Egpc Hse Manual

EGPC Drilling & Workover
HSE Requirements Manual

Egyptian General
Petroleum Corporation
Drilling & Workover
Health, Safety and Environmental
Requirements Manual
Revision no. 00
Revision Date: December 2023
Disclaimer: The cover photo is an EDC rig , and the pictures used in the section separators are open
source images downloaded from Pexels and Adobe stock
Sub-Committee
GP
HSE Manager
Eng. Ahmed Halawa
HSE Manager
Eng. Ehab Mostafa
HSE Section Head

Eng. Ahmed Saeed
Senior QA Engineer
Eng. Eman Ashraf
Senior QHSE Supervisor

Eng. Hazem Abdelrasheed
Senior QHSE Supervisor

Eng. Ahmed Rageh
QHSE Engineer
Eng. Zienab Habib
HSE General Manager

Eng. Mohamed Afifi
Contents
Overview
Revision History
Introduction
EGPC Ass. Chairman for HSE word
EGPC D&WO HSE Policies
Manual Scope
Thanks and Appreciation
Section A: Administrative Requirements
A.1 Abbreviations and Acronyms

A.2 Reference Material
A.3 General Safety Rules (GSR)
A.4 Roles and Responsibilities
A.5 HSE Organization
A.6 Welfare Management
A.7 Communications
A.8 HSE Orientation
A.9 Competency and Training
A.10 Short Service Employee Program (SSE)
A.11 Journey Management Systems (JMS)
A.12 Contractor Management/Service providers
A.13 HSE Audits and Inspection Reporting
A.14 Management of Change (MOC)
A.15 Deviation Permits (DP)
A.16 Rig Move requirements
A.17 Emergency Response Plan (ERP)
A.18 Incident Reporting and Investigation
A.19 International, National standards and Legal compliance
Contents
Section B: Safety Requirements
B.1 Permit To Work (PTW)

B.2 Lock-Out & Tag-out (LOTO)
B.3 HSE Drills
B.4 DROPS prevention Program
B.5 Rigging & Lifting
B.6 Working at height
B.7 Risk Management
B.8 Confined Space
B.9 Housekeeping
B.10 Respiratory Protection
B.11 Hydrogen Sulfide Safety (H2S)
B.12 Fire Prevention / protection
B.13 Electrical Safety
B.14 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)
B.15 Gas Detection System
B.16 Transportation safety requirements
B.17 HAZCOM
B.18 Harsh weather Requirements.
B.19 High pressure systems (Air & hydraulic)
B.20 Welding and Cutting
B.21 Temporary pipework
Section C: Offshore Safety Requirements ( Jack up rigs)
C.1. Over Water Operations

C.2. Life Saving Equipment (LSE) MODUs
C.3. Helicopter Operations
C.4. Personnel Transfer between Boats (PT) and MODUs
C.5. Rig Move Procedures
Section D: Asset Integrity Management Requirements
D.1. Equipment Inspection and Integrity

D.2. Inspection Certificates Process and Filing
D.3. Technical Documentation Review
D.4. Rig Equipment Inspection
D.5. Requirements for HSE Cases
Contents
Section E: Occupational Health Requirements
E.1 Food Service Hygiene

E.2 Sanitization
E.4 Minimum Medical Requirements
E.5 Fitness To work requirements
Section F: Environmental Requirements
F.1 Environmental Protection Responsibilities

F.2 Planning Requirements
F.3 Legislation requirements
F.4 Waste, Excess and Reusable Materials Management
F.5 Air Emissions Control
F.6 Spill Prevention, Preparedness and Response
F.7 Water Conservation Program
F.8 Noise Control Program
F.9 Naturally Occurring Radioactive Materials (NORM) Management
Revision History
Version Revision Date Modifier Comments
Preparation and Document created
00 25.12.2023
review commitee and issued for use
Introduction
The Egyptian General Petroleum Corporation (EGPC) has developed a comprehensive manual
for HSE (Health, Safety, and Environment) guidelines for drilling and workover operations. This
manual aims to provide a framework for EGPC’s contractors and employees to ensure the safety of
personnel, protection of the environment, and prevention of accidents during drilling and workover
activities.
The manual covers a wide range of topics, based on international best practices and is regularly
updated to reflect the latest changes in HSE regulations and standards.
The EGPC’s Manual for HSE Guidelines of Drilling and Workover is an essential resource for
all EGPC contractors and employees involved in drilling and workover activities. By following
the guidelines in this manual, EGPC can help to ensure the safety of its personnel, protect the
environment, and prevent accidents.
EGPC is committed to continuous improvement of its HSE performance and is constantly
reviewing and updating its HSE guidelines to ensure that they remain effective in preventing
accidents and protecting the environment.
EGPC encourages its contractors and employees to provide feedback on the EGPC’s Manual for
HSE Guidelines of Drilling and Workover so that it can be continually improved.
EGPC Ass. Chairman for HSE Word
Dear Colleagues,
I am delighted and proud to have the opportunity to write the introduction for this Manual. It
represents the culmination of several months of hard work from a dedicated team of professionals
in the industry.
Their goal has been to provide the Egyptian oil and gas sector with a comprehensive approach to
managing the significant risks involved in drilling and workover activities.
This Manual consolidates all the standards and guidelines that have been developed over many
years of experience.
As a result, all rig operators and contractors are required to ensure a safe working environment for
all drilling and workover operations.
We possess the complete collection of safety standards and guidelines for drilling and workover
operations in Egypt. These regulations shall be enforced upon all rig operators, contractors, and
supporting services contractors in Egypt.
I am confident that this extraordinary instance of collaboration among the members of the
Egyptian rig operations safety committee will have a long-lasting effect on the petroleum industry
for many years to come, possibly extending beyond our country’s boundaries in the near future.
Chemist/ Ehab Mohamed Ali

Thanks and Appreciation
The preparation committee of this manual would like to express its sincere gratitude and
appreciation to Eng. Osama Kamel, Chairman of the Board of Directors at the Egyptian Drilling
Company, and Eng. Mohamed El-Guoshey, Chairman and Managing Director at Sino Tharwa
Drilling Company.
We thank them for their crucial role in providing full support to the preparation team responsible
for producing these guidelines.
Their generous contribution was invaluable in enabling us to complete this important task. We are
deeply indebted to their assistance and recognize their commitment to our success.
EGPC D&WO HSE Policies
EGPC D&WO are committed to protect people and the communities in which we operate
through driving environmental, health, safety and Environment excellence. Our approach includes
implementing strong HSE programs and standards, reducing our HSE risks, and complying with all
applicable Egyptian HSE laws
EGPC requires the active commitment to and accountability for HSE from all employees and
contractors.
Line management has a leadership role in the communication and implementation of and
ensuring compliance with QHSE policies and standards. We are committed to
• Protect and strive for improvement of the health, safety, and security of our people at all times
• Set quality and HSE performance objectives; measure results; and assess and continually
improve processes, services, and product quality through the use of an effective management
system
• Aspire to achieve an ‘Incident Free environment’, as a commitment to preventing injury, ill
health, and protecting the environment including the prevention of pollution
• Provide sufficient information, instruction, training and supervision to enable everyone to avoid
hazards and contribute to their own safety and health;
• Empower our employees to stop unsafe acts or activities and encourage the reporting of
Accidents, incidents and near misses.
• Ensure effective communication of our HSE management system, including the ongoing
consultation with, and participation of our employees and contractors to determine if further
measures are required in terms of continual improvement.
• Ensure that all hazards and environmental aspects are identified and subsequently risk
assessed. Suitable risk mitigation measures are to be adopted to ensure that we provide a safe
and healthy working environment, manage our environmental impacts and reduce risks so far
as is reasonably practicable
• Plan for, respond to, and recover from any emergency, crisis, and business disruption
• Communicate openly with stakeholders and ensure an understanding of our QHSE policies,
standards, programs and performance; reward outstanding QHSE performance
• Improve our performance on issues relevant to our stakeholders that are of global concern
and on which we can have an impact and share with them our knowledge of successful QHSE
programs and initiatives.
This Policy shall be regularly reviewed to ensure ongoing suitability. The commitments listed are
in addition to our basic obligation to comply with other EGPC standards as well as all applicable
Egyptian laws and regulations.
Manual Scope
Introduction and Scope
EGPC drilling and workover HSE Manual provides the foundation, and serves as an administration
guide, for all Rig operator and contractors management systems incorporating Health, Safety,
Quality, and Environmental Protection, implemented and maintained by EGPC
The Manual described in this document applies to all EGPC-affiliated rig operators and
contractors’ operating management.
This Manual has been established in alignment with the International HSE and industrial
standards, in addition to, the applicable HSE legislation and, rig operations HSE best practices,
EGPC will provide full support as required at the various organizational levels within all affiliated
companies and rig contractors to apply this guideline effectively and successfully
Mission Statement ”Rig Operators and Contractors“

All EGPC-affiliated companies and rig contractors are committed to providing optimum technical
solutions, a safe operating environment, and quality service to the oil and gas industry.
Rig operators shall meet all requirements mentioned in this guideline as a minimum requirement
through the dedication and teamwork of their management and employees, also they will continue
working to achieve high levels of industry standards and exceeding it as possible and improving
their employee’s safety culture as an important target
Manual Objectives and Values

• It is the primary and continuing goal of the Ministry of Petroleum and all affiliated holding
companies to protect its personnel, environment, assets, business activities, and reputation. In
part, this is done by maintaining and continually.
• Improving their management systems, through taking cognizance of various International
recognized codes, and standards and applying it not only for HSE but for all drilling and
workover contributing factors and their related impacts, as mentioned in EGPC Drilling and
workover guideline
• Each rig contractor shall provide a framework for systematically and thoroughly evaluating their
performance and activities by identifying and assessing associated risks.
• Rig contractor shall also ensure that it recognizes all applicable standards, rules, and
regulations
• Established by the relevant classification societies, including but not limited to, the American
Petroleum Institute (API), as well as all applicable insurance warranties and obligations. In
addition, the Company shall recognize all Egyptian applicable laws and regulations.
• EGPC promotes the following Operational Values to all personnel working under its affiliated
companies
- Effectively Engage Rig operators and contractors’ people, processes, and systems with our
operational objectives
- Encourage “Do Safe” by understanding, planning, and doing the right thing for every task
performed
- Excel by better understanding our business to make our business understandably better
• Time and commitment are the key enablers for EGPC’s safe Operational Values.
• Adequate time in support of these Operating Values shall always be provided by rig operators
and contractors management and it will be an integral part of the drilling and workover HSE
guidelines.
• EGPC expects affiliated companies, worksite leadership teams, supervisors, and safety leaders
(wherever they happen to be) to continuously reinforce its safe Operational Values through their
commitment, actions, and behaviors.
• The Operational Values above and the following principles shall provide the basis by, which all
Manual Scope
Introduction and Scope
EGPC drilling and workover HSE Manual provides the foundation, and serves as an administration
guide, for all Rig operator and contractors management systems incorporating Health, Safety,
Quality, and Environmental Protection, implemented and maintained by EGPC
The Manual described in this document applies to all EGPC-affiliated rig operators and
contractors’ operating management.
This Manual has been established in alignment with the International HSE and industrial
standards, in addition to, the applicable HSE legislation and, rig operations HSE best practices,
EGPC will provide full support as required at the various organizational levels within all affiliated
companies and rig contractors to apply this guideline effectively and successfully
Mission Statement ”Rig operators and contractors“

All EGPC-affiliated companies and rig contractors are committed to providing optimum technical
solutions, a safe operating environment, and quality service to the oil and gas industry.
Rig operators shall meet all requirements mentioned in this guideline as a minimum requirement
through the dedication and teamwork of their management and employees, also they will continue
working to achieve high levels of industry standards and exceeding it as possible and improving
their employee’s safety culture as an important target
Manual Objectives and Values

• It is the primary and continuing goal of the Ministry of Petroleum and all affiliated holding
companies to protect its personnel, environment, assets, business activities, and reputation. In
part, this is done by maintaining and continually.
• Improving their management systems, through taking cognizance of various International
recognized codes, and standards and applying it not only for HSE but for all drilling and
workover contributing factors and their related impacts, as mentioned in EGPC Drilling and
workover guideline
• Each rig contractor shall provide a framework for systematically and thoroughly evaluating their
performance and activities by identifying and assessing associated risks.
• Rig contractor shall also ensure that it recognizes all applicable standards, rules, and
regulations
• Established by the relevant classification societies, including but not limited to, the American
Petroleum Institute (API), as well as all applicable insurance warranties and obligations. In
addition, the Company shall recognize all Egyptian applicable laws and regulations.
• EGPC promotes the following Operational Values to all personnel working under its affiliated
companies
- Effectively Engage Rig operators and contractors’ people, processes, and systems with our
operational objectives
- Encourage “Do Safe” by understanding, planning, and doing the right thing for every task
performed
- Excel by better understanding our business to make our business understandably better
• Time and commitment are the key enablers for EGPC’s safe Operational Values.
• Adequate time in support of these Operating Values shall always be provided by rig operators
and contractors management and it will be an integral part of the drilling and workover HSE
guidelines.
• EGPC expects affiliated companies, worksite leadership teams, supervisors, and safety leaders
(wherever they happen to be) to continuously reinforce its safe Operational Values through their
commitment, actions, and behaviors.
• The Operational Values above and the following principles shall provide the basis by, which all
Section A:
Administrative Requirements
EGPC D&WO HSE Guidelines
1.Welfare HSE Organization
A1. Abbreviations &

Acronyms
A.1. Abbreviations & Acronyms
1.1. Abbreviations and Acronyms

ABS American Bureau of Shipping
ACM Asbestos Containing Material
ALARP As low as reasonably practicable.
ANSI American National Standards Institute
API American Petroleum Institute
BE Barge Engineer
BOP Blowout Preventer
CPR Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation
ECC Emergency Control Center
D&WO Drilling and Workover
DP Deviation Permit
EP Emergency Preparedness
EPD Environmental Protection Department
ESD Emergency Shut Down
FAI First Aid Injury Case - Minor injury (not illness)
FAT On-Job Fatality - An On-Job injury or occupational illness that results in Fatality
FRC Fast Response Craft
GHG Greenhouse Gases
GM General Manager
GMDSS Global Marine Distress and Safety System
HACCP Hazard Analysis and Critical Control Point.
HSE Health, Safety and Environment
IADC International Association of Drilling Contractors
KPI Key Performance Indicator
LTI Lost Time Injury/Illness Case - An on-job injury or occupational illness that involves one or
more days away from work beyond the day the injury or illness occurred
MOC Management of Change
MODU Mobile Offshore Drilling Unit
MOME Management of Major Emergencies
MOT Ministry of Transportation
MMSR Minimum Medical Standard Requirements
MTC Medical Treatment Injury/Illness Case - An on-job injury or occupational illness that is
more serious than on-job first aid injury (FAI) or occupational illness requiring medical
treatment
MVA Motor Vehicle Accident - An MVA is any occurrence involving motor vehicle that results in
death, injury, or property damage
NEC (American) National Electrical Code
D&WO HSE Guidelines Page 24

A.1. Abbreviations & Acronyms
NFPA (American) National Fire Protection Association

NM Near Miss - Event which did not result in injury or loss, but which had the potential for
injury or loss if the conditions had been slightly different (Ref. G.I.0006.004 – Section 2.0)
NTP Night Tool Pusher
OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer
OIM Offshore Installation Manager
OJI Off- Job Injury Case - An injury suffered by an employee that does not arise out of and in
the course of employment and which results in death or day(s) away from work (Ref. ANSI
Z16.3- – Recording and Measuring employee Off-The-Job Injury experience and G.I.6.005
– Section 3)
OPITO Offshore Petroleum Industry Training Organization
OSC Oil Spill Committee
PCR Power Control Room (SCR, VFD, etc.)
PIC Person in Charge
PTW Permit to Work
RDI Restricted Duty Injury/Illness Case - An on-job injury or occupational illness that results in
restricted work or job transfer (Ref. G.I.6.005 – Section 3)
SCR Silicon Controlled Rectifier
SDS Safety Data Sheet
SMART Specific, Measurable, Accountable, Reasonable and Timely
SME Subject Matter Expert
SMP Supplemental Manpower
SWL Safe Working Load (Limit)
MOC Management of Change
CRF Change Request Form
CRT Change Review Team
CIT Change implementation Team
PHA Preliminary Hazard Analysis
RIK Replacement-in-Kind
AL Action Level
dB Decibels
STS Standard Threshold Shift
NRR Noise Reduction Rating
Page 25 D&WO HSE Guidelines

A2. Reference Materials

A.2. Reference Materials
ANSI NFPA-70-2023 Grounding Separately Derived Alternating-Current Systems

ANSI B 31.1 -2021 Power Piping
ANSI Z88.2 -2021 American National Standard Practices for Respiratory Protection
ANSI Z89.1 -2021 Protective Head ware for Industrial Workers Requirements
Pressure Vessel Inspection Code: In-Service Inspection, Rating,Repair,
API 510 -2023
and Alteration
Piping Inspection Code: In-service Inspection, Rating, Repair, and
API 570 -2023
Alteration of Piping Systems
API BULL 13C -2022 Drilling Fluid Processing Equipment
API BULL 5C2 -2021 Performance Properties of Casing, Tubing, and Drill Pipe
Round Thread Casing Joint Strength With Combined Internal Pressure and
API BULL 5C4 -2021
Bending
Standards, codes, and best practices, guide for quality management
API Q1 10 th edition 2023
systems in the oil and gas industry.
Recommended Practice for Drilling and Well Servicing Operations
API RP 49 -2023
involving Hydrogen Sulphide
Operation, Inspection, Maintenance and Repair of Drilling and Well
API RP 4G -2023
Servicing Structures
Recommended Practice for Classification of Location for Electrical
API RP 500 -2023
Installation at Petroleum Facilities
API RP 510 -2023 Pressure Vessel Inspection Code
Recommended Land Drilling Operating Practices for Protection of the
API RP 52 -2023
Environment
Recommended Practices for Occupational Safety and Health for Oil and
API RP 54 -2023
Gas Drilling and Servicing Operation
API RP 572 -2023 Inspection Practices for Pressure Vessels
API RP 576 -2023 Inspection of Pressure Relieving Devices
API RP 7G -2023 Drill Stem Design And Operating Limits
Recommended Practice for Inspection and Classification of UsedDrill
API RP 7G-2 -2023
Stem Elements
API RP 7H -2023 Drilling Machinery
Procedures for Inspection, Maintenance, Repair, and Remanufacture of
API RP 7L -2023
Drilling Equipment
API RP 8B -2023 Hoisting Tool Inspection and Maintenance Procedures
Recommended Practice for Procedures for Inspections, Maintenance,
API RP 8B -2023
Repair & Remanufacture of Hoisting Equipment
API RP 9B -2023 Application, Care and Use of Wire Rope For Oil Fields
API RP 9B -2023 Application, Care, and Use of Wire Rope for Oil Field Service
API SPEC 13A -2023 Oil Well Drilling Fluid Materials
API SPEC 4A -2023 Steel Derricks
API SPEC 4E -2023 Drilling and Well Servicing Structures

API SPEC 6A -2023 Wellhead Equipment

API SPEC 7 -2023 Rotary Drilling Equipment
API SPEC 7 B-11C -2023 Internal Combustion Reciprocating Engines For Oil Field Service
API SPEC 8 -2023 Drilling and Production Hoisting Equipment
API SPEC 9A -2023 Wire Rope
API STD 53 -2023 Blowout Prevention Equipment Systems for Drilling Wells
API STD 653 -2023 Tank Inspection, Repair, Alteration, and Reconstruction
ASME B 30.10 -2021 Hooks
ASME B 30.11 -2021 Monorails & Underhung cranes
ASME B 30.23-2005 Personnel Lifting Systems Safety Standard for Hoists
ASME B 30.7-2011 Winches
ASME B 30.9 -2021 Slings
ASME SE 709 Sec V -2022 Non Destructive Examination
ASME VIII -2023 Guidebook for the Design of ASME Section VIII Pressure Vessels
Safety Requirements for Self-Retracting Devices for Personnel Fall Arrest
ASSE Z 359.14 -2023
and Rescue systems
Aviation Dept. Rig/Vessel Helideck Requirements & Operation Guidance
Specification for the Testing of Steel Overhead Runway Beams for Hoist
BS 2853:2011
Blocks
BS 3956-5 :2018 Fork Arm for Fork Lift Trucks – Guide for Inspection
BS 5655-10 :2009 Testing and Inspection of Electric and Hydraulic Lifts
BS EN 14502-1 :2015 Cranes - Equipment for the Lifting of Persons Part 1: SuspendedBaskets
Safety Rules for the Construction and Installation of Lifts - Part 1:Electric
BS EN 81-1 :2019
Lifts
BS EN 81-2 :2018 Safety Rules for the Construction and Installation of Lifts
BS ISO 18893:2004 Mobile Elevating Work Platforms – Inspections
BS ISO 5057:1993 Industrial Trucks – Inspection and Repair of Fork Arms
DS-1 Drill Stems Design and Inspection.
Standard Specification for Performance Requirements for Foot Protection
F2413-11 & F2412-11
and Standard Test Methods for Foot Protection.
IADC International Association of Drilling Contractors
IADC IADC Drilling Manual
Explosive Atmosphere - Part 17: Electrical Installations Inspectionand
IEC 60079-17 :2013
Maintenance
IEC 60947-2 :2016 LV Switchgear and Control Gear
RP for the Selection, Field Testing and Life Expectancy of MoldedCase
IEEE STD 1458-2005
Circuit Breakers for Industrial Application
IEEE STD 43-2000 RP for Testing Insulation Resistance and Electric Machinery
ISO 2415: 2004 Forged Shackles for General Lifting Purposes

ISO 45001:2018 Occupational health and safety management system

ISO 9001:2015 Quality management system
ISO 9712 :2012 Qualification and Certification of NDT Personnel
International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships. The
MARPOL 2017
latest version
MODU Code Applicable to the MODU. The latest version
Metals for Sulphide Stress Cracking and Stress Corrosion Cracking
NACE MR0175 :2021
Resistance in Sour Oilfield Environments
OSHJ-CoP-01 Risk Management and Control
OSHJ-CoP-04 Work at Height Safety
OSHJ-CoP-13 Safe Work Equipment
OSHJ-CoP-15 Employee Welfare and Wellbeing Version 1 Rev 0
OSHJ-GL-11 Safety in Warehousing
OSHJ-GL-15 Safety in Heat
PVIC Pressure Vessel Inspection Code. Safe Practices in Drilling Operations.
SAE J 2228 _202305 Kingpin Wear Limits – Commercial Trailers
SOLAS 2020 Safety of Live at Sea

A3. General Safety Rules

A.3. General Safety Rules
3.1. Scope
The regulations that follow are designed to keep the organizations’ workers safe. Rules violations
may result in disciplinary action. This procedure applies to EGPC D&WO Contractors and Service
Providers.
3.2. Rules
• All Work-related injuries/illness or vehicle collisions, no matter how slight, shall be reported
immediately to the work supervisor.
• All fires, spills, and releases, no matter how small, shall be reported immediately to the work
supervisor.
• Immediately report any unsafe conditions, practices, near misses, or incidents to the work
supervisor.
• Horseplay and fighting are safety violations. Supervisors allowing these acts as well as the
violators are subject to disciplinary action.
• All personnel (drivers and passengers) shall wear seat belts at all times. The number of vehicle
occupants will be based on the number of seat belts available.
• Smoking is only allowed in designated smoking areas. This includes the use of vape pens and
electronic cigarettes.
• Before beginning work or if the location or conditions change, identify the risks and hazards
associated with the jobs.
• Permit to Work (PTW), deviation permit, and risk assessment shall be issued before a safety
device is removed from service and/or defeated, the appropriate supervisor and affected
parties shall be notified, the device shall be tagged and the action documented.
• Unauthorized removal of isolations or operation of equipment with a “Danger Do Not Operate”
tag is forbidden.
• Before operating any machinery or switch gear, all safeguards, switches, and alarms shall be in
place and functional.
• All block valves on pressure relief systems in service shall be locked or sealed open.
• Finger rings and other jewelry, as well as loose-fitting clothing, long hair (head and facial), and
other loose accessories, are not permitted to be worn when working on rig sites.
• Do not apply compressed air, other gases, or high-pressure wash-down guns to yourselves or
others.
• Climbing ladders requires both hands. The usage of railings is required when going up and
down stairs.
• When descending ladders, the employee shall always face the ladder.
• Running in work areas is prohibited.
• Use the correct tool for the task, all tools and equipment must be well maintained. Homemade
tools are prohibited.
• Erect barricades/flagging around areas of hazardous work, such as holes in decking and work
areas, trenches, road crossings and overhead hazardous work.
• Climbing or standing on equipment, piping or valves to do work is prohibited. Approved
scaffolding, work platforms, personnel lifts, or ladders with full body safety harnesses shall be
used.
• All fire extinguishers and other emergency equipment shall be in good condition, inspected at
least monthly, and kept clear of any obstructions. Accidental discharge or use of firefighting
equipment must be reported to the supervisor immediately.
• Manual lifting procedures must be utilized correctly at all times. If the load is too heavy, seek
assistance from the work supervisor or use a mechanical lifting equipment.
• Proper PPE shall be used according to the related job such as safety eyewear, hard hats, gloves,
and safety footwear etc. Metal hard hats are prohibited.
• When handling or mixing chemicals, chemical gloves, goggles, apron and appropriate
respirator must be used (reference the SDS). In addition, when mixing caustics, a full face shield
and goggles are required. Anytime a face shield is required, goggles shall also be worn.
• Hearing protection be worn when entering high noise areas 85 dB or higher.

• All personnel are empowered and accountable to STOP WORK if they observe; any defective
equipment, machinery, hazardous condition or unsafe work practice, and immediately report
the hazardous condition or work practice to their supervisor. No further activity shall be
conducted until a safe working environment exists.
• Work or walk under a suspended load is prohibited.
• Full body safety harnesses with properly secured lanyards shall be worn when working at
heights above 4 feet (1.2 meters). The lanyard shall be connected to an anchor point all the time.
Suspension Trauma devices shall be provided on all full-body harnesses to be used to prevent
blood circulation issues in case of a free fall, and also employees are required to be trained on
how to use them. In case of a free fall the safety harness shall be disposed.
• Riding the elevators and cathead lines is not permitted.
• The use of one tong and the rotary to trip the pipe is prohibited.
• All personnel shall participate in the emergency drills.
• HSE Meetings: all personnel shall attend the HSE meetings conducted in the D&WO operations
as follows:
- Weekly HSE Meetings: All Drilling Contractor and Service Companies supervisory and crew
personnel and sub-contractors/third-party companies personnel who are present at the rig.
- Pre-Tour HSE Meetings: All Drilling Contractor and Service Companies supervisory and crews’
personnel, and sub-contractors/third party companies’ personnel who are involved in the
current operation.
- Pre-Job HSE Meetings: All Drilling Contractor and Service Companies supervisory and crews’
personnel, and sub-contractors/third party companies’ personnel who are involved in the
job. The company representative who is conducting any particular job must lead the Pre-Job
Meeting.
Note:
Meetings shall be documented with main subjects discussed and attendance list will be signed
off.
• Anyone taking prescription drugs must report this to the Rig Doctor / Medic when arriving on
the rig.
• A “tail rope” must be used when moving pipe, tubing, etc., in from the V-door.
• All personnel arriving to the rig location shall report to the person in charge (PIC) for safety
orientation, fill out health questionnaire and registration.
• Only company transportation / rented vehicles by the drilling contractor and Service Company
itself shall be used to go to work locations, rig camps and heliport bases. No personal owned
vehicle shall be used to travel to and from Rig Locations or Aviation Heliports.
• Non-approved electrical/electronic devices (e.g., cellular phones, pagers, cameras, and
instruments) shall not be used in classified areas unless properly permitted. Drilling Contractors
shall have a study and map with the classified areas aligned to API RP 500 and API RP 505.
• Maintain good housekeeping in in the workplace all times.
• Regular rig crews shall arrive and depart the rig location during daylight hours only, using the
Contractor’s provided transportation.
• Drilling Contractors and Service Companies are to perform a pre-job safety meeting, Job Safety
Analysis (JSA), and job-specific Risk Assessment jointly before embarking on any two-party
activity. This is to ensure proper hazard identification, establish clear roles and responsibilities,
and agreeable effective communication methodology.
• Drilling Contractors and Service Companies shall follow the Lifesaving Rules established by
IOGP to prevent incidents.
• Drilling Contractors and Service Companies must have a STOP WORK AUTHORITY (SWA)
Programmed in place to ensure that all employees and subcontractors are aware that they
have the Authority and Accountability to stop any work that they consider unsafe and has the
potential to injure personnel, damage equipment, or harm the environment, without fear of
retaliation.
• Management and Supervisors shall demonstrate visible leadership on this matter, and
encourage employees permanently to exercise the STOP Work Authority when required.
• Periodic SWA Drills shall be included in the program with different operations and including the

participation of third party and sub-contractor employees.

• A copy of the SWA Program shall be provided to Proponent Department for implementation
verification.

A4. Roles & Responsibilities

A.4 . Roles & Responsibilities
4.1. Scope
This procedure applies to all contractors and service companies to define responsibilities and
accountabilities during all phases of any drilling or workover operation.
The following minimum guidelines are provided to aid the Rig Operators and Service Companies in
meeting their responsibilities and assist them in complying with the requirements of EGPC.
4.2. Guidelines
4.2.1. The rig operators and service contractors shall:
• Hold responsibility for preventing accidental losses, protecting company interests and
resources, and avoiding any environmental contamination.
• Establish a written HSE manual/programs and plans that fulfill all the requirements stated in
this Manual.
• Establish a written bridging document to ensure that:
- Operations or projects are planned and conducted in line with both organizations’ HSE MSs.
- The organizations’ HSE MSs do not conflict with each other.
- Where aspects of both organizations’ HSE MSs are jointly used, the interfaces are well-
defined and operable (that is, the identification of which components of the individual
organizations’ HSE MSs will be used during the project, contract, or operation).
• HSE program for frequent and regular inspections of the equipment, materials, and
accommodations by competent persons designated by the Rig Operator or Service Company
Management. This inspection shall be completed periodically or at least annually and
submitted to their management for concurrence and follow-up.
• Hold responsibility to verify that all personnel arriving on location register and receive proper
training.
• Be thoroughly familiar with the drilling or workover program. The rig operator Representative
(Company Man) shall inform the rig crew of any potential adverse conditions (For example: lost
circulation zones, high reservoir pressure, high H2S concentrations) that require special safety
precautions, training, equipment, or additional personnel.
• Identify the “Smoking Permitted” areas around each rig location, using risk assessment,
and should have clear instructions for those areas. All other areas on the location shall be
considered as “Non-Smoking” areas and shall be marked accordingly. Smoking shall be closely
controlled throughout the rig location.
• Take all reasonable safety precautions to prevent oil spills or pollution both onshore and
offshore operations. If an accidental spill or discharge does occur, every effort shall be made to:
- Protect human life, including both employees and the public,
- Minimize the impact on the environment.
• Immediate reporting of spills is required to the Company representative for containment and
reporting compliance.
• Adequately train each of their employees in the recognition and avoidance of unsafe conditions
and all Company HSE standards applicable to his work environment. They shall also adequately
train their employees in methods to control or eliminate any hazards or other exposures that
may result in injury or illness (hazard recognition program).
• implement a HAZCOM Program to ensure that employees who are required to handle or use
poisons, caustics, acids, and other harmful substances, are adequately trained regarding safe
handling and use.
• Discuss the potential hazards, personal hygiene, and required personal protective equipment
before their employees handle any harmful materials. In all areas where hazardous chemicals
are being stored or utilized.
• Adequately maintain eyewash and emergency shower station, as required by the Material
Safety Data Sheet (SDS), for washing chemical spills.

A.4 . Roles & Responsibilities
Note:
All SDSs shall be kept and maintained at each Chemical/Hazardous material storage area in both
Arabic and English at a minimum.
• Allow only those qualified & competent personnel with certified training to operate equipment
and machinery.
• Ensure that all certified operators have copies of their certifications and licenses in their
possession. The rig shall also maintain copies of all operators’ certifications and licenses. Each
rig shall maintain a rig-specific training matrix that shall be updated.
4.2.2. Rig Operator’s providing offshore rigs shall:
• Verify that their rigs are kept in compliance with all applicable maritime/MODU standards
of the country in which the rig is registered as well as any applicable laws and regulations of
Egypt.
• Verify that all required (Marine and Vessel Flag State) certifications are current and that re-
certification inspections are completed by an approved certification authority before the
expiration of the existing certificate.
• Include any special or unusual towing characteristics of an offshore rig included in the operating
instructions and communicate to the towing vessel operators before towing operations begin.
• Ensure that all navigation and transit lights are operable and used as required by International
Rules and Regulations for Aids to Navigation.
If a Rig Operator’s or Service Company’s HSE requirement conflicts with a Company’s requirement,
the most stringent requirement shall apply.

A5. HSE Organization

A.5. HSE Organization
5.1. Scope
All drilling contractors, Operators, and service companies operating in Egypt are required to
establish an autonomous Health, Safety, and Environment (HSE) department, which will directly
report to the managing director/chairman of the organization.
5.2. Purpose
This procedure is intended to identify the specific health and safety roles and responsibilities
within the organization, as well as the channels of communication and chain of command for
reporting.
5.3. HSE Organizational Structure

An effective HSE organizational structure shall clearly define roles and responsibilities, ensuring
that all personnel are accountable for HSE performance. The structure typically includes the
following elements:
5.3.1. Managing director/chairman

The managing director/chairman is responsible for:
• Setting the overall HSE policy and providing the necessary resources for HSE management.
• Ensuring that all necessary resources are provided to ensure the safety of employees and that
all potential risks are minimized to protect them.
• Overseeing the overall HSE performance within their designated jurisdiction.
5.3.2. HSE department Manager/Director
Responsible for developing, implementing, and maintaining the HSE management system. And
must hold a senior management position within the organization.
5.3.3. HSE Coordinators

• Shall assist the HSE manager in implementing HSE programs, conducting audits, and
investigating incidents.
• Are responsible for liaising between the employees and the company regarding any
occupational or environmental issues and devising ways to address these issues. Shall also
promote ways to prevent or mitigate current problems.
5.3.4. HSE Engineers
Site HSE representatives are responsible for day-to-day HSE activities on drilling and workover
sites, to formulate, implement, communicate and coordinate environmental, health, and safety
programs for the organization. they shall, Also provide technical and administrative direction in
regard to all HSE matters.
5.4. HSE Engineer

5.4.1. Job Summary
All drilling contractors shall provide a dedicated, qualified, and professional HSE engineer to work
at the rig site twenty-four hours, seven days a week basis to perform various safety duties.
The HSE Engineer shall:
• Report directly to the drilling contractor’s HSE department and act as a visible supervisory
Health, Safety, and Environment presence during operations on the installation.
• Act as an advisor to the senior rig personnel regarding conformance to the drilling contractor
management system and EGPC D&WO HSE requirement at the installation.
• Provide ongoing independent updates to the drilling contractor’s top management regarding
the overall condition of the HSE management system’s effectiveness and implementation on
the installation.

A.5. HSE Organization
• Monitor and perform all HSE training as directed by the drilling contractor to the extent
of personnel knowledge/qualification and ensure that HSE training-related goals are
communicated to employees assigned to the respective installation.
• Monitor conformance to the drilling contractor and EGPC policies, procedures, and all
appropriate HSE standards.
5.4.2. Qualification
In addition to the training required in this manual, The HSE engineer shall have the following
training and competencies:
• Engineering / Science Bachelor degree or equivalent.
• NEBOSH general certificate
• Formal Root Cause Analysis (Tap Root the preferred system)
• Certified first aid and Basic Life Support
• General HSE Train The Trainer (T.T.T)
• 1 Year Experience in the oil & gas Industry (Drilling industry preferable) or equivalent
operational industry. Fresh graduate Engineers may be accepted as Night HSE engineers for
one year before graduating to the Day HSE engineer position.
• Excellent communication skills
• Computer literate with proficiency in the Microsoft Office suite of programs.
• Excellent knowledge of HSE practices common to the drilling contractor and the industry.
5.5. Essential Functions

• Independently monitor and observe ongoing rig operations daily with a focus on conformance
to the drilling contractor and EGPC policies and procedures.
• Report any non-conformances or violations, incidents, or any HSE-related issue immediately to
the drilling contractor’s HSE department.
• Plan and facilitate weekly HSE meetings
• Communicate all Safety Alerts to all crew members
• Facilitate the permit to work package process (PTW, SJA, PJSM, checklists…)
• Ensure all incidents are reported correctly on time and participate in the incident investigation.
• Review all behavior-based safety (BBS) observation cards generated on the installation and
monitor the effectiveness of the program.
• Follow up on all high potential unsafe acts and conditions.
• Perform HSE audits and inspections and report trends to rig management.
• Monitor the Short Service Employees (SSE) program to ensure implementation.
• Perform Orientation of personnel arriving at the installation following policies and procedures.
• Perform all required rig-based HSE training to the extent of personal qualification.
• Ensure installation critical equipment is properly maintained as directed by the Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) and drilling contractor Preventive Maintenance Program (PMS).
• Spot check a minimum of 25% of the PTW package produced daily.

6.Welfare Management
A6. Welfare Management

A.6. Welfare Management
6.1. Scope
This procedure defines the EGPC minimum acceptable requirements of the Occupational Safety
and Health System.
6.2. Purpose
Workplace welfare facilities are essential for a safe and healthy work environment. Rig contractors
and services companies must provide employees with the facilities to stay safe, healthy, and well.
Rig contractors shall comply with these requirements without conflict with any relevant
national laws, building codes and standards, they also may apply better/ higher practices higher
than, but not less than those mentioned in this document.
6.3. Definitions
6.3.1. Risk Assessment
The systematic identification of workplace hazards and evaluation of the risks associated. This
process considers existing control measures and identifies and recommends further control
measures where required.
6.3.2. Wellbeing
An employee is in a state of being comfortable, healthy, or happy.
6.3.3. Workplace
A place that the rig contractors and services companies allocates for the performance of the work.
This term shall also include the employees’ resting places, their accommodation, and similar places
the rig contractors and services companies allocates to employees.
6.3.4. Welfare Facilities

Include changing, washing, rest, eating, and toilet facilities that are clean and necessary for the
well-being of employees.
6.3.5. Workstation
An area with equipment for the performance of a specific task, such as a computer station or a
specific location on an assembly line, control room, etc.
6.4. Responsibilities
6.4.1. Rig contractors’ Responsibilities
• Ensure the workplace has adequate welfare facilities for employees and others using the
workplace;
• Ensure resources are available for the provision and maintenance of the welfare facilities;
• Assess and identify risks to employees’ well-being and introduce control measures to eliminate
or reduce those risks;
• Ensure the workplace has safe access and egress to and from the workplace.
• Rig Operatowr’s PIC and HSE Shall verify the implementation of all the above-mentioned
responsibilities. before spud in
6.4.2. Employees’ Responsibilities
• Not endanger themselves or others;
• Follow precautionary control measures to ensure work activities are performed safely and
without risk to health;
• Cooperate with the rig contractors and services companies and support the safety and health
policies and procedures of the rig contractors and services companies;

• Report any activity or defect relating to employee welfare and well-being which they know is
likely to endanger the safety of themselves or that of any other person.
6.5. Requirements
The rig contractors and services companies shall comply with the requirements of the
Occupational Safety and Health System in the EGPC D&WO manual concerning employees’ welfare
and well-being.

• The rig contractors and services companies shall provide welfare facilities based on Egyptian
law & EGPC D&WO requirements but is not restricted to these requirements. Risk assessment
of the workplace may require the rig contractors and services companies to add welfare
facilities above these requirements, depending on the size, distribution, layout, and work
activities of the rig contractors and services companies.
• All aspects of employee welfare and well-being must be risk assessed and any control
measures identified that can eliminate or reduce risks to employees implemented. The rig
contractors and services companies shall assess risks to welfare, examples include but are not
limited to:
6.5.1.1. Housekeeping
• Assess the number of employees utilizing various areas, shift patterns used, the type of work
activities being conducted, how to keep floors and pedestrian routes clear of obstructions and
liquid spills, rest areas, changing rooms, and how often they need to be regularly cleaned, and
how any waste materials generated are safely handled, stored, transported and disposed of
toilets and washing amenities
• Assess the adequacy and number of toilets and washing facilities for the number of employees.
• The rig contractors and services companies shall ensure:
- Every workplace, including furniture, furnishings, fittings, toilets, washrooms, rest and break
rooms, and communal spaces are kept clean and in a sanitary condition.
- The prompt removal of waste materials as necessary to prevent the build-up of waste from
causing safety and health issues.
6.5.1.2. Drinking water
Assess the amount of water employees require for working at certain times of the year, the
distribution of employees and the work activities they are undertaking, and how to supply water to
employees.
6.5.1.3. Access and egress
Assess the adequacy of not just how employees and others enter and leave premises in normal
conditions and emergencies and consider how people work and move through the workplace. Such
as, can doors open in the direction of travel, can people see through doors when opening them and
are emergency exits clearly identified.
6.5.1.4. Workstations
It is essential for rig contractors and services companiess to acknowledge that their employees
are their most valuable asset. Therefore, the welfare and wellbeing of employees should be a top
priority for any rig contractors and services companies. This means that all workstations must be
suitable for the employees and the nature of their work.
This includes the size of the workstations they work in, whether are they sufficient in size for the
work activities they perform, suitably ventilated, and provided with adequate lighting.
6.5.1.5. Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC)
• Workplaces & accommodations shall be adequately ventilated with fresh clean air which should
be drawn and filtered from a source that is not contaminated by fumes, gases, dust, smells, or
chemicals.

• Ventilation should also remove excess heat and humidity, provide a comfortable working
temperature without causing draughts, and be regularly serviced and maintained.
• Employees working outdoors or in work environments indoors that generate high levels of
heat, such as foundries or kitchens, are at risk from high air temperatures or, exposure to high
thermal radiation or, high levels of humidity, and should be provided with a cool resting area.
• Employees working outdoors in heat must be provided with a cool resting area.
6.5.1.6. Lighting
• Lighting shall be sufficient to enable people to work and move about safely within the
workplace. It needs to allow employees and others to carry out their work effectively, without
adopting awkward postures or straining their eyes to see.
• Some tasks may require local lighting to be provided at individual workstations, in addition
to general lighting, or require different lighting at different times during the day or if working
during the night.
• Assess the type of work activities being undertaken, what the work involves, the availability of
natural lighting, and artificial lighting, and the employees undertaking the activities.
6.5.1.7. Room Dimensions
• The volume of the room, when empty divided by the number of people normally working in it
should be at least 11 cubic meters. 11 cubic meters is a minimum space requirement and may be
insufficient in some places depending on the layout, contents, and the nature of the work.
• Employees must be able to leave workstations quickly in an emergency.
• If work can or must be done in a seated position, seats or chairs must be provided and suitable
for the employees using them and for the work being done.
• Seating shall provide adequate support for the lower back, and footrests provided for
employees who cannot place their feet on the floor.
6.5.1.8. Maintenance
• The rig contractors and services companies shall ensure that within the workplace certain
equipment, machinery, devices, and systems are maintained to preserve the safety, health, and
well-being of employees.
• Regular maintenance is required for ventilation systems, machinery, equipment, and devices
that would cause a risk to safety, health, and welfare if a fault occurred; and equipment and
devices intended to prevent or reduce safety and health risks. Maintenance requirements are
usually specified in the manufacturer’s manual.
• The rig contractors and services companies shall retain maintenance records.
6.5.1.9. Floors and Pedestrian Routes
• The rig contractors and services companies shall ensure there are sufficient pedestrian and
vehicle routes, of sufficient width and headroom to allow employees and vehicles to move
safely.
Note: Pedestrian and vehicle routes include any stairs, fixed ladder, doorway, gateway, loading
bay, or ramp.
• Floors and vehicle routes shall be sufficiently strong enough for the loads placed on them and
the vehicles expected to use them. The surfaces must not have holes, be uneven or slippery, and
kept clear of obstructions to prevent slipping and tripping.
• Restrictions shall be clearly indicated, where sharp or blind bends are unavoidable or vehicles
need to reverse. Measures such as one-way systems, visibility mirrors, and speed limits were
introduced.
• Screens shall be provided to protect employees who have to work where they would be at risk
from exhaust fumes, or to protect employees from materials likely to fall from vehicles.
• Additional measures need to be taken where pedestrians have to cross or share vehicle routes.
These include the marking of routes, and provision of crossing points, bridges, subways, and
barriers. Stairs shall have handrails at an appropriate height to assist people when ascending
and descending the stairs. Staircases with openings on either side shall be provided with a top

and middle guardrail.

• Loading bays shall have at least one exit point from the lower level or a refuge shall be
provided to avoid people being crushed or trapped by vehicles. Where vehicles offload by
tipping into a pit or similar place, and vehicles or persons could fall into it, barriers and wheel
stops shall be provided.
6.5.1.10. Falls and Falling Objects
• The rig contractors and services companies shall ensure a high standard of protection is in
place to prevent employees from falling from heights and protect employees from objects
falling onto them.
• Materials and objects need to be stored and stacked in such a way that they are not likely to
cause injury. Storage racking and shelving need to be of adequate strength and stability for the
loads to be placed upon it.
6.5.1.11. Transparent or Translucent Doors, Gates or Walls and Windows
• Windows, transparent or translucent surfaces in walls, partitions, doors and gates should
be made of safety materials or be protected against breakage. If there is a risk of employees
coming into contact with it, they shall be marked or incorporate features to make it apparent
that it is not a pedestrian route.
• Openable windows, skylights and ventilators should be capable of being opened, closed or
adjusted without exposing any employees to risks of safety and health. Windows and skylights
shall be designed so they may be cleaned without risk to safety and health.
• Doors and gates should be suitably constructed and fitted with safety devices if necessary.
• Doors and gates that swing both ways and conventionally hinged doors on main pedestrian
routes shall have a transparent viewing panel.
• Power-operated doors and gates-if available-shall have safety features to prevent employees
being struck or trapped and, where necessary, shall have a readily identifiable and accessible
control switch or device so that they can be stopped quickly in an emergency.
6.5.1.12. Escalators and Moving Walkways
Escalators and moving walkways must function safely be equipped with necessary safety devices
and be fitted with one or more emergency stop controls that are easily identifiable and easily
accessible to users.
6.5.1.13. Toilets and Washing Rooms
• The rig contractors and services companies shall provide employees with suitable and sufficient
toilets and washing facilities.
• There should be, at a minimum one toilet and wash basin for every 8 employees and if required
the appropriate number of showering facilities required. In all cases, independent facilities must
be provided for men and women.
• The rig contractors and services companies shall make arrangements for people of
determination to access toilets and washing facilities easily. Washing facilities must have hot
and cold water, soap, clean towels, or other means of cleaning or drying and must be regularly
maintained and cleaned.
6.5.1.14. Drinking Water
• The rig contractors and services companies is responsible for ensuring that all employees in the
workplace have access to an adequate supply of drinking water.
• To determine the required supply of drinking water, a risk assessment should be conducted
considering the environment in which the work is being carried out, the nature of the work
activities, as well as the weather, and the time of year.
• Drinking water shall be provided via bottled water and with a suitable amount of cups or a
water dispensing system that is regularly cleaned, serviced, and filters replaced according to
the manufacturer’s recommendations.
• The rig contractors and services companies shall ensure that regular and routine cleaning and
disinfection of all potable water storage tanks whether fixed or portable, shall be adequately

cleaned at a minimum of once every 6 months.

6.5.1.15. Changing Rooms
The rig contractors and services companies shall provide suitable changing rooms for employees
to change into and out of work-related clothing. They must ensure the employees’ privacy and
provide secure storage of employees’ personal and work-related clothing.
6.5.1.16. Rest Areas
• The rig contractors and services companies shall provide rest areas, with sufficient seating and
large enough for the number of employees likely to use them at any time.
• Rest areas shall be provided for new and expectant mothers and be close to toilets and
washing facilities.
6.5.1.17. Eating Areas
• It is important to provide suitable and sufficient facilities for employees to eat meals while at
work. This is especially important in areas where food might be likely to become contaminated.
• To ensure that the eating areas (such as canteens and pantry areas, mess halls) are suitable
for use, they should have sufficient seating, tables, and facilities for eating meals. It is also
important to keep these areas clean and hygienic. Additionally, these eating areas should not
be designated as areas where personal protective equipment needs to be worn.

A7. Communications
A.7. Communications
7.1. Scope
This procedure applies to all events occurring at all the organization’s locations & Units. It applies
to all EGPC employees, contractors and visitors who are involved in drilling and workover relevant
activities.
7.2. Purpose
To ensure that operational and HSE matters are communicated to all personnel during
organization unit operations.
7.3. Drilling /WO Communications Means

7.3.1. Communication Requirements
• Reliable radio and telephone communications must be maintained at all times between the rig
(onshore/offshore), and the operations base.
• Offshore rigs must also be able to continuously communicate with other rigs, helicopters, and
vessels in the vicinity.
• Each offshore and land rig and Rig less Operations must conduct an initial survey to verify that
all working areas are covered by the intercom system.
• Inspections must be carried out after each rig move to ensure that all speakers and all
communications means are working and messages are clear.
7.3.2. Intercom System
• Offshore rigs must be equipped with an internal multi-channel (minimum 4 channels) Gai-
Tronics or Drilling & WO approved equivalent communications system, powered by a UPS
power source.
• The system must have sufficient stations and speakers to contact all operational areas of the
rig.
• Acoustic cabins must be provided in all high-noise areas.
7.3.3. Alarm System
• Every offshore/onshore rig must be equipped with an integrated alarm system capable
of providing a minimum of three (3) separate and distinct alarm signals (i.e., Abandon,
Combustible Gas/Fire, and H2S), which shall be audible throughout the entire rig, exceeding the
high noise level at rig site.
• In high-noise areas, visual alarm signals (strobe lights) must be provided in addition to the
audible alarms.
• The Rig Operator must ensure that all visual warning signals are readily visible in all work areas
and are not obstructed or hidden by equipment, machinery, or structure.
7.4. Internal communications:

The drilling rig contractor and service companies shall establish a minimum level of internal
communications, including but not limited to:
• Risk assessments
• JSA (Job safe Analysis )
• Policies & procedures
• HSE Alerts
• HSE Bulletins, Campaigns and safety tips
• Investigation reports
• MEMOs
• Annual QHSE plan
• Organization chart
• Daily HSE morning report
• Daily STOP cards sheet

A.7. Communications
• Weekly communications included but not limited to Weekly Inspections, Weekly HSE Meeting
• Weekly HSE Audit Plan
• Monthly communication included but not limited to Monthly Inspections and Monthly Meetings
• Outstanding tracking sheet
• Updates of annual QHSE plan
• Non-conformance tracking sheet
• MOC tracking sheet
7.5. External communications:

Each rig contractor shall communicate the required communications, including but not limited to:
• Monthly HSE performance including leading and lagging indicators to EGPC.
• Incidents Investigation Reports to EGPC
• Statistical report for occupational safety and health to Labor office.
EGPC will send the HSE communications to all drilling contractors and service companies which
may include but are not limited to:
• Policies & procedures
• General instructions
• HSE alerts
• HSE Bulletins and Annual Campaigns program

A8. HSE Orientation

A.8. HSE Orientation
8.1. Scope
Work Site Orientation applies to all EGPC employees, contractors and visitors who are involved in
any drilling and workover Sites
8.2. Purpose
It’s crucial for all personnel to be familiar with their workplace, including its nature, hazards, and
controls. As a result, visitors must be informed about general instructions concerning living quarters,
emergency exits, emergency signals, and the location of first aid stations before starting work.
8.3. Rig/MODU HSE Orientation/induction structure

• Personnel shall sign a declaration form stating that they have received rig orientation.
• The orientation shall include:
- Fire and Emergency Station Assignments and Escape Routes.
- Room Assignment — including bunk card review
- Review any rig-specific safety policies
- Classification of hazardous areas
- PTW system
- DROPS prevention program
- Medications
- Safety equipment layout
- Welfare facilities available
- Security
- Environment. Protection
- Safety observation Reporting
• All personnel shall be:
- Aware of rig/ location evacuation procedures.
- Aware of the location of Lifeboat Stations and Assignments.
- Able to identify emergency signals and state their assignments.
- Aware of the drilling contractor’s Hazard Observation Program.
- Aware of H2S risks and precautions.
- able to demonstrate their understanding of their responsibilities toward safe working
practices
- Able to demonstrate their understanding of when a Permit to Work and Risk Assessment is
required.
- Be aware of mobile phone and smoking policy.
• The Person in Charge or designated person shall:
- Conduct a tour of the rig with all new personnel explaining emergency procedures and
evacuation routes.
- Oversee their enrollment in the contractor/subcontractor Short Service Employee program.
- Assign a qualified person to repeat the induction for any person who left the rig for more than
three months.

A9. Competency & Training

A.9. Competency & Training
9.1. Scope
This procedure applies for all EGPC affilated companies rig contractors employees to execute the
competence assurance process.
9.2. Purpose
This procedure is to identify the training requirements, courses, and execute the training matrices
for continual improvement and meeting the operational needs.
9.3. Training Requirements

9.3.1. Management of Major Emergencies (MOME)
MOME training program provides practical hands-on experience for managing unanticipated
events. Personnel who are in charge shall undergo MOME training (Offshore Only).
• Persons to be trained (Minimum) : OIM and NTP
• Training Provider: Certified and Competent (3rd Party)
• Valid for: 5 Years
9.3.2. Proficiency in Survival Craft and rescue boat / FRC Coxwain (If equipped)
Training to be completed by an EGPC-approved school. Certificates of competency shall be
maintained at the rig location.
• Persons to be trained (Minimum): Two (2) Coxswains per Lifeboat, as identified on the Station
Bill and or the safe manning certificate.
• Training Provider: 3rd Party
9.3.3. Marine License
Training required by a regulatory body, training required to obtain and maintain a marine license
or training required by the vessel’s flag state. See Flag requirements for guidance as to where the
training is to be completed.
• Persons to be trained (Minimum): OIM and Barge Engineer.
9.3.4. Global Maritime Distress and Safety System (GMDSS) Training

• Persons to be trained (Minimum): Radio Operator
9.3.5. Stability
• Persons to be trained (Minimum): OIM and Barge Engineer (if BE or Rig Mover OIM while
Floating)

9.3.6. Helideck Operations Initial Training Standard (HOIT)

This training can be completed at any OPITO approved school. Certificates of competency shall be
maintained at the rig location.
• Persons to be trained (Minimum): There shall be two (2) certified competent HLO/HOIT aboard
at all times (one per shift).
• Training Provider: Certified and Competent 3rd Party. (OPITO).
• Valid for: None
9.3.7. Helideck Emergency Response Team Member (HERTM)
This training is to be completed at an EGPC approved school. Competency must be verified
through experience and qualification.
• Persons to be trained (Minimum): There shall be four (4) certified competent HERTM aboard at
all times, as identified on the Station Bill
• Training Provider: Certified and Competent external provider(OPITO)
9.3.8. Helideck Emergency Response Team Leader (HERTL)
This training is to be completed at an OPITO approved school. Competency must be verified
through experience and qualification.
• Persons to be trained (Minimum): There shall be two (2) certified competent HERTL aboard at
all times (one per shift)
• Training Provider: Certified and Competent external provider(OPITO)
9.3.9. HUET, Helicopter Underwater Escape Training
This training can be completed through any OPITO approved school. (Approved courses are
BOSIET, TBOSIET (FOET which is a refresher for BOSIET/TBOSIET), HUET, THUET)
• Persons to be trained (Minimum): All personnel on-board.
• Training Provider: Certified and Competent (3rd Party).
• Valid for: 4 Years.
Note: THUET and TBOSIET are required for employees that are attending the training for the
first time and for employees that require refresher training after their certification expires while
working.
9.3.10. Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styren (ABS) Welder

Each MODU Welder shall be trained and certified in accordance with MODU classification society.
Each land rig welder shall be deemed competent by a third party accreditation institution. All
certifications shall be current and valid.
• Persons to be trained (Minimum): Welder.
• Training Provider: ABS approved examiner/3rd Party.
• Valid for: 3 Years..
9.3.11. Fire Fighting Team Leader (Offshore)
This training shall be completed at an EGPC approved school.
• Persons to be trained (Minimum): Fire Team leaders as identified on the Station Bill. Two (2)
persons per tour
• Training Provider: Certified and Competent 3rd Party
9.3.12. Emergency Response Leader
Onshore senior personnel shall be trained to adequately respond in an emergency, this training
shall follow both the contractor and EGPC emergency response procedures.
• Persons to be trained (Minimum): TP, NTP and Safety Engineer.


9.3.13. Fire Team Member (Offshore)
This training should be conducted at an accredited external school. Each member of a fire team
shall be able to demonstrate competency in basic firefighting techniques and the use of first aid
firefighting appliances. Competency shall be demonstrated through experience, theoretical, and
practical examination.
• Persons to be trained (Minimum): All Fire Team members as identified on the Station Bill.
• Training Provider: external provider(Must be OPITO/STCW-95 accredited or EGPC approved
school).
• Valid for: As per certificate.
9.3.14. Gas Tester
Gas testing is required in all locations where injury to personnel or damage to property could occur
due to the presence of combustible gases, toxic gases, or oxygen enriched/deficient atmospheres.
An adequate number of competent personnel must be maintained at each rig location, it is
required that the rig maintain at least two (2) competent persons per tour. Competency shall be
demonstrated through experience, and theoretical and practical examination.
• Persons to be trained (Minimum): Two (2) persons per tour.
• Training Provider: Certified and Competent (external provider or In-House).
Note: A current list of all competent Gas Testers shall be posted at the PTW issuing center
9.3.15. Confined Space Entry Inspection

A physical inspection is required in all locations where injury to personnel could occur due to the
nature of confined space work as well as considering the presence of combustible gases, toxic
gases, or oxygen enriched/deficient atmospheres, the physical condition of the work area must be
considered, particular attention must be paid to rescue procedures in given confined space work
areas. An adequate number of competent personnel trained in confined space entry inspection (this
training shall include gas testing) must be maintained at each rig location, it is recommended that
the rig maintain at least two (2) competent persons per tour. Competency shall be demonstrated
through experience, theoretical and practical examination.
• Persons to be trained (Minimum): Two (2) persons per tour.
Note: A current list of all competent Confined Space Entry Inspectors shall be maintained at the
PTW issuing center.
9.3.16. Well Control

Well control training shall be completed at an IADC or IWCF approved school. Certificates of
competency shall be maintained at the rig location.
• Persons to be trained (Minimum): Driller, NTP, and STP
• Training Provider: Approved IADC or IWCF School
9.3.17. First Aid CPR
This training shall be administered by an approved competent instructor at an external school or
at the rig location, each trainee shall demonstrate competency through practical and theoretical
examination.
• Persons to be trained (Minimum): All rig personnel.
• Training Provider: Certified and Competent (external provider or In-House)

9.3.18. Fire Safety Training (Onshore)

Fire safety training will be provided in a manner appropriate to the risk identified and be adapted
to take account of any new or changed risks to the safety of employees, such training will enable
personnel to perform their duties as identified in the Fire Attack Plan.
• Persons to be trained (Minimum): All employees at the time of employment or when an
employee is introduced to new work equipment or when new technology is introduced.
9.3.19. HAZCOM Training
This program provides hazardous materials information, and guidance on how to handle
chemicals safely to minimize incidents and reduce risks to people, production, equipment, and the
environment.
• Persons to be trained (Minimum): All rig personnel.
9.3.20. Spill Prevention Training
This training shall include prevention and containment of chemical spills. All personnel must
have a basic understanding of prevention; containment; and the environmental, health, safety, and
legislative impact of chemical spills.
• Persons to be trained (Minimum): All rig personnel, this training can be combined with
HAZCOM training
9.4. Respiratory Protection Training

The Rig Operator shall ensure that all respiratory protection equipment needed by, or reasonably
anticipated to be needed by his employees, is provided. Those employees required to use this
equipment must be trained in its effective use. This training shall include the following:
- The need for respirator protection.
- An explanation of why a particular type of respirator has been selected.
- Fitting of face pieces.
- Donning (putting on) and doffing (taking off) of respirators.
- Instructions in emergency procedures.
- Maintenance, inspection, and storage of respirators.
- Sealing and functioning of the face piece
• Persons to be trained (Minimum): All personnel at the rig location who may be required to use
respiratory equipment in the normal course of their duties. This training shall be documented.
9.4.1. Confined Space Training
All entrants into a confined space must be made aware of:
- The strict requirement for a PTW prior to any entry or hot work.
- The hazards of a confined space:
- Oxygen Deficiency
- Flammable and Explosive Gas
- Toxic Gas and Vapors
- Engulfment
- The strict requirement for an emergency observer.
- The necessity to wear a Confine Space Entry (CSE) full body harness.
- The importance of following the requirements as specified in HSERM/A/A-12/PTW-and the
CSE procedure.

- The strict requirement for the preparation and review of a JSA.

• Persons to be trained (Minimum): All personnel whom in the course of their normal duties will
be expected to enter a confined space.
9.4.2. Lock-Out /Tag-Out
The purpose of this training is to protect personnel from the potential releases of stored energy
or the startup of machinery or equipment that may cause injury. This specifically includes any
maintenance activity where electrical, mechanical, steam, hydraulic, pneumatic or any other energy
source is present. Additional hazards may include heated, flammable, toxic, corrosive or chemical
materials. Employees required to perform Lock-Out/Tag-Out procedures shall receive training in
these procedures before performing the procedures.
• Persons to be trained (Minimum): Employees required to perform Lock-Out/Tag-Out (LOTO) as
part of their normal duties (Drillers, ASDs, Derrickmen, Electricians, Motormen and Mechanics).
9.4.3. Permit to Work
As part of each Rig Operator and Service Company Loss Prevention Program, a Permit to Work
System shall be established based on EGPC D&WO HSE Manual The system is intended to be
applied to those jobs that represent a potential hazard to operations, personnel or equipment.
Contractors may use existing internal forms developed as part of their loss prevention programs.
Employees required to work under the PTW system procedures, or whose jobs may be affected by
the PTW system procedures, shall receive training in these procedures.
• Persons to be trained (Minimum): Employees required to work under the PTW system
procedures, or whose jobs may be affected by the PTW system procedures, shall receive
training in these procedures to an appropriate level (OIM, TP, NTP, BE, Driller, ASD, Derrickman,
Crane Operator, Electrician, Motorman, Mechanic and Safety Officer).
9.4.4. Hydrogen Sulfide (H2S)
The Rig Operator and Service Company shall adequately train all his personnel in the basic
fundamentals of Hydrogen Sulfide (H2S) safety. This training must include and all personnel on the
rig must be able to demonstrate an understanding of the following:
- Characteristics of H2S and its toxicity.
- Detection and warning systems peculiar to the location.
- Emergency procedures consisting of:
- Designation of safe briefing areas.
- Wearing and use of emergency breathing equipment.
- Evacuation procedures.
- Rescue procedures.
- First aid for victims.
- Instructions in the inspection, maintenance, and use of assigned respiratory protection
equipment.
- This training MUST include drills in all applicable procedures so that personnel on the
location can quickly and effectively follow each of these instructions when there is an actual,
life-threatening emergency.
- All basic H2S training shall include the actual donning and breathing from each different type
of breathing apparatus in use on that particular rig. Each person must be able to don and
breathe from the SCBA within 45 seconds.
- A training card shall be issued to each person completing the basic H2S training. This card
shall remain valid for two years, following which the person must retake the basic H2S
training.

- All personnel must be able to identify the H2S alarms.

- All personnel must be able to muster to the safe briefing area or muster station (offshore).
Offshore personnel must also be able to enter into the lifeboat wearing both SCBA and
personal floatation device (PFD).
- In addition to the basic skills listed above, all personnel must be able to competently perform
the tasks assigned to them in the rig specific H2S emergency plan.
• Persons to be trained (Minimum): All personnel on location.
9.4.5. Hazard Recognition Program
The Rig Operator shall adequately train each of his employees in the recognition and avoidance
of unsafe conditions and in all Company loss prevention standards applicable to his work
environment. He shall also adequately train his employees in methods to control or eliminate any
hazards or other exposures resulting in injury or illness (hazard recognition program).
9.4.6. Air Hoist and Manrider Operator Training
Air hoists are powerful pieces of equipment that if misused can lead to serious incidents. Only
qualified competent personnel shall operate air hoists. Competency shall be demonstrated through
experience, and theoretical and practical examination using Air Hoist and Man Rider.
• Persons to be trained (Minimum): All personnel who in the course of their normal duties would
be expected to operate an Air Hoist (Driller, ASD, Derrickman, Crane Operator, Roughneck,
Roustabout, Mechanic, and Motorman).
9.4.7. Fall Protection/ working at height Training
Fall protection refers to the use of lifeline, harnesses, guardrails, anchors, lanyards, and safety
netting. One or more of these systems may be required when working at an elevation. Workers shall
be trained and competent in the use of the “Fall Protection Plan” and the inspection and use of Fall
Arrest and/or Fall Restraint equipment prior to using it. Training shall reflect “ANSI/ASSE Z359.1 and
OSHA,” with curriculum content that meets or exceeds current international training models.
• Persons to be trained (Minimum): All personnel who would be expected to work at height as
part of their duties; deck crew, drill crew, maintenance crew and marine crew.
9.4.8. Rigging and Lifting
Rigging and lifting involves the use of equipment that if misused can lead to serious incidents.
Only qualified competent personnel shall rig loads or signal cranes and forklifts. Competency shall
be demonstrated through; experience, theoretical, and practical examination.
• Persons to be trained (Minimum): All personnel who will be expected to prepare equipment
or personnel to be lifted by a powered or manual hoist (BE, Crane Operator, Roughnecks,
Roustabouts and Medic).
9.4.9. Manual Handling

Many injuries are documented annually as a direct result of poor manual handling techniques.
Training must include the use of good kinetic lifting techniques.
9.4.10. Scaffolding Safety
Scaffolds shall only be erected and dismantled by qualified personnel, taking into account stresses
on the scaffold, main supports, ties, etc., and all personnel must be made aware of EGPC and
contractor procedures relating to the erection and dismantling of the scaffolding.
• Persons to be trained (Minimum): All personnel who; supervise, erect, and/or dismantle
scaffolding and its work platforms (Tool pusher and Barge Engineer) (Designated scaffolding
inspectors and erectors). If no scaffolding is available or used at all on rig location no training is
required.
9.4.11. DROPS Training
Personnel must be aware of how to identify, evaluate and the potential consequences of a Drop
object event and the prevention measurements required to be in place to avoid it.
• Persons to be trained (Minimum): All personnel on location, except catering personnel
• Training Provider: Certified and Competent instructor accredited by a recognized national or
international agency (external provider or in House)
Note: Advanced DROPS training shall be provided for the persons who perfom/ accountable for
the DROPS insepection
9.4.12. Emergency Response to a Power Line Incident

This program demonstrates how a driver evacuate a vehicle which has contacted overhead/
underground power lines safely. Reference: “OSHA Title 29 CFR 1926.
• Persons to be trained (Minimum): All rig move drivers and escort personnel.
• Training Provider: Certified and Competent (external provider or in House)
• Valid for: Once
9.4.13. Banksmen/Flagman Training
This training directs the movements of large vehicles both rigid and articulated on a worksite,
during loading and unloading to safely maneuver identified structures or obstacles in a route.
• Persons to be trained (Minimum): All rig move personnel/person responsible for assisting in the
maneuvering and loading/unloading vehicles, drivers and escort personnel.
Note: Additional Rigless Operations Training
9.4.14. Rig Inspection Training
Rig inspection training equips individuals with the knowledge and skills to conduct thorough and
accurate inspections of drilling rigs. It empowers individuals to contribute to a safer, more efficient,
and environmentally responsible drilling environment.
• Persons to be trained (Minimum): driller, NTP, STP, safety engineer
• Training Provider: Certified and Competent (external provider or in House and approved from
EGPC Drilling and workover steering committe)
• Valid for: once
9.4.15. Preventive Maintenance

Preventive maintenance (PM) training equips individuals with the knowledge and skills to
proactively maintain equipment and assets, preventing breakdowns and ensuring optimal
performance. By equipping your workforce with the knowledge and skills gained through preventive
maintenance training, you can create a culture of proactive asset care, ensuring the smooth
operation of your equipment and the success of your organization.
• Persons to be trained (Minimum): mechanic, electrician
• Valid for: once
9.4.16. Environmental Awareness
Environmental awareness training educates individuals about the impact of human activities
on the planet and empowers them to make eco-conscious choices and establishing and applying
environmental registers. Investing in environmental awareness training empowers individuals to
become agents of change. By fostering a culture of sustainability within your organization, you can
contribute to a healthier planet and a brighter future.
• Persons to be trained (Minimum): all
• Valid for: once
9.4.17. HACCP Awareness
HACCP (Hazard Analysis and Critical Control Points) training equips individuals with the knowledge
and skills to implement a preventive food safety system. This internationally recognized approach
focuses on identifying, preventing, and controlling hazards throughout the food chain
• Persons to be trained (Minimum): catering crew, safety engineer
• Valid for: once
Specific knowledge and experience requirements for special equipment operations requires
progressive training for its operators. These training requirements shall be developed by the Service
Companies for crew members, senior operators and shift supervisors. This training will be identified
in the Service Company training matrix.
In addition to the required training, these personnel shall have experience with the type of
work planned, to carry out the duties assigned in a competent manner. The type and amount of
experience required depends on the complexity of the work and the specific duties assigned.
The Service Company shall conduct an assessment of the operators work experience and training
to ensure they have the skills and knowledge required to meet the requirements for the work and
duties being assigned.

9.5. Training Matrix
Validity
OIM
Tool pusher (STP)
Night pusher (NTP)
Barge Engineer
Rig Engineer
Driller
A/D
Derrick man
Floor man
Assistant Floor man
Crane Operator
Forklift Operator
Mechanic
Electration
Doctor / Medic
Radio Operator
Safety Engineer
welder
Management of Major
5Y
Emergencies (MOME)
FRC Coxwain 3Y
Marine License 5Y
GMDSS Training 5Y
Stability 5Y
Helideck Operations
Initial Training Standard Once
(HOIT)
Helideck Emergency
Response Team Member 2Y
(HERTM)
Helideck Emergency
Response Team Leader 2Y
(HERTL)
HUET 4Y
ABS Welder 3Y
Fire Fighting Team Lead-

2Y
er (Offshore)
Emergency Response
5Y
Leader
Fire Team member 3Y
Gas Tester 2Y
Confined Space Entry 3Y
Well Control 2Y
First Aid 3Y
Fire protection 3Y
HAZCOM 3Y
Spill Prevention 3Y
Respiratory Protection 3Y
Confined Space entry

3Y
Inspection

Validity
OIM
Tool pusher (STP)
Night pusher (NTP)
Barge Engineer
Rig Engineer
Driller
A/D
Derrick man
Floor man
Assistant Floor man
Crane Operator
Forklift Operator
Mechanic
Electration
Doctor / Medic
Radio Operator
Safety Engineer
welder
PTW 3Y
LOTO 3Y
H2S 2Y
Hazard Recognition 3Y
Air Hoist 2Y
Fall Protection 2Y
Rigging & Lifting 3Y
Manual Handling 2Y
Scaffolding Safety 3Y
DROPS 2Y
Emergency response to a
Once
power lie incident
Banksmen/Flagman
3Y
Training
Rig inspection once
Preventive maintenance once
Environmental aware-
once
ness
HACCP once

A10. Short Service Employee

Program (SSEP)
A.10. Short Service Employee Program (SSEP)
10.1. Scope
This program applies to all rig contractors and service companies to help protect persons who are
at particular risk on work sites because they are new (Short Service Employees), or are unfamiliar
with the site.
10.2. Purpose
The purpose of a Short Service Employee (SSE) Program is to ensure that new employees,
temporary workers, and subcontractors with less than three months of experience are provided
with the necessary training, supervision, and support to perform their jobs safely and effectively.
This program aims to reduce the risk of accidents, injuries, and other hazards associated with
inexperience and lack of familiarity with workplace procedures and safety regulations.
10.3. Responsibility
It is the responsibility of the rig contractor PIC to ensure that a Short Service Employee (SSE)
program, meeting the following minimum requirements is implemented at their site.
10.4. Procedure
All new employees, including regular and contract employees, holding rig rotational positions
shall be easily identifiable as SSEs by the following system.
• For the first 45 working days that they are filling a regularly rotating or field position they shall
wear a different colored hard hat. If they are transferred to or working temporarily on another
site during this period, they shall continue to wear a different colored hardhat based on the
rig contractors’ and service companies’ policies for the duration of their initial 45 working day
period.
• After the 45 working day initial period they shall only wear the company’s regular color hard
hat. An SSE shall be only or all of the following:
- New to the industry.
- New to the company.
- New to the rig/location.
• All service personnel shall conform to the above system of recognition, but in any event, shall
not wear a hard hat color that conflicts with and/or reduces the effectiveness of the above
system.
• All SSEs and visitors are required to attend an initial orientation on the rig before beginning
work.
• All SSEs shall be assigned in writing by a contractor, or a safety partner (Mentor) from within
their work group. The supervisor and appointed safety partner (Mentor) shall provide close
supervision during the appropriate familiarization.
• The supervisor and designated safety partner shall ensure that the SSE is familiarized with
personal protective equipment, all relevant procedures, and the location and operation of
emergency equipment.
• The supervisor and appointed safety partner shall discuss and review with the SSE any known
and/or potential hazards associated with a proposed task before commencement, and review
all emergency equipment, personal protective equipment, and relevant procedures. An
appropriate hazard recognition process must be utilized.
• The appropriate supervisor shall enroll the SSE into the program by utilizing the Short Service
Employee Enrollment Form, a copy retained on the rig to record the enrollment.
• Following the successful completion of the required SSE period, the supervisor and appointed
safety partner shall record the transition by signing and dating the enrollment form. The
completed form shall be maintained on the rig. An employee shall not be considered a
graduate of the program until he/she has completed the following training, as a minimum:
- H2S safety training
- Basic Fire Fighting
- Casualty Handling
- Permit to Work

A.10. Short Service Employee Program (SSEP)
- Hazard Recognition Program

- Rigging and Lifting
- Fall Protection Training
- Confined Space Entry
• All Training must be provided in compliance with EGPC D&WO HSE requirements.
• Additional questions and tasks shall be added as necessary by the supervisor and safety
partner, to ensure that the employee has a working knowledge of Safety and Environmental
procedures, and has demonstrated a safe work ethic and safe behavior throughout the SSE
program.
• Any Employee who is not deemed as qualified for release from SSE status after 45 working
days, may continue to work only with written approval of the Person in Charge (PIC).

A11. Journey Management

System ( JMS)
A.11. Journey Management System (JMS)
11.1. Scope
The Safety Management System (SMS) serves as a guide for managing work-related travel by
implementing a risk-based Journey Management System (JMS). It provides a standardized approach
for EGPC drilling contractors to create a JMS that identifies their travel requirements, how to manage
travel, and how to deal with travel-related incidents and emergencies.
Any additional notification, reporting and/or investigation requirements as a result of work-
related travel incidents shall also apply as per the EGPC Incident reporting and investigation
requirements.
11.2. Purpose
The goal of the JMS is to minimize or eliminate travel-related risks wherever possible, using
engineering solutions such as mandatory locators or tracking technologies when traveling, and
administrative controls such as a risk-based JMS with an emphasis on positive communication
and proper documentation. By enforcing the drilling contractor’s JMS, safe travel behavior can be
ensured.
11.3. Journey Management System ( JMS)

11.3.1. Program Requirements
• The drilling contractor is responsible for developing its own JMS equivalent to this SMS and
shall be reviewed and approved by the proponent drilling contractor.
• The JMS shall define the drilling contractor’s work-related travel needs, managing travel, and
managing travel-related incidents.
• JMS system could be implemented manually or through electronic or digital-based
technologies, provided these solutions are fully integrated and complained with companies
SMS, legal requirement.
11.3.2. Work-Related Travel Requirements
• The drilling contractor shall identify and define all work-related travel needs based on the
operational business requirements and geographical locations.
• Categorize the work-related travel needs into routine travel and non-routine travel.
• During any adverse weather condition, all vehicle movement shall be restricted to the
minimum, in case any movement (after approvals) all driving safety precautions shall be
applied.
• Night travel shall be risk-based on a case-by-case basis. No night driving is allowed unless it is
essential to business operations or required for personal safety reasons or medical cases. Night
driving requires authorization from the drilling contractor’s senior management level.
11.3.3. Manage Work-Related Travel
The drilling contractor shall have a risk-based JMP which emphasizes;
• Use of mandatory technologies when traveling (e.g., GPS, tracking system shall be equipped
through ETIT Companies and/or satellite communications), Proper follow up with the driver
during all trips, till reaching the final destination.
• The JMP shall include the following sections and standards as minimum requirements:
- A time-out/time-in log system for determining when transportation means are behind the
estimated arrival time, and this information may aid in primary and secondary search and
rescue efforts. The logging system must have the following components:
- Passengers Name(s),
- JMP number(s),
- Mode of transportation (for example, air, sea, or land),
- Destination(s) .
- Transport type and vehicle.
- Planned route(s),

- Departure time,
- Expected arrival time at destination(s),
- Expected return time to the origin, if applicable,
- Contact telephone number(s) or radio frequency,
- Additional information,
- A journey management coordinator (or equivalent to meet the intent),
- Signature(s) out/in.
• Nomination of a Journey Management Coordinator (JMC) per trip based on the drilling
contractor’s structure and operations. Drilling contractors utilizing a centralized journey
management system would meet this requirement.
• For all road routine travel, the appropriate emergency procedures, supplies and equipment
shall be carried for the journey and include the following:
- Periodic vehicle inspection sticker ( if applicable )
- First Aid kit
- Vehicle tracking system ( shall be equipped through ETIT Companies)
- Tire changing kit
- Reflective Triangles (x2)
- Reflective Vest
- Pair of Gloves
- Jumper (starter) Cable
- Air conditioning working
- Windscreen free of cracks/chips
- Posted drilling contractor lost in desert instruction.
- Tire tread depth >6 mm & no cracks,
- Tire Pressure (PSI) correct to vehicle specifications, including spare tire.
• For all travels, the appropriate emergency procedures, supplies, and equipment shall be carried
for the journey and include the following:
- The requirements of the section above plus:
- 4x4 vehicle
- Off-road driver training
- When a single vehicle is used, travel should be with a minimum of two persons (if applicable).
- Satellite mobile in case of no mobile signal
- Any additional equipment, supplies, or procedures that may be appropriate for the intended
journey.
- Off-Road survival box including the following but not limited to:-
- Igloo and water (>5L per person traveling)
- Shovel
- Towing Cable/towing strap
- Shackles
- Flash Light (with spare batteries)
- 12V portable tire air compressor
11.3.4. Manage Work-Related Travel Incidents and Emergencies
• It is critical for emergency preparedness of journey management to effectively plan and
schedule travel journeys in advance which include:
- The drilling contractor and Service Companies shall qualitatively assess the risk of work-
related travel then rank the types of travel, identify credible incidents (or scenarios) for work-
related travel and emergency medical evacuation as part of the overall drilling contractor’s
emergency response program, and take the appropriate actions accordingly.
- The JMP shall include the following sections and standards as minimum requirements within
the drilling contractor’s emergency response plan (ERP):
- The drilling contractor and Service Companies shall have an emergency response plan for
primary search, rescue events, and emergency medical evacuation events if required.
- Where the drilling contractor and Service Companies’s ERP would not cover the work-related
travel emergency response for their workers or contractors, the drilling contractor and
Service Companies shall implement the EGPC’s emergency response plan for primary search

and rescue situations.

- Each drilling contractor and service companies shall maintain access to the Vehicle Tracking
System to support plans for primary search and rescue events.
- If a missing person(s) is not found after a maximum of 3 hours since the activation of the
drilling contractor’s primary search and rescue response plan, ‘The EGPC Emergency control
room’ shall be called and escalated to a secondary search and rescue to ensure appropriate
resources are utilized.
• Primary search and rescue drills shall be scheduled and conducted at a minimum annually.
• Participation in secondary search and rescue drills scheduled at a corporate level to ensure
existing procedures and resources are sufficient to meet the intent of this instruction.

A12. Contractor Management/

Service Providers
A.12. Contractor Management/ Service Providers
12.1. Scope
This procedure offer a range of services to manage the entire lifecycle of contracted services,
from pre-qualification and selection to performance monitoring and post-contract evaluation. This
typically includes:
12.1.1. Pre-qualification and selection

Establishing contractor qualification criteria, pre-qualifying potential vendors, conducting bid
evaluations, and selecting the best contractor for the job based on technical expertise, safety record,
experience, and cost.
12.1.2. Contract administration

Managing contracts through all stages, including reviewing and negotiating terms, issuing
purchase orders, handling change orders, and ensuring compliance with all contractual
obligations.
12.1.3. Performance monitoring

Tracking contractor performance against agreed-upon metrics, including safety, quality, schedule,
and budget. This often involves conducting site visits, reviewing reports, and identifying areas for
improvement.
12.1.4. Risk management

Identifying and mitigating potential risks associated with contractor activities, such as safety
incidents, environmental damage, and financial losses. This may involve developing contingency
plans and implementing safety protocols.
12.1.5. Post-contract evaluation

Evaluating the overall performance of the contractor and the effectiveness of the contract
management process. This can inform future contractor selection and contract negotiation
strategies.
12.2. Purpose
The primary purpose of using a CMSP is to improve the efficiency, effectiveness, and safety of
managing drilling contractors. CMSPs can offer drilling companies several benefits, including:
12.2.1. Reduced costs

By streamlining the contracting process and ensuring compliance with contracts, CMSPs can help
drilling companies save money on procurement, project delays, and rework.
12.2.2. Improved safety

CMSPs can help drilling companies enforce safety standards and procedures, leading to a reduced
risk of accidents and injuries.
12.2.3. Enhanced quality

CMSPs can ensure that contractors deliver work that meets the required quality standards,
reducing the need for rework and delays.
12.2.4. Increased efficiency

By managing the administrative burden of contracting, CMSPs can free up drilling company
personnel to focus on core operational tasks.

A.12. Contractor Management/ Service Providers
12.2.5. Reduced risk

CMSPs can help drilling companies identify and mitigate potential risks associated with contractor
activities, protecting their assets and reputation.
Overall, CMSPs play a critical role in helping drilling companies manage their contractor
relationships effectively and achieve their operational goals.
For all related guidelines, please refer to EGPC’s contractor management guidelines.

A13. HSE Audits and

Inspections Reporting
A.13. HSE Audits and Inspections Reporting
13.1. Scope
The scope of this procedure applies to all EGPC D&WO Operators and contractors.
13.2. Purpose
The purpose of this Procedure is to outline the types of EGPC inspections, assessments and
periodic reviews that will occur across the Rig contractors and provide directional advice in
managing safe processes.
Comprehensive checklists shall be used so that important items/areas are not overlooked.
13.3.1. EGPC Audit Focal Point
• Responsible for the verification and tracking of all submitted contractor safety inspection
reports.
• Perform Trend Analysis of all findings from all inspection reports.
• Perform a root-cause analysis (RCA) of all repeat/reoccurring inspection deficiencies.
13.3.2. Auditors Committee
• Develop audit objectives, plans, and scope by reviewing available information and conducting
research.
• Prepare audit findings, write audit reports, and develop recommendations.
• Ensure compliance with all applicable plans, policies, and standards.
13.3.3. Auditee
• Responsible for initiating correction and corrective action(s) within due time, and reporting
back to the Auditor’s committee according to the audit follow-up scheme.
13.4. Definitions
13.4.1. HSE Audit
Is a systematic critical examination of the whole health and safety management system to identify
any weaknesses and then produce an action plan with suitable recommendations to correct any
non-conformity.
The audit aims to ensure that the management system is Used, Adequate, and Existing by Using
THREE evidences:
• Inspection (physical observation)
• Documents checks
• Staff interviews
13.4.2. HSE Inspections
Are typically more routine and limited in scope, involving visual checks of equipment and specific
hazards that need to be controlled. While formal corrective action may be required, in some cases
problems can be documented and then corrected on the spot.

13.4.3. Examples:
Audits inspections
Tests the existence, adequacy and use of safety Identifies hazards that are not controlled to a
management systems standard
Includes physical observation, staff interviews and

Physical observation only
documentation checks
Identifies unsafe conditions and some
Identifies Rig contractoral failures which are root causes
unsafe actions that are immediate causes of
of accidents and ill-health
accidents
largely reactive as they lead to quick fix of
Very proactive immediate causes rather than corrective
action of root causes
13.5. Procedure
13.5.1. Audit Process
• EGPC will develop an annual inspections and audits program to confirm HSE performance
sustainability within Rig contractors, HSE inspections and audit programs may include but are
not limited to:
- Quarterly HSE inspection
- Annual HSE Gap analysis audit
- Pre-commencement Inspection
• EGPC shall establish an audit committee responsible for conducting audits and inspections
across all Rig contractors operating under the EGPC. The committee’s main objective is to
ensure that the current HSE systems meet both national and international standards by
conducting thorough reviews.
• Each Rig contractor shall develop HSE inspections and audits program to monitor HSE
performance within the Rig contractor which reflects management commitment regarding
HSE performance sustainability, HSE inspections, and audit programs may include but are not
limited to:
- Daily cross-area inspection
- Monthly complete area inspection
- Monthly environmental area inspection
- QHSE Annual audit
13.5.2. Audit Findings
Findings shall be categorized as follows
13.5.2.1. Compliance:
Compliance with the QHSE management system and international standards requirements.
13.5.2.2. Critical NC
• A finding which include life threatening hazard. It should follow with immediate action to
eliminate it.
• Operations will not be resumed until status proved safe and Critical NC either removed or
downgraded.
13.5.2.3. Major NC
• A finding with a high risk that could lead into major personal injury/ equipment damage.
• A complete violation to QHSE management system, International standards/ legal

requirements.
• Repetitive / a number of minor nonconformities associated with the same requirement.
13.5.2.4. Minor NC
A finding with a medium risk that could lead to a minor damage/person injury. Inadequate
implementation of QHSE management system
13.5.2.5. OFI
Opportunity for Improvement
13.6. EGPC Required Audit & Inspections

13.6.1. Pre-Commencement
Pre-commencement inspections (PCI) apply to all drilling contractors new to Drilling &WO
operations and contractors where there is a significant amendment to the existing contract or
existing Scope of Work (SOW). Example:
New Rigs
• Post-Shipyard.
• Upgrades or Major Maintenance.
• Special Requests.
13.6.2. Contractor Asset Integrity Inspection
• Contractors will conduct asset integrity inspections to meet the requirements of industry best
practices and standards.
Example: API 4G. Derrick Inspections.
• All inspection report deficiencies will be rectified and tracked through closure.
13.6.3. Gap Analysis Audit
• A Gap Analysis is a strategic planning tool to help the Rig contractor to understand where we
are, where we want to be and how you’re going to get there.
• One of the first steps in the Management System transition or implementation project is to
compare the current Management System to the requirements of the standard.
• A gap analysis is mainly done at the beginning of the D&WO guideline implementation to
assess what is currently in place against the set of requirements of the EGPC D&WO guideline.
13.6.4. Regular Internal Inspections
13.6.4.1. Hand Tools, Power Tools, and Equipment Pre-Use Inspections
A worker must perform a pre-use visual inspection of any hand tool, power tool or equipment
when using it for the first time during his tour to ensure it is free from defect or deficiency and
is properly equipped with any guard or safety accessory required. This is an undocumented
inspection.
13.6.4.2. Pre-Spud Inspection
After moving a rig onto a new location but before spud, the Person In Charge (PIC) shall ensure
that the worksite and rig equipment are inspected as per the Pre-Spud Checklist.
13.6.4.3. Daily Mobile Equipment Pre-Use Inspection
This shall be performed by the operator of any mobile equipment, e.g., forklift, crane, elevating
work platform, motor vehicle, etc. This documented inspection shall conform to the Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) recommended pre-use inspection process. The inspection report or
log shall be available for review.

13.6.4.4. Derrick Mast Inspection

The Rig contractor driller shall ensure that the derrick is inspected once a week as per the Drilling
Weekly Inspection Checklist. He may delegate the inspection to the Derrick man but retains
responsibility for its completion.
13.6.4.5. DROPS Inspection
The rig operator PIC shall ensure that DROPS inspections are completed by a competent team.
These inspections shall be documented.
13.6.4.6. Drillers Pre-Tour Inspection
This inspection shall be conducted by the incoming driller at the start of his tour. It shall be done in
conjunction with the turnover at tour change. The inspection shall be performed and documented.

A14. Management of Change

A.14. Management of Change
14.1. Scope
This procedures gives guidelines for controlling management of change process that could
significantly affect management system to fulfill customer demands within all over EGPC ffilated
comapanies rig contractors
14.2. Purpose
The purpose of this procedure is to establish and implement process to formally manage changes
or additions (both temporary and permanent) so that the processes, organizational structure,
drilling and contractor management operations, equipment, and QM-HSE performance is not
compromised.
EGPC shall ensure that the integrity of the quality management system is maintained when
changes to the quality management system are planned and implemented.
14.2.1. An MOC is used to:

• Identify and mitigate hazards due to change.
• Provide training required by the change.
• Communicating the change to affected personnel.
Therefore, changes can be safely incorporated into the organization’s operations.
14.2.2. MOC is required when changes occur in the following situations:

• Emergencies exceeding 24 hours duration, where changes to an operational arrangement
occurs.
(ex.: site layouts, operating process are modified, move from 24-hour operations to daylight
manning only, changes in shift patterns or manning levels, when facilities are mothballed or the
Departments scope changes, i.e. gas drilling or workover activities are added.
• When new procedure steps, critical suppliers, Improvements. Upgrades. Renovations (in service
or product) in both field and office are introduced in the process.
• Technology and equipment changes.
• Rig layout or associated building changes.
• Organizational changes are made, i.e., when the Department opens and/or closes a division
or other Department organizational structural/name or activity changes including position
changes are proposed.
• Movement of key personnel anywhere in or from outside organizations.
• Non In Kind or Like-for-Like Replacements/ Changes.(e.g., component, equipment, chemical,
and procedure)
Changes to the management system, in regulatory requirements, standards, specifications and/or
technical codes. (Ex. Change in API or ISO standard)
14.2.3. An MOC is not required for the following:

• Changes in kind – i.e., normal maintenance work, where parts or equipment are replaced by an
identical part or equipment of an identical make and model.
• Bypassing or modifying an emergency shutdown device or system for servicing only is not part
of the department’s MOC process. Rather, the Safe Work Procedures and deviation permit (not
exceeding 24 hours, if exceeds, it’s a temporary change) shall be used to manage this type of
work.
• Urgently needed changes for an emergency. Once emergency situations end, work gets back to
normal conditions, otherwise MOC is required.
14.3. Definitions
14.3.1. Change
To make or become different. Change implies making either an essential difference often
amounting to a loss of original identity or a substitution of one thing for another.

14.3.2. Facility Change

Any physical change in a facility or deviation from existing documented safe operating limits,
except like for like replacement.
14.3.3. Procedural Change

Any deviation from the approved work procedures or documented safe operating limits.
Examples of “Change” are provided in Appendix – A: “Examples of Changes”.
14.3.4. Not In-Kind Change

This includes any replacement, change or addition that does not match the specification for the
existing item, equipment, structure or component or with the operating procedure for the system.
“Not in Kind” changes require formal review and approval as documented under this procedure.
14.3.5. In-Kind or Like-for-Like Change

Like-for-like change is the replacement of an existing item (e.g., component, equipment, chemical,
and procedure) with another item that complies with the current design specification of the item
being replaced.
The formal review as outlined in this MOC procedure is not required for Like-for-Like changes.
Examples of “Like-for-Like change” are provided in the aide memoire included in Appendix – B of
this procedure.
14.3.6. Management of Change

Process to systematically evaluate, authorize, implement, and document changes to existing
processes and assets, to ensure that safeguards are in place to eliminate the possibility of
introducing hazards because of changes.
14.3.7. Management of Organizational Change

Process to systematically evaluate, authorize, implement, and document changes in personnel and
the organizational structure, to ensure that safeguards are in place to eliminate the possibility of
introducing hazards (loss of skills, experience, and supervisory oversight) because of changes
14.3.8. Change Log Register

The Department log for recording and tracking MOC
14.3.9. MOC Package

All the documentation necessary for the submittal, review, and implementation of the change (ex:
MOC form, supporting technical documents, approval or rejection reports, etc...)
14.3.10. Change Request Form

Department forms the initiator completes and forwards to the MOC Coordinator to start the
change management process.
14.3.11. Change Review Team

Internal multidiscipline Department team selected by the Department Head and MOC Coordinator
that are technical authorities and that have the experience and knowledge to review and approve
changes
14.3.12. Change Implementation Team

Department subject matter experts are responsible for developing the change idea, performing the
relevant risk assessments, and engineering studies, and developing the change and communication
plans

14.3.13. Communication
When a change is made in a process that will affect how the Department performs a specific task,
those changes are required to be communicated across the Department to ensure the change is
effectively implemented
14.3.14. Hazard Identification

The process of recognizing that a hazard exists and defining its characteristics.
14.3.15. Minor
Lesser or secondary in amount, extent, importance, or degree.
14.3.16. Change Initiator

The person, usually an employee within D&WO, who identifies the necessity for a change.
14.3.17. MOC Coordinator

A person assigned by the Department Head to manage the departments MOC process by
recording, tracking and reporting the status of the MOC requests.
14.3.18. Primary/Initial Hazard Analysis

Any key organizational or staff changes, Any significant drilling process improvement changes or
Any changes to standards, material specifications, operating conditions, methods, or procedures.
Is usually the first attempt to systematically identify and categorize hazards associated with
a proposed change using a team-oriented process. The formal technique is used to identifying
hazards, assess the severity and consequences of potential incidents that could occur from these
hazards, then risk assess these events using a risk matrix. Additional safeguards may be proposed to
reduce the risk to acceptable levels, which then is developed to be a full risk assessment
14.3.19. Pre-Start-up Safety Review

A field verification process undertaken to ensure that all criteria identified in the change review
process with regard to physical installation, procedural amendments and training are in place. The
Initiators Supervisor shall ensure a PSSR is conducted.
14.3.20. Risk Analysis Checklist

A checklist used to identify potential hazards and operability problems
14.3.21. Replacement-in-Kind
A replacement-in-kind is replacing equipment, infrastructure, supporting systems or personnel
positions with identical or new equipment, infrastructure, supporting systems or personnel, i.e., like
for like. It is one in which the old equipment is replaced with an identical part or an equivalent part
approved and specified by the applicable engineering standard or in the case of a change to process
parameters these remain within the established MOC timeframe . Replacement-in-kind is not subject
to the EGPC MOC procedure. Any replacement of equipment or minor update to written procedures
requires documentation in accordance with maintenance work requirements (e.g., work orders in the
case of equipment), or appropriate approvals in the case of procedures. Any replacement needs to
include all necessary quality assurance, quality control, inspection, and field verification.
14.3.22. Training Needs Analysis

A training needs analysis is utilized to identify the necessary training required to ensure that
personnel are fully conversant with the equipment and operations within their facilities by
identifying any required training needed because of a specific change.

14.3.23. Risk
Combination of the frequency of occurrence and consequence of a specified hazardous event.
14.3.24. Critical suppliers

Is one where would have a negative impact on your business if not present. They might be a
supplier of a critical product or service, components, and/or activities.
14.3.25. Significant Change

Any changes to parts, equipment, or facilities including changes resulting from purchasing a
replacement with a non-identical make and model.
14.4.1. Change Initiator (CI)
• Identify the change, (e.g., changes to process technology, material, equipment, procedures,
facilities, buildings or departmental structure and positions).
• Identify what the change will affect (impact) and the expected benefits
• Discuss the proposed change with their supervisor and get their agreement to proceed further
with its assessment. This discussion should be based upon the technical basis of the change, as
well as the benefits.
• Provide a brief justification for the proposed change.
• Identify the type of change (whether it is temporary or permanent).
• Complete a change request form including attaching relevant documents and submit this to the
MOC coordinator.
• Adding closing target date according to change categories.
Note: Change initiator cannot be a coordinator
14.4.2. MOC Coordinator (reviews request then informs/announces completion)

• It is the individual, designated by the Department Head, who has overall coordination for
implementation of the change procedure.
• Document the receipt of any change request (so it can be tracked).
• Send all MOC forms and documents to document control team for record keeping.
• Assign tracking number and keep records of all MOC requests and send to.
• Track and monitor the status of the MOC (i.e., from initiation to completion) in the change log
register and coordinates the MOC process from initiation to completion/closure.
• Ensure that the change hasn’t been requested in the past, hasn’t been previously rejected and
there are no conflicts with other changes taking place.
• Carry out an initial verification of the acceptability of the change proposal affecting the
department to pass on to the Department CRT for review of the change suggestion/proposal.
• In conjunction with the Department Head, establish a departmental list of potential members
for the Department Change Review Team consisting of subject matter experts (SME) from
within the department.
• Coordinate when the CRT is to meet to review an idea for change.
• Recommend to the Department Head to close the MOC.
14.4.3. Change Implementation Team
Evaluate the approved change proposal addressing hazard identification, risk assessment/
reduction/control, technical skill coverage and expertise, training needs (matrix) update,
communication to affected personnel, and revision of assessment internal procedures/processes.
• Modify/enhance the required initial risk assessment if needed.
• Performs any additional required design studies.
• Develop an implementation/communication plan and provide the approved implementation
plan to the identified personnel for implementation. Plan is to determine how all affected

persons understand the change which is taking place.

• Present the completed design to the CRT for approval of implementation.
• Work with the Training Coordinator to develop any training material required.
14.4.4. Change Review Team (CRT) (reviews request and implementation plan)
Reviews the change request on its technical basis and assess for potential:
• Safety
• Basis for change
• Feasibility
• Benefits
• Financial implications
• Environmental
• Organizational impacts
The CRT does an initial review to determine the purpose of the change and how the change adds
value or benefits the department and also if it is safe to undertake/implement. The CRT consults and
obtain the concurrence of others, if the change impacts their area.
• Confirm the change to proceed to the implementation stage if it is considered suitable.
• In case of rejection, provide documented reasons for rejecting change ideas.
• Review and approves the implementation plan developed by Change Implementation Team.
• Determine if the proposed change can proceed to implementation and if so what other actions
are required.
• The CRT is to be a multidiscipline team of experts from the Department (i.e., Operations, QM-
HSE, etc.) with the necessary background to assess the suitability of a change. It is important
that every discipline/operational function is represented for the MOC request to be reviewed
thoroughly.
• The CRT will be the technical authorities from their relevant disciplines who can determine the
basis of the change and if the change will be:
- Suitable to provide the intended benefits.
- The feasibility of the change.
- Safe in principal.
• Has the authority to approve a change in principal.
• Can assign the Change Implementation Team if one has not been assigned so far.
• After the implementation stage is complete the CRT review its outcome to determine if the
proposed change can proceed to implementation and if so what other actions are also required.
14.4.5. Change Approver
• Establish a local MOC procedure in line with the EGPC Safety Management Guide for MOC. The
Procedure must:
- Cover all changes – permanent and temporary.
- Be documented and consist of a structured review process of the proposed change.
• Assign an MOC coordinator and back-up for the department to be the department’s focal point
for managing change.
• Assign resources to manage changes (e.g., review and implementation).
• Ensures full implementation of this MOC process, including the MOC process flowchart.
• Organize with the MOC Coordinator to develop a Change Review Team, who will have the
experience, knowledge and authority to review and approve changes.
• Provide the final approval for the change to be implemented.
• Approve the MOC for closure.
Note: Change approver cannot be a coordinator.

14.5. Types of change

14.5.1. Temporary Change
A change implemented with the intent that the change is applied for a fixed duration. Temporary
changes that remain in place after execution/implementation starts for longer than 6 months for
personnel change, and 3 months for any other change -unless top management decides otherwise-
should be subject to the full permanent change procedure (i.e., MOC). Temporary changes (including
removal, disabling, bypassing or modifying an emergency shutdown device or system or personal
changes) are included in the scope of the D&WO MOC process. The defeat or bypassing of such
devices for servicing only is not part of the MOC process. Rather, a local process should be
established for review, authorization and documentation of such activity.
After the 3 or 6 months’ time the change should be properly reviewed and either:
• Granted an extension, by maximum one month, can’t be repeated, while providing documented
justification.
• Be managed as a permanent change.
• Reverted to its original condition.
With due regard to the 3 or 6 months threshold, the basic intent is to ensure temporary changes
are restored to specifications at the earliest opportunity without need for extension.
A temporary change is subject to the same evaluation as a permanent change.
14.5.2. Permanent Change

A permanent change is one, which once implemented, is a permanent feature of the design,
organizational structure, operation or procedural control of drilling operations, associated site
infrastructure or supporting services
Changes that are not a replacement-in-kind and are permanent organizational changes and are
required to be assessed under the departments MOC process.
This change should be raised when the intention is for the change to remain for a period greater
than 3 or 6 months, where no further modification is required or planned.
14.5.3. Emergency Change

Any change that must be actioned immediately to maintain safe and environmentally sound
operations by correcting existing conditions that form an immediate danger to the health and
safety of personnel, potential for major equipment and/or property damage, potential for major
production loss, or serious environmental impact.
To be classified as an ‘Emergency Change’, the change must meet the following itemized criteria:
• The need for the change shall be urgent.
• The change shall be perceived, both by the initiator and the approver as not to otherwise
compromise safety/health of persons or protection of the environment or asset/equipment
damage.
• Must be authorized by the Department and Division Heads, the MOC Coordinator and the
Drilling Rig Foreman.
• The original set up shall be returned once the emergency situation is over.
If the change needs more time, it can be raised either on a temporary or permanent basis after
handling the initial emergency in hand, and ensuring safety of personnel, major equipment and/or
property, major production loss, and preventing environmental impact.
14.5.4. After emergency change

• Change request shall be approved by the PIC considering of all possible consequences of the
change and where applicable, consultation with requester and responsible HSE personnel.
• The “Emergency” though recorded in the Operator’s/Shift logbook shall however be routed
through the normal Change Assessment and Closeout process at the earliest opportunity.

• For Emergency changes implemented during ‘non-working hours’, this shall be upon
resumption of the following work day.
• The change request can be implemented by the PIC with the approval of only, however, it
will be valid for up to 24 hours, by which time it must be have been assessed and approved
following the due process.
• After the emergency ends, the change must be identified and evaluated according to the
actions taken.
14.6. MOC Procedure:

It consists of a six (6) step process as shown in the figure and listed below:
The following section describes in detail the Departments change management process.
14.6.1. Identify Change

14.6.1.1. Categorize Change
• Determine whether the change is replacement-in-kind or not.
• The basis for the change must also be captured (i.e., why or what is the need for the change)
according to 8 key categories: Safety, Environmental, Security, Compliance, Operational
– Production, Operational – Efficiency, CAPEX reduction and OPEX reduction. More than 1
category can be selected here as there may be multiple benefits of the change.
• It is expected that in the explanation section, detailed description shall be included, on how
the change will impact the category selected and any supporting information attached as
necessary.
• Provide justification for the change, identify the priority and describe the required change (i.e.,
description; justification; present situation; proposal and work scope). Identify stakeholders
affected by the change, and the type of impact, if any, i.e., QM-HSE, costs, etc.
14.6.1.2. Assign a Permanent or Temporary Category
Assign a permanent or temporary category to the change. The change can be either temporary or
permanent as per the definitions section 14.5.
14.6.1.3. Initiate MOC Request
Initiate the MOC request by discussing it with coordinator to assess the benefits and determine if it
is safe, filling in the MOC Change Request Form, attach any relevant documents.
14.6.1.4. Obtain Primary Approval
• The initiator and coordinator, perform a Primary Hazard Analysis for the proposed change. They
should review previous department MOC requests to see if there have been similar proposals
submitted and any lessons learned from these (accepted or rejected and the reasons why).
• They then determine if the MOC required escalation to the next management level based on

the risk assessment checklist in the Department’s MOC form.

Note: Approval of the Change Request is approval for further detailed engineering work to be
carried out to gain a better understanding of the task. It is not an approval for the work to be
implemented.
14.6.2. Initiate MOC Form

The Change Request Form needs to be filled in with the relevant information. The form must
contain the reasons for the change and a description of the benefits that this change could have and
any consequential changes should also be identified.
Attach all the change related documents that will clearly identify and describe the change purpose
and support the change, such as (but not limited to):
• Drawing/illustrations
• Data sheets
• Organization chart and position descriptions
• New procedure, etc.
• Investigation reports
• Vendor information
• Technical data for equipment
• Photographs
14.6.2.1. Submit Idea to the MOC Coordinator
• The Change Initiator completes and submits the Change Request Form along with the related
documents to the Department’s MOC Coordinator for review and further processing.
• The changes should be reviewed by the MOC Coordinator with the aim of determining if a
similar change has taken place before or if there are any conflicts. The MOC Coordinator has
the first opportunity to not only record the change but also review the basis of the change and
determine if it is suitable.
• Each MOC should be given a unique tracking number to allow it to be tracked to completion.
14.6.3. Review MOC Request
MOC is reviewed by the initiator presenting the idea to the Change Review Team, who decides
whether it needs to proceed to the design step.
14.6.3.1. Review Process for MOC
The Change Initiator presents the proposal to the Change Review Team.
The information should include:
• A description and purpose of the change. This should include the potential benefits for the
change.
• Technical basis for the change, i.e., safety, financial, environmental, etc.
• Impact upon health, safety and environmental (QM-HSE) considerations.
The CRT’s first review of the proposed MOC is to determine whether it should proceed from the
conceptual idea stage to planning and implementation.
The CRT review the basis of the proposed MOC to determine:
• The potential impact, and also dictate what types of risk assessments and studies may be
required.
• If the proposed change idea will achieve the intended benefit. A high level assessment of
whether the proposed change will provide the stated benefit, if the change can be done in
reality and if it can be sufficiently resourced.
• The Approver may take part in the CRT debates, to determine if they are also satisfied with this
change to take place.
• The proposed change should be agreed to proceed, the CRT may also assign the CIT and
provide direction as to the type of risk assessment or the type of engineering or feasibility study
required to be performed.
14.6.3.2. Document the MOC
The decision for whether to proceed with the change to the implementation stage needs to
be documented and recorded. The change request form should be updated after the review
is completed with the comments that the CRT recommends and approves to proceed to the
implementation stage.
If the idea is rejected, feedback should be provided to the Change Initiator for the reason of the
rejection.
MOC Implementation – The MOC is developed by the CIT to determine if a risk assessment or
other engineering studies are required. If so they undertake the risk assessment and required studies
and develop plans for the ideas implementation.
14.6.3.3. Determine Risk Assessments and Engineering Studies
All proposed changes should be assessed for risks. The risk assessment should identify the
hazards that have been created by the change and that may affect the management system, and the
corrective action(s) that need to be implemented to eliminate or reduce the risk.
The Implementation Team need to determine which type of risk assessments (e.g., PHA/ HAZOP
etc.) are suitable for the type of change being proposed while ensuring that all actions from the risk
assessments and engineering studies are addressed.
14.6.4. Develop Plans for Implementation

• The implementation team develops plans for execution, which must include the conclusions
from the risk assessments and engineering studies performed.
• The plans should be specific, measurable, achievable, and realistic and time bound (SMART).
• The implementation plan should also include a communication plan which includes (i.e.,
communication, awareness, training, etc.) as to who needs know the change and how this is
done.
14.6.5. Approve and Implement Change
CRT determines if the plan meets the original intent. The final authorization is given by the
Department Head/ approver to proceed.
14.6.5.1. Presentation of the Plan
CIT presents the plan to the CRT (including any options and outcomes from the risk assessment
and engineering studies performed) for approval.
The CRT must check that all recommendations from performed studies are completed and that a
plan is in place for follow up on recommendations that can only be completed during or after the
implementation. These recommendations still need verification that they are complete prior to the
close out of the MOC.
This is the final approval step by the CRT.
CIT prepares the following documentation as applicable prior to the meeting.
• Cost estimate.
• Detailed scope of work/procedure.
• Detailed schedule.
• Impact analysis.
• Manpower requirements.
• Communication plan (communication; awareness; training needs, etc.).
• Documentation updates.
14.6.5.2. Authorization to Proceed from the CRT
The CRT provides the authorization to proceed to implementation. This is on the basis that all
actions from risk assessments and other relevant studies are completed.
14.6.5.3. Authorization to Proceed from the Division Head/Approver

The Division Head may also be part of the CRT, but as the change affects their area they should be
the final approver to decide that the change can proceed. It is important that the Division Head signs
on to approve the change, as it is taking place in their area, and they will have the best situational
awareness regarding whether the change can take place safely.
14.6.5.4. Allocate Resources then Implement
Sufficient resources for the implementation of the change must be assigned to perform this to
completion.
Items to consider for the plan for change are as follows:
• Staff – qualification and allocation of responsibilities.
• Business issues – business interruption and reputation.
• Procedures – review, modify, and update where needed.
• Hazard information – communicate new workplace hazards.
• Training and communication – all affected personnel.
• Product documentation – update product documentation as appropriate.
• Asset or equipment data – revise all drawings and other pertinent data.
• Installation plan.
• Document updates – process safety information must be available and up to date prior to
commissioning.
• Commissioning procedures.
14.6.6. Document, Update and Close the MOC
Document, update, and close the MOC by checking that communication of the change is
completed, including any required training, all documents are updated, and it is confirmed that the
process has been completed, and the MOC is closed.
14.6.6.1. MOC Communication
• The change must be communicated to all affected personnel.
• Communication shall be performed through formal channels ( e-mail, official signed documents,
etc…) to keep records for documentation.
• Awareness and Training should be considered for all personnel affected by the change. The
training must provide sufficient detail to allow for personnel to interact with the change safely.
• The Change Implementation Team must coordinate with the Training Department to prepare
training material if additional training is required. Training matrixes and training records shall
also be updated.
• Competency and training requirements are determined by the MOC process/form.
14.6.7. Update all Documents
The Change Implementation Team must have all documentation updated and must inform the
MOC coordinator when this is complete.
Documents to update could be as follows:
• Drawings for equipment, etc.
• OEM certification and documentation including operating procedures.
• Inspection and maintenance records.
• Training matrix.
• Emergency response plans.
14.6.7.1. Confirmation of Completion
• Once the verification is complete, the MOC coordinator can recommend to the Department
Head/ approver that the MOC should be closed.
• The MOC cannot be closed out until all items and recommendations previously identified have
been completed and all documents are up to date.
14.6.7.2. MOC Closure

Once confirmation that the change is complete the Department Head approves the MOC closure
and records should be kept for reference purposes.
14.6.7.3. MOC Status
There are 3 statuses that a change can be in at the closeout phase to be tracked in the MOC
register:
• Executed – This indicates that the change was approved at the assessment phase and has been
fully engineered and implemented
• Cancelled – This indicates that the change has been approved at the assessment phase
however, has been cancelled for other reasons. Details of the justification for cancelling the
change shall be attached to the Closeout documents.
• Rejected – This indicates that the change has been rejected at the Change Assessment phase.
Details of the justification for rejecting the change shall be attached to the Change Closeout
document.
14.7. MOC Evaluation

• The effectiveness of MOC shall be evaluated during the annual internal audit of every
department.
• QMS sections shall prepare a tracking document for MOC stages status.
14.7.7.1. Tracking and Document Numbering
All MOC forms and documents shall be submitted to the document control team for record-
keeping for MOC 10 years
The MOC proposal shall be registered with a definite identifying number. Each MOC shall be
designated a unique number utilizing the following numbering system to maintain uniformity.
14.8. Guidance on Applying MOC Scope

14.8.1. Changes Requiring Use of Formal MOC Process
14.8.1.1. Changes to process safety system design, function or information.
• Instrumentation - if changing device range, multiplier, measuring unit, or resetting alarm
set points, such as changing a PSHL, LSHL, or PSV if outside the current operating range or
changing equipment trip set points.
• Permanent by-passing of any safety system device. (Temporary bypassing of safety systems for
routine testing, maintenance, or start-up purposes is excluded; but to be recorded as per Permit
to Work Procedure.)
• Changes to any other safety critical equipment, including equipment trip settings.
14.8.1.2. Construction of new production or process facilities or new projects tied into
existing facilities.
• Modification of existing facilities / process, whether temporary or permanent, including
changes to plant lay-out, materials of construction, their specifications, etc.
• Enhancement of plant capacity beyond the design and what has already been evaluated.
• Changes in operating conditions that could cause equipment or systems to be operated beyond
their rated capacities (pressure, temperature, flow rate, etc.), created by:
• Newly drilled well
• Re-completed well
• Well work-over
• Increased flow from adjoining facility
• Change in composition of flow from adjoining facility.
14.8.1.3. Equipment changes / modifications that cause changes to pressure relief

requirements.
• Any changes to Safety Critical Equipment (SCE) such as Fire & Gas Detection Systems,
Emergency Shutdown Systems, PSV’s etc.
• By-pass connections around equipment normally in service or removing equipment from
service.
• Changes to emergency response equipment, fire-fighting services; deluges, monitors and
pumps etc.
14.8.1.4. Operations outside the scope of current procedures.
• Operation outside the safe operating envelope, i.e., operation outside the safe upper and lower
limits of key parameters such as flow rate, pressure, temperature, level and composition.
• Introduction of new or different process chemicals (where composition, function, or reaction is
changed)
14.8.1.5. Equipment changes (general)
• Valves - of style, material, pressure rating, size, packing, seals.
• Piping and flanges - of size, schedule, material, flange rating, facing, or gasket type. Pumps and
compressors - of materials (including internals), flange size, rating, capacity, head, or type of
seal.
• Drivers - of horsepower rating, motor electrical rating classification, or lubrication system
change.
• Vessels/tanks - of nozzles, service or configuration, Maximum Allowable Working Pressure, or
relief capacity or welding on shell, head, or walls.
• Permanent removal from service - of pumps, compressors, vessels or tanks.
14.8.1.6. Operational Procedures
Procedural changes, operational software, computer or Program Logic Controller control scheme,
or resetting control parameters outside of normal high or low limits and other technical changes
that deviate for the design intent, including process control and emergency shutdown software/
programs.
14.8.1.7. Process Chemicals
New chemicals or additives or new catalysts
14.8.1.8. IT Changes
A change is any scheduled addition, deletion or modification to any component or services of the
IT hardware and software infrastructure, excluding like for like changes.
14.8.1.9. Maintenance
In-service welding on live equipment, or changes to standard welding procedures on vessels or
other certified equipment.
14.8.2. Examples of Changes requiring MOC

A Management of Change form should be completed for those changes satisfying or exceeding
the following criteria;
• Any change to the design basis or detailed design specifications,
• Any change that significantly changes the design function, design configuration, or operation of
the system,
• Any design changes to a mechanical control, operating, or shutdown system after it has been
through a HAZOP study and approved,
• Any change in the trip set point of equipment protection device,
• Any change that affects another related area of responsibility (an interface issue),
• Any change to the structural, mechanical, electrical, instrument, or other “approved for
construction” drawings or specifications that has a significant impact,
• Any change that has an impact from a health or safety standpoint,
• Any change that affects the regulatory status or environmental impact (e.g., emissions, waste

disposal, consumption, and efficiency).

14.8.3. Examples of Changes in Well Operations
Well operations are subject to continual change to do the following;
• Increase efficiency,
• Improve productivity and safety,
• Reduce environmental impacts and
• Improve HSE performance.
Any of these changes can introduce new hazards or compromise the safeguards built into the
original design.
A change in well operations occurs whenever equipment or services are replaced or added. It may
also occur as a result of differences between predicted and actual geological conditions. Typical
instances in which MOC would be needed include, but are not limited to, the following;
• Major drilling changes,
• Modification of existing wellhead equipment,
• Pore pressure, fracture gradient significantly higher or lower than predicted, and changes to
PDDP Worksheet,
Note: “Significant” is defined as that could reasonably require a change to the well casing
program, affect the ability to control a well kick, require a change in pressure rating of equipment, or
a change in produced fluid type and corrosion concerns, etc.
• Changes to the AFE Scope Summary, such as changes in Well objectives, Drilling deeper and
Side-tracks,
• Introduction of new or different chemicals (chemical substitution) and
• Equipment failures to critical equipment requiring change to standard operating practice or
policy
14.8.4. Examples of “Like For Like” (LFL) Changes
LFL which includes changes that use the same size, material, style, type, range, chemicals, control,
operation, procedure, etc., do not require an MOC. Examples of LFL are as follows;
14.8.4.1. Valves
Replacement of existing valves with valves of same design capabilities (e.g., pressure rating,
materials of construction, nominal size, style, and flange facing),
14.8.4.2. Piping and flanges
Replacement piping and flanges must have matching nominal size and bore with the piping and
flanges being removed. The manufacturer may differ but the weight, schedule (wall thickness),
flange rating, facing and materials of construction must be the same
14.8.4.3. Pumps and compressors
replacement must match the existing equipment in pumping capacity, materials of construction,
seal type, suction and discharge rating and flow rate and must also have same environmental
standards (e.g., emissions and lubricants),
14.8.4.4. Electrical
replacement of a breaker or fuse with one of the same rating, replacement of wiring with same
gauge and current carrying rating, or replacement of insulation
14.8.4.5. Electric motors
Replacement must have matching materials, horsepower, efficiency, voltage rating, RPM, and
frame size and type,
14.8.4.6. Instrumentation/safety systems

new control valve with no change in design capabilities or materials of construction, adjusting
operational set points within established operating range, or routine testing and maintenance of
safety devices and alarms,
14.8.4.7. Chemicals
Changing the recommended concentration of a chemical additive, within established limits or
product name change without alteration to composition,
14.8.4.8. Operations
variations in operating parameters (flow, pressure, and temperature) that are within the design
limits as described in current standard operating procedures and
14.8.4.9. Inspection & Maintenance
Changes to schedules and scopes that are within written risk based policies.
Note: Hot taps and stopples on pipelines are covered by Operations and Maintenance procedures
and do not require an MOC. The reason the hot tap/stopple was needed may well require an MOC
but not the hot tap/stopple itself when restricted to pipelines and pipe work. However, satisfactory
risk assessment has to be carried out to manage all risks during the hot-tapping/plugging
operation.

A15. Deviation Permits

A.15. Deviation Permits
15.1. Scope
This procedure applies to all departments within D&WO; including EGPC facilities, Contractors,
and Service Companies.
• Deviation permits are for a specific time frame and shall not exceed 24 hours in duration.
• In case the Deviation Permit exceeds 24 hours, a new risk assessment along with senior
management approval are required.
15.2. Purpose
The purpose of this procedure is to ensure all deviations from requirements specified in the
contract or documented policies and procedures is assessed and approved by an authorized person
for a specific period.
EGPC Risk Management shall be utilized to determine the potential severity and/or consequence
of the incident or potential incident.
When determining the risk associated with any planned deviation, it is the potential likelihood and
severity of the incident that may result as a consequence of that deviation that must be assessed for
risk.
“Changes” to process technology, chemicals, equipment, procedures, facilities, buildings,
personnel, contracts, and/or organizations shall be by EGPC Management of Change procedure.
15.3. Definitions
15.3.1. Authorized Person:
A person who is charged with the authority to control all aspects of the activity concerned and who
holds the information required to determine the consequences of the deviation.
15.3.2. Deviation Permit:

A written authorization to depart from specified requirements for a specified time.
15.3.3. Deviation permit time period:

It is the duration through which the deviation is valid and cannot be used after this period without
escalated approvals
The Concerned Manager of each department of a drilling contractor and service provider is overall
responsible for the implementation of this procedure.
15.4.1. Deviation Permit Initiator

• Responsible for identifying a need for deviation.
• Describes and/or documents the proposed deviation and communicates it to the approver.
• Performs the required risk assessment and identifies proper controls to reduce the risk to as
low as reasonably practicable (ALARP).
• Fill After Action Review.
15.4.2. Deviation Permit Approver
The concerned department/ the process owner: is responsible for assuring that the deviation risk
is as low as reasonably practicable.
15.4.3. Deviation Permit focal point

A group responsible for providing recommendations, monitoring, and verifying the deviation
permit during the whole processes. Also is responsible for logging, tracking, following up on all the
deviation permits regularly.

A.15. Deviation Permits
15.5. Procedure
15.5.1. Initiation of a Deviation permit
• To request approval to deviate, the initiator shall initiate a Deviation permit request.
• To assist in expediting the Deviation Permit review, attach all supporting documentation
(Example; Formal Risk Assessment).
• The Deviation Permit request justification shall include a discussion of the impact of approving
the deviation.
• Document and support cost benefits or penalties by addressing the following items but not
limited to:
- Decrease in safety or reliability.
- Adverse environmental impact.
• The Deviation Permit request shall always identify and analyze other alternatives to deviate.
15.5.2. Deviation Request Submittal and Logging
• Submit a Deviation Permit request and all supporting documentation to Operations and HSE
Heads.
• The Deviation Permit request shall be assigned a tracking number and routed to the
appropriate subject matter expert within the organization to analyze the request and
recommend disposition.
15.5.3. Deviation permit Request Analysis and Conditions of Approval
• The Operations and HSE heads shall be assigned the task of review and analysis of the
deviation request.
• If the review determines that the Deviation Permit request is not required, due to
misinterpretation or misapplication, it shall be returned to the Deviation Permit Originator with
an explanation.
• If the review and analysis determines that the deviation request is not supported and should be
rejected, it shall be returned to the Originator with a documented explanation of the rejection.
• If the review and analysis determines that the deviation request should be supported
and approved, then the analysis shall be documented. If the Operations and HSE heads
have identified specific factors or concerns, these shall also be included in the analysis
documentation. If there are conditions associated with the approval of the deviation request,
the Deviation Permit requester shall insert them.
15.5.4. Waiver/Deviation Request Approval:
• The deviation request is approved by obtaining signatures from the Department Manager(s),
Operations Manager, HSE managers, and managers of the proponent department affected by
deviation from the requirement and the QHSE department.
• Approval to deviation shall be approved to minimize cost and schedule impacts, new projects
are encouraged to obtain a deviation permit request approval during Project Proposal
development.
15.5.5. Waiver Request Rejection and Appeal
• The requester shall accept the rejection recommendation or resolve the issue with Operations
and HSE heads.
• If the requester disagrees with the rejection decision, he shall submit a documented appeal for
reconsideration to the company Chairman. The final authority to approve or reject shall rest with
the company Chairman.

A16. Rig Move Requirements

A.16. Rig Move Requirements
16.1. Scope
Ensure safe rig move for all drilling and workover operations and provide Guidelines for all
concerned personnel/departments who supervise the rig move.
16.2. Purpose
The purpose of this document is to provide a specific plan of action for personnel working on the
Rigs when conducting the rig transportation, This document provides the general safety rules and
guidelines for rig move operations, each specific task required to safely perform the specific job
steps involved in performing the rig move operation must have a rig specific Job Safety Analysis
(JSA) available at the rig site and must be reviewed by the supervisor in charge prior to the start of
each task in a Safety Meeting , to ensure that all personnel involved in the task understand their
roles and responsibilities to perform the task in a safe and efficient manner
Also this document applies to all rig-contractor personnel employed at the rig and third party
contractors, during the rig move activity, it also applies to personnel who are hired specifically for
this purpose. The responsibilities include proper planning for rig move, assessing and arranging
the available resources for various jobs, coordinating with the Rig Operators HSE department and
assigning specific chores to key personnel is the rig contractor main responsibility.
16.3.1. Rig contractors PIC responsibilities
• Give clear safety instructions to all personnel performing the rig move.
• Oversee the entire rig move operations and coordination with the rig operators drilling
supervisor.
• shall ensure that loading/moving/off-loading the critical lifts, such as Rig sub-base and mast
will be under the close Supervision of the tool pusher and truck pusher (no delegation is
acceptable) and shall be conducted as per OEM plan and procedure or approved lifting plan by
rig operators drilling and HSE department
• Ensure that a “Lifting Plan” is prepared and approved for each critical lift. This operation must
be conducted under close supervision from both the Rig contractors Move Supervisor and
lifting engineer and rig operators appointed lifting engineer
• Ensure all wide loads are moved in a convoy with a lead escort vehicle and a follow escort
vehicle. Escort vehicles shall equipped with rotary beacon lights.
• Conduct and document daily safety meeting at the beginning of each day of the rig move with
all drivers, Rig Operators drilling supervisor, Contractor drivers, rig contractors truck pusher and
rig contractors HSE engineer to discuss all safety aspects and lessons learned from previous rig
moves also to emphasize safety during the rig move.
• Ensure all rig move equipment (winch trucks, trailers, prime movers, loader forklifts and cranes)
and their operators are in good working order, certified and meet Rig operators and EGPC
specifications and Asset Integrity Standards.
• Ensure that two escort trucks pushers vehicles for each convoy contain up to 6 trucks and three
escort truck pusher vehicles for convoy contain more than 6 trucks
• Ensure that the total number of rigs move trucks per each convoy do not exceeding 15 trucks
• Ensure full arrangement with rig operators security representative before any convoy
movement
• Make sure that the assigned truck pusher is competent to perform the work and has good work
experience
• Ensure that the move permit was issued before starting rig move
• Ensure that the black road check points is notified “ if applicable”
• Ensure that all Trucks head lights are switched on whenever travelling.

16.3.2. Truck pusher responsibilities

• Provide full support to the rig contractors PIC and rig management as needed.
• Ensure safe driving at all rig move stages through close supervision of drivers.
• Enforce high truck utilization and distribute work evenly among drivers.
• Escort the loaded truck/trailer in-group between old and new location following the Rig Move
route map
• Ensure that traffic is allowed to get around wide loads whenever possible by pulling off to the
side of the road at the specific points identified in the rig move route map.
• Ensure that none of the drivers leave the old location without his permission.
• Contact the road services mechanic for any truck/trailer break down.
• All trucks that contain wide load shall adhere to the approved rig route (No deviations from
approved rig routes are allowed). All trucks that don’t have any wide load can utilize any road/
route after approval from the Rig operator’s security, Drilling and HSE departments.
• Make sure that two escort truck pusher vehicles are presents for convoy contain up to 6 trucks
and three escort truck pusher vehicles for convoy contain more than 6 trucks
• Make sure that by any mean the total number of trucks per each convoy do not be more than 15
trucks
• Make sure spacing between travelling trucks is at least 45 meter
• Two convoy leaders should be present during each rig moves.
16.3.2.1. Rig Operators drilling supervisors
• Shall obtain the rig move route map from rig contractors PIC and contractor HSE engineer at
least 10 days prior to the drilling rig move and no less than 2 days prior to the work over rig
move and 1 day prior to the pulling unit move
• Must make sure that the move map shall show all move needed information
• Arrange the TBT (tool box talk) with the rig contractors PIC” tool pusher”, truck pusher,
contractor HSE engineer to discuss rig move plan and route survey and responsibility prior the
pre-move meeting
• Ensure No moves are allowed in foggy, rainy and dusty weather where visibility is less than 100
m. It is the rig operators PIC “drilling supervisor” responsibility to ensure that there is adequate
visibility for the move
• Rig Operators drilling supervisor, truck pusher and the contractor HSE engineer & Rig operators
HSE engineer and production engineer ensure that all overhead cables are to be approached
with caution. The rig move has to stop, and then proceed slowly under the cable, to avoid any
excessive movement of the rig suspension.
• If the decision to cut power from the overhead is taken the rig operators PIC shall take the
necessary steps with the concerned department and production departments to cut the power
and pass safety under the overhead
• Conduct daily rig move meeting with the tool pusher, the truck pusher and HSE assigned
personal to drilling
• Alert all field departments/and concerned parties about the rig move & make sure security
gates are closed before moving
• In the deserts concessions rig operators PIC shall make sure that the security gates are closed
before each convoy moving
• In the agriculture concessions rig operators PIC shall make sure that the governmental
authorities and check points were notified
• Ensure that the move permit is issued before any move
• Ensure that TBT be conducted & review move plan package presented by tool pusher.
• Ensure that lowboy trucks equipped with ramp arm mechanism are not included in the move
trucks as it is forbidden to use within petroleum sector
• Perform all the task assigned to him as per rig operators assigned responsibility

16.3.3. Rig Superintendent

• Responsible for the preparation for the Rig Move, for:
- Coordinating the Rig Move with the Operator.
- Approving the final Rig Move Plan.
- Coordinating with the Senior Tool pusher to make sure that personnel and equipment are in
place.
- Coordinating the requirements for transport units with the Transportation Section.
- Making sure that all relevant matters are attended to in a timely and cost-efficient manner.
16.3.4. Transportation Superintended (Rig Move)
• Ensure that all required rig move equipment’s are available according to the rig move plan.
• Ensure that all rig moves plans are completed and reviewed by the concerned rig STP and
superintended.
• Ensure that the estimated rig move cost is within the agreed –up on budget
16.3.5. Rig Contractors maintenance team
16.3.5.1. Senior Mechanic
• Shall fulfill his job description during the Rig Move activities and not limited to:
- Be responsible for securing and protecting all mechanical equipment from damage during the
rig mobilization.
- Performing the carrier checklist & mast raising/lowering checklist.
- Inspect all Rig Move transport equipment upon arrival at the location and report the rejected
points to the PIC immediately.
- Participate in the daily rig move meetings and coordinate rig up and maintenance plan with
the rig STP.
- Coordinate and plan ahead with the rig superintendent for the required spare parts needed
for any maintenance or overhauling which will be carried out while the rig move operations.
- Follow the rig move plan as per STP instructions.
- Shall insure that all planned/outstanding maintenance on PMS was done during rig move.
16.3.5.2. Senior Electrician
• Be responsible for securing and protecting all electrical equipment from damage during the rig
mobilization.
• Be responsible Rig down and rig up all electrical equipment in safe manner.
• Ensure that the grounding system shall be the last system removed at rig down and reverse the
process at the power up.
• Participate in the daily rig move meetings and coordinate rig up and maintenance plan with the
rig STP.
• Coordinate and plan ahead with the rig superintendent for the required spare parts needed for
any maintenance or overhauling which will be carried out while the rig move operations.
• Follow the rig move plan as per STP instructions.
• Shall insure that all planned/outstanding maintenance on PMS was done during rig move.
16.3.6. Rig contractors radio operator
Perform all the task assigned to him as per responsibility check list and to be included in the Move
permit.
16.3.7. Rig contractor’s HSE

• Ensure proper handling and filing of all HSE-related documents as he acts as HSE Document
Controller.
• Ensure the preparation of all the necessary PTW, safe job analyses, and also the required lifting
plan.

• Participate in holding safety and morning meetings for the rig move crews to emphasize the
work to be done.
• Participate in rig move equipment inspection and report the finding to PIC.
• Ensure that all Drivers and Operators understand the task at hand.
• Assist Supervisors in holding Pre-Tour Safety Meetings with all involved personnel.
• Report and investigate all incidents that may occur during the Rig Move.
• Ensure the implementation of drops inspection prior to the rig down/rig up.
• Prepare all required fall protection equipment needed for the rig move operations and make
sure it is being used by the crew properly. It is recommended to refer to the rig specific fall
protection plan.
• Validate that the rig STP and truck pusher sign off for approving all the loaded trucks before
departing from the old location.
• Review the third party blacklist.
• Make sure all safety equipment’s are in position as per safety equipment layouts.
• Prepare with help of the rig STP the rig specific emergency response plan for the current new
well.
• Ensure all personnel wear Personal Protective Equipment (PPE).
16.3.8. Rig operators HSE assigned engineer
• Make sure the HSE representative is presence in the move route survey in a timely manner
- Participate in the pre-move meeting with the rig operators Drilling supervisor and production
engineer
- Take a close look and discuss all the JSA and work permit done by the contractor
- Make sure the responsibility checklist is discussed in the meeting.
- Oversee all the inspection reports of all lifting equipment and lifting tools
- Make sure that truck load survey sheet is filled correctly
- Ensure that lowboy trucks equipped with ramp arm mechanism are not included in the move
trucks as it is forbidden to use within petroleum sector
16.3.9. Rig Operators Production Department PIC
• Make sure the production representative is presence in the move route survey in a timely
manner
• Attend the pre move meeting with the rig operators drilling supervisor and drilling HSE
engineer
• Make sure that all the ramps (if needed) meet the production and projects departments
requirement
• Witness the crossing of any pipeline
• In desert concessions he shall make sure that the overhead height is correct in the route survey
and in the truck survey sheet.
16.3.10. Rig Operators Security Representative
• Attend the route survey
• make sure security gates are closed before moving
• Perform all the task assigned to him as per responsibility check list to be included in the move
permit documents
16.4. Requirements
Every Rig contractor shall have a rig specific documented procedures for their move/
transportation which shall cover the following at minimum:
• Rig specifications such as
- Type of rig (i.e. Drilling, Workover, Offshore)
- Rig HP (i.e. 2000HP)
- Rated drilling depth
- Manufacturer, Year built
- No. of rig move loads

- Drilling equipment
- Mast height
- Top drive/Kelly
- No. of mud pumps and its type
- Power supply equipment
- No. of main power supply
- No. of emergency power supply
- Well control equipment (No. of BOP rams and its types)
- Down hole equipment (i.e. Drill pipe , Drill collar)
- Storage facilities
- Liquid Mud (i.e. 2000 BBL)
- Drill water (i.e. 2000 BBL)
- Fuel at rig site and main camp ( I.e. 2000 BBL)
- Fresh water at rig site and main camp ( I.e. 2000 BBL)
• Roles and Responsibilities
• Rig Move procedures
- Raising and lowering the mast procedures
- Loading and offloading procedures
• Rig move picture book
- The rig move picture book provides all of the necessary data for each load in the rig that is
lifted during the rig move, as seen in the example below.
16.5. Procedures
16.5.1. Planning and sequence of operation
In order to maintain regularity and standardization of operation during the planning of the operation,
it is recommended to follow the planning and sequence of operation as outlined below.
The planning and sequence of operations have been divided into the following 14 steps:

Actions
Pre-move Route survey and obstructions identification, road hazards identification
Preparation Pre-move meeting
Pre-move loads (Non critical load)
Critical loads
Rig Move Approval Procedure
Line of responsibility & Job Descriptions
Risk Assessment & Job safety analysis
Rig move plan
Permit to work (move)
Precaution to be taken Rig release
Execution Rig move
Rig move truck type
Transportation Incidents Emergency Response Plan (ERP)
Reporting Post Rig Move report
16.5.2. Rig Move Route survey and Hazards Identification

The route survey committee shall include Rig contractor Tool pusher, truck pusher and HSE with rig
operator’s security, HSE & production representatives,
They must carefully check the condition of rig move route the following items must be checked in
the preliminary rig move route map:
• Obstructions (low overhead power lines, etc.)
• Road hazards (gates, condition of roads, etc.)
• Emergency safety services along the rig move route in case of emergency traffic or within an
agriculture areas such as ambulance, fire truck etc.. at least 2 points per each road
• Nearest ambulance position in case of emergency
• Any ramp needed and if yes state the type of the ramp
• Are there any soft sands in route?
• Is the rig move route a company/army/public other company road?
• Is there any areas that should be prepared or adapted for the rig move?
• Is there any area without network coverage if yes? Where?
• Is there any other rig move occurs at the same time?
Rig Operators drilling supervisor shall obtain the Rig Move Preliminary Route map along with the
route survey sheet from survey committee not less than 10 days prior to drilling Rig Move and not
less than 2 days prior to work-over rig move to be able to arrange and conduct Pre-move meeting
excluding pulling unit.
Rig contractor tool pusher will provide a copy of the preliminary Route map along with the
route survey to rig operator’s security, HSE, Production representative, prior conducting Pre-move
meeting
Rig operators drilling supervisor, contractor HSE engineer, Tool pusher and Truck Pusher shall hold
a tool box talk prior to the Pre-move meeting, the minutes of this meeting shall be documented on a
specific Meeting Form and should be signed off. This meeting will include, but not be limited to the
following topics:
• load out sequence
• Additional equipment needed for the move (i.e. – lifting equipment and their corresponding lift
plans).

• Lessons learned from the last rig move.

• Any special inspections (i.e. – derrick) or repairs to be completed before next rig up.
• Precautions of the Green hand employees (short service employees) with limited experience
which may require additional supervision or other extra precautions.
• Number of Required trucks, three escort vehicles.
• All vehicles shall be in good operating conditions.
• personnel responsibilities
• Number of loads and will it be on one convey or two
• Forklifts and crane operations safety precautions
• Rig move convoy shall contain Min. of 2 trucks and maximum of 15 trucks
• drug test to drivers if needed
All concerned Departments from Rig Operators and contractors shall accept the route survey after
ensure that it is the safest route to the new locations
Pre-move meeting shall be conducted in the rig site not less than two weeks before drilling rig
release and One day before work over rig release
16.5.3. Pre-move meeting

A combined Pre-move meeting between (Rig operators HSE, drilling supervisor, production,
security, and rig contractor’s management) shall be conducted. This meeting shall include
Discussion of:
• Rig move responsibilities,
• Rig Move Route for Pre-Move Loads
• If The Same Route Apply for The Critical Load or will make another route for critical loads,
• The Wide loads move procedures,
• Confirm that Risk assessment and job safety analysis for all rig move activities were issued
• Communication
• Potential hazardous that could be encountered and how to avoid them.
• Previous rig move incident lessons learned
• Dealing with Public and public roads and sensitive agriculture areas “ if any “
Note:
- Rig operator and Rig contractors PICs shall make sure to break the job down into basic steps.
A balance needs to be struck between making the steps too general, resulting in missing
specific steps and their associated hazards, and too detailed, leading to excessive steps.
- It is recommended that each job instruction should be limited to a maximum of 5 steps. If
more than 5 instructional steps are required, it is usually better to break the job instructions
into multiple jobs.
16.5.4. Pre-move loads (non-critical load)
Rig loads, which can be moved at any convenient time, can also move during the rig move. Usually,
those non-essential pieces of equipment that can be rearranged in a rig move plan in order to
expedite the Rig Move process “if applicable “and after get official written approval from the rig
Operators HSE, security and Drilling department this load will be moved under the name of (Free
Runners), the load does not exceed any of the following dimensions.
• Height: Truck with load is low with +3.2 meter between any overhead obstructions identified
along the route.
• Width: Whole truck/car (width) do not exceed one lane of the road and the load does not
exceed the width of the truck (No wide load permitted).
• Length: No overhangs the rear, no front overhangs
• Speed: All vehicles speed shall cope with rig operator speed limits
All rig move Drivers must have been briefed as to the correct routes, and supported by a copy of
the Route Survey and must adhere to that route with NO deviations / Violations or stoppage under
no circumstances unless obtaining permission for that in writing by the rig operators security, HSE
and drilling departments

Note:
Loads which are out of dimensions due to height or length (all wide loads) must be considered as
critical move. All wide loads must form part of a rig move convoy.
16.5.5. Rig Move Approval Procedure

• Rig Operators shall Create a specific move permit including but not limited to the following:
• Rig Move Description and approval authorities including HSE, Drilling, Production, security and
Area authority
• Route survey sheet “Route map “
• Pre-move meeting report form
• Personal responsibility check list
• Rig Move safety equipment checklist
• Rig Maintenance team checklist
• Rig HSE team checklist
• Rig Radio operators checklist
If the rig operators has more than concession and the move will take place between two different
concessions the following should sign the rig move permit:
• Rig operators shall assign HSE, production, security Destination location Representative and
Arrival HSE, production, security Arrival Location Representative
All above mentioned representative shall present in the Pre-move meeting in rig site.
Note
- After Rig Contractors performing risk assessment on moving with wide loads on blacktop,
agriculture or desert roads and all rig up/down operations
- Rig Operators HSE General manager & Operation general manager shall approve wide load
move in written before starting the wide loads move by email or other written equivalent
method.
- In case of pipe crossing ramp required for both oil pipeline and underground gas pipeline,
the ramp shall be constructed after consulting rig operators projects department. Line of
responsibility & job description.
16.5.6. Pre move general instructions
• The operator/rig operators informs the rig STP with the new location coordinates.
• The concerned rig STP obtains the necessary approvals from the operator.
• STP to issue the rig operators’s rig move documents
• The rig management requests a truck pusher to assist in surveying the route to the new
location, if needed as per route survey checklist.
• STP to conduct the Route survey accompanied by the Truck Pusher.
• The new location is to be approved by the rig STP to fulfill Rig contractor minimum
requirements for building locations mentioned in the relevant rig move manual.
• The rig STP and truck pusher prepare the rig move plan to be sent to the rig superintendent and
transportation rig move section for review.
• The reviewed rig move plan is to be presented to operations management and top
management for approval (Less time and more bonus).
• Estimate rig move time is based on distances, number of loads, etc.
• The rig move section checks if any traffic permits are needed for the rig move.
• The rig STP orders, prior to the rig move, the sufficient diesel quantity to be consumed during
the rig move operation, as per the rig contract.
• The STP ensures/delegates another person to ensure that all transportation rig move
equipment are inspected as per Rig contractor checklist to assure compliance with company
standards.
• The STP/rig safety engineer prepares all the necessary safe job analysis and risk assessments
for the critical lifting operations.

16.5.7. Overhead Line Clearance

Where there are OHL crossing the intended route, the following must be noted and reported by
the rig operators’ representatives during Route Survey:
• The location
• Height of line
• Sagging of the line
All overhead cables are to be approached with caution. Each truck has to stop then proceed slowly
under the cables to avoid any excessive movement of the Truck suspension, it is the responsibility
of rig contractors truck pusher, tool pusher and HSE engineer to finally determine if the rig can pass
safely under overhead cables, as outlined in the below table:
Line voltage Absolute limit of approach
34.5 1.53 meters (5 feet)
69 1.7 meters (5 feet 7 inches)
380 3.65 meters (12 feet)
16.5.8. Rig move Permit
Rig move permit will be required prior to commencing the rig move operations. The new rig move
permit “blanked form” will be provided by the rig operators to the rig contractors PIC and should be
available at the Rig contractor HSE and tool pusher offices and rig operators PIC “Drilling supervisor
“on location, the Rig contractor PIC who is the person responsible to initiate the rig move permit
16.5.9. Work permit validity

The maximum validity period for a rig move permit will be determined according to the number of
convoys required to transport a rig, 10 days’ shift maximum and must be written at the permit.
For any work not completed by 10 days, the permit is to be cancelled and a new permit shall be
issued. In issuing the new Permit the Authorized Signatories will check for changes to the work
scope and consider the effects any new or existing hazards may have on the work.
Work Permits are automatically suspended in the event of an Emergency or Emergency Exercise.
In this case all work shall cease and persons proceed as per the site Emergency Procedure. Move
Permit shall be reissued by the Authorized Signatories signing.
16.5.10. Rig move procedures

Precautions to be taken before Rig release & during Rig move shall be PPE, SJA, Communication
and supervision, as covered in this manual.
• The rig STP and truck pusher hold safety and morning meetings for the rig crews and move
crews to emphasize the work to be done.
• The truck pusher checks and approves all the loaded trucks departing from the old location.
• The rig STP and truck pusher sign off for approving all the loaded trucks before departing from
the old location.
• The rig materials man/STP prepares a packing slip for all the involved rig move trucks in case of
long rig moves. Three slip copies are to be distributed as follows:
- One copy to be kept in the rig files.
- One copy to be handed to the truck company.
- One copy to be sent to the rig contractor’s transportation department.
• The rig STP delegates a competent person to acknowledge receipt of the items mentioned in
the packing slip at the new location, in the same condition as before being loaded.
• Rig move operations are conducted during day light only, without any excuse.
• The truck pusher prepares a rig move report with all the transportation rig move equipment

involved on the rig move.

16.5.10.1. Lifting Operations
Load Positioning
• The second most important task after loading is to secure the loads on the trucks; inadequate
load securing can result in severe damage to loads, leading to time delays and additional costs.
The main purpose of load securing is to ensure that the load remains in its intended position, is
neither self-damaging nor damaging to other loads.
• This normally happens by securing the loads to tie-down lashings which are visually inspected
before securing loads to them, also the truck’s anchoring points are to be visually inspected
before being used.
• If the load is correctly restrained, it will never shift for fall off or move in all expected driving
conditions, including a full braking stop. Drivers should travel slower when cornering and on
rough roads as increasing the speed will increase the forces that cause the load to shift.
• It doesn’t matter how heavy or big the load is, when truck brakes, accelerates, changes
direction or travels over rough road surfaces, forces are generated which are far greater than
the friction between the load and the truck bed. If the load is not secured properly, it will move
or fall.
• Liquid filled tanks shall be loaded on the low boys instead of 3-Axle trailers and a minimum two
securing chains as a lashing method fixed to the low boy chassis shall be used;
• Tanks filling shall be less than 20% of its capacity or more than 80% of its capacity. (<20% or
>80%).
• The overall height of the loaded truck must not exceed 7 meters.
• The load must be positioned to maintain adequate stability and not to overload tires and axles.
• The load is positioned so that its center of mass is as low as possible and no offset to one side
of the vehicle to reduce the truck tendency to overturn when cornering.
• Loads are being placed on truck such that heavier loads to be placed behind lighter loads.
•
Load Restraining
Loads must be restrained to prevent unacceptable movement during all expected road
conditions.
The load restrain system must, therefore, satisfy the following requirements:
• Any load movement is to be limited, such that in all cases where movement occurs, the truck
stability and weight distribution cannot be affected.
• The weight of the load alone cannot provide enough friction to restrain it during normal driving,
additional restraint must be used.
• The load is only considered to be secured, if the adequate restraining devices (chains, webbing
belts, chocks, netting, twist locks etc.) are installed.
• Checker plate steel beds are just as smooth as flat steel beds. Loading directly onto steel beds
is to be avoided and wooden strips are to be used to prevent steel to steel contact.
• Wooden strips are placed at lashing positions and if loads are multilayer, the upper rows of
wooden straps are placed directly above the bottom ones.
• Never use ropes in securing loads as they are extremely ineffective for restraining loads
because of their very low amount of tension regardless how tight it looks.
• Lashings shall be one of three types of material:
- Steel chain 13 mm (1/2 inch) in thickness with grab, winged or claw hooks is preferable to use
- Steel Chains should be 10mm (3/8”), Grade 70 Transport Chain but more lasing will be needed
- Webbing straps of 50 mm width or greater.
• Steel chain shall not be used to restrain steel pipes or tubular - webbing straps shall be used.
• Lashings shall be attached to the lashing points on vehicles and equipment to provide adequate
restraint and prevent damaging the equipment.
• In cases where no lashing point on the equipment is available, the equipment shall be
restrained at a point that will not move during transport with respect to the lashing

During the journey, some loads can move, shift or lashings can loosen and objects can fall off
accordingly. The driver periodically checks the loads and lashings during the journey and after
emergency/severe backing, to ensure that the load does not fall off.
Recommended checking distance interval is 50 KM for black road and 25 KM for rough roads the
driver shall stop the vehicle in a safe place to inspect the load.
Steel Chains
For loads requiring steel chains for restraint purposes:
• chains shall of 13 mm (1/2 inch) in thickness, is preferred but the usage of 10 mm (3/8 inch) in
thickness is acceptable as long the number of chains with respect to (WLL) is calculated and
taking in consideration.
• Grade 80 and grade 100 chains can be used in restrain big loads with respect to the (WLL)
• Chains shall only be used for securing vehicles, mobile plant and equipment, skidded loads,
cable reels, and specific heavy loads such as transformers.
• Chains shall not be used to restrain pipes and tubular.
• chains shall not be used for lifting purposes
• When purchased chains shall be supplied with a copy of the manufacturers Shock Testing
certificate which shall be retained by the purchaser/owner, and made available for inspection as
may be required.
Webbing and tensioners
For loads requiring nylon webbing as a restraint, webbing of a minimum 50 mm width, shall be
used. The webbing can be tensioned using either:
• Truck winch on trailer side
• Hand ratchet winch (part of webbing assembly).
The webbing shall be in good condition, not frayed or showing signs of excessive wear, stitching
damage or chemical corrosion, or sunlight exposure damage. Damage can be assessed by the hairy
appearance of the fibers
Broken webbing even tied together with knots is totally unacceptable. Once webbing breaks, or is
damaged to the extent that its lashing capacity is reduced by 10% or more it must not be used, and
shall be disposed of:
Chain binders
There are two main types of chain binder:
• Lever type and
• Ratchet type chain binder.
The ratchet type chain binder should be used only when securing short and straight sections of
chains. The lever type chain binder will not provide sufficient tension when the chain is short.
Headboards and Loading Racks
Most headboards and loading racks are not strong enough to fully restrain heavy loads under
heavy braking. If the load is tied down to provide the required restraint for the Sideways, rearwards
and vertical directions, the headboard or loading rack can provide Some or all of the extra restraint
needed for heavy braking or minor collisions.
Side Gates
Most drop-in side gates are not capable of restraining tall or stacked loads unless they are
supported at the top by diagonal cross lashings to the opposite tie rails or are attached to other
structures such as bulkheads or loading racks. When straps are tensioned over the top of opposite
gates, they clamp the load together and prevent the gates lifting. If the load is stacked more than
gate high, the gates cannot prevent the top layers from tipping sideways
Load Net

• Chemical material, chemical big bags, chemical bags Can be carried in sided vehicles and
tankers.
• Fine powdered material (cement contained in silo) should be contained or transported in fully
enclosed vehicle bodies such as cement bananas so that no product can fall or dislodge from
the vehicle during transport.
• Load covers or load nets are required to restrain loose chemical bags and objects in open
topped vehicles to counteract the effect of air flow and rough roads
• The use of ‘netting’ can be effective for a limited time in restraining chemical bags and small
objects. Load netting can be made from closed or open-weave material and can be applied
manually. Load nets can also be used effectively for vertical restraint of lightweight bulk loads
in open-topped vehicles.
16.5.10.2. Lashing Techniques

Top-Over Lashing
Top-over lashing is a method of securing where lashings are positioned over the top of the goods
order to prevent the cargo section from tipping or sliding.
Direct Lashing
If the cargo is equipped with lashing eyes compatible with the strength of the lashing, it is possible
to lash directly between the lashing eyes and the lashing points on the vehicle.
Loop Lashing
Loop lashing is a form of sling lashing cargo to one side of the vehicle body, thereby preventing
the cargo from sliding towards the opposite side. To achieve double-action lashing, loop lashings
must be used in pairs, which will also prevent the cargo from tipping over. Two pairs of loop lashings
will be required to prevent the cargo from twisting longitudinally.
Lashing Angles
In order to be effective, lashings
must be applied in directions that
are opposite to the direction in which
a load is to be restrained. A lashing
applied to keep a load from moving
forward needs to be angled such that
it is primarily directed toward the rear
of the vehicle and not vertically. Direct
lashings should be applied in a manner
that gives a maximum slope of 1 to 2 in
the direction of restraint as shown in
figure.
In no case shall lashings applied to restrain loads in the forward and reverse direction exceed 60
degrees. Lashings applied to restrain only sideways movement should be applied to provide a 1 to 1
slope.

Amount of Restraint
Every load shall be restrained. The
restraint system shall be strong enough to
restrain the load without any movement
relative to the vehicle during all expected
conditions of operation. This requires a
load restraint system strong enough to
withstand:
• 100% of the load weight in the
forward direction of the vehicle
• 50% of the weight of the load in the
sideways directions
• 50% of the weight in the reverse
direction of the vehicle
• 20% of the weight in the upward
direction
Size mm (inches) WLL (working load limit ) Kg (Pounds)

Grade 70 Grade 80
7 (1/4) 1,430 (3,150) 1,570 (3,500)
8 (5/16) 2,130 (4,700) 2,000 (4,500)
10 (3/8) 2,990 (6,600) 3,200 (7,100)
11 (7/16) 3,970 (8,750) N/A
13 (1/2) 5,130 (11,300) 5,400 (12,000)
16 (5/8) 7,170 (15,800) 82,00 (18,100)
Synthetic webbing (WLL)

Width mm (inches) WLL (working load limit ) Kg (Pounds)
50 (2) 910 (2,000)
75 (3) 1360 (3,000)
Example:
If a machinery weighs 40,000 lbs. to be loaded on a truck
Forward position (100% of the load weight should be restrain)
Considering 90% lashing effectiveness so 10mm grade 70 lashing will have 5940 lb. WLL (working
load limit) & 13mm grade 70 will have 10170 lb. WLL (working load limit)
• 100% of the load will be 40,000 lbs.
• 40,000 / 5,940 lbs. will need 7 10mm grade 70 chain lashing to restrain load in forward
direction
• 40,000 /10,170 lbs. will need 4 13mm grade 70 chain lashing to restrain load in forward
direction
Sideways and reverse position (50% of the load weight should be restrain)
Considering 90% lashing effectiveness so 10mm grade 70 lashing will have 5940 lb. WLL (working
load limit) & 13mm grade 70 will have 10170 lb. WLL (working load limit)
• 20,000 / 5,940 lbs. will need 4 10mm grade 70 chain lashing to restrain load in Sideways and
backward direction
• 20,000 /10,170 lbs. will need 2 13mm grade 70 chain lashing to restrain load in Sideways and
backward direction upward position (20% of the load weight should be restrained)


• 8,000 / 5,940 lbs. will need 2 10mm grade 70 chain lashing to restrain load in Sideways and
backward direction
• 8,000 /10,170 lbs. will need 1 13mm grade 70 chain lashing to restrain load in Sideways and
backward direction
Lashing Equipment Inspection
As for lifting equipment, lashing equipment can only be relied upon if it is in serviceable condition.
The nature of the application, particularly the possibility of the load moving in transit, means
that lashing equipment can be accidentally damaged each time it is used. It should therefore be
inspected before each use. This need not be a formal inspection and no record is required but
trained users should be able to ‘cast their eye’ over it and check for any obvious damage. It is
recommend that lashing equipment should periodically be formally inspected by a competent
person and a record made of the result.
Chains and hooks Chains and hooks shall be visually inspected every six months to ensure
• no broken,
• stretched,
• bent,
• damaged or worn
• grooved links (link diameter reduced by 10% = failure),
• No stretched or damaged hooks.
Note: If deemed fit for service chains shall be color coded on the links adjacent to the hooks (as
per contractor lifting equipment color codes), with the hooks also color coded.
• Chains “repaired” by welding are unacceptable.
• Chains which fail the inspection shall be scrapped.
• CHAINS FOR LASHING SHALL NEVER BE USED AS LIFTING EQUIPMENT-their method of
manufacture and steel type makes them unsuitable for lifting purposes.
The manufacturer’s Certificate of Shock Loading shall be obtained at time of purchasing the chain,
and be retained for inspection at rig premises.
• Name of the lashing equipment
• Brief description
• Date of inspection
• Result of inspection clearly stating whether the equipment is safe to use
• Name of person making the inspection
• Signature of person making the inspection
• Part number or serial number marked on the chain or in a steel plate attached to the chain.
Webbing
Webbing shall be visually inspected every six months & pre-use checks to ensure the following
defects and damage are not present
• cuts of 4 mm or more at the edges of webbing lanyards
• surface abrasion across the face of the webbing and at the webbing loops,
• abrasion at the edges, particularly if localized
• damage to stitching (e.g. cuts or abrasion)
• a knot in the lanyard, other than those intended by the manufacturer;
• chemical attack which can result in local weakening
• heat or friction damage indicated by fibers with a glazed appearance which may feel harder
than surrounding fibers
• UV-degradation which is difficult to identify particularly visually, but there may be some loss of
color (if dyed) and a powdery surface;
• external abrasion; damaged or deformed fittings
• damage to the sheath and core of the rope
• internal damage
• Surface fibers damaged by abrasion

Vehicle Selection
Select a vehicle appropriate for the actual load to be carried; the following:
• Design and construction of the vehicle; e.g. wood or steel deck, open sided or side gated, high
bed or low bed, twist locks fitted, open or closed body, restraint anchorage points.
• Maximum carrying capacity of the vehicle in relation to the weight of the load, -do not overload
the vehicle.
• Length, height and width of the vehicle load deck in order that a load can be contained within
the vehicle if possible and thus avoid the need for an escort (try to make it non critical load as
possible).
16.5.10.3. Escort Vehicles
• The Escort vehicle must have at least two roof mounted amber beacons.
• Vehicles carrying an oversized load shall have, appropriate flags, and placards.
• Wide loads shall have additional lighting and have lit hazard markings and width indicators.
16.5.10.4. Load Height
• A vehicle shall not be loaded to such a height that vehicle stability is affected.
• Overhead power lines present a hazard to high loads, in desert oilfield areas. A minimum
vertical gap–to avoid flashover, which can be up to 3.65 meters dependent on line voltage, is
required between the point of maximum load height and the overhead power-line
• In order to identify such potential obstructions when planning the movement of loads a pre-
movement route survey shall be completed carefully.
16.5.10.5. Rig move truck type
A vehicle shall not carry a load which exceeds its specified loading capacity, the maximum
permitted legal load is determined by both the empty weight of the trailer and the drive axle load
capacity of the prime mover as stated on their Vehicle Registration Documents. Here are some of
different type of moving trucks and its capacity.
Semi-trailers hauled by SINGLE REAR AXLE Prime Movers (4 X 2)
• The maximum safe and legal load depends on the trailer empty weight (and meeting the ROP
legal maximum axle loadings,
• Trailer with an empty weight of 9 tones: Maximum allowable load is 29 tones.
• Trailer with an empty weight of 8 tones Maximum allowable load is 30 tones.
Low boy
• Ramp arm mechanize type is prohibited within all rig move belonging to EGPC affiliated
companies
• Consideration must also be given to loads with high centers of gravity). Vehicle and load
combinations that have a high center of mass will overturn at speeds that are lower than vehicle
and load combinations with lower centers of gravity. These types of loads should be carried on
a vehicle with a low platform height or on a vehicle with good roll stability.
• Consideration must also be given to loads with high centers of gravity. Vehicle and load
combinations that have a high center of mass will overturn at speeds that are lower than vehicle
and load combinations with lower centers of gravity. These types of loads should be carried on
a vehicle with a low platform height or on a vehicle with good roll stability.
16.5.11. Post move procedure
• The truck pusher and STP conduct a meeting with each other at the end of the rig move
and write down any violation or suggestions to improve rig move to be presented to rig
superintendent and transportation rig move section to take proper action.
• The concerned rig STP fills in the Rig Move Evaluation Report indicating the performance of the
rig move participants.
• The rig STP fills in the Rig Move Fuel Consumption Form - approved by the rig operators
representative - and submits it to the relevant rig superintendent who in turn approves and

sends it to the cost control section).

• The rig STP fills in the Rig Move Acceptance Form – approved by the rig operators
representative - and submits it to the relevant rig superintendent who sends it to the receivable
section
16.5.12. Post Rig Move report
• After completion of the Rig Move a Post Move report is to be made by the contractor tool
pusher within 72 hours of the spud-in the next well. (Report attached)
• The purpose of the report is to review all aspects of the move, lesson learned, identify positive
achievements and areas for improvement on future moves of that rig.
16.6. Transportation Incidents Emergency Response Plan (ERP)

In case of any transportation incidents, the rig operators drilling supervisor, rig superintendent
and HSE manger in addition to rig contractor doctor/ rig HSE engineer .must be reported with the
situation.
The following data is to be determined:
• Incident location
• The vehicle’s owner
• No. of passengers
• Nearest ambulance location
• Nearest Hospital in the area
• Description of injuries and damages as a result of the incident
• The transportation section (rig move section) calculates the estimated rig move cost as per
the truck pusher’s Rig Move Report and submits the estimated calculated cost to the rig
superintendent.
• The rig superintendent reviews the calculated cost for the involved transportation rig move
equipment in accordance to the approved rig move plan.

A17. Emergency Response Plan

A.17. Emergency Response Plan (ERP)
17.1. Scope
This procedure applies to all emergencies involving operators /contractors Personnel, Assets,
Activities, Operations and Business Partners; within rig contractor-controlled areas to respond
effectively to incidents that may occur on and around any rig contractor premises. A high degree of
emergency preparedness will be maintained at all times on board to handle any arising emergency
at the shortest possible notice.
The necessary procedures and plans of emergency preparedness address all emergency cases,
resources available and communication required during different scenarios to prompt the first
immediate action(s) required.
17.2. Purpose
This Emergency Response Plan (ERP) details the rig contractor and predetermined actions to
respond effectively to incidents that may occur on and around any rig contractor’s offshore units
and to prevent and limit as far as practicable the consequence of an emergency (or crisis) in an
organized and integrated manner. To ensure that:
• Clear practical guidance for all personnel who may be involved in an incident to identify their
roles and responsibilities in an emergency.
• Key emergency personnel are identified, and their required action(s) are taken on being alerted.
• An adequate level of preparedness and response to Emergency cases.
• Identification of scenarios that may require evacuation from the facility in case of an emergency
to avoid or minimize a major accident.
• The agreed lines of communication and emergency rig contractor are established for rig
contractor Units and they are ready to respond, as required, to any potential emergency.
• The emergency is correctly categorized and reported through the correct channels.
• Design of safe means for escape, evacuation, and rescue and identification of scenarios that
may require evacuation
• The rig contractor Units have been designed and equipped with sufficient emergency response
equipment and facilities to ensure the safety of personnel.
17.3. Types of emergencies

- Serious injury, loss of life, missing persons or man overboard.
- Fire / Explosion.
- Total loss or damage that may shut down the unit.
- Loss of well control.
- Blowout.
- Gas release
- Environmental Pollution.
- Evacuation.
- Collision with another vessel
- Loss of Stability
- Punch through
- Security Incident
17.4. Emergency Response Rig contractor

The rig contractor operates on a governance structure that provides an integrated benchmarked
capability to enable the company to:
• confirm the nature and extent of the event
• Take control of the situation
• contain and manage the incident
• communicate with the investors, concerned other parties, and the public

17.4.1. Management Emergency Rig contractor:

Certain types of serious emergencies will require the activation of an operation room designated
as an Emergency Operating Centre (EOC) in the head office as follows:
• The Chairman (Head of Emergency Rig contractor – Incident commander)
• Emergency Manager
• Logistic Coordinators
• HR Director
• QM-HSE Director
• Security Office
• Head office Doctor
17.4.2. Unit Emergency Rig contractor:
The Emergency Operating Center Team shall muster in the Radio Room; the team comprises the
following:
• PIC (OIM \STP) in the absence / incapacitated of the Person in Charge (OIM); the Off-duty Tool
Pusher shall replace him.
• Off-duty Tool Pusher (Second Commander)
• Rig Engineer
• On / off-duty Radio Operators - Internal and External Communications
• Operator’s Representative
• Barge Engineer is the (Damage Controller / On Scene Commander) in Emergency cases
• In the absence / incapacitated of the Operator’s Rep the OIM shall replace him.
17.5. Activation of Emergency Operating Centre

Certain types of serious emergencies will require the activation of an operation room chosen as an
Emergency Operating Centre (EOC) in the head office as follows:
• The Head of Emergency, when contacted in an emergency:
- Shall report immediately to EGPC emergency room.
- Shall determine the seriousness of the situation and decide whether EOC should be activated.
- Shall inform the Operations Management, and duty support personnel and then proceed to
EOC to assume incident commandment.
- May delegate the Chief Operations Officer or the Operations Manager as Incident
Commander to ensure such responsibility until he arrives at EOC.
• The Duty Superintendent shall inform duty support personnel and others as may be instructed
by the Incident Commander.
• Rig Superintendent shall open up a control room, and write up the time(s) and first event(s) of
the emergency on the situation log report. Then he shall ensure that all maps, charts, drawings,
emergency procedure manuals, and other data sources relevant to the situation are made
readily available.
• The Incident Commander may designate, as necessary, a person or a team to proceed to the
location of the emergency to coordinate the action(s) being taken on site or to act as a source
of information of the status of the situation.
• The STP/OIM at the emergency site will provide a report at the end of the emergency detailing
times and relevant points of meeting/decisions/occurrences.
17.6. Emergency Response Arrangements

In all foreseeable circumstances the prior arrangements provided for emergency response, and the
management of these arrangements, will ensure, as far as is reasonably practicable, the safety of all
persons involved in activities within the business unit. These arrangements include:
• Planning for emergencies.
• Emergency Response Training for key personnel.
• Scheduled emergency drills at the unit site.
• Major emergency planning and simulation with Operator participants.
• The detection, prevention, mitigation, and control of incidents.

• Informing all personnel of what their response to emergencies shall be.

• Informing all personnel of hazardous conditions, their response, and accounting for all
personnel following an incident.
• Recovery of personnel.
• Escape routes.
• Coordination of the response and the cooperation of all those involved.
• Support and response resources available.
17.7. Safe work practices During Emergency cases

The following safe work practices should be followed during emergency cases on the unit:
• Muster crew for accountability.
• Cancel all work permits and secure work that could present an additional hazard or increase the
danger of the emergency.
• Stop all welding and buffing, the use of non-EX lights, and portable electric devices.
• Evacuate all personnel from confined spaces, and ensure that all power is shut off to
equipment.
• Close all manholes, hatches, and watertight doors.
• If applicable, bypass valves must be opened or closed as required.
• Where there is incomplete work (e.g., handrails and deck plate’s removed, dismantled, or
nonoperational machinery or equipment) that could be hazardous to personnel, fence off the
area and post warning notices.
17.8. Procedures
Each rig contractor shall have a specific ERP including at minimum:
• Introduction
• Scope and Purpose
• Emergency response rig contractor
- Alerting process
- Roles and responsibilities
- Unit Specific ERP contact list
• Emergency drills
• Mustering Process
• Emergency communications
• The unit emergency data include:
- Emergency response scenarios
- Specific Safety / Fire Fighting equipment layout
- Station Bill

A18. Incident Reporting

and investigation
A.18. Incident Reporting and investigation
18.1. Scope
This procedure details the process for timely reporting of all incidents and near misses. It applies
to Incidents involving Drilling contractors and Service companies.
18.2. Purpose
• Ensure that personnel who sustain injury or become ill receive the best possible care as soon as
possible.
• Guide the preparation, dissemination, and review of incident reports.
18.3.1. Rig Operator’s HSE Manager
• It is the responsibility of the HSE Manager to ensure that all incidents involving injuries,
illnesses, environmental spills, loss of primary containment, dropped objects, property damage,
fire or near miss incidents that occur at the rig site, the associated rig camp or non-routine rig
operations are notified to the EGPC in Cairo.
• Rig PIC shall follow up and ensure that all contractor injuries and incidents are reported to the
rig operator’s top management verbally, through E-mails, or electronic systems if applicable.
• Ensure that all other departments will appropriately report and investigate all incidents on
time.
• Ensure the affected department shall classify incidents to define the levels of notification,
investigation, and recording activity that EGPC requires.
• IADC incident reporting guidelines will be used as a reference.
• Take immediate action when any injury or potential major incident is found to have occurred,
but was not reported. Determine the factors that contributed to the non-reporting.
• Follow the requirements stipulated in IADC incident reporting when assigning/determining
classifications of incidents.
• Ensure that the department training policy mandates training for incident reporting
responsibilities.
18.3.2. Rig operator’s person in charge “DSV”
• Promote immediate reporting of all near misses by communicating to employees and
contractors, the positive aspects of near miss reporting. This can be accomplished through
positive reinforcement at safety meetings.
• Ensure that all employees and contractors working in the D&WO facility are aware of their
incident reporting responsibilities to the facility PIC. This will first be communicated during the
site safety orientation.
• Notify all injuries, loss of primary containment (spills, leaks, etc.), unsafe conditions, near-
misses, and incidents to his direct manager.
• Take immediate action for any injury or potential major incident that is found to have occurred,
but was not reported. Determine the factors that contributed to the non-reporting and submit
the information to the Division Head, who will determine the corrective action that will be
applied.
18.3.3. Contractors
Each rig ontractor is responsible for reporting contractor incidents by E-mail within 24 hours of the
incident.

18.4. Incident Categories

18.4.1. Fatality (FTL):
A fatality is a work-related injury or illness that results in death. Fatalities are included when
calculating the Lost Time Incident (LTI) incident rate and frequency rate.
18.4.2. Lost Time Incident (LTI):

A work-related incident (injury or illness) to an employee in which a physician or licensed health
care professional recommends days away from work due to the incident.
Note: Time away from work on the day of the incident is not considered in determining Lost Time
Incidents (LTI). Time spent traveling, undergoing evaluation, awaiting medical evaluation results,
or otherwise seeking medical treatment should not be counted as a Lost Time Incident (LTI) when
considering LTI classification.
18.4.3. Restricted Work/Transfer Case (RWTC):

• A Restricted Work/Transfer Case (RWTC) occurs when an employee cannot perform all of the
routine job functions but does not result in days away from work. An RWTC occurs when, as a
consequence of a work-related injury or illness:
- The employee is temporarily assigned to another job
- The employee cannot perform all of his routine job functions for all or part of his work shift
- The employee works his regularly assigned job but cannot work the full shift/tour
• Restricted or light duty the day of the injury or illness does not make the incident a recordable
Restricted Work/Transfer Case (RWTC). If the employee continues under restricted duty the day
after the incident, the case becomes a recordable Restricted Work/Transfer Case (RWTC).
• When an employee experience minor musculoskeletal discomfort such as muscle pains or
strains, a physician or licensed health care professional determines whether the employee is
fully able to perform all of his routine job functions, and the employer assigns work restriction
to that employee or restricts the employee’s job functions, to prevent a more serious condition
from developing, the case is not recordable as a restricted work case.
18.4.4. Medical Treatment Only (MTO):
• Any work-related injury or illness requiring medical care or treatment beyond first aid
(regardless of the provider of such treatment) that does not result in a Restricted Work/Transfer
Case (RWTC) or Lost Time Incident (LTI).
• Medical treatment does not include first aid treatment even though provided by a physician or
registered professional personnel.
• For record-keeping purposes Medical Treatment Only (MTO) does not include:
- Visits to a physician or other licensed healthcare professional solely for observation
consulting;
- Diagnostic procedures such as x-rays and blood tests, including the administration of
prescription medications used solely for diagnostic purposes (e.g., eye drops to dilate pupils);
or any treatment contained on the list of first-aid treatments.
18.4.5. First Aid (FA):
Any treatment of minor scratches, cuts, burns, splinters, and so forth, and any follow-up visit for
observation. The following are generally considered first-aid treatments:
• Using a non-prescription medication at non-prescription strength regardless of route of
administration, i.e. oral, injection, ingestion, inhalation, or absorption. Medications available in
prescription and nonprescription form, the use of or a recommendation by a physician or other
licensed health care professional to use a non-prescription medication at prescription strength
is considered medical treatment for recordkeeping purposes).
• Administering tetanus immunizations (other immunizations, such as Hepatitis B vaccine are
considered medical treatment);

• Cleaning, flushing, or soaking wounds on the surface of the skin;

• Using wound coverings such as bandages, Band-Aids TM, gauze pads, etc.; or using butterfly
bandages or Steri-Strips TM (other wound closing devices such as sutures, staples, etc., are
• Using hot or cold therapy;
• Using any non-rigid means of support, such as elastic bandages, wraps, non-rigid back belts,
etc. (devices with rigid stays or other systems designed to immobilize parts of the body are
• Using temporary immobilization devices while transporting an incident victim (e.g. splints,
slings, neck collars, backboards, etc.);
• Drilling of a fingernail or toenail to relieve pressure, or draining fluid from a blister;
• Using eye patches;
• Removing foreign bodies from the eye using only irrigation or a cotton swab;
• Removing splinters or foreign material from areas other than the eye by irrigation, tweezers,
cotton swabs, or other simple means;
• Using finger guards;
• Massages (physical therapy or chiropractic treatment are considered medical treatment for
record-keeping purposes);
• Drinking fluids for relief of heat stress.
18.4.6. Property Damage:
An incident that has resulted in damage to property or equipment.
18.4.7. Environmental Incident:

Any incident that results in damage/pollution to the environment. This includes ground, air, and
water.
18.5. Incident Reporting Procedure

Incident reporting is the documented process of notifying top management or a designated
person of an incident for evaluation for further actions. The process involves an initial notification
and a structured incident reporting process that takes into account the date and time, a brief
description of the incident, the type of activity, the work equipment being used, the employees
involved and the consequence of the incident. Incident reporting can be both internal and external;
internally to persons within an rig operator and externally to an enforcement authority once an
incident falls within a given category.
18.5.1. Initial notification

Incident reporting begins with an initial notification, which is done immediately to a designated
person e.g., a safety officer or an immediate supervisor. The purpose is to preserve all relevant data,
knowledge, and evidences about the incident by the designated person to prepare for the next
stage of incident reporting i.e. preparing a preliminary incident report. The initial notification takes
the form of an email, phone call, or face-to-face communication.
18.5.2. Preliminary incident report

is a report put together to provide preliminary information about the incident to top management-
both the rig operator’s and contractor’s-for evaluation and decision-making on the need for further
actions – given that, not all incidents deserve the same level of action. Once initial notification has
taken place, the supervisor or the safety officer must send the preliminary incident report to the HSE
Manager-both the rig operator’s and contractor’s, the most senior management personnel e.g., MD,
and all relevant persons as per procedure within 24 hours. The purpose of a preliminary incident
report is for severity evaluation by the top management to decide on the needed relevant actions.
The preliminary incident report should include:

• Date and time of the incident

• Name of the person(s) injured (or the names of the person(s) at risk in the case of a near miss)
• Witness name(s)
• Name of supervisor
• Description of injuries (or the potential injuries that could have happened in the case of a near
miss)
18.5.3. Simplified steps to follow when reporting:
• Employee or witness to an incident informs his supervisor.
• The supervisor notifies the Drilling Foreman.
• The Medic provides treatment as required.
• The rig Foreman shall notify via telephone, SMS, email or messenger the Rig Superintendent
for all Loss Time Incidents (LTIs) and property damage as soon as practicable but in no case
more than 12 hours after he has been advised.
• For Incidents that occur on a contractor rig involving Service Company employees or
equipment, the rig Foreman will ensure that the Service Company conducts a thorough
investigation as per the Service Company Investigation policy and provide a complete
investigation report. This report will be sent to the Rig Superintendent.
• Any injury/incident that is found to have occurred but was not reported will be reviewed by
Drilling Management to determine the factors that contributed to the non-reporting.
18.6. Incident Investigation

18.6.1. Investigation Process
The incident investigation process consists of 5 steps:
• Immediate actions
• Investigation planning
• Data collection
• Data rig operator and analyses
• Actions and Report.
18.6.2. Investigation Planning
• Nominate the investigation team and allocate roles/tasks
• Develop an investigation plan
• Identify information to be collected
• Review previous incidents (similar incidents, reoccurring incidents, personnel involved).
18.6.3. Level of Investigation
The level of investigation is determined based on the actual severity. However, this level may be
increased by considering the probability and potential consequences of incidents.
Similarly, the causes of a near miss can have great potential for causing injury and ill health.
When making your decision, you must also consider the potential for learning lessons. For example,
if you have had several similar incidents, it may be worth investigating, even if each single event is
not worth investigating in isolation. It is best practice to investigate all adverse events which may
affect the public.
Also, the investigation level shall consider the probability and potential consequences of incidents
that may require an increase in the level of investigation.

The tables below will assist you in determining the level of investigation, which is appropriate for
the incident. Remember you must consider the worst potential consequences of the incident
Table 1: Determine (Actual / Potential) Consequences and severity of the Incident that occurred.
Consequences (Actual / Potential)

Severity
Harm to people Asset Damage Environmental Impact
A Oil Spill (offshore sheen) or

First Aid / Near Miss < $1,000
Negligible < 1 barrel on land.
B
MTO > $1,000 ≤ $10,000 Oil Spill < 10 barrels
Low
C
Restricted Work Injury > $10,000 ≤$100,000 Oil Spill <10 barrels > 100 barrels.
Medium
D Oil Spill <100 barrels >1000
LTI / Partial Disability >$100,000 ≤$1,000,000
High barrels.
E Fatality (Multiple) /
> $1,000,000 impact Oil Spill >1000 barrels.
Major Permanent Disability
18.6.4. Investigation Team

For an investigation to be worthwhile, it is essential that the management and the workforce are
fully involved. Level of investigation shall be determined by the incident severity.

Level of investigation
In a minimal level investigation, the relevant supervisor will look into the
A
circumstances of the event and try to learn any lessons which will prevent future
Negligible
occurrences.
Low level undertaken by:
Business unit PIC: Team Leader
B
HSE Engineer: Team Member
Low
Maintenance team: Team Member
Any other member requested by investigation team leader
Medium level undertaken by:
Rig SUPT / project manager.: Team Leader
C HSE section head : Team Member
Medium Business unit PIC: Team Member
HSE Engineer: Team Member
Maintenance team :Team Member
Severity
High level undertaken by:

Operations Manager : Team Leader
D HSE Manager: Team Member
High Rig SUPT/ project manager.: Team Member
Field HSE Head: Team Member
Major level undertaken by:
Chairman: Team leader
Chief Operation Officer: Deputy Team Leader
EGPC Representative : Team member
E QM-HSE Director: Team member
Major Operations Manager : Team member
HSE Manager: Team Member
Rig SUPT/ project manager.: Team Member
Field HSE Head: Team Member
Any other members may include Technical Superintendent, 3rd party representatives, Engineering
Department representatives, or experts.
18.6.5. Data Collection

• Conduct interviews and collect statements from those involved in the incident and any
witnesses. Written statements of those involved should be sought as soon as possible
following an incident and to be signed by the witnesses. After reviewing the statements, further
questions may be developed.
• Collect all available and relevant information such as photographs, videos, sketches, SMS
documents, details of the environmental conditions at the time, measurements, records
(training, CVs, JMS, maintenance, inspection certificates,…etc.), data or physical evidences,

layouts, or any other relevant information required.

• Tools required for an investigation, depending on its nature may include Digital cameras,
Portable lights, Sketch pad, or Portable gas / vapor detector.
• All information gathered should be factual. Speculation, opinions and assumptions based on
facts are not to be included in the information gathered.
18.6.6. Data Rig operator and Analysis
• Develop a timeline and/or sequence of events (if required). It is critical to establish the
sequence of events leading up to the occurrence of the incident and immediately after the
incident occurred.
• The level of detail will depend on the severity and complexity of the incident. When
constructing a sequence of events the critical information is who did what, when they did it,
where did it occur and what else contributed to it occurring. A sequence of events should be
written out.
• Using the proper Root cause analysis technique to identify why the failures occur? What were
the deficiencies or absent defenses? What did people do or not do, systems failures, decisions,
training deficiencies, etc. that allowed the incident to occur? This analysis can be identified
through the following:
- Immediate causes are the obvious causes that gave rise to the event itself. These will be the
things that occur at the time and place of the accident. It is common to think of these causes
in terms of unsafe acts and unsafe conditions.
- Underlying or root causes are the things that lie behind the immediate causes. It must be
present for the incident to occur. If you can confidently say that the incident could have been
prevented/or the likelihood drastically reduced but for this factor, then it is a root cause. There
may be more than one root cause identified during an investigation. Often, root causes will be
failure in the management system such as lack / insufficient / noncompliance with procedures
or instructions.
• All other factors are causal factors. Their presence or absence made the event more or less
likely to occur, or more or less severe.
• When analyzing data ensure that the information is both valid and reliable. Valid means that the
evidence is directly related to the investigation. Reliable means that the evidence would be the
same no matter who or how the evidence/data was collected
18.6.7. Immediate Actions
• Secure the scene to eliminate danger to personnel, and preserve evidence to prevent being
altered.
• Check injured persons and provide first aid if safe to do so
• Notify key personnel
18.6.8. Actions and Report
Once the investigation is completed, effective and clear actions shall be developed through (Aegis)
by tapping the HSE drop list, selecting add new Incident then go through the last page “Action
items”, they should be: “SMARTER”
• Specific; what exactly are the recommendations aim to fix?
• Measurable; Recommendations / corrective actions shall be incorporated into internal
inspections. To examine if the same factors that caused the original incident still exist.
• Accountable; Each corrective action/recommendation must have an accountable person in
charge responsible for implementing it, this person could also manage the communications
aspect in keeping the workplace informed on progress and completion.
• Reasonable; when establishing the recommendations / corrective actions, the method and cost
of its implementation should be considered before presenting these solutions to management.
• Timely; each corrective action/recommendation must have a time for completion target; the
duration of the implementation depends on the priority and the possibility of achieving it.
Assigning a reasonable period for completion helps make the recommendations a little more
manageable and therefore likely to be accepted and completed.

• Effective; by taking Risk Assessment as a reference, an effective recommendation should be

reducing both the severity and frequency of a future incident.
• Reviewed; examining if the recommendation is still in place and doing what its role or not,
examining recommendation effectiveness should be in internal inspections and follow-ups.
All corrective actions should be based on the Hierarchy of Control to ensure the most effective
controls are being considered. Actions should prevent the reoccurrence of the incident in both the
short and long term.
• Short-term actions are those that prevent the causes of an incident from remaining or
developing further. They may include site communication or temporary barricades.
• Long-term actions eliminate the causes of the incident and generally take longer to implement.
These may include engineering controls, elimination of a hazard, and capital projects.
Effective actions are those that:
• Eliminate the cause of the incident in a practical way;
• Are lasting and required minimal maintenance; and
• Are readily implemented.
18.6.9. Approval
• The Investigation Team shall issue the final investigation report which shall be printed out,
approved, and signed by all involved investigation team members and reviewed and approved
by the QM-HSE Director and Concerned Department Manager
• Incident investigation shall be submitted within two weeks after the incident happened,
however, it may be extended, if the evidence is still being collected.
18.6.10. Final Incident report

• The final incident report should include the following sections:
• Final incident classification
• Incident Location
• Date and time of the incident
• Name of the person(s) injured (or the names of the person(s) at risk in the case of a near miss)
• Witness name(s)
• Name of supervisors
• Description of injuries (or the potential injuries that could have happened in the case of a near
miss)
• A detailed description of the incident covering:
- Sequence of events
- Results of the event
- Observations of anything unusual before, during, or after the incident
- Observations of safety equipment or procedures used
- The affected or involved person(s) version of the events
- Witness statements
- A detailed description of the treatment after the incident, which may include:
- The reasoning behind the decision to call or not call emergency services
- How the injury (if any) was treated
- How the area of the incident was controlled, cleaned up, or rectified
- A post-analysis of the incident
- The root cause(s) of the incident
- Any health and safety breaches that may have contributed to the incident
- The hazards identified
- How to remove the hazards or mitigate the risks
- Photographs (if relevant and where possible)
N.B: For class E incidents, EGPC has the authority to form an official investigation team or delegate
the investigation to the drilling contractor/service company investigation team, and a single final
investigation report shall be created by all involved parties and approved by EGPC.

18.7. Incident Rate Calculations

Incident rates can be calculated based on frequency or incidents.
18.7.1. Frequency Rate

The Frequency Rate includes applicable incidents per 1,000,000 man-hours worked.
18.7.2. Calculate the Lost Time Incident (LTI) Frequency Rate using this formula
[Number of Lost Time Incidents (LTI) including Fatalities (FTL) multiplied by 1,000,000 and then
divided by Total Hours Worked = Lost Time Frequency Rate]
18.7.3. Calculate the Total Recordable Frequency Rate (TRFR) using this formula
[All applicable recordable incidents [(MTO+RWC+LTI+FTL) multiplied by 1,000,000 then divided by
Total Hours Worked = Recordable Frequency Rate].
18.7.4. Incidents Rate

The Incidents Rate includes applicable incidents per 200,000 man-hours worked. The two numbers
are essentially the same, except Frequency Rate is five (5) times the Incidents Rate.
18.7.5. Calculate the Lost Time Incidents (LTI) rate using this formula
[Number of Lost Time Incidents (LTI) including Fatalities (FTL) multiplied by 200,000 and then
divided by Total Hours Worked = Lost-Time Incidents Rate]
18.7.6. Calculate the Total Recordable Incidents Rate (TRIR) using this formula
[Recordable incident data [(MTO+RWC+LTI+FTL) multiplied by 200,000 then divided by Total
Hours Worked = Recordable Incident Rate]
18.7.7. Calculate the Days Away Restricted or Transferred (DART)

With applicable incidents (FTL+LTI+RWC) that involve days away from work but do not include
MTO cases using this formula, [Total number of applicable DART cases*200,000)/Total hours
worked = DART Rate
18.8. Safety Communication / HSE Alert

• HSE Alert shall be established to circulate the gained information/lessons learned from
incidents that occur on any units and to ensure that learning points are communicated to all rig
operator personnel, HSE Alert shall be issued for:
- Recordable Incidents
- Occupational Health Incidents
- Material Damage Incidents ( for damage has cost of repair above 10,000 $)
- Significant Environmental incidents
- HIPO
- Transportation incidents (involving the total loss or major damage i.e. roll over).
• HSE Alert shall include;
- Date and Time of incident.
- Description of the incident
- Actual and possible outcome
- Cause(s)
- Action(s) to avoid recurrence
- Photo/ Sketch if applicable
• HSE Alert shall be posted at visible place(s) on the rig where personnel can have access to it
such as; communication boards.
• Rigs/Units are required to use the lessons learned as an improvement to their specific
operations i.e. include learning in Rig/Unit action items (when applicable).

18.9. Incidents Tracking and Follow-up

• The Action party shall take actions within the target date with the related evidence. If not,
actions will be escalated to his line managers, according to the rig operator hierarchy.
• Approver shall verify the implementation of actions with its related evidence.
• The Concerned Supt. /Concerned Manager shall follow up on the actions status.
• When this implementation requires involvement of several parties, an action plan shall be in
place and executed. This plan shall be formalized and followed-up on the HSE Committee
Meeting.

A19. International, National

standards and Legal
compliance requirement
A.19. International, National standards and Legal compliance
19.1. Scope
This procedure is established to demonstrate all organizations’ commitment to follow legal and
other obligations when executing their business.
Each drilling contractor/service company working under EGPC authority shall have a procedure in
place that addresses significant laws, rules, and other requirements and ensures they are factored
into the QHSE management system.
19.2. Purpose
Ensure that both rig contractors/operators comply with all applicable international, national, and
legal standards and regulations.
19.3. Egyptian laws and regulations

All drilling contractors and service companies shall obey all Egyptian rules and regulations, which
include, but are not limited to, the following:
• Labor Law: No. 12/2003 and its amendments and executive regulations
• Environmental Law: No.4/1994 and its amendments and executive regulations
• Commercial Law: No. 17/1999 and its amendments and executive regulations
• Social Insurance Law: No. 148/2019 and its amendments and executive regulations
• Customs Law: No.207/2020 and its amendments and executive regulations
• Tax Law: No. 91/2005 and its amendments and executive regulations
• Traffic Law: No. 66/1973 and its amendments and executive regulations
• Waste Management Law: No. 202/2020 and its amendments and executive regulations
• Other related HSE laws and regulations.
19.4. International Standards

• ISO standards
- Quality Management System Requirements, ISO 9001:2015
- Environmental Management System Requirements, ISO 14001:2015
- Occupational Health and Safety Management System Requirements, ISO 45001:2018
• HSE standards such as
- OSHA – Occupational safety & health association
- DROPS reliable securing
- ANSI ( American National Standard Institute)
- ASTM ( American Standard for Testing and Materials)
- National Electric Code Article 500 HASAWA (Health and Safety at Work etc. Act)
- EU (European Union)
- HSE (Health& Safety Executive)
- SOLAS.
- Restrictions by Continental Shelf/Flag State.
- MARPOL
• IADC ( International Association of Drilling Contractors)
- Incident Statistics Program (ISP)
• API
- API Standards for Safe Offshore Operations.
- Relevant Standard shall be applied.

Section B:
Safety Requirements
B1. Permit to work
B.1. Permit to work
1.1. Scope
• The PTW applies to all Drilling rigs and Service Companies not using an approved Permit to
Work (PTW) procedure.
• Drilling Contractors or Service Companies shall be permitted to use their own PTW procedure
provided where:
- The contractor PTW procedure shall be reviewed by the client’s HSE and Drilling Departments
and they have to ensure that it meets the minimum requirements of EGPC PTW procedure.
- The contractor’s PTW system shall cover the rig activities identified in their PTW process.
1.2. Purpose
The purpose of the Permit to Work Procedure (PTW) is to define a formal safe system of control
for Rig or Rig less activities that are potentially hazardous. This procedure establishes minimum
requirements and responsibilities for a Permit to Work, and outlines the competencies required for
those responsible for implementing this procedure. When issued, the PTW serves as a written record
of conditions and requirements agreed upon by the issuer and receiver. They list minimum safety
precautions to be taken and hazards, which must be controlled.
1.3. Definitions
1.3.0.1. Person in charge (PIC) / Permit to work Issuer
The rig contractors PIC is the Tool pusher or, in his temporary absence, his designate. On Mobile
Offshore Drilling Units (MODU), depending on the type of operations, the PIC is the Offshore
Installation Manager (OIM)/Barge Master (or designate). Rigless Operations: The PIC shall be the
Client on Site Representative.
1.3.0.2. Permit to work requester
The contractor persons who have received training (as mentioned in EGPC Administrative
requirements /section1.9) and are certified by their employer to issue the PTW form and also who
are performing the work shall request authorized PTW.
1.4.1. Rig contractors and Service Companies
It shall be the responsibility of the rig contractor and Service Companies Line Management staff to
fully implement their approved PTW procedure.
The rig operators Representative” must be notified by the rig contractor or Service Company
of all permits before they are issued. He shall “initial” all permits besides the signature of the rig
contractor “permit issuer” to acknowledge notification of the work.
1.4.2. Rig operators Representative

It is the responsibility of the rig operators on a contractor rig and Service Company to ensure that
contractor personnel comply with their PTW procedure. He shall do this by reviewing the filed PTW
forms at least once a month and periodically monitor work being conducted under the PTW.
Review the contractor PTW before work starts.
Determine if the mitigations and safety precautions specified for this work are adequate for safe
operations.
Recommend additional mitigations if he determines that the safety precautions in EGPC HSE
Guide Lines are not adequate.
Monitor jobs and shut jobs down where ALL of the steps in the JSAs/Risk Assessments are not
being followed. This could result in the rig being put on downtime.

B.1. Permit to work
1.5. Function of PTW

The PTW is intended to be used on jobs that pose a risk to employees, the environment, company
operations, or equipment. Drilling Operations may exempt jobs with extremely minimal risk
from the PTW. Carpentry (without power tools), inspections in non-hazardous areas, cleaning or
lubricating non-hydrocarbon equipment, and some classes of non-flash photography where Drilling
or Rigless Operations believe these duties may be done safely without a PTW are examples of jobs
that may be included
1.5.1. Examples of Work that may be performed without a PTW are:

• Routine drilling operations.
• Routine materials handling.
• Routine Helideck operations.
• Routine crane operations.
• Routine Cold Work inside workshops and within accommodation units.
In such cases and workover Operations must maintain adequate control in the workplace. On a
practical level through applying PJSM using job specific JSAPTW shall:
• Limit the scope of the task.
• Ensure that upon completion of work, equipment and site are left in a safe condition.
• Ensure supervisors and crew members follow procedures, are informed of and heed necessary
safety precautions and recognize the need for and use required safety equipment.
• Encourage pre-task planning, minimizing risk to personnel and equipment, and reduce the
inconvenience and interference to other operations.
• Increase the awareness of personnel responsible for the overall safety of the unit by providing
documented details of potentially hazardous activities in progress.
• Provide a continuous control and record of ongoing work activities, detailing the nature of the
work, required precautions/safeguards, and the responsible competent person in charge.
• Provide formal notification of completion of all work to the PIC.
1.5.2. The PTW shall include, but is not limited to the following operations:
• Any Hot work involving welding, burning, heating, and any other spark producing activity or
potential ignition source outside the designated “welding shop.”
• Work requiring entry in any tank or confined space.
• Work where there is a danger of falling into the sea or any working over water activity.
• Work involving the use of unapproved electrical equipment (i.e., camera, flashguns, radios, cell
telephones, etc.).
• Work on any pressurized system where there is a possibility of pressure being released.
• Work on electrical or mechanical equipment requiring energy isolation (LOTO) to ensure the
safety of personnel.
• Work on electrical equipment in hazardous areas to eliminate sources of ignition.
• Work carried out below sea level (i.e., columns, pontoons, tanks, etc.) that might affect the
station keeping, structural integrity, stability of the Rig or certification.
• Work that might affect or disable the Rig’s safety systems (i.e., firefighting, gas detection,
watertight doors, etc.).
• Man riding operations, this shall include the use of a man-ridding air hoist, work baskets
whether suspended by a crane or air hoist.
• Personnel transfer to or from MODU to supply vessel.
• Work involving perforating or acidizing operations, radioactive materials, explosives or other
dangerous substances.
• Work on/or near moving equipment where safety barriers and guards have to be bypassed.
• Work involving heavy lifts with material handling equipment (i.e., cranes, BOP hoists, slings,
shakles, hook, etc.) that are near maximum safe working loads (85%).
• Opening the Master Dump Valve.
• Flaring and/or flow testing of wells.
• Maintenance of the draw-works, pumps, rotary table, top drive systems, engines, generators,

B.1. Permit to work
water treatment plant, life boat, all Derrick sections, deep water wells or tanks.
• Pressure testing BOPs.
• Cementing operations.
• Removing well heads.
• Installation and testing of all Contractor equipment.
• Any maintenance on the accumulator unit.
• Any raising or lowering of the mast.
• Slipping and cutting drill line.
• Any Rig up or Rig down by a Workover Rig over an existing wellhead
• Any repair to the jacking or ballasting system of an offshore rig (MODU).
• Any work to be performed or equipment to be moved near or around overhead power lines.
1.6. Procedure
1.6.1. Issuance and Approval of PTW form
Every Rig contractor and service firm must have appropriate procedures in place for the granting
and approval of the permit to work to ensure that the PTW is issued correctly for the tasks that
require it and that job-related hazards are controlled.
1.6.2. Filing of PTW

Each Rig contractor/ service company shall maintain a records for the issued PTWs and
maintained at the Rig/Unit files for 3 months.
PTW shall be filed as one package in HSE filing with the below forms:
• Safe Job Analysis.
• Pre-Job Safety Meeting.
• All PTW checklists, Rescue plans.
• Lifting Plans.
A PTW log shall be maintained on work permit Focal Point (PTW board) and shall contain the
following information, as a minimum:
• PTW number
• Date and time opened.
• Brief description of the task name.
• The workgroup of each PTW e.g. Drilling, Mechanical, Wire line team, etc.
• Date and time Closed.
• Isolation Certificate reference number, if applicable.

B2. Lock-Out & Tag-out (LOTO)
B.2. Lock-Out & Tag-out (LOTO)
2.1. Purpose
The purpose of this procedure is to protect personnel from the potential releases of stored
energy or the startup of machinery or equipment that may cause injury. This specifically includes
any maintenance activity where electrical, mechanical, steam, hydraulic, pneumatic or other energy
source is present. Additional hazards may include heated, flammable, toxic, corrosive, or chemical
material.
2.2. Scope
The rig contractors or service companies shall implement a Lock-Out/Tag-Out system in line, as
minimum, with the instructions described in this section to ensure safe execution of Drilling and
workover activities.
It is the responsibility of the Person in Charge (PIC) to ensure compliance with this procedure.
2.4. Procedures
2.4.1. Job Supervisors
Shall identify all energy sources that are subject to this procedure. Prior to performing any
maintenance or repair work on any machine or equipment, a drilling contractor or service company
Permit to Work (PTW) shall be completed before the work is commenced.
2.4.2. Function Test

A function test shall be required following inspection and/or repairs to equipment which is in
isolation and prior to reintroducing it into service, approval must first be granted by the PTW issuer.
During the function test all safety practices and procedures in place are to be adhered to.
2.4.3. Restoring Service to Equipment

After completing the work the locks shall be removed and only the person who placed their lock
and signed the tag may remove the lock.
The last person removing their lock and releasing the “DO NOT START” tag shall close out the
permit and notify all affected parties that the repairs are complete and the equipment is ready for
service.
The individual restoring energy shall:
• Inspect the work to ensure that non-essential items have been removed.
• Ensure that the equipment components are intact.
• Check the work area to ensure all employees are safely positioned or removed from the
equipment.
• Notify all affected employees.
In the event a person is unavailable to remove the lock, the following procedure shall be
followed:
• Verify that the employee is not on-tour.
• Advise PIC and gain approval to remove absent employee’s lock.
• Ensure that the employee knows that their lock/tag has been removed before they return to
work.
2.4.4. Locks and Tags
• Each unit shall provide standardized tags and individually keyed locks as required to implement
the procedures.
• The keyed locks and tags shall be of a specific design used only for LOTO.
• Tags shall be on a non-reusable type.
• During isolations, keys to all locks used in the LOTO process shall be kept in a lock box under

B.2. Lock-Out & Tag-out (LOTO)
the control of the PIC and shall not be kept on individual’s person.
2.4.5. Long term isolation procedure
In the event it is necessary to isolate a piece of equipment for an extended period of time or more
than one tour, the following procedure shall be followed:
• A permit shall be raised; a record of the isolation shall be made in the Isolation Log added on
the Active Isolation List displayed in the control room/permit issuing office.
• The equipment shall be isolated, locked and tagged out. When isolation of the equipment has
been completed (i.e., removal of equipment) the electrical PTW and all safeguards shall remain
in place
When work/repairs have been completed on the isolated equipment, the following steps shall be
followed:
• All LOTO equipment shall be removed following all safety procedures.
• Once the equipment is back in service and all systems have been returned to a safe condition,
the PTW shall then be cancelled. Signed off
2.4.6. Training
Employees are required to perform LOTO procedures shall receive training in these procedures
before performing the procedures. This training shall be documented.
2.4.7. Audit
LOTO system shall be audited by drilling contractor or Service Company to evaluate its
implementation and potential improvement opportunities. Records of these audits are to be
available for revision.

B3. HSE Drills
B.3. HSE Drills
3.1. Scope
An emergency drill is a procedure carried out to practice how an individual/ groups would respond
to an unexpected event to a simulated crisis such as fire, H2S release, kick etc.
3.2. Purpose
The purpose of this procedure is to describe the requirements to ensure all personnel onboard
are adequately qualified and trained regarding safety at all organization units and that drills and
exercises are carried out to:
• Tests and develops the communication arrangements.
• Tests emergency equipment under realistic conditions.
• Maintains and develops individual competencies in emergency response, including command
and control activities.
• Monitors the performance of individuals to identify areas of improvement and any additional
training requirements.
• Verifies data and assumptions used in the emergency response assessments, E.g. times to
evacuate / escape and muster etc.
3.3.1. Person in Charge (PIC)
Operator’s or Contractor’s PIC is responsible / lead the team on EOC (Emergency Operating
Center) and insuring that drills are conducted in safe and professional manner and deficiencies must
be observed, documented and monitored to prevent the reoccurrence in any real emergency case.
Note:
- The authority shall be delegated to Night Pusher to perform the drills during the night shift.
- In the absence / incapacitated of the Person in Charge (PIC) the STP shall replace him.
3.3.2. Barge Engineer (BE)
Is the On Scene Commander, the Damage Control Leader, Fire Marshal for leads Fire Fighting and
communicate and report the situation to EOC (Emergency Operating Center)
3.3.3. Other Personnel responsibilities:

- Developing and implementing a drill and exercise program, based on the reliable scenarios
identified below, will ensure that all procedures of the
- Emergency response plan are practiced and tested for realistic potential incidents, including
the command and control activities.
- All Personnel shall participate in every drill; responsibilities of all personnel will be mentioned
below on every drill procedure.
3.3.4. HSE Engineer shall be responsible for
- Keep a record for all drills on his files.
- Follow up with STP to ensure that all require drills are performed within due date.
- Report all the drills Area of improvements in the drills tracking sheet and work with all rig
supervisor to improve all the weak areas.
3.3.5. Teams:
3.3.5.1. Firefighting team:
To move and control to a fire as quickly as possible. Normally it will be 2 teams on board, Fire
team No. 1 and fire Team No. 2 by the rig crew as per station bill.
3.3.5.2. Gas check and Search / Rescue Team:
To search for any man down due to the emergency case and transport the victim to the Safest

B.3. HSE Drills
place to medical team to start patient treatment.

3.3.5.3. Medical Team:
Lead by the rig Doctor / Medic. Mustered as per Station Bill to make treatment for injured
Persons.
3.4. Drill Procedures

The onshore/offshore drills procedures describe the typical types of emergencies on organization
sites, its frequency, identified alarm for each drill, actions taken and explain the emergency response
knowledge required for all personnel to ensure that they are prepared for an emergency in terms of
escaping, evacuating and rescue from a particular worksite or location.
• Drill is designed to meet a specific training purpose or (e.g. breathing apparatus, procedures for
the fire team members) then it should include mustering of all personnel to both their primary
and their secondary muster points.
• Some drill didn’t require mustering of all Employees, it required other procedures to be done
(e.g. accumulator drill, oil spill drill) and it will be discussed later. However, some drill doesn’t
require mustering of all employees such as fire pump test drill, stop work authority.
• At a minimum, the frequency of each drill should be held and documented according to
organization requirements or if needed as per practice.
• Station bill shall be prepared, approved and posted by each rig contractors.
3.4.1. Well control drills
Shutting-in the well quickly to minimize the size of the influx is a major element of successful well
control.
3.4.2. Pit drill

• The pit drill is designed to simulate an actual kick while drilling ahead and is designed as both
a teaching and testing tool, and also to make driller to constantly aware of the fluid level in the
mud pits.
• Pit drills should be supervised by the STP.
• All equipment required for pit drills is to be available on rig floor and inspected by driller in
each shift prior to drilling and kept in good operating condition.
• Alarm Identity: Continuous sounding of air horn.
• Results of the pit drill shall be documented in the Kick / pit drill form
3.4.2.1. Procedure:
• The STP simulates the kick by raising a float in the mud pits or by raising the arm on the flow
show indicator and making a note of the time.
• Detect the kick and sound alarm.
• The time of the alarm must be noted.
• Upon hearing the alarm, all members of the drilling crew should immediately execute their
assigned duties, identified below.
• The Driller prepares to shut in the well using the approved organization Shut-in Procedure.
Kick / Pit Drill Responsibilities

Position Responsibility
STP / NTP Proceed to Rig Floor and assess situation.
Driller Sound air horn continuously until well is shut in as per organization
Procedure.
Assistant Driller Assist the Driller in shutting in the well and confirming that it is shut in.
Derrick man Proceed to Suction Tank vicinity and prepare to raise mud weight.

B.3. HSE Drills
Kick / Pit Drill Responsibilities

Floor man Remain on Rig Floor and assist the Driller as directed.
Roustabout Foreman Mobilize Assistant Floor men, Crane and Forklift Operators to mud mixing
area.
Assistant Floor man Proceed to mud mixing area to assist the derrick man
Rig Doctor Proceed to Master Point and a wait instruction.
Welder Proceed to Master Point
Senior or Night Electrician Proceed to SCR/VFD House and a wait instruction.
Senior, Night Mechanic Proceed to mechanics workshop and wait instruction.
DSV Receive status report and co-ordinate well kill.
HSE Engineer Shall assist in observing the crew and recording completion times.
All other Personnel Proceed to Master Point
3.4.3. Kick drill

• The kick drill is designed to train the drilling crew to recognize and respond to kick indications
which occur while tripping pipe.
• All equipment required for kick drills is to be available on rig floor and inspected by driller in
each shift prior to drilling and kept in good operating condition.
• Results of the trip / kick drill shall be documented in the Kick / pit drill form
• Responsibilities: Same as above Pit drill
3.4.4. Accumulator Drill
• Accumulator drills / BOP tests are designed to verify that the accumulator/closing system is in
good working order and that it is properly sized for the particular blowout preventer stack.
• Accumulator drills must be conducted when the drill pipe is not in open hole, but up in the
casing.
• Results of the accumulator drill shall be documented in the accumulator drill form
3.4.4.1. Procedure
• Turn off all accumulator-pressurizing pumps.
• Record the initial accumulator, manifold, and annular pressures.
• Close all of the preventers (Except the Blind Rams). Substitute a reopening of a pipe ram to
simulate the blind ram closure when applicable.
• Open the Hydraulic Control Relief (HCR) valve.
• Measure and record the closing times for each preventer with a stopwatch.
• Record the final accumulator, manifold and annular pressures.
• To pass the accumulator test, all BOPs must have closed in less than 30 seconds with at least:
1500 psi accumulator pressure remaining (for a 3000 psi accumulator).
• Observe the remaining pressure for at least 5 minutes to detect any possible ram piston seal
leaks.
• Re-open the BOP and turn the accumulator pump(s) back on.
• Record the time required to charge system back up (recharge time).

B.3. HSE Drills
Accumulator Drill Responsibilities

Senior or Night Tool Proceed to Rig Floor and assess situation.
Pusher
Driller Shut in as per applicable Client Procedure.
Assistant Driller Assist the Driller in shutting in the well and confirming that it is shut in.
Derrick man Proceed to Suction Tank vicinity and prepare to raise mud weight.
HSE Engineer Shall assist in observing the crew and recording completion times.
All other Personnel Work as scheduled
3.4.5. Mustering and Rescue Drills

• Every rig shall provide means of escape and evacuation in a safe manner; two muster points are
required.
• Some of the below drills required mustering and evacuation, other required rescue only, and
others required both.
• All drills have to be performed in a professional way to train employees to be aware of the
onshore/offshore layout, associated emergency procedures, escape routes, muster locations,
alarms locations, usage, , and appropriate response to it, and methods of communication.
• These drills are maintained to ensure effective control and treatment of injured personnel as
required.
• Personnel should receive training relevant to their duties.
• Rescue drills require the use of a dummy in the same size and weight of a real person.
• A rescue team is required to be identified for any rescue drill procedure and they have to be
well trained for all emergency scenarios.
3.4.6. H2S Drill
• Organization is committed to providing adequate arrangements, resources, and training to
facilitate the safe evacuation and escape of personnel in the event of H2S emergency drill. Thus
a secure muster area is provided where all personnel can access.
• Every person who may be required to work on a rig must be able to wear breathing apparatus
within 45 seconds.
• All known persons working near a rig must be able to recognize the H2S alarm and know to
proceed to the Master Point.
• Results, corrective actions, areas of strengths, and response time of the H2S drill shall be
recorded in the H2S drill form
3.4.6.1. Procedure
• Masking up and breathing bottled air for those crew members whose assigned tasks require
breathing apparatus.
• Requiring all non-essential personnel (i.e that have no specific assigned tasks as per the Station
Bill) to musters at upwind Master Point.
• Conducting a head count by using T-Card system for all personnel on board for fast and
efficient head count and search for any missing personnel. All personnel shall flip their T-Cards
on the T-Card Board.
• Alarm Identity: Continuous audible alarm and strobe light.
• The Fixed Gas Detection System Panels will indicate which of the four sensors is in alarm
condition.

B.3. HSE Drills
H2S Drill Responsibility

Senior or Night Tool Proceed to Master Point and don SCBA with selected buddy. Confirm that well
pusher is shut in. Determine source of H2S with useof portable gas detector. Report
status to DSV.
Driller Don SCBA on. Activate air horn. Shut in well and await instruction.
Assistant Driller Proceed to Master Point , then Proceed to gas release location with (30 Min.
SCBA) then report gas readings to PIC
Derrick man Proceed to Master Point. If on Monkey board, wear Escape Hood then proceed
to Master Point.
Floor man If on Rig Floor, don SCBA, and assist Driller. If at Shale Shakers, don SCBA and
proceed to Master Point.
Roustabout Foreman Proceed to Master Point. Don SCBA and await instruction to search.
Assistant Floor man Proceed to Master Point. Two Assistant Floor men don SCBA and await
instruction.
Rig medic Proceed to Master Point with Muster Board, Oxygen Resuscitator and Medical
First Response Kit. Send Runner to alert Main Camp personnel. Proceed to
Muster.
Welder Isolate Welding Machine and Oxy/Acy sets.
Radio operator T-Card Head counting
If R.O is not available, Material man shall be assigned for this task, but for a
work over rigs derrick man is assigned
HSE Engineer Go to Master Point. Monitoring crew performance and areas of improvement.
Senior or Night Proceed to SCR / VFD House and stand ready to electrical isolate the power
Electrician for any required equipment
Senior, Night or Proceed to Engine room and stand ready to mechanical isolate any required
Assistant Mechanic equipment/lines
Rig Driver Turn off vehicle engine and proceed to Master Point. Await instructions.
DSV Proceed to Master Point and receive status reports. Respond as per company
policy.
All Other Personnel Proceed to Master Point
3.4.7. H2S Rescue Drill

• It is a drill that are done to measure the response of the rescue team and the medic in a man
down or missing scenario.
• Rescue Team members should be trained and physically fit to be able to carry out rescue
operations while donning SCBA. Training should include classroom training, on-the-job training
in rescue techniques, and an examination.
• There must be no prior warning of this drill, nor any warning whatsoever that someone is
missing. It is critically important to verify that the standard H2S drill procedure is adequate to
identify who is missing and locate and rescue him.
• Results, corrective actions, areas of strengths, and response time of the H2S drill shall be
documented in the H2S drill form

B.3. HSE Drills
3.4.7.1. Procedure
Follow the above normal H2S drill procedure with addition to:
• HSE Engineer / STP shall assign a person to be a man down in a specific place
• No other one knows that there is a man down or missing
Rig crew must be able to identify that someone is missing by using T-Card system for all personnel
on board for fast and efficient head count. All personnel shall flip their T-Cards on the T-Card Board,
locate the missing person, and rescue him by bringing him to the Master Point and administering
appropriate first aid.
Alarm Identity: Continuous audible alarm and Strobe light. The Fixed Gas Detection System Panels
will indicate which of the four sensors is in alarm condition. There must be No prior warning of the
drill
Note: The Rig Public announcement (PA) system shall immediately and repeatedly announce “This
is a Drill__ This is a Drill”
H2S Rescue Drill

Senior or Night Tool Proceed to Master Point and don SCBA with selected buddy. Confirm that well
pusher is shut in. Determine source of H2S with use of portable gas detector. Report
status to DSV.
Driller Don SCBA. Activate air horn. Shut in well and await instruction.
Assistant Driller Proceed to Master Point , then Proceed to gas release location with 30 Min.
SCBA then report gas readings to PIC
Derrick man Proceed to Master Point. If on Monkey board don Escape Hood then proceed
to Master Point.
Floorman If on, Rig Floor don SCBA and assist Driller. If at Shale Shakers don SCBA and
proceed to Master Point then they will be secondary rescue team
Roustabout Foreman Rescue team leader Proceed to Master Point. Don SCBA and await instruction
to search.
Assistant Floorman Proceed to Master Point. Rescue team
Medic Proceed to Master Point with Muster Board, Oxygen Resuscitator and Medical
First Response Kit. Send Runner to alert Main Camp personnel. Take Muster.
Welder Isolate Welding Machine and Oxy / Acy sets.
work over rigs derrick man is assigned
HSE Engineer Go to Master Point. Monitoring crew performance and areas of improvement
Senior or Night Proceed to SCR / VFD House and stand ready to electrical isolate the power
Electrician for any required equipment
Senior, Night or Proceed to Engine room and stand ready to mechanical isolate any required
Assistant Mechanic equipment/lines
Rig Driver Turn off vehicle engine and proceed to Master Point. Await instructions.
DSV Proceed to Master Point and receive status reports. Respond as per Clint
policy.

B.3. HSE Drills
H2S Rescue Drill

All other personnel Turn off engines and proceed to Master Point.
3.4.8. Firefighting
Fire drill may be done in the main camp or in the rig site that aims:
• To provide an orderly emergency response plan for all employees.
• To ensure all exit routes, emergency staircases are not obstructed and can be used in an orderly
fashion during emergencies.
• To ensure fast, organized and smooth evacuation during emergencies.
• To train rescue team on the fire drill, emergency evacuation and to conduct their duties
successfully.
• To test the working conditions and effectiveness of all fire and emergency equipment.
• Results of the firefighting drill including location, type of drill, time to assemble and fire fight;
shall be documented in the firefighting drill form
3.4.8.1. Procedure
• Sound the fire alarm and shout fire, fire and fire
• Actions to execute when fire is seen and where.
• Starting of a fire pump, using required jets of water to show that the system is in proper working
order.
• Inspection of fireman’s outfit and other personal rescue equipment, for correct use and
donning.
• The HSE Engineer shall observe and time drill crew response.
• Fire drill locations shall be varied to provide practice in all Fire Attack Plans.
• Conducting a head count for all personnel by using T-Card system for all personnel on board
for fast and efficient head count and search for any missing personnel. All personnel shall flip
their T-Cards on the T-Card Board.
• Alarm Identity: Sounding of intermittent tone and followed by an announcement in the PA
clarifying the location of the fire.
Fire Drill Responsibilities
Senior or Night Tool Proceed to fire team muster point and Direct firefighting operation.
Pusher
Driller Make PA announcements as to the fire location. Prepare to shut in the well.
Assistant Driller Fire Team Leader. Proceed to Fire Team Muster Point
Derrick man Proceed to Master Point.
Floor man Proceed to fire team muster point and One Floor man to remain on Rig Floor
to assist Driller.
Roustabout Foreman Back-up Fire Team Leader. Proceed to Fire Team Muster Point
Assistant Floorman Proceed to fire team muster point
Rig Doctor Proceed to Master Point with Muster Board, Oxygen Resuscitator and Medical
First Response Kit. Take Muster.
Welder Isolate Welding Machine and Oxy / Acy sets.
work over rigs, a derrick man is assigned

B.3. HSE Drills
Fire Drill Responsibilities

HSE Engineer Go to Master Point. Monitoring crew performance and areas of improvement.
Senior or Night Proceed to SCR / VFD House and stand ready to make electrical isolations.
Electrician
Senior, Night or Proceed to and start diesel driven water pump. Remain in vicinity.
Assistant Mechanic
Ambulance driver Drive the ambulance if available and Proceed to Master Point.
Client DSV Proceed to Master Point and receive status reports. Respond as per Client
Company policy.
All other Personnel Proceed to Master Point.
3.4.9. Secondary Drill (disaster drill)

• Every rig shall conduct an annual emergency disaster drill, to be ready for any unexpected
events that may happens in work location.
• Disaster drill may be a combination from different scenarios (e.g. Well control situation, gas
release and man down) as such situations will be reported and evaluated by rig Supt and HSE
Rig supporter and shall require minimal mobilization of equipment and personnel.
• It aims to identify any recurring areas of emergency operations preparedness weaknesses in
secondary drills, the adequacy, effectiveness, and ensure continuous emergency response
preparedness training initiatives.
• Results, corrective actions and areas of strengths of the secondary drill shall be documented on
secondary drill form
3.4.9.1. Procedure
• A secondary drill required the participation of all employees depending on the type of
emergencies.
• It has no typical procedures, but depends on the emergency scenarios chosen to perform the
drill.
• STP will use the Thuraya phone (If available) after recognizing the situation to call the rig
superintendent to let him assess the situation.
• Alarm Identity: Depends on the scenarios
• Responsibilities will be determined as per the scenario approved by rig Superintendent and
HSE Rig Supporter.
3.4.10. Man down (Injury) Drill
• Each rig shall conduct a medical drill that complies and introduce the medical emergency
treatment in different scenarios.
• Every rig shall address and post the numbers of the nearest medical facility and nearest Client
medical clinic.
• The drill shall be combined with any of the rescue drills such as H2S man down drill and first
aid, confined space rescue drill.
3.4.10.1. Procedure
• Drill comes after a scenario of a rescue drill so conducted a normal situation in addition to the
first aid drill procedures which is:
- Immobilizing a casualty.
- Using the correct techniques when maneuvering a casualty in to a stretcher.
- Identifying the appropriate type of stretcher to use.
- Basic First Aid.
- CPR.

B.3. HSE Drills
- If needed transferred to the ambulance to the nearest hospital.

• Alarm Identity: Depends on the scenario and fast announcement
• Responsibilities will be determined as per the scenario of the rescue drill.
• Results of the drill, its location, type of drill, type of injury and time to bring injured person to
the clinic shall be documented in the Man down (injury) form
3.4.11. Man Lost Search / Rescue Drill
• Each rig shall conduct a man lost drill. It usually done by: the pickup driver lost in desert
scenario to identify, assess the risk and the consequences of the real situation if it happened
and check the quality and the effective of the GPS system and the Thuraya phone (If available)
assuming no mobile signal.
• Results, corrective actions and areas of strengths of the man lost drill shall be documented in
the man lost drill form
3.4.11.1. Procedure
• The scenario of the man lost should be done by STP and HSE Engineer approved by the rig
SUPT and HSE Rig Supporter and could be as minimum:
- Driver lost his way and missing and there is no contact.
- PIC reviewed JMS and called organization Office to inform the situation and then Primary
Response Plan (PRP) is activated
- Started to contact the driver (Failed due to weak mobile signal) then, tried to contact his
family / friends who may know the driver (No Body have an idea) and finally tried to Contact
nearest hospitals and police stations (His name is not listed)
- Secondary Response Plan is activated and DSV notified about missing person in the desert,
a meeting is conducted to plan the search route of the grounding search included the black
road and off road searches and Thuraya phone is provided to the selected search team.
• Ground search Plan started with a planned route.
• Alarm Identity: No alarm required
• Responsibilities will be determined as per the approved scenario.
3.4.12. Vertical Rescue Drill
• Each rig shall conduct a vertical rescue drill (using dummy) to prevent the injuries that could
happened during the mobilization of an injured person while working at height.
• A vertical rescue drill scenario could differ according the place of injury; a vertical rescue kit
(working on height rescue kit) could be used while:
- Using man riding
- Using man basket
- Working over roofs
• Results, corrective actions and areas of strengths of the vertical rescue drill including location,
type of drill, time to transfer injured person to clinic shall be documented in the vertical rescue
drill form
3.4.12.1. Procedure
• The scenario of the vertical rescue drill should be done by STP and HSE Engineer approved by
the rig Superintendent and HSE rig supporter and could be as minimum:
- The usage of the dummy is Must.
- Prompt notification of the Medic.
- First aid at the injury site if possible.
- Placing and securing the injured person in a basket stretcher (appropriate rescue equipment).
- Transferring the injured person from height to the rig clinic (during all drills, a suitably
weighted dummy must be used).
• Alarm Identity: No alarm required only fast announcement on PA system
3.4.13. Confined Space Rescue Drill
• Each rig shall conduct a confined space rescue drill to prevent the injuries that could happen

B.3. HSE Drills
during the mobilization of an injured or unconscious person working inside a confined space, it
also ensures the effectiveness of the usage of the confined space rescue kit.
• Rescue Team members should be trained and physically fit to be able to carry out rescue
operations while don a SCBA. Training should include classroom training, on-the-job training in
rescue techniques, and an examination.
• Results, corrective actions and areas of strengths of the confined space rescue drill including
location, type of drill, rescue equipment used and time to transfer injured person to clinic shall
be documented in the confined space rescue drill form
3.4.13.1. Procedure
• The scenario of the Confined Space Rescue Drill should be done by STP and HSE Engineer
approved by the rig Superintendent and HSE Section Head and could be as minimum:
- The usage of the dummy is Mast
- Confined space rescue kit has to be available and in good condition and used to mobilize IP to
ground level.
- Prompt notification of the Medic.
- First aid at the injury site if possible.
- Placing and securing the injured person in a basket stretcher (appropriate rescue equipment).
- Transferring the injured person from height to the rig clinic (during all drills, a suitably
weighted dummy must be used).
• A PTW shall be done before conducting drill to ensure that all controls in place while entering a
confined space.
• The drill shall be conducted by confined space entry rescue team, confined space rescue
equipment (Tripod & winch, Elsa escape, Harness W/shoulders D-ring and Y-lanyard).
• Alarm Identity: No alarm required only fast announcement on PA system
3.4.14. Environmental Protection Drills
• Environmental drill has to be done to ensure that every rig has the appropriate spill prevention
and cleanness equipment and effective to be used without causing any harm to personal or
environment.
• The rig has to work to prevent incidents that may result in spills of hazardous substances.
• This means making sure that the facilities are well designed, safely operated, and properly
inspected and maintained. It also involves an effective spill emergency response capability.
• Organization plan, prepare and practice on emergency response to incidents to mitigate the
consequences to people and the environment.
3.4.15. Oil Spill / Clean up Drill
• Conducting an oil spill drill will help to achieve continuous performance improvement. And
manage health, safety, environment and social performance in a systematic way, it also train
persons to conduct a safe clean plan to any spill happened that could harm personnel or
environment.
• Results, corrective actions and areas of strengths of the Oil spill drill shall be documented in
the Oil spill drill form
3.4.15.1. Procedure
• The scenario of the Oil spill drill should be done by STP and HSE Engineer approved by the rig
SUPT and HSE Rig supporter and could be as minimum:
- Observation of the incident or spill scene.

- PIC should perform a safe cleanliness plan.
- Use and demonstration of all rig clean-up equipment that shall be located in designated
areas.
- The equipment used during drills shall immediately be brought back to its fully operational
condition and any faults and defects discovered during the drills shall be remedied as soon as
possible.

B.3. HSE Drills
• Alarm Identity: No alarm required only fast announcement on PA system.

• Responsibilities will be determined and mentioned as per the approved scenario.
3.4.16. Emergency Equipment Maintenance Drills
Emergency maintenance drills has to be conducted to show and test the effectiveness and the
operation of the emergency equipment used in the emergency cases such as checking of the fire
pump.
3.4.17. Weekly Fire Pump Test

• Each rig shall conduct a fire pump test drill to ensure the effectiveness of the fire pump and
insure that maintenance procedures are quietly done in appropriate manner.
• Results, corrective actions and areas of strengths of the fire pump drill shall be documented in
the fire pump drill form
3.4.17.1. Procedure
• Rig Electrician and mechanic to confirm and inspect their checkpoints as per the fire pumps
checklist
• Operate the pump to document the max pressure.
• The usage of at least one fire hose while operating the pump and the checking of any water
leaks in lines or hoses.
• The presence of the rig HSE Engineer while the drill is required to ensure that all steps has been
done safely and appropriate.
• Alarm Identity: No alarm required.
• Responsibilities: As per mentioned in the procedures and the fire pump drill form
3.4.18. Stop Work Authority drill
• STOP work authority (SWA) drills shall be conducted to Measure the level of employee’s
awareness and test its effectiveness to enhance the reporting and encourage STOP work
authority.
• Each individual has the right to stop work at any time if you see or witness something you feel
unsafe or just doesn’t feel right and also shall participate in Stop work authority drill.
• All Employees are committed to use the Stop work authority as it is a very important and a
proactive tool to avoid accidents and correct unsafe acts and conditions before facing incidents.
• Alarm Identity: No alarm required.
• Weekly STOP work Authority (SWA) Drill
STW Responsibilities:
HSE Engineer Coordinate the drill scenario to achieve the direct benefit of the drill and
discuss it with crew members while safety meetings.
STP Give any required support to complete the drill properly.
Note: All workplace employees will be determined as per the scenario of the SWA drill.
3.4.19. Emergency Drills for Offshore

The procedure of each drill depends on the type of the drill as following:
• Abandon rig drill
• Life boat drill
• Man-overboard drill
• Security drill
• Helicopter emergency drill

B.3. HSE Drills
3.4.20. Abandon Rig Drill

• This exercise will be conducted weekly by rig crew and supervised by the OIM / Barge Engineer.
• Abandon drill shall be realistic and practical as possible with the use and demonstration of all
rig lifesaving equipment including:
- Reporting to stations and preparing for the duties described in the station bill.
- Checking that crew are suitably dressed.
- Checking that lifejackets are correctly donned.
- Lowering of at least one lifeboat after any necessary preparation for launching.
- Different lifeboats shall, as far as practicable, be lowered in compliance with this requirement
at successive drills.
• Summoning of crew to muster stations with the alarm followed by drill announcement on the
public address or other communication system and ensuring that they are made aware of the
order to abandon the rig.
• Each lifeboat shall be launched and maneuvered in the water at least once every three months
during an abandon ship drill.
- Starting and operating the lifeboat engine.
- Operation of davits used for launching life rafts.
- Search and rescue of passengers trapped in their staterooms.
• The OIM will decide if more frequent abandon ship drills are required to ensure adequate
response.
• Abandon ship Drills must include everyone on board, with the possible exception of only those
crew members absolutely essential to maintain a safe watch over the on-going operation.
• Abandon ship drills may be combined with fire and / or H2S drills.
• The maximum acceptable response time for abandon ship drills must take into account:
- The possibility that evacuation may have to proceed in a hazardous H2S environment.
- Therefore, everyone on board must be able to muster to the boat stations and enter it with
enough time left to lower the boats and sail to a safe upwind area before the SCBA’s run out
of air.
- Everyone on board must be with their assigned boat within 12 minutes of the alarm first
sounding.
• Fully occupied lifeboats shall not be lowered into the water as part of the abandon ship drill.
When performing drills with personnel on the lifeboat, the lifeboat must first be:
- Lowered and recovered without persons on board to ensure all equipment is functioning
correctly.
- The next launching should only be with the number of personnel on board necessary to
operate the boat.
- FRC crew contacted to ensure landing area is kept clear with life boat crew.
- Coxswain (The person in charge of a boat) entered lifeboat, started engine, activated
sprinklers system
3.4.20.1. Procedures:
• Emergency Operating center (EOC) manned by senior rig management.
• Immediate and repeated PA announcement “ This a Drill__ This is a Drill”
• A trained and competent muster checker shall be assigned on each lifeboat.
• Headcount procedure for verification / reporting (to the EOC), that all persons are accounted for
Search and rescue procedure to locate all missing persons.
• Maximum acceptable response time for all persons to report to their boat / Raft stations.
• Verification that everyone aboard the rig is capable of entering the lifeboat and securely
fastened his seat belt while wearing both a PFD and SCBA.
• Instruction in the use of radio life-saving appliances.
• Alarm Identity: According to Station Bill.
• For Abandon Rig Drill

B.3. HSE Drills
3.4.21. Life Boat Drill

Life boats shall be launched with their assigned crew aboard and maneuvered in the water.
3.4.22. Man-Overboard Drills

• Each offshore rig shall develop Man-Overboard rescue procedures and train a sufficient number
of crewmen for safe and prompt rescue.
• This drill is conducted at least once per 12 weeks. OIM will decide if more frequent man
overboard drills are required to ensure adequate response.
3.4.22.1. Procedure
• A suitably floatable dummy shall be used to simulate a man overboard. Man overboard drills
shall involve either (or both) the standby boat, when available on that specific rig.
• If no standby boat is readily available, the rig must launch a rescue boat to retrieve the dummy.
• Each man-overboard drill including the response time to rescue the man overboard shall be
documented
• Alarm Identity: No alarm required only fast announcement on PA system.
Responsibilities
MOB (Man over Board) Leader is Barge engineer.
Station Bill Shall assign the team members, they are responsible for Launching Fast
Rescue Boat Don lifesaving equipment for rescue the MOB person.
First Aid team Shall wait for the casualty with stretcher & first aid kit.
3.4.23. Security Drill

• The objective of this drill is to ensure that shipboard personnel are proficient in all assigned
security duties at all security levels and the identification of any security related deficiencies
which need to be addressed.
• Security drills will be implemented to ensure the effective implementation of the provisions of
the ship security measures.
3.4.24. Helicopter emergency drill
• Helicopter emergency drill shall be done once every month in helicopter emergency drill form
• Foam system shall be operate during this drill.
3.5. Communication
• HSE Engineer shall ensure that all drills observations and corrective actions are communicated
to all employees who are affected by the drill during the drill done after finishing the drill.
• All the observations and corrective actions must be tracked in the drills tracking sheet and to be
filed in the drills file.
• A follow up on the corrective action must be done by the Rig HSE Engineer during the drill after
finding the observation.
• A drill tracking sheet shall be developed monthly and updated weekly that include all drills
performed during the month, the due date for the next drills to avoid any incompliance.
• this drill tracking sheet shall be sent to the organization office monthly to track and informed
about the next drills which needs to be pre-planned to develop a good scenario.

B.3. HSE Drills
3.6. Drills Matrix
Drills / Intervals Weekly Bi-Weekly Monthly 3 Months 6 Months 12 Months
Kick Drill / Pit drill

Accumulator Drill / BOP Drill
Fire Drill - Rig Site
Fire Drill - Camp Site
Onshore / Offshore Drills
Man down ( Injury ) Drill

Vertical Rescue Drill
Man Over Board Drill and Rescue
Boat
Confined space rescue drill
H2S Release Emergency Drill
H2S Rescue Drill

Annual Emergency Drill Disaster
Oil Spill Drill
Fire Pump Drill
Stop work Authority drill
Helicopter Emergency
For Offshore Drills
Life boat drill

Security Drill
only
Abandon Rig Drill

Life Boat Drill
Fire Drill

B4. DROPS prevention program
B.4. DROPS prevention Program
4.1. Scope
Providing guidelines to all personnel of rig contractors and service companies to prevent dropped
objects.
Assist with the reduction and elimination of potential dropped objects through:
• Standard approach to DROPS surveys and inspections
• Commitment to training.
4.2. Purpose
To convey EGPC’s expectations regarding the prevention of injury to personnel and damage to
equipment from potential dropped objects.
4.3. Definitions
4.3.1. DROPS
Dropped Objects Prevention Scheme.
4.3.2. DROPS Inspection

Inspection performed by rig crews using DROPS Inspection Books.
4.3.3. Fail List / Corrective Action List

A list of remedial actions resulting from the conditional assessment of the Dropped Objects
Survey.
4.3.4. Independent Dropped Objects Survey

A conditional assessment and equipment survey by a 3rd Party resulting in the makeup of the
Dropped Objects Survey, Dropped Objects Inspection Book and a Fail list /Corrective action list.
4.3.5. Inspection Book

A picture book containing all necessary information for the rig crews to use to perform rig based
Dropped Objects Inspections.
4.3.6. Inspection Procedure

Description of how rig crews perform a Dropped Objects Inspections.
4.3.7. Mitigation of Dropped Objects

Reduce the consequences of an incident if preventive measures fail.
4.3.8. Prevention of Dropped Objects

Prevent an item from dropping by reducing the likelihood of the event.
4.3.9. Primary retention

The primary means of securing equipment at height is by reducing the likelihood of it dropping,
e.g., nuts, bolts, screws, clamps, brackets, turnbuckles or welding.
4.3.10. Retention Methodology

A systematic approach to retaining equipment at height (see Primary/Secondary).
4.3.11. Secondary retention

Refers to the mitigating measure put in place to reduce the consequence should the primary
retention fail

4.3.12. Static Dropped Object

A solid object, initially at rest, that falls from its original position under its own weight.
4.3.13. Dynamic Dropped Object

A solid object that breaks free from its fastenings due to the applied force from the impact of some
other or a moving object.
It is the responsibility of the Ri contractors/ operators Person in Charge (PIC)/business unit to
ensure compliance with this program.
4.5. General requirements

4.5.1. All rig contractors and service companies must have DROPS program that:
• Follows Industry best practices, referencing dropsonline.org and reliably securing the last
version.
• Communicates dropped objects expectations and requirements to all parties concerned.
• Can verify compliance and effectiveness through the audit process.
4.5.2. Each installation with a DROPS program shall have the following :
• An annual Independent 3rd party dropped objects survey as per industry-recommended
guidelines from the approved vendors’ list.
• Defined DROPS survey and inspection criteria.
• Perform periodic DROPS inspections on the rig by the rig crew.
4.5.3. An effective tracking system:
Implemented by the rig contractor to be used to schedule, track, and monitor:
• All 3rd Party DROPS surveys and inventory lists.
• All periodic DROPS inspections performed by rig crews.
• All corrective action or fail lists (all lists to be closed out and documented, including photos as
evidence).
4.5.4. Equipment Inventory
An inventory of all equipment at height must be in place. If the rig does not possess an Inventory,
the process can be done by onboard personnel or retrieved from their 3rd party DROPS survey.
• Each zone will have an inventory of equipment and shall be recordable.
• The rig supervisors will analyze any equipment that is added or removed for any potential
knock-on effects.
• The inventory must be updated and any equipment should be added or removed.
4.5.5. Secondary Retention
All secondary retention systems shall be OEM-compliant and/or certified designs installed
following the applicable OEM design and installation standards.
4.5.6. Worksite Hazard Management

Each rig is responsible for the implementation of its Safety Management System. This should
include but is not limited to the following:
• An adequate working at height policy and procedure.
• A working at heights or derrick log book accountable to the area PIC.
• DROPS toolbox/toolkits.
• Address Dropped Object Management using Safety Management Tools:
- JSA/PTW.
- Pre-Tour Meetings/Toolbox Talk.

- STOP WORK AUTHORITY.

- Management of Change process.
- Behavioral Based Safety program.
- DROPS Cargo and Collision Checklists (Appendix No.5).
- DROPS Calculator (Appendix No.3).
- DROPS Inspection Books.
- Zone Management (i.e., Red or No Go Zones shall be clearly identified)
4.6. DROPS Survey and Inspection Criteria

The following guidelines are to ensure all DROPS surveys and inspections are performed
consistently. Areas
Identify and divide the Derrick and rig into small manageable zones to assist with the inspection
process. The number of zones shall depend on the size and type of rig.
4.6.1. Example of land rig:

• Zone1: Crown Area.
• Zone 2: Upper Derrick to Monkey Board.
• Zone 3: Travelling Equipment + TD Rails.
• Zone 4: Under Monkey Board to Rig Floor.
• Zone 5: Lower Substructure and BOP area.
• Zone 6: All other Areas:
- Cranes.
- Communication Masts.
- Storerooms, Machinery spaces.
- Living quarters (internal or external).
- Other areas as determined by the PIC.
4.6.2. Example of Offshore rig:
• Zone1: Crown to Water Table
• Zone 2: Upper Derrick to Monkey Board
• Zone 3: Travelling Equipment and TD Rails
• Zone 4: Under Monkey Board to Rig Floor
• Zone 5: Lower Substructure/Cantilever and BOP deck.
• Zone 6: Cranes (various)
• Zone 7: Jack Houses and raised platforms
• Zone 8: Navigation/Communication masts
• Zone 9: Living quarters (internal or external)
• Zone10: Other areas as determined by the OIM/PIC
4.6.3. DROPS Inspection Frequency of land rigs
Item Zones/ Areas Frequency

1 Derrick Zone1, Zone2, Zone3 and Zone 4 and cranes Weekly
2 Below rig floor, Substructure, BOP and cellar area Monthly
3 All other areas Monthly
4 Mast Monthly
5 Shale shakers, Mud/ cement tanks, mixing area Monthly
6 Accommodation Monthly
7 Other areas determined by PIC Monthly

4.6.4. DROPS Inspection Frequency of Offshore Rigs
Item Zones/ Areas Frequency

1 Derrick Zone1, Zone2, Zone3 and Zone 4 and cranes Weekly
2 lower Substructure/ cantilever and BOP deck Monthly
3 Jack Houses and Raised Platforms Monthly
4 Navigation/Communication Masts Monthly
5 Living Quarters (external and internal) Monthly
6 Other areas as determined by OIM/PIC Monthly
4.6.5. Additional Rig Crew DROPS Inspections would be required for the following:
• Raising and lowering mast (Rig move).
• Rig up of new equipment.
• Pre spud.
• Excessive vibration (top hole).
• Fishing and jarring.
• Adverse weather.
4.6.6. DROPS Survey
Independent 3rd Party survey companies and personnel must be able to demonstrate competence
in the following:
• Survey and inspection techniques.
• Industry recognized rope access qualification.
• Knowledge in working at height procedures.
• Permit to work systems (rig specific).
• Use of approved tools at height.
4.6.7. Survey Specification
The Independent 3rd Party Survey Company is responsible for ensuring that:
• All common guidelines and industry recommended practices are adhered to during the DROPS
survey.
• A detailed corrective action/fail listing for equipment that does not meet industry guidelines.
• Inform the OIM/PIC of any equipment that represents an immediate danger.
4.6.8. Survey requirements
The following tasks shall be performed and captured using photographic evidence, alongside a
written format for producing the DROPS Survey:
• Document the equipment location by the inspection area.
• Photograph each item.
• Describe each item.
• Inspect and record the primary and secondary retaining methodology.
• Record equipment condition as a Pass/Fail. Include comments as satisfactory or reasons and
priorities based on risk for failures.
• Allocate an inspection frequency, i.e., weekly or monthly, etc.
• Generate a corrective actions list/fail list.
N.B: The independent survey company personnel are to identify and remove any equipment in
immediate danger of falling, and remove any redundant material if required.

4.6.9. Documentation
Survey companies are to deliver to the Drilling contractor the following deliverables within a
reasonable time frame:
• Dropped objects survey report.
• Corrective action/fail list.
• Dropped objects inspection books (by area and frequency).
4.6.10. Vendors List
All annual DROPS surveys shall be conducted by vendors on the EGPC approved vendor list.
4.6.11. Secondary Retention

Appropriate OEM compliant and installation of secondary retention on equipment identified in the
compliant DROPS inspection surveys should include:
• Retention devices shall have the minimum breaking strength of at least five (5:1) times the
weight of the secured equipment and shall be attached to an appropriate (separate) anchor
point.
• All heavy weight secondary retention applications shall use certified wire rope slings, four (4)
part shackles and certified anchor points included and logged in the lifting equipment register
and inspection process.
4.6.12. Examples of light and heavy weight secondary applications include:
• Light weight secondary applications include: rig lighting/flood lights, safety gates, CCTV
cameras, Communication/alarm system speakers, top drive system (bolts) and signage.
• Heavy weight secondary applications include: HP mud and cementing hoses, bulk transfer
hoses, Bug Blowers, Kelly Hose, monkey board, derrick fingers, casing stabbing board, crown
bumper blocks, tugger sheaves and communication satellites.
4.7. Drops calculators

The DROPS calculator must be used to determine the severity of the dropped objects.
The calculator and other DROPS resources can be downloaded from: www.dropsonline.org.

B5. Rigging & Lifting
B.5. Rigging & Lifting
5.1. Scope
This procedure covers all lifting gear equipment and rigging hardware used within drilling and
workover contractors and service companies as well.
5.2. Purpose
Implementation and adherence to this procedure shall provide the rig management with
documented means to verify that all rigging & lifting equipment in use at the rig have been tested,
certified and inspected by both crew member and third party to ensure that they are fit for the
intended use.
5.3. Definitions
5.3.1. Competent person
The person having the necessary practical and theoretical knowledge, experience, training, skill,
and ability to perform the specific duty to which the requirement refers and shall be certified with
the “APLO and Lifting supervisor” courses as minimum requirement.
5.3.2. Certification
An approved and legally acknowledged method of checking and providing written evidence that a
piece of equipment has been examined and meets required standards.
5.3.3. Certificate of Conformity (COC)

It is the manufacturer’s certificate that confirms that any necessary manufacturing test, or other
product verification required by the standard, has been carried out and states the working load
limit.
5.3.4. Color Coding

A method of marking equipment using paint to give visual indications of its certification status.
This color code should be changed every 6 months (During January & July).
5.3.5. Pre-use inspection

It is a basic visual check for obvious signs of damage, it includes a function check if applicable
before each use.
5.3.6. Lifted equipment

Any device that is used to suspend the load. e.g. containers, tanks, skid, etc.
5.3.7. Blind lift

A lift where at any point in time during the lifting operation the crane operator cannot see the
load
5.3.8. Lifting Plan

A plan contains the details of how the lifting plan shall be undertaken, the lifting equipment and
lifting accessories to be used, how the equipment and lifting accessories shall be rigged up and
control measures in place to manage the risks.
5.3.9. Tandem lift

involving the simultaneous use of more than one crane, hoist or other pieces of powered lifting
equipment, it is recommended that each crane be capable of lifting 75% the total load at the
required boom length and operating radius.

5.3.10. Lifting Accessory

Any device that is used or designed to be used directly or indirectly to connect a load to a
lifting appliance and does not form part of the load e.g. slings, hooks and fittings, swivels, hoist
rings, sheave blocks, lifting harnesses, shackles, eye bolts, rigging screws, drill pipes and casing
elevators.
5.3.11. Working Load Limit (WLL)

It is the maximum load (mass) that an item of lifting equipment is designed to raise, lower or
suspend. WLL is designated by the equipment manufacturer.
5.3.12. Safe Working Load (SWL)

The safe working load (SWL) is the maximum load the equipment can safely lift as assessed by a
competent person. SWL may be equal to or less than WLL.
5.4.1. STP / PIC
is responsible to maintain register of all lifting
equipment’s on location with the help of HSE
Engineer.
5.4.2. Rig Superintendent

• To ensure that relevant staff / Contractors
preparing cargoes from contractor shore
bases, warehouse and Contractors to
pier / port are aware of contents of these
guidelines.
• Shall provide the rig with the required
safety equipment for safe cargo handling
operations.
5.4.3. OIM
• Is responsible for installation safety,
personnel on board and any operation within
the safety zone affecting the installation
safety, OIM may delegate operational task to
other competent person.
• Report cargo handling incidents and
nonconformities to Rig Supt. & Client
representative.
5.4.4. HSE Engineer
• Shall stop any unsafe act / unsafe
observation related to cargo handling and discuss with the crew the safe way of operation.
• Report cargo handling incidents to OIM & HSE Section Head.
• Participate with Incident Investigation Team to find out the root causes & corrective actions.
• Ensure that learning lessons from incidents have been delivered to all personnel on board
through HSE meetings.
5.4.5. Barge Engineer
• Shall prepare the required documentation before loading is initiated for cargo to be shipped
ashore by the vessel.
• Preparation for required paperwork such as PTW, PJSM, JSA, Checklist etc.

• Shall be, or his delegates, responsible for cargo handling operations.

• Ensure that the supply vessel Captain has been informed about simultaneous operations being
carried out by the rig which may affect the supply vessel.
• Shall submit documentation to the vessel Captain before any cargo is loaded on board the
vessel.
• Must ensure drilling rig operations do not present a hazard to vessels alongside specially where
over-side discharges may contact or fall on a vessel working alongside.
• Shall approve commencement of an operation and has the authority to stop any operation.
• Must ensure there is a good level of communication between the vessel crew and the drilling
rig crew.
• Shall ensure that prior to lifting cargoes on board the rig, those cargoes shall be checked on
board the vessel by a competent person whom has the authority to refuse lifting any cargo
against foreseeable hazards.
• J. Must not pressurize vessel Captain to take or execute any decision which in the
• Captain’s professional judgement, compromises the safety of vessel and or crew.
5.4.6. Rig Marine Crew
• Rig marine supervisors and follow workers are responsible for both their own safety and the
safety of those they work with, all crew must always work safely to prevent accidents.
• Identify foreseeable hazards and report it immediately to job supervisor.
• Establish and communicate a clear work scope with vessels to avoid confusions.
• Crew has the authority to stop any operation if unsafe or if in doubt stop and discuss with your
supervisor.
• Crew shall use the required PPE as per EGPC Occupational Health & Safety Procedure.
• Crane Operator must:
- Perform cargo check and complete cargo checklist form.
- Review the cargo manifest to identify the weight of loads.
- Communicate with the supply vessel or supervisor on deck to verify the load being lifted is
correct item listed on the manifest.
5.5. Lifting Gears and Rigging Hardware

Lifting Gear Equipment and Rigging Hardware includes but are not limited to:
• Wire Rope Slings
• Web Sling
• Shackles
• Man Basket
• Pad Eyes
• Personal Elevator
• Chain Blocks
• Turn Buckles
• Cross Lifter
• Master Bushing Lifter
• Pallet Lifter
• Forklift Forks
• Container Lifting Points
• Rams Lifting Eyes
• CSE Rescue Winch
• Swivel of Air Hoist
• Big Bag Rings
• Drum Lifter
• Life boat, rescue boat, winches/davits, and stretchers with lifting points and bridles.
• Crane Hooks
• Snatch Blocks

5.6. Lifting Requirements

• All lifting equipment shall be visually inspected before use to ensure the
• color code is per current Color Code Scheme, with SWL clearly marked.
• Operators of lifting equipment are deemed to have received the required
• training and have been certified to operate subject equipment.
• All Crane operator certifications shall be valid and verified before the crane
• operator is sent to location.
• MODU (Mobile Offshore Drilling Unit) crane operators shall follow the client Requirements. All
marine/offshore crane operators shall have successfully completed the medical examination
prior to applying for initial certification.
• Crane operator shall perform a daily pre-operational safety inspection, prior
• to operating his assigned crane, or whenever operators change, using
• “Crane Daily Check List”, based on crane manufacturer’s daily inspection checklist.
• At the beginning of each shift and before operating the forklift truck, check
• its condition, using “Forklift Daily Check List”, These Inspections are to be reported and signed
by Rig Maintenance and Management PICs. Records of these inspections are to be maintained
in rig locations for a minimum of one year.
Note: The use or possession of mobile phones and tablets is prohibited inside the crane / forklift
cabins.
• All sling types shall have identification information permanently affixed with
• durable identification tags or wire rope swages and shall be maintained
• legible during the life of the sling.
• Sling proof-load test certificates shall be properly filed.
• Aluminum Ferrules are specifically prohibited on all wire rope slings.
• Use of slings that have been repaired shall be prohibited.
• All attaching devices (i.e., rings, links, coupling pins, etc.) shall be selected to provide capacities
equal to, or greater than, the slings used.
• Approved, self-closing safety latches shall be used on all hooks designed for
• safety latches.
5.7. General Instructions

• The rigging hardware manufacturer’s rated SWL capacity shall not be exceeded.
• The maximum allowable speed for the lifting operation is 25 knots or as per OEM instructions
(the less shall be selected)
• Slings shall be shortened, or otherwise adjusted, only by methods approved
• by the sling manufacturer.
• Slings shall not be shortened or lengthened by knotting, by re-splicing, or by
• wire rope clips.
• Eyes in wire rope slings shall not be formed using knots.
• Once the task involving webbing, synthetic slings has been completed, the slings shall be
inspected by a competent person.
• Slings shall be hitched in a manner that provides the best control of the
• load.
• The running line of wire rope sling must come to shackle bow and not on the
• bolt while using the choke hitch loading.
• Slings or other rigging hardware in contact with sharp corners shall be
• padded with material of sufficient strength to minimize damage to the sling,
• other rigging hardware, and / or the load being lifted.
• Working conditions that may affect slings and other rigging hardware shall
• be considered, with special attention to temperatures, chemicals, abrasions, etc.
• Horizontal sling angles less than thirty degrees (30º) shall not be used.
• Each tubular lift shall always be slung with two slings, each of the same length and of the same
SWL. The SWL of each sling should be equal to or greater than the Gross Weight of the load.
Slings shall be placed at equal distance (approximately 25%) from the ends of the load with the

internal angle at the hook not greater than 90 degrees.

• Bundle tubulars of different sizes is prohibited.
• Barrel lifters shall be utilized while transferring chemical / engine oil / coolant
• drums using the forklift or the crane from the storage area to work area.
• Hooks are not allowed to be used with lifting hoists to lift equipment on the rig floor.
While using web sling the mentioned below requirements must be considered:
• Web sling is final choice.
• Web sling must be in secured storage area controlled by PIC (locked).
• Only used under PTW mentioning in it the web sling Serial no.
• Pre-use inspection for certification validity and Condition Check for wear, cuts and abrasions.
The surface tension resulting makes damaged fibers or cuts easier to see. Watch for frayed
edges, broken fibers pulled stitches, cuts, burns and chemical damage.
• Observe closely for any breaks in the stitching.
Ensure that:
• Made from synthetic materials with a safety factor of 7 to 1.
• Synthetic web slings are to be permanently marked with the manufacturer’s name, stock
number, type of material, and rate loads for different types of hitches.
• Web slings are not to be used where fumes, vapors, sprays, mists, liquids
• of acids.
• Web slings are to be immediately removed from service if any of the following conditions are
present:
- acid or caustic burns, melting or charring of any part of the sling surface, snags, punctures,
tears or cuts, broken or worn stitches, or distortion of fittings.
- Never lift load Exceed the SWL of the Web sling
Synthetic Web Slings. 1 Ply. Triangle & Eye/Eye type. Related capacity in pounds
Sling body width
(inches)
vertical choker
Vertical basket
60 deg. basket 45 deg. basket 30 deg. basket
1 1,000 750 2,000 1,700 1,400 1,000
2 2,000 1,500 4,000 3,500 2,800 2,000
3 3,000 2,200 6,000 5,200 4,200 3,000
4 4,000 3,000 8,000 6,900 5,700 4,000
5 5,000 3,700 10,000 8,700 7,100 5,000
6 6,000 4,500 12,000 10,400 8,500 6,000
All angles shown are measured from the horizontal
5.7.1. Storage
• All unused lifting accessories shall be stored in a dry place, kept away from the outdoor
weather conditions.
• The unused accessories for a long time shall be kept inside a storage area (i.e. Container) or be
covered by plastic sheets.
• Stored slings shall be lubricated by their specific lubricants to avoid corrosion.
5.7.2. Inspection
5.7.2.1. Pre-use Inspection
Visual examination by competent persons (STP, NTP, Driller, AD, HSE Engineer) prior to use.
Records are not required. A pre-use inspection should include such things as:
• Broken wire
• Kinks or dictions of the sling body

• Condition of eyes and splices, and any attachment hardware

• Reduction in diameter of the rope
• Any damage
• Corrosion
Whenever a sling is found to be deficient, the eyes must be cut, or other end attachments or
fittings removed to prevent further use, and the sling body discarded.
5.7.2.2. Periodic Inspection
Detailed visual, MPI & load test inspection by a certified rigger / rigging competent person
performed as per OEM requirement or latest client approved intervals. The inspection is recorded in
the lifting gear register listing any deficiencies found.
Periodic inspections records shall be kept for the life of the rigging & lifting equipment and, as a
minimum, include the following information:
• Frequency of use
• Severity of service conditions
• Nature of lifts being made
• Experience gained on the service life of slings used in similar circumstances.
All safety devices provided on MODU cranes such as boom stops, boom angle indicators, and
anti-two-blocking switches and any other limit switch, shall be kept in proper working order and
diligently function tested during each required pre-operation safety inspection.
All lighting installed on a MODU crane by the manufacturer, including boom lights, travel lights,
instrument panel lights, and warning lights shall be properly maintained and used. All lights shall be
included in Rig DROPS program.
5.7.3. Color Code

• All new lifting equipment placed in
service must be marked with the current
color code.
• Defective or damaged rigging
hardware or rigging hardware shall be
immediately removed from service and
shall be destroyed to prevent further
use. Slings removed from service shall
be recorded in the sling inspection
log maintained by the rig (Lifting Gear
Register).
• Updating Color code shall be done only
by third party competent person.
• Lifting accessories, which are
incorrectly color coded shall be stored
in a separate clearly marked area and
returned for re-inspection, certification
and color coding.
• Rejected items shall be marked red
and put out of service until they are
disposed off.
5.7.4. Rejected Lifting Equipment
Lifting gear equipment’s shall be rejected when:
• There are broken wires - For 6-strand wire rope slings, 6 randomly distributed broken wires in
one rope lay, or 3 broken wires in one strand of one rope lay.
• There is metal loss - Wear or scraping of one-third the original diameter of outside individual
wires.

• There is distortion - Kinking, crushing, bird caging, or other damage which distorts the rope
structure.
• There is heat damage - Any metallic discoloration caused by exposure to heat.
• There is bad end attachment - Cracked, bent or broken end fittings caused by abuse, wear or
accident.
• There is corrosion - Severe corrosion of the rope or end attachments.
• There is Pulled Eye Splices - Any evidence that eye splices have slipped.
• There is mechanical damage - One of the most common causes of damage
• is the kink which results from pulling the sling body through the loop (choker hitching), thus
causing wires or strands to be deformed and pushed out of their original position.
• Metal plates with securing bolt is an approved method for Plugging infrequently utilized
components and shall be listed as Quarantined (Removed from the Periodic Inspection Process)
until required for use and then load tested and post load test MPI prior to use.
• Defective or damaged rigging hardware or rigging hardware that does not comply with above
requirements, shall be immediately removed from service and shall be destroyed (Eyes on both
ends must be cut off) to prevent further use. Slings removed from service shall be recorded in
the sling inspection log maintained by the rig (Lifting Gear Register).
5.7.5. Lifting Gear Register
Each rig shall keep the lifting gear register updated up to date as per safety inspections conducted
by the rig. Lifting Gear Register should contain:
• Cranes + Crane Wires
• Gas Cylinder Racks, Cargo Baskets, Container lifting points and offshore
• equipment skids
• Personnel Work Baskets, personnel transfer baskets, hydraulic operating
• telescoping derrick baskets
• Slings
• Shackles
• Winches
• Hoisting equipment
• Certified Chains
• Wire rope
• Pad-eyes and anchor points
• Turfers
• MODU Flare Booms and Flare Boom King Post Anchor Points and Pad-eyes
• Big Bag Handling System and bag lifting devices
• Snatch Blocks and Pulleys
• High Pressure hose and pipe (HP) Secondary Restraint slings and clamps
• Heavy weight secondary restraint slings, shackles and clamps
• Any other lifting accessories.
N.B: The register must include the mentioned below information’s:
• OEM Serial number or Unique Rig ID.
• OEM Design Certificate Number.
• Lifting Equipment Designation / Location (i.e., hoist wire, sling, shackle, padeye,
• etc.).
• Safe Working Load (SWL) and Proof Load Test.
• In-service date.
• Prior Out-of-service date, if applicable.
• Inspection Results (i.e. Fit for Service, Quarantined, and Rejected).
• Next Required Inspection (i.e. Visual, Annual Load Test / MPI, etc.).
All lifting equipment entered into the comprehensive registry shall have complete trace ability
which includes the following minimum OEM Identification and Design Information Certifications:
• Unique Serial Number / Equipment ID and associated OEM Design Certificate.
• Compliant sling certificates defining the Design Safety Factor (Minimum 5:1), SWL, and Proof
Load Test shall accompany.

• In-Service Date, Location, and Required Inspection Frequency.

• Last Inspection, Next Required Inspection, Fitness for Service.
• A Compliant Proof Load Test shall be as follows for all anchor points and padeyes:
• All Man Lifting Devices (Man Baskets, Casing Stabbing Boards and Adjustable
• Height Texas Decks that are designed to lift personnel) shall be proof load tested following
international applicable standards.
• All Anchor Points, Fixed Texas Deck and Pad-eyes shall be proof load tested following
international applicable standards.
• Marine Towing System SMIT Bracket, Closed Chock & Bollard are exempted from the periodic
proof load test inspection and only annual NDT inspection is required, the rig shall maintain the
initial as built certificate.
• Lifting equipment to be inspected by a D&WO approved third party.
• MODU shall maintain a register for crane’s wires replacement in accordance with
Manufacturing recommendations and wires specifications for Main Block,
• Auxiliary Block and Boom, the following information shall be verified and entered into the
register.
- Frequency of wire replacement
- Last wires replacement date
- Next due replacement date
5.8. Lifting Operation Plan

• All lifting operations must be properly planned and supervised by a competent person with the
required knowledge and training.
• Based on the lifting operation parameters and conditions, select the category of the lifting
plan as per the lifting categorization checklist to get the proper categorization for any lifting
operation, whether It is Routine, non-routine simple, non-routine complicated, or non-routine
complex lifting operation.
• A PTW, JSA and pre-job safety meeting should be conducted prior commencement of the lifting
operations. This shall be the responsibility of the person in charge of lifting operation.
• Make sure that a categorization checklist is attached to the lifting plan document all the time.
• Personnel involved in lifting operations must be selected by the person responsible for the
lifting operation based on their experience and skill.
• During lifting operations, a clear means of communication should be established between crew
members conducting the lifting operation.
• Visual and audio signals during lifting operation should be given by competent personnel who
are designated at the beginning of the lifting operation to give required signals.
• When visual communication is not practical, radio communication should be used, extra
• Personnel should be posted to relay signals, and or instructions to personnel involved in the
lifting operations.
• All loads to be examined by a competent person before the execution of the lifting operation to
ensure integrity of the load and suitability of lifting equipment used.
• Load path should be clear of obstructions and shall when practical be marked to avoid
personnel working or passing under load.
• Lifting operations by night shall be conducted when sufficient light is provided in both lift and
landing areas.
• Ensure that shackle bolts are tight, slings are of equal length, cargo containers, and appropriate
Rigging of the lift applied and loads are balanced when being lifted.
• The working load on winch mechanisms, hoists, lines, slings, grommets, hooks, pad-eyes and
fittings shall not exceed the labeled / tagged Safe Working Load (SWL).
• The SWL and unique identification number shall be displayed on each lifting device and each
piece of rigging hardware in order to facilitate tractability through the lifting equipment registry.
New lifting equipment shall be accepted for use based on Certificates of Conformity (If COC still
valid).
• OEM Certified four (4) Part Shackles shall be installed on all fixed pad-eye anchor points such
as cylinder racks, cargo baskets, HP Secondary Retention Sling Clamps, Man Baskets, sheave

block anchor points, SRL anchor points and overhead shackle installation applications.
N.B. Four (4) part shackles are intended for use on permanent / semipermanent (temporary
installed) installations and where man lifting operations are taking place at rig floor.
• If in doubt lifting operations must be stopped until assured.
• Lifting plan for critical lifting operation shall include but is not limited to:
- Lifting plan Ref. number
- PTW Ref. number
- SJA Ref. number
- Brief description of lifting operation
- Category of lifting operation( i.e. routine, non-routine simple, non-routine complicated , non-
routine complex)
- Lifting gears and accessories data
- Wind speed
- Load data
- Crane configuration and calculations
- Communications method (i.e. Radio, verbal , signals)
- Lifting operation step by step
- Lifting operation sketch.
- Lifting team members, their roles and signature
5.9. Lifting Operation

5.9.1. Routine
• Load with known and evaluated weight, shape and center of gravity.
• Suitable environment conditions.
• Standard rigging arrangements.
5.9.2. Critical
• When the load exceeds 85% of the SWL of the lifting equipment.
• Use of two or more items of lifting equipment (tandem lift).
• Personnel lifting e.g. man basket, man riding.
• Transferring Hydrocarbons “Don’t use Man basket if the wind speeds exceeding 38 km/h
(23mph – 20 knots – 11 meters/second).
• MODU Crane operations shall not be conducted above a Wind Speed of 32 km/hr., unless the
crane manufacturer has specifically rated the unit to operate at a higher defined wind speed
• Lifting operations near power lines/facilities
5.9.3. Categories
The additional controls and minimum supervision level for each category are explained in the table
below:
Lifting category Controls Minimum supervision Minimum Competencies
level
Routine Lifting Operation PJSM and SJA shall be issued. Onshore: Derrick Man or A/D Safety Management System
or RAF (SMS)
Offshore: Crane Operator or Basic Rigging &Lifting
A/D
Non-Routine Simple PTW, PJSM and SJA are required Onshore: Derrick Man or A/D Safety Management System
Lifting Operation plus a higher level of supervision or RAF (SMS).
might be required (e.g. Barge
Offshore: Crane Operator or Basic Rigging &Lifting
Engineer, Truck pusher, Senior
A/D
Tool Pusher)

Lifting category Controls Minimum supervision Minimum Competencies

level
Non-Routine Complicated PTW, PJSM and SJA are required Onshore: Driller Safety Management System
Lifting Operation plus a higher level of supervision (SMS).
Offshore: Barge Engineer or
might be required (e.g. Barge
Day/Night Pusher Advanced Rigging &Lifting
Engineer, Truck pusher, Senior
Tool Pusher)
Non-Routine Complex PTW, PJSM, and SJA shall be Onshore: NTP or STP Safety Management System
Lifting Operation issued. (SMS).
Specialized expertise added to Advanced Rigging &Lifting
Offshore: Barge Engineer or
the lifting team, which may be
Day/Night Pusher
expanded to include several
Personnel needed to complete
the lifting Operation safely
Engineering techniques are
needed.
5.10. Lifting operation instructions

• All lifts must be controlled by a dedicated and competent banks man who has been identified
at the pre-task safety meeting with clear communications and signals agreed before
commencing. In addition, the banks man will be identified by high visible vest and must never
be involved in any rigging or slinging activities.
• The Banks man is not a part of the load handling team; he shall not attempt to assist the riggers
at any time. He shall remain at a remote distance from the operation where he can clearly see
the riggers, the load and the crane operator at all times.
• The competent banksman shall direct heavy equipment movements in high impact areas,
conjected or tight areas in which are hazardous (e.g.in between/behind mud tank areas, behind
the rig minicamp, chemical storage areas or other areas which are hazardous to personnel and
assets).
• A tag line shall be used to control the movement of a load being raised or lowered.
• The tag line shall not be wrapped around the forearm or around the body, Wide loads must be
controlled by two taglines from one side of the load and away from line of fire.
5.11. Lifting of Personnel

• Lifting of personnel shall be avoided unless the risk has been demonstrated as being as low as
reasonably practicable (ALARP).
• Lifting of personnel shall be according to a specific personnel lift plan for that lift.
• Lifted personnel shall be properly secured with lanyards unless written procedures and risk
assessment require otherwise.
• The equipment used for lifting personnel for work and for personnel transfer shall be
specifically designed, approved / certified and clearly marked as suitable for personnel lifting.
Any equipment not so marked shall not be used for personnel lifting.
• Lifting accessories and lifted equipment used for lifting people shall not be used for any other
purpose. The factor of safety required for lifting people shall be higher than for lifting normal
loads, typically this is double for personnel lifting activities.
• Environmental and other limits for personnel lifts shall be set out in the lift plan with
• Clarity on where they differ from limits for other lifting. In case of any changes in job scope
or conditions, the job shall be made safe and stopped, risks re-assessed and a pre-job safety
meeting executed before the job is re-started.
• Example of such A rescue plan shall be prepared for all personnel lifts as part of the lift plan
and attached to the PTW form. All equipment required to implement the rescue plan shall be
readily available prior to and during the lift. Rescue plans shall be practiced at regular intervals
N.B: Rescue operations can introduce their own hazards, therefore the planning and execution of
rescue exercises requires particular care and attention including additional risk assessments.

• All personnel involved including those being lifted shall have received the necessary specific
training.
• A test lift without personnel shall be carried out where there is confined access, potential for
snagging or other hazard.
• Personnel transfer by lifting shall not be permitted in hours of darkness unless specifically
approved by the PIC and supported by thorough risk assessment and assessment of alternative.
• Onshore Rigs Operating Man Baskets shall not be conducted above 38 km / hr. or 23 mph (20
knots – 11 meters / second) wind speed.
• Offshore rigs Transfer of Personnel by Personnel Basket operation shall not be
• conducted above 20 knots wind speed. A safety line shall be used on each personnel basket.
The crane hook shall be equipped with a safety latch.
• Each personnel basket used for transferring personnel by crane between an offshore rig and
crew boat shall:
- Have current lifting gear certification.
- Be in good condition
- Provided with an adequate number of approved life preservers or buoyant work
- vests.
- It shall be stored and covered when not being used.
• The competent person planning the operation should have adequate practical and theoretical
knowledge and experience of planning lifting operations.
• The crane capacity load chart shall be de-rated fifty percent (50%) when performing a personal
lift and an approved Critical Lift Plan shall be available on site, prior to any personal lift.
5.11.1. Man riding
• Man riding must be kept to an absolute minimum and shall only be performed under the
strictest of controls and must only take place under the direct supervision of the Senior Tool
Pusher or Night Pusher of the rig that shall nominate only competent person to perform tasks.
• The approval of the man riding shall always be with the OIM/STP/Night Pusher unless the rig is
assigned to the Tow master (in offshore rigs).
• For Workover Rigs which have not Night Pusher, at night shift man riding must only take place
under the direct supervision of the Driller.
• Adverse weather conditions and lighting conditions should be assessed prior to the
commencement of any man riding operation, this is determined by the rig management.
• Dedicated Man Riding winch shall be used solely for hoisting and lowering personnel and must
incorporate the following safety features in their design:
- Drum guard standard to protect operator.
- Lift-to-Shift variable speed lever provides precise control and built-in safety
- Slack wire detector automatically stops the winch from paying out in case of slack wire
- Filter, regulator, lubricator air preparation package included to protect internal components
(for air operated man riders)
- Emergency lowering system
- Emergency stop button.
- Emergency lowering button.
- A clutch capable of disengaging should not be fitted.
- Overload limit switch.
- For the Hydraulic operated man riding winches should have a self-locking & self-braking
system fitted.
- In the event of failure of the automatic brake a secondary brake should be provided to prevent
the load from failing. This may be manual in operation and simple in design.
- A device should be fitted to prevent the winch from over-riding or under-riding
- Anti-spin wire should be used
• The dedicated man-riding hoist stating “For man riding purpose only” and the Safe Working
Load should be clearly identified.
• One system of hand signals MUST be used in all rigs (Man riding Tuggers Signals Board.
• Winch operator to keep man rider in view at all times.
• The employee must be shackled directly onto the end of the man riding hoist line without any

intervention (Shackle must be secured).

• When man riding operations are taking place, all other activities in the vicinity shall be
suspended. At no time shall the travelling blocks be moved or pipe rotated. No other activity
shall interfere with man riding operations.
5.11.2. Hands Free Lifting
5.11.2.1. Tag Lines:
• The tag lines shall:
- Free of any knots.
- Attached to the load.
- It length ensures that the person holding the line is stand in clear area during handling the
load.
- Have 45° angle with the vertical line.
- Not to be tied to any objects or wrapped around a hand.
- Have additional slack length.
• In case of two lines, they shall be from one side of the load.
5.11.2.2. Push & Pull Stick:
• The Push & Pull Sticks are normally made of aluminum, wood or fiberglass & has an average
length around 2 meters.
• The main purpose for it is to keep the personnel remote from the load.
5.12. Offshore Cargo Handling Procedure

5.12.1. Communication
• All radio communications shall be conducted in an understandable Language.
• Offshore cranes shall also be equipped with two-way means of communication with the supply
boat.
• When rig operation requires radio silence, so prior to the Start of radio silence the vessel’s
Captain shall confirm to OIM / Barge Engineer that all radio silence procedures are being
correctly observed.
• Continuous communication is a MUST with blind lifts, if there are no communication no crane
movement.
5.12.2. Vessel anchoring at Jack-Up Rig for Supply Purposes
• The Barge Engineer or his delegate must give the supply boat clear instructions about the safe
anchoring location.
• When laying an anchor for use in a mooring system to a Jack-Up rig the anchor is to be paid out
under tension.
• All rig provided moorings will be inspected periodically by rig personnel, moorings with
deficiencies shall be reported immediately to Barge Engineer.
• Conduct & maintain a clear communication between rig & vessel.
5.12.3. Loading and Offloading
• Scope of work shall be communicated prior starting the cargo handling operations.
• Wind speed shall be checked and reported to Barge Engineer or his delegate prior starting the
operation.
• The approved Color Code of lifting equipment shall be followed.
• Defective or damaged rigging hardware that does not comply with EGPC
• Rigging & Lifting Equipment Procedure shall be immediately removed from service.
• Visual check is required on board the vessel by a competent person prior to loading / offloading
on all lifts for loose Items (tools. debris, etc.) or improper securing methods or improper
stacking of materials, unsafe observations shall be reported to Barge Engineer or his delegate.
• A competent person shall inspect the lifts for potential dropped objects.

• Do not under any circumstance accept / lift an unsafe load on supply vessels.
• All backloads should be pre-planned to ensure safe operation.
• Crane operators should swing the load away from the vessel deck before hoisting or lowering
to reduce the risk in case of lift failure.
• MODU’s shall have a minimum of two certified big bag lifting devices and two certified crane
big bag lifting devices for off-loading supply boats.
5.12.4. Snatching Operation and Maneuvering alongside
• Snatching of materials is not permitted when sea height exceeds 1.5 meters.
• Wind speed shall be checked and reported to Barge Engineer or his delegate prior starting the
operation.
• Vessel’s Captain is not, under any Circumstances, to place the stern or any portion of the vessel
between the legs or under the hull of the Jack-Up rig.
• Conduct & maintain a clear communication between rig & vessel.
5.12.5. Bulk Cargo Operations
• Jack-Up rig and vessel shall be communicated properly about the job planning to avoid
undesired mistakes.
• MSDS shall be provided & discussed prior to transferring hazardous materials such as OBM &
brine.
• Bulk hoses shall be of sufficient length.
• Ensure that hoses, slings and lifting points are visually inspected prior to starting the operation.
• Hose should be slacked before the vessel crew secure the hose and disconnect the crane wire.
• Hoses shall be remaining afloat at all times by using sufficient floatation devices.
• Watch man from the rig shall be assigned to avoid any discharge to environment.
• Shipper and receiver should confirm quantities discharged and received at regular intervals to
ensure there are no leaks.
• Not allowed to close out valves against a cargo pump.
• Not allowed to transfer any other liquids using potable water hoses.
• Heavy sections of reducers or connections at hose ends shall be avoided.

B6. Working at height
B.6. Working at height
6.1. Scope
This procedure applies to all Drilling and Workover companies or Service companies to ensure all
risks associated with working at height are identified and managed.
6.2. Purpose
The purpose of a working at height procedure is to prevent falls from height, which are a major
cause of workplace injuries and fatalities. The procedure outlines the steps that must be taken to
identify, assess, and control the risks associated with working at height.
6.3. Definitions
6.3.1. Work at Height:
Work at height is an activity at an elevated location of more than 1.2 meters (4 feet) high from the
working ground level including work at/near the edge from where a person can fall through an open
surface in a floor opening or hole/pit/excavation or through fragile surface or work over water.
6.3.2. Fall Arrest System:

Equipment or material or a combination of both that is designed, to arrest the fall of a person.
6.3.3. Restrained fall:

The person is partially restrained by a restraining device and the fall is arrested.
6.3.4. Anchor Point:

It is a fixture to which a person anchors the line with a hook, to be held securely and to prevent
a fall. This point must be able to withstand a weight of 5000 lbs (2.25 ton) for each person
anchored.
6.3.5. Guardrail:
A barrier at least 42 inches high is erected to prevent personnel from falling from working levels
more than 30 inches above the floor, ground, or other working areas of a building.
6.3.6. Tie-off:
A procedure of connecting directly or indirectly to an anchorage point.
6.4.1. Person in charge of the Rig/workplace
• Ensuring that the procedures are implemented in the workplace.
• Identifying all tasks that involve working at height in the workplace and its hazards in
collaboration with employees and contractors/3rd parties.
• Provide appropriate height access equipment such as portable ladders and work platforms that
are inspected and appropriate for use.
• Ensuring risk assessments/safe job analyses are conducted for identified working at height
tasks.
• Confirming issuance of a permit to work to contractors or employees who will be working at a
height of 1.2 meters or above.
6.4.2. HSE Engineer
• Verifying that the guidance at the procedure is implemented and understood in the workplace.
• Ensuring that the company’s employees attended the required working at height courses.
• Verifying that appropriate height access equipment such as portable ladders and work
platforms that are inspected and appropriate for use.

6.5. Procedures
The rig/concerned area PIC shall follow the below sequence to comply with the Procedure:
• Identifying all the work height tasks
• Review the Work at height risk and control mentioned at the risk register to identify minimum
control measures in place and add more measures by following the hierarchy of Fall Protection.
• The SJA must be reviewed and updated (if needed) before rig up or if the equipment changed
e.g., skidding cantilever to ensure that all working at height areas were assessed and covered
with appropriate mean.
• Use the appropriate pre-use checklist (I.e. Working at height checklist, Man riding checklist)
before commencing the working at height activities.
• Fall protection equipment must be inspected and recertified bi-annually by a Competent 3rd
party inspector.
• Any fall protection device with any damage shall be immediately removed from service and
junked in addition to updating the Lifting Gear Register.
The following are requirements that you need to consider when planning and undertaking work at
height but not limited to the following, you shall:
• Take account of weather conditions that could compromise worker safety.
• Check that the place (e.g. a roof) where work at height is to be undertaken is safe.
• Each place where people will work at height needs to be checked every time, before use.
• Stop materials or objects from falling or, if it is not reasonably practicable to prevent objects
falling, take suitable and sufficient measures to make sure no one can be injured, e.g. use
exclusion zones to keep people away or mesh on scaffold to stop materials such as tools falling
off.
• Store materials and objects safely so they won’t cause injury if they are disturbed or collapse.
• Plan for emergencies and rescue, e.g. agree a set procedure for evacuation.
• Think about foreseeable situations and make sure employees know the emergency procedures.
6.6. Rescue Plan

Job specific rescue plan should be developed before installing the harness system. It’s critical that
a suspended worker can be promptly rescued. Rig operators shall review and approve this plan.
6.6.1. A rescue plan should consider:

• The rescue method, i.e. use of a crane or elevating work platform
• Available equipment
• Responsibilities and training
• Communication
• Medical requirements
• Involving the emergency service
Note:
Work at height rescue plans shall be in place, reviewed and well understood from the personnel
involved in performed job to verify that work group members know well the roles during running the
work at height job.
6.7. Working at height safety accessories

6.7.1. Safety Harness
6.7.1.1. Pre-Use Inspection of Safety Harness:
• The visual check should be undertaken in good light.
• Inspect harness hardware (buckles, D-rings, back pad, loop keepers); these items must not be
damaged and must be free of sharp edges, burrs, cracks, worn parts, or corrosion.
• Ensure buckles work smoothly.
• Inspect webbing; material must be free of cut or broken fibers and check for tears, abrasions,

mold, burns, or discoloration.

• Inspect stitching; Check for pulled or cut stitches. Broken stitches may be an indication that the
harness has been impact-loaded and must be removed from service.
• Inspect labels; all labels should be present and fully legible.
• If inspection reveals a defective condition, remove the harness from service immediately and
destroy it.
• When returning the harness, ensure that it is clean, in good condition, and ready for the next
use.
6.7.1.2. Maintenance of safety harness:
• Clean the harness with a mild soap or detergent and warm water.
• Don’t use high-pressure cleaners.
6.7.1.3. Storage of safety harness:
• In cool, dry, and clean condition.
• Out of direct sunlight.
• Away from direct sources of heat.

B7. Risk Management
B.7. Risk Management
7.1. Scope
This procedure applies to all onshore and offshore drilling and workover rigs, assets and facilities
controlled directly by D&WO Operations. D&WO Operation’s contractor and service companies
will execute aspects of the programs. Rig Contractors and service companies shall also have a Risk
Management System that meets the D&WO Risk Management Policy.
7.2. Purpose
Outline the risk management activities to protect people, environment, and preserve company
assets. This procedure shall be used in conjunction with the Risk Management Training Package.
7.2.1. The Risk Management Process shall be applied in the following circumstances:
7.2.1.1. General
• Operations in new areas or under new circumstances.
• Execution of new operational requirements.
• Implementation of new technology.
• Significant change in operational process, procedure, operational condition, design intent of
equipment, tools, material, and existing safeguards and barriers.
7.2.1.2. Engineering (with Operations input) – Office based
• Well Planning stage including Well Approval Process and/or Workover Candidate Proposal
• Well program development stage during well design and approval process.
• Changes in well program.
7.2.1.3. Operations (with Engineering input) – Rig based
• Well construction activities Onsite (Wellsite, Rig site and Campsite) Rig move activities.
• Managing well related activities, e.g:
- Drilling program implementation.
- Unplanned arising conditions.
- Any other situation as may be required by management.
7.3. Definitions
7.3.1. Risk
Risk can be defined as the combination of the likelihood or probability of an event (including
changes in conditions, circumstances) and its consequences. Likelihood X Consequence (severity) =
Risk.
7.3.2. Risk source

Element which alone or in combination has the potential to give rise to risk.
7.3.3. Hazard
An object, substance, condition, situation, practice or behavior with the potential to interrupt or
interfere with the orderly progress of an activity being carried out, and which has the potential to
cause harm to people, equipment, property, or environment.
Hazard can be a risk source.
7.3.4. Event
Occurrence or change of conditions, circumstances. It may trigger by a cause or causes.
An event can also be something that is expected, but does not happen; or something that is not
expected, but happens. An event can be a risk source.

7.3.5. Cause
Mistake(s), action(s) or failure(s) followed by an event or events.
7.3.6. Consequence
Outcome of an event affecting objectives. Consequences can be expressed qualitatively or
quantitatively.
7.3.7. Risk description

A structured statement of risk usually contains four elements: Risk sources, Events, Causes, and
Consequences.
7.3.8. Likelihood
Likelihood is the chance of something happening.
Likelihood can be described qualitatively using general terms or quantitatively, mathematically
such as probability or frequency.
7.3.9. Probability
Measure of the chance of occurrence expressed as a number between 0 and 1, where 0 is
impossibility and 1 is absolute certainty.
7.3.10. Frequency
Number of events or outcomes per defined unit of time.
7.3.11. Level of risk

Magnitude of a risk or combination of risks, expressed in terms of the combinations of
consequences and their likelihood.
7.3.12. Potential Risk

Risk level before the risk treatment.
Potential Risk can also be defined as the interaction with uncertainty. Uncertainty is a potential,
unpredictable, and uncontrollable outcome, potential risk is a consequence of actions taken in spite
of uncertainty.
7.3.13. Risk Control Measures

Risk Control Measures are developed to maintain and/or modify the risk.
Preventative control measures intend to change the likelihood, mitigation control measures intend
to change the consequence. Risk Control Measures frequently referred as barriers or safeguards.
7.3.14. Residual Risk

Risk remaining after risk treatment. Residual risk can contain unidentified risk.
7.3.15. Risk Tolerance Criteria

Reference against a risk is evaluated. A predetermined levels of risk used to support decisions
about whether further efforts are needed to reduce risk. It shall be determined before risk
assessment.
Risk Tolerance Criteria can be described by a Risk Matrix (Consequence/Probability Matrix) as a
qualitative risk assessment tool. Risk levels are determined and decision rules assigned to them.
Risk Matrix is frequently called as risk assessment matrix, heat matrix or heat map.

7.3.16. Risk Tolerance

Stakeholder’s readiness to bear the risk after risk treatment to achieve its objectives.
7.3.17. Risk Management

The ongoing implementation of existing control measures, and identification and implementation
where practicable of additional control measures to manage risk to levels that are tolerable and As
Low as Reasonably Practicable (ALARP).
Risk Management is an integral part of the D&WO Safety Management System (SMS).

A formal process to assess the likelihood and consequences associated with identified risks to
determine the level of risk and evaluate the tolerability of the potential risk and residual risk. Risk
Assessments are an integral part of Risk Management. Risk assessments have three key sequential
steps: Risk Identification, Risk Analysis, and Risk Evaluation.
7.3.19. Risk Matrix

A Qualitative Risk Assessment technique used to rank risks, based on the level of risks. A Risk
Matrix is the reference against the risk being evaluated and developed as a risk tolerance criteria.
7.3.20. As Low as Reasonably Practicable (ALARP)

Balance the level of residual risk with the amount of effort, time and money required to reduce the
potential risk.
Efforts to reduce risk should be continued until the incremental sacrifice (in terms of time, effort,
cost, or other expenditure of resources) is grossly disproportionate to the value of the incremental
risk reduction achieved.
7.3.21. Stakeholder
Person or organization that can affect, be affected by, or perceive themselves to be affected by
risk, decision, or activity.
7.3.22. Risk Management Process

The core process of Risk Management involves identifying risks, systematically assessing, and
implementing risk treatment plan throughout an asset’s life cycle. Potential Risks and residual risks
shall be documented, communicated, monitored, and measured.
The following are the responsibilities in the implementation of this manual:
7.4.1. Managers
Shall provide adequate resources required for the implementation of Risk Management to ensure
that the Risk Management Policy is complied with. They shall take overall responsibility for the
implementation of this manual for their respective departments, and ensure that Risk Management
decisions are made at the appropriate
7.4.2. Management level

7.4.2.1. Engineering – General Supervisors/Supervisors
Verify that all risks within technical/engineering designs are identified and adequate controls are
in place.
7.4.2.2. Operations - Superintendents
Verify that all risks within operations activities in their respective divisions are identified, assessed,

communicated, and adequate controls in place at the planning stage, prior to the approval of work
to be performed, and during the execution of well programs. Ensure that the controls identified are
implemented.
7.4.2.3. Operations - Rig Foremen/Liaison man/and other D&WO Key personnel
Implement the Risk Management policy on site and have the required controls in place prior to
and during the execution of well programs including Rig moves.
7.4.2.4. Department Safety Advisors / Field safety engineers
Verify that the controls identified are implemented. They shall also provide advisory role and
support for the Risk Assessment and Management including the role of risk assessor.
7.4.2.5. Drilling Contractors and Service Companies
Contractors and service companies shall implement the controls identified by D&WO Operations.
In addition, they shall also have a Risk Management System that meets the D&WO Risk
Management Policy.
7.5. Process Flow Diagram

The following are the sequential steps in the Risk Assessment and Management core process, which
shall be individually addressed in this manual:
• Determine context and identify Stakeholders.
• Risk Identification (Risk assessment) and Recording.
• Risk Analysis and Evaluation (Risk Assessment).
• Decision-making on Potential Risk tolerance.
• Risk Reduction and Control (Risk treatment).
• Decision-making on Residual Risk tolerance.
• Risk Communication and Documentation.
• Risk Monitoring and Review.
7.5.2.1. Determine Context and Identify Stakeholders
7.5.1. Context of Risk Management

As a preparation for risk management, the following shall be determined as a minimum:
• Scope and Objectives
• Boundaries
• Risk Tolerance Criteria
• Activities subjected for Risk Management
• Parameters of Activities
• Selected Risk Assessment Technique and methodology
• Stage of the Asset Lifecycle
• Resources
7.5.1.1. Identify Stakeholders
Identify persons or organizations that can affect, or be affected by risk, decision, or activity.
7.5.1.2. Risk Assessment Team
A multidisciplinary team comprised of representatives from all stakeholders. Team members
require in-depth knowledge and experience about the subject operations and activities. Risk
assessment is a teamwork exercise.
Note:
Risks shall not be assessed by an individual.
7.5.2. Risk Identification and Recording

7.5.2.1. Risk Identification
Risks shall be identified through a series of simple questioning of the activity to be carried out. It
shall seek to answer the following questions:
• What can happen, where and when?
- Identify risk sources, hazards, consequences, changes which may have adverse effect.
• Why and how can it happen?
- Identify events, conditions, or circumstances.
• What can go wrong?
- Identify causes, mistakes, and failures.
• Is there any potential deviation from expected?
- What tools and techniques can be used to assist detection?

7.5.3. Risk Recording

7.5.3.1. Risk description
Record the risk description. Risk description is a structured statement of risk usually containing
four elements: Risk source, Event, Cause, and Consequence.
Example:
Drilling crew remain in hazardous area if the evacuation bus cannot reach the safe staging area #1
during evacuation, due to the designated evacuation road blocked by road construction work.
• Drilling crew remain in hazardous area (consequence)
• If the evacuation bus cannot reach the safe staging area #1 (risk source)
• During evacuation (event)
• Due to the designated evacuation road blocked (cause) by road construction work.
7.5.3.2. Risk Register
Risks and/or new risks identified in drilling and workover operations shall be recorded in a Risk
Register, which shall be updated continuously, and shall be maintained by the D&WO Operational
Departments and D&WO Engineering Departments.
7.5.4. Risk Analysis and evaluation

7.5.4.1. Risk Analysis
Analyze the likelihood and potential consequences of each risk by using scales or ranking
(qualitative or quantitative). Determine the level of each potential risk.
7.5.4.2. Risk evaluation
Prioritize (rank) all analyzed risk associated with the project or activity according to the potential
risk levels.
7.5.5. Decision making on Potential Risk tolerance

Evaluate the risk level against the risk tolerance criteria. Decision shall be made on all assessed
risk, as to whether the potential risk level is tolerable. If the Potential Risk is at intolerable level, it
shall be treated by identifying and implement existing and additional control measures, to reduce
the level of risk As Low as Reasonably Practicable (ALARP).
7.5.5.1. Risk Reduction and Control (Risk treatment).
This is the step where measures are taken to eliminate, reduce, tolerate, or avoid the risk analyzed
to control the undesirable effects of the risk or hazard.
7.6. Risk Control Techniques

Risk Control techniques include the following:
7.6.1. Terminate:
Preventative control measures are established and implemented to eliminate the risk by removing
the source of risk.
7.6.2. Treated
Control measures are implemented to reduce the risk As Low as Reasonably Practicable. Effective
implementation of control measures can change the likelihood or change the consequences of the
risk.
7.6.3. Tolerated
The risk is determined to be tolerable.

7.6.4. Transferred
The risk is toured to others or avoided.
7.7. Risk Control Measures

Controls include, but are not limited to, any process, policy, device, practice or other conditions
and/or actions which maintain and/or modify risk.
The following measures are used for controlling specific risks and shown in preferred order:
7.7.1. Engineering Controls

Risks are avoided, eliminated or reduced through appropriate engineering design. Various
engineering standards are in place to address designs and implementation with minimum required
standards for controlling risks.
7.7.1.1. Administrative controls
These controls include administrative procedures, location and proximity, education, work
assignments, substitutions, breaks, and personnel rotations.
7.7.1.2. Personal protective controls
These are additional or supplemental interim measures to complement engineering and
administrative controls
7.7.1.3. Risk treatment plan
The treatment plan relating to each risk shall be summarized in a Risk Assessment Form
7.7.1.4. Existing, current control measures
Record all existing preventative control and mitigation measures and refer to Standard, Policies,
Administrative Controls (SPAC) or Procedures where the expected performance of the control
measures are determined. Identify and record stakeholders who are responsible for the effective
implementation of each existing control measure.
7.7.1.5. Additional control measures
Once an additional control measure is identified, it shall be described as developed S.M.A.R.T.E.R
matrix where the responsible stakeholder and the expected performance of the implementation is
clearly defined.
7.7.1.6. Decision making on Residual Risk tolerance
With consideration of the existing and the additional control measures effectiveness, re-analyze
and evaluate the level of risk. Decision shall be made on all Residual Risk, whether the residual
risk level is tolerable with consideration of the existing and the implementation of additionally
identified control measures effectiveness and continuous improvement. It shall be monitored
during the execution of the risk associated project or activity. Risk tolerance and continuation or
commencement of the risk associated project or activity shall be approved by the appropriate level
of executive management according to the level of Residual Risk.
7.8. Risk Communication

The result of risk assessment and the risk treatment plan shall be communicated by the approving
party to all stakeholders, parties responsible or affected by the implementation.
A key factor to the success of any Risk Management activity is risk communication.
Risk Management is an ongoing process that involves three significant topics that must be
communicated in various ways:
• Assessing the risk.
• Treating the risk.

• Monitoring the risk.

A structured communication process is required so that an informed decision about risk treatment
can be made. A proper risk communication will support Risk Management implementation and
enhance staff general awareness and Risk Management, recognition and understanding of the Risk
Management approach and a positive risk-awareness culture at all levels.
Risk communication can be done in the following ways
• Structured meetings.
• Teleconferencing.
• Detailed written program/instructions.
• Distributed Risk Management Report
7.9. Risk Documentation

The various risk management done to assess risk prior the execution of an activity shall be well
documented. D&WO Operational related Risk Assessment and treatment plan usually recorded and
documented in the D&WO Risk Assessment Form (RAF) and attached to the well file.
Risk Management of a project is documented in a formal “Risk management” report within which
the members (stakeholders) of the risk assessment team shall be identified. These reports shall
be included in the well file for D&WO operations and in the central projects database for other
operations.
Risk Management Report shall include:
• Objectives and Scope
• Stakeholders and Risk Assessment Team members
• Description of selected Risk Assessment Technique & Methodology
• Risk Tolerance Criteria
• List of Activities
• Limitations and Assumption List
• Data, their sources and validation
• List of uncertainties
• Risk Assessment and Treatment Plan
• Conclusions and Recommendations
• References
7.9.1. Reviewing cycle
Report shall be reviewed by all stakeholders.
7.9.2. Approval cycle according to risk tolerance criteria

• Report shall be approved by executive management according to the highest level of residual
risks.
• For D&WO qualitative risk management if the highest level of residual risk evaluated as low
(tolerable) it does not need to submit for approval. Effectiveness of implemented control
measures shall be maintained and managed for continuous improvement at field level.
• If the highest level of residual risk evaluated as medium (highlighted as yellow) the decision on
risk tolerance shall be made by D&WO Superintendent.
• If the highest level of residual risk evaluated as high (highlighted as red) the decision on risk
tolerance shall be made by D&WO Department Manager. Continuation or commencement
of the high residual risk associated project or activity shall be approved by D&WO
Department Manager or subject the risk for further detailed analysis (e.g., QRA) based on the
recommendation of the Risk Assessment Team.
• There shall also be a risk register which shall be maintained and updated regularly with
feedback from projects, incident investigations, accident/incident reports, etc. Updated risk
registers of stakeholders provide input information for future risk identification.
• In the course of implementing a risk assessed project, there could be some planned activities

which if carried out as designed may reveal new risk which was not initially identified.
Newly identified risks shall be managed, and the risk register shall be updated, and it shall
be communicated through the D&WO organization as lessons learned by issuing an HSE/
Operational Alert.
7.10. Risk Monitoring and Review

7.10.1. Risk Monitoring
Risk Monitoring includes continual checking, supervising, observing or determining the required
or expected status, effectiveness and performance level of control measures. The observations
during implementation combined with the documentation and communication process will help in
achieving the following:
• Facilitate continuous effectiveness monitoring of control measures, therefore the monitoring of
residual risk level.
• Maintain the residual risk level as low as possible.
• Obtaining further information to improve risk management.
• To share and communicate Risk Management activities among all stakeholders, most
particularly with the field personnel who will be executing risk managed projects.
7.10.2. Review
Overall Risk Management Process of the project shall be reviewed based on the following to
ensure continual improvement.
• Significant change in operational process, procedure, operational condition, design intent of
equipment, tools, material, existing safeguards and barriers.
• Unplanned arising conditions.
• Based on the recommendation or finding from any conducted Audit.
• Based on the corrective action of incident.
• If it is initiated by a stakeholder.
• If the Risk Tolerance Criteria of Risk Assessment changed.
7.11. Risk assessment technique

7.11.1. Risk Assessment Matrix (Consequence/Probability Matrix)
The “Risk Assessment Matrix” quantitative /semi quantitative risk assessment technique shall
be used as the main technique to assess risks for Drilling and Workover operations. The Risk
Assessment Matrix is a tool used to determine qualitatively the ranking of a risk, based on the
consequence (its harm to people, damage to equipment, property, and impact on environment or
interruption of operation) and its probability or likelihood of occurrence as well as how frequently
it could occur. The proper use of the Risk Assessment Matrix is covered in the Risk Management
Training Package.
The RAF is used to document the risks associated with a particular project or activity, the threats
(causes) that could result in a release of the hazard or risk source, the potential consequences, the
potential risk associated with the hazard or risk source, the control measures that are or will be put
in place and the residual risk taking into account the effectiveness of these measures.
The RAF shall prioritize (rank) all risk associated with a project or activity, and shall be used
primarily during the project or process planning stage.
Many risk events may have a range of consequences with different associated likelihood (e.g.,
fatality as consequence of event is always less likely than a first aid injury). Usually minor/low
consequences are more common than catastrophes. Therefore there is a choice as whether to rank
the most common consequence or the most serious or as a combination of these. In many cases,
it is appropriate to focus on the worst credible consequences as these pose the largest threat
and the most concerned. In some cases it may be appropriate to rank both common, minor/low

consequence, and unlikely catastrophic consequence events, as separate risks.

It is important that the likelihood relevant to the selected consequence is used and not the
probability of the event as a whole. Decision making guidelines are also included in the Risk
Assessment Matrix for Potential and Residual Risks.
7.11.2. Risk Matrix Form

Consequence / Severity Probability / Likelihood
A B C D E
Never Heard Incident Happens Happens
People Assets Environment Reputation Heard of in has several several
of in industry occurred times per times per
industry in our year in year in a
company company location
No No • Monitor and review
0 No injury No damage regularly
effect Impact • Manage for continuous
Slight Slight improvement
1 Slight effect Slight impact
injury damage
Minor Minor
2 Minor effect Minor impact
injury damage
Major Localized Considerable
3 Localize effect
injury damage impact
Perm- • Stop the activity
Disability Major National Measures and • Investigate alternatives
4 Major effect
–One damage impact demonstrate ALARP
Fatality
Multiple Extensive International
5 Massive effect
fatality damage impact
7.12. Risk Assessment form

7.12.1. People
Potential impact Definition
0 No impact No injury or damage to health.
1 Slight impact Slight injury or health effects (including first aid case and medical treatment
or occupational illness), not affecting work performance or causing disability.
2 Minor impact Minor injury or health effects (lost time injury); affecting work performance,
such as restriction of activities (restricted work case or occupational illness),
or a need to take a few days off to fully recover (lost workday case).
3 Considerable Major injury or health effects; (including permanent partial disability and
impact occupational illness) affecting work performance in the longer term, such as
a prolonged absence from work.
4 National impact Permanent total disability or one fatality; from an accident or occupational
illness; agents which are capable of irreversible damage with serious
disability or death, (e.g. corrosives, heat stroke, cancer (small exposed
population).
5 Regional - Multiple fatalities from an accident or occupational illness (e.g. chemical
International asphyxiation or cancer (large exposed population); may include four
impact fatalities in close succession due to the incident, or multiple fatalities (four or
more) each at different points and/or with different activities.
7.12.2. Assest

0 No impact No disruption to the process. Maximum cost of repair below $10,000.
1 Slight impact Possible brief disruption to the process. Isolation of equipment for repair.
Estimated cost below $ 50, 000. Plant party is down, the process can be
restarted. Estimated cost of repair below $100,000.
2 Minor impact Partial loss of plant shut down (for at most 2 weeks and/or estimated cost of
repair below $ 500, 000.
3 Considerable Total loss of plant, extensive damage. Estimated cost of repair exceeding
impact $500,000.
4 National impact No disruption to the process. Maximum cost of repair below $10,000.
5 Regional - Possible brief disruption to the process. Isolation of equipment for repair.
International Estimated cost below $ 50, 000. The plant party is down, the process can be
impact restarted. Estimated cost of repair below $100,000.

7.12.3. Environment

0 No impact No financial consequences. No environmental risk.
1 Slight impact Negligible financial consequences. Local environmental damage within the
fence and systems.
2 Minor impact Limited contamination. Single exceedance of statutory or prescribed criteria.
Single complaint. No permanent effect on the environment.
3 Considerable Limited discharge of known toxicity. Repeated exceedance of statutory or
impact prescribed limit. Damage sufficiently large to affect the environment.
4 National impact Severe environmental damage. Extensive measures are required to restore
the contaminated environment to its original state. Extended exceedance of
statutory or prescribed limits.
5 Regional - Massive Effect Persistent severe environmental damage or severe
International
impact
7.12.4. Reputation
0 No impact No public awareness.
1 Slight impact Public awareness of the incident may exist.
2 Minor impact Some local public concern. Some complaints were received. Slight media
and/or local potential attention with potentially negative aspects for
operations.
3 Considerable Regional public concern. Numerous complaints. Extensive negative attention
impact in local media. Slight national media and/or local/regional/national policies
with potentially restrictive measures and/or impact on the grant of licenses.
Mobilization of action groups.
4 National impact National public concern. Continuing complaints. Extensive negative attention
in the national media and/or regional/national policies with potentially
restrictive measures and/or impact on grant of licenses. Mobilization of
action groups.
5 Regional - Regional International impact. Regional - international public attention.
International Extensive negative attention in regional international media and national/
impact international politics. Potential to harm access to new areas, grants of
licenses, and/or tax legislation. Concerted pressure by action groups.
Adverse effects on EGPC’s operations in other countries.

B8. Confined Space
B.8. Confined Space
8.1. Scope
During drilling and workover (D&WO) activities, the D&WO contractor or service companies and
subcontractors shall implement a Confine Space Entry program in line, as a minimum, with the
instructions described in this section to ensure safe execution of D&WO.
8.2. Purpose
The purpose of this Drilling and Workover (D&WO) confined space Entry procedure is to protect
personnel while working in Confined Spaces.
8.3.1. Supervisor or Competent Designate
• Conduct a Hazard Assessment.
• Determine the type of personnel protective equipment (PPE) required.
• Prepare a Confined Space Rescue Plan.
• Must ensure the workers are trained in confined space entry and the safe use of all the
personnel protection equipment prior to entering any confined space.
• Ensure all atmospheric tests are completed by a competent person and logged before
personnel enter a confined space.
8.3.2. Worker
• Be trained in confined space entry.
• Know the procedures for confined space entry.
personnel enter a confined space.
personnel enter a confined space after the area has been unoccupied for extended periods of
time, such as tea and meal breaks.
• Ensure all safety precautions are in place before entering a confined space.
• Ensure understanding the procedure for rescue.
8.3.3. Stand-by Person
• remain on the outside of, and near, the confined space
• capable of being in continuous communication with and, if practicable, to observe those inside,
• Initiate rescue procedures and operate equipment used for entry to the confined space, where
necessary.
8.4. Definitions
8.4.1. Competent Person
A person who has effectively proved the ability to solve or address problems relating to the subject
matter at work by holding a recognized relevant degree or certificate of professional standing, or by
considerable knowledge, training, and experience.
8.4.2. Confined Space

8.4.2.1. A space or volume which
• Is not intended as a regular workplace.
• Has restricted means of entry and exit.
• May have inadequate ventilation and/or an atmosphere, which is either contaminated or
oxygen-deficient.
• Is at atmospheric pressure during occupancy.

B.8. Confined Space
8.4.2.2. Confined spaces include, but are not limited to:

• Storage tanks, spud cans, pre-load tanks, mud pits (land rigs ),trip tanks, voids, process vessels,
boilers, pressure vessels, batch mix tanks and other tank-like compartments.
• Open-topped spaces of more than 1.2 meters in depth, such as rotary opening when the bell
nipple is installed, and pits which are not subject to good natural ventilation.
• Pipes, sewers, shafts, ducts, and similar structures.
• Any shipboard spaces entered through a small hatchway or access point, cargo tanks, cellular
double bottom tanks, duct keels, cofferdams, ballast and oil tanks, and void spaces, but not
including dry cargo holds.
8.4.3. Contaminant
Any dust, fume, mist, vapor, gas (H2S) or other substance, the presence of which can be harmful to
health.
8.4.4. Exposure Standard

An airborne concentration of a particular substance in the workers breathing zone, exposure to
which, according to current knowledge, should not cause adverse health effects, nor cause undue
discomfort to nearly all workers.
The exposure standard can be of three (3) forms:
8.4.5. Time Weighted Average (TWA)

The average airborne concentration of a particular substance when calculated over a normal eight
(8) hour workday, for a five (5) day working week.
8.4.6. Short-Term Exposure Limit (STEL)

A fifteen (15) minute TWA exposure, should not be exceeded at any time during a working day,
even if the eight (8) hour TWA average is within the TWA exposure standard. Exposure at the STEL
should not be longer than fifteen (15) minutes, and should not be repeated more than four (4) times
per day. There should be at least sixty (60) minutes between successive exposures at the STEL.
8.4.7. Peak
A maximum or peak airborne concentration of a particular substance determined over the shortest
analytically practicable period, which does not exceed fifteen (15) minutes.
8.4.8. Explosive (Flammable) Range

The range of flammable contaminant/air mixture between the Lower Explosive Limit (LEL) and the
Upper Explosive Limit (UEL).
8.4.9. Hot Work

Welding, thermal or oxygen cutting, heating, and other ignition-producing or spark-producing
operations.
Note:
Hot work is not permitted if the atmosphere is above 0% LEL.
8.4.10. Lower Explosive Limit (LEL)

Concerning a flammable contaminant, this is the concentration of the contaminant in air, below
which the spread of a flame does not occur in contact with an ignition source.

B.8. Confined Space
8.4.11. Sufficient Oxygen

Before entry, verify that the O2 level is between 20% and 23.5%. If the O2 level is less than 20%,
entry is permitted only while continuously wearing an atmosphere-supplying respirator. If the O2
level is above 23.5%, no entry is permitted.
8.5. Risk assessment

8.5.1. Major hazards of CSE
Fatalities or severe injuries could occur as a result of the following:
• Oxygen deficiency in the confined space.
• Temperature - either too hot or too cold, which can result from the work process or the weather
conditions, or where appropriate ventilation or appropriate clothing is not supplied or worn.
• Radiation - within a confined space caused by the use of X-rays, radiation gauges, isotopes,
lasers, and welders.
• Manual handling
8.6. Monitoring
8.6.1. Before Entry
The evaluation of the atmosphere and a survey of other hazards should be performed outside the
confined space before any entry occurs (the results should be recorded on the entry permit).
The supervisor shall ensure that no person enters a confined space without a work permit until the
following tasks have been carried out:
Confine Space Entry Oxygen Flammable/Combustible Carbon Hydrogen

(02) Mixtures Monoxide Sulfide (H2S)
(CO)
Permitted without an At or above Less than 5% Less than 35 Less than 10
atmosphere-supplying 20% and ppm ppm
respirator less than
or equal to
23.5%
Permitted ONLY while less than At or above 5% and less At or above At or above
continuously wearing an 20% than 10% 35 ppm and 10 ppm and
atmosphere-supplying less than less than 100
1000 ppm ppm
No entry permitted above At or above 10% At or above At or above
23.5% 1000 ppm 100 ppm
Consistent with the hazards identified in the risk assessment and ensure actions are taken according to
the levels of the atmosphere test, as per the following table:
8.6.2. Gas Detectors

A thorough knowledge of the gas indicators is required and should include the following:
• Properties of the gas/vapor.
• Humidity and temperature in the space.
- Never trust your senses to determine if the air in a confined space is safe! You cannot see or
smell any toxic gases and vapors, nor can you determine the level of oxygen present.
• Presence of airborne contaminants that may reduce the accuracy of the reading or “poison” the
sensor.
• The presence of corrosive gases and mists, which may damage the sensor and give misleading
results, causes a false zero reading.

B.8. Confined Space
• Calibration, adjustment, and maintenance requirements.

• Need for recalibration during testing.
• Condensation and/or absorption of gas into walls of sampling lines where these are used.
• Response of the instrument to high and low concentrations of flammable gas or vapors (for
example, false zeros).
• Oxygen deficiency causing an erroneously low reading.
• Oxygen enrichment where the instrument may act as an ignition source causing explosion.
• Difference in atmospheric pressure, which may cause false readings in some sensors.
Equipment for continuous monitoring of gases and vapors should be intrinsically safe and
equipped with an audible alarm if danger develops. Instruments should be calibrated per the
manufacturer’s guidelines. If an acceptable result cannot be obtained without continuous
forced draft ventilation, then the ventilation device should be suitably tagged to ensure it is
not disconnected while the inspection or other work is in progress. The standby person is
responsible for monitoring the proper operation of the forced draft ventilation device.
8.6.3. During Entry
Because of the potential for the latter release of hazardous material, arrangements should be
made to monitor or re-test the atmosphere within the confined space. The use of continuous
monitors, which have alarms, is the most conservative approach.
8.7. Control
8.7.1. Hierarchy of Control Measures, the control measures should consist of:
• Elimination.
• Substitution.
• Engineering controls.
• Adoption of safe work practices.
• Use of personal protective equipment.
8.7.2. Isolation Requirements
Before any employee enters a confined space, the employer shall ensure that all potentially
hazardous services, including all process services, normally connected to that space are positively
isolated to prevent:
The introduction of any materials, contaminants, agents, or conditions harmful to people
occupying the confined space; and It may be necessary to withdraw a confined space from
service before it is prepared for entry and that all persons who may be involved with the repair,
maintenance or operation of the confined space are advised.
Positive steps should be taken to achieve the following:
• Prevention of accidental introduction into the confined space of materials, through piping,
ducts, vents, drains, conveyors, service pipes, or fire protection equipment.
• De-energization and Lock-Out/Tag-Out (LOTO) de-energization and tag-out or both of
machinery, mixers, agitators, or other equipment containing moving parts in the confined space.
• Isolation of all other energy sources that may be external to, but still capable of adversely
affecting the confined space, for example, heating and/or refrigeration methods.
8.7.3. Methods of Isolation
8.7.3.1. Hazardous Materials
No personnel shall be allowed to enter a confined space until positive means are established to
prevent all energy sources from entering the confined space area or causing associated equipment
to operate while work continues.
All isolations shall be conducted under the PTW and LOTO Procedure. Listed below are three (3)
methods of isolation. Alternative methods may be used if equivalent security can be achieved.

B.8. Confined Space
• Removal of a valve, spool piece, and expansion joint in piping leading to, and as close as
possible to, the confined space and blanking or capping the open end of the piping leading to
the confined space. The cap or blank should be identified to indicate its purpose.
• Insertion of a suitable full-pressure spade (blank) in piping between the flanges nearest to the
confined space. The spade should also be identified.
• Where neither method above is practicable, isolation through closing and locking, or closing
and tagging, or both, of at least two valves in the pipe leading to the confined space shall
suffice.
Before entry is permitted to any confined space which itself can move, or in which agitators,
fans, or other moving parts, which may pose a risk to personnel are present, movement shall be
prevented by an approved means or an alternative method offering the equivalent security. Where
practicable, equipment or devices with stored energy such as hydraulic, pneumatic, electrical,
chemical, mechanical, thermal, or other types of energy should be reduced to zero energy.
• The person entering the confined space or the competent person should place a lock or tag,
or both, on the open circuit breaker or open isolating switch supplying electric power to
equipment with hazardous moving parts. This will indicate that a person is in a confined space
and that such isolation shall not be removed until all persons have left the confined space.
When a lock is used, the key shall be kept in the possession of the competent person.
• Where a power source cannot be isolated, controlled readily or effectively, a belt of other
mechanical linkage shall be disconnected and tagged to indicate that a person is in the
confined space and that the linkage shall not be reconnected until all persons have left the
confined space.
• Where the item methods a) and b) above are not practicable, moveable components shall be
blocked, and switches, clutches or other controls shall be tagged to indicate that a person is
in the confined space. The blocks and tags should not be removed until the person has left the
space.
• Where more than one person is in the confined space, the isolating device shall be either:
- Locked and tagged, or both, by each person entering the confined space.
- Locked and tagged, or both, by the Competent Person.
- Where locking or tagging is undertaken by the Competent Person, each person entering the
confined space shall verify or have it verified to him/her that isolation is effective prior to his
entry.
- Removal of Isolation: The locks, tags, blanks or other protective systems shall only be
removed be the person who installed them or by the Competent Person, after confirming that
work has been suspended or completed and all persons have left the confined space. All PTW
and Isolation certification shall be closed.
8.7.3.2. Ventilation
There are two main types of ventilation techniques:
• Natural
• Mechanical or forced
Either means of ventilation should be employed while confined space entry is taking place
to establish and maintain a safe breathing atmosphere. This ventilation should be continued
throughout the period of occupancy as a safeguard against unexpected release of contaminants.
It should be noted that for natural ventilation to be effective, there must be two ventilation points,
one at low level and one at high level, each must be of similar square area in opening. Mechanical
ventilation equipment may not be adequate or sufficiently reliable to maintain a safe atmosphere in
the operators breathing zone, particularly during operations likely to generate toxic contaminant.
Where maintenance of a safe breathing atmosphere in a confined space is dependent on
mechanical ventilation equipment, for example, a fan, then the equipment should:
• Be continuously monitored while the confined space is occupied.
• Have the controls (including any remote power source) clearly identified and tagged to prevent
against unauthorized interference. Exhaust facilities should be arranged to ensure that any

B.8. Confined Space
contaminated air removed from the confined space does not present a hazard to persons
or equipment. Nor do the emissions from equipment such as petrol or diesel engines enter
the confined space. The use of oxygen above concentrations of 21% shall not be used for
ventilation.
8.7.3.3. Cleaning Prior to Entry
All substances, which are likely to present a hazard to persons inside the confined space, should be
removed as far as possible prior to entry. Potentially dangerous material may be trapped in sludge,
scale or other deposits, behind loose linings, in liquid traps, or in instrument fittings, and may be
released only when for example, it is disturbed or heat is applied. Similarly, such material may lodge
in joints in vessels or in the bends of connecting pipes, or other places where removal is difficult.
Procedures and processes to be used to clean the inside of a confined space should be reviewed
and authorized prior to entry. The method to be used will depend upon the material in the confined
space and the potential hazards that may be created by the cleaning process itself. Contaminants
should be disposed of in a manner that will not constitute a hazard.
The following are some general practices to be observed:
• Whenever practicable, initial cleaning should be performed from outside the confined space.
Such initial cleaning should continue until the hazard of atmospheric contaminants has been
reduced as far as reasonably practicable possible.
• Each person entering the confined space should be provided with:
- Suitable protective suits
- Impervious footwear
- Safety helmet with face shield
- Protective gloves.
- Confined Space Safety Harness with D-rings on the top of both shoulder straps.
- An appropriate respiratory protective device, where necessary.
• Hydro jetting the following general precautions should be observed when hydro jetting is
undertaken in a confined space.
- Hydro jetting should always be carried out by trained personnel.
- Warning signs indicating that hydro jetting is in progress should be displayed in conspicuous
locations outside the confined space.
- The area affected by the hydro jetting should be barricaded while work is in progress.
- Where there is a possibility of a flammable environment, the nozzle of the hydro jetting
equipment should be earthed to decrease the generation of static electricity.
- Nozzle operators should have direct visual or audible communication with the pump
operators.
- Removal of fluids from the confined space should be continuous during operation.
- A high pressure/low pressure volume gun should be used to intermittently clean, rather than
operating continuously, thus allowing adequate replacement of air. All high pressure cleaning
equipment should be fitted with actuating devices, which require positive effort, by the
operator’s hand or foot to keep the supply valve open.
• Abrasive Blasting cleaning by abrasive blasting should only be undertaken where suitable air
supplied respirators are used. Further consideration should also be given to:
- Illumination and visibility adequate to allow safe working to continue.
- Protection of the breathing airline to the respirator.
- Escape equipment.
- Actuating devices, which require positive effort by the operator to keep blasting apparatus,
supply valve open.
• Chemical Cleaning In addition to creating toxicity hazards, chemicals used in cleaning operation
may also be capable of producing a flammable atmosphere. Accordingly, the safety of the
atmosphere should be reevaluated after cleaning and prior to the commencement of further
work.

B.8. Confined Space
8.7.3.4. Purging Prior to Entry

Care should be taken in the purging of a confined space to preclude rupture or collapse of the
enclosure due to pressure differentials. When flammable contaminants are to be purged, purging
and ventilation equipment designed for use in hazardous locations should be employed and
precautions taken to eliminate all sources of ignition.
Any methods employed in purging should ensure that any contaminants removed from the
confined space are exhausted to a location where they present no hazard. Where appropriate, the
confined space shall be cleared of contaminants by use of a suitable purging agent. An employer
shall ensure that oxygen or gas mixtures are not to be used for purging or ventilation. Where
supplied-air-breathing apparatus is not used, precautions should be used to establish and maintain a
safe breathing atmosphere.
8.7.3.5. Issue of Permits
The permit/PTW should state the period of its validity and should be replaced whenever it
becomes evident that the duration of work will involve one of the following:
• A change in the supervisor.
• A significant break in work continuity.
• A significant change in atmosphere or work.
8.7.3.6. Standby Persons
It is essential that communication and observation between those in the confined space and the
standby person(s) be constantly maintained. Communication can be achieved, dependent on the
conditions existing in the confined space, by a number of means, including voice, radio hand signals
and other appropriate means. Where it is expected that the person entering the confined space
and the standby person may change places then authorization shall be required on the permit to
do so. The maximum and minimum standby persons should also be recorded on the permit. The
supervisor ensures that no person enters the confined space unless standby person(s) outside the
confined space are maintained and relieved as required. The supervisor, prior to any person entering
the confined space, and during any occupancy of the space, shall ensure appropriate signs and
protective barriers are erected to prevent entry of people not involved in the work.
A stand-by man shall be assigned the duty of watching the persons working inside the confined
space during the time they are inside.
8.7.3.7. The duties of the stand-by man are:
• He shall have no responsibilities other than to continually watch those inside the confined
space and observe their condition and, also, be alert to any need for rescue or other assistance
by those inside.
• He shall be in such a position as to physically observe the condition of every person inside the
confined space.
• He shall have the means (winching equipment or adequate nearby personnel) to rescue any
personnel from inside the space.
• He shall have adequate personal protective equipment available so if it should become
necessary to aid those inside the confined space, he can enter the area safely.
8.7.3.8. Rescue and Rescue Equipment
• Method: The removal of trapped, injured or unconscious people from confined spaces is
extremely difficult, but invariably involves the use of Rescue line techniques (or Single Line
Rescue Techniques - SRT). The use of mechanical lifting equipment should be considered
and a Confined Space Entry and Work Tripod is on site before entry to the confined space is
permitted. The danger is inherent in these activities. Meticulous attention to detail, knowledge
of procedures and high standards of training will minimize risk. Safety standards are not a
substitute for foresight, prudence, common sense and experience in the implication of SRT
activities.

B.8. Confined Space
• Rescue methods and equipment to be used must be determined (and documented) before the
commencement of the job.
• Personnel who are suitably trained in rescue and first aid procedures (Rig Medic) and are to be
utilized in the event of any emergency.
• Entry and exit points to confined spaces must be of adequate size to permit rescue of all
persons who may enter a confined space. These openings are not to be obstructed by fittings or
equipment which could impede rescue.
• Standby persons must be equipped with a suitable means of communication.

B9. Housekeeping
B.9. Housekeeping
9.1. Scope
The housekeeping procedure applies to all areas of the organization, including but not limited to
offices, rigs, warehouses, etc. It covers all aspects of housekeeping, from cleaning and sanitation to
waste disposal and storage.
9.2. Purpose
The purpose of a housekeeping procedure is to establish and maintain a clean, organized, and
safe work environment. A well-maintained workplace can help to prevent accidents, injuries, and
property damage. It can also improve employee morale and productivity.
9.3. Housekeeping
The following minimum precautions shall be applied and implemented:
• Work areas, stairs, and walkways shall not be obstructed by debris or stored materials.
• All walking and working surfaces shall be kept in good repair and free from oil, mud, and other
potentially slippery materials.
• The area around the base of all ladders shall be kept clear to provide unhampered access to the
ladder.
• The area around the rotary table shall be kept clear of obstacles, clean, and free of tools,
materials, and any accumulation of oil, water, or circulating fluids.
• Storage of material shall not create a hazard. Bags, containers, bundles, super sacks, drill pipes,
etc., stored in tiers shall be stacked, blocked, and limited in height so they are stable and secure
against sliding or collapse. Pallets and big bags/super sacks shall never be stored more than
two high.
• Storage areas shall be kept free from accumulation of materials that constitute hazards,
tripping, fire, explosion, or environmental hazard.
• Combustible materials, such as oily rags, waste oil, and other waste, shall be stored in
approved covered metal containers and disposed of as hazardous waste.
• The area around the BOP controls shall be clear of materials to allow unobstructed access.
• The area around emergency equipment such as fire extinguishers shall be kept clear at all times.
• Empty sacks and containers, from mixing mud, shall be stacked neatly and disposed of
appropriately as soon as mixing is complete. The area around the mixing hoppers shall be kept
clear at all times.
• Any and all chemical spills, no matter what chemical or the quantity spilt, shall be cleaned up
immediately. Chemical spills shall be cleaned up and disposed of as per the SDS. If the chemical
is classified as hazardous, the chemical shall be disposed of appropriately, i.e., hazardous
chemical containers.
• Rubbish bins shall be provided around the location. All rubbish bins shall have a cover.
• Emergency escape routes shall be kept clear at all times.
• All permanent trip/collision hazards in emergency escape routes shall be marked with black
and yellow diagonal stripes. Where practical, remove permanent trip/collision hazards from
walkways.
• Each organization shall develop a regular housekeeping/inspection program and shall
document the checklists required for this procedure.

B10. Respiratory Protection
B.10. Respiratory Protection
10.1. Scope
The respiratory protection procedure applies to all workers in the organization who are exposed to
harmful airborne contaminants.
10.2. Purpose
The purpose of a respiratory protection procedure is to protect workers from exposure to harmful
airborne contaminants. This includes dust, fumes, mists, gases, vapors, and smoke. Exposure to
these contaminants can cause a variety of health problems, including respiratory illness, cancer, and
even death.
10.3. General
The Rig Operator or service company shall ensure that all respiratory protection equipment is
provided, well maintained, and used as intended to provide all personnel with adequate protection
against all hazardous atmospheres. Those employees required to use this equipment shall be trained
in its effective use. This training shall include:
• The need for respiratory protection.
• An explanation of why a particular type of respirator has been selected.
• An explanation of the operation, capabilities, and limitations of the respirator.
• Fitting of face pieces.
• Putting on and taking off of respirators.
• Regulations concerning respirator use.
• Instructions in emergency procedures.
• Maintenance, inspection, and storage of respirators.
• Sealing and functioning of the face piece.
10.4. Maintenance
• Such respiratory protection equipment shall be readily available, maintained in good working
order, in a sanitary condition, and inspected on monthly, yearly, and 5-yearly basis as follows:-
• Monthly Inspection: shall be performed by rig safety engineer/barge engineer “Offshore”.
• Yearly and 5-year inspection: shall be performed by a 3rd party.
10.4.1. Respirator inspection shall include:
• A check for tightness of connections.
• The condition of the respiratory inlet covering, head harness, valves, connecting tubes, harness
assemblies, and hoses.
• The proper function of regulators and alarms.
• Each rubber or other elastomeric part shall be inspected for pliability and signs of deterioration.
• Each air cylinder shall be inspected to ensure that it is fully charged and with a current hydro-
test date.
• A record of inspection dates shall be kept for each respirator maintained for Emergency or
rescue use.
• Parts Replacement and Repair
• Only technicians certified in the proper respirator maintenance and overhaul shall do
replacement of parts and repair.
• Replacement parts shall be only those designated for the specific respirator.
10.5. All Self Contained Breathing Apparatus (SCBA)

• Compliant 15-Min and 30-Min SCBA.
• Or hose-line work masks, including an emergency escape cylinder.
Unless protected by respiratory protection equipment, no personnel shall be allowed to enter any
area
Where the oxygen content of the atmosphere is less than 20% by volume an atmosphere-
supplying respirator is required.

Or where the atmosphere is contaminated or in danger of being contaminated by any airborne

substance that may be considered to be harmful.
10.5.1. Quantity
On all D&WO rigs operating in known H2S areas, or on any rig drilling a wildcat well, there shall
be on each rig at least the minimum amount of respiratory protection equipment, required in the
drilling/workover contract.
Respiratory protection equipment is or may be required to be worn in areas, which are or may be
contaminated with substances immediately dangerous to life or health. The user shall follow the
OEM usage instructions, guidance, and limitations.
10.6. Standard Safety Equipment for H2S Operations

H2S and Combustible Gas Monitors. All personnel shall be informed by the Rig Operator of the
specific well site hazards linked to Hydrogen Sulphide (H2S) and shall receive specific instruction
and demonstrate competency in the correct use of any personal safety equipment, H2S detectors,
and warning systems associated with the Rig Operator’s H2S Safety Program Procedures.
10.6.1. Integrated Combustible Gas and Hydrogen Sulfide (H2S) Detection and Alarm
System
An integrated Combustible Gas and H2S Detection System with separate and distinct Visual and
Audible Alarms shall be installed on all well site locations with known or suspected H2S Hazards.
This integrated Combustible Gas and H2S Detection System shall be continuously supplied with
both rig electric power and an emergency battery power back-up source sized for a minimum of
sixty (60) minutes of full operation.
A structured Preventive Maintenance (PM) and testing program shall be developed and diligently
implemented to ensure continuous calibration and operation. PM and Testing program shall include
following activities and must be documented when performed.
• Contractors and Service Companies shall ensure that Gas Detection Systems (fixed, portable
and air breathing compressors) are serviced and calibrated by an OEM authorized Companies
and personnel.
• Gas and H2S Detection System shall be calibrated and tested after dismantling during rig move
and on an annually basis.
• Weekly visual inspection for the splash guard to ensure the sensor provides accurate readings.
• Inspect that all sensors have OEM protective housings capable of protecting the sensor from
accidental spray from rig wash down hoses and accidental mud and/or oil splashes and replace
if signs of damages.
• Inspect during/after severe weather (rain/fog), check the condition of the detection equipment
and calibrate the sensors.
• Contractors and Service Companies shall have a detailed fixed sensor calibration procedure
provided by the OEM for use/reference during monthly calibrations.
• The sensors shall be located as near as practical to:
- The top of the bell nipple (H2S & Combustible Gas).
- The flow line opening to the shale shaker (H2S & Combustible Gas).
- The Driller’s position and about 18-24 inches above the floor (H2S).
- The cellar, this sensor should be readily moveable so that it can be use around the BOP stack
or at the well testing equipment when necessary (H2S & Combustible Gas).
• The H2S alarm system (amber strobe lights and audible alarm) shall be set for a Warning High
alarm (visual) maximum at 10 ppm and Critical High - High alarm (visual and audible) maximum
at 20 ppm. The alarm system shall be designed and strategically positioned so that at least one
visual alarm strobe light is clearly visible to all personnel in any work area. The Audible alarms
shall be readily heard by all personnel in any work area and shall be readily heard and inside all
living quarters and offices.

Note:
Consideration shall be given to all work areas such as the logging unit and military post, if H2S
alarms cannot be clearly heard and seen in these areas, then additional alarms shall be installed.
• There shall be, at a minimum, one spare H2S sensors.
10.6.2. Combustible Gas Detection and Alarm System
• All well sites shall have a continuous combustible gas monitor and alarm system composed of a
minimum of two combustible gas detection devices connected to a Warning High alarm (visual
- Red Strobe) and a Critical High - High alarm (visual and audible).
• The minimum of two (2) required combustible gas detection devices shall be located as follows:
• Rig Combustible Gas Detection Device Locations:
- The top of the bell nipple.
- The flow line opening to the shale shaker.
- The combustible gas alarm system (red strobe light and audible alarm) shall be set for a
Warning High alarm (visual) maximum at 25% LEL (Methane) and Critical High - High alarm
(visual and audible) maximum at 40% LEL (Methane).
- The alarm system shall be designed and strategically positioned so that at least one visual
alarm strobe light is clearly visible to all personnel in work areas including living quarters.
• There shall be a minimum of one spare LEL sensor.
10.6.2.1. Note:
• All portable gas monitoring equipment shall be calibrated as per the OEM recommendations,
log books with maintenance and calibration records shall be maintained for each gas detector.
Each gas detector shall be labeled with: date of last calibration and name of person performing
calibration.
• Number of required portable gas detectors shall be determined based on the internal H2S/
Combustible procedures or rig specific emergency response plan.
10.6.3. Required Breathing Apparatus
• All Well site Breathing Apparatus shall be equivalent to the SCBA Units specified in ANSI Z-88.2
with the minimum design features:
- Open-circuit positive pressure design.
- Minimum 10/15-Minute Escape Cylinder/Minimum 30-Minute Emergency Operations Cylinder.
- Integrated OEM Cylinder Quick Fill Connection (Emergency Packs Only 10/15 minutes).
• Minimum 10/15-minute SCBA Escape Units with integrated Cascade BA Manifold Connections
and Cylinder Quick Fill Connections shall be provided by Rig Management and positioned as
follows:
- All Rig Site Accommodation Cabins – Escape Only units such as ELSA.
• Minimum 30-minute SCBA Escape Units with integrated Cascade BA Manifold Connections
(Example Diaphragm) shall be positioned as follows:
Location ( Place) Required Number
Tool pushers office/quarters One
Company Foreman’s office/quarters One
Rig Floor Three
Primary safe briefing area Two
Secondary safe briefing area Two
• Each organization shall perform a risk assessment based on the well program to identify the
required number of Breathing Apparatuses.
• At least one fully-charged spare cylinder shall be provided for each 30 minute SCBA at each
designated Safe Briefing Area.

B11. Hydrogen Sulfide Safety (H S) 2
B.11. Hydrogen Sulfide Safety
11.1. Scope
The hydrogen sulfide safety procedure applies to all workers who may be exposed to H2S.
11.2. Purpose
This procedure identifies common hazards and possible safety precautions and monitoring
methods to ensure the safety of personnel and equipment, to reduce the health effects to workers
who are exposed to hydrogen sulfide by breathing it depending on concentration and exposure
duration.
11.3. Definitions
11.3.1. Hydrogen Sulphide
Chemical formula is H2S. It is a flammable, colorless, toxic gas that is heavier than air and
sometimes associated with oil and gas producing and gas processing operations.
11.3.2. Time-weighted average (TWA)

is a method of calculating a worker’s daily exposure to hazardous substances such as dust, fumes,
chemicals, gases, or vapors. It is averaged to an 8-hour workday or 40-hour week, along with the
average levels of exposure to the hazardous substance and the time spent in that area. TWA for H2S
is 10 PPM.
11.3.3. Short term exposure limit (STEL)

A 15 minute TWA exposure that should not be exceeded at any time during a workday. STEL for
H2S is 15 PPM.
11.4.1. PIC (OIM/STP)
• Shall ensure that all personnel follows the rules outlined in this procedure.
• Ensure that all required inspections for the H2S equipment are properly done as per required.
11.4.2. Senior Electrician
Shall ensure that the H2S detectors and equipment are maintained, calibrated and ready to use at
any time as per PMS.
11.4.3. Rig Engineer/ Senior Mechanic/Barge Engineer

• Ensure that all air lines and cascade system (If applicable) are in good conditions and working
properly.
• Shall be responsible for re-filling the BA cylinders after usage.
11.4.4. Safety Engineer
• Shall ensure all personnel are adequately trained in the basic fundamentals of Hydrogen
Sulphide (H2S) safety.
• Shall ensure that all personnel are trained in the using of H2S gas detectors and donning the
SCBA.
• Shall ensure that all personnel are aware of the H2S Emergency situation by following the
organization H2S drills matrix.
11.4.5. All other employees
Each Individual should follow organization Rigs specific station bill

11.5. Procedure:
It is not acceptable to proceed with work in a new area (where there is any reason to believe H2S
could be present) without provision of at least a minimum of H2S safety equipment. Minimum,
means detectors, measuring equipment and standby Self Contained Breathing Apparatus in the field
available to use for sampling and other activities where there is a potential exposure to H2S until
such time as H2S presence and quantity is accurately determined.
11.5.1. Facts and Hazards of Hydrogen Sulphide:

H2S is a highly toxic, colorless gas, heavier than air. It can paralyze the breathing system and KILL
in minutes. Being heavier than air, on still days H2S tends to accumulate in low-lying areas. Mud
pits are particularly hazardous. However, if the H2S is warmer than the surrounding air, it will rise.
Thus even personnel working in high places, such as the derrick-man should do so with caution.
H2S is highly soluble in water, and in hydrocarbons such as gasoline, kerosene and crude oil. At
atmospheric pressure, water will absorb about three times its own volume of the gas.
H2S can be naturally occurring, can be produced by sulfate-reducing bacteria, and can be
generated by reaction of HCL acid and iron-sulfides (sulfide scale) found on the well tubular. H2S
occurs worldwide in various concentrations associated with gas, oil and water.
11.5.2. H2S Gas Key Points

• Extremely toxic.
• Colorless.
• Heavier than air.
• Readily disperses by the wind.
• Smells like rotten eggs in small concentrations.
• Highly corrosive to certain materials.
• Burns with a blue flame and produce SO2.
• Ignition temperature 260C.
11.5.3. Health Effects of H2S
Hydrogen sulfide gas causes a wide range of health effects. Workers are primarily exposed to
hydrogen sulfide by breathing it. The effects depend on how much hydrogen sulfide you breathe and
for how long. Exposure to very high concentrations can quickly lead to death.
Short-term (also called acute) symptoms and effects are shown below:
Concentration (ppm) Symptoms/Effects

0.00011-0.00033 Typical background concentrations
0.01-1.5 Odor threshold (when rotten egg smell is first noticeable to some). Odor
becomes more offensive at 3-5 ppm. Above 30 ppm, odor is described as
sweet or sickeningly sweet.
2-5 Prolonged exposure may cause nausea, tearing of the eyes, headaches or loss
of sleep. Airway problems (bronchial constriction) in some asthma patients.
20 Possible fatigue, loss of appetite, headache, irritability, poor memory, dizziness.
50-100 Slight conjunctivitis (“gas eye”) and respiratory tract irritation after 1 hour. May
cause digestive upset and loss of appetite.
100 Coughing, eye irritation, loss of smell after 2-15 minutes (olfactory fatigue).
Altered breathing, drowsiness after 15-30 minutes. Throat irritation after 1 hour.
Gradual increase in severity of symptoms over several hours. Death may occur
after 48 hours.
100-150 Loss of smell (olfactory fatigue or paralysis).

Concentration (ppm) Symptoms/Effects

200-300 Marked conjunctivitis and respiratory tract irritation after 1 hour. Pulmonary edema may
occur from prolonged exposure.
500-700 Staggering, collapse in 5 minutes. Serious damage to the eyes in 30 minutes. Death
after 30-60 minutes.
700-1000 Rapid unconsciousness, “knockdown” or immediate collapse within 1 to 2 breaths,
breathing stops, death within minutes.
1000-2000 Nearly instant death
11.5.4. Longer term (also called chronic) symptoms and effects

Some people who breathed in levels of hydrogen sulfide high enough to become unconscious
continue to have headaches and poor attention span, memory, and motor function after waking up.
Problems with the cardiovascular system have also been reported at exposures above permissible
exposure limits. People who have asthma may be more sensitive to hydrogen sulfide exposure. That
is, they may have difficulty breathing at levels lower than people without asthma.
11.5.5. First Aid

In a case of emergency, below to be followed:
• Never enter the contaminated area before putting on Breathing Apparatus.
• Remove the victim from the contaminated area into fresh air as soon as possible.
• If breathing has stopped, start artificial respiration immediately.
• Keep the patient warm and at rest.
• Get patient to doctor as soon as possible, but continue artificial respiration en route if breathing
stops.
• If an oxygen resuscitator is available, use it instead of artificial respiration, as oxygen will more
quickly oxidize H2S in the blood. However, begin with artificial respiration rather than wait for a
resuscitator.
• Regarding the AED use:
• Patients who are comatose, hypotensive, or are having seizures or cardiac arrhythmias should
be treated according to advanced life support (ALS) protocols which may include AED if needed.
Regarding Eye:
• Do not irrigate frostbitten eyes. Otherwise, irrigate exposed or irritated eyes with plain water or
saline for at least 5 minutes.
• Eye irrigation may be carried out simultaneously with other basic care and transport. Remove
contact lenses if easily removable without additional trauma to the eye. If a corrosive material
is suspected or if pain or injury is evident, continue irrigation while transferring the victim to the
support zone.
11.6. Safety Precautions

The following precautions must be taken in order to protect from a possible H2S occurrence
safely:
• The Rig Operator and Service Companies shall ensure all personnel are adequately trained in
the basic fundamentals of Hydrogen Sulphide (H2S) safety and continuously maintain valid
H2S safety Training Certificates. No personnel are permitted to enter any rig/well site location
without a valid H2S Safety Training Certificate and completing the rig safety orientation.
• Training shall include all personnel on the rig to be able to demonstrate an understanding of
characteristics of H2S and its toxicity and Rig specific detection, warning system, and alarm
signals.
• Keep proper breathing apparatus on location, and train all personnel in its operation and
maintenance.
• H2S drills should begin prior to drilling into formations thought to contain H2S; so all
persons will react immediately at the warning signal. Periodic drills should also be carried

out even if H2S is not anticipated, in order to keep crews familiar with the procedure in case
of an unexpected occurrence of H2S. H2S drill to be conducted minimum bi-weekly as per
organization contingency manual.
• Portable electronic gas detectors: A hand portable device with a clear audio visual display with
alarm that able to determine oxygen content and level of H2S in air. Detectors must have a
valid calibration certificate by third party every six months. Personnel shall be trained in their
application, proper use and any operational limits that may be applicable. Detectors shall not
be used as measuring device.
• Have adequate H2S detection devices in key areas around the rig, with responsibilities for
monitoring them clearly defined.
• Ensure that the assigned first aiders in each crew are trained in artificial respiration and other
first aid techniques relevant to H2S poisoning.
• Restrict movement of personnel into areas likely to have H2S contamination by adequate
warning signs at rig entrance and apply warning announcement.
• Facial Hairs shall be removed for all breathing apparatus to be effective, it is critical to have
an effective seal around the face mask. Given that facial hairs may prevent this seal, it is
recommended to prohibit facial hairs for personnel working in known H2S areas.
• Enough wind socks shall be distributed
11.7. Detection and Monitoring Hydrogen Sulphide:

The detection and monitoring of Hydrogen Sulphide in the workplace is essential in implementing
a personnel safety program. No human sense can be relied on as a means of detecting H2S. This
toxic gas is colorless and odorless in concentrations low as 100 ppm by volume. Depending on the
individual’s physical makeup, length of exposure, and frequency of previous exposure, the sense
of smell may be removed at lower concentration levels. Emphasis on this adverse physical effect is
essential, as a false sense of security may arise from the loss of sense of smell.
Distribution of BA shall be as per rig-specific safety layout and station bill.
Rig Site / SCBA Escape set Derrick Single gas Single gas Multi -Gas Fixed gas Wind
Equipment 30 Min 15 Min Escape detector detector Detector detection socks
Hood ( H2S ) (O2 , CO, system
SO2 )
Drilling 12 7 2 3 1 for each 2 1 5
W/O 8 4 2 3 1 for each 2 1 4
Offshore 24 20 2 3 1 for each 4 4 6
11.7.1. Fixed detection systems

• Fixed hydrogen sulfide atmospheric monitoring systems used in oil and gas well drilling,
servicing and workover operations shall include visual and audible alarm(s), located where the
alarm can be seen or heard throughout the work area.
• A fixed system does not in itself provide protection for personnel and is not a substitute
for normal entry precautions to a high-risk area, where tests using portable equipment and
carrying of breathing apparatus should be part of the procedure for entry.
• The Fixed gas sensors shall be located as near as practical to:
• The top of the bell nipple.
• The flow line opining to the shale shaker.
• The Driller’s position and about 18-24 inches above the floor.
• In the cellar, this sensor should be readily moveable so that it can be used around the BOP stack
or at the well testing equipment when necessary.

11.7.2. Portable detectors

• Portable detectors are used for alerting the individual and should be available for designated
personnel. They may be used in locations where it is not practical to install fixed systems and
can also provide back-up facilities in the event of a fixed system failure.
• These detectors are based on the diffusion characteristics of toxic gases and usually incorporate
electrochemical detector which generate an electric current as the toxic gas passes over it. This
current is converted into an audible or visual display signal alarms (or both) if a preset gas level
is exceeded and provide the ability to have a continuous read-out of the concentration.
• The instrument provided should be continuous and automatic in operation and suitable for use
by non-technical worker. In addition the instrument should:
- Be suitable for use in hazardous areas (mandatory)
- Be robust in construction
- Be capable of being easily handed and operated by one person
- Have an integral power source rechargeable, lasting at least eight hours
- Have test function capability
- Be easy to calibrate.
• These portable detectors exist in two types:
- Multi-gas detector where H2S is one measured gas among other gases that the device can
detect.
- Personal / Single gas detector which dedicated only for H2S and can be mounted on
personnel pocket / coverall.
11.7.3. Testing and calibration:
• AII systems and equipment should be tested in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendation and Preventive maintenance system “Every 6 months”
• Because H2S detection systems are primarily warning device, not only the accuracy should be
verified but also the speed of response of the sensor. The functioning of the system-related
parts such as visual beacons, audible warning devices, and alike should also be verified at
regular intervals and before each period of use.
11.8. Breathing (Respiratory protection) Equipment

11.8.1. Self-Contained Breathing Apparatus (SCBA)
• Self-contained breathing apparatus consists of compressed air cylinder/cylinders carried on
the wearer’s back. Air is supplied to the full face mask via a flexible hose through a pressure
reduction and demand valve.
• The system can be obtained either in the ‘demand’ or’ positive pressure’ mode. In the positive
pressure mode the possibility of pulling in toxic vapor around the seal of the face mask is
minimized. Cylinders of 1200, 1800 and 2400 liters are readily available from the manufacturers.
• The amount of air remaining in the cylinder(s) is easily checked by the wearer by means of a
pressure gauge fitted to an extension tube attached to the front harness and by an audible low
pressure alarm.
• SCBA sets shall be inspected on monthly, yearly and 5-yearly basis as follows:
• Monthly Inspection: shall be performed by rig safety engineer / barge engineer “Offshore”.
• Yearly and 5 years inspection: shall be performed by a 3rd party.
11.8.2. Monthly Inspection Instructions for Breathing Apparatus
• Test and inspect all SCBA, according to Your (Rig’s) Location List
• Inspect the condition of diaphragms in breather valves, replace if found Brittle, hard, sticky,
deformed etc.
• Inspect all gaskets in high-pressure connections and Replace if required
• Check that pressure in all air bottles including spares is minimum 180 bar, if below, Recharge
the bottles.
• If no breathing air compressor is available, send the bottles requiring recharge to your local

Shore Base for recharging.

• Perform a leakage test of the equipment. After the check of the bottle pressure, close bottle
valve and watch the pressure gauge for 5 minutes, if the pressure drops, Find and repair the
leakage
• When releasing the pressure, check the air whistle for (Return Alarm) or Air Reserve Alarm
which should whistle when the pressure drops to 40 bar
• Inspect the overall condition of the face masks, ensure that all equipment Related, are in a safe
and good working condition, especially the function of the Membrane in the breather valve, and
change as required.
• Check hoses, straps and belts, remedy as required.
• Inspect carrier equipment for condition and cleanliness.
• Report if abnormal conditions are observed in an unscheduled work order report
• Every H2S Drill Check bottle pressure on all units including spare bottles.
11.8.3. Compressed Airline Breathing Apparatus
• These sets consist of a full face mask attached to either a remote set of cylinders containing
compressed air or to a compressor. The face mask is connected to the bank of compressed
air cylinders or the compressor via a flexible hose and pressure regulator. The bank of remote
cylinders or the compressor should never be left unattended whilst users are connected
• The hose should be of a construction capable of withstanding chemical attack and kinking
under pressure. In the case of the compressor it may be necessary to include a filter
downstream of the compressor to remove any contaminants. The compressed air hose
breathing apparatus with a remote set of cylinders is recommended for use in an H2S
contaminated environment up to a maximum of 2 per cent (20,000 ppm) H2S.
11.8.4. Cascade Air Breathing System
• This equipment used typically on drilling rigs combines the compressed airline system with the
self-contained breathing apparatus by providing with the latter a possibility of connecting into
a compressed airline supply.
• The self-contained breathing apparatus set allows the person to leave the hazard area when
necessary.
11.8.5. Escape BA Sets
An auxiliary self-contained air supply rated for less than 15 minutes is suitable only for escape or
self-rescue use.
11.8.6. Chemical Canister Respirators

• These respirators consist of a full face mask connected to a canister. The canister contains an
adsorbent material selected for the specific toxic gas, in this case H2S, which it removes from
the inhaled air’.
• The canister of adsorbent is for one time use only and must be discarded after use, regardless
of how short the usage was. While breathing in, a negative pressure is developed inside the
face mask and, if a poor face seal exists, H2S could enter the mask.
• Escape hood is easily deployed in an emergency. When the case is opened, the filter plug
automatically releases and the filter moves into operational position so the escape hood can be
immediately donned. The self-adjusting internal head harness requires no additional tightening.
11.9. General precautions

• Respirators should be selected on the basis of the hazards to which workers are exposed.
• The user shall be instructed and trained in the proper use of respirators and their limitations.
• Respirators shall be cleaned and disinfected after each use.
• Respirators should be stored in a convenient, clean, and sanitary location.
• Respirators should be inspected during cleaning. Worn or deteriorated parts should be
replaced. Respirators for emergency use should be thoroughly inspected at least once a month

and after each use.

• Appropriate surveillance of work area conditions and degree of employee exposure or stress
should be maintained.
• Persons should not be assigned to tasks requiring the use of self-contained breathing apparatus
(SCBA), unless it has been determined that they are physically able to perform the work and use
the equipment.
• Equipment needing repair shall be appropriately tagged and removed from equipment stock
until it is suitably repaired or replaced.
11.10. Storage, Inspection and Maintenance

• Personal breathing equipment shall be located so that this equipment is quickly and easily
available to essential personnel.
• Additional breathing equipment may be required by site specific contingency plans. When
an alternative derrick escape means is not available, an escape-type air pack shall be readily
available.
• Breathing equipment shall be maintained and stored in a convenient, clean, and sanitary
location.
• All breathing equipment should be stored to protect them from damage, contamination, dust,
sunlight, extreme temperatures and damaging chemicals. The breathing equipment should be
packed and stored to prevent deformation of the face piece and exhalation valve.
• All breathing equipment shall be checked before and after each use and inspected at least
monthly to ensure that it is maintained in satisfactory condition. A record of the monthly
inspection results, including dates and findings should be retained for a minimum of 12 months.

B12. Fire prevention/ protection
B.12. Fire prevention/ protection
12.1. Scope
This fire prevention and protection procedure outlines the organization’s responsibility to prevent
fires and explosions and handle fire emergencies.
12.2. Purpose
The purpose is effective planning for a fire protection and prevention safety program to maximize
the effectiveness of respective activities/processes and to prevent injuries to people, losses to
business, damage to environment which may lead to interruptions of services flow to customers and
loss of trust from communities.
12.3. Onshore Rig Fire Fighting Equipment and Operations

• Rig contractor shall complete a Fire Risk Assessment specific for each rig to identify potential
fire hazards and appropriated controls to mitigate fire risk including fire prevention, detection
and emergency response measures. The Fire Risk Assessment shall be updated when be
required and reviewed every year by Rig Contractor.
• On every onshore drilling or workover rig, the Rig Operator shall provide and continuously
maintain the fire detection and extinguishing system equipment, along with the firefighting
equipment specified in the Drilling/Workover Contract.
• The Rig Operator shall develop and implement a structured rig fire detection and extinguishing
equipment maintenance and inspection program, designed to ensure all detection and
extinguishing equipment is readily accessible and continuously operable in their designated
locations.
• All firefighting equipment shall be inspected monthly as a minimum. Additionally, all fire
extinguishers shall have an external visual inspection as stipulated by NFPA 10.
• All rig fire detection and extinguishing equipment maintenance, inspection and testing activities
shall be documented in an inspection log.
• Firefighting equipment can only be operated by trained personnel.
• The firefighting water tank must contain a sufficient quantity of water to fight the fire for a
minimum of 15 minutes, until more firefighting water trucks arrive at the fire area.
Example:
The business unit must have a firefighting water tank with adequate capacity of 6000 liters, for
watering out a fire for 15 minutes, in accordance with NFPA 13, for a 2” fire nozzle diameter, 150 PSI
water pressure, and a 100 m fire hose.
• Fire detection and extinguishing equipment shall not be tampered with or removed for other
than for firefighting, training and/or required maintenance servicing. Any fire extinguishers
removed from the well site for maintenance and/or recharging shall be replaced during the
period they are missing.
• All fire extinguishers shall have an identification signage posted in a visible place. Additionally,
all fire extinguishers shall be appropriately mounted so that the top of the extinguisher is 1m
above the ground, and provided with an OEM protective cover or cabinet.
• The drilling contractor shall develop written site specific Fire Attack Plans for each of the
following areas:
- Engine compartment or engine skid.
- PCR room.
- BOP/Cellar Area
- Fuel tank storage area(s).
- Rig site and camp accommodation cabins.
- Any other area on the rig where a fire may be reasonably thought possible.
As a minimum the fire attack plan shall include the following:
• Identify the primary and secondary Fire Attack Teams that will fight the fire.
• Identify the Fire Team composition, as a minimum this will consist of: Fire Team leader and
three additional members. All designated Fire Team Members shall wear compliant firefighting
PPE and 30 minute SCBA.

• Identify specific firefighting equipment and procedures to fight a fire in that specific area.
• Identify the maximum allowable response time for the Fire team to assemble and fight the fire.
• Include procedures such as a “T” Card system, to facilitate a rapid and accurate head count or
other means to account for all personnel.
• Include rescue procedures for rescuing potentially injured personnel from the fire site or vicinity.
The drilling contractor shall provide adequate training to ensure that all personnel are capable
of performing their assigned tasks as specified in the fire attack plan.
• The rig crew shall validate the safe and effective implementation of this plan in routine rig fire
training exercises and emergency drills at rig site and main camp.
Note:
The drilling contractor shall provide adequate training to ensure that all personnel are capable of
safely and effectively performing their assigned tasks as specified in the fire attack plans.
• Kitchen galley hoods and cooking appliances shall be provided with a fixed fire suppression
system. The capacity of the system shall be based on a Fire Study from a competent person. Its
design, installation and maintenance must follow, as minimum, the OEM recommendations and
NFPA standards.
• Fixed fire extinguishing systems for each onshore rig (including water, carbon dioxide, dry
powder or foam) shall be kept in good working order, available for immediate use at all times
while engaged in drilling operations or in transit and have conspicuously placed operational
instructions for each system. Actuation station for the range extinguishing system shall be away
from the fire range to activate it safely in case of a fire event.
• A fire blanket is required to be available at the kitchen. The blanket shall be away from the
cooking range area, to reach the blanket safely in case of fire.
• All compressed gas and fire extinguisher cylinders shall be hydro tested and inspected
according to original equipment manufacturers (OEM) guidelines and specifications. Fire
extinguisher cylinders shall be hydro tested at intervals not exceeding those specified in the
Supplements 01 and 02 of the G.I. 1781.001-01 and as per industry standard NFPA 10. They may
be hydro tested earlier if deemed necessary.
• Manual fire alarm stations at rig site and main camp shall be conspicuously located.
• Fire alarms shall be audible in all areas of the rig, high noise areas shall also be furnished
with a visual alarm (strobe lights). All fire doors shall remain closed at all times unless fitted
with magnetic locks (or a similar device) which shall automatically release when an alarm is
activated.
12.3.1. Hand/Portable Fire Extinguishers
• All fire extinguishers shall be “listed” by an approved testing authority to certify performance.
• The specified CO2 and Dry Chemical Hand/Portable Fire Extinguishers shall be of the specified
manufacturers and models (or preapproved equivalent) and deployed as follows:
Safety Equipment Register Quantity

No. Item Description Land Rigs
Fire Fighting Equipment Drilling Workover
1 Fixed CO2 System for SCR / VFD 1 1
2 Kitchen wet chemical System 1 1
3 Diesel Fire Pump (Rig site& Camp site) 2 2
4 Fire Station with Fire Hoses and Nozzles 4 3
5 Fire Hoses - Spare 3 2
6 Fire Nozzles - Spare 2 1
7 Dry Powder Fire Extinguishers - 12 kg. 40 30

Safety Equipment Register Quantity

No. Item Description Land Rigs
Fire Fighting Equipment Drilling Workover
8 CO2 Fire Extinguishers - 6 kg. 25 15
9 Wheeled Foam Extinguishers 45 L 4 4
10 Fire Blanket 4 4
11 Firefighting Suits 4 4
12 Firefighting Gloves 4 4
13 Firefighting Helmets 4 4
14 Firefighting Visor 4 4
15 Firefighting Boot 4 4
16 Fire Axe 2 2
17 Smoke Detectors (Camp site& Rig site) 75 45
12.4. Offshore Rig Fire Fighting Equipment and Operations

On every offshore drilling or workover rig, the MODU Operator shall provide and continuously
maintain the fire detection and extinguishing equipment, specified in both the applicable Drilling/
Workover Contract and Classification Society Standards, available for immediate use at all times,
while engaged in drilling operations or in transit.
The MODU Operator shall develop and implement a structured rig fire detection and extinguishing
equipment maintenance and inspection program, designed to ensure all firefighting and rescue
equipment is readily accessible and continuously operable in their designated locations. All offshore
rig firefighting and extinguishing equipment maintenance, inspection and testing activities shall be
documented in an inspection log.
The Drilling Contractor shall notify the Liaisonman if the Fire System is found to have any
impairment that may affect the operation of the system. The Liaisonman shall take necessary action
and inform the Aviation Department for helideck shut-down considerations.
A compliant firefighting and rescue equipment maintenance, inspection and testing program will
have the following elements:
• EFWP System and Fire Water/Foam Monitor System will be Functionally Tested weekly as per
IMO requirements.
• Monthly BOP/Well Platform Deluge Water spray System and Helideck DIFFS System Function
Test
• 316L SS bolts shall be installed in the foam fire fighting monitor flanges.
• The MODU Operator (Contractor) shall conduct a monthly Fire Hose Station Function Test
• An annual compliant flow test shall be conducted to ensure the system (pumps, lines, relief
valve, strainers) are functioning. The results shall be recorded and maintained on the MODU for
verification as per below charts templates as a minimum.
• All new MODU’s joining Operations and rigs returning from Shipyard after 5 year Surveys/
maintenance shall have a compliant 3rd Party Flow Test completed as per below charts and
requirements as a minimum.
• Flow tests shall be completed using one or two deep-well pumps as needed to achieve the rigs
normal operating manifold/system pressure and a single fire pump. Two pumps may only be
used in cases where a booster/helideck pump has been installed. A by-pass line is required for
all booster pumps in case of pump failure. A minimum of two successful pressure and flow tests
(using different configurations) are required to be achieved.

Safety Equipment Register

No. Item Description Quantity
Fire Fighting Equipment Offshore Rigs
Fixed Water mist System for MCC / VFD/Emergency generator/Engine room/
1 1
Mud pits
2 Rig floor deluge system 1
3 BOP area and accumulator unit deluge system 1
4 Helideck and helicopter fueling station foam system 1
5 Helicopter fuel tank dump system 1
6 Kitchen wet chemical System 1
7 Fire Pump 2
8 Fire Station with Fire Hoses and Nozzles 40
9 Fire Hoses - Spare 12
10 Fire Nozzles - Spare 10
11 Dry Powder Fire Extinguishers - 6, 12&30 kg. 90
12 CO2 Fire Extinguishers - 6,25&53 kg. 45
13 Wheeled Foam Extinguishers 45 L 3
14 Fire Blanket 8
15 Firefighting Suits 12
16 Firefighting Gloves 12
17 Firefighting Helmets 12
18 Firefighting Visor 12
19 Firefighting Boot 12
20 Fire Axe 6
• Fire detection, extinguishing, and rescue equipment shall not be tampered with and shall not
be removed for other than for firefighting, training, and/or required maintenance servicing. Any
fire detection or fire extinguishing equipment removed from the offshore rig for maintenance,
refurbishment, and/or recharging shall be replaced by compatible spare extinguishing
equipment during the period they are missing.
• All firefighting and rescue equipment shall be conspicuously signed and appropriately mounted
with OEM brackets and protective covers specifically designed for reliable service in the rugged
offshore operating environment. Fire extinguishers shall be mounted so that the top of the
extinguisher is 1m above the ground and shall be provided with an OEM protective cover or
cabinet specifically designed for offshore installations. All fire extinguishers located in the
potential helideck “Rotor Wash” Zone shall be stored in OEM Protective Cabinets.
• Fixed Extinguishing System Cylinder Racks (including operating instructions), Piping Manifolds,
and associated Shutdown Interlocks/Switches shall be placed in protective enclosures when
located outside the hull compartment or similar protected space.
Note:
Canvas or cloth covers shall not be used as protective covers for firefighting equipment located in
the “ROTOR WASH ZONE.”
Carbon tetrachloride and other toxic vaporizing liquid fire extinguishers are prohibited.
• Each offshore rig shall have a dedicated fire water system supplied by a minimum of two

(2) electric fire water pumps taking suction from the deep well pump system supply loop. In
addition, at least one (1) of the fire water pumps shall be configured to be effectively supplied
from the sea chest and drill water tanks. The electric fire water pump supplied from the sea
chest shall be connected to the rig’s emergency power supply bus. All fire pumps shall be
installed by the relevant requirements of NFPA 20.
12.4.1. Fixed Fire Extinguishing Systems
• IMO/Class approved manually actuated fixed fire extinguishing systems with the following
specified shutdown interlocks shall be provided for the Engine Room, main SCR/PCR rooms,
Paint Locker and Galley Hoods. All fixed suppression systems shall remain fully operational in
all Dead Ship Loss of Power Scenarios.
• All fixed fire extinguishing system discharge manifold safety relief device discharge shall be
routed to a safe unenclosed/uncongested location. These safety relief devices shall be included
in the MODU RV Registry and Periodic Visual Inspection Process, as well as the Safety Relief
Device OEM Recertification Process.
• Conspicuously placed sequential operational instructions shall be posted at each manual
actuation station. Fixed Extinguishing System Cylinder Racks shall not be located in the hazard
areas they protect, except the Galley Hood Extinguishing Systems.
12.4.2. Fixed Fire Extinguishing System Shutdown Interlocks
The shutdown interlocks shall be provided for each designated system. Manually operated fire
dampers, located outside the fire hazard zone, are an acceptable design alternative to automatic
damper closure devices.
12.4.3. Engine Room

Engine and Diesel Fuel Supply Shutdown, Supply and Exhaust fan shutdown and Supply and
Exhaust damper closure interlocks.
12.4.4. MCC Compartments/SCR and VFD Rooms

HVAC Shutdown and Damper closure interlocks.
12.4.5. Paint Locker

Supply/Exhaust fan shutdown and Damper closure interlocks.
12.4.6. Galley Hoods

• Exhaust fan shutdown and damper closure interlocks. An integrated heat, smoke, and
manual fire alarm station system shall be provided following applicable Classification Society
Standards, with detection and alarm devices strategically located throughout the rig. Smoke
detection devices shall be provided in all climate-controlled living and work spaces and fixed
temperature/rate of rise heat detectors in all equipment and machinery spaces.
• Fire alarms shall be audible in all areas of the rig, high noise areas shall also be furnished with a
visual alarm (strobe lights).
• All compartment fire doors shall be diligently maintained and remain closed at all times, unless
fitted with magnetic locks (or a similar device) which shall automatically release when an
alarm is activated. All main deck supply/exhaust and vent stacks shall be adequately labeled
with the hull compartments/areas they serve. All main deck hatch covers shall have suitable
means of access and closing mechanisms installed as appropriate. When mechanical or closing
mechanisms are used they shall be inspected and function tested weekly and entered into the
rigs lifting gear registry and preventative maintenance system.
• Annually each fire hose must be subjected to a test pressure equivalent to the maximum
pressure to which it may be subjected during operation. Each fire hose must be subjected to a
pressure of at least 100 p.s.i.
• The access to any fire hose station shall not be blocked.
• Each fire hose station shall be equipped with an appropriate spanner wrench.

• Each fire hose shall be properly stored on a Fire Equipment OEM designed offshore rack or reel
with a protective cabinet or cover when not in use. All Fire Hose Stations located within the
potential helideck “Rotor Wash” Zone shall be placed in OEM Protective Cabinets.
• Each fire nozzle shall remain continuously attached to the hose at each designated fire hose
station.
• Each fire station on an offshore rig shall be properly identified by marking: “FIRE STATION
NO.____” next to the station in letters at least 5 centimeters (2 inches) high.
• On each offshore rig, there shall be at all times at least one formally trained helideck crew
holding valid OPITO in HOIT and Heli-Deck Crash Fire Rescue operations. The minimum
required Heli-deck crew will include at least four personnel: HLO, baggage handler and a 2
member Heli-Deck Crash Fire Fighting Team.
• The required Heli-deck crew shall demonstrate knowledge and competency in the following
critical operational elements:
• Rig Heli-Deck Fire Attach Plan. Basic Heli-Deck Crash Rescue. Rig Heli-Deck Fire Fighting
System. Basic Heli-Deck Fire Fighting.
• Crash rescue box is to be permanently located in a designated staging area readily accessible
to the heliport. This box is to be highly visible and designated exclusively for crash equipment.
• Portable and Wheeled Fire Extinguishers shall be provided following the applicable
Classification Society Requirements

B13. Electrical Safety
B.13. Electrical Safety
13.1. Scope
This procedure applies to all EGPC drilling /workover contractor facilities that safeguard
employees from the hazards associated with electrical energy during activities such as installation,
inspection, operation, maintenance, and demolition of electrical and related equipment.
13.2. Objective
13.2.6.1. The purpose of these procedures are as follows:
• Prevent electrical-related injuries.
• Implement proactive controls across the spectrum of expected hazards.
• Educate all personnel about electrical hazards.
• Promote a vibrant electrical safety culture.
• Demonstrate compliance with established standards.
13.3. Definitions
Definitions are provided to clarify terms and provide additional resource information.
13.3.1. Classified Area:

An area that poses electrical hazards and is classified following the guidelines of a nationally
recognized electrical code. Areas are defined by class, division, and group. See National Electrical
Code, NFPA 70, for complete definition of hazardous areas. For purposes of the Electrical Safety
policy, Class I areas are to include Division 1 and Division 2 classified areas. Consult Facility Electrical
Hazardous Area Classification drawings to identify where Class I areas are defined. See hazardous
zone layout.
13.3.2. Tag-out
The placement of a tag-out device on an energy-isolating device according to the procedure to
indicate that the equipment may not be operated until the tag-out device is removed.
13.3.3. Authorized Lockout/tag out employee

A person who has completed the required hazardous energy control and is authorized to lockout or
tag out a specific machine or equipment to perform service or maintenance.
13.3.4. De-energized electrical work

Electrical work that is performed on equipment that has been previously energized and is now free
from any electrical connection to a source of potential difference and from electrical charges.
13.3.5. Energy source

Any source of electrical, mechanical, hydraulic, pneumatic, chemical, thermal, or other energy.
13.3.6. Exposed electrical parts

Energized parts that can be inadvertently touched or approached nearer than a safe distance by
a person. Parts not suitably guarded, isolated, or insulated. Examples include terminal contacts or
lugs, and bare wiring.
13.3.7. Grounding
A conducting connection, whether intentional or accidental, between an electrical circuit or
equipment and the earth or to some conducting body that serves in place of the earth.
13.3.8. Hazardous Location

An area in which airborne flammable dust, vapor, or gas may be present and would represent a
hazard if a source of ignition were present.

13.3.9. Interlock
An electrical, mechanical, or key-locked device intended to prevent an undesired sequence of
13.3.10. Isolating Switch:

A switch intended for isolating an electric circuit from the source of power. It has no interrupting
rating and is intended to operate only after the circuit has been opened by some other means.
13.3.11. Life Safety Equipment

Equipment that provides critical protection for safety in the event of an emergency or other serious
hazard. Life safety equipment, which is electrically energized, should be worked on using Energized
Electrical Equipment procedures to ensure that the protection provided by the equipment is not lost
(e.g., fire alarm and evacuation).
13.3.12. Limited Approach Boundary

An approach limit is a distance from an exposed live part within which a shock hazard exists.
13.3.13. Restricted Approach Boundary

An approach limit distance from an exposed live part within which there is an increased risk of
shock, due to electrical arc-over combined with inadvertent movement, for personnel working in
close proximity to the live part.
13.3.14. Remote-control Circuit

Any electric circuit that controls any other circuit through a relay or an equivalent device.
13.3.15. Switching Devices

Devices designed to close and/or open one or more electric circuits. Included in this category are
circuit breakers, cutouts, disconnecting (or isolating) switches, disconnecting means, interrupter
switches, and oil (filled) cutouts.
13.3.16. Voltage (of a circuit)

The greatest root-mean-square (effective) difference of potential between any two conductors of
the circuit concerned.
13.3.17. Voltage, high

Circuits with a nominal voltage more than 50 volts.
13.3.18. Voltage, low

Circuits with a nominal voltage less than or equal to 50 volts.
13.4. Responsibilities:
13.4.1. Rig Electrician
• Shall be aware of electrical hazards and implement required controls
• Know how to protect themselves from adverse effects of electric shock/burn.
• Ensure all electrical equipment is grounded.
• Ensure that the grounding loop is connected before powering up and ground Ohm reading is
within acceptable limits
• Discuss and review work/isolation permits with the concerned party and ensure that all
personnel are aware of the related hazards and controls
13.4.2. Work Group Supervisor
The person who will supervise the work execution and persons performing the job.

13.4.3. Rig Management:

• Provide a safe work environment and the implementation of this procedure
• Ensure that employees are provided with the required information and training on the electrical
hazard and required controls.
• Determine the required PPE, ensure its availability, and that employees are properly trained on
how to use that equipment
13.5. Procedure
13.5.1. Electrical Safety Principles & Controls
13.5.1.1. Principles of Electrical Safety
• Electricity is different from other forms of hazardous energy, because it is both undetectable
by human senses and potentially immediately fatal upon contact. Thus, it requires a broad
application of specialized equipment construction methods and safe work practices to prevent
serious injuries or death.
• All electrical equipment must be installed and used following the manufacturer’s instructions,
Equipment shall be approved for use and shall not be modified or used outside of its approval
intent.
• Sufficient training is required to safely interact with electrical equipment. Operators must be
trained to operate equipment within its design intent and not defeat engineering controls.
• Personnel who service, modify, repair, or build electrical equipment must be able to recognize
the hazards and establish controls to prevent injury
• The most fundamental aspect is to Test before Touch. Without an innate human sense to detect
a hazardous condition, a qualified worker must understand how to properly use test equipment
to prove an Electrically Safe Work Condition.
• Live repair work is considered extremely hazardous and is generally prohibited. Exceptions can
be made but require detailed justification and approval by Rig management, after taking the
required precautions.
• Whenever possible, all work performed on equipment will be DE energized. To prove and
maintain DE energization, a qualified worker must follow a strict process to establish an
Electrically Safe Work Conditions.
• This process involves both Lockout/Tag out and Test before Touch. Because this is so
fundamental to safe electrical work
• Some forms of diagnostics require the equipment to be energized while circuit parts are
exposed. Only qualified workers with the proper PPE may perform diagnostics.
• Some combinations of switching, testing, and LOTO can involve significant procedural
complexity. In these cases, written work plans are developed, reviewed, and approved by
knowledgeable parties in advance and executed with formal procedural compliance (Isolation
of Systems procedure)
• Proper body positioning must be an integral part of both everyday work habits and detailed
work planning. This principle is embedded in the shock protection and arc flash protection
boundaries, but must also be emphasized in everything from routine switching activities to
setting up barriers and barricades.
13.5.1.2. Planning Electrical Work
• Every electrical job shall be planned for performing the job briefing.
• Planning is simply performing work permits, isolation, and SJAs.
• Define the scope of work.
• Analyze the Hazards.
• Develop/Implement controls.
13.5.1.3. Electrical Hazard Analysis
Qualified Electrical Workers shall be required for the following tasks, which are classified as
electrical work for any modification, repair, build, or assembly of electrical circuit parts or wiring

after being placed in an Electrically Safe Work Condition. Examples include:

• Making or tightening electrical terminal connections with tools, as poor or improper
connections can create serious hazards.
• Any work on the grounding and bonding system.
• Any work on the power entry module or field wiring terminals
• Replacing critical components with new components of different ratings. Critical components
include electrical components or assemblies used in a power or safety circuit whose proper
operation is essential to the safe performance of the system or circuit (e.g. fuses, circuit
breakers, power wiring, transformers, heaters, motors, overloads, interlocks, emergency stops,
etc.).
Such hazard analysis shall protect each employee from arc flash and from contact with energized
electrical conductors or circuit parts, operating, directly with any part of the body or indirectly
through some other conductive object.
13.5.1.4. Developing Controls
• Depending on the results of the Electrical Hazard Analysis Recognizing electrical hazards,
Controls must be selected to minimize both the risk to the persons performing the work and to
persons who may be in the area. Controls are considered when planning the work.
• Employees who work directly with electricity should use the personal protective equipment
required for the jobs they perform. This equipment may include:
- Rubber insulating gloves,
- Insulating hoods,
- Insulating sleeves,
- Dielectric matting or blankets,
- Industrial protective helmets designed to reduce electric shock hazard.
• Electric grade non-conducting deck coverings (e.g. non-conducting mats) or non-conducting
gratings shall be provided in each working area in front of and behind switchboards, as per
ASTM D178: Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Matting.
• Routine infrared inspections of energized electrical systems shall be performed annually prior
to shut down. More frequent infrared inspections, for example, quarterly or semiannually,
should be performed where warranted by loss experience, installation of new electrical
equipment, or changes in environmental, operational, or load conditions
• Infrared surveys should be performed during periods of maximum possible loading but not less
than 40 percent of rated load of the electrical equipment being inspected. The circuit loading
characteristics should be included as part of the inspection documentation.
- Equipment enclosures should be opened for a direct view of components whenever possible.
When opening the enclosure is impossible, such as in some busway systems, internal
temperatures can be higher than the surface temperatures. Plastic and glass covers in
electrical enclosures are not transparent to infrared radiation.
- Inspect distribution systems with imaging equipment capable of detecting a minimum
temperature difference of 1° C at 30° C.

Temperature difference (ΔT) Temperature difference Recommended Action

based on comparisons be- (ΔT) based on compar-
tween similar components isons between compo-
under similar loading nents and ambient air
temperatures
1°C - 3°C 1°C - 10°C Possible deficiency; warrants investigation
4°C – q5°C 11°C - 20°C Indicates probable deficiency, repair as time
permits
--- 21°C - 40°C Monitor until corrective measures can be
accomplished
>15°C >40°C Major discrepancy; repair immediately
Thermographic survey - Suggested actions based on Temperature rise, as per Table.100.8 ANSI/NETA
ATS
- The electrical supervisor should be immediately notified of critical, impending faults so that
corrective action can be taken before a failure occurs. Priorities should be established to
correct other deficiencies.
- Provide a report which includes the following:
- Description of equipment to be tested.
- Discrepancies.
- Temperature difference between the area of concern and the reference area.
- Probable cause of temperature difference.
- Areas inspected. Identify inaccessible and unobservable areas and equipment.
- Identify load conditions at time of inspection.
- Provide photographs of the deficient area.
- Recommended action
13.5.1.5. Lighting Requirements for Drilling Rig Platforms
How to select lighting fixtures for Drilling Rig platform
The protection level and explosion-proof level of the lamp housing shall be suitable for the
installation site and shall meet the following requirements:
• The minimum requirements for the protection level of indoor dry spaces should meet IP23;
• The minimum requirements for indoor large dripping spaces and mechanical damage hazard
spaces shall meet IP34;
• The minimum requirements for ballast pump rooms, refrigerated rooms, galleys and laundry
rooms should meet IP44;
• The minimum protection level for outdoor and open decks should meet IP55.
• When it is in the open air or exposed to rain and waves, the minimum protection level should
meet IP56.
• Positive pressure ventilation (Exp), flameproof (Ex d) and intrinsically safe (Ex “ia” or “ib”) are
available in Class 1 hazardous areas. Increased safety (Ex e), positive pressure ventilation (Exp),
flameproof (Ex d) and intrinsically safe (Ex “ia” or “ib”) are available in Class 2 hazardous areas.
• The types of lighting fixtures for Drilling Rig platforms can be divided into: fluorescent lamps,
high pressure sodium lamps, metal halide lamps, emergency exit lamps, aircraft deck boundary
lamps, windsock lamps, etc. Each type of lamps is used in different locations. The following
mainly introduces fluorescent lamps and high pressure sodium lamps. , the installation of
emergency exit lights.
• Fluorescent lamps: embedded, pole-mounted, wall-mounted, ceiling-mounted, etc.;are used
for indoor spaces with ceilings. The pole-mounted type is installed on the boundary of the
platform, the wall-mounted type is installed on the firewall, and the hoisting type is installed in
the indoor mechanical space.
• High pressure sodium lamp: The flood light is installed on the platform column with a height
of 5.5~6 meters. The flood light mainly illuminates the interior of the platform. The floodlight

should ensure that its movable part is within the illumination range required by the work, and
the rotation is flexible and unobstructed, and the light is not obstructed. Flood lights are also
installed on the border of the platform, mainly illuminating the sea surface.
• The emergency exit light is the light fixture of the emergency lighting system. Installed at the
door of the room, it is used to indicate the escape route and indicate the rapid evacuation of
personnel
Area Normal lighting (average illumi-
nance)
Staircase/passage area 100 Lux
Restrooms/toilets/changing rooms/other areas 100 Lux
material storage area 100 Lux
occupancy cabin 150 Lux
machinery spaces 150 Lux
Dining Room/Infirmary/Office/Control Room/Telegraph Room 200 Lux
kitchen 300 Lux
Frequency conversion room/electrician room/distribution room 300 Lux
Illumination requirements for lighting fixtures:

The number and location of lamps in each area depend on the average illuminance of the room.
Different areas and rooms have different illuminance requirements. The average illuminance of each
area on the platform is as follows:
13.5.1.6. The layout of lighting fixtures
The layout of other areas of the platform lighting fixtures should pay attention to the following
aspects:
• It should be ensured that there is sufficient lighting in places where frequent operations and
maintenance are required.
• The escape route, emergency escape and firefighting equipment, and other premises must have
emergency temporary lighting.
• The arrangement and installation position and height of the lamps should ensure that the lamps
are easy to operate and maintain, avoid being arranged above the movable equipment, do not
affect the aisles and safety passages, and provide lighting for the platform to the maximum
extent; lamps should not be arranged in the pipeline method. To avoid the gasket breaking and
the medium in the pipe spraying to the lamp.
• Emergency lighting should be arranged in the emergency equipment area so that the operation
and maintenance of emergency equipment will not be affected when the emergency generator
supplies power.
• The light of the lamp is not affected by any obstacles.
• The aircraft deck boundary lights and windsock lights shall ensure the safe take-off and landing
of the helicopter on the offshore platform, and the arrangement and installation position shall
comply with the relevant
13.5.1.7. DE energizing electrical equipment
• Power switches are the normal operator method for turning off electrical equipment and
typically do not remove all electric power from the equipment. Some electrical parts within
equipment remain alive even after all visible or audible signs seem to show otherwise. Just
because the external lights turn off, vibration sounds cease, and visible movement stops, do

not assume that there is no shock.

• Sometimes it is necessary to open electrical equipment to perform non-electrical work
that does not require an electrical worker. However, the electrical hazard must be isolated,
controlled, and verified safe before work. This is called “establishing an Electrically Safe Work
Condition”.
13.5.1.8. Working on De-energized Equipment (Electrically Safe Conditions)
The National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) lists six steps to ensure conditions for electrically
safe work:
• Identify all sources of power to the equipment. Check applicable up-to-date drawings,
diagrams, and identification tags.
• Remove the load current, and then open the disconnecting devices for each power source.
• Where possible, visually verify that the blades of disconnecting devices are fully open or that
the draw-out-type circuit breaker is fully withdrawn.
• Apply lockout/tag-out devices following a formal.
• Test each phase conductor or circuit part with an adequately rated voltage detector to verify
that the equipment is de-energized. Test each phase conductor or circuit part both phase-to-
phase and phase-to-ground. Check the voltage detector before and after each test to be sure it
is working.
• Properly ground all possible sources of induced voltage and stored electric energy (such as
capacitors) before touching. If conductors or circuit parts that are being de-energized could
contact other exposed conductors or circuit parts, apply ground-connecting devices rated for
the available fault current.
13.5.1.9. Lockout/Tag out Program:
• After de-energizing, each employee at risk should apply an individual lockout/tag-out device to
each source of electric energy.
• Pushbuttons or selector switches cannot be used as the only way to de-energize, A lockout
device is a key or combination lock with a tag that can be attached to a disconnecting device to
prevent the re-energizing of the equipment being worked on without removal of the lock.
• The lockout device should have a way of identifying by isolation/work permits and ensure all
keys that have been used for energy isolations are under the control of the PIC and kept in his
office in a locked box and given access to the NTP when he is off shift. But after all, the work has
been completed, a competent person who did the isolation shall remove the lock by himself.
• Before beginning work, each involved employee must verify through testing that all energy
sources have been de-energized. Electric lockout/tag-out procedures should be coordinated
with all other site procedures for controlling exposure to electric energy and other types of
energy sources.
• verifying that the circuit is de-energized and can’t be restarted by voltage testing, grounding
requirements, shift changes, coordination with other jobs in progress,
• Work/isolation permits are mandatory for keeping track of all involved personnel, applying
and removing lockout/tag-out devices, returning to service, and temporarily re-energizing for
testing/positioning.
• Lockout/tag-out procedures/permits should be developed for each machine or piece of
equipment that will require servicing.
• Each person who could be exposed to electric energy must be involved in the lockout/tag-out
process.
13.5.1.10. Energized electrical work:
• Repair, maintenance, troubleshooting, or testing on electrical circuits, components, or systems
while energized (i.e., life) is considered energized electrical work.
• There are two basic hazards when performing live work, electric shock and electrical explosion
(arc flash). Arc flash can cause burns and explosive force trauma injury. These hazards can be
controlled using structured safety procedures and appropriate Personal Protective Equipment
(PPE).

• Only Qualified Electrical Workers are permitted to work on energized circuitry of 50 volts/25
amps to ground or greater.
• Conductive materials, tools, and equipment that are in contact with any part of an employee’s
body shall be handled in a manner that prevents accidental contact with live parts. Such
materials and equipment include, but are not limited to, long conductive objects, such as ducts,
pipes and tubes, conductive hose and rope, metal-lined rules and scales, steel tapes, pulling
lines, metal scaffold parts, structural members, bull floats, and chains.
• Conductive Articles Being Worn. Conductive articles of jewelry and clothing (such as
watchbands, bracelets, rings, key chains, necklaces, metalized aprons, cloth with conductive
thread, metal headgear, or metal frame glasses) shall not be worn where they present an
electrical contact hazard with exposed live parts
• Employees shall not enter spaces containing live parts unless illumination is provided that
enables the employees to perform the work safely.
• For repair work within the restricted approach boundary of energized electrical installations
rated at 600 volts or above, two Qualified Persons shall be present at all times with an
appropriately rated rescue hook.
• For repair work within the restricted approach boundary of energized electrical installations
rated below 600 volts, an electrical emergency responder shall accompany the Qualified
Person performing the work with an appropriately rated rescue hook.
• After a circuit is de-energized by the automatic operation of a circuit protective device, the
circuit shall not be manually reenergized until it has been determined that the equipment
and circuit can be safely energized. The repetitive manual reclosing of circuit breakers or
reenergizing circuits through replaced fuses shall be prohibited. When it is determined from
the design of the circuit and the overcurrent devices involved that the automatic operation of
a device was caused by an overload rather than a fault condition, examination of the circuit or
connected equipment shall not be required before the circuit is reenergized.
13.5.1.11. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupt (GFCI):
NFPA 70E (5.4.5) requires the use of GFCI protection in conductive work locations and in all
locations currently required by the latest edition of the NEC
• A Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) is a safety device whose function is to interrupt the
electric circuit to the load when a fault current to the ground exceeds a predetermined value
that is less than that required to operate the over-current protective device of the supply circuit.
• GFCIs sense when current—even a small amount—passes to the ground through any path
other than the proper conductor. When this condition exists, the GFCI quickly opens the circuit,
stopping all current flow to the circuit and a person receiving the ground fault, The incoming
two-wire circuit is connected to a two-pole, shunt-trip overload circuit breaker.
• Do not bypass a GFCI or look for a non-GFCI-protected outlet if a GFCI trips repeatedly.
Tripping is a sign of a potentially fatal shock hazard and should be
evaluated and investigated carefully.
• Do not continue to reset the GFCI if it trips repeatedly
• GFCIs are required to be tested “following manufacturer’s
instructions” periodically.
• Distribution boxes in camp site shall be equipped with RCCB
(residual current circuit breaker) and to be tested periodically and
record results.
• Grounding layout shall be verified before powering up any
equipment and to ensure that the maximum resistance of the
ground wires is 1 ohm. Ground wires must be able to transfer high
currents without burning up. Lightning protection system
• The lightning protection system is a complete system of
strike termination devices, ground terminals, interconnecting
conductors that shall be bonded to the building or structure
grounding electrode system.
• One of the common lightning protection system is Early Streamer

Emission air terminal, also known as ESE or as an ionizing lightning rod, it is an external
lightning protection system.
• The aim of the lightning metallic rod (usually copper) is to protect a structure from lightning
damage by intercepting flashes and guiding their currents into the ground (discharge) in order
to achieve a controlled impact without damage.
Note: For lightning protection system installation, the top of the light terminal shall be installed
at least 2 meters over the area that it protects (including antennas, refrigerating towers, roofs and
tanks) Each lightning rod shall be connected to at least two down conductors.

• Mast structures shall require one strike termination device, down conductor, and ground
terminal.
• Metal tanks constructed so as to receive a stroke of lightning without damage, it shall require
only bonding to ground terminals .
• Strike termination devices shall be provided for all parts of any ordinary structure that are
likely to be damaged by direct lightning flashes , metal parts of a structure that are exposed to
direct lightning flashes and that have metal thickness of 4.8 mm or greater shall only require
connection to lighting protection system.
• Strike termination devices shall be made of solid copper or stainless steel (see attached pic for
lighting protection system).
We have two types for tank farms:
• Metallic tanks, vessels, and process equipment that contain flammable or combustible liquids
or flammable gases normally do not require lightning protection since this equipment is well
shielded from lightning strikes. Equipment of this type is normally well grounded and is thick
enough not to be punctured by a direct strike.
Note: This does not apply to liquids or gases stored under pressure, such as liquefied natural gases
or liquefied petroleum gases.
• Concrete Tanks and Silos. Lightning protection systems for concrete (including pre stressed
concrete) tanks containing flammable vapors, flammable gases, and liquids that can produce
flammable vapors; and concrete silos containing materials susceptible to dust explosions shall
be provided with either external
conductors or with conductors
embedded in the concrete.
Note: Protection where floating roofs
utilize hangers located within a vapor
space, the roof shall be electrically
bonded to the shoes of the seal through
the most direct electrical path at intervals
not greater than 10 ft (3 m) on the
circumference of the tank. These shunts
shall consist of flexible wide stainless
steel straps or the equivalent in current-
carrying capacity and corrosion resistance.
The metallic shoe shall be maintained
in contact with the shell and without
openings (such as corrosion holes) through
the shoe.
Regarding process area & buildings:
• Electrical systems and utilization equipment within the
structure can require further surge suppression addition
to the bonding of metal bodies, surge suppression should
be provided to protect power, communication, and data
lines from dangerous over voltages and sparks caused by
the lightning strikes.
• Surge arrester protects the installation from inside while
lightning arrester protects the equipment from outside
by intercepting the surges and send the extra unwanted
energy to the ground wire while lightning arrester divert
the energy flow to the ground through the arrester to the ground.
13.5.1.12. Electrical Shock
• Electricity is one of the most commonly encountered hazards in any facility. Under normal
conditions, safety features (engineering controls) built into electrical equipment protect
workers from shock.
surge arrester

• Shock is the flow of electrical current through any portion of the worker’s body from an external
source. Accidents can occur in which contact with electricity results in serious injury or death.
• Most electrical systems establish a voltage reference point by connecting a portion of the
system to an earth ground, because these systems use conductors that have electrical potential
(voltage) concerning ground, a shock hazard exists for workers who are in contact with the
earth and exposed to the conductors.
• If a person comes in contact with an energized (ungrounded) conductor, while also in contact
with a grounded object, an alternate path to ground is formed in which current passes through
his or her body.
The effects of electric current on the human body depend on many variables, including the:
• Amount of current
• Waveform of the current (e.g., DC, 60 Hz AC, RF, impulse)
• Current pathway through the body (determined by contact location and internal body
chemistry)
• Duration of shock
• Energy deposited into the body
The amount of current passing through the body depends on:
• Voltage driving the current through the body
• Circuit characteristics (impedance, stored electrical energy)
• Frequency of the current
• Contact resistance and internal resistance of the body
• Environmental conditions affecting the body’s contact resistance
13.5.1.13. Electrical Burn
• Burns suffered in electrical accidents are of three basic types – electrical current burns, arc
burns, and thermal contact burns.
• The cause of each type of burn is different, and prevention necessitates different controls.
13.5.1.14. Electrical Current Burns
• In electrical current burns, tissue damage (whether skin-level or internal) occurs because the
body is unable to dissipate the heat from the current flow.
• Typically, electrical current burns are slow to heal. Such electrical burns result from shock
currents,
13.5.1.15. Arc Flash Burns
• Arc flash burns are caused by electric arcs and are similar to heat burns from high-temperature
sources. Temperatures generated by electric arcs can melt nearby material, vaporize metal in
close vicinity, burn flesh and ignite clothing at distances of several meters, depending on the
energy deposited into the arc.
• The arc can be a stable low-voltage arc, such as in an arc welder, or a short-circuit arc at higher
voltage, resulting in an arc flash and/or arc blast. Such an expanding arc can ignite clothing
and/or cause severe burns at a distance from inches to feet.
13.5.1.16. Thermal Contact Burns
• Thermal contact burns are those that occur when the skin comes into contact with the hot
surfaces of overheated electrical conductors, including conductive tools and jewelry. This injury
results from proximity to a high-current source with a conductive object.
• Thermal burns can occur from low-voltage/high-current systems that do not present a shock or
arc flash hazards, and controls should be considered. The controls to prevent injury from shock
and arc flash should also protect against thermal contact burn.

Figure A. Hazardous zone layout example

Figure B. main camp grounding layout example

Figure C. Workover Rig grounding layout

B14. Personal Protective

Equipment (PPE)
B.14. Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)
14.1. Scope
PPE guidelines and requirements should apply to all employees exposed to workplace hazards.
This includes employees who work in a variety of settings, such as manufacturing, construction, and
healthcare
14.2. Purpose
The purpose is to ensure employees are provided with the appropriate personal protective
equipment (PPE) to protect them from workplace hazards.
Rig contractors management shall hand proper PPE to its employees as per EGPC requirements
and this procedure.
14.4. Personal Protective Equipment requirements

14.4.1. Head Protection
Safety Helmets “Caps & Hats”
• Standard Compliance:
- ANSI Z89.1 2003, Class E.
- ANSI Z89.1-2014
- CSA Z94.1-2015
• Minimum Required for: All personnel in work areas
Helmet Suspension
• Standard Compliance: ANSI Standard
• Minimum Required for: Used for all crew to hold the helmet against high wind speed
14.4.2. Eye and Face Protection
Safety glasses
- ANSI Z87.1-2010
- CSA Z94.3-2007
- Military V0 Ballistic Test for Impact meet or exceed the latest version of ANSI Z87.1
• Minimum required for: All personnel in work areas for eye protection.
Medical-prescribed safety glasses
• Standard Compliance: N/A
• Minimum Required for: All personnel in work areas for eye protection
Safety goggles
- ANSI Z87+ (High Impact)
- ANSI Z87+ (High Impact),
- ANSI Z.87.1/1989, CA 19,071
- ANSI Z.87.1/1989, CA 19,071
- CSA Z94.3 - Certified to the requirements of CSA Z94.3,
- ANSI Z87.1
- EN-166
• Minimum Required for All personnel working with HP machine, chemicals, buffering, grinding,
chipping & Sand/water Blasting, or breaking any metal or material that involves a flying chip
hazard; i.e. removing or replacing dies in pipe tongs, using grinders, drills, etc.

Welding & grinding goggles

- EN166
- EN 175
• Minimum Required for: Welders
Arc Flash Protection Face Shield
• Standard Compliance: Meet or exceed current ASTM F2178 and ANSI Z87.1 standard
specifications
• Minimum Required for:
- Electricians with any operation that could result in arch flashes.
- Arc flashes can be generated by various conditions including mechanical breakdowns or
failure of electrical circuits, current overloads, or accidental contacts.
- This explosive condition includes a broad spectrum of electrical magnetic energy, plasma,
fragments of damaged equipment, and molten metal from the destruction of conductors at
the point of the arc flash.
Face Shield Parts
- ANSI 287.1
- EN 166
• Minimum Required for: All personnel working with HP machine, chemicals, buffering, Grinding
& Sand/water Blasting
Welding shields/ helmets
- ANSI Z87.1
- CAN/CSA Z94.3
• Minimum required for: Made from Super TuffTM nylon, which is lighter than fiberglass. Drop-
down ratchet headgear. This helmet has a coating that makes it cooler and sheds spatter
without burning.
Eyewash Stations
- ANSI Z358.1-2014
- SEI Certified
- Uses less space while delivering ANSI-required 15-minute flush
- The clear tank allows easy fill level check Three mounting options; Wall, Bench Top, or
Transportable Waste Cart
- Allows for a fluid start/stop flow with no expensive cartridges to replace water preservatives
sold separately
Eyewash saline solution
- ANSI Z358.1
- ANSI Z358.1
• Minimum Required for: Eye Wash Saline Concentrate: For Use With Fendall Eye Wash Stations
Eyewash Saline Solution bottles
Combined Emergency Shower / Eye Wash Station
• Standard Compliance: ISO 10993-1:2009 Biological evaluation of medical devices -- Part 1:
Evaluation and testing within a risk management process.

- 0.9 % sterile sodium chloride – similar to that of the human eye

- Visible and readily available first aid
- Easily mounted on the wall close to the workplace and immediate washing may be needed
- Ensures quick and efficient eyewash
- Supplied with pictograms and mirror
- Use in dust-free and dirt-free areas
14.4.3. Body Protection (Coveralls/Jackets)
Long sleeve coverall
- ISO 13688
- EN 1194
- EN 340
- EN 342
- EN 343
- EN 466
- EN 11612 /9
- EN 11611
• Minimum Required for: All Onshore and Offshore Personnel
Short sleeve coverall
- ISO 13688
- EN 1194
- EN 340
- EN 342
- EN 343
- EN 466
- EN 11612 /9
- EN 11611
• Minimum Required for: All Personnel to be used in camp or accommodation area.
Thermal (winter) coverall
• Standard Compliance: All Onshore and Offshore Personnel
- ISO 13688
- EN 1194
- EN 340
- EN 342
- EN 343
- EN 466
- EN 11612 /9
- EN 11611
Winter jacket
- ISO 13688
- EN 1194
- EN 340
- EN 342
- EN 343
- EN 466
- EN 11612 /9
- EN 11611
• Minimum Required for: All Onshore and Offshore Personnel

Welder coverall
- EN ISO11611:2007
- Class 2-A1
- EN ISO 11612:2008 A1 B1 C1
- EN ISO 11612, EN 1149-5
- NFPA 2112 UL recognized component -fabric
- IEC 61482-2 (Class1)
- Welders while performing all hot work activities
- Rig Crew
Welder jacket and apron
• Standard Compliance: EN Standard (Flame Resistance, cut, heat, abrasion resistance)
• Minimum Required for: welders
Disposable coveralls
- EN 13034:2005
- A1:2009
- EN ISO 13982-1:2004
- A1:2010, EN 1149-5:2008), (EN 1073-2:2002) Class 1
- Personnel working in Painting /chemicals
- Confined Space
Rain suits
• Standard Compliance: ANSI Class 3
• Minimum Required for: All personnel working outside during the Rain
Freezer jacket
• Standard Compliance: EN 342: 2, 3 Protective clothing against cool environments until - 5º C.
• Minimum Required for: All personnel entering the freezer (Catering crew/ maintenance crew)
Hand Protection
Cotton safety gloves

• Minimum Required for: Cotton gloves for general use and routine operations
Chemical-resistant rubber gloves
- EN ISO 374-1:2016/Type A AJKLOPT
- EN ISO 374-5:2016
- EN 388:2016 3.1.3.2.A
- EN 407:2004 X.2.X.X.X.X
- EN 1149:2004
• Minimum Required for: for personnel working with chemicals
Maintenance gloves
- EN 420:2003
- A1:2009 EN 420:2003
- A1:2009; Category III
- EN 4131A
- EN 4231

- For Maintenance teams.

- Reduced strain, better ergonomics
- For safety gloves that offer breathable comfort
Roughneck / Impact gloves
- ANSI/ISEA 138 Level 2
- ANSI/ISEA 105-2016
- EN 420:2003 + A1:2009
- Category II EN388-4232BP
- ANSI A2 CUT, ANSI 6 ABR
- EN388:2016 4242AP
- ANSI Cut Level A1, ANSI/ISEA 138
- EN388 – 4544FP
- EN 420:2003 + A1:2009
- Drilling crew dealing with pipe handling.
- High-performance fibers used to protect the hands from cut injuries
- Back-of-hand TPR bumpers significantly reduce the risk of crush, pinch, and impact injuries
Anti-vibration and Technician Gloves
Mechanics and gloves
• Standard Compliance: EN 388
• Minimum Required for: Mechanical & Electrical Department
Welders thermal/hot work gloves
- EN12477 Type A welding protection
- EN ISO 21420
- EN388:2016 +A1:2018 - 3243X
- EN 12477 Type A, EN 407 413244
- ANSI/ISEA 105: 2016 CUT Level A2
- 14” cow split leather welding gauntlet with a one-piece back and full cotton lining for comfort
- Maximum EN407 burn behavior resistance
- Ideal for welding and metal handling
- 14” cow split leather welding gauntlet, full cotton lining
Electrical insulation rubber gloves
- Meet ANSI/ASTM D120 standard and
- NFPA 70E for use around electrical hazards
- and arc flash protection
- IEC-EN 60903
- ASTM D 120,
- IEC EN60903
• Minimum required for: For electricians working/ dealing with high voltage.
Kitchen/chainmail gloves
- EN388:2016
- ANSI Standards
• Minimum Required for: For Catering Crew

14.4.4. Hearing & Vibration Protection

Ear plugs
- 5340.002.GENRAL.1314
- 5340.002.GENRAL.1100
- 5340.002.GENRAL.1314
• Minimum Required for: All personnel working in noisy areas
Ear muffs
- EN352-2
- ANSI S3.19-1974
- CSA Class Standard
• Minimum Required for: All employees working in noisy areas (noise level above 85 dB) (double
protection)
14.4.5. Respiration Protection
Respirator disposable mask
• Minimum Required for: All personnel working with chemicals, buffering, Grinding & Sand/water
Blasting
Respirator half / Full mask with cartridges and filters
- EN 143
- NIOSH
- AS/NZS 1716:2003
• Minimum Required for: All personnel working with chemicals, buffering, Grinding & Sand/water
Blasting
Self-contained Breathing Apparatus
- AS1716
- CE : EN137
- CE : EN139
- NFPA Department of Transportation (DOT) Transport Canada (TC)Minimum
• Required for: 30 min. Self-contained Breathing Apparatus (SCBA) is used by search and
• Rescue teams when the wearer is engaged in heavy physical work. Self-contained Breathing
Apparatus components
BA Air cylinder blanking plug
- AS1716
- CE: EN137
- CE : EN139
• Minimum Required for: ??
ELSA Set
- CE : EN139
- CE : EN402
- AS/NZ 1716
- EN1146:2005, ISO 23269-1:2008, ISO 23269-4:2011, SOLAS Chapter II-2
• Minimum Required for: To be used by all personnel in case of gas release emergencies

ELSA hood assembly

- CE : EN139
- CE : EN402
- AS/NZ 1716
- EN1146:2005, ISO 23269-1:2008, ISO 23269-4:2011,
- SOLAS Chapter II-2
• Minimum Required for: Drager CF Saver (SE) range
Monkey board escape hood assembly
- EN 403:2004
- DIN 58647-7
- EN 14387:2004 (only filter)
• Minimum Required for: One for each rig to be used by person working on monkey board in case
of gases / H2S
• emergency
SCBA Carrying case and storage cabinet
- EN 136 Class. 3, EN 137 type 2
- DIN 58610 (MHK)
- NIOSH (some versions)
- To store and protect the breathing apparatus
14.4.6. Foot Protection
Safety Shoes
- ANSI Z41.83
- meet or exceed ASTM F2412-11 & F2413-11
- ISO 20344
- ISO 20345
• Minimum Required for: Personnel working in service and support sections, do not have to work
in any of the areas where use of safety boots is a must (classified hazardous areas)
Safety Boot
- ASTM F2413-11, M I/75 C/75, EH
- ASTM F2413-18, M/I/C, EH PR
- EN ISO 20345:2011
• Minimum Required for: Personnel working in the drilling, technical and deck sections
Chemical Resistant Rubber Boot
• Standard Compliance: ASTM F2413-05
• Minimum required for: For personnel working in an oil-based mud environment or involved in
the mixing of the chemicals or Rig wash.
14.4.7. Fall Protection & Working at Height Tools
Full Body Harness
• Standard Compliance: ANSI Z359
• Minimum required for: For personnel working aloft (height 1.2 meters). – 4 ft.

Man-riding Harness
- BS EN 813:2008 (Sit Harness)
- BS EN 358:2018 (Work Positioning Systems)
- BS EN 361:2002 (Full Body Harness)
- OSHA 1910.66
- OSHA 1926.502
• Minimum Required for: For personnel performing Man riding operations.
Derrick Harness and belt
- ANSI A10.32
- ANSI Z359.1
- ANSI Z359.3
- ANSI Z359.4
- OSHA 1910.66
- OSHA 1926.502
• Minimum Required for: All Personnel Working on Derrick /Monkey Board - Pipe Racking
Confined space rescue harness
- EN 361
- EN 362
- ANSI A10.32
- ANSI Z359.1
- ANSI Z359.4
- OSHA 1910.66
- OSHA 1926.502
• Minimum Required for: ??
Rescue / retrieval Y-lanyard with spreader bar
- ANSI Z359.3
- OSHA 1910.66
- OSHA 1926.502
- ft. (0.6 m) rescue/retrieval Y-Lanyard
- Keeps victim upright during rescue
- Abrasion resistant polyester webbing
- Built-in spreader bar
- User friendly self locking snap hooks
- High strength D-ring tie-off point
Lanyards & Shock Absorbers
- ANSI Z359.3
- OSHA 1910.66
- OSHA 1926.502
- ft. (0.6 m) rescue/retrieval Y-Lanyard
- Keeps victim upright during rescue
- Abrasion resistant polyester webbing
- Built-in spreader bar
- User friendly self-locking snap hooks
- High strength D-ring tie-off point

Fall Arrestor Self Retracting Life Line

- ANSI A10.32
- ANSI Z359.1
- ANSI Z359.14
- OSHA 1910.66
- OSHA 1926.502
• Minimum Required for: Self-Retracting Lifeline (SRL) incorporates a patented concept that
helps separate components, such as the motor spring and brake, from foreign elements
such as grease, moisture, and dirt. In addition, it features patent-pending technology that
reduces retraction speed, limiting the effects of a released lifeline on the SRL and surrounding
equipment
Tail Line Flex for Derrick Harness Accessories
- ANSI A10.32
- ANSI Z359.1
- ANSI Z359.14
- OSHA 1910.66
- OSHA 1926.502
- separates components, such as the motor spring and brake, from foreign elements such as
grease, moisture, and dirt. In addition
- features patent-pending technology that reduces retraction speed, limiting the effects of a
released lifeline on the SRL and surrounding equipment
Onshore Derrick Escape Device
• Standard Compliance: ANSI/ASSE Z359.1
- The Geronimo Emergency Escape Device provides the quickest and safest method of
controlled descent from a derrick or tower in the event of an emergency.
- Geronimo is carefully engineered and constructed of the finest materials. For years, it has
proven itself under all conditions on oil derricks around the world
Offshore Derrick Escape Device
• Standard Compliance: ANSI, OSHA Standards
• Minimum Required for: Descent Device will get personnel down safely from high places when
quick escape is vital. Either angled or sloped descent models are available to provide complete
versatility and flexibility for any job site or work environment
Ladder Climbing Fall Arrest System
• Standard Compliance: ANSI A14.3-1992, ANSI Z359.16
- He Lad Saf™ flexible cable system consists of a top and bottom bracket that act as anchors
for a steel cable that runs the length of the climbing area.
- A Lad Saf™ X3 sleeve connects the worker to the system, automatically follows the user
during the climb and locks onto the cable in the event of a fall, allowing the user to regain
their footing.
Derrick Ladder Climbing Assist Fall Arrest System “Counterweight Climb Assist”
- ANSI Z359.1-2007 Requirement
- OSHA 1910.66
- OSHA 1926.502
• Minimum Required for: DBI SALA® SSB Climb Assist System, with external counterweight, aids
workers and provides fall protection while climbing lengthy ladders and towers.

It’s ideal for use on land based and offshore drilling platforms, where environmental and work
conditions can make climbing ladders hazardous.
Rescue at Height Kit
• Standard Compliance: Various EN Approvals
• Minimum Required for: Rescue Pack delivers a mechanical advantage for a lifting of around 3:1
by the use of the stainless-steel HURRICANE. The rope device can pay rope out but lock when a
load is applied. The hook can attach to D ring or harness shoulder strap if needed.
Rescue at Height Kit Components
Suspension Trauma Safety Straps
- ANSI
- OSHA Requirements
- All Personnel Working at height above 1.2 m (4 ft.)
- Relief straps are used to relieve pressure and improve circulation in the legs and hips of a
worker who is suspended in a safety harness while he or she awaits rescue after a fall.
Working at Height Tool Kit & components
• Standard Compliance: EN Approved
- Tested & Certified Lanyards.
- Tools are tested to a 5 meter drop.
- Tools are also tested to destruction.
- We determine safe working load practices.
Working at Height Tools bags
- Stop drop Tooling Waist and Shoulder Bags for working at height.
- Stop drop Tooling Waist and Shoulder Bags with adjustable strap for working at height. Black
& Yellow bags with Stop drop Tooling logo
Scaffolder Working at Height Tool Bag & Tools belt
• Standard Compliance: OSHA Requirements
- The Stopdrop Tooling Scaffolding Tool Kit Belt includes a: Scaffolding Wrench, Ratchet
Podger, Spirit Level, 5M Tape Measure and Claw Hammer. All of the Tools come with
appropriate Belt attachment points and 1M Black Coil Lanyards.
- Stopdrop Tooling Scaffolders Tool Belt Pouch for working at height.
- Stopdrop Tooling Scaffolders Tool Belt Pouch with adjustable rear loops for tool belt for
working at height.
- Interior velcro divider
- 4 interior locking carabiners
- Interior pockets
Rebel Self-Retracting lifeline
- ANSI A10.32
- ANSI Z359.14
- OSHA 1910.66
- OSHA 1926.502


- Is designed to be a component in a personal fall arrest system.
- helpful during working on top of mast while disconnecting mast sections and there is no WAH
platform or similar activities
Tie-off adaptor
- ANSI Z359.18
- OSHA 1926.502
- OSHA 1910.140
• Minimum Required for: Designed for use by person (only one) no more than 141 kg.
Roll Clamp Fall Arrest Beam Anchorage Point
• Standard Compliance: Complies with standard EN795 class B
- The Roll Clamp mobile anchorage device meets the requirements of construction workers
who want to be able to work safely while retaining considerable freedom of movement.
- On its 4 rollers the Roll Clamp follows the construction worker as he moves on the structure,
with minimum action required from the worker.
- There are two models, according to the “H” type metal section on which it is used: 380 mm
or 640 mm max. Adjustment range from 120 mm to 640 mm according to the width of the
flange.
Sliding beam anchor
- ANSI Z359.18
- OSHA 1910.140, 1926.502 Anchorage Connector standard
- ANSI A10.32
- EN795
- OSHA
- Z359.1
• Minimum Required for: Anchorage connectors are the unsung heroes of most fall protection
systems, often overlooked but critical components because they securely attach your system to
the anchorage
14.4.8. Fire Safety Equipment
Firefighter Outfit / Suit
- EN469-2005
- 96/98/EC
- SOLAS
- Marine Fire Suit, SOLAS/MED, EN469,
- PS6573 EN 469:2005+A1:2006 Protective clothing for firefighters
- EN 367
- ISO 6942
- EN 20811
- EN/ISO 11092
- NFPA 1971:2018
- Fire Team Member/ Leader
- Insulated for extra protection against radiant heat
- Reflective trim
- Radio and box pockets
- Removable knee pads
- Adjustable braces in the pants

Firefighter gloves
- EN659
- 96/98/EC SOLAS
- NFPA 1971-2013
• Minimum Required for: Fire Team Member/ Leader
Firefighter helmet
- NFPA 1971-2013
- Approved according to EN443 and SOLAS/MED
- NFPA 1971-2018
- GA44:2015
Firefighter helmet visor
• Standard Compliance: NFPA 1971 -2013
Firefighter helmet chin strap
- Certified to NFPA 1971-2018
- NFPA 1951-2013 to work on MSA Cairns® Fire Helmets
Fire-fighter hood
Firefighter Helmet Neck Cover
Firefighter boot
- EN345-2
- SOLAS/ MED
- EN 15090:2012
- EN ISO 20345:2011
- EN 50321:1999
- SOLAS/MED
- NFPA 1971-2013
Firefighter Life Line
• Standard Compliance: MED type approved according to SOLAS 74/2009 convention
• Minimum Required for: Fire fighter life line, with hook
Firefighting Axe
- Axe approved according to the FSS Code
- This product meets or exceeds ASME B107.400-2008
• Minimum Required for: Long fireman’s axe , 90CM, high voltage for escaping purpose
Portable Fire Extinguisher Dry Chemical Powder
• Standard Compliance: EN3 - 10 item 5.4
• Minimum Required for: Distribution of extinguisher as per rig lay out

Portable Fire Extinguisher CO2

• Standard Compliance: EN3
• Minimum Required for: Distribution of extinguisher location as per rig lay out
Portable Fire Extinguisher Foam
• Standard Compliance: EN3
Fire extinguisher inspection tags
• Minimum Required for: To state the inspection date
Fire extinguishers box –Cover
• Minimum Required for: all fire extinguishers
Water Fire Station
- DIN 50049
- EN 10204
- EN 10130
• Minimum Required for: Distribution of extinguisher as per rig lay out.
Fire Hoses
• Standard Compliance: Bavaria Standard fire hose is manufacturer and tested according to
European Standard DIN 50049
• Minimum Required for: Highly abrasion resistant Flat nylon hose with internal rubber lining 64
mm (2½ inch) of 30 m Equipped with instantaneous coupling
Fire tap
• Standard Compliance: DIN 14461-3
• Minimum Required for: Landing Valves (fire valves) with 30° Outlet - For hose diameter 64 mm
(2 ½ inch) / 38 mm (1½ inch)
Fire Blanket
• Standard Compliance: certified to BS EN 1869
14.4.9. Confined space entry and gas detection equipment
Portable Multi Gas Detectors
• Standard Compliance: CE Approved
• Minimum Required for: Drilling / Workover Rig Requirement: One each MGD to be available
onboard all the time considering the calibration time
Portable Multi Gas Detectors replacement battery
• Minimum Required for: Multi-Gas Detector Battery Pack, Rechargeable, Lithium-Ion, Portable
Gas Monitor Battery Replacement, Durable, Handheld, Easy to Install.
Portable Multi Gas Detectors single & multi charger
• Standard Compliance: (IEC) 61000-4-3
• Minimum Required for: N/A
Portable Multi Gas Detectors sampling hose / line
• Minimum Required for: straight Wand, Air Line, Quality Tester, Durable & Reusable Line, Safety

Diagnostic Tool, Rechargeable Battery Operated (Gas Detector Accessory )
Single Gas Detectors

• Standard Compliance: EN 5612-15
• Minimum Required for: All Personnel Working in Job has Gas Release Hazard
CSR TRIPOD With Manual Winch
- ANSI Z117.1
- ANSI Z117.1-1995
- OSHA 1910.146
- OSHA 1910.66
- OSHA 1926.502
- Complete rescue system including tripod and Salalift II winch.
- Winch features 60’ of 1/4’ galvanized steel cable.
- UL classified 7’ aluminum tripod (8000000).
- Designed for durability and lightweight, easy to set-up and transport.
- Complete with quick mount bracket for Salalift II winch attachment.
- Rated working load is 350 lbs for work support and 310 lbs for fall arrest.
- Designed for raising, lowering, work support or personnel rescue
- Lightweight design for ease of use.
- Durable corrosion-resistant construction featuring anodized aluminum side plates, zinc-plated
gears and shafts, stainless steel springs and aluminum drum for superior corrosion resistance.
- Overload clutch reduces chance of injury to entangled worker
Confined space rescue stretcher
• Standard Compliance: OSHA Requirement
- The stretcher is fabricated from a special plastic formula that is both flexible and durable.
- Securing straps with steel buckles are sewn into the stretcher through brass grommets, which
contribute to the strength and durability.
- Revolutionary design.
- Durable and easy to use.
- With Cordura backpack storage.
Confined space rescue dummy
• Minimum Required for: Lifetec General Purpose dummies are suitable for common land rescue
scenarios such as height, confined space, USAR, road accident and general handling exercises
14.4.10. Lockout Tag-out & Electrical Hazard equipment
Standard Five Lock Station
• Minimum Required for: Suitable for SCR & VFD room
Standard Ten Lock Station
- Suitable for SCR & VFD room.
- Patented insulated key chamber protects workers from shocks when key is inserted.
- Superior temperature, chemical and corrosion resistance.
- Special 6-pin cylinder resists tampering and offers more unique key cuts.
- Ships with 1 key and labels.

Ball Valve Lockout

- Easy to use, single-piece design locks quarter-turn ball valves in OFF position.
- Two sizes fit most valves up to 3”.
- 65692, 65669 and 65693 are made of powder-coated steel.
- 65666 are made of super-tough nylon (service temp -40° to 248° F).
- Prizing Ball Valve Lockouts made from ultra-tuff polypropylene
Gate Valve Lockout
- Made of rugged injection-molded polypropylene
- Service temperatures from –25°F to 200°F
- Unique knockout center accommodates OS&Y or “rising stem” valves
- Accepts locks with shackles up to 3⁄8” in diameter
Butterfly Valve / Universal Valve Lockout
- OSHA 29 CFR 1910.147 ©(4)(ii)( A)(1)/(c) (5)(ii)(C)(1) ,
- ANSI standard Z244
• Made of industrial-grade steel and nylon
• Small UVLO: for use on handle widths up to 1” (max handle thickness of 0.6”)
• Large UVLO: for use on handle widths up to 1.6” (max handle thickness of 1.1”)
Single Pole Circuit Breaker Lockouts
- Works on a wide range of single-pole and internal-trip multi-pole breakers.
- Made of rugged polypropylene and impact-modified nylon.
- Use thumbscrew to clamp lockout securely onto switch tongue, then pull cover.
- Over thumbscrew and lock in place to prevent clamp from being loosened
Electrical Plug Lockouts
• Standard Compliance: OSHA compliant
- For high & low-voltage plugs up to 3” in diameter and 51⁄2” in length
- 2 sliding top lids can be used individually or together to accommodate small, medium and
large-diameter cords up to 11⁄4”
All Purpose Cable Lockout
- Superior chemical, corrosion and temperature resistance properties
- Nonconductive nylon cable (1⁄8” diameter)
- Sheathed metal cable (3⁄16” diameter, vinyl coating)
- Max. Service temperature of cables:
- Sheathed Metal: -30° to 180° FNon-Conductive Nylon: -40° to 200° F
Push buttons Lockout
- Safety Covers quickly and efficiently secure facility production and operating equipment at
the point of need
- Includes a permanently mounted base and a removable cover

Energy Source Lockout-Tagout Tags

• Minimum Required for: Danger sign /tag
Steel Group Lockout Hasps
• Standard Compliance: Directive 2011/65/EU and 2015/863
- Hasps are constructed of vinyl-coated high tensile steel with rust-resistant plating
- Hasps allow multiple padlocks to secure a single lockout device
- Equipping your employees with the proper lockout tools and warning devices can save lives,
reduce lost employee time, and cut insurance costs
Lockout Padlocks
• Standard Compliance: OSHA requirements
- Padlocks feature lightweight, nonconductive fiberglass-reinforced nylon bodies, hardened
steel shackles and tamper-resistant 6-pin cylinders
- These lightweight padlocks comply with all OSHA requirements and offer superior
temperature, chemical and corrosion resistance
- Non-conductive nylon padlocks are a safer alternative to metal locks for lockout applications
- Reserved, paracentric keyway provides optimal security and the special design prevents the
key from being released until the padlock shackle is closed
Electrical Hazard Rescue Hook
• Standard Compliance: ASTM F711
• Minimum Required for: This insulated, heat-treated rescue hook features a closed-cell, foam-
filled tubular fiberglass reinforced handle
14.4.11. Offshore Safety Equipment
Life Jackets
- SOLAS, USCG, Transport Canada
- SOLAS 74, as amended, Regulation III/4 and 34
- The LSA Code, Regulations I/1.2 and II/2.2 IMO Resolution MSC.81(70), Part 1, MSC 200(80),
MSC 207(81)
- As per personnel on board
- All Personnel wear Life presevers in emergency
- Permanently stored
Life jackets lights
- Exceeds the IMO SOLAS regualtions
- Min. standard: 0.75cd output
- Min. standard: 8-hour duration Low profile, compact
- Easily fitted
- Exceeds the IMO SOLAS regualtions
- Min. standard: 0.75cd output
- Min. standard: 8-hour duration
- Low profile, compact
- Easily fitted
Inflatable life jackets
• Standard Compliance: SOLAS and UK Department of Transport Marine Directorate
• Minimum Required for: Fast rescue craft team and Personnel boarding the chopper

HLO & Banksman vest

• Standard Compliance: EN Approved
- Helicopter Landing Officer (HLO)
- Banks man
Lifebuoys
- Life-Saving Appliance. 2nd ed. IMO. 2010. Ch II. Personal life-saving appliances. Item 2.1.
Lifebuoys P 9
- USCG Approved Type IV
• Minimum Required for: Rig Requirement As per rig safety plan
Man-overboard dummy
• Minimum Required for: The Lifetec Water Rescue Dummy perfectly simulates an unconscious
casualty in water
14.4.12. Health and Occupational Protection Related Equipment
Basket Stretcher
• Standard Compliance: Council Directive 93/42/EED , ISO 13485
• Bridle ends are adjustable for ideal patient positioning
• Includes 4 locking steel carabineers for attachment to lifting points
• The carabineers’ welded-in retaining bar prevents separation from bridle webbing
Adjustable lifting bridal
• Standard Compliance: Council Directive 93/42/EED , ISO 13485
- Bridle ends are adjustable for ideal patient positioning
- Includes 4 locking steel carabineers for attachment to lifting points
- The carabineers’ welded-in retaining bar prevents separation from bridle webbing
Pole Stretcher
• Standard Compliance: FDA
- removable stretcher, can use independently
- lightweight aluminum frame
- The fabric is waterproof, anti-cracking and easy to clean
Backboard stretcher
- EN 1789
- EN 1865
- AS/NZS-4535:1999
- IP56, SAE J3027
- KKK-A-1822
- IEC 60601-1
- NFPA-1917
- CAAS GVS v. 1.0
- RoHS-2
- CE
• Minimum Required for: Designed and constructed for both horizontal and vertical casualty
evacuations

Traverse / Vertical rescue stretcher

- EN 1789
- EN 1865
- AS/NZS-4535:1999
- IP56, SAE J3027
- KKK-A-1822
- IEC 60601-1
- NFPA-1917
- CAAS GVS v. 1.0
- RoHS-2
- CE
• Minimum Required for: Designed and constructed for both horizontal and vertical casualty
evacuations
Stretcher cover
• Minimum Required for: It is made from lightweight, coated nylon the cover contains a dual zip
that opens from both ends to access patient or equipment. The cover can be rolled or folded
and stuffed into its self-contained storage pouch, which could be attached to the stretcher with
the integral Velcro attachment straps.
Stretcher strap
• Minimum Required for: Stretcher Strap
14.4.13. Hands-free tools and lifting Aids
Radiation Survey meter / Norm meter
• Minimum Required for: The instrument measures alpha, beta, gamma, and X-rays. Its digital
display offers selectable counts per minute (CPM), mR/hr) or accumulated counts
Digital anemometer “Wind speed meter”
- Simultaneous display of Ambient Temperature and Air Flow or Air Velocity
- Up to 8 easy to set Area dimensions (ft2 or cm2) are stored in the meter’s internal memory
- 3% velocity accuracy via low friction 2.83”D (72mm)
Analog anemometer “Wind speed meter”
• Minimum Required for: Anemometer “ANEMO” (Hand-Held) with measuring ranges: 0 - 120
km/h, 0 - 12 Beaufort, 0 - 35 m/sec, 0 - 70 knots
Barricading caution tapes
- Yellow tape is bright and noticeable
- 3 inch wide tape with large, bold 2 inch letters
- Thick, durable poly stands up to wear and tear
- Rolls are individually labeled with UPC code

14.4.14. Environmental equipment

Spill Kit
• Standard Compliance: OSHA Requirement
- Keep your spill Kits full
- Restock without buying a whole new kit
- Contains all component of original kit
Spill kit container
• Standard Compliance: 40 CFR 112.7, 40 CFR 122.26
- Oil-Only Spill Kit in Cart features swing-out front doors that make it easy to get to the
supplies you need quickly.
- The swing-out doors, prepacked shelves and compartments, make cart easy to inventory and
access. 8 in

14.5. PPE Matrix
Disposable Coverall
Welder Face Shield
Resistant Gloves
Welder Goggles
Safety Harness
Welder Gloves
Rubber Gloves
Impact Gloves
Cotton Gloves
Mech. Gloves
Face Shield
Dust Mask
Ear Plugs
Goggles
Electric
Rubber
Apron
SCBA
Boot
Welding, Cutting or Brazing
Confined Space Entry
Man Riding
Man Basket
Work at Height
Pressure Testing
Electrical Work
Mechanical Work
Working with Chemicals /
Oil
Tubular Handling
Grinding, Drilling or Ham-
mering
Painting
Environmental Conditions
Painting
Noisy Area
Fumes
Dust
Toxic Area
Hazard Chemicals

B15. Gas Detection System
B.15. Gas Detection System
15.1. Scope
The gas testing procedure applies to all workplaces where there is a potential for exposure to
hazardous gases.
15.2. Purpose
The gas testing procedure is designed to identify and assess the potential hazards from hazardous
gases in the workplace. It is intended to protect workers from exposure to harmful gases that can
cause serious health hazards/rescueding respiratory illness, cancer, and even death. The procedure
outlines the steps to be taken to identify, monitor, and control hazardous gases in the workplace.
15.3. Definitions
15.3.1. Competent Gas Tester:
Any person who has been adequately trained and has working knowledge and experience
of instruments and equipment being used in gas testing, and is full aware of the working area
associated hazards/rescue from confined space in addition to knowing his limit and when to stop
and ask for assistance.
15.3.2. Confined Space:

A location that has one or more of the following characteristics:
• Not large enough or has an internal configuration such that can enter and perform assigned
work or could be trapped or asphyxiated by inwardly converging walls or by a floor that slopes
downward and tapers to a smaller cross section.
• Is not designed/intended for continuous human occupancy.
• By design, has limited openings for entry and exit.
• Unfavorable natural ventilation.
• Contains, or has a potential to contain, hazardous atmosphere such as exposure to flammable,
toxic, oxygen deficient, hot or humid atmosphere or any combination of it.
• Contains a material that has the potential for engulfing the entrant.
• Examples include but are not limited to the following:
• Tanks, vessels, storage bins, hoppers, vaults, pits, manholes, and ports, including any piping large
enough to enter.
• Pits, dikes, or ditches more than 5-feet deep that require personnel to work with their heads below
the rim.
Some spaces that are not normally considered to be confined spaces can become so due to a
change in the conditions within the space.
15.3.3. Hazardous Atmosphere:

An atmosphere which exposes person or persons to a risk of death, incapacitation, injury, or acute
illness from one or more of the following;
• Flammable gas, vapors or mist in excess of 10% of its lower flammable limit (LFL).
• An atmospheric oxygen concentration of below 19.5 percent or above 23 percent.
• Any atmospheric condition recognized as immediately dangerous to life or health
15.3.4. Hot Work
Any work being conducted that will produce any heat, sparks or fire that may increase the risk of
fire or an explosion. Hot work consists of, but is not limited to, welding, thermal cutting, grinding
and heating
15.3.5. Lower Explosive Limit (LEL)

Lowest concentration (percentage) of a gas or a vapor in air capable of producing a flash of fire in
presence of an ignition source (arc, flame, heat). At a concentration in air below the LEL there is not
enough fuel to continue an explosion.

15.3.6. Lower Flammable Limit (LFL)

Lower end of the concentration range of a flammable solvent at a given temperature and pressure
for which air/vapor mixtures can ignite.
15.3.7. Upper Explosive Limit (UEL)

Highest concentration (percentage) of a gas or a vapor in air capable of producing a flash of fire in
presence of an ignition source (arc, flame, heat). Concentration higher than UFL or UEL are “too rich”
to burn.
15.3.8. Upper Flammable Limit (UFL)

Upper end of the concentration range of a flammable solvent at a given temperature and pressure
for which air/vapor mixtures can ignite
15.3.9. Oxygen Deficient Atmosphere

An atmosphere containing less than 19.5% oxygen by volume.
15.3.10. Oxygen Enriched Atmosphere

An atmosphere containing more than 23% oxygen by volume.
15.3.11. Airborne concentration

The mass of particulate substances or fibers, or the vapor percentage of dissolved pollutants in a
specific volume of air. As the concentration increases, the risk of inhalational exposure rises.
15.3.12. Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL)

Is the maximum amount or airborne concentration of a substance to which a worker may be
legally exposed. Most PELs have been defined for substances that are dangerous when inhaled,
but some are for substances that are dangerous when absorbed through the skin or eyes. A PEL
may be defined in either of two ways; a Time Weighted Average (TWA) concentration. This average
concentration must not be exceeded during any 8 hr. work shift of a 40 hr. workweek. Or, a ceiling
value, which must not be exceeded at any time during the workday.
15.3.13. Threshold limit value (TLV)

The concentration in air to which it is believed that most workers can be exposed daily without
an adverse effect (i.e., effectively, the threshold between safe and dangerous concentrations).
The values are time-weighted concentrations (TWA) for a 8 hr. workday and 40 hr. workweek, and
thus are related to chronic effects. A short-term exposure limit (STEL) is defined as a 15 min. TWA
exposure, which should not be exceeded at any time during a workday even if the 8 hr. TWA is within
the TLV-TWA.
15.3.14. Time-weighted average (TWA)

A method of calculating a worker’s daily exposure to hazardous substances such as dust, fumes,
chemicals, gases, or vapors. It is averaged to an 8-hour workday or 40-hour week, along with the
average levels of exposure to the hazardous substance and the time spent in that area. TWA for H2S
is 10 PPM.
15.3.15. Short term exposure limit (STEL)

A 15 minute TWA exposure that should not be exceeded at any time during a workday. STEL for
H2S is 15 PPM.
15.3.16. Continuous Gas Testing

A process whereby the required gas tests are continuously monitored. Continuous monitoring is
normally required where there is a high likelihood of changing gas concentrations and / or there is a
high risk to workers if the gas concentration changes unexpectedly.

15.3.17. Gas Free

A tank or confined space that has a Zero reading for harmful, toxic and explosive gases when
tested.
15.4.1. OIM/PIC and relevant Section Leader (Applicant) shall ensure that
Nominating competent Gas Testers, and ensure that all personnel follows the rules outlined in this
procedure.
15.4.2. Work group supervisor

• Verify any requirement for gas testing related to the Work Permit.
• Ensure that gas testing is carried out where appropriate by Competent Gas Testers, prior to issue
of a Work Permit, and that the results are recorded on the permit.
15.4.3. Competent Gas Tester
• Assess atmospheric hazards inherent in the confined space, i.e. organic vapours, toxic or oxygen
deficient atmospheres etc. using the applicable calibrated instruments.
• Assess work to be performed inside the confined space to evaluate atmospheric hazards that may
be introduced into the confined space as a result of work activity.
• Based on the above assessments identify PPE required for entry, ventilation requirements.
• Perform gas test of confined space, record readings on permit and signs as competent gas tester
in the entry permit.
• As an competent gas tester, states on the Work Permit how long the test is valid for before a new
gas test is required.
15.5. Procedure
• Gas Testing is carried out by a competent gas tester to check whether it is safe to carry out, or
continue with certain activities, ensuring that people and plant are not placed at risk by potentially
dangerous gas concentrations during the activity. This procedure indicates the requirements for
Gas Testing to acceptable Gas Test Standards.
• Gas Testing shall be carried out as part of, and in accordance with, the requirements of Permit to
Work Procedure and Entry into Confined Spaces Procedure. Moreover, all appropriate PPE should
be worn by the gas tester during the gas tests.
• Appropriate arrangements must be in place for the control and use of all gas testing instruments.
15.5.1. Precautions for Gas Testing:
• Follow the manufacturers’ supplied literature before operating the instrument.
• Avoid exposing the gas detection instrument to chemicals or substances that may poison the
sensors or detectors. Refer to manufacturer’s literature for examples of such poisons or chemicals.
• Only use manufacturer approved accessories with your instrument as incorrect accessories can
harm the operation of the instrument.
• Portable multi gas detector that is shared among multiple users should be disinfected / cleaned
before using. In order to minimize the risk of sensors’ damage or malfunction, disinfecting /
cleaning the device must be in accordance with manufacturer‘s recommendation.
15.5.2. Test the Atmosphere inside the Permitted Space
• Initial testing should be carried out by a competent gas who will issue a certificate stating
whether the space is ‘safe for man’ and/or work, and if any special conditions are to be observed.
Ventilation should be stopped about 10 minutes before tests are made and not restarted until the
tests are completed.
• A continuous gas monitoring has to be carried out by competent gas tester to check the
atmospheric conditions inside the confined space with calibrated gas detection device. And record

it in the Gas Testing Readings Log form at least every one hour.
15.5.2.1. Measuring must cover the:
• Top of the plant to measure the Methane gas level and Carbon Monoxide (CO).
• Middle of the plant to measure the oxygen level
• Bottom of the plant to measure the H2S level.
15.5.3. Location of Gas Testing
• Gas tests shall be carried out at different intervals and record the results of the gas testing so
that they provide a representative indication of the conditions inside the vessel or pipework or
other confined spaces or in the surrounding area of worksite. For vessels the vapor space shall be
sampled (From outside the vessel) at several levels and positions inside the vessel.
• Where pipework is to be broken, the contents of the pipe shall be tested from a sampling point as
near to the break-in point as possible, or from sampling points on either side of the break-in point.
If this is not possible, the contents of the pipe can be sampled by breaking the flange and testing
at the break-in point before complete dismantling.
• Where Hot Work is to be carried, the worksite and adjacent area must be tested together with
possible sources of gas leak in the surrounding area and in particular those upwind of the worksite.
• Where H2S could be present, it is essential to sample as close to the bottom of the vessel as
possible
15.5.4. Types of Gas Tests
Testing for oxygen (O2) Testing for flamma- Testing for H2S Testing for Carbon
ble atmosphere Monoxide (CO)
Prior to entry, verify that A space with an H2S are measured Carbon monoxide
the O2 level is between atmosphere with in parts per million (CO) gas testing shall
19.5% and 23%. If the O2 more than 0% of the (PPM). A space with an be conducted for
level is less than 20%, “Lower Flammable atmosphere with more all confined space
entry is permitted only Limit” (LFL) or “Lower than 0 ppm must not entry activities. The
while continuously wearing Explosive Limit” (LEL), be entered. concentration shall be
an atmosphere-supplying on a combustible gas less than 35 PPM.
respirator. If the O2 level indicator should not be
is above 23%, no entry is entered.
permitted.
15.5.5. Requirements for Gas Testing

Gas Testing will always be required for any of the following:
• Preparation of confined space entry.
• Before and during entry into confined spaces
• Before all hot work in hazardous areas, and thereafter, as specified on the work permit.
• Before all cold work in hazardous areas, and thereafter, as specified on the work permit.
• As specified on any other Work Permits.
• A potential ignition source contacting a flammable or explosive atmosphere.
• Where there is a potential for a reduction or increase of oxygen in a breathable atmosphere.
• Where there is a potential for a toxic atmosphere.

B16. Transportation safety

requirements
B.16. Transportation safety requirements
16.1. Scope
This procedure applied on all EGPC affiliated vehicles. It ensures
16.2. Purpose
Transportation and road safety rules and the following instructions are issued to provide
guidelines for all users Rig contractors/operators transportation units and Persons in Charge (PIC) of
Rigs, Bases etc. who supervise operations of these units.
16.3.1. Top management
Rig operators and contractors are responsible for ensuring the implementation and activation of
this procedure.
16.3.2. Driver
• Responsible for the safety of both passengers and vehicles.
• Responsible for implementing pre-trip checklist on vehicle before starting the trip.
• Responsible for ensuring JMS form is correctly filled in and that all Passengers’ names are
listed.
16.3.3. The transportation manager
Ensures procedure is understood and implemented at all work locations. He monitors the
implementation and proposes revisions and/or corrective actions when required.
16.4. Procedure
16.4.1. Driving Safety Precautions
• Rig contractor shall ensure that Traffic law is followed at all times (i.e. speed limits, licenses,
and vehicle
• Condition and road signs).
• Journey Management System is implemented and followed.
• Headlights should be used at any time when vision quality is not optimum
• Driver’s medication has to be approved by Medical specialist.
• Driver shall not exceed (road / desert) speed limit.
• Using mobile phones while driving is prohibited.
• Seat belts are installed and fastened by all occupants.
• It is prohibited to pick up hitchhikers without permission.
• Daily driving distance for drivers doesn’t exceed 9 hours, and continuous driving doesn’t
exceed 3 hours.
• The distance from the front vehicle while driving should be 3 driving seconds in normal road &
weather conditions, and to be 6 seconds in low vision (fog, rains… etc.)
• Smoking is not allowed inside EGPC vehicles.
• Driver has a valid defensive drive certificate.
• Drivers are subjected to a random drug test.
• Light vehicles are to be checked daily by using pre-trip checklist.
16.4.2. Night Driving
Due to the increased driving hazards at night, EGPC has implemented restrictions on driving
during nighttime hours, limiting it to a minimum. It is only limited to business-critical activities only
considered by the organization’s Operations and HSE Managers
As night driving increases risks in driving, the following minimum controls shall be in place:
• Night drive checklist shall be done by STP/PIC and to be attached with the journey plan.

• Night drive within the same concession without crossing highways/public roads; the
Superintendent’s approval is required.
• Infield crew change; senior tool pusher’s approval is required.
• Night drive between different concessions & on public roads; organization’s Operations
and HSE Manager’s approval is required.
• Ambulance movement; Superintendent /senior tool pusher’s approval is required.
16.4.3. Convoy Safety Precautions
• Rig Contractor shall ensure two truck pushers escorted at least in the following cases:
- For the wide loads even if it’s only one.
- If loaded trucks in rig move pass below a bridge or electrical overhead transmission lines.
- If the convoy passes on public roads.
- If number of vehicles moving together exceeds 10 vehicles.
• Precautions:
- The truck pusher:
- Brief all drivers and participants in the morning meeting on convoy safety procedures,
stating hazards and precautions.
- During the convoy’s journey, the truck pusher plays a crucial role in ensuring safety. They
prevent any vehicle from passing when the convoy is crossing intersections. Moreover, the truck
pusher leads the convoy by driving in front of it and providing proper instructions to the truck
drivers.
- The maximum height and width of the road, regarding to road survey should be considered.
- Number of trucks in one convoy shall not exceed 20 trucks, excluding the convoy lead vehicle
and convoy tail vehicle.
- Wide loads edges are to be covered with reflection tapes (The reflection tapes are provided
by rigs).
- Orange/yellow revolving light or strobe light is installed in the convoy’s front truck, if
available.
- Escorts have an agreed method of communication between each other.
- While travelling in convoy, the speed of the convoy vehicles is to be adapted to the prevailing
road conditions, legal speed limit, and road speed limit.
- Safe distance is to be maintained between trucks, distance should be 5 driving seconds from
the front vehicle.
16.4.4. Poor Visibility Precautions
Rig contractors shall ensure that all employees aware by the driving procedures in case of poor
visibility (e.g. sandstorms, heavy rains, unclear visibility etc.):
• Ensure the trip is necessary; Reduce vehicles movement.
• Before the trip inspect the vehicle, as per EGPC compliance checklist, and ensure all light
signals, water of windshield wipers and wipers are working efficiently.
• Ensure the driver is approved; driver’s documentation are valid (Defensive
• Drive training, Driving license, and medical checkup).
• Prepare a journey plan for the trip and contingency plan in case of inability to complete the
journey in the middle of the road.
• Don’t speed up & keep safe distance with the front vehicle. Leave 6 seconds with the front
vehicle & if you can’t make it pull over in a safe place.
• STOP in case of heavy fog and poor visibility stop in a safe place, turning on your flash light/
waiting signals alerts other drivers of your vehicle’s location.
16.4.5. Desert Lost Man Survival
Each rig contractor shall ensure that all drivers and employees are familiar with guidelines to be
followed in case lost in desert
• Call trip manager to inform him with the situation
• If you get lost, stop immediately. Try to locate your bearings, and do not resume until you are
sure of where you are going. (The best policy is to backtrack until you know where you are.)

• Means of signaling include the headlights, which should only be used if you see another vehicle.
• Use food and water carefully.
• If realized you are completely lost, do not leave your vehicle.
16.4.6. Journey Management System
16.4.6.1. JMS form to be issued for
• Cairo-assigned vehicles conducting field trips.
• Cairo & field assigned vehicles conducting trips 50 Km (+).
• Rig-assigned vehicles conducting trips outside the rig’s operations area.
• Rig move convoys (between rigs locations when passing a high way/public road.)
• Regular weekly supply trucks and contractor’s vehicles conducting field trips.
• All inter-cities trips.
• JMS to be filled in at the departure point (origin point), kept with the vehicle driver and
completed upon arrival at destination by the designated Person in Charge (PIC).
For further requirements refer to EGPC safe transportation guidelines.

B17. HAZCOM
B.17. HAZCOM
17.1. Scope
This procedure sets out practical step-by-step instructions for managing the potential hazards of
chemicals and appropriate protective measures to employees.
17.2. Purpose
The purpose of a Hazard Communication (HazCom) is to ensure that employees are aware of the
hazards of chemicals in the workplace and are provided information regarding the potential hazards
associated with exposure to these chemicals.
17.3. Definitions
17.3.1. HazCom
Means “Hazard Communication” which works to keep people safe by providing information about
potential sources of injury — specifically, hazardous chemicals in the workplace.
17.4.1. The rig contractor’s HSE engineer
• Shall review and maintain any safety data sheets of hazardous chemicals, and ensure that they
are readily accessible to employees (SDS)
• Provide safe work environment and the implementation of this procedure
• Ensure that employees are provided the required information and training on the chemicals
handling hazard and required controls.
• Determine the required PPE, ensure its availability and that employees are properly trained how
to use of that equipment.
• Assure that all hazardous chemicals that enter or leave the workplace are properly labeled,
tagged or marked.
• Develop safe instructions / SJA for chemical handling.
17.5. Procedure
17.5.1. Chemical inventory
To comply with HazCom standards, companies that work with hazardous materials create a list
of all chemicals they use in their work and organize it in their specific work areas. If you’re creating
a HazCom system for a company, you can review and track all chemical items your team members
may work with. You can add or remove items to keep the inventory accurate as the inventory
changes.
Taking inventory of hazardous chemicals may involve identifying materials and their hazards or
knowing what materials are in a workplace. Once the list is complete, an employer can post it in a
public area and distribute it to all employees to familiarize themselves with the hazardous materials
in the workplace and interact with them according to their identified potential hazards.
17.5.2. Labeling system

Companies that ship or manufacture hazardous materials use the correct labels to comply with
HazCom standards. These labels include the chemical’s name, a signal word, a hazard warning or
statement, instructions for safe handling and the name, address and phone number of the company
or manufacturer.
In addition to the written text, chemical labels contain a pictogram that professionals can use to
quickly identify an item’s hazards. Some chemicals may include multiple graphics to show different
hazards. Common pictograms may include a flame to denote the contents are flammable, an
exclamation point to show the chemical is an irritant or a human health hazard symbol to show it’s
essential for an individual to use care when handling the item.

B.17. HAZCOM
17.5.3. Safety data sheets

(SDS) is a document that shows the hazards of various chemicals. To comply with HazCom
standards, companies create an SDS for each chemical they have in the workplace. They can give
these documents to employees or transporters to help make a safer work environment. OSHA
guidelines state the safety data sheet should contain the following information in this order:
• Chemical identification
• Hazard identification, such as a signal word
• Ingredient information
• First-aid treatment instructions
• Firefighting measures
• Protocols for an accidental spill or release
• Instructions for storing and handling items
• Guidelines for limiting exposure and instructions for personal protection equipment
• Physical and chemical description of the item
• Details about the material’s stability and reactivity
• Information about the material’s toxicology
• Information about how the product may affect the environment
• Disposal instructions
• Transportation guidelines
• Regulatory information, if the material has additional safety guidelines
• Other information, if necessary
17.5.4. HazCom training program
Companies can create a HazCom training program to help employees understand hazardous
materials’ safety procedures. During this training, professionals can learn more about the materials
they may encounter at work and their associated risks. Companies can provide and discuss the
safety data sheets for all items employees might work with, which can help team members prepare
for their roles.
17.5.5. Written HazCom program

• A HazCom program is a written plan that details how a company plans to approach hazmat
standards. It includes information about the inventory, labeling, SDS and training plans. For
example, it may contain information about who can maintain the inventory and how often they
can update the inventory amounts.
• Creating a HazCom program can help companies ensure they meet all standards. In the written
plan, businesses can include details about how and when they plan to review their safety
systems. This can help ensure companies update their procedures to comply with new HazCom
guidelines

B18. Harsh weather Requirements
B.18. Harsh weather Requirements
18.1. Scope
The goal of this EGPC harsh weather requirements is to recommend practices to establish safe
working environment for personnel working in oil and gas field activities
18.2. Definitions:
18.2.1. Inclement Weather:
As any extreme or harsh weather condition that makes it unsafe or impractical to work safely for
personnel, operation and equipment, if precautions are not taken to protect against the hazard.
Inclement weather conditions include cold temperatures, high temperatures, heavy rain, hurricanes,
high winds, and tornadoes etc.
18.2.2. Wind Indicating Devices:

Unobstructed wind-indicating devices, such as windsocks & Anemometer, shall be provided and
maintained in good condition. They shall be conspicuously located so at least one is readily visible
from anywhere in the location.
18.2.3. Visibility:
The greatest distance at which a black object of suitable dimensions, situated near the ground, can
be seen and recognized when observed against a bright background OR the greatest distance at
which lights of 1,000 candelas can be seen and identified against an unlit background .
18.2.4. Low Visibility:

Visibility of less than 100 meters (330 ft).
Fog, Mist and Haze: Fog is the visibility of less than 1 km. Mist is the visibility of between 1 km and 2
km and Haze from 2 km to 5 km.
18.2.5. Knot:
Is a unit of speed equal to one nautical mile per hour, 1.852 km/h (approximately exactly 1.151 mph
or 0.514 m/s). The ISO standard symbol for the knot is kn
Rig Contractors responsible to suspend operations whenever find it unsafe to resume work Based
on the weather forecast and to ensure that weather conditions are favorable and that adequate
visibility exists for the work otherwise he must suspend or delay the operations until conditions
improve
18.4. Procedure:
Work shall be suspended during inclement weather conditions such as heavy rains, fog/dust with
poor visibility, sand storm, and high wind speed when such conditions are likely to cause harm to the
people if they continue to work.
The Rig Contractors or the permit issuer, applicant & site HSE engineer should asses the risk of the
situation and decide on the continuation of the activity.
The wind-indicating device is to be used at the rig site to record the wind speed or information to
be obtained from a reliable source located sufficiently close to the worksite to assure the accuracy of
the indicated wind velocity.
After clearance of inclement weather/sand storm, ensure the location is safe to work by inspecting
all the work areas for any potential hazards.

B.18. Harsh weather Requirements
18.4.1. Inclement Weather Precautions:

PIC is responsible for ensuring that the following precautions are in place.
18.4.2. Hot weather Precautions:
• Take frequent breaks. Avoid working under direct sunlight
• Rest and cool off several times during the day.
• Do not ignore warning signs from your body.
• Before start of physical work/job and during the job, drink plenty of cool water throughout the
day even when you are not thirsty and do not eat heavy meals before working in the heat.
• Do not force yourself to do more work than you think you can. If possible schedule jobs to
cooler part of the day.
• Get good sleep during your rest period/time.
• Do not work alone in isolated places. Always ensure you are being seen by others.
• Wear light breathable clothing.
• Supervisor to daily ensure crew are fit for job during summer.
• Contact Supervisor / First-aid Centre if you are not feeling well or you feel the heat stress
symptoms.
18.4.3. Transportation precautions:
During the winter season, expected to have a heavy rains, fog and unclear visibility so be sure to
have the following:
18.4.3.1. Before any trip:
• Check wipers are in place working properly and in a good condition.
• Check the level of windshield washer fluid and fill it up in case of low level.
• Check the radiator coolant level, oil level, and battery conditions.
• Check tire condition.
• Any journey is not permitted to begin until the bus supervisor, transportation representative,
and PIC agree that there is sufficient/acceptable visibility.
18.4.3.2. During any trip:
• Ensure the trip is necessary, and reduce vehicle movement.
• Allow extra time for your journey and reduce your speed.
• Do not speed up & keep a safe distance from the front vehicle. Leave 6 seconds with the front
vehicle & if you cannot make it pull over in a safe place.
• If visibility is seriously reduced by fog, use low-beam headlights and fog lights. Switch on your
wipers to keep your windscreen clear.
• Remember to turn fog lights off when they are no longer needed, as they can be a distraction to
other drivers.
• Avoid sudden braking, accelerating too quickly and harsh steering in slippery conditions.
18.4.3.3. Location precautions:
Location may be affected by rains and floods; thus the following shall be implemented:
• The graded road to the rig is well compacted and does not have weak points to prevent the
wheel stuck.
• After any heavy rains, or floods rig road to be surveyed and checked its compatibility to avoid
heavy trucks being stuck.
• In case of being in an area with a history of floods or heavy rains, be sure to choose the high
ground area for camp setup to avoid being in rain or flood drains.

B19. High pressure systems

(Air & hydraulic)
B.19. High pressure systems (Air & hydraulic)
19.1. Scope
This procedure applies to all high-pressure systems (air and hydraulic) in the workplace, including
but not limited to:
• Compressed gas cylinders
• Air compressors
• Hydraulic pumps
• Hydraulic hoses and fittings
• Pneumatic tools
19.2. Purpose
The purpose of this procedure is to ensure the safe operation and maintenance of high-pressure
systems (air and hydraulic) in the workplace. This includes:
• Identifying and assessing the hazards associated with high-pressure systems
• Implementing appropriate controls to prevent accidents and injuries
• Providing training to workers on the safe operation and maintenance of high-pressure systems
• Establishing emergency procedures for responding to high-pressure system failures
19.3. General Requirements

• All mud pumps shall be marked with safety signs indicating “Remote Start.”
• A pressure relief device (PRD) shall be installed on all power-driven rig mud pumps that directly
service the drilling or maintenance of the well. There shall be no valve between the rig mud
pump and the pressure relief device.
• The PRD shall be set to discharge at a pressure not above the manufacturer’s recommended
maximum working pressure of the rig mud pumps and all connecting pipes and fittings.
• Shear pins used in PRDs shall be those specified by the manufacturer. Tools, welding rod tips,
etc., shall not be used for shear pins.
• All PRDs of the shear pin type shall be provided with a guard or barrier placed around the shear
pin and spindle of the device.
• All fluids or materials discharged through a PRD, including i.e. cement silos, mud pumps, etc.
shall be piped in a direction that will not endanger workers.
• There shall be no valve in the discharge opening of a PRD or in the discharge pipe connected to
it.
• The piping connected to the pressure side and discharge side of a PRD shall not be smaller than
the normal pipe size openings of the device.
• The piping on both the inlet and discharge side of the PRD shall be adequately secured to
prevent movement during discharge.
• The PRD lines shall be flushed at the beginning of each well and every month.
• The piping from the discharge side of the PRD shall be continuously sloped downward to the
suction pit to drain liquids.
• All mud guns used for jetting shall be securely anchored.
• Quick-closing valves shall not be used on the discharge line from a positive displacement type
mud pump.
• Clamps and wire rope safety lines shall be used to fasten a Kelly hose at the stand-pipe end to
the derrick and at the swivel end to the swivel housing.
• Mud line system hoses, which may be subject to whipping in case of failure, shall be equipped
with clamps and wire rope safety lines of sufficient strength and secured to adequate support.
• Wire rope safety lines shall not be attached at the connection. They are to be attached to the
hoses after the internal fitting.
• Partial bolting of flange fittings is not permitted and installed bolts shall extend completely
through their nuts.
• All MODU Mud Pump Rooms shall be configured to ensure routine equipment repair/
replacement activities can be safely and efficiently completed through strategic placement of
certified lifting equipment anchor points hoists, or work platforms as appropriate to ensure safe
access to mud pump components and relief valves.

B.19. High pressure systems (Air & hydraulic)
• Each D&WO operator facility, Rig contractor, and service company equipment which is used on
drilling facilities or rig locations shall develop and maintain a comprehensive Pressure Relief
Register/tracking system.
• The register shall include:
- The asset, and the number of relief valves associated with the asset.
- Location.
- Serial number.
- Model number.
- Service type.
- Maximum Allowable Working Pressure (MAWP).
- Set pressure.
- Inspection certification intervals.
- Service – Installation date.
- Last Inspection date and type.
- Next Inspection date and type.
- Annual or as per OEM Inspection date and type.
• Pressure Relief Devices shall be calibrated by a third party company annually or as determined
by the OEM recommendation, whichever is more frequent. Air service PRV’s are required to
have function test capability and be tested every three (3) months. A function test tag shall be
displayed on each air service relief device.
• Maintenance personnel who perform the inspections and replacement of the PRVs shall verify
the PRVs being installed has the required tracking information attached to the PRV and this
information is documented into the PRV register/tracking system.
• All pressure gauges shall be calibrated as per OEM.
• All mud pump pulsation dampers must be marked with “Only N2 for pre-charge” text.
• High pressure gauges are critical pieces of equipment, their maintenance, repair and
replacement must be monitored and tracked. All drilling contractors and service providers
shall implement a program that addresses the criticality of this equipment. As a minimum, the
following will be implemented.
• A “High Pressure Gauge Register” will be developed for every rig or work unit. All high pressure
gauges shall be identified using the following information:
- Unique ID.
- Pressure gauge pressure rating.
- Gauge location and use.
- History of gauge calibration shall be maintained until the gauge is disposed of. (If the gauge
history is not currently available, one shall be made starting with the next calibration).
- Calibration of the pressure gauge shall follow OEM recommendations or stricter
recommendations that are set by EGPC standards or requirements if implied.
- Gauge Calibration Register shall have as a minimum (an example of a register is found
below).
- Gauge serial number.
- Gauge location.
- Gauge use.
- Current calibration date.
- Next calibration date.
- Internal / external calibration service.
- Calibration provider.

B20. Welding and cutting
B.20. Welding and cutting
20.1. Scope
This procedure applies to the rig operators, contractors and service companies in all EGPC
workplaces on all welding operations including Acetylene welding, Electric arc welding, Grinding,
Machining, and Spot Welding to protect personnel from the hazards of cutting and welding,
including sparks, molten metal, harmful rays, and flying particles.
20.2. Purpose
The purpose of this procedure is to ensure the safe performance of welding and cutting operations
in the workplace. This includes:
• Identifying and assessing the hazards associated with welding and cutting operations
• Implementing appropriate controls to prevent accidents and injuries
• Providing training to workers on the safe operation of welding and cutting equipment
• Establishing emergency procedures for responding to welding and cutting fires
20.3. Definitions and Acronyms

20.3.1. Hot Work:
Any work involving a source of ignition such as welding, burning, cutting, riveting or similar
operations, as well as the use of hand drills, grit blasting, equipment that could produce sparks, and
electrical equipment which is not intrinsically safe (i.e. not Ex. proof).
20.3.2. Lower Explosive Limit (LEL):

Lowest concentration (percentage) of a gas or a vapor in air capable of producing a flash of fire in
presence of an ignition source (arc, flame, heat). At a concentration in air below the LEL, there is not
enough fuel to continue an explosion.
20.3.3. Lower Flammable Limit (LFL):

The Lower end of the concentration range of a flammable solvent at a given temperature and
pressure for which air/vapor mixtures can ignite.
20.3.4. Oxygen Deficient Atmosphere:

An atmosphere containing less than 19.5% oxygen by volume.
20.3.5. Oxygen-Enriched Atmosphere:

An atmosphere containing more than 23% oxygen by volume.
20.3.6. Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL):

This is the maximum amount of airborne concentration of a substance to which a worker may be
legally exposed. Most PELs have been defined as substances that are dangerous when inhaled,
but some are substances that are dangerous when absorbed through the skin or eyes. A PEL may
be defined in either of two ways a time-weighted average (TWA) concentration. This average
concentration must not be exceeded during any 8-hour work shift of a 40-hour work per week.
20.3.7. Fire Watcher:

A person trained in firefighting, Fire watcher must be standing by with a suitable fire extinguisher.
After work is completed, check that area is free of sparks, glowing embers, or flames.
20.4. Responsibilities:
20.4.1. Work Supervisor:
• Ensuring worksite inspections are carried out before, during, and after the performance of the
hot work permit.

• Ensuring that all PTW & Risk Assessments have been met and that the work permit has been
signed.
• Ensuring that proper PPE is used.
• Supervise employees properly.
• Ensure that gas testing for the Welding Operation was done and record it in the PTW.
• Obtaining agreement with the team on the minimum precautions needed to perform the work
safely through the issue and use of PTW and the corresponding JSA for the job.
• Once the welding operation is completed it shall be verified that the personal tools, garbage,
etc., have been evacuated from the workplace and PTW can be signed off.
20.4.2. Welder performing the work:
• Welder shall be qualified by having 6GR welding certification.
• Only certified Welder is allowed to use any type of welding or cutting equipment.
• Cutters, welders, and their supervisors must be suitably trained including Confined Space Entry,
and competent in the safe operations of their equipment and the safe use of the process.
• Welders shall be provided with special welding coveralls, welding gloves, and flame retardant
balaclavas/hoods as required, to protect them from molten iron, sparks, open flame, and
intense heat.
• Welding coverall shall be worn with the sleeves rolled down and secured at the wrists. Buttons/
zippers shall be secured so as to protect the wearers’ chest and neck. Pant/coverall legs shall
be worn rolled down and shall not be tucked inside footwear.
• The welder must lock the equipment in suitable secure storage when not in use to avoid misuse
of the equipment.
• All helpers or other personnel working in the immediate area of the hot work will be required to
wear appropriate PPE.
20.4.3. Employee on duty as Fire Watch
• Be aware of the effects of hazards from welding and cutting operations.
• Be aware of all classes of fire and all Types of Fire extinguishers and how to use it.
• Check that area is free of sparks, glowing embers, or flames.
• Fire Watch Personnel shall be familiar with the location of the Telephone, if available nearby
and Fire and fume alarm boxes.
• They must have fire-extinguishing equipment readily available.
• They must watch for fires in all exposed areas, try to extinguish them only when obviously
within the capacity of the equipment available, or otherwise sound the alarm.
• Continues fire watch for at least 30 min after the job is finished.
20.4.4. HSE Engineer:
• Review PTW and ensure that all precaution is in place.
• Ensure that the gas test is done & recorded (Certified Gas tester list to be posted on PTW
control board).
• Ensure that continuous gas monitoring is being implemented by a competent gas tester and
recorded in PTW every hour.
20.5. Procedure
20.5.1. General Safety Precautions
• Welding and cutting equipment is strictly controlled and may be used only by qualified
authorized personnel. Welding and cutting equipment maintenance may only be done by the
same qualified, authorized persons. Use welding or cutting equipment with caution; it can cause
numerous rig fires. The use of welding or cutting equipment is restricted to non-hazardous
areas. No welding or cutting is to take place without a “Work Permit” approved by the Senior
Tool Pusher / PIC.
• Before welding or cutting takes place near an oil-saturated area, the area should be washed

down thoroughly and soaked in water prior to commencing the job. No welding or cutting will
be allowed on any tank, pump, or lines containing flammable fluids.
• If welding or cutting must be done on tanks, pumps, lines, etc that have contained a flammable
substance they must be thoroughly clean and tested and certified gas-free before the work
begins.
• The area surrounding the location for any proposed welding shall be examined to ensure that
no spark flames, or hot slag will be blown in or fall upon any combustible material.
• Personnel using welding or cutting equipment must wear the correct eye/face protectors and
correct protective clothing. On completion of any work, welding machines must be turned off,
valves on bottles closed and all welding leads or hoses must be picked up and properly stored.
• Damaged cables or hoses should be repaired immediately or replaced totally if repairs are not
considered to be safe by the supervisor.
20.5.2. Gas Cylinders
Cylinders of compressed gas are stored and used on all rigs. Personnel responsible for the use,
handling, and storing of gas cylinders must observe these precautions:
• Internal storage areas must be well-ventilated on top and bottom.
• Cylinders stored in the open should be protected from heat sources Tarpaulin, or any other
cover, must not be in direct contact with the cylinders.
• “NO SMOKING” signs must be displayed in and around the storage area.
• Cylinders shall at all times be protected from rusting and corrosive conditions.
• No artificial heat is to be allowed in stores where gas cylinders are kept.
• Full and empty cylinders should be kept apart, and clearly marked to prevent confusion and
mistake.
• In order to store and transport this gas, acetylene cylinders are not voids, but are filled with
a porous material that divides the interior spaces into small partly separated cells; thereby,
limiting the size of individual gas areas. To avoid the storage of acetylene as a gas, the porous
material is saturated with acetone, which will absorb up to 25 times its own weight of acetylene
per atmosphere of pressure. Thus, the acetylene is stored and transported in cylinders at up to
250 psi because it is in solution rather than a gas.
• Because of the unusual properties of acetylene and the construction of cylinders, three very
important points must be remembered:
- If at all possible, store and transport acetylene cylinders in a vertical, upright position.
If cylinders have been lying down, stand them upright for 30 minutes before attaching
regulators and using them. This assures the acetone drains down, away from the valve where
it cannot flow out of the bottle through the regulator/torch with possibly disastrous results.
- Never allow acetylene gas in excess of 15 psi to flow on the downstream side of the regulator.
- Cylinders should be separated from Oxygen cylinders a minimum distance of 20 feet or by a
standard firewall.
• Oil or gas cylinder will ignite violently in the presence of high-pressure oxygen and
an explosion may result. Cylinders and fittings must be kept away from all sources of
contamination such as oil barrels, overhead shafting, cranes, or drive belts.
• Do not use cylinders as rollers, work supports, or jacks.
20.5.2.1. Handling Gas Cylinders
Experience shows that in the majority of cases the danger arising from the mishandling of
cylinders falls under a number of well-defined headings, as follows:
• Cylinders may be subjected to undue strain by blows or mechanical damage.
• Pressure in the cylinder may be increased and the cylinder wall may be weakened by heat.
• The gas in the cylinder may come into contact with some material with which it reacts violently,
even explosively.
• The gas may escape from the cylinder valve or attached apparatus, and become concentrated
in a confined space.
• Faulty apparatus may be attached to the cylinder, or equipment may become damaged after
attachment.

• The following rules must be observed when handling cylinders:

- Cylinders must not be lifted with magnets and chains. A rope or nylon sling may be used to
lift one cylinder, never more than one at a time, provided it is correctly adjusted to prevent
slipping. If more than one cylinder has to be handled by a crane, a properly designated cradle
with chain/wire suspension should be used.
- Cylinders must not be allowed to come into contact with electrical apparatus or live wires,
since arcing may be set up which will heat or damage the cylinders.
- Cylinders must be kept away from sparks, flames, or slag from welding or cutting operations.
- Personnel must not lubricate any valve or fitting, and must not use any white or red lead or
any other jointing compound.
- Personnel must not handle oxygen cylinders, valves, or any other fittings with greasy hands,
gloves or rags.
N.B. Oxygen has no smell. Although it does not burn, it supports and accelerates combustion. Ordi-
nary clothing, and more flammable materials such as oil, can be ignited and will burn fiercely in oxy-
gen, or where the atmosphere has been enriched with oxygen. In confined spaces, a small amount of
acetylene or oxygen may create a dangerous condition, which will cause an explosion or fire from a
spark or naked light.
• Take care to avoid leakages, test with soapy water and a brush, never with a naked flame.
• If an acetylene cylinder overheats, perhaps due to excessive or severe backfiring of faulty
equipment, it must be dealt with promptly as follows:
- Shut the valve, detach the regulator, and take the cylinder into the open air, away from any
source of ignition.
- Immerse in, or apply water to cool the cylinder, open the valve fully and keep cool with water
until the cylinder is empty. As this may take several hours, immediate contact should be made
with the suppliers for further advice.
N.B. Acetylene can form explosive compounds in contact with certain metals or alloys, in particular
copper and silver.
• Joint fittings or piping made of copper should on no account be used, and acetylene should
never be allowed to come into contact with copper or any alloy containing more than 70 %
copper.
• Keep cylinders and valves clean. Grit, dirt, oil, and dirty water should not be allowed to enter
the cylinder valve sockets; otherwise, it will be impossible to prevent equipment from leaking at
the joints.
• Clean out any loose dirt by “sniffing” some gas through, i.e. by opening and closing the cylinder
valve momentarily before attaching regulators or fittings. Stand clear of the cylinder valves
before clearing outlet socks.
• Shut the cylinder valves when work has to be stopped for more than a few minutes, or when the
cylinder is empty.
• Use only the standard keys for operating cylinder valves. Do not increase the leverage, or
employ a long leverage spanner or badly worn keys, or attempt to get gas from cylinders with
broken spindles as valves may be damaged and the cylinder rendered useless and dangerous.
• The following rules must be observed while transporting the gas cylinders:
- Cylinders should be transported with care. They should not be handled roughly, dropped, or
knocked around while transportation.
- Protective caps should always be in place on both full and empty cylinders while they are
being moved or transported.
- A special rack should be built for the purpose of transporting and storing oxygen and
acetylene cylinders. The rack should be constructed as to properly secure individual oxygen
and gas cylinders.
- Empty cylinders should have the valve closed, the valve protection cap replaced, marked
empty, and returned to the vendor.

20.5.2.2. Handling Valves and Regulators

Always observe the following procedures when handling valves and regulators for gas cylinders:
• The cylinder must always be opened slowly. Cylinder valve spindles always have right-handed
threads, irrespective of whether the cylinder contains fuel gas or non-combustible gas.
Excessive force must not be used.
• Cylinders must never be transported with the regulators and hose attached. Unless a proper
trolley or carrier is used. When transporting, the cylinder valve must be shut.
• Welding or cutting apparatus must not be used unless automatic pressure regulators are fitted
to the oxygen and fuel gas cylinders.
• It is unsafe to rely entirely on the use of a needle valve, as this does not prevent a reverse flow
of gases towards the cylinders. Moreover, the use of a needle valve in the place of a regulator
may cause the bursting of the hose if the gases are cut off at the blowpipe, as the hose will be
subjected to cylinder pressure.
• For improved safety use reverse flow “flashback” arrestor check valves, the check valves on
regulators MUST be fitted to stop the possibility of reverse flow of gas, which can create a
dangerous mixture of fuel and oxygen. Check valves should be tested for proper function at
least every six months. Careless usage, dirt, or, abuse can shorten check valve life and require
more frequent testing.
• Before a regulator is put on a full cylinder, the person must always release the adjusting screw
to regulate the pressure of output, otherwise there is a risk of damage to the regulator.
• It should be ensured that the threads on the regulators and other auxiliary equipment are the
same as those on valve outlets. The outlets of the industrial gas cylinder valves are screwed
with 5/8’’ bsp thread: right–hand for oxygen and non-combustible gases, left–hand for
acetylene, hydrogen, and combustible gases NEVER force connections that do not fit. Where
cylinders are connected to manifolds or headers, such manifolds must be of proper design and
equipped with one or more pressure regulators and proper flashback arrestors.
• Do not attempt to use the equipment for gases other than those for which it is intended. Coal
gas, hydrogen, and acetylene/propane regulators are all fitted with left-hand threads of the
same size, but acetylene or propane regulators should not be used on coal gas or hydrogen
cylinders that are filled to a higher pressure than is suitable for them.
20.5.2.3. Handling Gas Cylinder Gauges
Always observe the following procedures:
• Never use pressure gauges other than those recommended by the suppliers. Gauges for oxygen
should be marked “OXYGEN” and should not be tested with oil. Gauges used to show the
contents of oxygen, nitrogen, coal gas, or hydrogen cylinders should have a dial reading of not
less than 3000 psi (207 bar).
• No gauge used on acetylene should have a dial reading less than 600 psi (41.4 bar)
20.5.2.4. Handling Gas Cylinder Hose
Observe the following with regard to the hoses:
• Only the best quality hose is to be used. An Inferior hose tends to harden, crack, leak and may
fire internally when oxygen passes through it.
• Hoses should be firmly attached to the blowpipe and other connections by crimping/ OEM
recommendations and not Jubilee clamps. The Length of the hose is supplied with the ends
firmly attached to nipples with screwed unions suitable for connection to standard regulator
outlets and blowpipe inlets. These should be used in preference to any other hoses.
• Frequent accidents occur due to leakages, or the supply hoses becoming loose or blown off.
Hose connections must be frequently examined. Lengths of the hose should be joined by
means of suitable connecting fittings when more than the standard length is required. Do not
use unnecessarily long lengths of hose.
• Cylinders should not be used to support the work, and handling of gas cylinders, nor should
the blowpipe flame be allowed to come into contact with the cylinders. The blowpipe, when
alighted, should not be hung on the cylinder or on the regulators.

20.5.2.5. Cylinder Color coding

Color coding applies solely to the shoulder or the curved part at the top of the cylinder and is used
to identify the properties of the gas in the cylinder, a number of gases have been assigned a specific
color and these are shown below:
Gas Type Description Colors
The head/ shoulder white

Oxygen (O2)
The body black
The head/shoulder green

Nitrogen (N2)
The body black
The head / shoulder brown

Acetylene
The body brown
20.5.2.6. Labeling Information

• All Gas cylinders are required to be labeled to indicate the contents of the cylinder. It must
always be remembered that the label is the means of identifying the contents of the cylinder.
The color of the cylinder is only a guide.
• The cylinder should carry the following information per the Egyptian regulation:
- Capacity in liters
- Cylinder’s number
- The gas name and its chemical symbol
- The product name or trademark (as applicable)
- The total weight of the cylinder
- Test pressure
- Operating pressure
- The date of the last Hydrostatic test
• When operating outside Egypt the local regulation shall be implemented
20.5.2.7. Lighting Torch
• It is important that an adequate flow of fuel gas is issuing from the nozzle of the blowpipe or
other apparatus before lighting up. Personnel must follow this procedure:
- Set the regulators to the recommended working pressure.
- Keep the blowpipe nozzle away from any source of ignition (pilot light, etc.) until the fuel
gas is flowing freely from the nozzle. The use of a spark lighter is recommended for lighting
blowpipes.
20.5.2.8. Using Compressed Gas Equipment
• Inspect the rubber hose periodically to see that it is free from cuts, cracks, burns, and worn
places, and arrange it so that it cannot be cut by contact with sharp edges or corners, falling
metal, sparks, or the blowpipe flame.
• Use a red hose for acetylene and other combustible gases, and be careful to see that they are
never interchanged.
• Use hoses of equal length and do not coil the surplus hose around regulators or cylinders.
• Do not use odd bits of tubing. Remember that copper or high copper content alloy should not

be used in acetylene hose or other parts in contact with acetylene. Use a proper adaptor.
• Be sure to observe carefully the maker’s instructions for lighting and using blowpipes.
• Never attempt to light a blowpipe until sufficient time has elapsed after opening the acetylene
valve for the gas in the hose to normalize at the correct working pressure and for all air to be
blown from the hose.
• It is important that the instructions for the correct procedure for lighting up and operation of
equipment, and the safety precautions taken in the event of a cylinder becoming overheated,
should be followed. Failure to carry out these instructions and precautions properly may cause
the cylinder to heat up internally and burst.
• Cylinder should not be sited or used adjacent to the intake of air compressors.
• It is most important that the fire extinguishers are made available at the scene of welding
operations before welding starts. Precautions for removing the fumes present during welding,
and the rules laid down for welding, must be strictly observed.
20.5.3. ARC Welding:
Certain general precautions should be taken by all persons using arc-welding equipment for
welding or cutting as follow:
20.5.3.1. Burn Prevention:
• Wear protective clothing leather gauntlet gloves, and hardhat and high-top safety boots.
Always button the shirt collar coverall collar and pocket flaps to prevent the entry of sparks or
slag.
• Wear a helmet with safety goggles with correct filter lenses or plates (protected by clear glass).
This is a MUST for welding or cutting (and chipping), to protect the eyes from radiant energy
and flying metal.
• Avoid oily or greasy clothing a spark may ignite it.
20.5.3.2. Fire and Explosion Prevention:
• Causes of fire and explosion are combustible gas reached by the arc, flying sparks, hot slag or
heated material, and short circuits. Sparks and slag can fly 35 feet and will be unseen by the
goggled welder.
• Keep equipment clean and operable; free of oil and grease, and in the electrical parts, free of
metallic particles that can cause short circuits.
• Walls touching combustible material on the opposite side should not be welded on or cut. Clear
all such material away before starting work. A firewatcher must be standing by with a suitable
fire extinguisher. After work is completed, check that area is free of sparks, glowing embers, or
flames.
• Any containers that must be welded or cut, which may have held flammable material, or which
may produce toxic gases, must first be thoroughly cleaned, and if necessary, purged with air or
water to remove any carbon dioxide.
20.5.3.3. Shock Prevention:
• Exposed hot conductors or other bare metal in the welding circuit, or in underground,
electrically hot equipment can totally shock a person whose body becomes a conductor. Do not
come in contact with a wet surface when welding, without suitable protection.
• To protect against shock, keep body and clothing dry, and use a dry duckboard or rubber mat
when working in a damp or wet area. Sweat, seawater, or moisture between the body and an
electrically hot part – or grounded metal – reduces body surface electrical resistance, enabling
dangerous, and possibly lethal, currents to flow through the body.
• Ensure the frames of each unit, such as welding power source, work table, etc., are adequately
grounded. Conductors must be sized to carry grounds safely. Equipment made electrically hot
by strong currents may shock, possibly fatally. Do not ground to electrical conduit, or to pipe
carrying any gas or flammable liquid such as fuel.
• Before welding, check the ground for continuity. Be sure conductors are touching the bare
metal of the equipment frame at connections. Fully insulated electrode holders with protruding

screws.
• Fully insulated lock-type connectors should be used to join welding cable lengths.
• Frequently inspect cables for wear, cracks, and damage. Immediately replace those with
excessively worn or damaged insulation to avoid shock from bared cable. Cables may be taped
to give resistance equivalent to the original cable.
• Keep cable dry, free of oil and grease, and protected from hot metal and sparks.
• Terminals and other exposed parts of electrical units should have insulating covers secured
before operation.
20.5.4. Portable Grinders:
• Portable grinders are used for cutting, grinding, sanding, and brushing metal and timber
materials, depending on the type of disc fitted to the machine.
• Using a portable grinder is a very critical job as incidents involving grinders do not happen
often, but when they do, the results can lead to serious injuries and even death.
• General precautions to be followed when using a portable grinder:
- Only preauthorized, qualified personnel are authorized to use the grinder.
- Only authorized, qualified personnel may change the disks on a grinder.
- Guards must be installed and adjusted, never operate the grinder without a guard being
installed as if the wheel breaks while rotating, it can cause serious injury.
- Guards/covers should cover half the disk between the operator and the disk.
- Full personal protective equipment (PPE) should be worn while using the grinder (face shield,
Gloves, safety boots, ear plugs, etc.).
- Ensure the working area is clean and no flammable fluids/ materials are around.
- Always use both hands when using the grinder.
- Do not tighten the mounting nut excessively.
- Do not put the grinder on the floor or working surface until the wheel has stopped turning.
- Grinders should be cleaned and serviced according to manufacturer’s recommendations.
- Check if grinder cut off as soon as the dead man switch is released.
- Never use the portable grinder as a bench grinder by clamping it to a vice.
- Keep coworkers away from any grinding operations.
- In case of excessive vibration or rough operation, shut off the grinder immediately.
- Unplug the grinder before changing disks.
• Ensure disk fitted to the grinder is:
- The correct type of material to be used.
- The correct size of the grinder.
- Disks are designed for a particular revolution speed which should be equal or exceed that of
the grinder.
- Cutting disks should not be used for grinding jobs, and grinding disks should not be used for
cutting jobs.
- Disks worn small through use should be discarded and NEVER used on smaller machines.
- Free from any damage or cracks that may result of disk shattering.
- Expiry date should be checked.


B21. Temporary Pipework
B.21. Temporary Pipework
21.1. Scope
• The procedures to be applied for drilling and workover operation related to EGPC affiliated
companies within Arab republic of Egypt
• All service companies working in drilling and workover operations related to EGPC affiliated
companies shall adhere with all requirement mentioned in the procedures
• To define what is Temporary pipework and the Hazards associated with it.
• To review methods for mitigating the risks posed by temporary pipework operations.
• Temporary pipework, treating iron or CHIKSAN is piping and flow line equipment that is
mobilized to the well site for performing different pumping or flowing operations.
• Temporary in the context of pipework, and flow line equipment, applies to any pipework,
which can be changed out without recourse to formal structural or process engineering design
reviews.
• Temporary pipework is manufactured for use in either Standard or Sour Service.
21.2.1. PIC of the Rig
The Rig contractor/operator’s/Service company person in charge is responsible for implementing
and following up the procedure/precautions, reviews, and requests revision when required.
21.2.2. Superintendents and service companies Representative

The Rig contractor/Rig operators Superintendents and service companies Rep. are responsible for
verifying the procedure/precautions are adhered to on the Rigs under his responsibility.
21.2.3. HSE teams

The Rig contractors/Operations HSE teams are responsible for verifying the securing method
during the periodical HSE audits, inspection tours and walkthrough where:
• It is forbidden to Use any uninspected pipework for all operations related to EGPC affiliated
companies
• It is forbidden to use temporary pipe work without securing using OEM recommendations and
best practices
21.3. Procedure
• Temporary pipe work operations General pumping operations (transfer of fluids, mud/brine
mixing operations, reverse circulating well fluids, etc.)
• Pressure testing of surface lines and Equipment (Wellheads, BOP, Xmas tree, flow lines, etc.)
• Cementing.
• Well killing.
• Well Stimulation.
• Well Fracturing
• Well testing.
• Nitrogen pumping.
• Well clean up.
• Underbalanced drilling operations.
• Pressure testing of downhole equipment (casing, packers, tubing, plugs, valves, accessories)
21.3.1. Equipment used as Temporary pipework
Temporary pipework can be both hard and flexible pipe, It can also be any of the below
equipment.
• Pipework runs (chiksans), pup joints, elbows.
• T-pieces.
• Laterals (Y-Pieces).
• Swivel joints.

• Treating loops.
• Crossovers.
• High pressure hoses.
• Flanges, blinds, plugs, tapping for sensors and sample points
21.3.2. Connections
• Temporary pipe work is always connected by hammer or WECO unions which can be an
integral or welded. Threaded make up is not accepted anymore. The identification of the female
and male parts of a hammer type union is shown in the figure below.
• Hub-type connections.
• Flange connections.
• Pipe body to pipe body (welded) or pipe body to Sub.
• Gas welded
• Friction welded
• Thread Pipe body to Sub
• NPST (no pressure seal on thread)
• PST (pressure seal on thread)
• Hammer-type connections
21.3.3. Provision of Temporary pipe work for Drilling Operations
Each Temporary pipe work component shall be identified with its service and unique identifier
traceable to its type and manufacturer. Metal banding or hard stamping, using low stress stamps
(Hard banding is preferred), shall include the following data:
• Unique identification number, traceable to material certification.
• Maximum allowable working pressure.
• Test due date.
Note: if the label is missing then the item shall be re-certified.
• When hoses are fitted, the rated working pressure should be printed on and be clearly visible
along the length of the hose.
• All Temporary pipe work shall be subjected to a regular maintenance program and shall take
into account the manufacturers maintenance recommendations.
• Any Temporary pipe work equipment must be properly inspected prior to use.
• Test certificate must be valid as Per OEM / international related standard .
• Manufacturer certificate that shows a suitable material.
• Temporary pipe work equipment must be made up correctly at all connections and unions as
per the recommendations of the operational design.
• Pipework should be suitably restrained where there is a connection (Hard pipe to hard pipe OR
Hard pipe to flexible hose).
• Special register shall be available at the rig and service companies for Temporary pipe work
equipment
• Any certified Temporary pipe work equipment should be included in a register so as to be easily
tracked
21.3.4. General precautions during testing and operating
• Due to typical pressures and flow rates involved, temporary pipework systems contains a lot
of stored energy, which can cause vibration, bending forces, and shock loading on the system.
The fluids can attack the integrity of the strength of the system. That’s why the following
precautions should be considered during testing or pumping through Temporary pipe work.
“Ref. Pressure equipment API requirement, clause #7.11 - API 54 - 4th ed.”
• Installation of restraints is mandatory where fluids are pumped through the pipework. A
restraint system acts like a shock absorber to absorb the kinetic energy of the pipe.
• Based on a rig contractor /service companies risk assessment, lines and hoses should be
appropriately secured to restrict unsafe movement that could cause serious injury or death.
Other suspended hydraulics and, airlines should be appropriately secured. A buffer zone based

on the risk assessment is recommended to limit injury exposure.

• During pressure testing rig contractor team shall keep at least two pipes run lengths away from
the line under pressure barrier / NO-GO zones.
• Before the rig contractor starting the Pressure tests , rig management should announcing in
the radio system and should be conducted only conducted under proper SJA and approved PTW
prepared by rig contractor/service company and approved by rig operators representative .
Keep out of the line of sight of pressured plugged outlets, instrument connections on vessels,
and flow line equipment.
• Mismatching of the pressure rating of the connections with the pipe body is not accepted.
• Mismatching of pipe work hammer union components is not accepted. \
• Pressure de-rating of the pipework from its original working pressure specification below the
manufacturer’s recommendation is not accepted.
• Threaded connections are not accepted.
• The use of Chiksan swivels shall be kept to a minimum, where frequent movement is expected
to occur when the pipe work is under pressure.
• Infield maintenance or repairs are unacceptable except for changing the rubber seal in the male
connection by qualified and certified person
21.4. Temporary pipework identification and traceability

• Each temporary pipework component shall be clearly identified with its service & unique
identifier traceable to its type and manufacture.
• Metal banding or hard stamping, shall include the following data:
- The unique identification number, traceable to material certification.
- The maximum allowable working pressure.
- Test-due date.
- Type of service (e.g. H2S, Standard).
• The band shall be fitted such that it floats on the pipe and cutting is the only means of removal.
If the data is missing then the item shall be rejected and recertified.
21.5. Operational Hazards

• High level of stored energy due to pressures and flow rates involved
• Corrosive and/or erosive fluids being flowed can “attack” the integrity or strength of the
system.
• Vibration due to excessive pulsation, mechanical natural frequencies and inadequate support.
• Shock loading, due to significant and fast change in flowrate or pressure.
• Hazardous fluids like brines, acid or H2S
• Catastrophic failure due to excess pressure, faulty connections, worn components, damage to
the piping connection, mismatching unions
21.6. Hammer Unions

• Hammer unions are used in chemical process plants, the mining industry, the oil and gas
industry, and other operations, and are available in different sizes and pressure ratings
• It is an old design (early 1950s) created by the Well Equipment Company (WECO) which was
acquired by FMC Technologies
21.6.1. Identification of Hammer unions
• The union parts are “NAMED” using a Nominal pipe size, a FIG “designation” and a code
e.g.1502.
• For example: (3 in. FIG 1502)
• The “3 in.” is the Nominal diameter and is close to the inside diameter.
• The meaning of “FIG” is an abbreviation of “figure” – meaning drawing, and 1502 is a code for
the Cold working pressure rating – “15” referring to 15,000 psi.
• For H2S service, pipework “15” means 15,000-psi Test pressure and cold WP rating of 10,000 psi.
• The last two digits in the designation of hammer unions generally refer to the sealing

arrangements.
• “02” refers to a square gasket seal “06” refers to an “O”-ring sea
21.6.2. Mismatching Unions
• Mismatches in hammer unions are severe mechanical hazards to the integrity of the temporary
pipework system, which can fail under pressure.
• Mismatches occur in 5 main categories:
• Mismatching the same size.
• Mismatching the pressure ratings.
• Mismatching of wing nuts.
• Mismatching of components.
• Mismatching of non-detachable and detachable components
21.6.3. Mismatching Pipe Pressure Rating
Refers to connecting hammer union products having different pressure ratings but with end
connections of the same size and figure number.
This occurs when mixing sour gas pipe with standard service pipe or when unions are welded to
pipe with a working pressure lower than that corresponding to the union
21.6.4. Mismatching Wing Nuts

Occurs when the wing nut of one size and figure number is mounted on the male sub of another
size and figure number.
There is only a small amount of engagement of the male sub in the wing nut and therefore the
connection will not safely hold typical working pressures.
21.6.5. Mismatching Components

Occurs when segments and nuts of one figure number are made up of a detachable male sub with
a different figure number.
This results in a small amount of engagement of the male sub with the segment engaging the
wing nut.
21.6.6. Mismatching Non-Detachable And Detachable Components

Is caused by the assembly of non-detachable nuts on detachable male subs.
The detachable wing nuts require a longer thread length to compensate for the segments
between the wingnut and the sub-shoulder.
This results in a lack of thread engagement and an insufficient engagement between the male sub
shoulder with the wing nut ID

21.6.7. Mismatching Swivel Joint Components

It is physically possible to erroneously assemble a male race end of a SPM 3 in. HD-LR component
into the female race end of an FMC 3 in. component
The mating of hub connector components from two different manufacturers (only) is allowed if:
• The components are dimensionally the same and mechanically equivalent.
• The hub connector face shall be from one manufacturer and all the other connector
components shall be supplied by the other manufacturer.
• The assembled connector integrity has been validated at temperature, pressure, and side-
loading by the manufacturer supplying the majority of the components.
21.7. Elastomers
• Elastomers are used to provide the seal in hammer unions.
• When selecting the elastomers, consideration shall be given to the pressure, temperature, fluid
type and exposure time.
• Elastomers suitable for high temperatures are not suitable for very low temperatures and vice
versa.
• Seals exposed to high pressure or high temperature should have an integral backup / anti
extrusion ring Anti-extrusion union seals are recommended for the following applications:
- HP (exceeding 10,000 psi) and elevated temperature (exceeding 130°F)
- Applications involving excessive side loading.
- Where the pipework is in service for a long time e.g. extended well test.
- Where periodic maintenance checks are required but cannot be conducted.
- Pumping aggressive fluids, which may chemically attack union seals, leading to softening of
the composition and possible extrusion.
- Applications in which the suitability of the union seal material is marginal
21.8. Threaded Connections

• Threaded connections where the seal is made by the thread (PST), with a nominal size >1/2 in.
are not allowed above 285 psi.
• The agreed specification break for “low pressure” is given by the rating class 150 flanges - A 105
material specification (forged carbon steel). The flange has a pressure rating of 19.6 bar (285
psi) (ASME 16.5).
• (Pressure Sealing Threads) provides a false sense of security - one cannot tell the condition of
the threaded connection as it can be corroded by well or pumped fluids.
• Non-Pressure Sealling Threads
• Pressure Sealing Thread

21.9. NPST & PST FOR Hammer Unions

• Made-up NPST hammer union male and female connections often cannot be distinguished,
viewed externally, from made-up pipework with PST connections.
• A solution to distinguish between the two has been introduced by FMC.
• NPST hammer union subs will be identified by a groove 0.38” from the end of the subs
21.10. Flexible Pipe- Hoses

• The high-pressure hoses that are used in temporary operations include:
• Hoses to direct well fluid from the test tree to the standpipe or choke manifold - test lines.
• Hoses to direct fracking fluids from the stimulation vessel to the frac head.
• Cementing hoses, Acid lines, Nitrogen lines
• Chemical injection hoses.
• Kill lines.
• The standards for hose design and construction for application in temporary pipework
operations include API 16C, API 17J (which is identical to ISO 13628-2), for bonded and ISO 13628-
10 for unbounded hoses.
• The recommended brand for high-pressure hoses is Coflexip (Technip).
• This hose design is classified as “unbounded flexible pipe”.
• The construction consists of separate unbounded polymeric and metallic layers, which allow
relative movement between the layers
21.10.1. Flexible Pipe – Hoses Handling
• The preferred installation for a flexible line is with the pipe positioned in a J or U configuration,
with the end fittings pointing up in a vertical position.
• Do not leave a medium to longer lengths of horizontal pipe unsupported.
• Ensure the flexible pipe is not bent over or resting on sharp edges - any vibration will cause
damage at such points.
• Do not exceed the minimum bending radius of flexible pipe. [Fig.1As a rule of thumb, the
minimum bending radius (MBR) is roughly 12 x the I.D. of the pipe]
21.10.2. Risk Mitigation
Pre-mobilization Check List The pre-mobilization check of all the equipment shall include
verification that there are no mismatches of the types identified in this guide of the mating integrity
of connections of the interfaces where equipment comes from different suppliers of critical
dimensions (IDs, ODs)
21.10.3. Installation of HP Hoses Clamps

• Don’t use the safety clamp (1) as a lifting
device as its location may result in over
bending of the hose.
• Don’t use the hose lifting collar clamp (2)
as a safety clamp as the minimum breaking
strength and working load limits are less
than required and it is not positioned in the
correct location for this task on the hose
assembly
• Don’t use the wrong safety clamp size as it
will not assist in case of hose burst.
• Don’t use any of hand made or unauthorized
welded safety clamps
• Do Use the safety clamp for securing the Hose after the metal support (3) of the hose end
• by 8-18 inches (5) as the weakness point in the hoses is the area after the metal support area.

21.10.3.1. Cautions
• Warning signs shall be installed and the temporary pipework area shall be barriered-off during
operations.
• During pressure, testing keeps at least 2 pipe run lengths away from the line under pressure.
• Keep out of line-of-sight of pressured plugged outlets, and instrument connections on vessels
and flow line equipment.
• If any leaks are identified, the pressure shall be bled-off before attempting any repair.
• No not hammer temporary pipework under pressure
• Be aware of the liquid spills while disconnecting the hoses.
• Install barriers around the HP hoses area.
• Use proper secondary retention (spring washer, lock nut and safety wire) for hose size.
• Use proper torque for bolts and nuts for the clamp size.
21.10.4. Restraints for temporary pipework
• The forces reacting on pipework when fluids at high pressure are discharged through a rupture
are large.
• The installation of temporary pipework restraints is mandatory where fluids are pumped or
flowed through the pipework.
• The weakest part of the restraint system must have at least twice the strength of the force
generated by the reactive force acting on the parted pipe.
• The maximum theoretical dynamic forces generated in wire ropes, round slings, fiber
• ropes, etc. used to restrain pipe when the pipe ruptures are given in charts based on the pipe
IDs and pressures in question
21.11. Flow line Safety Restraint System (FSR)

21.11.1. Precautions
• It is critical that these products be used and maintained properly; any components that show
obvious signs of damage or wear should be removed from service immediately.
• Flow Line Safety Restraint components are not intended for individual use, FSR Ribs and Spines
are not lifting devices and should never be used as such, Any Ribs or Spines that have been
subjected to any loads should be immediately taken out of service.
• FSRs are considered “single-use” items. This means that, while these components can be
installed multiple times out in the field, if they are employed (that is, subjected to trauma
• as in the event of a union failing or a pipe rupturing), then the affected FSR components need to
be replaced immediately.
• Always keep ALL personnel away from the flow line while under pressure. This applies even
when a restraint system such as FSR is in place
21.11.2. Hammering unions
• Connections, where the equivalence of the design and manufacture of one mating side (male/
female/face) has not been established with that of the other mating side (female/male/face).
• Use of standard service pipework on sour service operations.
• Non-Pressure Sealing Thread (NPST) pipework without external hammer union sub
identification.
• Pressure Sealing Thread pipework nominal size greater than ½”
21.11.3. Installing FSR
21.11.3.1. Step 1
Begin by positioning the Rib beneath the flow line as shown.
The Rib profile should straddle the union assembly.

21.11.3.2. Step 2
Next, bring end “A” up and over piping and union assembly.
Insert end “A” down through end “B” opening. Pull “A” back
through to the original side as shown.
21.11.3.3. Step 3
Continue to bring end “A” back around to form a second loop.
Rib profile should still evenly straddle union assembly as shown.
21.11.4. Flow Line Components

Virtually all flow line components utilize two-wing union
connections – usually male x female. Therefore, most flow line
components (check valves, plug valves, etc.) require FSR Ribs
installed at each end.
21.11.5. Long Piping Assemblies

Most piping assemblies can be treated like other flow
line components - with one FSR Rib installed on each union
connection at each end
21.11.6. Swivel Assemblies

Swivel assemblies should have FSR Ribs installed at each of the
following locations:
• One at each union connection
• One additional Rib for each additional articulating joint
(excluding the joints adjacent to each union connection).
This will result in the following arrangement:
• Style 50 Three ribs
• Style 10 Three ribs
• Style 100 Four ribs
21.11.7. Installing SPM FSR Components-Spine Linking

21.11.7.1. Step 1
Lay out FSR Spines end to end as shown. For illustration
purposes only, we will consider ends “A” thru “D” for this
procedure

21.11.7.2. Step 2
While keeping the “B” end stationary, draw “C” end thru
as shown.
21.11.7.3. Step 3
Continue to pull “C” end thru “B” end. Insert “C” end
back thru the “C-D” FSR Spine as shown. As “C” is pulled
further, unrestrained “D” end will move towards “B” end.
21.11.7.4. Step 4
Pull the remainder of “C” end thru until “D” end
draws close to “B” end as shown. While holding
“B” end stationary, (using either a second person or
placing a weight on the “A/B” FSR) pull “C” end the
remainder of the way through.
21.11.7.5. Step 5
With “C” end pulled taut, notice how “D” and “C”
ends have switched places. Keeping “A/B” FSR
stationary, keep pulling the “C” end until the “B/D”
connection can no longer be tightened. SPM® FSR
link should look like the detail shown.
21.11.8. Securing SPM FSR System Ends

21.11.8.1. Looping
the FSR Spine around the anchor point, then back
through itself (Note: tying off to an anchor point is
never acceptable)
21.11.8.2. “C” SHACKLE

Looping the FSR Spine around the anchor point, then
utilizing an anchor shackle to secure the end back to the
FSR Spine

21.12. Temporary pipework Inspection

21.12.1. Temporary pipework should be inspected yearly as follows:
• 100% wall thickness gauging should be applied.
• 100% Pressure testing.
• NDT on all welding and threads.
21.12.2. Inspection, Testing and Maintenance of Temporary Piperwork (Rigid pipe-
work)
• All temporary pipework shall be subject to a regular (minimum annual) maintenance/inspection
program as per the manufacturer’s /EGPC requirements, but as a minimum shall include the
following:
• Visual inspection of the pipe bore for erosion and corrosion.
• Visual inspection of threads and load shoulders and inspection of sealing surface conditions,
bolts and lock rings, for male sub, female union thread half, wing nuts, hub, (including clamps
and bolts), segment and retaining clip (circlip), swivel joint ball race.
• Magnetic Particle Inspection (MPI) of hammer union segments.
• Wall thickness measurements.
• Pressure testing to maximum working pressure for rigid pipework.
• If repairs/modifications have been done, the P/T shall be 1.5 x WP
21.12.3. Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of Temporary Pipework (Hoses)
• The inspection of hose end connections as above.
• The external protection cover for the hose shall be inspected for damage and action taken to
replace the hose if needed.
• The internal bore of the hose shall be checked for wear corrosion and erosion as prescribed by
the hose manufacturer.
• Annual pressure test to cold WP or the pressure prescribed by the manufacturer.
• As specified by the manufacturer, but not exceeding 5 years of non-destructive examination
(NDE) shall incorporate:
• Magnetic Particle Inspection (MPI) of pipework welds.
• MPI/LPI of castings, e.g. cast wing nuts.
21.12.4. Equipment is forbidden in operations
• 2” FIG 602 hammer unions and 2” FIG 1002 hammer unions. Ref. API RP54 clause 7.11.5
• Hammer unions flowing produced, energized fluids from the well at pressures greater than
• 10,000 psi.
• Pipework where the pipe body has a lower pressure rating than either of its end connections.
• The pressure de-rating of pipework from its original working pressure specification
• because of reduction in its wall thickness
• Back-welded threaded connections or fittings.

21.12.5. Duty and pressure rating chart

Size And Pressure Ratings
Light Duty
Nominal Iron Size Max Working Pressure (PSI)
2” 15,000
3” 7,500
4” 5,000
Medium Duty
2” 20,000
3” 15,000
4” 10,000
Heavy Duty
2” 20,000
3” 15,000
4” 15,000
Note:
• FSR Ribs and spines are rated for specific duty ratings. Ribs should NEVER be substituted for
Spines. Ribs and spines from different duty ratings should not be mixed.
• Medium Duty FSR System is rated for use on 4” treating iron up to 10,000 psi. In instances
where the product is required for 4” 1502 lines, a double wrapping technique may be used that
will provide an acceptable load rating for the flow line. Please contact Weir
21.12.6. Duty rating and color code chart
Color codes
Light Duty
SPM® FSR Ribs Yellow
SPM® FSR Spines White
Medium Duty
SPM® FSR Ribs Red
SPM® FSR Spines Blue
Heavy Duty
SPM® FSR Ribs Orange
SPM® FSR Spines Grey
Note: the color code could be changed as per OEM

21.12.7. Chemicals capability chart

Chemical FSRs
Acids See note
Alcohols OK
Strong Alkalis OK
Ethers OK
Hydro-Carbons OK
Ketones OK
Oils-Crude OK
Oils-Lubricating OK
Soaps/Seawater OK
Water/Seawater OK
Weak Alkalis OK
Note:
• Acid compatibility- hydrocarbon Acid (HCI) concentrations up to 36%are acceptable for up to 8
hours
• Hydrofluoric Acid-(HF) concentration up to 10%are acceptable for up to 8 Hours
21.12.8. Additional guidelines
• FSRs are intended to help contain high-pressure piping and flow line components in case of
rupture or excessive impulse during the pumping process. When flow lines fail, whether it is due
to excessive pressure, faulty connections, worn components, trauma to the piping connections,
or otherwise, the results can be devastating and catastrophic to both equipment and people.
The metal components that were previously subjected to up to 20,000 psi of internal pressure
are suddenly and instantly forced to relieve themselves of the stored energy.
• Safety Restraints generally do not require any special maintenance to keep them in service.
Even though they are water resistant, the components should NOT be used underwater or
submerged in water. If they are in an environment where they get wet, it is recommended that
they are wiped dry after each use with a clean, dry cloth.
• Temperature rating is “Minimum: -30˚ C / -22˚ F - Maximum: 100˚ C / 212˚ F’

Section C:
Offshore Safety Requirements
( Jack up rigs)
C1. Over water operations

C.1. Over water operations
1.1. Scope
The scope of over-water operations is vast and encompasses a variety of activities, including:
• Exploration drilling: Locating and evaluating potential hydrocarbon reservoirs.
• Development drilling: Creating wells to access and extract oil and gas.
• Workover operations: Maintaining and repairing existing wells to optimize production or
address technical issues.
• Decommissioning: Plugging and abandoning wells that are no longer productive.
1.2. Purpose
The primary purpose of over-water operations is to access and extract hydrocarbon resources from
offshore locations. This is essential for meeting global energy demands, as a significant portion of
oil and gas reserves are located beneath oceans and lakes. Over-water operations also contribute
to:
• Economic development: Generating revenue for governments and creating jobs in the oil and
gas industry.
• Technological advancements: Spurring innovation in drilling and production technologies to
overcome the challenges of offshore environments.
• Geopolitical stability: Securing reliable energy supplies for countries with limited onshore
resources.
1.3. Requirements
• Working over water will be controlled using the contractor Permit to Work (PTW) System (Refer
to Section B PTW procedure). The Rig Operator Drilling Supervisor will counter sign all over
water or PTW.
• When work is performed over water, the Rig contractor shall instruct all personnel in the proper
water entry and survival procedures to be used.
• While working over water an emergency means of escape from platforms shall be provided.
• IMO / SOLAS approved life preservers and buoyant work vests (personal flotation devices
(PFDs)) shall be readily available on an offshore rig or platform. They shall be used whenever
there is a risk of falling overboard, working above water, gangways or platforms with removed
handrails, etc.
• Oil-soaked or otherwise damaged personal flotation devices (PFDs) shall be removed from
service and destroyed.
• Approved PFDs shall be worn:
- When being transported by personnel basket between an offshore drilling rig or platform and
a crew boat.
- When performing work over water or from a work basket that is suspended over water.
- When moving either a blowout preventer or a diverter stack on or off the wellhead where the
suspended work platform on which personnel are working is over open water.
- When being lowered to the water in a davit-launched life raft, life boat, survival craft, rescue
craft or inspection boat.
- When being transported by helicopter over water.
• Employees wearing PFDs shall keep them snugly fitted and securely fastened.
• Decks of all rig platforms shall be kept clean of oil, grease, debris and free of all excess
equipment that poses a tripping or fire hazard.
• Equipment to be transported to or from offshore water locations shall be securely tied down
once the cargo has been loaded on a vessel.
• It shall be the responsibility of the person controlling a vessel to determine when it is safe or
unsafe to tie up or jack up on a well site.
• Fire drills, abandon rig drills, Hydrogen Sulphide (H2S) drills, and man overboard drills shall
be held by the Rig Operator as per EGPC Drills matrix. The Rig Operator shall brief all newly
arriving personnel on all emergency procedures.

C.1. Over water operations
• Working over water during adverse weather conditions shall be suspended when rescue
operations, if necessary cannot be conducted safely, i.e., Support Vessel unable to provide
rescue support or the rig cannot safely launch the Rescue Craft.
• Sufficient work area illumination shall be provided in the over water work and sea areas.
• Man-Overboard rescue plan shall be part of the over-the-side-work JSA.
• Each offshore rig shall have records of mooring line installation dates, certification, and
replacement program in addition to a monthly inspection process as minimum.

C2. Life Saving Equipment

(LSE) MODUs
2.1. Scope
Life Saving Equipment (LSE) MODU requirements outline the specific equipment, procedures,
and training necessary to ensure the safety of personnel working on Mobile Offshore Drilling Units
(MODUs) in the event of an emergency. These requirements are designed to:
• Minimize the risk of injury or death during emergencies.
• Facilitate rapid evacuation of personnel from the MODU.
• Provide adequate protection and support for personnel in the water after evacuation.
• Maintain operational functionality of LSE during emergencies.
These requirements apply to all drilling and workover contractors operating MODUs in various
offshore environments, including fixed and floating platforms, jack-up rigs, and drill ships.
2.2. Purpose
The primary purpose of LSE MODU requirements is to:
• Protect human life: Ensure the survival and rescue of personnel in case of accidents or
emergencies such as fires, explosions, structural failures, or collisions.
• Minimize downtime and financial losses: Rapid and effective evacuation minimizes disruption
to operations and potential damage to the MODU.
• Comply with regulations and international standards: LSE requirements adhere to national and
international regulations like SOLAS (Safety of Life at Sea) and IMO (International Maritime
Organization) guidelines.
2.3. Requirements
• There shall always be enough personal flotation devices (PFDs) aboard to provide 125%
coverage of persons on board at any time.
• The PFDs shall be maintained in good condition, U.S.C.G. or U.K.D.O.T. approved, and labeled
with the name of the rig.
• Spare PFDs shall be stored in marked containers throughout the rig.
• Each cabin shall be equipped with the proper number of PFDs stored on top of the lockers.
• PFDs shall be equipped with compliant (within the manufacturers’ expiration dates) salt water
activated lights, whistles and reflector tape (one for each bed in the room).
• Each offshore rig shall be equipped with at least ten (10) life buoys rings maintained in
satisfactory condition, and mounted so that they are easily removable from their brackets.
• At least one ring life buoy on each side of the offshore rig (total of two) shall have attached to
the ring a buoyant life line that is at least 1-1/2 times the distance from the deck of stowage to
the waterline at low tide and maximum air gap of 27.4 meters (90 feet), whichever is greater.
The end of the line must not be secured to the rig.
• Note: These life buoys may not have any other attachment, the throwing line must be attached
directly to the buoy, and the throwing line must be stored so as to unravel without knotting
when used.
• Not less than one half of the total number of lifebuoys shall be provided with lifebuoy self-
igniting lights, not less than two of these shall also be provided with lifebuoy self-activating
smoke signals and be capable of quick release. Lifebuoys with lights and those with lights and
smoke signals shall be equally distributed on both sides of the MODU and shall not be the
lifebuoys provided with lifelines.
• All ring life buoys shall be in their proper location according to the rigs approved fire control
and lifesaving equipment plan, and each shall be marked with the rig name and port of registry.
• Escape ladders with OEM protective covers shall be provided and maintained either side of the
MODU on the main deck. Escape ladders shall be attached to the MODU on no less than two
(2) certified anchor points each with a minimum SWL of 1000 kg or the manufacturer SWL of the
ladder. Appropriate access platforms shall be provided for each escape ladder.
• There shall be a minimum of 200% coverage of life rafts aboard in addition Inflatable life

rafts and their containers shall be intact and not damaged. The rubber seals shall be free of
breakage or damage, and the container bands intact.
• Operating instructions shall be posted at each life raft in English and Arabic languages.
• Annual certification by an OEM’s authorized third party and servicing inspections shall be
required for all life rafts and containers.
• All life raft containers shall be kept clean and free of oil and gas, and shall be clearly marked
with “inflatable life raft,” date of next servicing and capacity.
• Access to each raft shall be free of obstructions that would interfere with launching.
• The cradle for each raft shall be of proper size and the release mechanism kept free of rust and
corrosion.
• Inflatable life raft containers shall be stored with the top straight up so the drain holes on the
bottom are properly positioned for drainage of any moisture.
• Temporary lashing bands used in transporting the inflatable life raft containers shall be
removed before stowage on the rig.
• The Rig Operator shall ensure that the length of the painter line for each manually launched
inflatable life raft is greater than the distance from the deck of stowage to the waterline at low
tide and maximum air gap. The Rig Operator shall ensure all life rafts are stowed within the
manufacturer’s maximum certified storage height.
• The exit point for the painter line shall be pointed aft of the rig when possible to protect it from
the on-coming water during towing.
• The painter line for each inflatable life raft which is not davit-launched shall have its external
end secured to a strong point on the platform.
• Each life raft station shall be clearly marked to conform to the Station Bill.
• Emergency escape routes leading to the lifeboat and life raft stations shall be conspicuously
marked. Pathways shall be painted throughout the MODU, maintained and kept clear at all
times. A standard escape route/pathway will have a minimum width of 600 mm (24 inches) in
accordance with the applicable SOLAS Regulations.
• Station Bills shall be kept current and posted in conspicuous locations throughout the MODU.
• All MODU Station Bills shall define the Emergency Response Actions to be taken in the
following specific incident scenarios:
- Rig Abandonment.
- Combustible Gas Release.
- Fire.
- H2S Release.
- MODU Rescue Boat Operations
Note: Each MODU shall develop a compliant Station Bill which is aligned with the required Fire
Attack Plans, H2S Contingency Plan, and Safety Briefing. The Station Bill shall specifically define the
required emergency response actions to be taken upon the activation of any has release Warning
High alarm (visual). Crucial MODU Emergency Response Assignments such as the closure of Main
Deck Fire Dampers and Hatches, Activation of Fixed Fire Extinguishing Systems, along with the
composition of the Fire Fighting and Rescue Teams shall also be clearly defined.
• The launching equipment for davit-launched inflatable life rafts must include:
- A means to hold it securely while personnel enter the life raft.
- A means to rapidly retrieve the falls if the station has more than one life raft.
- The capability of being operated from either the life raft or from the rig.
- Winch controls located where the operator can observe the life raft launching.
- A system whereby a loaded life raft does not have to be lifted before it is lowered.
• Not more than two davit-launched life rafts may be launched from the same launching
equipment.
Note: All personnel aboard will receive sufficient training as to allow them to efficiently and safely
load and launch a davit launched life raft.

• Survival craft and life rafts shall be manufactured to a recognized international standard.
• The access route and launching platform from which survival craft are to be launched shall be
kept clear of any obstruction that interferes with the immediate launching of the craft.
• An embarkation ladder extending, in a single length, from the deck to the waterline in the
lightest seagoing condition under unfavorable conditions of trim of up to 10 and a list of up
to 20 either way shall be provided at each embarkation station or at every two (2) adjacent
embarkation stations for survival craft launched down the side of the MODU. The operator may
permit such ladders to be replaced by approved devices to afford access to the survival craft
when waterborne, provided that there shall be at least one embarkation ladder on each side
of the ship. Other means of embarkation enabling descent to the water in a controlled manner
may be permitted for the life rafts.
• Emergency and dead ship lighting shall be provided at each embarkation ladder, life raft, life
boat, rescue boat and designated muster stations. Emergency and dead ship lighting shall also
be provided for overboard launching zones for a minimum of 30-minutes of full operation and
shall be maintained in good working order.
• Each survival craft shall be marked with the number of the craft, name of the rig, port of registry,
and the number of persons allowed in the craft. This marking shall be with letters at least 7.6
centimeters (3 inches) high and in a color that contrasts to the background color of the craft
(international orange). Davit release mechanisms are to be clearly labeled in a manner to
prevent premature release.
• Davit release mechanisms shall be clearly labeled in a manner to prevent premature release.
• The watertight doors of all survival craft shall seal properly to maintain watertight integrity.
• Spare life preservers shall be stored in a storage box outside both lifeboats.
• A compass shall be mounted in the craft where it will be readily visible to the operator. It shall
be maintained in good working order.
• The gear shift and throttle control shall always be kept in the neutral position until made ready
for starting the engines.
• The salt water inlet valve and fuel shut-off valve shall always be in the open position.
• The fuel tank shall be kept full. Lifeboat and rescue boat diesel fuel shall be changed out
annually and a log maintained.
• All survival craft shall be checked weekly and recorded in a log book by a qualified mechanic to
ensure the following:
- Compressed air tanks are full.
- Drain plug is in place.
- Battery and battery connections are in good condition.
- Belts and hoses are in good condition.
- Transmission and hydraulic fluid, and oil levels are in the full range of the dipstick.
• Abandon Ship and Rescue Boat Drills shall be conducted in accordance with EGPC drills Matrix.
• All survival craft engines shall be started weekly and run for no longer than five minutes (or
until the engine becomes warm) if the craft is not placed in the water.
• All emergency supplies required in the survival craft shall be visually inspected weekly to
ensure that they are still safely stored in the craft.
• Emergency food rations and drinking water in each survival craft shall be replaced prior to their
expiration date. They shall be replaced sooner if the vacuum seal of the container is lost. Signal
flares shall be replaced prior to their expiration date.
• The complete launching system for all survival craft shall be visually inspected weekly by a
qualified mechanic to ensure that the hand stop, wire rope, U-clamps, motor and motor starter,
supports, sheaves and blocks, falls, release pins, and limit switches are in good order.
• When any survival craft is launched in the water during boat drills, the sprinkler system shall be
checked to ensure that it works properly.
• A survival craft operator and alternate operator shall be assigned to each craft. Both shall be
trained in the operation of the survival craft. As a minimum, one of the assigned operators will
be capable of completing running repairs on the survival craft.

• One McMurdo Marine Model RT9-3 or equivalent shall be available at each lifeboat.
• Class Society five (5) year load test certificates shall be obtained for all lifeboat on-load
release mechanisms winches and davits, this information will be entered into the MODU lifting
equipment registry.
• Lifeboats shall have a compliant cascade system installed complete with manifolds to ensure
sufficient air is available under demand for the total capacity the lifeboat is certified to carry.
Cascade plug in points shall be available for the maximum allowable capacity of the lifeboat.
Air shall be supplied from the MODU cascade system via a breakaway airline connection.
• Each lifeboat shall have certified anchor points used for connecting safety slings during lifeboat
inspections and maintenance rated the lifeboats OEM’s certified minimum SWL.
• Lifeboat and life raft on-load release mechanisms shall be certified by an OEM authorized third
party service provider, on-load release mechanisms shall be inspected and function tested per
IMO/Class requirements.
• All designated muster stations shall have a minimum of 0.35 m2 (square meters) per person of
unobstructed assembly area. The calculation of the required assembly area shall exclude any
obstructions, defined access/escape paths, lifejacket containers or doorway openings.
• Muster areas shall have clearly marked assembly indications on the deck for each person
assigned to the muster station.
• Cascade breathing manifolds shall be suitably positioned to minimize the potential for any
obstructions of access/escape paths. Hose lengths at muster areas shall be of adequate length
and shall not allow obstructions to the defined exit/emergency paths.
• Designated muster areas shall be arranged appropriately to allow for a clear access path to the
lifeboats embarkation area without obstructing the movement of assembled personnel.
• Muster Area personnel assignments shall be defined based upon calculated space available.
• Each rig shall have a Class approved designated rescue boat. The rescue boat shall comply
with all applicable SOLAS Regulations and maintain a valid safety certificate. All designated
members of the rescue boat crew shall have specific training and operations experience with
the rescue boat.
• Offshore drilling contractors shall ensure that all survival craft comply with MODU code
requirements.
Note:
- Falls, where used, should be long enough for the survival craft to reach the water with the
unit under unfavorable conditions, such as maximum air-gap, lightest transit or operational
condition or any damaged condition
- All MODUs shall develop and implement an OEM Compliant LSE maintenance and inspection
process to ensure all LSEs are diligently maintained and readily operable.

C3. Helicopter Operations

C.3 Helicopter Operations
3.1. Scope:
Helicopter operations play a crucial role in the offshore oil and gas industry, facilitating
transportation of personnel and equipment to and from Mobile Offshore Drilling Units (MODUs)
located in remote or challenging marine environments. The Helicopter Operations Procedure (HOP)
outlines the specific protocols, equipment, and training necessary to manage these operations
safely and efficiently.
3.2. Purpose:
The primary purpose of the HOP is to:
• Ensure the safe and efficient transport of personnel and equipment between shore bases,
helicopters, and MODUs under various weather and sea conditions.
• Minimize the risk of accidents or fatalities during helicopter operations.
• Maximize operational uptime and efficiency by optimizing helicopter movement.
• Comply with national and international regulations governing safe helicopter operations in
offshore environments.
3.3. Definitions
3.3.1. Moving helidecks
A helideck mounted on a floating unit such as a Vessel, Floating Production Unit, Semi-
Submersible Rig, floating Jack up Rig, and other helidecks shall be considered to be an unstable/
moving landing area if the Pitch or roll exceed ± 3º degree.
3.3.2. Pitch and Roll (P/R)

Pitch and Roll angels relative to absolute horizon. The roll axes is parallel with the helideck
heading.
3.3.3. Helideck Inclination (Inc.)

The angle between the absolute horizon and the plane of the helideck.
3.3.4. Heave Amplitude (HA)

The vertical movement of the helideck.
3.4. Helideck Organization

Rig contractor shall comply with Rig Operator Vessel Helideck and Operations Requirements
and
Latest ECAR-138 (Egyptian Civil Aviation Authority- Part 138) and prepare a rig specific Helicopter
operation procedure.
Each Rig shall maintain a specific Helicopter operation procedure and it shall be available in hard
copy and signed by top management.
3.4.1. Personnel
Personnel engaged in the helicopter operations include:
• HLO (Helicopter Landing Officer)
• Radio operator
• 2 X Helideck Assistants (HDA)
• Minimum 1 cargo handling person

3.5.1. HLO’s - HDA’s Responsibilities
Each contractor shall have a designated person(s) / Crane Operators who has received HLO/
BOSIET training.
The designated person(s) / Crane Operators are formally trained and certified as HLO. It is the duty
of the HLO to supervise and run day to day operations on the helideck during helicopter visits.
3.5.1.1. 30 Minutes before Helicopter Landing
• Receive radio operator’s advice on all details needed and incoming load.
• Ensure Helideck is free of obstruction and loose articles including gas or flammable substances.
• Check availability of fire/crash equipment.
3.5.1.2. 10 Minutes before Helicopter Landing
• Communicate to crane operators to stop all crane operations.
• Remove Traffic cone from Heli-deck center.
• Deploy fire equipment, unlock crash boxes, and prepare fire team.
• Restrict access to Helideck.
• Ensure that stand-by boat supply vessel has been informed.
• H E R T M to be alerted and on stand-by.
3.5.1.3. Immediately Before Landing
• Confirm all crane operations have ceased.
• Deploy fire/crash team.
• Clear Helideck of all personnel.
3.5.1.4. After Landing - Rotors Running Turn Round
• Wait until rotating anti-collision lights are switched off / Pilot Signals.
• Disembark passengers, freight, and clear Helideck.
• Hand manifests to the pilot
• Load outgoing freight and passengers.
• Clear Helideck of all personnel except line crew.
• Remain clear of rotor sweep in sight of pilot.
• Check closure of doors and security of hatches.
• Clear Helideck prior to take off.
• Advise radio operator that Helideck is clear for takeoff, and give all-clear signal to pilot.
Note: HLO must be visible to the pilot at all times. He should not be handling cargo or
passengers.
3.5.1.5. After Landing - Shutting Down
• Wait until rotors are stopped.
• Disembark passengers and freight.
Note: Tie-down straps are provided for restraining the helicopter when shut down on the rig. These
straps are included in the permanent equipment on every helicopter. The flight crew will advise on
the tie-down procedures (If exist).
3.5.1.6. Helicopter Departures
• The pilot shall be given a copy of the manifest for outgoing passengers/cargo from HLO. Hand
manifest to pilot.
• Passengers, baggage and cargo shall be loaded per the directions of the pilot.
• Passengers shall follow the directions of the pilot and HLO during boarding and be mindful to
keep clear of the tail rotor and the main rotors at the front of the helicopter.

• Passengers shall wear life jackets and ear protection, with seat belts fastened.
• The HLO shall check the closure of doors and the security of hatches.
• Clear Helideck of all personnel except deck crew.
• Watch pilot’s signals, be ready for rotor start, and ensure all personnel are clear of rotor sweep
area.
• Helideck crew should make sure that all passengers are wearing life jackets in the right way.
• HLO shall check for fuel and oil leaks, shall clear the Helideck prior to take off and give the all
clear signal to pilot for takeoff.
• Advise Radio Operator Helideck clear for take-off.
• Put back the Traffic cone after departure.
3.5.2. Radio Operator
• The radio operator is in charge of communications with the helicopter until immediately before
landing and after the helicopter has taken off safely.
• Radio operator receives information about:
- Expected time of arrival
- Helicopter type
- No. of passengers
- Request for weather information (from the pilot)
- advises the HLO when the Helideck crew must be ready for helicopter handling,
- Prepares a manifest including information on passengers, freight and luggage,
- Calculates the total weight and converts it to the weight unit used on the helicopter type
- Informs the helicopter pilot of situations, which may cause a risk such as cold flaring, fire,
manned cranes etc.
3.5.3. Pilot
The pilot is ultimately responsible for loading, unloading and weight distribution. The HLO follows
the standard loading instructions or the pilot’s instructions during such activities.
3.5.4. Other Personnel

HERTM and the cargo handling crew must follow the instructions given by the HLO.
3.6. Passenger Luggage Weight Limits and Labelling

Offshore passenger luggage should be according to the helicopter capacity/type (should not
exceed 13kg per individual) and should be contained in a properly secured, robust, soft-walled
hold.
3.7. Passenger-/Cargo Manifest

• Whenever passengers, luggage and/or cargo are transported by helicopter a passenger/cargo
manifest must be completed and accompany the helicopter.
• Manifest An official document stating the names of the passengers, their employers, the weight
of the passengers and their luggage, the weight of the cargo and the destination.
• When the passenger/cargo manifest has been completed, it is considered to be an official
document and therefore subject to inspection.
• The manifest shall contain the following information:
- The full name of the passenger
- Employer of each passenger
- The weight of each passenger
- The weight of the each passenger’s luggage
- Weight of cargo/luggage
- Destination
• Any statement about weight must be the actual weight of passengers, cargo and luggage that

are weighed individually. The weight must not be estimated.

• When sending cargo from an installation to shore the HLO is responsible for checking the
manifest and ensuring that it accompanies the transmittal.
• The HLO is responsible for checking that the number of passengers on board complies with the
passenger manifest, and that the manifest is handed to the helicopter crew.
• The HLO should ensure that correct units of weight (e.g. lbs or kg) are used in accordance with
the helicopter operators’ requirements. Incorrect use of units of weight can have a major impact
on the safety of an aircraft.
• The correct manifesting by the HLO of passengers, luggage and freight is essential to enable
the flight crew to calculate the total weight accurately on the aircraft load sheet. Inaccurate
weights on the manifest can result in adverse aircraft performance and in center of gravity
limits being exceeded.
• Manifests should be prepared in a legible fashion and sufficient copies provided for retention of
records for every aircraft sector of the flight. They are computer generated.
3.8. Scales for Weighing Passenger & Luggage

Scales should be provided for weighing passenger & luggage. The scales weighing platform
should be large enough to handle packages securely without having to lift them off the ground more
than a few inches.
Scales should be supplied with an initial calibration certificate and manufacturer’s recommended
maintenance schedule. The scales should subsequently be calibrated annually.
3.8.1. Location
The weighing scales is located at the GYM at a location set aside for weighing, labelling and secure
stowage of luggage, ready for transport by helicopter.
3.8.2. Passenger / Luggage Weighing Procedures

Radio Operator (or delegate HSE Eng. /Barge Eng.) to take the weights for each passenger & his
luggage physically on the scale & put the data in the manifest
Radio Operator initiate the manifest on computer after getting the data for all passengers & their
luggage
HLO “Crane OP.” receive a copy of the manifest from the Radio operator & do a double check for
each passenger & his luggage.
After check & confirm the manifest; each passenger keep his bag at the Luggage keeping area.
All passenger to stay at rig designated waiting area waiting the helicopter landing
3.9. Dangerous Goods Requirements

HLO shall ensure that passengers do not carry prohibited items. All items that are intrinsically
dangerous (e.g. weapons, explosives, ammunition and prohibited substances) must be excluded
from carriage and No dangerous goods are allowed to be transported via helicopters.
3.10. Training
3.10.1. Radio Operator
GMDSS Training: Training required by the vessel’s flag state (PANAMA)

3.10.2. HLO
The HLO shall have completed Helicopter landing Officer (HLO) and Basic Offshore Safety
Induction and Emergency Training (BOSIET) course
3.10.3. Heli-Crash Team

The Heli-crash team as identified on the station bill shall have completed Basic Offshore Safety
Induction and Emergency Training (BOSIET)course
3.10.4. Other Personnel

A valid HUET (Helicopter under Water) Course for 4 years
3.11. Communication
All communication with the helicopter pilots must be in English / Arabic.
Communication with Helicopter by 2 ways
• Air VHF Radio.
• Marine VHF Radio.
3.12. Helideck Operations

3.12.1. Crane Operations
All cranes for which the boom intrudes in the approach, departure or Helideck spaces shall move
the boom from the area, shut down and cease to operate it for the duration of helicopter operations.
Exceptions to this policy shall be approved and supervised by the OIM/PIC.
3.12.2. Clear Landing Area

Before a helicopter lands or takes off, the Helideck must be clear of obstructions, including:
• Loose tools, machinery, debris or other articles.
• Oil, gas or other flammable substance.
• Large amounts of water.
• All personnel.
• Traffic cone.
• Safety nets around the landing area, are to be properly secured and in good condition.
3.12.3. Control People
No person other than those selected based on their training for safe helicopter operations should
be in the vicinity of the helicopter landing area. Access to the Helideck must be restricted.
3.12.4. Fire-fighting Equipment

The fire-fighting equipment for the Helideck must be manned by adequately trained personnel,
and one member of the crew must be dressed in the fireman’s suit.
3.12.5. Alert Stand-By Vessel

The standby vessel, if provided, will be informed that helicopter operations are going to take
place.
3.12.6. Helicopter on the Helideck

Rotors Turning Safety Control
• The HLO shall ensure that whenever a helicopter is on the Helideck with rotors turning, no
person shall, except in emergency, go on the Helideck. When cleared by pilot and HLO; all
personnel shall approach in front of the helicopter, within view of the pilot, and at a safe

distance from the exhausts and tail rotor.

• Helicopter’s approach/departure shall be monitored for any abnormalities and pilot is to be
warned if any are observed. Radio room to be manned all the time to provide constant radio
contact with the helicopter in addition to visual contact by HLO.
• Passengers shall remain seated with life jackets and wait to disembark until told to do so by the
pilot and HLO.
3.12.7. Helicopter Arrivals
Passengers shall collect their baggage unless HLO indicates otherwise, exit the helicopter directly
away from the side of the helicopter and then exit the heliport, or as directed, being mindful to keep
clear of the tail rotor and the main rotors at the front of the helicopter.
3.13. Passenger Information

3.13.1. General
• To ensure safety of passengers, all passengers unfamiliar with helicopter operations are to be
instructed in the proper procedures before boarding, observe all standard regulations, and
know the emergency landing procedures. These procedures must give consideration to the type
of aircraft, the lifesaving equipment provided, the environment in which the unit is operating,
and any other relevant factors.
• Passengers should be present and ready to board at the scheduled departure time.
• Personnel will neither approach nor leave the helicopter until either the rotor blades have
stopped turning, or a signal has been given by the pilot and HLO indicating that boarding or
disembarking may be done safely.
• Always approach and leave a helicopter towards the front of the aircraft, in the pilot’s normal
field of vision, staying clear of the rotor blades.
• Maintain a secure grip on hand luggage and clothing, to prevent them being draw into the rotor
blades
• Passengers are to follow the instructions of the pilot and the HLO at all times.
• No smoking is allowed with any aspect of helicopter flights or Helideck operations.
3.13.2. Pre-Flight
Helicopter briefing shall be given to all passengers before leaving by Helicopter
3.13.2.1. Life Jackets
A briefing on the correct way to wear the lifejacket during flight and how to prepare it for use in an
emergency should be given. The life jacket instructions are carried on the aircraft.
3.13.2.2. Safety Debrief
The pilot shall brief passengers on positions of safety equipment, emergency exits and emergency
procedures. It is the responsibility of passengers to ensure that they fully understand what they are
told.
3.13.2.3. EN Route
During flight, passengers are instructed to follow the procedure laid down by the helicopter
Operator and in particular to note the following:
• Seat Belts: Seat belt must remain fastened at all times.
• No Smoking: The “No Smoking” sign must be observed.

3.13.3. After Landing

• Passengers must remain seated after landing and only release their belts when instructed to do
so.
• When cleared to leave the helicopter, avoid the tail area and any helideck hazards such as the
landing net.
3.13.4. Arrival to / Departure from MODU
• Arrival to MODU
• All people has to sign in Arrival Log
• All visitors & who did not arrive on board for more than 3 months need to attend rig safety
orientation by HSE Engineer onboard
• Departure from MODU:
- All people leaving has to sign in Departure Log
- All people has to attend the Helicopter Brief Orientation , 30 min. before leaving
3.14. Helicopter Emergency Procedures

It is vital that the HLO and his crew are aware of the established procedures to deal with any
emergency, which may arise.
3.14.4.1. Examples of Emergencies
• Bad weather condition which causes emergency landing.
• Engine fire on start up.
• Crash on helideck.
• Ditching near rig.
• Rig on fire.
• Obstructed helideck.
• Partial evacuation - men in water.
• Planned evacuation.
3.15. Emergency Equipment

The Emergency Equipment shall be stored in immediate vicinity of the helicopter landing area.
They shall be stored in a suitable container to keep them in good condition for immediate use
It is part of the HLO’s responsibility to regularly check that this equipment is all available and in
good condition as per ECAR-138 (Egyptian Civil Aviation Authority- Part 138).
3.15.1. Fire-Fighting Equipment

It is required by Regulations and Company policy that fire-fighting equipment is available at the
helideck, ready for any emergency, and protected from damage.
The HLO is responsible for ensuring, before any helicopter lands or takes off, that the fire-fighting
equipment is manned by adequately trained personnel, and that one person is wearing fireman’s
protective outfit including gloves, boots, a facemask or hood and a helmet.
3.15.1.1. ECAR-137 Helideck Foam Fire Fighting System
An ECAR-137 compliant Helideck Foam Fire Fighting System composed of a Foam Monitor System
supplied by a compliant Foam Bladder Tank Skid.
3.15.1.2. Helideck Foam Monitor System
The Helideck Foam Monitor System equipped with Foam Monitor Nozzle; Inlet Pressure to each of
Three (3) simultaneously operating Foam Monitor Stations
Three (3) Helideck Foam Monitor Stations shall be located on separate and distinct Foam Monitor

Platforms no greater than 50” below the helideck surface with direct stairway access to the helideck
surface. A direct stairway access/escape path shall also be provided under the helideck to each foam
monitor station platform.
3.15.1.3. Helideck Foam Hose Reel Stations
In addition to Helideck Foam Monitor System, two (2) Foam Hose Reel Stations shall be provided.
These Foam Hose Reels shall be place in OEM Protective Cabinets and located 180o apart at the
Foam Monitor Station Platforms or Helideck Access/Escape Stairway Platforms.
3.15.1.4. Helideck Foam Fire Fighting System EFWP Start Switches
Helideck Foam Fire Fighting System EFWP Start Switches shall be provided at each Foam Monitor
Station and/or at the HLO Staging Position located outside the potential Helideck crash fragment
zone
3.15.1.5. Lighting Equipment
• The chromaticity and luminance of colors of luminescent panels should conform to ECAR Part
139, Appendix 1, 3.4.
3.15.1.6. Windsock
4 wind socks shall be installed on the highest locations to be visible from all directions, give true
wind direction. 1 wind sock illuminated for night operations.
3.16. Rig Floating Procedures

• On floating Installation in accordance with Egyptian Civil Aviation Authority (E-CAR) 137; roll,
pitch, heave and heading data is passed to the helicopter operator/flight crews prior to and
when requested during helicopter operations.
• Prior to landing on floating Installation, the Pilot must be advised of any change in roll, pitch,
heave or heading
• Sea state and pitch, roll and heave measuring instruments will be readout in the rig control
room
• Barge Engineer is responsible of passing this information to the radio operator prior to
Helicopter landing for any Emergency reason during Rig floatation.

C4. Personnel Transfer

between Boats (PT) and MODUs
C.4. Personnel Transfer between Boats (PT) and MODUs
4.1. Scope:
Personnel Transfer (PT) between boats and Mobile Offshore Drilling Units (MODUs) is a critical
activity in the offshore oil and gas industry. It involves the safe and efficient movement of personnel
between various vessels in challenging marine environments. The PT procedure outlines the specific
protocols, equipment, and training needed to manage this transfer within acceptable levels of risk.
4.2. Purpose:
The primary purpose of the PT procedure is to:
• Ensure the safe and efficient transfer of personnel between boats and MODUs under various
weather and sea conditions.
• Minimize the risk of injuries or fatalities during the transfer process.
• Promote efficient operations by minimizing downtime associated with personnel movement.
• Comply with national and international regulations governing safe transfer practices.
4.3. Procedure:
• Personnel transfers will be controlled by the use of an adequate risk assessment and the
contractors Permit to Work (PTW) system.
• The maximum wind conditions at which the transfer of passengers offshore can take place
shall not exceed a consistent wind speed of 25 knots. For every transfer, the Vessel Master
and Crane Operator must use their professional judgement to determine as to whether the
operation can be successfully completed even if the conditions of are within the guidelines
outlined in this instruction.
• Personnel shall be transferred by basket to or from a rig only when visibility is good.
• The lifting and lowering of personnel in a personnel basket shall be over open water whenever
reasonably practicable.
• A safety line shall be used on each personnel basket. The crane hook shall be equipped with a
safety latch.
• Each personnel basket used for transferring personnel by crane between an offshore rig and
crew boat shall:
- Have current lifting gear certification.
- Be in good condition.
- Provided with an adequate number of approved life preservers or buoyant work vests.
- It shall be stored and covered when not being used.
- The Crane Operator must hold an approved License with an approved third party competency
assessment for the specific type and model crane or home country License indicating that he
has been tested and passed, to handle man baskets.
- The offshore crane operator shall not be required or permitted to transfer more than four (4)
persons by personnel basket each crane trip.
- When employees are transported by personnel basket, they shall wear approved life
preservers or buoyant work vests. They shall stand on the outer rim of the basket facing
inward.
- Only light hand luggage shall be permitted inside the personnel basket when the basket is
occupied by personnel.
- Rig supplies shall not be transported by personnel basket at any time.
- Personnel transfers at night will only take place after an adequate risk assessment has been
completed and approved by the OIM.
Note: Ensure adequate lighting is available for safe operations.

C5. Rig Move Procedures

5.1. Scope
The offshore rig move procedure outlines the safe and efficient transportation of a drilling or
workover rig between different well locations or ports. This crucial process involves meticulous
planning, coordination, and execution to ensure the timely and cost-effective movement of valuable
equipment while minimizing risks to personnel and the environment.
5.2. Purpose
The purpose of this manual is to provide specific instructions to the OIM during a rig move. It also
provides general guidelines for the conduct of marine operations.
5.3. Definitions and Abbreviations

5.3.1. Approval
Statement or signature from an authorized person that a product or service complies with
specified requirements or that a defined series of planned actions may be initiated. (Hard copy,
digital or soft copy)
5.3.2. Bathymetric Survey

To determine the water depth at the installation site and to ensure a safe navigable approach to
the site.
5.3.3. Certificate of Approval of an Operating Location (COA)

The document which verifies that a specific Offshore Unit can be safely installed on a specified
location and be safely operated within the operating envelope applicable to the unit and the
planned operations. The COA will be issued by a Warranty Surveyor Office approved by the Leading
Underwriters and the Chairman of the drilling contractor’s company.
5.3.4. Cone Penetration Test (CPT)

To obtain soil resistance data to enable the prediction of leg penetration.
5.3.5. Grab Samples / Shallow Coring Survey

To confirm the composition of seabed sediments, and provide information on scour potential.
5.3.6. Installation of an Offshore Unit

The act of bringing an offshore unit onto a new location. For a unit requiring bottom contact
‘Installation’ include placement of the structure/anchors and the load tests required to verify the
soil’s capability to withstand the maximum forces induced.
5.3.7. Operation Plan

The Operation Specific Plan issued by the Marine Superintendent and included in the Towmaster’s
Instruction Letter. Information contained in the Operation Plan may be acknowledged by the
Operator prior to commencement of the operation.
5.3.8. Shallow Seismic

To identify and map possible gas accumulations and to obtain information about the configuration
of the soil unit within the foundation zone.
5.3.9. Side Scan Sonar

To detect any objects or obstructions and to map the seabed in order to investigate its topography,
variations in sediment cover and any bed forms.

5.3.10. Soil Bore (Coring)

To provide geotechnical and lithological data to calibrate information from the Shallow Seismic
Survey.
5.3.11. Tow Bridle

Main towing arrangement used in connection with the lead tug of the tow.
5.3.12. Warranty Surveyor

A company approved by the underwriters and which has been nominated and approved by the
Chairman to issue the COA for installation of the offshore unit and issue verification documents
(Towing Certificate, Tie down Certificate, etc.) on the accomplishment of intermediate stages of the
operation.
5.3.13. Bathymetry Data

Data to determine water depth at the installation site and to ensure safe navigable approach to
the installation site.
5.3.14. Grab Hazard Seismic Data

Data required to map and identify possible gas accumulations within the top whole zone.
5.3.15. Gas Samples / Shallow Coring Data

Samples to verify the composition of the seabed sediments and to support scour-potential
evaluations.
5.3.16. Installation of an Offshore Unit

The act of bringing an offshore unit onto a new location. For a unit requiring bottom contact
“Installation” include placement of the structure /anchors and the load tests required to verify the
soil’s capability to withstand the maximum force induced.
5.3.17. Magnetometer
Instrument used to define the position of cables, pipelines and buried wrecks in the area
surveyed.
The method is only used where obstructions are likely to be encountered.
5.3.18. Seabed Inspection

Inspection to confirm the absence of obstructions at locations and investigate, in detail, locations
previously occupied by drilling units.
5.3.19. Shallow Seismic Data

Identifying and mapping the distribution of soil types, variations in soil layer thickness, and
shallow faulting within the foundation zone. The determination of soil stratigraphy requires
correlation with soil boring data within the surveyed area. Quantitative and qualitative assessment
of foundation behavior cannot be performed based on shallow seismic data only.
5.3.20. Side Scan Sonar Data

Information to detect and map any objects or obstructions on the seabed and variations in seabed
sediment cover and to investigate in detail seabed topography and bedforms.
5.3.21. Swathe Bathymetry Techniques

A technique developed to conduct bathymetry survey, by use of a multi-beam echo sounder.

5.3.22. Warranty Surveyor

A company approved by the underwriters and which has been approved by the Chief Executive
Officer.
5.4. Responsibility
5.4.1. Personal in charge (PIC)
Is Responsible for:
• All changes in the load distribution - such as loading of casing or other tubulars, loading of bulk
or sack material like barite, cement or clay, or shifting between tanks of water and/or fuel - are
subject to the Towmaster’s approval.
• Assurance The unit is in a sea-worthy condition
• Assurance All essential parts of the unit and equipment necessary for the safe operation are in
satisfactory condition
5.4.2. Towmaster
is Responsible for:
• The navigation, operation, management, care and safety of the unit, and the safety and well-
being of all personnel on board.
• operating envelope of the unit, and its personnel capacity, equipment, anchor handling, ballast
arrangements, jacking performance, towing capabilities, safety and survival equipment and
other essential characteristics of the unit
• Assurance Fuel and water, spare parts, safety equipment, provision, stores needed for the
voyage are available and on board.
• Ensure that the stipulated crew and other personnel required for the operation are available on
board.
• Ensure that the interests of the Owner, the Operator as well as the various
• Government Authorities that have a legal or justified interest are attended to.
• Approval Any crane operation either the unit is afloat or in a transit condition
• The Work Permit System implemented on the unit must be in force
• Report to the rig contractor’s , on a daily basis using Marine forms and Drilling morning report
form.
• In the capacity of the Person in Charge, the Towmaster holds the highest authority on board
from the time the unit is signed over to him and until he signs the unit over to another
authorized Person in Charge.
Note: A Towmaster participating in a rig move as Marine Advisor is not taking command, but will
act in an advisory position (pilot function) to the Person in Charge who will remain fully in charge
and responsible for all operations including the marine part.
5.4.3. Marine Superintendent

• Shall ensure that the requirements of this procedure are complied with.
• Responsible for maintaining this procedure.
5.5. Procedure
The general procedures for going off location are influenced by several factors and require widely
differing approaches, which cannot be covered in the Operation Manual for the Mobile Offshore
Unit.
Upon completion of the preparation for the rig move and after having taken command it is part
of the responsibility of the Towmaster to advise the relevant authorities and/or other involved
parties about the intended rig move. The requirements that pertain to the area of operation can be

extensive and it is recommended to coordinate the messages that need to be transmitted with both
the local shore base and the Operator’s representative.
The confirmation that attending vessels are available and prepared and ready to commence the rig
move must be ensured. The acceptance by the Warranty Surveyor, confirmed through a Certificate of
Approval in connection with extended field moves or ocean tow/transport, is requested.
Any delays, caused by reasons which cannot be considered part of the moving off location
procedure or which could give reason for dispute in relation to the contract or part of the contract,
e.g. applicable rates, should be duly noted and reported either as part of the rig move report or if
deemed necessary in separate documentation.
In case of changing of command from Person in Charge to another the following shall be
applied:
• Recording of change in the log book or in the IADC log. It must state date and time of the
change and signatures.
• Prior to taking command, the Towmaster should make a close inspection of the unit, preferable
together with the attending Warranty Surveyor (when applicable)
• Ensure that securing and preparation for the rig move have been completed in accordance with
guidelines contained in the Operation Manual or other instructions issued.
• Checklists covering the various sections of the unit should be completed and submitted to the
Towmaster with the signature of the responsible person for each section.
• Towmaster should accept command when the inspection clearly reveals no serious deficiencies
in the preparation and securing
- Only when the inspection clearly reveals no serious deficiencies in the preparation and
securing should the Towmaster accept command.
Note: Deviation from this general guideline under special conditions or circumstances will be given
in form of a letter of instruction from an authorized person from the rig contractor, or the Towmaster
has to prepare such documentation, explaining what caused the deviation from the guidelines and
obtain approval from the Chief Executive Officer (CEO).
It must always be ensured that change of command only takes place between persons who are
holding certificate of competency to take charge either by Government Authority and/or the legal
representative for the owner.
5.5.1. Jacking Operation

Moving off location should only commence when the conditions are in compliance with the
limitations stated in the Operation Manual. However, jacking to a more convenient air gap awaiting
the final decision can be of advantage and is acceptable.
If the air gap is reduced below the minimum requirement for the area and time of the year, it must
be possible to resume safe air gap within the time limit dictated by the advance warning system for
excessive weather.
Units equipped with leg clamping systems or other means of securing the legs in a fixed position
can commence deactivating the system in preparation for jacking prior to completion of the
securing, if approved by the Towmaster and subject to no extreme weather being imminent or
anticipated for the rig move period.
The period between jacked and afloat condition of a jack-up should be kept at a minimum as this is
an especially vulnerable exposure position. Extra emphasis on the reducing of this period should be
made where/when marginal conditions exist.
Connecting of towing vessels should take place at a safe air gap meaning that the vessels are
given the optimum conditions for maneuvering without restrictions imposed by the hull.

Prior to the jack-up reaching the afloat condition (preferable when having reached a draft of 2-3
meters) the jacking should be discontinued and a thorough check of the water-tight closures should
be conducted. Only if/when the water-tight integrity has been confirmed, the final jacking and leg
retrieval should be attempted.
The time of confirmation of the water-tight integrity should be noted and reported in the rig move
report.
The retrieval of legs and spudcans can mostly be achieved by jacking the hull to a draft in excess of
the calculated displacement. The limitations allowed are stated in the unit’s Operation Manual.
Where soil conditions and/or deep penetration restricts the speedy retrieval or even keeps the
spudcans fixed, the high and low pressure jetting systems arranged on the spudcan should be
utilized.
When attempting to utilize the low pressure system (bottom of spudcan) it could be difficult to
obtain passage of water as the nozzles could be plugged by mud or clay. The application of high
pressure on the low pressure system to obtain passage should be attempted with utmost caution.
Any application of pressure exceeding the design criteria of the system will have to be approved by
the Marine Superintendent or in his absence the CEO.
The freeing of one leg at a time can be of advantage as the water flow can be maintained at
a higher capacity, however, caution should be exercised when this approach is used to avoid
unnecessary strain in the leg or leg guides resulting from a hull swinging out of level when one leg
breaks free.
Alternative methods to free legs and spudcans, should the use of excess draft and jetting fail,
could e.g. be:
• The use of drill pipe being lowered over the side and washed down beside the spudcan and
supplied from the mud pumps with seawater.
• The application of pull by towing vessels can also contribute to achieving the required force to
break free.
However, regardless of what alternative attempts are being used, extreme caution and
extraordinary care should be taken to instruct personnel and secure the work area in the best
possible way.
Guidance and information that could assist in evaluating the risk when using alternative
methods, should be tried obtained from any available source either locally or from the Marine
Superintendent.
When retrieving the legs it is recommended to have an observer placed at the leg well to give
immediate warning to the control room about any damages or hazards that can be seen. This could
be loose pipes, damaged bracings or debris caught in the leg structure.
Special attention should be paid to the accumulated soil on top of the spudcan when approaching
the final stage of retrieval. Especially when deep penetration has been achieved in clay, the
accumulated amount could become critical and result in damage to the hull.
Close observation of power consumption or pressure indicators at the control stations can likewise
indicate that a hazardous situation is under development.
Accumulated soil on top of the spudcan can be attempted washed off by utilizing the high pressure
system installed (top of spudcans) or by towing the legs in a partly lowered condition.
The Towmaster should advise the towing vessels of his decision and position of the leg/spudcan
enabling the required compen¬sation in safe navigation due to excessive draft, reduced speed or
drifting of the tow due to current.

Where stiff clay has accumulated on top of the spudcans it can be required to wash with water
hoses or even high pressure mud guns. The use of high pressure equipment requires extreme caution
and it is recommended to mount/secure the guns in fixed position at the leg wells.
5.5.2. Use of Towing Vessels

Assisting vessels should be utilized to the extent possible to keep the unit in position during the
leg retrieval. Where only one assisting vessel is available the most convenient position should be
chosen taking into account the wind, sea and current conditions during the period of time needed.
During very short field moves the assisting vessel(s) can be kept in their position at the starboard
or port quarter, however, if reconnection to assist at the bow is required, this should only be
attempted at a safe distance from any obstructions in the area.
During reconnection of the towing vessels the unit should be kept at a stable position without
making headway.
The towing vessels should not commence towing at full power before the legs have been fully
retrieved or the Towmaster has accepted this.
The time period for going off location is considered completed when the unit is at a safe distance
from location of departure and towing vessel(s) are connected ready for tow.
The time will be noted as commencement of tow (start of sea passage).
The time when sea passage is commenced should be logged on the attending vessels with the
clear understanding that the Master of the towing vessel or where more than one vessel is used
the Master of the lead tug, has taken the full responsibility of the navigation in accordance with the
applicable legislation.
This includes coordination of the towing vessel’s pull and change of heading and maneuvering in
compliance with the collision regulations.
5.5.2.1. Jack-ups
• The towing vessel should always be connected to the main bridle prior to attempting going on
the water and retrieving legs. The vessel should be ready in position to pull as soon as the unit
is afloat.
• When moving off platform installations the application of pull should be exercised prior to
coming afloat to ensure that neither drift nor setting to the stern takes place; this to avoid any
contact between the unit and the platform.
• When more than one vessel is used for towing, the most powerful or suitable vessel should be
placed on the main bridle and be the lead tug.
5.5.2.2. Use of Anchors
• The use of anchors for moving the unit off location is not considered a standard requirement
but can be advantageous where special circumstances warrant this or it is required by the
Operator.
• However, when moving slot type jack-up units off platforms the stabilizing effect of anchors can
assist the clearing of the slot by use of the stern anchors and the Towmaster should consider
this.
• The anchors must always be secured in their anchor racks during field moves. In connection
with extended field move extra securing with chain or wire together with quick release should
be added.
• For ocean tow and upon request by underwriters’ Warranty surveyor for extended field move in
adverse weather areas, the anchors should be removed from the racked position and stowed on
deck in a secured manner.

5.5.3. Transit
The period to be considered as towing period will be the time from completion of going off
location to commencement of the going on location time.
During the towing period the Towmaster has to ensure that:
• The unit is safely towed and navigated, and that the unit’s position, weather and sea conditions
are recorded at regular intervals.
• The loading condition and stability criteria are maintained throughout the voyage,
• Rotation of a watch is established keeping control with water-tight and weather-tight closures.
• Necessary drills and exercises to maintain the crew ready and prepared for contingencies are
held,
• Details and information concerning the voyage required by authorities or relevant entities are
submitted,
• Proper seamanship is exercised in every respect.
Further, it is the Towmaster’s responsibility to plan and utilize - together with the unit’s senior
personnel - that time available, which is not needed for maintenance or keeping watch and other
tow related duties, is utilized as effective as possible by the crew for maintenance and overhaul of
the unit and her equipment.
5.5.3.1. Watch Keeping
It is of utmost importance that radio communication is maintained on a 24 hour turnaround with
the attending vessels.
During the towing a sea watch and look-out, enabling an around the clock (24 hours’) control of
the safety and integrity of the unit, has to be maintained in all respects as dictated by regulations
and proper seamanship.
The duties of the sea watch will be to maintain the needed power supply and other necessities as
dictated by the circumstances, and be prepared to respond to any emergency that might develop.
The deck watch should maintain communication with the attending vessels and establish a routine
tour on the unit to check that the water-tight or weather-tight integrity is maintained, that securing is
maintained and that resecuring takes place should this be needed.
Observation of the navigational lights and signals are exhibited properly should also form part of
the tour.
The towing gear must, weather permitting, be inspected for chaffing or other damage that could
have an unwanted impact on the safety of the established towing connection.
The tour should as a minimum take place at an interval of 4 hours, however, where deemed
necessary by the Person in Charge a higher frequency should apply.
The observation for any fire or any potential danger of fire is to form an important part of the
roundation, and the route around the unit should be planned in such way that all risk areas are
visited.
The watch should, during the tour, carry a portable radio enabling an immediate contact with the
control room.
Note: In certain areas the increased activity by pirates warrants the use of extra personnel for the
sea watch. This should be included in the planning of the day-to-day work to ensure that excessive
working hours are avoided and alertness is at the optimum at the most crucial hours.
As part of the daily routines the Person in Charge or the substitute should keep record of all

occurrences or observations that could be of interest to the safety of the unit.

This includes but is not limited to:
• Daily control/sounding of all spaces/tanks below deck.
• Daily calculation of the water and fuel supplies.
• Daily updating on the stability to ensure that the unit remains within the limitation in
accordance with the approved criteria.
Any shortcomings observed should if at all possible be corrected as soon as the situation
permits.
Should supplies for any reason become insufficient during the voyage the Person in Charge must
consider alternatives like obtaining replenishment or introduce rationing
5.5.3.2. Weather Observations
The motion characteristics of the vessel should be observed closely and where/when weather
limitations are approached, correctional steps must be taken e.g. by altering the heading of the tow,
changing the pull exercised by the towing vessel(s) or installing changes in own propulsion.
Should the unit be unable to maintain the motions within the values derived from the critical
motion curves, steps should be taken to minimize the danger for the crew and damages to the
unit.
The influence on tows by weather and the dangers of adverse conditions are well-known and
documented, thus the observation of weather and especially the changes compared to predictions
can give trained observers early indication of potential oncoming risk.
The observation and proper recording of weather data can thus become an important issue and
should be given the proper attention.
As a minimum a record at an interval of 4 hours of the following should be maintained during rig
moves:
• Unit’s position and speed.
• Wind force
• Wind direction
• Sea height
• Sea period
• Swell height
• Swell period
• Barometric reading
• Temperature
• Cloud observation
The observation should be compared with the forecast received from the weather bureau and
where development is in contradiction to the forecast it is strongly recommended to take contact
with the bureau for verification or clarification.
Alternative weather forecasting sources can be sought to obtain further details.
Whenever adverse weather (gale warning) is forecasted for the expected route, the frequency for
observation should be increased.
When utilizing special routing forecast it is necessary to support the predictions by reporting the
actual weather experienced. It should thus be endeavored to arrange for one daily submittal (noon
observation) of the relevant observation to the routing service.
Subtropical or tropical cyclones: whenever a situation requires the rig move of a unit through areas
or during periods where these storms pose a risk, the special cyclone procedure adapted for the

area should be adhered to and arrangements with the routing forecast office should be reflecting
the increased risk.
5.5.3.3. Position Reporting
The mobile offshore units are equipped with one GPS device, permitting the Towmaster to
ascertain the position of the unit at all times. Otherwise the towing vessels or a position service
company on board can provide this service.
Supplemented with observations received from the towing vessel(s) and the visual observation
from the Mobile Offshore Unit, the Towmaster will be able to form an overall picture that should
enable a proper and safe manoeuvring between the locations.
The position of the tow should be recorded at a minimum interval of six (6) hours’ including
information about the means for observation e.g. radar-decca-celestial etc. or dead reckoning.
Where means exists on the Mobile Offshore Unit to track or control observations these should be
utilized to the extent possible and any deviations observed should be brought to the attention of the
Master(s) of the towing vessel(s), and clarification be obtained.
During extended field move or ocean tow the daily noon position together with other information,
as detailed on the report form in section 5 must be forwarded to the Chief Executive Officer.
Where Operators or local authorities require advice about the transit of Mobile Offshore Units and
have instructed the Towmaster either directly or through the local shore base, the Towmaster will
ensure that data as requested is submitted either directly or arranged through alternative routes.
Even if such local reporting is not requested it is advisable to report the intended move and
frequent position to the local authorities that could have an interest, e.g. the Rescue Centre, the
coastal radio stations or the harbour authorities, especially where the approach is restricted.
Other hazards like close passage of airfields or interference of heavily trafficked routes where
maneuverability is limited should have the attention of the Towmaster, and issuance of navigational
warning on radio frequencies can be advisable. (Preferably VHF transmittal).
5.5.3.4. Crane Operation
Crane operation during the rig move should be limited to an absolute minimum, and as a
general rule the cranes should remain in the support structure secured against vertical or lateral
movement.
Any use of the cranes during a rig move has to be approved on a case-to-case basis by the Person
in Charge (Towmaster).
Where the situation allows the use of a crane, this should be limited and the return to the support
structure should be executed immediately.
A crane should under no circumstances be left unattended if operated during a rig move.
For ocean tow and where required by underwriters’ Warranty surveyor’s recommendation for an
extended field move, the cranes have to be secured to avoid revolving.
When crane operation is required over the side during rig move, e.g. in case of personnel transfer
(injuries) or if equipment has to be transferred from attending vessels, the Mobile Offshore Unit has
to be stopped or kept into the wind without making headway.
Attention to the dynamic forces and maneuverability of the vessel will always have to be evaluated
carefully prior to attempting any crane operation while under tow.

5.5.4. Going on Location

Going on a location, after having completed the towing part of a rig move, will commence when
the Towmaster discontinues the sea passage or takes full charge of the maneuvering of the tow,
whichever comes first.
Before commencing the final approach, certain items have to be checked or verified e.g.:
• Positioning equipment installed and confirmed operational.
• Location marking confirmed placed in position as agreed for both location and obstructions.
• Auxiliary vessels and/or assisting tow/anchor handling vessel(s) in readiness.
• Platform(s) advised of approach operation and confirmation obtained that ‘hot’ platform(s)
is(are) ready to shut-in.
• Weather and sea conditions within limitation as stated in the Mobile Offshore Unit - Operation
Manual.
• Acceptance from the Operator is obtained for commencing location approach.
• The unit’s crew and other personnel are instructed about duties and advised about the
operation.
5.5.4.1. Conditions on Location
Whenever approaching the final location, whether an open sea location or a platform or other
installation, the Towmaster must have in his possession the Location Approval issued by the
underwriter appointed Warranty Surveyor.
The details contained in the same should be checked and verified and especially attention should
be given to any recommendations or limitation incorporated in the approval.
The Towmaster should have verification that a location survey has been conducted within the area
stipulated for stand-by and (jacking) operation. This survey should not be older than six months and
should state that no obstructions posing a hazard is within the surveyed area.
In case of vessels being observed within the area of final location or in the approach channel, radio
warning about the imminent approach shall be broadcasted with a request to clear the area.
If available, a stand-by or auxiliary vessel could be dispatched well in advance and clear the area
for the approach of the Mobile Offshore Unit.
Verification of tidal or other current should be requested if available.
When other vessels are engaged in authorized operation within the location area (safety zone)
or the anchor pattern directions and approach channel, the coordination necessary must take
place. The Operators Senior Representative should arrange for the coordination, and if deemed
appropriate, details have to be planned between the involved parties.
5.5.4.2. Approach
The approach of a wildcat location is to take place with the unit heading on a predetermined true
heading based on the prevailing or extreme weather conditions that are existing in the area.
When the operation of helicopters and supply vessels can be critical on the preferred heading and
a request is received from the Operator for alternative heading, due consideration should be given
and acceptance granted, however, only where the limitations of the units safety and stability are not
reached.
When the final approach of the location is to take place, the Towmaster has to ensure that the
required number of generators is aligned for sufficient power supply, and where available a spare
generator should be on stand-by for immediate use, should failure of any one generator occur.
The tow should reduce the speed in time for the re-positioning of the towing vessel and the

lowering of the legs.

The crew should be alerted and detailed instructions given to the supervising personnel.
Positioning equipment and jacking system should be checked and confirmed in satisfactory
operational condition.
The spudcans should always be kept sufficiently above the seabed during the final approach to
ensure a clearance of 5 meters above any seabed obstructions or to compensate for inaccuracy in
the water depth expected.
The final lowering of the legs and engagement of the seabed with the spudcans should preferably
be executed with the unit making no or only very limited headway. Where some headway is
unavoidable it should preferably be ensured that first bottom engagement is made by the two stern
legs, thus diverting the stress and impact on the single leg. This procedure is not applicable, when
approaching stern first towards a platform.
Even though the approach of a wildcat location generally does not require the greatest accuracy in
positioning, it might be necessary to use anchors for the final and accurate positioning.
Should this be required, the Towmaster has to plan this in details and take into account the
number and size of the vessels available and other conditions like e.g. wind/sea/ current and tidal
development.
Note:
- Approach of a wildcat location with one or even two vessels could necessitate the use of
stern anchors for stopping headway or drifting off location. In these situations it could be of
advantage to have an anchor ready and the anchor buoy trailing on the final approach.
- Positioning at platforms or reentry of subsea locations almost without exception require the
deployment of anchors for safe and accurate final positioning.
- This operation will have to be planned in details with the involved parties and the as is
situation has to be taken into account at the time of operation.
- However, as a general rule, the unit should be pinned or positioned temporarily in an area
approx. 100 x 200 m off the final location on a heading preferably close to the intended final
true heading.
- In this position the unit will run anchors, await the allowable weather conditions and where
required await shut-down/final approval for the approach.
Warning:
• Experience has shown that when a jack-up Mobile Offshore Unit is in transit from afloat to
bottom supported condition, extreme gyrating of the hull may occur, especially where low but
long swell exists.
• To avoid damage to both the unit and the installation from contact, the max.
• Safe distance with due consideration of drill floor reach of wells should be attempted.
• Where only marginal distance can be maintained it can be advantageous to have a towing
vessel connected and pulling away from the installation thus reducing the gyration. Also the
optimum jacking speed should be used to minimize the period of time where this phenomenon
is apparent.
5.5.4.3. Anchor Operations
The running of anchors should take place based on a pre-agreed anchor pattern which has the
acceptance of the Operator and the Warranty Surveyor.
The anchor pattern should, whenever possible, be laid in such a way that crossing of pipelines,
cables or other subsea obstructions are avoided. However, if necessary the maximum safe distance
from such obstructions must be obtained.
Close attention should be paid to the fact that the anchor handling vessel is maintaining sufficient

pull to ensure vertical clearing of pipelines and cables while running anchor moorings.
In case of interference with already established anchor pattern by another offshore unit, it must be
ensured that deployment of own anchors does not interfere with the operation of the other unit.
When running anchors it has to be ensured that the only equipment used is equipment which has
been checked to be in a good operational condition prior to use and the anchor wire or chain should
be examined for any damage like broken wire parts or loose/missing studs in chain etc.
If, due to the local circumstances, the exact positioning of anchors is of paramount importance,
it could be required to have the location marked by buoys or use highly accurate positioning
equipment.
The Towmaster should ensure that proper recording is kept on all anchor operations. The recording
should include position, distance and headings during deployment, thus making the search for
equipment lost on the seabed, whether intentional or by mishap, as easy as possible.
For the exact general pattern of deployment of anchors we refer to the Mobile Offshore Unit’s -
Operation Manual or special mooring analyses that have been made for the area of operation. Either
on request from the Operator or by other authorized parties
When jack-up Mobile Offshore Units have deployed their anchors, prior to going afloat for final
positioning, the winches have to be pulled to stalling capacity to ensure that proper holding force
has been obtained.
If this is not the case, resetting of the anchors should be attempted with slight alteration of
distance and/or heading. If this does not result in proper hold, the use of piggy-back anchors should
be contemplated.
As an alternative and where piggy-back anchors are difficult to obtain, the use of towing vessels
afloat or at anchor could, together with the unit’s own anchor but at reduced holding capacity, give
ample resistance to achieve a sufficient pull to move the unit safely onto location.
Note:
- Where pipelines and/or cables have been crossed with the anchors, dragging of anchors can
result in costly legal proceedings
- If damage could be claimed. It is thus of serious consequence if the Towmaster has failed to
keep an accurate record of the circumstances around the anchor handling etc.
Any observed discrepancy should be noted in a statement of fact and signed by the
Operator’s representative
5.5.4.4. Preloading
Mobile Offshore Units of the jack-up type have to be preloaded to the minimum required bottom
pressure as stated in the unit’s Operation Manual.
Preloading should only commence when the final acceptance of the location has been received by
the Operator’s representative.
This preload should be based on the year-round operation requirements, and only where special
circumstances have been accepted prior to going on the location, a deviation can be incorporated in
the location approval.
Preloading should take place with a minimum air gap, taking into account the tidal influences and
the actual and expected weather criteria during the preload period.
When an acceptable minimum air gap cannot be maintained, the Towmaster should evaluate
the overall situation and, if deemed necessary, abandon the operation and await improved
condi¬tions.

If, due to weather condition, a preload operation has to be abandoned, the unit should be jacked to
a height which ensures that the waves will not reach the bottom of the hull.
The unit should thus maintain alertness to any change in the weather and be prepared to adjust on
short or immediate notice to any development in the wave action.
The preload should preferably be taken on board in an uninter¬rupted sequence to avoid
thixotropic effect (building a crust). This effect has relevance in soil of clay or clay nature and should
be considered a high risk for punch-through.
Should the effect have been build up, it could be necessary to abandon the location or reposition
the unit on virgin soil.
Preload should be taken on board in a preplanned sequence ensuring equal distribution on
the legs. It is recommended to prepare a written instruction to the supervisor in charge for the
preloading with clear details as to tank order and pumping speed.
When the Mobile Offshore Unit is positioned close to a platform and where a potential risk of
punch-through/rapid penetration is apparent, extra care with the taking on of preload should be
exercised. In this context it could be advisable to give the forward leg a slight headload, thus forcing
the unit healing to the bow, should unequal or rapid penetration occur.
This could reduce the risk of contact between unit and platform and minimize possible damage.
Taking on preload, while the unit is afloat or only pinned lightly and consequently jacking with
partial or full preload, should be attempted only if the soil should require this procedure and the Unit
Operations Manual allows this way of preloading.
In special situations, e.g. when knowledge concerning soil gives reason to believe that rapid
penetration could be at high risk, it is acceptable, after consultation with the Warranty Surveyor, to
use the method.
Note:
- The “In Water Preload” method should never be attempted for time-saving reasons only.
- An alternative way of preloading in risky soil, is to preload one leg at a time. The dynamic
lateral forces are reduced during a situation with rapid penetration, provided the preload is
dumped before the next leg is commenced. This method could also be used afloat.
5.5.4.5. Jacking to Final Gap
After completion of the preloading procedure and a satisfac¬tory result of the settlement period
has been recorded, the preload water will have to be dumped before commencing the final jacking
to the minimum required air gap as stipulated in the location approval.
The air gap can be adjusted to a higher figure to achieve improved stress distribution by placing
bracing or connecting points in or close to the leg guides.
Likewise it is permitted to adjust to a higher air gap for fixed installation levels or conductor pipe
measurements. The final position of the unit, however, should never exceed the approved maximum
allowable air gap. The required leg reserve should not be used without the explicit approval from the
Marine Superintendent and Warranty Surveyor in attendance.
During the jacking the hull should be kept at an even level, but as a minimum within the allowable
0.3 degree where even level is not achievable.
When reaching the final air gap, the hull must always be placed at an even level and the level
alarm should be checked for workability and be left in operational position.
Final measurements on the leg extension are to be made and noted in the appropriate records.

Note:
During final jacking the Towmaster must ensure that the raw water supply system is under strict
surveillance by a responsible supervisor equipped with a communication means to the jacking
control room for immediate alarm to stop jacking.
This is required in order to avoid damage to the piping or cables in the raw water supply system
5.5.4.6. Signing over the Command
When returning charge of the Mobile Offshore Unit, the Towmaster will ensure that proper
recording stating date and time of the change of command is made. The record should be signed by
both the relieved and the relieving Person in Charge.
Generally this change will take place when the Mobile Offshore Unit is accepted:
* Jacked to final air gap and accepted by Operator and Underwriters’ Warranty Surveyor as being
on a safe location, ready to commence (drilling) operation.
It is generally the duty of the Towmaster to ensure that the anchors have been retrieved and that
the substructure is skidded out to the operational position. However, where circumstances warrant,
this task can be delegated to the Person in Charge after change of command.
5.6. Requirements for Soil Bore (coring) Operations from a Mobile Offshore
Unit
The Marine Superintendent/Towmaster, shall prepare an Operational Procedure Plan for the
attending Towmaster, which shall ensure compliance with the requirements listed below. This Plan
shall be approved by the CEO
The list of requirements is as follows:
• A length of weather window deemed adequate to complete the operation is forecast.
• The amount of time planned for the coring operation is minimised (e.g. through careful planning
etc.).
• The unit remains in a sea-fastened condition.
• If shallow gas is expected, the heading of the rig shall, wherever possible, be into the prevailing
winds and all anchors shall be run, tensioned and manned by personnel in radio contact with
the Towmaster.
• If shallow gas is expected, the stern anchors shall be prepared for free wheel mode, and engine
cooling water shall be arranged from the internal tank systems e.g. drill water tanks.
• The main towing vessel will remain connected to the bow of the unit and, where possible, be
heading into any prevailing wind and current. It shall fully operational and ready to move the
unit off location, if required.
• The drill string may be sacrificed in the event of a rapid departure from location.
• The cantilever shall be skidded out to permit the rotary table to clear the hull (if required).
• An operational - safety meeting shall be held with all the crew members and 3rd party
companies involved.
• Sufficient stock of drill water, barite and bentonite for the core/drilling operation shall be
available on board the unit before the operation is initiated.
• The operation shall be suspended if the weather deteriorates. A suitable safe stand by location
must be available, with a COA issued, or an acceptable shelter of refuge available e.g. behind
an island.
• The drilling/moonpool area to be observed by a person with radio contact to the Towmaster.
• The Towmaster shall be in charge throughout the entire operation.
• The jacking control room shall be manned during the entire coring operation and radio contact
with the Towmaster maintained.

• Power to the jacking systems and anchor winches shall be maintained during the entire coring
operation.
• On completion of the coring operation and prior to any jacking operation, the cantilever shall
be skidded to stowed position and secured in accordance with the Operation Manual.
• All other possible, relevant contingencies to enable the unit to promptly move off location, in
case of lost buoyancy or power shut down (e.g. due to shallow gas), must be considered and
implemented where deemed necessary.
Any deviations from the above requirements shall be documented, with an explanation of such, on
the Operational Procedure Plan.
The procedures devised by the Marine Superintendent/Towmaster for the above activities are
subject to the Warranty Surveyor’s approval.
5.7. Location Appraisal

Prior to any rig move, a Location Appraisal shall be prepared. This Appraisal shall contain the
following information, as a minimum:
• COA issued by the approved warranty surveyor.
• Soil evaluations of location of arrival and including standby/emergency jacking locations (if
applicable).
• Penetration analysis
• Report of seabed survey.
• Towmaster’s Letter of Instruction.
• Operation Plan (Rig move Procedures).
• Copy of sea charts and site-specific offshore charts.
• Relevant drawings.
5.8. Change of Command

Prior to change of command from Person in Charge to attending Towmaster a checklist “Change of
Command” shall be prepared and completed.
5.9. Rig Move checklists

5.9.1. Prerequisites
Criteria (Check N if criteria is not met) Y/N Action to take if not compliant
The Rig Move Procedure issued by the Marine OIM will request a Deviation Permit issued
Superintendent and approved by the Rig by the Rig Contractor.
Contractor is in hand of the attending OIM. Commencement will not be initiated
All information required for the conduct of the before this item is clarified.
move is in hand.
The information and instructions contained in the OIM will request a Deviation Permit issued
Rig Move Procedure have been confirmed. by the Rig Contractor.
Commencement will not be initiated
before this item is clarified.
The Location Approval Certificate issued by the OIM will request a Deviation Permit issued
Warranty Surveyor Office is in the hand of the OIM. by the Rig Contractor.

Permits & notices required by the Continental OIM will request a Deviation Permit issued
Shelf Authority for the operation concerned are by the Rig Contractor.
complied with. Commencement will not be initiated
The rig operator representatives designated to OIM will request a Deviation Permit issued
attend the move are available. by the Rig Contractor.
The requirements for attending vessels and OIM will request a Deviation Permit issued
services stipulated in the Rig Move Procedure, the by the Rig Contractor.
CoA, Commencement will not be initiated
by the Flag State, Continental Shelf Authority must before this item is clarified.
be complied with.
5.9.2. Commencement
The Rig Operating Manual approved by the Flag Issue a Nonconformance Report to the Rig
State/Classification Society is available to the OIM. Contractor.
If the nature of the noncompliance affects
the safe conduct of the marine operations
OIM will request for a Deviation Permit
issued by the Rig Contractor.
The Flag State & Continental Shelf Authority Issue a Nonconformance Report to the
minimum manning requirements are complied Marine Superintendent, or in his absence
with. the Rig Contractor.
Alternatively proper dispensations are available.
The pertaining certification requirements issued by Issue a Nonconformance Report to the
the Flag State & Continental Shelf Authority must Marine Superintendent, or in his absence
be complied with. the Rig Contractor.
Alternatively proper dispensations are available.
Two independent weather centers have identified
and documented a suitable weather window; OIM will request a Deviation Permit issued
enabling the safe lowering of the unit on location by the Rig Contractor.
of departure, transit from location to location,
preloading and safe jacking of the unit on the
location of arrival. One of the weather centers
should be an internationally recognized institution.
Arrangements are made for the Towmaster to
receive regular forecasts for the duration of the
operation.

All equipment and systems pertaining to the
move have been verified operational on checklists Issue a Nonconformance Report to the Rig
completed by the responsible section heads on Contractor.
board the Rig.
Alternatively notes from the Classification Society
and/or Rig Contractor provide information on any
operating restrictions.
The stability parameters for the rig are within OIM will request a Deviation Permit issued
criteria limits stipulated in the Rig Operation by the Rig Contractor.
Manual for the anticipated operation. Operations will not proceed before item is
resolved.
Attending vessels and services have been Issue a nonconformance Report to the rig
inspected for compliance with the requirements contractor’s Chairman.
stipulated in the Rig Move Procedure, CoA, OIM will request a Deviation Permit issued
Panama Flag State and Continental Shelf Authority by the Rig Contractor.
requirements.
before this item is resolved.
The OIM has conducted an instructional meeting
for all personnel concerned. OIM will request a Deviation Permit issued
The minutes of the meeting including list of by the Rig Contractor.
attending personnel will be attached to the Rig
move report.
All pre-move requirements stipulated in the CoA OIM will request a Deviation Permit issued
are complied with. by the Rig Contractor.
This includes the nomination of a suitable number Operation will not proceed before this item
of standby locations. is resolved.
The OIM is aware of the Quality Management OIM will familiarize himself with the
System procedures pertaining to Work Permits, procedures relevant to the operation and
Personnel on Board reports, Emergency Response his function.
organization and procedures.
5.9.3. Departure
A Towing Certificate verifying the tie down of loose OIM will request a Deviation Permit issued
items, the watertight integrity and the condition by the Rig Contractor.
of the attending vessels has been issued by the
attending Warranty Surveyor
Sea & weather conditions are within the criteria OIM will request a Deviation Permit issued
specified in the Operating Manual for jacking into by the Rig Contractor.
the water.
Attending vessels and services performs according OIM will request a Deviation Permit issued
to the specified criteria. by the Rig Contractor.

Departing From a Fixed Installation. OIM will request a Deviation Permit issued
Permission obtained from the Installation by the Rig Contractor.
Manager/operator Representative to commence
transit.
5.9.4. Transit
Weather forecasts confirm availability of suitable Issue a nonconformance report to the
weather window for the completion of the Marine Superintendent.
anticipated transit. OIM will request a Deviation Permit issued
by the Rig Contractor for considering
deviation towards a nominated standby
location.
Attending vessels and services performs according Issue a Nonconformance Report to Marine
to the specified criteria. superintendent.
OIM will request a Deviation Permit issued
by the Rig Contractor.
5.9.5. Approach
Approaching a fixed installation OIM will request a Deviation Permit issued
Permission to approach has been obtained from by the Rig Contractor.
the Installation Manager/Operator Representative.
A suitable weather window for the final stages Consider deviation towards a nominated
of the move has been verified by the forecasts stand by location.
received.
All equipment and systems pertaining to the Issue a Nonconformance Report to the Rig
positioning/elevation of the rig has been verified Contractor.
to be operational on checklists completed by the OIM will request a Deviation Permit issued
responsible section heads on board the rig. by the Rig Contractor.
Attending vessels and services have been Issue a Nonconformance Report to the
confirmed operational. Marine Superintendent.
Location markers and navigation equipment for the OIM will request a Deviation Permit issued
approach are operational. by the Rig Contractor.
Seabed confirmed free of unplanned obstacles and
suitable for carrying out the anticipated operation.

5.9.6. Arrival (including Positioning / Preloading)
Actual arrangements at location (e.g. lay out Issue a Nonconformance Report to the
of fixed installations) are according to the Marine Superintendent.
information provided in the Rig Move Procedure. OIM will request a Deviation Permit issued
Final position accepted in writing by the Rig OIM will consult Marine Superintendent.
Operator Foreman.
Actual penetrations encountered are within the OIM will request a Deviation Permit issued
following limitations. by the Rig Contractor.
The maximum acceptable measured penetration Operations are discontinued until this item
deviation from the predicted penetration in is solved, and authority to proceed, has
the CoA is 2 meters + 10% of the predicted been received from the Rig Contractor.
penetration.
The maximum penetration variation between legs
is 2 meters + 10% of the highest actual penetration
measured on one leg.
Leg/hull structure stress parameters (such as RPD) OIM will request a Deviation Permit issued
are within the criteria stipulated in the Operation by the Rig Contractor.
Manual. Operations are discontinued until this item
is solved, and authority to proceed, has
been received from the Rig Contractor.
The mooring operations / elevating operations Issue a Nonconformance Report to the
are conducted in accordance with the procedures Marine Superintendent.
specified in the Operating Manual and Item 03 and OIM will request a Deviation Permit issued
04 of this Checklist. by the Rig Contractor.
The preload/mooring-tensioning program is OIM will request a Deviation Permit issued

complied with in accordance with the requirements by the Rig Contractor.
stipulated in the CoA and Operating Manual. Operations are discontinued until this item
is resolved.
5.9.7. Prepare for Operation
The operator Foreman has declared final OIM to consult the Marine Superintendent.
acceptance of airgap / operating draft on location.

5.9.8. Port Operations

Check lists OIM will request a Deviation Permit issued
Prerequisites by the Rig Contractor.
Commencement has been completed.

Port Authority representatives have attended a OIM will request a Deviation Permit issued
planning meeting. by the Rig Contractor.
Documentation pertaining to Immigration and Issue a Nonconformance Report to the
Customs clearance is available. OIM.
A Port Contingency plan including call out Issue a Nonconformance Report to the
and notification lists has been prepared and Marine Superintendent.
implemented. OIM will request a Deviation Permit issued
5.9.9. Heavy Lift Vessel/Barge Operations (Dry Tow Operations)
A Transport Manual approved by the designated Issue a Nonconformance Report to Marine
Warranty Surveyor and Marine Superintendent or Superintendent.
in his absence the Rig Contractor is available. If the nature of the noncompliance affects
the safe conduct of the marine operations
by Rig Contractor.
Check lists OIM will request a Deviation Permit issued
Prerequisites by Rig Contractor.
Commencement has been completed prior to load

out/off.
Port Authority representatives have attended a OIM will request a Deviation Permit issued
planning meeting. by Rig Contractor.
Documentation pertaining to Immigration and Issue a Nonconformance Report to the OIM
Customs clearance is available. on board.
by Rig Contractor.
A Contingency Plan for the riding crew including Issue a Nonconformance Report to Marine
call out and notification lists has been prepared Superintendent.
and implemented. OIM will request a Deviation Permit issued
by Rig Contractor.

It has been confirmed by inspection conducted Issue a Nonconformance Report to Marine
by the designated Warranty Surveyor and the Superintendent.
Towmaster that the Heavy Lift Transport Vessel If the nature of the nonconformance affects
complies with the requirements stipulated in the the safe conduct of the operation, the OIM
contract and the Transport Manual. will request a Deviation Permit issued by
Rig Contractor.
The designated Warranty Surveyor has issued Issue a Nonconformance Report to Rig
a certificate verifying that the sea fastening Contractor.
arrangements and the stability parameters for the If the nature of the non-compliance affects
combined tow is in compliance with the criteria the safe conduct of the operation the OIM
stipulated in the Transport Manual. will request a Deviation Permit issued by
Rig Contractor.
The motion and stability parameters during the The OIM issues a Nonconformance Report
transit are within the limitations stated in the to the Marine Superintendent.
Transport Manual.

Section D : Asset Integrity
Management Requirements
D1. Equipment Inspection

And Integrity
D.1. Equipment Inspection And Integrity
1.1. Scope
This section of EGPC guidelines will be applied to all drilling and workover rigs working within the
Egyptian Oil and gas sector
1.2. Purpose
The purpose of this Section is to define the Egyptian Petroleum Ministry requirements for keeping
the all EGPC affiliated rigs equipment serviceable in good and safe operating condition, in addition
to, carrying out rig equipment inspections for all drilling and workover rigs working within Egyptian
Oil and gas sector following the EGPC requirements ,international applicable standards and
different OEM recommendations in order to ensure the integrity of equipment through a common
Inspection Standards.
The inspection frequencies and scope are defined in this Chapter represent EGPC “minimum
requirements” which cannot be exceeded
Under no circumstances EGPC inspection frequencies and scope should never be changed unless
change made by OEM or other applicable standards “latest versions”
1.3. Responsibility
1.3.1. EGPC/EGAS Drilling and workover HSE Dept.
• Responsible to ensure that all requirements mentioned in in this guidelines are carefully
implemented through predetermined audit and inspection plan
• Responsible for reviewing and updating the guideline as a custodian of this guidelines
• Responsible for assigning a special committee from its affiliated companies for performing rigs
Auditing and updating this guideline
1.3.1.1. Rig Operator’s chairman of the board and Gen. Mgr.
• Responsible to ensure that all requirements mentioned in this guidelines are carefully
implemented and support the implementation of all HSE policies
• Responsible to provide strategic and operational financial support in achieving the
organizational goals of providing high quality, integrated health and personal social services.
1.3.2. Rig Operator’s Operations Gen. Mgr.
implemented through predetermined acceptance audit and inspection
• Responsible to assign an appropriate concerned authority OR Approved qualified third party for
performing acceptance Audit
• Ensure that HSE case is implemented within each Drilling unit working under his responsibilities
1.3.3. Rig Operator’s Drilling Gen. Mgr.
implemented through supporting the implementation of periodical audit and inspection plan
• Ensure all rig contractors and drilling team are adhering to all EGPC safety rules and regulations
• Ensure all rig contractors are Inspection plans are being complied with EGPC Equipment
integrity and inspection matrix
• Responsible for reviewing HSE case results and recommendations with HSE manager and Rig
contractor Operations and HSE management team

1.3.4. Rig Operator’s HSE Gen. Mgr.

• Responsible to ensure that all requirements mentioned in in this guidelines are carefully
implemented Responsible to prepare a plan to Perform HSE audit/ Inspection/ Walkthrough
..etc. and Follow up the daily HSE activities using his Company checklist which established
based on EGPC Drilling and workover guideline
• Responsible to ensure that the acceptance audit performed by EGPC approved third party is
performed and all critical and major items are closed
• Responsible for Assigning Rig HSE team for continues follow up all rigs operations
• Responsible for reviewing HSE case results and recommendations with Drilling manager and
Rig Contractor Operations and HSE management team
1.3.5. Rig Contractors’ Operations Gen. Mgr.
• Operations Manager is responsible to approve the specific inspection requirements plan
updated by the Maintenance and asset integrity departments at his company after ensuring its
totally complied with EGPC requirements
• Responsible to ensure that the inspection Plan totally implemented through his respective
Drilling and workover operations managers
• Responsible to issue Clear instructions and commitments to all company affiliated rigs to
comply with EGPC HSE guidelines
1.3.6. Rig Contractor’s Drilling and workover operations managers
• Responsible to follow up the implementation of the inspection requirements which already
approved by the Rig contractor’s operations manager and to submit the same to his respective
Drilling and workover Superintendents
1.3.7. Rig Contractor’s Drilling Superintendents
• Responsible to ensure that all equipment certifications (COCs, Inspection certificates etc.) of
equipment owned by his company and under his supervision are uploaded into any drilling
company secured Shared folder or PMS, CMMS or equivalent systems, as applicable, in order to
be eligible for all company affiliated rigs
• Responsible to Ensure that All rigs under his responsibilities are complied with EGPC Drilling
and workover HSE guidelines and international standard
1.3.8. Rig Contractor’s Maintenance and Assets Integrity Manager
• Responsible to provide necessary support and advice to all Maintenance Superintendent
and maintenance teams (fields and workshops), as applicable, for implementing EGPC asset
integrity and inspection requirements as defined in this manual,
• Responsible to issue an approved PMS and the inspection plan and procedure based on EGPC
Drilling and workover HSE guidelines and international standard
• Responsible to Update the Current PMS and Inspection plan periodically based on EGPC
Drilling and workover HSE guidelines and international standard
1.3.9. Rig Contractor’s Rig Superintendent (Rig Supt)
• The rig Supt.is responsible for planning and execution of the inspections as per EGPC
guidelines Equipment Inspection Matrix and OEM recommendations
• Rig Superintendent will be the custodian of the original inspection certificates and will be
responsible to maintain those certificates in his office as defined in this Module
• Responsible to provide the required mandatory training for His affiliated rigs crews based on
this guideline and international standard

• Responsible to assign rigs STP to supervise the inspections, in accordance with this Guideline
1.3.10. Rig Contractor’s Maintenance Superintendent
• Responsible to provide necessary assistance to the Rig Superintendent in identifying rig
specific inspection requirements and in updating the Inspection Matrix.
• Responsible to ensure that any unscheduled repairs carried out during the inspection process
are recorded in their Maintenance system
• Responsible to ensure that PMS and inspection plan are totally implemented in a way
that does not contradict with EGPC HSE Guidelines
• Where the Maintenance Superintendent position is not available, the above defined
responsibilities will be borne by the Rig Superintendent.
1.3.11. Rig Contractor’s Senior Tool pusher
• Responsible to supervise the inspections, in accordance with this Guideline after designated by
his company to do so.
• Must be qualified and experienced to supervise the inspection activities in accordance with this
Guideline
• Responsible to verify the completion of the individual inspection jobs.
• Responsible to maintain the copies of Inspection Certificates in dedicated files as defined in this
Guideline
• Responsible to maintain the Equipment Integrity Inspection Tracker up to date as defined in this
procedure.
1.3.12. Rig Contractor’s Chief Mechanic and Chief Electrician
The Chief Mechanic and Chief Electrician will assist the inspection party on site by providing the
necessary Manufacturer’s Parts Lists, Operation Manuals, drawings and other technical support
needed for the inspections.
1.3.13. Rig Contractor’s site HSE

Responsible to follow up the implementation of the inspection requirements which already
approved by the Rig Operator’s operations manager and to Report all deficiencies to Rig Operator’s
HSE manager and Rig Superintendent through the official reporting channels
1.4. Procedure
1.4.1. Rig Equipment Integrity Inspection
The process of equipment integrity inspection is defined as comparison of equipment conformity
and serviceability condition to predetermined standards as listed on the EGPC equipment Inspection
Matrix followed by determination of group of actions required.
1.4.2. Rig Equipment Integrity Inspection Matrix

• To ensure that the integrity of all drilling and workover equipment are maintained correctly
to render those as ‘fit for purpose’ at all times within their given design criteria, the inspection
requirements are listed in ‘EGPC rig equipment Integrity Inspection Matrix’ (EGPCEIIM),
provided as Appendix 1 attached to this Chapter
• EGPC rig equipment Integrity Inspection Matrix’ (EGPCEIIM) Is considered a minimum
requirement for rig Equipment inspection and all rig operators have to follow all requirements
mentioned as minimum
• EGPC rig equipment Integrity Inspection Matrix contents are primarily based on the
requirement of equipment manufacturer “OEM” and international applicable oilfield standards
and practices.
• The Maintenance /Assets integrity Managers within all drilling and workover companies is the

custodian of their own equipment Inspection Matrix which must be prepared and issued in each
drilling and workover company in Egypt based on the mandatory requirements mentioned in
this guideline
• Drilling and workover company’s operations Managers will be fully accountable for
implementing their own Equipment Inspection Integrity Matrix based on this guideline
requirement
• Any changes to the equipment inspection frequency/intervals or any other changes should
be based on OEM official recommendations or International standard changes and must
be mentioned in the Matrix revision control register” MRCR” at each drilling and workover
company
• Under no circumstances the inspection /maintenance best practices should not exceeding the
OEM requirements /Applicable relevant standards and should be scheduled and included in the
PMS
• MOCs (Management of Change) or Dispensation requests related to the rig operator equipment
inspection matrix will be issued based on New OEM recommendations, Standards changes
or IADC recommendations and it must be reviewed by the Maintenance /Assets integrity
Managers and shall be maintained in equipment register
• Compliance audits will be implemented through EGPC special inspection Committees
1.4.3. Scope of EGCP Equipment Inspection Matrix
• EGPC equipment inspection matrix guideline, provided in this chapter, defines EGPC minimum
requirements as well as the inspection frequencies for API Category III and Category IV
inspections and fields/full inspections of the main and critical equipment as well as applying
other relevant international standards
• The related detailed requirements contained in the EGPC Equipment Integrity Inspection
guideline define the scope of work for the required inspections for each equipment used in
Drilling and workover operations.
• The inspection frequencies listed on the EGPC integrity Inspection Matrix guideline will be
applied for all rig equipment based on the following inspection levels
• API 54, API 52, and other API standards related to HSE aspects within drilling and workover
operations must be implemented carefully within all drilling and workover operations
1.4.4. Inspection Levels
Based on the Applicable international standards, OEM recommendations referred, IADC
requirements and EGPC equipment integrity matrix guideline, EGPC Equipment Inspection
Categories are divided as below:
The inspection levels For all equipment falling under the API RP -4G, API RP-8B, API RP 7L, 14F, and
API 53 STD the following inspection categories shall be applied
1.4.4.1. Category I: (PM system Category)
This category involves observing the equipment during operation for indications of inadequate
performance. Any equipment found to show cracks, excessive wear, etc. must be removed from
service for further examination.
Note: Must be included in the PM System and all records must be maintained, NO third-party
inspection certificates are required
1.4.4.2. Category II: (PM system Category)
In addition to CAT I inspection, further inspection for corrosion, deformation, loose or missing
components, deterioration, proper lubrication, visible external cracks, and adjustment.

Note:
- Must be included in the PM System and all records must be maintained, NO third-party
inspection certificates are required
- CAT I and CAT II inspections are integrated with scheduled preventive maintenance systems,
therefore, the scope of this inspection chapter does not consider CAT I and CAT II inspections.
BUT EGPC Drilling HSE auditors will check the implementation of PM system including CAT |I
and CAT II within their audits Based on the rig operators Preventive applied maintenance plan
1.4.4.3. Category III: (inspection plan)
In addition to CAT-II inspection requirements, this category should include non-destructive testing
(NDT) of exposed critical areas that may involve some disassembly to access specific components
and identify wear that exceeds the manufacturer’s allowable tolerances.
Note: The manufacturer’s allowable tolerances must be identified with references and provided
to the inspection third party this may include, NDT-MPI, NDT-UT, NDT-PT, NDT-VT, and other
Nondestructive testing based on the inspection scope of work which must include EDPC as
minimum requirements
1.4.4.4. Category IV:
In addition to Cat III inspection requirements, Category IV inspection requires further inspection for
which the equipment is disassembled to the extent necessary to conduct NDT of all primary load-
carrying components as defined by the manufacturer and the equipment must be:
• Disassembled in a suitably-equipped facility to the extent necessary to permit full inspection of
all primary-load-carrying components and other components that are critical to the equipment.
• Inspected for excessive wear, cracks, flaws and deformations.
• Replacing spare parts and repair activities must be included in CAT IV report in details
Note:
- Suitably–equipped facility will include specific (rig operators) approved workshops/ yards
where the necessary tools and equipment can be made available.
- Prior to Category III and Category IV inspections, all foreign material such as dirt, paint,
grease, oil , scale etc. must be removed from the concerned parts by a suitable method (eg.
paint-stripping, steam-cleaning, grit-blasting) this step must be included in the report with
evidences .
For all drill pipes, BHA and drill string accessories falling under DS–1 Vol. 3 and API RP 7G-2
inspection standard the following inspection categories shall apply:
Category III:
Designed for mid-range drilling conditions where a standard inspection Program is justified. If a
failure occurs, the risk of significant fishing or losing part of the hole is considered minimal.
Category IV:
This category may be used when drilling conditions are more difficult than category III. Significant
fishing cost or losing part of the hole are in the event of a drill stem failure.
Category V:
This category applies to severe drilling condition. Several factors combine to make the cost of a
possible failure very high.
With the same categories as Cat III and Cat IV requirements, EGPC has classified more equipment
integrity inspections categories as for any equipment not covered under the API regulations “Field
Inspection” and “Full Inspection”.

1.5. Types of inspections

1.5.1. Equipment Field inspection: CAT III
The purpose of the field inspection is to carry out visual and NDT inspection of exposed critical
areas and to identify any equipment survivability problems, field inspection Is equivalent to API
Category III type and normally conducted on site with limited interruption of the operations
1.5.2. Equipment Full inspections, CAT IV

More extensive inspections than field inspections which may or may not require the equipment to
be fully stripped down depending on the applicable standard and OEM regulations, may be done
either on site or with the help of qualified inspectors and workshops.
1.6. Qualifications for Inspectors and Welders

1.6.1. Inspector Qualifications
The persons carrying out equipment integrity inspections will be suitably qualified, either
by possession of a recognized degree, certificate or professional standing, and has sufficient
knowledge, training and experience
1.6.2. Specific Category III qualifications

• Inspector conducting Category III inspection must possess ASNT Level I Technician certified per
ASNT specification SNT-TC-1A or equivalent.
• The supervisor of the inspector must possess adequate knowledge and experience in this
field. Typical persons qualified to supervise the inspection could be an engineer or ASNT Level
II Technician certified per ASNT specification SNT-TC-1A, with the aid of a senior operations
person (Senior mechanic, Senior electrician, and Senior tool pusher) designated by rig operator
Representative, provided they meet the above stated criteria of experience, training and
knowledge.
1.6.3. Specific Category IV qualifications
• Category IV inspection of the drilling structures will be conducted by or closely supervised by a
Professional Engineering third parties, Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) representative
or authorized representative of other manufacturer of drilling structures
• Welds visual inspection shall be conducted by AWS certified welding inspector or equivalent.
• Category IV inspection qualifications of the other equipment covered in this standard shall have
the same CAT III requirements.
• Rig operator’s management must assign rig inspection responsibilities to their Rig
superintendents, and maintenance superintendents in order to be involved in the supervision of
the implemented inspection at rigs sites under their supervision.
1.7. General Lifting gear and lifting equipment inspectors

All inspectors and supervisors shall be certified by internationally recognized lifting equipment
and lifting gear inspection organization must have sufficient experience in this regards (not less than
two years’ experience).
Each rig shall prepare an updated lifting gear register” SOW” and shall be provided to the
inspection third party as part of work order

1.8. Load testing and inspection

All inspectors and supervisors shall be certified by internationally recognized lifting equipment
and lifting gear inspection organization.
NDT inspection must be conducted before and after Load testing to ensure safe testing and safe
operations of tools or equipment
1.9. Information shall be provided to the inspection third party by the rig opera-
tors
The inspector shall recive the following information:
• OEM or related international standards assembly drawings and drawing identifying critical
areas of equipment to be inspected;
• OEM or related international standards acceptance and Rejection criteria.
• History of repairs, modifications, grindings or remanufacturer, conducted at each equipment if
available.
• The above data shall be officially provided by the rig Contractor’s management to the rig
operators PIC and inspection company in order to be used by the third party inspector
Note: In case of absence of the critical area drawings, all areas of primary-load-carrying
components will be considered critical.
1.10. Welder Qualifications

Welders will be qualified to a recognized standards and to the level required for the application (as
per ASME IX or equivalent). “Welder certificates is an essential part in the welding acceptance
1.11. Planning and Execution of Equipment Integrity Inspections

Based on rig operator equipment inspection and integrity matrix, each Rig Management shall
monitor the ‘Upcoming inspection’ in their rig inspection plan for obtaining information on the
forthcoming inspections and will communicate with maintenance /asset integrity managers for
initiating necessary actions to carry out the planned inspections on time.
The rig management will ensure that all remedial works required as per the inspections are
accordingly recorded under PM system and inspection plan as Unscheduled Repairs
In case of the inability to carry out the equipment inspection at the specified time, due to
operations circumstances or force majeure such as epidemics or other force majeure, Rig
management must conduct visual inspection for all critical equipment by an approved third party
in order to extend re-plan the inspection with maximum 30 Days from the original inspection
date using the deviation Permit after conducting specific risk assessment and get all the required
approvals

1.12. Equipment Inspection Matrix Guidance
Frequency Frequency
Field Field
Relevant Standards
Description Inspection Inspection
(Cat III) (Cat IV)
Mast, Substructure & associated Pad eyes 2 Years 10 Years”3650” API RP 4G
Raising Cylinders (Mast & Sub) 1 Year 5 Years API RP 4G

Stabbing Board & Monkey Board 6 Month 5 Years API RP 4G
Crown Block 6 Month 5 Years API RP8B,
Traveling Block 6 Month 5 Years API RP8B
Drilling Hook and / Hook block combination 6 Month 5 Years API RP8B
Top Drive System 6 Month 5 Years API RP8B
Elevator Links 6 Month Annually API RP8B
DP & DC Elevators, Casing & Single Joint 6 months Annually API RP8B
Elevators, Tubing Elevators
Kelly Drive Bushing 6 Month 2 Years API RP 7L
Master Bushing 6 Month 5 Years API RP 7L
Insert Bowls 6 months Annually API RP 7L
DP , DC , Casing Slips & Power Slips - 6 months API RP 7L
Spider / Elevator 6 months 1 Year API RP 8B
Safety Clamp 6 Month Annually API RP 8B
Manual Rotary Tongs for DP , DC & Casing 6 Month Annually API RP 7L
Kelly Spinner 6 months 5 Years API RP 8B
Draw-works Brake bands & Linkages 6 months 5 Years OEM
Recommendations.
Draw-works Disk Brake 6 months 5 Years OEM
Recommendations.
Deadline Anchor 6 months 5 Years API RP 8B
Lifting Plugs & Subs - 6 Month API RP-7G-2
Tubular Lifting Cap - 6 months API RP-7G-2
Utility Winches (Including Truck 6 months 1 Year ASME B 30.7
Winches,Subbase Raising)
Man Riding Winch 6 months 1 Year ASME B 30.23, B
30.7
Rotary Swivels 6 Month 5 Years API RP8B
Drilling Spools, Flanges, Diverters & Valves - 5 Years API STD 53
Hub Clamps 6 Month 5 Years API STD 53

Frequency Frequency
Field Field
Relevant Standards
(Cat III) (Cat IV)
RAM Type BOP 2 Years, others 5 Years API STD 53
Bag Type BOP Annular Annually 5 Years API STD 53

Choke & Kill Line (Cement Line) New well 5 Years API STD 53
IBOP , Kelly Valve and Safety Valve 6 Month 5 Years API STD 53
Mud Gas Separator Annually 5 Years API STD 53
Hydraulic Catwalk 1 Years 3 Years OEM
Recommendations.
Iron Roughneck Roughneck OEM
Recommendation
Pipe Arms & Pipe Loaders 1 Year 3 Years OEM
Recommendation
Spinning Wrench - 6 Month OEM
Recommendation
Chicksans & Swivel - 1 Year API 570, ANSI B 31.1
High Pressure Choke Manifold and Valves 1 year 5 Years API STD 53
Standpipe & High Pressure Piping 1 Years 5 Years API 570
Rotary hoses, Vibrator hoses & Welded - 1 Year API RP 7L , API STD
Connections 53
Pulsation Dampener 1 Year 10 Years OEM
Recommendation
BOP Accumulator Unit 6 month 5 Years API STD 53,
/Annual OEM Manual
Accumulator Bottles 1 year 5 Years API STD 53,
Accumulator Bottles WT 1 year - API STD 53,
Mud Pump Relief Valves calibration - 12 Months API RP 576
Drill Pipe - 50K Ft. or 6 API RP-7G-2, DS 1 (3)
Months
Drill String Accessories & BHA - 500 Rotating API RP-7G-2, DS 1 (3)
Hours
Raising Line / Bridle Line/Substructure raising - 10 Cycles or 2 API RP 4G
line Years
(whichever
occurs earlier)
Slings, Shackles & Fabricated Pad Eyes - 6 Month API RP 9B, ASME B
30.9, ISO 2415

Frequency Frequency
Field Field
Relevant Standards
(Cat III) (Cat IV)
Trailer King Pins - 6 Month SAE J 2228

Personnel Basket 6 Months 4 Years BS EN 14502-1:2005
Personnel Elevators 6 Months 4 Years BS 5655-10.2.1
Self-Propelled Man lifts 6 Months 4 Years ISO 18893
Sack Handling Devices - 6 Months ASME B 30.11 & BS
2853
Crane Hooks - 1 Year ASME B30.10
Forklift Forks & Forklift Fork Support - 1 Year BS ISO 5057:1993
Air Pressure Vessel 1 Year 5 Years API 510,API RP 572
Air Pressure Relief Valves 1 Year 5 Years API 510, API RP 576
Fuel Storage Tanks 1 Year 10 Years API STD 653
BOP Lifting Devices 1 Years 4 Years API 7 L
Fall Arrestor & Emergency Escape Devices 6 Month 1 Years ANSI/ASSE Z359.14-
2012
Ex(d) & Ex€ Systems 1 Year 3 Years IEC 60079-17
Rig Instrumentation 6 Month 1 Year OEM
Recommendations.
Breathing Air Cylinders (Fiberglass Wrap/steel) 1 Year 3 Years ASME VIII
Rig Main Diesel Engines Top End Major OEM
Overhaul Overhaul Recommendations.

D2. Inspection Cerificates

Process And Filling
D.2. Inspection Cerificates Process And Filling
2.1. Scope
This standard is applicable to all EGPC/EGAS affiliated rigs within Arab republic of Egypt
2.2. Purpose
To provide necessary guidance for rig operators management and E&P companies for rig
equipment certifications process and Re-Certification requirements
2.3. Responsibility
It is the responsibility of rig operator’s management and work site supervisors to ensure that this
standard is followed.
2.4. Requirements
2.4.1. Equipment Integrity Inspection Tracker
In order to have an overview of the status of the equipment inspections based on the Rig specific
equipment inspection matrix, an Inspection Tracker will be maintained by rig management on
specific form established for equipment Integrity Inspection Tracker
2.4.2. Inspection Certification management and control

• The Inspection Summary / Certificate contents and minimum information required must be
mentioned in all agreements or contracts between rig operators and inspection third parties, as
a minimum:
• On receipt of the inspection certificates from the inspection company, those will be verified
against the contents by rig operator representative before acknowledging on the certificate.
• Each Rig contractor has to assign a qualified person to accompany the inspectors as a witness
and to ensure the inspection quality and accuracy
• The filing of the inspection certificates will be carried out in sequential manner in accordance
with the Certificate Filing Reference in this guideline
• The filling List provided as Attachment 2 to this chapter and should be recorded in PM system
or equivalent under Equipment inspection part
• The certificates will be filed using the EGPC Equipment Certifications register guidance
• Each Rig Superintendent will be the custodian of the original inspection certificates and will
be responsible for maintaining the OEM certifications and equipment integrity inspection
certificates in the sequence of the Certificates Filing Reference List provided in this chapter
• Each Rig Management will be responsible to maintain copies of the OEM certificates and copies
of inspection certificates in the sequence of the Certificates Filing Reference List provided in this
chapter
• Inspection plan to be established at allover rig contractors based on EGPC Guidance
2.5. Guidance on Maintaining Equipment Certifications at rig site

Rig Contractor’s management shall responsible on maintaining the equipment COCs in addition to
the re-certification documentations in a good manner based on the as following subjects:
• Certificate types
• Inspection certificate contents
• Filing of certificates
• Inspection Date
• Next inspection date
• Certificates history
Guidance on Maintaining Equipment Certifications has been prepared for easy understanding of
the equipment certification filing requirement by rig operator’s management.

Guidance on Maintaining Equipment Certifications is a mandatory part that shall be followed by

rig contractors’ management
2.6. Certificate types

The certification process and control requirement of all rigs equipment can be categorized into two main
types:
2.6.1. Equipment Original Certification

• Certificate of conformity (COC), provided by OEM, to relevant international standards of current
edition, eg. API, ASME ,IEC etc.
• Proof load test certificate, for load-bearing equipment, as applicable
• Pressure Test certificate, for high-pressure hoses
• Hydrostatic test certificate, for pressure vessel, as applicable
• Capacity test certificate, for pressure-relieving devices, as applicable
2.6.2. Equipment Re-Certification:
Supported with various applicable NDT reports, load test report, hydrostatic test report, capacity
test report etc. provided by competent inspection company/party, after carrying out API CAT III or
Cat IV inspections in accordance with rig operator’s equipment Inspection Matrix requirements and
based on this guidance requirements, including associated tests, or after undergoing any major
repairs, or modifications reports and its approvals as applicable.
2.6.3. Technical documentation

Filling List guidance “the below list is considered guideline of minimum requirements “
Title Remarks
Main Technical Registers
Mast and substructure System
Hoisting System
Rig Floor System
Rotating System
Mud Pump Assembly
Mud circulating /cleaning system
Standpipe System
High Pressure Hose
Bumper Hose
High Pressure Piping
Well Control System
BOP Equipment
Choke and Kill Lines and Valves
Choke Manifold
Power Generation System
Tubular Handling System

Title Remarks
Drill String System
Hydraulic System
Air Dryers
Bulk Storage & Handling System
Bulk Material Handling
Big Bag Handling System
Fuel System
Water System
HSE Equipment
Lifting Gear
Gas Detection and Alarm System
Air Breathing system
Waste Management equipment
Mobile Heavy Equipment
Main Camp System
HSE equipment
Additional Technical Registers
Wall thickness register
Calibration register
Lifting register
HSE and Rescue equipment register
2.6.4. Equipment Integrity Inspection Certificate Contents
As per EGPC guideline requirements, the inspection certificate will contain the following
information, as a minimum:
• Rig Name and No.
• Location of inspection
• Equipment Description – Name, Make, Serial No.
• Date of Inspection.
• Type of inspection carried out with relevant international standard reference.
• Photograph/single line sketch of equipment inspected showing the area inspected.
• Devices /Tools used for inspection and their calibration validity.
• Result of Inspection with remarks.(accepted/ rejected)
• Repair work carried out, if applicable.
• Result of inspection with rework done.
• Inspector and Inspection Company Details.
• Signature, Job Position of both inspection company representative and rig operator
representative.

Note: The inspection certificates provided by EGPC approved inspection companies MUST be
verified for all details and then acknowledged by signing by rig operator authorized person on
dedicated place provided on the certificate.
2.7. Filing of Certificates

Filing of equipment certificates will be done by creating two Key sets of files on each EGPC
affiliated rig:
2.7.1. Original set “First set of file” Must contain

• Rig Equipment List as first page
• Original equipment Certificate of Conformity (COC), where applicable
• Original Hydrostatic Test Certificate, where applicable
• Original Load Test Certificate, where applicable
• Original Capacity Test Certificate, where applicable
2.7.2. Re-certification set “Second set” must contain the re-certifications and other
testing reports
• Rig Equipment List as first page
• Rig Equipment Inspection Matrix with all relevant information updated
• Rig Equipment Inspection Tracking Sheet with all relevant information updated
• Equipment re-certification inspection certificates and various applicable NDT reports,
repair reports, modifications report and its approvals if applicable, and other test reports
accompanied by the specific cover page for Equipment Inspection Certification including the
following:
- Equipment Name
- Inspection type
- Inspection standard reference
- Equipment serial
- Assets number
- Filling reference
- Inspection Company
- Date of inspection
- Date of next inspection
- Type of next inspection
Note: The sequence of filing the equipment certificates will follow the Equipment Inspection
Certificate Filing Reference List.

D3. Technical Documentation

Review
3.1. Scope
This standard is applicable to all EGPC/EGAS affiliated rigs within Arab republic of Egypt
3.2. Purpose
To ensure that all proper technical documentations are in place during the equipment re-
certification and rig acceptance process as a guide for most important items to be checked in the
technical documentation of the major equipment.
3.3. Certificates of conformity contents

Certificates of conformity is a declaration from a non-consumable item supplier stating that the
referenced Product /material meets all requirements, standards and/or specifications, but it is not
a summary of test results. Could be named Certificate of conformity/Certificate of compliance/
Certificate of manufacturing/ Certificate of quality
3.4. Essential information for the Certificates of conformity

• Certification should be on company letterhead
• Date of issuance
• Manufacturer Name
• Manufacturing Facility
• Product description
• Part/Serial Number
• Applicable Specification/Standards to which the Product was manufactured
• Approval signature/Stamp (from quality assurance department)
3.5. Mast and Substructure re-certification (API RP 4G)

• Records of the CAT III and CAT IV inspections including the visual inspection forms mentioned in
the API RP 4G latest version and other applicable standard.
• Description of the structure including the name of the manufacturer, date of manufacturer, style,
serial number, PSL and specifications, clear height, maximum static hook load chart.
• Complete results and methods of any NDT inspection reports.
• Date and documentation of all repairs performed.
• Significant defects reported.
• Location and extent of repair/ modifications attached with Copy of any approved WPS “welding
procedures specifications”, MOC, RA .etc.
• Primary load carrying components repaired or modified
• Copy of all NDT inspector’s qualifications
• Copy of welder’s qualifications.
• Material certifications and traceability as applicable.
• Assembly drawings.
• New COC for the structure.
3.6. Hoisting Equipment re-certification (API RP 8B)

• Records of the CAT III and CAT IV inspections including the visual inspection,
• Load test related to the re-certification or for indicating the load carrying capacity of the
equipment “load test may be performed at the rig site”.
• All repairs and remanufacturing activities performed with its approvals.
• Significant defects report.
• Location and extent of repair attached with Copy of any approved WPS “welding procedures
specifications”
• Complete results and methods of any NDT inspection reports.
• Primary load carrying components repaired or modified.

• Replacement parts.
• Copy of all NDT inspector’s qualifications.
• Re-certification COC for the equipment
3.7. Equipment covered under the API RP 8B

• Crown-block sheaves and bearings;
• Traveling blocks and hook blocks;
• Block-to-hook adapters;
• Connectors and link adapters;
• Drilling hooks;
• Tubing hooks and sucker-rod hooks;
• Elevator links;
• Casing elevators, tubing elevators, drill-pipe elevators, and drill-collar elevators;
• Sucker-rod elevators;
• Rotary swivel-bail adapters;
• Rotary swivels;
• Power swivels;
• Power subs;
• Spiders, if capable of being used as elevators;
• Dead-line tie-clown/wireline anchors,
• Drill-string motion compensators;
• Kelly spinners, if capable of being used as hoisting equipment;
• Riser-running tool components, if capable of being used as hoisting equipment;
• Wellhead-running tool components, if capable of being used as hoisting equipment;
• Safety clamps, capable of being used as hoisting equipment;
• Top drives;
• Casing running tools.
3.8. Drilling Equipment re-certification (API RP 7L)

• Records of the CAT III and CAT IV inspections including the visual inspection, 7.2.load test/
pressure test related to the re-certification or for indicating the load 7.3.Carrying capacity of the
equipment.
• All repairs and remanufacturing activities” if any” performed shall be Supported with all related
official documents and approvals.
• Significant defects report.
• in case that any major repairs or modifications were performed ,the location and extent of
repair attached with Copy of any approved WPS “welding procedures specifications”, MOC,
OEM approvals, RA ,,etc,,,.
• Complete results and methods of any NDT inspection reports. 7.8.Primary load carrying
components repaired or modified.
• Replacement parts.
• Copy of all NDT inspector’s qualifications.
• Re-certification COC for the equipment
3.9. Equipment covered under the API RP 7L

• Rotary tables.
• Rotary bushings.
• Rotary slips.

• Rotary hoses.
• Slush pump components.
• Spiders not capable of use as elevators. 8.7.Manual tongs.
• 8.8.Safety clamps not used as a hoisting device.Ram preventer and annular re-certification (API
RP 53-API 6A and API 16A)
• Valid Manufacturer API-16A license
• Valid Quality control certificate (ISO).
• Certificate of compliance.
• Equipment identity information (Material and temperature class; size and working pressure,
OEM, PSL, serial number and any other traceable info).
• BOP element’s H2S trim proof.
• BOP body or shell’s mechanical properties.
• List of replacement parts.
• Replacement parts material certificates and chemical analysis
• Visual examination.
• Surface NDT inspection (MPI or PT).
• Repair welds welding procedure specifications
• Repair welds heat treatment.
• Repair welds subsurface NDT (radiographic or ultrasonic tests).
• Hardness testing report
3.10. The BOP acceptance inspection includes but not limited to the following
BOP tests
• Hydrostatic Proof Test (Hydrostatic body or shell test).
• Hydraulic Operating System Test.
• Sealing Characteristics Test (Closed-preventer test).
• Manual ram-locking system test. Ram preventers only
• Hydraulic ram-locking system test (if applicable). Ram preventers only
• BOP lifting lug load test.
3.11. General requirements

3.11.1. Visible Marking of Damage:
It is recommended that at the time of the inspection all damaged sections are marked clearly and
visibly so that needed repairs can be identified. When repairs are made, the visible markings should
be removed by painting. It is also necessary for the inspector to write “None” when no damage
marks are needed, as this is his indication that the item has passed inspection.
3.11.2. Defects:
• Any defects found must be reported to the Rig Management for the correct remedial actions.
• Mark any crack, damage or “out of tolerances wear” visible on the items.
3.11.3. Through cleaning:
Ensure that all equipment is thoroughly cleaned prior to commencing any inspection and all
foreign material such as dirt, paint, grease, oil, scale, etc. are actually removed from the concerned
parts by a suitable method (e.g. paint-stripping, steam-cleaning, grit-blasting).

D4. Rig Equipment Inspection

4.1. Scope
This standard is applicable to all EGPC/Egas affiliated rigs within Arab republic of Egypt
4.2. Purpose
This procedure was developed as a guideline for the inspection and should be used by the
qualified inspector responsible for both the “Field Inspection” and “Full Inspection”, The following
activities should be seen as the “minimum requirement “In the manufacturer’s documentation and
manuals you may find more detailed recommendations especially for the most critical and safety
related items of the mast and substructure.
4.3. Responsibility
• It is the responsibility of rig operator’s management and work site supervisors to ensure that
the following requirements are followed.
• The STP will be responsible to ensure that Rig Critical Instrumentation “Inventory” Log is
maintained up to date “ Log updates must be Planned “
4.4. Definitions
4.4.1. Primary Load
Axial Load to which the equipment is subjected in operation
4.4.2. Critical Area

Highly stressed area of a primary load carrying component as defined by the manufacturer
4.4.3. Primary Load Carrying Component

Component of the equipment through which the primary load is carried
4.4.4. Visual inspection

A visual inspection is an inspection which identifies, without the use of access equipment or tools,
those defects, e.g. Missing bolts, which are apparent to the eye.
4.4.5. Close inspection

A close inspection is an inspection that encompasses those aspects covered by a visual inspection
and, in addition, identifies those defects, e.g. Loose bolts, which will become apparent only when
access equipment,
E.g. Steps (where necessary) and tools are used.
Close inspections do not normally require the enclosure to be opened or the equipment to be de-
energized.
4.4.6. Detailed Inspection

A detailed inspection is an inspection which encompasses those aspects covered by a close
inspection and, in addition, identifies those defects, e.g. loose terminations, which only become
apparent when the enclosure is opened up, or by the use of tools and test equipment.
4.4.7. Compex
(Meaning Competency in Ex atmospheres) is a global certification scheme for electrical and
mechanical crafts persons and designers working in potentially explosive atmospheres.

The scheme is accredited by UKAS to ISO/IEC 17024. The scheme is broken down to twelve units
covering different actions and hazardous area concepts
4.4.8. Top End Overhaul

Minor disassembly for the engines components including the removal, inspection and rework of
the engines cylinder heads and replacement/service of some additional accessories and engine
components as per the OEM instructions.
4.4.9. Major/” Zero Hours” Overhaul

Major disassembly for the engines including the removal, inspection, exchange and rework
of all the engines components as per the OEM instructions. Including pistons, liners, bearings,
camshaft(s), gear train, flywheel and crankshaft.
4.4.10. Suitably Qualified Person

A person who is by knowledge, experience or training has successfully demonstrated the ability to
manage Top End and Major Overhauls of the rig main diesel engines
4.5. Inspection Requirements

4.5.1. Mast and substructure
4.5.1.1. CAT III Field Inspection (Every 2 years)
• A thorough visual inspection of all load bearing members, welds and pickup points must be
conducted to Determine the condition of the mast and substructure.
• Inspection will be conducted via an approved third party with Qualified Inspector
• Thorough visual inspection of all load bearing members, OEM welds and pickup points, also
identify corrosion points if any
• NDT-MPI & VT must be conducted to the following parts
- Main section pad eyes and OEM welds
- All Pad eyes distributed all over the mast and substructure
- Mast raising / lowering pad eyes
- All center pins
- Raising system including raising line, sheaves and center pins
- Yoke and its pad eyes including two center pins
• NDT – MPI and VT for hang off line, shackle, pad eyes, check original certificates for SWL
• Rig floor stairway pad eyes, pins and bolts
• All repairs to major damage require supervision of a Professional Engineer or an OEM agent.
• Repairs to minor Damage may be completed by operating personnel, after consulting with the
rig operator Field Support Manager, and do not Require certification. If there is any question
as to whether the damage is major or minor, a Professional Engineer or OEM agent shall be
consulted.
• Check the condition and content of the manufacturer’s name plate.
Below is the guide of thorough visual inspections needed to be carried out on the mast and
substructure (according to API 4G).
• Mast Legs DS, ODS, Rear Leg DS: Symmetry, Visible damage, Pin condition, Pin hole condition,
Safety pins/keepers
• Crown Support Beams: Pins & bolts, Safety pins/keepers, Welds
• Crown Saver Block(s): Safety cable, Block(s) condition, Attachment strapping, Strapping welds
• Ladders: Vertical rails straight Rails in alignment, Ladder stand offs, Standoff connections Rail
welds, Rungs Rung welds, Rung spacing, Access at rig floor, Cage, Toe clearance
• Raising, Telescoping and Guying Assemblies
- Hydraulic System: Raising ram condition Hose and hose ends, Connections

- Guy Line Anchorage: Anchors and dead man Acceptable, Turnbuckles, Cable clamps, Guy line
condition
- Locking Devices and Seats – Telescoping Masts: Pin hole(s), Pins, Safety pins/keepers, Bars/
dogs or pawls, Seats, Mechanism
• Tong Counterweights: Guides, Weight device, Sheaves/shafts, Wire lines, Cable clamps, Welds
• Miscellaneous Sheaves Assemblies: Clevis/shackle, Mast pad-eye, Sheaves, Bearings, Shafts,
Sheave bolt, Side plate bolts, Bolt safety pins, Grease fittings, Safety line
• Shoes: Pin connections, Pin holes, Bolt connections, Bolt holes, Pins/bolts, Safety pins, Support
beams Welds
• Floor Area: Floor plates, Handrails & toe boards, Handrail connections, Setback material, Floor
bracing ,Welds
• Sub-Spreaders and Rotary Beams: Rotary beams, Spreaders, Pin connections, Pin holes, Pins,
Pad-eyes, Welds
• Dead Line Anchor Mounting: Supports, Bolts, Flooring, Break over assembly, Handrails
Acceptable, Welds Substructure Components, Beams straight, Cross braces, Pin/bolt holes,
Pin/bolts, Safety pins, pull back posts, Draw works tie downs, Welds, BOP anchor pad-eyes,
Pad-eyes
• Raising System: Pin connections, Pin holes, Pins, Wire lines, Sheaves, Bearings, Seals, Grease
fittings, Hydraulic winches, Hydraulic cylinders, Hydraulic hoses, Cylinder hinge
4.5.1.2. Cat IV Full Inspection (every 10 years)
The entire mast must be inspected by a Professional Engineer or an Original Equipment
Manufacturer (OEM) or his agent. This inspection shall include but not limited to the following:
• Category III inspection in addition to the following:
• The equipment is to be disassembled and cleaned to the extent necessary to conduct NDT of
all defined critical areas.
• An ultrasonic thickness test is recommended on all tubular style (or closed style) members to
test for internal corrosion.
• All welds (100 %) shall be visually examined.
• All welds in critical areas shall be inspected using magnetic particle (MPI), liquid penetrant (PT)
or ultrasonic testing (UT) in accordance with AWS D1.1. Welds on galvanized structures may
require different inspection techniques and intervals. Cracks are generally identified through
visual inspection on a galvanized mast/derrick.
• Disassemble mast and substructure members
• Sand blasting must be performed for all mast and substructure members
• Perform NDT MPI for main section pad eyes and supporting eyes
• Perform NDT MPI or all must and substructure main pins 4.1.4.2.10. Disconnect raising sheaves
and complete NDT –MPI 4.1.4.2.11. Measure the bearing clearance and sheave grove
• 4.1.4.2.12. NDT MPI for raising Sheaves foundation base and raising pad eyes 4.1.4.2.13. Perform
NDT MPI for raising Yoke and its pad eyes including two Main pins 4.1.4.2.14. NDT MPI for
raising sockets and check the raising line previous records 4.1.4.2.15. NDT VT/MPI for mast cage
structure, connection eyes and
• NDTMPI for Rig tong counter balance track
• Check the all weep holes in good conditions and not blocked
• Review OEM inspection certificates
4.5.1.3. Inspection results
Any damage found during the inspection is defined as major, secondary, or minor, on theFollowing
basis.
• Major Damage: Significant geometrical distortion or structural damage to primary load carrying
components including raising assembly, main legs, hinge points and crown.
• Secondary Damage: Damage or distortion to non-primary load carrying components.
• Minor Damage: Damage or distortion to ancillary equipment, i.e. Ladders, monkey board, walk

around, tong hangers, etc

All damage may be repaired in the field Major damage should be repaired in a shop-like
environment and in accordance with the OEM or equivalent specifications.
Documentations and Records of the Inspection Results
Cat III & IV Certifications should include but not limited to the following:
• Type and style, serial number, PSL “product specification level”
• Name of manufacturer and date of manufacture,
• Clear height;
• Maximum rated static hook load, in pounds, with guy lines if applicable, for stated number of
lines to traveling block,
• Maximum combined rated static rotary and rated setback capacity on substructure,
• List of components and assembly drawings; critical areas should be clearly defined.
• Complete documented results for the full inspection.
• Date and period of certification.
• Date of next Recertification
Repairs or Modifications should be reported as below
• Complete documented results of any inspection reports,
• Date and documentation of all repairs performed accolated with “Approved WPS, MOC, etc. “
as applicable
• Significant defects (type, dimensions) reported,
• Location and extent of repairs,
• NDT methods used and results,
• Primary load carrying components replaced or modified,
• Date and location of repairs,
• Copy of NDT inspection’s qualifications,
• Copy of NDT inspectors and welder’s qualifications,
• Material certifications and traceability as applicable,
• Assembly drawings and documentation of all modifications,
• The date and the name of the qualified person(s) involved in the repair or modification.
4.5.2. Stabbing board and monkey board
4.5.2.1. CAT III Field Inspection – (Six month)
• Visual inspection and checking the main frame for bends, cracks, and deformations.
• Visual inspection and checking for all connections/mounting brackets and chains.
• Visual inspection and checking of the hoist (condition and wear).
• Visual inspection and checking the platform (inclination. Grating and handrails).
• Visually check the welding of the monkey board fingers and the safety chain wear, cracks or
deformation.
• Visually check the stabbing board anti-fall mechanism and positive stopper installed
underneath the track for any crack or deformation.
• Perform MPI on the connections and critical areas of the main frame.” Critical areas must be
identified in the rig inspection plan “by rig operator’s management at each rig
• Thorough visual inspection for whole structure,
• NDT-MPI for hanging connections
• NDT –VT for the shock absorber,
• NDT-MPI for main OEM welds
• NDT-MPI for the stopper and platform welding points
• Identify the SWL
• NDT –VT for Fall protection system

4.5.2.2. CAT IV Full Inspection – (Five years):

Complete the full Cat III every Six-month inspection in addition to the following:
• Sand blast the complete stabbing board/monkey board.
• Perform NDT-MPI on all identified load bearing and critical areas/components of the stabbing
board/monkey board as per the manufacturer’s specification.
• Complete overhaul (including load test) of the hoist.
• Repaint the stabbing board/monkey board.
• Complete disassemble the racking board
• Perform sand blasting for all main structure member
• Perform NDT- VT and MPI for finger OEM welding connections and check for bents or corrosion
or cracks
• NDT- VT /MPI for the whole fingers from all sides
• NDT –VT for fingers safety chains
• NDT MPI for safety chain foundation welding areas
• NDT-MPI for all racking board Pad eyes
• NDT-MPI for mast supporting pad eyes
• NDT-MPI for the whole structure of mast supporting beam
• Complete NDT MPI and VT for the Air winch including foundation plates brake system and wire
condition, complete NDT-MPI for drum
• NDT- VT for all fall arrestors devices
• NDT- MPI for all fall arrestor devices hanging points shackles, beams, links etc.
• NDT –MP/VT Escape devise and escape wire
Below is the guide of thorough visual inspections needed to be carried out on the monkey board
and stabbing board (according to API 4G and OEM ).
Pipe Racking Platform
Frame Straight, Pin Hole(s) , Pins , Safety Pins/Keepers , Frame Welds, Working Platform, Landing
Platform ,Handrails ,Ladder Access, Fingers Straight ,Finger Welds, Finger Safety Lin
Casing Stabbing Board
Frame Straight, Welds, Handrails, Working Platform, Hoisting Assembly, Hoist Mounting,Lower
Travel Stops, Pin or Bolt Holes, Pins or Bolts, Safety Pins/Keepers
Tubing Support/Belly Board
Frame Straight, Welds, Handrails, Pin Holes, Pins , Safety Pins/Keepers , Support Cables ,Cable
Connections
Casing Stabbing Board Safety Equipment
Limit switch, Stoppers, Automatic brakes, guardrails system, personnel securing system, Safe
working limit, load test report
4.5.3. Crown block

foreign material such as dirt, paint, grease, oil, scale, etc. Are actually removed from the concerned
parts by a suitable method (e.g. Paint-stripping, steam-cleaning, grit-blasting).
This inspection should be done while the drilling line is removed from the Draw works and the
crown sheaves are not subjected to any load.
4.5.3.1. Field Inspection – Cat III (six months)
• Visually check for damage, bent beams.
• Visually check the condition of the paint of the crown frame (including handrails).
• Check the access and safety aspects of the crown platform.

• Visually check for wear and damage of the “bumper block” and its safety wires and wire mesh
condition.
• Check the bolts and nuts and connections of the clusters (hammer check).
• Perform NDT-MPI & VT to Check the sheaves for wear, cracks including the fast line sheave and
main OEM welding areas
• Visually check the wear or tolerances of the bearings (fast line sheave and cluster bearing) with
a pry bar and check for equal spacing between sheaves.
• Perform MPI on weld areas of the cluster beams; hang off pad eye and jumper bars.
• Verify the sheaves groove depth and compare it with the maximum wear limits identified in
OEM recommendations.
• Check the free access and condition of the grease nipples
• Visual inspection for wear & damage of the bumper block
• Preform Check the bolts and nuts and connections of the clusters
• Perform Check the Condition of the grease nipples and safety aspects of the crown
• Perform NDT MPI and VT for crown supporting frame up and down OEM welds and loose
fastener
• Perform NDT MPI for All pad eyes up and down supporting frame
• Perform NDT-VT for the Fall arrestor devices and its hanging accessories and supports
4.5.3.2. Full Inspection – Cat IV (every five years)
Complete the full CAT III every six months’ inspection in addition to the following:
• Disassemble the crown block and ensure that all individual items, sheaves, bearings, seals etc.
Are cleaned (Mark or document the position of each of the components).
• Perform all required NDT inspections on the frame, sheaves and shafts according to ASME
codes and API Standard.
• Measure and document the wear of the sheaves (including the remaining wall thickness of the
sheave rim) and reference the value to OEM recommendations.
• Visual inspection for all snatch block and decide the condition of its bearing
• Visual check the snatch block safety wire
• Replace all bearings and seals.
• Reassemble the crown block and use the sheave with the largest remaining wall thickness
(shoulder thickness) as fast line sheave if applicable.
• Check the condition and content of the Serial Number plate.
4.5.3.3. General Notes
• A properly machined sheave groove allows a wire rope to pass through unhindered by friction
or obstructions.
• Sheaves should be checked periodically for wear in the grooves which may cause abrasion,
pinching, and bird- caging of the rope.
• If the groove shows signs of rope imprints the sheave must be replaced or re-machined and re-
hardened in accordance with OEM procedures and tolerances and Under OEM approval ONLY.
• Below is the guide of thorough visual inspections needed to be carried out on the monkey
board and stabbing board (according to API 8B and various OEM recommendations).
- General information (OEM and Name plate): Make / Model, sheaves Number, Cluster Sheave
Diameter, Fast Line Sheave Diameter
- Serviceability Condition: Sheaves , Grooves in Gage , Spacers or Seals , Grease Fittings ,
Bearings , Drilling Line Guards “ Jumper bar)
- Crown Platform: Decking Holes Covered, Safety Gate, Ladder Access, Handrails, Frame
Straight Welds condition Bolts and Nuts.
- Super Support Beams: Beam Straight, Pins and Bolts , Safety Pins/Keepers , Welds condition
- Pad-eyes Under the Crown Platform: SWL Marked, Welds condition, Pin Holes.
- Arrest/Climbing Assist Device Mounting: Support Gin-pole, Base, Sheave Attachment, Weight

Bucket Attach Welds condition, Pad Eyes.

- Crown Saver Block(s): Safety Mesh, Safety Cable, Block(s) Condition , Attachment Strapping,
Strapping Welds
- DROPS prevention: Upper supported beam, Under supported beam,
4.5.4. Traveling block
parts by a suitable method (e.g. Paint-stripping, steam-cleaning, grit-blasting).
This inspection should be done while Traveling block is laid down with sheaves not subjected to
any load.
4.5.4.1. Field Inspection – CAT III (six months)
• Visual check of the side plates and other load bearing items (connection to the hook, Elevator
link eyes etc.) For damage or cracks.
• Visually check for any missing locking pins of the block attachment connections.
• Visually check the accessed part of the sheaves for wear or cracks. Verify the groove depth and
compare it with the maximum wear limits identified in by OEM recommendations.
• Check the wear of the bearings (pry bar) and ensure equal spacing between sheaves.
• Check the condition and content of the Manufacturer’s Name plate.
• Check condition of the paint.
• Prepare and submit the inspection report.
4.5.4.2. Full Inspection – CAT IV (Five years)
Complete the full CAT III every six months’ inspection in addition to the following:
• Fully disassemble the traveling block and clean all individual items. Mark or document the
position of the components.
• Perform all required NDT inspections on the side plates, sheaves hub/web welding areas, shaft
and other load bearing items. Mark any crack, damage or “out of tolerances wear” visible on
the items.
• Measure and document the wear of the sheaves (including the remaining wall thickness of the
sheave rim) and reference the value to OEM recommendations
• Reassemble the traveling block using new bearings and seals. Use the sheave with the largest
remaining wall thickness (shoulder thickness) as the “fastest” sheave.
• Check the condition and content of the Serial Number plate.
Below is the guide of thorough visual inspections needed to be carried out on the monkey board
and stabbing board (according to API 8B and various OEM recommendations)
• Traveling Block Assembly: Serial Number, Sheaves Number, Sheave Diameter
• Serviceability conduction: Sheaves, Grooves in Gage, Spacers or Seals, Grease Fittings,
Bearings, Drilling Line Guards
• Block Attachment: Pins and Bolts, Safety Pins / Keepers, Welds
Note: Any defects found must be reported to the Technical Operations group for the correct
remedial actions.
4.5.5. Drilling hook / hook block combination

parts by a suitable method (e.g. Paint-stripping, steam- cleaning, grit-blasting).
Note: Any defects found must be reported to the rig operators maintenance/ assets integrity
manager for the correct remedial actions

4.5.5.1. Field Inspection – Cat III (six months)

• Visually check the hook body and other load bearing items (link ears, hook, bail and bail
support) for
• Damage or cracks.
• If found any initiation of cracks in the load bearing areas, MPI is recommended to verify the
crack condition.
• Visually check bail pins, tongue latch pins and all locking nuts and cotter pins for any damage,
looseness or missing parts.
• Check to insure tongue latch operates properly and tongue swings freely.
• Check for fluid leaks. Check the bearing clearance.
• Check the condition of the paint.
4.5.5.2. Full Inspection – Cat IV (Five years)
Complete the full Cat III every six-month inspection in addition to the following:
• Fully disassemble the hook and clean all individual items.
• Mark or document the position of the components.
• MPI the upper bow and bolts, link ears, hook, spring and retainer pin of the latch assembly and
critical areas of the body.
• Mark any crack, damage or “out of tolerances wear” visible on the items.
• Measure and document the wear of bearing and link ears, bail and hook area and compare it
with API spec 8C.
• Check the condition of the Manufacturer’s name plate.
• Reassemble the Drilling hook and fill up oil. Check for oil leaks.
• Carry out one function test (dampening and rotation of the snubber).
Note : Any defects found must be reported to the rig operators maintenance/ assets integrity
manger for the correct remedial actions
4.5.6. Top drive systems

4.5.6.1. Field Inspection Cat III (every six months)
• Visually check the welds on the top drive frame, guard, mounts and supports for cracks or
damage.
• Visually check the condition of all bolted connections (including lock pins).
• Visually check pins and pin holes for wear and damage.
• Visually check hydraulic cylinders, hoses, fittings and connectors and check for any oil leaks.
• Visually check the guide rails (or torque tubes) for any wear, damage, proper assembly and
alignment.
• Visually inspect the “hang off” line (including shackles, bolts, nuts etc.) And MPI the connections
of the hang off line.
• Visually check the condition of blower frame welds and junction boxes mounted on top drive
unit.
• Remove the wash pipe assembly; check the upper quill shaft liner or connection for any erosion
and measure the shaft end play (compare the measurement with OEM maximum limits)
• All required NDT inspections for critical areas as per manufacturer’s recommendation (including
the pipe handler link tilt catches /retainers – link tilt cylinders ends – link tilt clamps).
4.5.6.2. Gooseneck Assembly Inspection – (Two years)
• Completely disassemble the gooseneck assembly and remove it from the top drive bonnet.
• Visually inspect the mud line pipe, S pipe, hammer unions, seals, and threads for any damage,
pitting or
• Excessive corrosion.

• Perform all required NDT inspections “PT (Liquid penetrant)/MPI..etc inspection on all the
hammer unions and wireline plug threads.
• Perform a wall thickness measurement (UT) on the mud line, extension pipe and S-pipe and
compare it with
• The OEM and ASME B31.3 minimum requirements.
• Check the condition of secondary retention between the gooseneck and rotary hose
Complete the full Cat III every six months inspection in addition to the following:
• Fully disassemble the top drive to the extent necessary to permit full inspection,
• MPI/measurement of all primary load carrying components and other Components which are
critical to the equipment, as per manufacturer’s instructions.
• Measure and record the wear of the guide rails or torque tubes and compare with maximum
allowable tolerances as per OEM.
• Drive motor
- Completely disassemble the motor.
- Steam clean the internal metal and insulated parts with a non-caustic cleaner (Do not exceed
30 to 40 PSI steam pressure).
- Blow out the inside of the stator with clean, dry compressed air.
- Check the insulation resistance of the stator and rotor coils and record results.
- Varnish and bake the motor coils.
- Replace the drive and connection end bearings.
- Conduct a dimensional measurement on the armature shaft including the bearings fit area.
- Conduct an MPI on the armature shaft to check any cracks or discontinuities.
- Check the condition of the hub/pinion and brake pads/discs; replace if they are not complying
with the OEM requirements.
- Reassemble the motor.
- Follow OEM overhauling procedures and requirements and international standards
Moreover, CAT IV shall include but may not be limited to:
Drilling motors
• Remove and fully overhaul the drilling motor(s)
• MPI the pinion gear and brake hub after installation back on motor shaft
• On re-installation replace all O-rings, gaskets.
• Torque the motor bolts and record torque value in the work order notes
• Measure the pinion to compound gear backlash
• Record measured value in the work order notes or data book
• Follow OEM overhauling procedures and requirements and international standard
Gearbox
• Remove lower gear case
• Remove bull gear and NDT bull gear hub
• Remove compound gear assemblies
• Strip down High and Low gear assemblies
• Visually inspect and MPI High and Low gear assemblies
• Strip down main shaft assembly “
• Grit blast and NDT upper and lower gear case bodies and bonnet
• Thoroughly clean and re-assemble all parts and subassemblies with new bearings and seals
• Follow OEM overhauling procedures and requirements and international standards
Cooling system
• Strip and clean spark arrestors
• Clean and inspect ducting for holes or other damage, replacing as required
• Remove the blower motor assembly and clean thoroughly

• Repair or replace impellor if necessary

• Overhaul of electrical motor
Brake assembly
• Disassemble and inspect for damage, overheating and corrosion
• Perform all required NDT inspections for Brake mechanism
• Replace worn pads / Brake blocks
• Thoroughly clean and re-assemble brake
• Follow OEM overhauling procedures and requirements and international standards
Lubrication system
• Replace or fully overhaul the lube oil pump
• Overhaul electrical motor
• H. Follow OEM overhauling procedures and requirements and international standard s
Counter balance system
• Grit blast and MPI chains, clevises, pins and pear links (shackles)
• Inspect and recharge accumulator bottles.
• If accumulator bottles are older than 10 years, they must be renewed
• Pressure test counterbalance relief valve
• Overhaul counterbalance cylinders, pressure test and recharge with Nitrogen
• Overhaul counterbalance valves
• Rotating Head: o Completely strip down
• Check bores of clevises for wear and MPI clevis and clevis mountings
• Inspect actuating cylinder and indexing mechanism
Main Shaft
• Strip down main shaft assembly
• Full visual and dimensional inspection, MPI and UT inspection
• Inspect landing collar area for wear or damage, measure landing collar groove,
• Measure shaft outside diameter, measure shaft inside diameter
• Inspect spline for wear, Measure and record main shaft end play
Bonnet assembly
• Remove the S-Pipe assembly
• Inspect flange surfaces for damage, corrosion or signs of wash out o
• Carry out wall thickness test on wash pipe
• Remove gooseneck and inspect flange surfaces for damage, corrosion or signs of wash out.
• Carry out U/T wall thickness for gooseneck
• Remove wash pipe assembly and replace with new wash pipe and seals
IBOP
• Strip down IBOP assembly
• MPI actuator shell and connections
Pipe handler
• Complete strip down and grid blast
• MPI support shaft, jaws, frame, shaft welds, torque tube, stabilizer, actuator mechanism, guards
and all pins
• Overhaul and renew seal kits of all hydraulic cylinders Link tilt assembly

• Complete strip down, grit blast and MPI base, lever assembly and stop assembly
Swivel yoke
• Grit blast and MPI yoke, lugs and pins
• Measure and record pin shaft clearance
Dolly frame and torque bar
• Completely strip down
• NDT inspection of all dolly wheel pins and all dolly wheels (Renew if cracks are found)
• Inspect (renew) dolly wheels
• NDT inspections of entire torque bar Upon completion, all bolts and nuts need to be secured
• With locking wire for DROPS as per OEM instructions.
• Details of replacement parts installed shall be noted on the certification.
• All areas measured and calipered shall be noted against OEM tolerance on the report.
All the above are considered as a Minimum requirement guideline and instructions which shall
meet the OEM requirements and international standards
Note : Top drives will be subjected to a dyno test for electrical and hydraulic systems at the
discretion of rig operator’s maintenance managers.
4.5.7. Elevator links

Ensure that elevator links is thoroughly cleaned prior to commencing any inspection and all
parts by a suitable method (e.g. Paint- stripping, steam-cleaning, grit-blasting).
4.5.7.1. Full Inspection – Cat III (Six Months)
• Check the Serial No. And Manufacturer’s stamps.
• Visually check the Elevator Links for damage or cracks.
• NDT MPI/UT the whole link, measure the eye thickness for wear, identification on both eyes.
• Measure length, elongation and check straightness of both links.
• Down grade the links as necessary according to the actually measurement compared by OEM
requirements
4.5.7.2. Full Inspection – Cat IV (Annually)
• Check the Serial No. And Manufacturer’s stamps.
• Sand blast links as per the requirements of the qualified inspector.
• Visually check the Elevator Links for damage or cracks.
• MPI the whole link, measure the eye thickness for wear identification on both eyes.
• Measure length and check straightness of both links.
• Down grade the links as necessary according to the measured wear to the new maximum load
limits.
4.5.8. DP, DC, Elevators, Inspection Requirements
Ensure that elevator links is thoroughly cleaned prior to commencing any inspection and all
parts by a suitable method (e.g. Paint- stripping, steam-cleaning, grit-blasting).
4.5.8.1. Full Inspection – Cat III (every six months)
• Measure the wear on the body parts, door, hinge pin, latch, latch pin, latch spring stop, latch
lock bolt, door lock pin, latch cam and all other load bearing components and compare the
measurements with the maximum wear tolerances.
• MPI all of the above items as per the relevant API and manufacturer’s manuals.
• For Y-type Elevators: check the slip visually, inserts, slip bolts, insert retainers, slip setting rings

and guide plates for damage or wear.

• MPI the following items: slip elements, slip bolts, insert retainers and guide plates.
• Measure clearance of hinge pin, latch pin and link ear thickness.
• Inspect the wire line of the single joint elevators for any damage, kinks etc.
• Measure bore taper angle, ID and height of center bore of type B and G elevators, Measure ID
and thickness of top and bottom bore of R, T and S type elevators.
• Reassemble the elevator with new springs.
• Sand blast the elevator to the qualified inspector’s requirements.
• Measure the wear on the body parts, door, hinge pin, latch, latch pin, latch spring stop, latch
lock bolt, door lock pin, latch cam and all other load bearing components and compare the
measurements with the maximum wear tolerances.
• MPI all of the above items as per the relevant API and manufacturer’s manuals.
• For Y-type Elevators: check the slip visually, inserts, slip bolts, insert retainers, slip setting rings
and guide plates for damage or wear.
• MPI the following items: slip elements, slip bolts, insert retainers and guide plates.
• Measure clearance of hinge pin, latch pin and link ear thickness.
• Inspect the wire line of the single joint elevators for any damage, kinks etc.
• Measure bore taper angle, ID and height of center bore of type B and G elevators, Measure ID
and thickness of top and bottom bore of R, T and S type elevators.
• Reassemble the elevator with new springs.
Note:
Any defects found must be reported to rig management for the correct remedial actions.
Any repair and/or welding only to be done by a qualified company according to the OEM’s
instructions. Load test after repairs is required with additional MPI after the load test.
4.5.9. Rotary table

4.5.9.1. Field Inspection – Cat III (every two years)
• Review all PMS records before starting CAT III inspection
• Take the rotary table (or the complete rotary table skid) out of the substructure.
• Check the connections from the rotary table to the rotary beams and to the skid visually for any
damage or cracks.
• Check the rotary manual lock system (pin and hole) for any damage or cracks.
• Check the “back lash” and the condition of the sprocket or the coupling.
• Perform MPI on the lock pins and the connection system to the rotary beams and skid.
• Measure the table opening and master bushing for proper fit and any damage or wear.
• Check the condition of the manufacturer’s name plate.
• Check the paint condition of the table and the complete skid.
• Check the Condition of the air brake housing
• Confirm that Electrical cables and J-boxes are designed to work in hazardous areas EX
• Check Noise and vibration levels periodically
• Ensure that DC motor air suction from outside the hazardous areas and spark arrestor on the
discharge side
• Check the condition of the main bearingEnsure the Condition of the Safety matting around
rotary table
• Verify the Locking system through function test
• Function test 120 rpm for 30 minutes in on right-hand rotation
• Function test left-hand rotation at slow speed
• Check Bushing pullers to be included in the Lifting-Gear Register and NDT inspections

• Check that Rotary table DC motor equipped with spark arrestors.

• Check that the purge alarm sensor installed in between the spark arrestors
• Check the bearings and bearing race serviceability condition
• Check for wear indications in the tapered inserts and master bushings
• Check the condition of Anti-slip matting must
• Preform NDT – MPI for all installation safety Pins and housing
Complete the full Cat III every two years’ inspection in addition to the following:
• Take off the main rotary table cover and inspect the condition of the main bearings.
• Clean the rotary table housing completely.
• Check in detail the condition of the gear box and drive components such as the sprockets,
couplings and propeller shafts (if applicable).
• Preform NDT- MPI/UT Complete inspection for Rotary table, Muster bushing and inserts as Per
required by standard reference and OEM requirements
Note: The above are the minimum Requirements and User shall follow and comply with OEM
requirements and international standards
4.5.10. Kelly drive bushing

4.5.10.1. Field Inspection – Cat III (Six months)
• Dismantle the kelly drive bushing.
• Visually check the rollers, drive pins, cover plate and bolts and nuts for any damage or cracks.
• Applying NDT for all critical areas based on OEM requirements and applicable international
standards
• Check the wear of the roller bearings.
• Measure the wear of the rollers, drive pins (for pin drive). Refer to the manufacturer’s wear
limits.
• Perform MPI on all critical welds on the housing and the drive pins and check the threads of the
“hold down bolts” for damage or cracks.
• Check the condition and details of the manufacturer’s name plate.
• Check the paint condition and repaint as required.
• Assemble the drive bushing and carry out one function test. Check for any loose items.
4.5.10.2. Full Inspection – Cat IV (Two years)
• Complete the full Cat III every six month inspection in addition to the following:
• Fully disassemble the Kelly drive bushing and measure and record all main components and
compare measurements with wear limits.
• Perform MPI on all main items per the manufacturer’s specification.
• Rig Contractors have to follow OEM procedures and applicable international standards
4.5.11. Master bushing
• Visually check the master bushing for any damage or cracks.
• Measure the wear of the bushing. Refer to the manufacturer’s wear limits.
• Perform MPI on the master bushing and pin.
• Check the availability and condition of the manufacturer’s Serial No.
• Grease the bushing.


Note 1: inspection is the most important aspect of preventive maintenance, the Inspection consists
of observing, measuring, and testing.
Note 2: There is wear in the 1D of the rotary table which gives insufficient support for the master
bushing itself.
- The OD of the master bushing is worn.
- There is excessive wear in the taper and the throat 10.
Note 3: the below mentioned checks are considered as guideline and instructions and rig
contractors have to follow the OEM recommendations and applicable international standards
• Visually check the master bushing for any damage or cracks.
• Measure the wear of the bushing. Refer to the manufacturer’s wear limits.
• Perform MPI on the master bushing and pin.
• Check the availability and condition of the manufacturer’s Serial No.
• Check top diameter of bushing bore and inspect bowl seat for burrs and peened-over edges;
• File or grind flush as required. This procedure will ensure easy installation and proper fit.
• Grease the bushing.
• Repaint as required.
Note 1: Any defects found must be reported to Rig management for the correct remedial actions.
4.5.12. Insert bowls

4.5.12.1. Full Inspection – Cat IV (every six months)
• Remove both Half of the Drilling Bowls outside of master bushing using proper lifting chain
Sling.
• Visually inspect the inner and outer surface areas of the bowl for any burrs and peened-over
edges.
• Clean the inside taper of the insert bowls from any abrasive materials.
• Hold a straight edge against the tapered area to measure the tapper length (It should be as per
the OEM recommendations).
• Measure the taper angle & throat diameter and compare with the OEM recommendations.
• Perform MPI on the recess and load bearing areas of the Drilling Bowls.
• After completing the inspection, Lubricate the back of the drilling Bowls before assembling in
the master bushing.
• Insert the drilling bowls inside the master bushing using the proper lifting chain sling.
• Observe the height of set slips in the master bushing and ensure that it is not riding low in it
(master bushing can also share the reason).
• Remove both Half of the Drilling Bowls outside of master bushing using proper lifting chain
Sling.
• Visually inspect the inner and outer surface areas of the bowl for any burrs and peened-over
edges.
• Clean the inside taper of the insert bowls from any abrasive materials.
• Hold a straight edge against the tapered area to measure the tapper length (It should be as per
the OEM recommendations).
• Measure the taper angle & throat diameter and compare with the OEM recommendations.
• Perform the required NDT inspections on the recess and load bearing areas of the Drilling
Bowls based on the international standards and applicable international standards.
• After completing the inspection, Lubricate the back of the drilling Bowls before assembling in
the master bushing.
• Insert the drilling bowls inside the master bushing using the proper lifting chain sling.
• Observe the height of set slips in the master bushing and ensure that it is not riding low in it

(master bushing can also share the reason).

• Replace the API drilling bowls when throat measurement exceeds 10.718 inches (276 mm) on
extended API bowls or based on the OEM requirements or other applicable standards
4.5.13. DP, DC, casing slips and power slips
• Visually check the slips for any damage, missing parts or cracks.
• Dismantle the slips as far as possible into single components.
• For Power slips: visually check the split top cover, slip hangers, split bowl assembly split guide
ring, springs, hinged connections and slips for any damage.
• For Rotary, DC and Casing slips: visually check for damage, deformation or cracks on the hinge
brackets, slip segments with tail slots, handles and hinge pin.
• Perform MPI as per Manufacturer’s recommendation of hinged connections, body (inside and
outside) handles, guide halves, slip hangers, slips, top cover halves etc.
• Measure the wear of the hinge connections, door and pin holes, dovetail slots etc. As per
manufacturer’s recommendation.
• Reassemble the slips, grease and paint.
• Check the condition and content of the name plates or stamped part No’s.
• For Power slips: Perform one function test.
Note : Any defects found must be reported to the rig management for the correct remedial
actions.
4.5.14. Spider / elevator

4.5.14.1. Field Inspection – Cat III (every six months)
• Disassemble the units as far as necessary and possible and clean all single parts.
• Check all components visually for any cracks, damage and bends etc.
• Perform MPI on hinged connections, body (inside and outside) including guide pin cases, guide
halves, slip hangers, slips and top cover halves.
• For Spiders: Visually check for damage and wear on the yoke assembly, slip lock assembly,
body (inside and outside), door, door pins, guide plate assemblies, hinge pins, insert retainers,
link blocks with link block pins, slips and dovetail slots.
• MPI body (inside and outside), yoke, slips, hinge connections, door, door pins, guide plate assy.
And link blocks.
• Check condition and details of the manufacturer’s name plates.
• Assemble the units and refurbish painting and marking as required.
4.5.14.2. Full Inspection – Cat IV (every one year)
• Disassemble the spider / elevator completely.
• Measure and record all main components and compare with wear limits.
• Perform full MPI as per manufacturer’s requirement.
4.5.15. Safety clamp
• Visually check for cracks, deformation, missing cotter pins, deformed nuts, broken slip springs
and movement of slips.
• Visually check all threads for wear and stretching.
• Perform full NDT- MPI on all slip elements, pins and hold studs.
• Check dies wear crack and serviceability condition “Replaced if needed “

• Reassemble the clamp.

• Lubricate and preserve safety clamp.
• Check main body for Wear, distortion, damage, nicks, gouges, cracks, corrosion, etc.
• Check Jaws for Wear, distortion, damage, nicks, gouges, cracks, corrosion, etc.
• Check suspension points for Wear, distortion, damage, nicks, gouges, cracks, corrosion, etc.
• Check clamp mechanism and serviceability
• Dismantle the safety clamp components.
• Visually check for cracks, deformation, missing cotter pins, deformed nuts, broken slip springs
and movement of slips.
• Visually check the threads.
• Perform full NDT- MPI on all slip elements, pins and hold studs.
• Check dies wear crack and serviceability condition
• Reassemble the clamp.
• Lubricate and preserve safety clamp.
4.5.16. Manual tongs for DP, DC and casing
• Clean the surface from oil, grease, sand, paint and loose rust which may interfere with
satisfactory inspection.
• Carry out MPI according to OEM requirements and applicable international standards
• Measure hinge pins and hinge pin holes for wear (see OEM’s recommendation for max.
Clearance).
• Examinations must be performed with sufficient overlap to ensure 100% coverage of the area or
part under inspection.
• Carry out the required NDT inspections according to ASTM E709 and compare defects to ASTM
E125
• This inspection should include NDT of critical areas and will involve disassembly the tong to
access specific components and to identify wear that exceeds the manufacturer’s allowable
tolerances.
• Disassemble the tongs.
• Visually check all main components (lever, long jaw, latch lug jaw, short jaw, latch, hinge law) for
damage, bending or cracks.
• Measure hinge pins and hinge pin holes for wear (see OEM’s recommendation for max.
Clearance).
• Perform NDT- MPI on lever, long jaw, latch lug jaw, hinge jaw, hinge pins, latch and hanger.
Disassemble the following parts of the tong for dimensional check according to maximum
allowable wear:
- Hinge pins
- Latch pins
- Hinge pin holes
- Latch pin holes
- Jaws/Latches
- Reassemble tongs and repaint and grease as required.
Note: Maximum allowable wear to maintain 100% torque rating should be recorded and cross
referenced against OEM wear data

4.5.17. Kelly spinner

• Break off the kelly spinner from the kelly.
• Visually check the bearing clearance and check for any damage, wear or cracks.
• Visually check the air or hydraulic system (piping, hoses, fittings, filters etc.)
• Disassemble the air (or hydraulic) motor from the spinner housing and visually check the
condition of the motors (bearing clearance, condition of shaft, sprocket etc.)
• Perform the required ndton the threads, hinge eyes of turnbuckles and upsets of stem.
• Measure the thread of the kelly drive sub for pin stretching and bore diameter.
• Visually check the pinion, gears, spinner body (inside and outside), inner threads and sealing of
connections for damage and wear.
• Reassembly the kelly spinner and repaint as required.
• Check condition and details of the manufacturer’s name plate.
• Fully disassemble the kelly spinner and the drive components.
• Measure and record all main components and compare with wear limits.
• After repair (if applicable) carry out function test and performance test to the maximum torque.
4.5.18. Draw works brake bands & linkages
4.5.18.1. Field Inspection - (Six months)
• Hang off traveling block and/or top drive (if applicable) on the dedicated hang off line or clamp
device.
• Visually check the bands for any bends, twists, damage or cracks.
• Carefully check the correct installation, alignment and adjustment of the brake linkage system
according to the OEM’s recommendation.
• Perform NDT on the brake bands(dead and live end) and all connecting items such as brackets
(including pins and holes), extension rods, equalizer beam with pins and brackets, eye bolts,
bearing blocks (including the fastening bolts and nuts).
• Check for the correct length, position and condition of the main brake lever.
• Visually check the brake rims for grooving defects, uneven wear or cracks as per IADC drilling
manual, Chapter F “Measure and record the wear, brake rim and water jacket thickness”.
• Reassemble all items and repaint as required.
4.5.18.2. Full Inspection (each Five years)
Complete the full Cat III every six-month inspection in addition to the following based on the OEM
requirements and international applicable standards:
• Completely disassemble the brake system and measure and record all items and compare with
wear limits.
• Remove all air, water and lubrication piping and inspect condition.
• Remove all copper grease piping.
• Remove all chains and inspect condition.
• Disassemble and inspect all control valves.
• Remove foot throttle control valve, disassemble and inspect condition.
• Remove oil lube pump, disassemble and inspect condition.
• Disassemble rope rollers and inspect condition.
• Remove make-up and breakout catheads, disassemble for inspection.
• Remove transmission shifter, disassemble and inspect condition.
• Remove transmission shifter cylinder, disassemble and inspect condition.

• Remove braking system and brake bands, disassemble and inspect condition.
• Remove sand reel brake system and brake bands, disassemble and inspect condition.
• Remove drum-shaft, disassemble clutches and bearings for inspection.
• Remove transmission output shaft, disassemble for inspection of bearings.
• Remove transmission input shaft, disassemble for inspection of bearings.
• Remove low drum drive shaft, disassemble for inspection of bearings.
• Remove sand reel / cat-shaft, disassemble for inspection.
• Sand blast Draw works frame, guards and braking system.
• Inspect Draw works frame for any corrosion to main structural members
• Metal Particle Inspection should be carried out on all disassembled shafts, braking system and
all load bearing areas in accordance with ASTM E-709.
• Prepare inspection and NDT MPI reports, repair recommendations, digital photographs of
disassembly and assembly, parts list to expedite the CO
Note: All the above mentioned instructions are considered minimum requirements
4.5.19. Draw works disc brake

4.5.19.1. Field Inspection (Six months)
• Hang off traveling block on the dedicated hang off line or clamp device.
• Disassemble the components of the brake system that requires inspection.
• Clean the Caliper Arms and associated mounting components allowing visual inspection.
• Visually inspect all Brake structural members (calipers support arms, levers, connecting pins,
shoe pins,etc.) For any cracks, corrosion or Weld defects. MPI is encouraged in case of any signs
of cracks are found.
• Replace any worn components as required.
• Perform spring force testing and ensure the spring stiffness is as per the manufacturer`s
recommendations Replace if required.
• Verify the brake disc thickness and ensure that it’s within the manufacturer`s recommendations
and check for any signs of cracks.
• Verify brake blocks for wear (Replace Brake Blocks if their thickness has reached the minimum
limit as the manufacturer`s recommendations).
• Carry out brake efficiency test as per OEM guidance and record in the PMS.
4.5.19.2. Full Inspection (Five years)
Complete the full Cat III every six-month inspection in addition to the following:
• Completely disassemble the brake system.
• MPI all Brake structural members (calipers support arms, levers, connecting Pins, Shoe springs,
shoe pins,
• Backing Plates) for any cracks, corrosion or Weld defects. Replace any worn components as
required.
• Replace brake discs, brake blocks, calipers, springs, oil seals.
• Carry out brake efficiency test as per OEM guidance
4.5.20. Deadline anchor
4.5.20.1. Field Inspection – Cat III (Six months)
• Hang off the top drive or travelling block, as applicable, on the dedicated hang off line or clamp
and remove the drilling line from the dead line anchor drum.
• Visually check the anchor and foundation bolts, clamp with slips, line guards, bearing cap nuts,
and bolts for any damage, corrosion and abnormal wear.

• Check the bearing clearance.

• Using a pry bar check for drum assembly to verify no play/wobbling.
• Visually check all the welding areas of the base assembly, line guards and the line clamp
assembly. If in doubt, MPI should be carried out.
• Visually check the load cell for any leakage and damage and use the correct clearance gauge
for checking of proper installation.
• Recharge with instrument fluid and recalibrate if necessary.
• Check Air gap records
Note: This inspection should be done while the dead line anchor is not subjected to any load.
Complete the full Cat III every six-month inspection in addition of the following:
• Remove the dead line anchor from the foundation.
• Disassemble the dead line anchor and perform MPI on the critical areas and foundation as per
Manufacturer’s recommendation.
• Carry out a Dimensional inspection.
• Replace Bearings, seals and any items that are deemed unserviceable.
• If any remanufacture of the Deadline Anchor is deemed necessary, then all such repairs shall be
carried out in accordance with API spec 8C.
• Rebuild the anchor as required.
• Reinstall the anchor using new bolts of the correct grade and size as per OEM.
Note: Any defects found must be reported to the rig management for the correct remedial
actions.
4.5.21. Lifting plugs and subs

4.5.21.1. Full Inspection (every six months)
• Prepare lifting plug or sub for MPI (remove paint etc.). Visually check the body, thread and lifting
bail (if applicable) for any damage wear or cracks.
• Perform MPI on thread and bail welding area (if applicable).
• Measure and record threads, ID of pin, lifting plate diameter, check for pin stretching.
• Check the serial numbers.
4.5.22. Tubular lifting cap
4.5.22.1. Full Inspection CAT IV (Six months)
• Clean the thread with cleaning wire brush.
• Visually inspect the thread and check for any galling or corrosion.
• Perform MPI inspection on the threaded areas (recommended the wet fluorescent magnetic
particles method) and put it out of service if found any cracks check for thread stretching and
wear.
• Check box swells or pin stretch using lead gauge. The allowable elongation should be within
the tolerance range as per the OEM recommendations.
• Conduct a Visual inspection on bail area and check for any nicks or gouging.
• Perform required NDT inspection ”MPI/UT” on all bail area including welding points.
• Perform a dimensional measurement on bail throat area and check for the deformation, throat
opening, and wear limit. Any values exceed the manufacturer recommendations limits shall be
cause of rejection.
• A load test certificate should be available, if not carry out load test by qualified inspector.

4.5.23. Utility /truck/ substructure raising winches

4.5.23.1. Fields Inspection CAT III (Six Month) By a Qualified Inspector
• Isolate the winch by shutting off the air, unwind the winch line from the drum and inspect the
line visually for any kinks, broken lines and other damage.
• Remove the winch from the foundation plate or mounting brackets.
• Visually check all outside parts of the winch (including the spooling device and control valves)
for proper installation and any damage or wear.
• Perform NDT on the brake band and associated components.
• Perform NDT on winch connecting points to the mounting bracket or plate, bolts, clamp area
etc. As per manufacturer’s recommendations
• Ensure the SWL is clearly marked.
• Perform NDT on the turndown sheave attachment point in the mast.
• Perform inspection on all line attachments (turndown sheave, shackles, swivels etc).
4.5.23.2. Full Inspection CAT IV (Annually) By a Qualified Inspector
line visually for any kinks, broken lines and other damage.
• Perform NDT over the foundations plates and pins
• Perform NDT on the brake band and associated components.
• Perform NDT on winch connecting points to the mounting bracket or plate, bolts, clamp area
etc. As per manufacturer’s recommendations
• Ensure the SWL is clearly marked.
• Perform NDT on the turndown sheave attachment point in the mast.
• Perform inspection on all line attachments (turndown sheave, shackles, swivels etc).
• Reinstall the winch.
• Carry out load test (to the SWL) based on OEM requirements and international applicable
standards
4.5.24. Man riding winches
4.5.24.1. Field inspection (Six Month)
line visually for any kinks, broken wires and other damage.
• Visually check the brake band components and mechanism for wear or damage.
• Perform MPI on winch connecting points to the mounting bracket or plate, bolts, clamp area
etc. And on all main components as per manufacturer’s recommendation.
• Repaint the winch (including the SWL marking) as required.
4.5.24.2. Full Inspection (every one year)
line visually for any kinks, broken wires and other damage.
• Disassemble the complete winch including drive components.

• Visually check the brake band components and mechanism for wear or damage.
• Perform MPI on winch connecting points to the mounting bracket or plate, bolts, clamp area
etc. And on all main components as per manufacturer’s recommendation.
• Repaint the winch (including the SWL marking) as required.
• Reinstall the winch.
• Carry out load test (to the SWL).
4.5.25. Rotary swivels
• Visually check the body, bail, bottom connection and gooseneck for any damage, wear or
cracks.
• Replace (if not already done) the 2” thread connection on top of the gooseneck with one butt
welded connection.
• MPI the critical load bearing items of the swivel like the bail, bail connection and bottom
connection.
• Carry out wall thickness measurement of the gooseneck.
• Disassemble the Rotary Swivel to the extent necessary to conduct MPI/PT of all primary load
carrying
• Components as defined by manufacturer and ensure that all individual items are cleaned (Mark
or document the position of each of the components).
• Measure and document the wear of all components as necessary.
• If any remanufacture of the Rotary Swivel is deemed necessary then all such repairs shall be
carried out in accordance with API RP 8B and OEM recommendations.
• Replace all bearings and seals.
• Reassemble the Rotary Swivel.
• Check and record the condition and content of the Serial Number plate.
• Prepare and submit an inspection report which should contain all details related to the
inspection, remanufacture and reassembly of the Rotary Swivel.
4.5.26. D. spools, flanges, diverter & valves
• Visually check the equipment for any damage or cracks.
• Measure and record the ring joint grooves, flange thickness, bolt hole size and number of holes.
• Perform MPI on the welds between the body and flanges.
• Pressure test to maximum working pressure and record.
• Check the manufacturer’s name plate or stamps.
• Check the material certificates of the equipment and if they are missing or incomplete conduct a
material test.
• Repaint the equipment as required.

4.5.27. Hub clamps

4.5.27.1. Fields Inspection – Category III (verify Six month)
• Visually check the clamp and clamp with bolt and nut for any damage or cracks.
• Perform MPI on the hub and the clamp (including the bolt) and the weld between the hub and
body (if any).
• Check the manufacturer’s name plate or stamp.
4.5.27.2. Full Inspection – Category IV (every five years)
• Visually check the clamp and clamp with bolt and nut for any damage or cracks.
• Measure and record the hub details, bolt and nut size.
• Perform MPI on the hub and the clamp (including the bolt) and the weld between the hub and
body (if any).
• Check the manufacturer’s name plate or stamp.
• Check the material certificates of the equipment and if they are missing or incomplete conduct a
material test.
• Refurbish painting of the equipment as required.
4.5.28. Ram type bop
4.5.28.1. Field Inspection – Cat III after “ up to 2 years from the last CAT IV inspection Upon
commencement to new well the following to be performed as a minimum
- Visually check the body, flanges, bonnet bolts, threads and other main components for
damage, wear or cracks.
- Visually check sealing surfaces on the body, door, piston, intermediate flange, ram change
piston, ram change cylinder and operating cylinder.
- Inspect all rubber seals, gaskets, O-rings and Ram packing; replace components according to
their physical condition.
- Perform pressure testing and drawdown test and record the Closing and opening time
• Each two year from the Last CATIV the following inspection shall be performed
- Completely disassemble the BOP.
- Visually check the body, flanges, bonnet bolts, threads and other main components for
damage, wear or cracks.
- Visually check sealing surfaces on the body, door, piston, intermediate flange, ram change
piston, ram change cylinder and operating cylinder.
- Inspect all rubber seals, gaskets, O-rings and Ram packing; replace components according to
their physical condition.
- Measure and record the wear on the ram cavities & all bonnets and check for cracks.
- Measure and record flange ring grooves (lower, upper and side outlets).
- Reassemble the BOP.
- Carry out NDT based on the OEM requirement and international applicable standards
- Carry out function test (with rams installed).
Note: In case of three years schedule major inspection is contractually required; the field inspection
will not be performed with the precautions that BOP cavities condition and measurements are being
verified every one year.
4.5.28.2. Full Inspection – Cat IV (every five years) By OEM or OEM Approved Inspector
• Completely disassemble and sand blast the BOP.
• Visually check the body, flanges, bolts, threads and other main components for damage, wear
or cracks.
• Measure and record the wear on the ram cavities & all bonnets and check for cracks.
• Perform NDT on the BOP hoisting eyes and the weld between the flange and body.

• Check sealing surfaces on the body, door, piston, intermediate flange, ram change piston, ram
change cylinder and operating cylinder. Replace seals with new.
• Measure and record flange ring grooves (lower, upper and side outlets).
• Check hydraulic system and connections.
• Perform MPI on all load bearing items (Ram blocks, body, flanges, pistons, operating cylinder,
doors, bonnets, cavity area, bolts etc.) As per manufacturer’s recommendation.
• Perform individual body pressure test as per manufacturer’s recommendation.
• Reassemble the BOP.
• Carry out function test (with rams installed) followed by one pressure test to WP.
• Repaint the BOP (primer coat and final coat).
• Preserve for storage and tighten on BOP transport skid.
Note: Use only original OEM parts.
4.5.29. Bag type bop annular

4.5.29.1. Field Inspection – Cat III (Annually)
• Perform MPI on all load bearing items as per manufacturer’s recommendations.
• Perform MPI on the BOP hoisting eyes and the weld between the flange and body
• Visual check for the elastomers condition , ensure that no cracks found
• Check all hydraulic system and connections.
• Completely disassemble and sand blast the BOP.
• Perform MPI on all load bearing items (body, preventer head, flanges, piston, sleeve, sealing
and thread areas etc.) As per manufacturer’s recommendation.
• Perform MPI on the BOP hoisting eyes and the weld between the flange and body.
• Measure and record the dimensions of BOP head, piston, body, lower flange, sleeve and
adaptor ring (if exist), etc. Verify the measured dimensions are within the OEM tolerances/
recommendations.
• Replace the annular packer, upper& lower piston seals, inner& outer head seals, and lower &
upper adaptor ring seals (if any).
• Check all hydraulic system and connections.
• Individual body pressure test as per manufacturer’s recommendation.
• Reassemble the BOP.
• Carry out function test (with installed packing unit) followed by one pressure test to working
pressure.
• Repaint the BOP (primer coat and final coat).
• Preserve for storage and tighten on BOP transport skid.
Note : Use only original OEM parts.
4.5.30. Choke, kill and cement lines

4.5.30.1. General instructions
Ensure that all equipment is thoroughly cleaned prior to commencing any inspection. I.e. All
foreign material such as dirt, paint, grease, oil, scale, etc. Shall be removed from the concerned parts
by a suitable method (e.g. Paint-stripping, steam-cleaning, grit-blasting).
4.5.30.2. Fields Inspection – Cat III
Will be conducted in the following cases:
• Upon completion of the well and/or prior to installation of the equipment on a new well;
• Prior to any required pressure test of the equipment
- Remove the paint from the areas to be inspected.

- Perform visual checking for the Choke/Kill Hose

- Preform Greasing using the OEM recommended grease
- Carry out pressure tests on all components to working pressure.
- Perform NDT for all safety clamps and lifting pad eyes
• Fully disassemble the HP valves and other components.
• Change all the valves seals and packing and check for the rising stem condition.
• Remove the paint from the areas to be inspected.
• Visually check all components including HP valves, hammer unions and sealing areas for any
damage, deformation, wear, corrosion or cracks.
• Measure and record all the API flanges, according to API 6A.
• Measure and record the main components and compare with wear limits.
• Perform the required NDT inspection on all welds and sealing areas of HP valves based on OEM
requirements
• Carry out and document wall thickness measurements on pipes (min. Three measurements per
meter). Compare with maximum wear limits recommended by manufacturer and API RP 574.
• Carry out pressure tests on all components to working pressure.
• Grease and preserve ring joints and sealing areas.
• Remove the Choke/Kill Hose from service and send it to an approved facility for the following:
• Visually inspect the choke and kill hoses steel outer Wrap for any damage, deep notches or
cuts.
• Full internal Bore-O scope inspection
• Full pressure test to 1.5- 2 x Working Pressure according to hose API 16C specifications.
• MPI Inspection on all end fitting area
Note: Any defects found must be reported to the rig management for the correct remedial
actions.
4.5.31. Chicksans and swivels

by a suitable method (e.g. Paint-stripping, steam-cleaning, grit-blasting).
4.5.31.1. Full Inspection – Cat IV (every year)
• Completely dismantle the swivels.
• Visually check all pipes, swivels and hammer unions for damage, wear or cracks.
• Visually check all seals, seats and bearing housings in the swivels. Check bearing clearance. For
tolerances refer to manufacturer’s specification.
• Measure wall thickness on specific points over the full length of the pipes (minimum three (3)
points per meter) and mark the checkpoints on a sketch or drawing.
• Measure wall thickness on complete swivels.
• Perform the required NDT inspections on the swivel and hammer union seal areas and on welds
between pipe and swivel and hammer union.
• Reassemble the swivels and joints.
• Conduct pressure test on all components to working pressure.
4.5.32. H.Hressure choke manifold & valves
by a suitable method (e.g. Paint-stripping, steam-cleaning, grit-blasting)

4.5.32.1. Full Inspection – Cat III (Annually / upon commencement on new well operations):
• Visually check choke manifold and HP valves completely.
• Visually check all items for damage, wear, corrosion, erosion or cracks.
• Perform NDT on welds and hammer union sealing areas (inside and outside).
• Perform MPI on all welds, hammer unions, ring joints and valve seat areas
• Calibrate all pressure gauges.
• Perform pressure test to rated working pressure.
• Carry out full inspection on the remote control panel and gauges and stroke counter (if
applicable).
• Disassemble the choke manifold and HP valves completely.
• Measure wall thickness on specific points of the HP piping, T-joints and buffer manifold. Mark
position of checkpoints on a drawing
• Perform NDT on welds and hammer union sealing areas (inside and outside).
• Measure and record all flange details and ring groove details for all valves, crosses and HP-T
pieces.
• Disassemble all valves and chokes and inspect the items for damage, corrosion, erosion, wear
or cracks.
• Perform MPI on all welds, hammer unions, ring joints and valve seat areas
• Calibrate all pressure gauges.
• Perform individual body test on buffer manifold to rated working pressure.
• Carry out full inspection on the remote control panel and gauges and stroke counter (if
applicable).
4.5.33. Standpipe and high pressure piping
4.5.33.1. Field Inspection (Annually) by a Qualified inspector
• Dismantle the stand pipe manifold and HP mud manifold into individual components as best as
possible.
• Measure the wall thickness on specific points of the standpipe and HP piping, (two points
per meter) and mark position of checkpoints in a drawing. Pay special attention to 90 degree
elbows and T-pieces. All results shall be compared with the original thickness and the
• The approved third party shall identify the loss percentage and decide that the reading
accepted or not based on the OEM requirements” these data shall be provided by rig operators
and delivered to an
• Approved inspection third party
• Rig contractors shall perform data analysis for all wall thickness measurement to avoid any
sudden deformation which may affect the equipment integrity and may lead critical well control
or safety situation
• Check the HP hoses (drilling hoses and vibration hoses) for damage, cracks, rubber condition
and wear.
• Visually check the safety clamps and lines.
• Only vibrator safety clamp shall be used
• Visually check all valve for damage, wear, corrosion, erosion or cracks and perform the required
• Greasing “ Greasing procedures shall be according to the OEM requirements and rig

contractors shall adhere with the grease type

• Perform NDT on all welds and hammer union sealing areas (inside and outside).
• Perform Thread inspection against wear and thread stretching
• Reassemble the standpipe, HP piping and hoses (including manifolds) and pressure test all to
working
• Pressure based on the OEM procedures or international applicable standard.
• New inspection report (stamp new inspection date on stainless steel band).
• Rig contractors shall follow OEM requirements and International applicable standards
4.5.33.2. Full Inspection (every five years)- by a Qualified Inspector
Complete the full Cat III every one years’ inspection in addition to the following:
• Disassemble all valves from the stand pipe manifold and HP mud line manifold.
• Check all valve components for damage, wear, corrosion, erosion or cracks
• Check all valve sealing and serviceability condition
• Perform the required NDT inspection on all welds, ring joints (if applicable) and valve seat areas
of the valves.
• Repaint all of the components
• New Cat V report inspection report.
• Rig contractors shall follow OEM requirements and International applicable standards
4.5.34. Rotary hoses &welded connections
4.5.34.1. Full Inspection – Cat III (Six Month)
• Visual Check the hoses fittings for damage, cracks, and wear.
• Visual Check the hoses outer layer for damage, cracks, rubber condition
• Visually /NDT check the safety clamps and secondary retention wire.
• Perform NDT on all welded areas and fittings
• Visual Check the hoses for damage, cracks, rubber condition and wear.
• Visually /NDT check the safety clamps and lines.
• Perform NDT on all welded areas and fittings
• Pressure test shall be performed on the hose using water and to a value equal to the maximum
rated working pressure
4.5.35. Pulsation dampener
4.5.35.1. Field Inspection (every year) By a Qualified Inspector
• Check the manufacturer’s name plate and serial number of the pulsation dampener.
• Release the nitrogen pressure and remove the pulsation dampener from the pump manifold.
• Remove all mud and dirt from the body and the connection flange and dismantle the
dampener.
• Visually check all components (body, studs, nuts, threads and flange) for any damage, cracks
and wear.
• Perform NDT on the ring groove and the welding between the body and the flange.
• Perform wall thickness based on the OEM original wall thickness “the certificates must mention
the status accepted/ rejected based on the OEM original thickness “
• Visually Check the condition of the bladder and its condition
• Visually Check the bolts and bolts thread and bolts ports in the
• Recharge the bladder with nitrogen and ensure that the pre-charge pressure is equal to 1/3rd of
the Operating Pressure

• Receiving the inspection report.

4.5.35.2. Full Inspection (every ten years) By a Qualified Inspector
Complete the full every one-year inspection in addition to the following:
• Perform MPI on the whole body and pressure test to working pressure (use a dummy seal).
• Replace all studs, nuts and fasteners with new items.
• Repaint all of these components.
• Perform wall thickness and review its analysis and statistics for all previous periods based on
the OEM original wall thickness in order to ident is it serviceable for another period or shall be
replaced
• Perform Hydro test inspection based on the OEM original wall thickness
• Rig contractors shall follow the OEM requirements and applicable standards
4.5.36. Bop accumulator unit
All rig contractors shall use four banks accumulator ONLY other two bank accumulators shall not
be used within EGPC affiliated companies drilling and workover operations
4.5.36.1. Field Inspection (Six month) By a Qualified Inspector
• All lifting lugs or pad eyes
• Secondary retention wires
• Visually check all EX devices and its bolts
4.5.36.2. Field Inspection (every year) By a Qualified Inspector
• Calibrate all pressure gauges
• Calibrate all installed PRV, s
• NDT - UT inspection shall be done for all accumulator bottles
• Checks all units’ alarms and ensure it is working effectively
• Visually check that the air alarm was set not less than 70 PSI
• Check bottles connection NDT MPI
• Visually check for any damage or leakage.
• Bleed the pressure off the system.
• Drain the hydraulic system and clean the inside of the oil tank.
• Visually check and clean all filters and lubricators.
• Perform MPI on the pressure lines to and from the bottles manifolds (connectors seal area and
welds).
• Release the pressure from all accumulator bottles and remove all accumulator bottles from the
manifold
• Check the condition of the pneumatic and triplex hydraulic pumps (drive components, suction
and pressure lines etc.)
• Check condition of all position valves, 4 way valve, relief valve, reducing and regulating valve,
shut off valves etc.
• Perform MPI on all connections of the bottles pressure manifold.
• Perform MPI on all connections (seal area and welds) of all high pressure pipes and lines.
• Check the complete electric system (including control lights and remote panels).
• Reassemble the unit.
• Fill with oil and adjust the manifold pressure and the annular pressure to manufacturer’s
requirements.
• Perform one function test. Record the startup time till operating pressure is reached.
• Record opening and closing time for each function and record the final pressure in the
accumulator bottles at the end.
• Check condition and function of the remote control panel(s).

• Preserve, paint and grease the unit.

4.5.37. Accumulator bottles
4.5.37.1. Field Inspection CAT III (every one year) by a Qualified Inspector
• Perform NDT UT for all accumulator bottles
• Perform NDT – MPI for all Accumulator bottles connection welding
• Checking the serviceability of all isolation valves
• Remove the accumulator bottle from service.
• Disassemble the bladder and the poppet valve assembly.
• Replace the bladder with a new one.
• Check for the condition of the poppet stem, spring, spacer and stop nut and Replace any O-
rings or rubber parts installed.
• Conduct a wall thickness measurement on all the accumulator bottle shell area and compare it
with minimum requirements (OEM recommendations).
• If the thickness is thinner than the recommended OEM value, that can be a cause of rejection
and removal from service and replace with new one.
• Reassemble the accumulator, bladder and poppet valve assembly.
• Charge accumulator bottles to the manufacturer’s requirements.
• Repaint the accumulator bottle.
4.5.38. Mud pump relief valves
4.5.38.1. Field Inspection (every 90 Days)
• Remove the relief valve from the high pressure pump manifold.
• Disassemble the valve, check and clean internal and external components
• Visually check all parts for damage, cracks, corrosion and wear (especially on valve body and
seat). Replace parts as required.
• Visually check the inlet and outlet piping for signs of deposits.
• Check the reset provision and function test of reset mechanism several times.
• Test the relief valve to ensure that it relieves at the set pressure stated using a certified
monitoring gauge.
• The test shall include a minimum of 3 different pressures spanning the full range of the relief
valve (including zero setting)
• The pressure relief valve manufacturer portable test kit with a proper test gauge (1/4 % full
scale accuracy) and adapter flange is recommended to be used
• Adjust the pressure setting scale as required using manufacturer’s recommendations.
• Check that the liner cooling plant reservoir was filled with coolant
• Grease valve and flanges (if applicable) and reinstall relief valve on the high pressure pump
manifold. Set the required relief pressure.
• NDT inspections for the pony rod hubs & piston hubs and their clamps
• Visually check all fixed guard available on its location and connected well, and in a good
condition N.
4.5.38.2. Field Inspection (Annually and Semi- Annually)
• NDT –MPI inspection for Swing arm service hoist “lifting and welding “Semi- annually”
• Transmission Belts fixed guard shall be NDT inspected “ Semi- Annually”
• Prvs calibration “Annually”
• All Mechanical parts must be included on both inspection plan and PMS according to the OEM

recommendations
• Crank shaft lifting be considered as a part of mud pump hoist and must be include on the lifting
register
• Rig contractors shall prepare routine visual and auditory inspections of the mud pump may
catch cavitation before it becomes catastrophic
• NDT –UT inspection hall be conducted over all modules and thickness loss shall not exceeding
85 % from the original thickness
• Repaint and stamp new inspection date in stainless steel ring.
• Measuring crosshead bearing clearance comparing with OEM tolerance
4.5.38.3. Full Inspection (5 years)
• Disassemble the valve, check and clean internal and external components
• Visually check all parts for damage, cracks, corrosion and wear (especially on valve body and
seat).
• Replace parts as required.
• Check the reset provision and function test of reset mechanism several times.
monitoring gauge.
• The test shall include a minimum of 3 different pressures spanning the full range of the relief
valve (including zero setting)
• The pressure relief valve manufacturer portable test kit with a proper test gauge (1/4 % full
scale accuracy) and adapter flange is recommended to be used
• Adjust the pressure setting scale as required using manufacturer’s recommendations.
• Grease valve and flanges (if applicable) and reinstall relief valve on the high pressure pump
manifold. Set the required relief pressure.
• All Mechanical parts must be included on both inspection plan and PMS according to the OEM
recommendations
• An NDT inspection the main crankshaft. K.
4.5.39. Drill pipe
4.5.39.1. Full Inspection
Vertical wells (every 50,000 ft. Or 6 months, whichever occurs first)
• Perform a dimensional inspection on the tool joints including but not limited to
- Box OD
- Pin ID
- Box shoulder width
- Tong Space
- Box and pin thread profiles for pin stretch or box swell checks
- Box depth – Pin length –Pin nose diameter (for the proprietary connections)
• Visually inspect the connections for pitting, corrosion, cracks, refacing and box hard banding
• Condition (No refacing for the double shoulder connections to be done without benchmarking
or in field).
• Visually inspect the secondary shoulder area condition (for the proprietary connections).
• Visually inspect the threads (roots, flanks) for any pitting, corrosion, galling, crack or damage.
Pipe body
• Visually inspect the pipe tube for pitting, excessive corrosion, cuts and straightness.
• Check OD of the pipe tube and compare it with the minimum standard requirements.
• UT the wall thickness of the pipe body (at the center of the tube and all defected area).

• Full body EMI log (buggy) checking for cracks and discontinuities.
• Check the condition of the internal plastic coating and classify it as per DS 1; condition 1 to 4
• (Condition 4 is a cause of rejection).
• Mark pipes with the required API color code.
• Hard stamp each pipe on the pin 18deg taper, with the qualified inspector’s name and date.
Full Inspection
Deviated and horizontal wells (every 50,000 ft. Or 6 months, whichever occurs first)
Tool Joint
• Perform a dimensional inspection on the tool joints including but not limited to
- Box OD
- Pin ID
- Tong Space
- Box counter bore depth
- Box counter bore diameter
- Bevel diameter
- Box depth – Pin length –Pin nose diameter (for the proprietary connections)
• Visually inspect the connections for pitting, corrosion, cracks, refacing and box hard banding
• Condition (No refacing for the double shoulder connections to be done without benchmarking
or in field).
• Perform a black light inspection on the pin and box areas for transversal cracks and heat
checking.
Pipe body
• Visually inspect the pipe tube for pitting, excessive corrosion, cuts and straightness.
• Check OD of the pipe tube and compare it with the minimum standard requirements.
• UT the wall thickness of the pipe body (at the center of the tube and all defected area).
• Full body EMI log (buggy) checking for cracks and discontinuities.
• Perform MPI on the slip/upset area covering at least (36” from the pin shoulder and 48” from
the box shoulder).
• Check the condition of the internal plastic coating and classify it as per DS 1; condition 1 to 4
• (Condition 4 is a cause of rejection).
• Mark pipes with the required API color code.
• Hard stamp each pipe on the pin 18deg taper, with the qualified inspector’s name and date.
4.5.40. Drill string accessories & BHA
4.5.40.1. Full Inspection (every 500 rotating hours)
Connections
• Perform a dimensional inspection on the tool joints, including but not limited to
- Box OD
- Pin ID
- Tong Space
- Box counter bore depth
- Box counter bore diameter
- Bevel diameter

- Pin stress relief groove

- Boreback
- Shoulder flatness
- Box depth – Pin length – Pin nose diameter (for the proprietary connections)
• Visually inspect the connections for pitting, corrosion, cracks, refacing and box hardbanding
• Condition (No refacing for the double shoulder connections done without benchmarking or in
field).
• Perform a black light inspection on the pin and box areas for transversal cracks and heat
checking.
Body
• Visually inspect the body for pitting, excessive corrosion, cuts and straightness.
• Check the HWDP center upset OD (If applicable).
• Check the drill collar elevator and slip grooves (If applicable).
• Check the subs length (shoulder to shoulder) and compare them with the minimum standard
requirements.
• Perform an MPI on the subs outside diameter.
• Mark the individual items according to the given color code.
• Grease the equipment and install thread protectors
4.5.41. Raising line / bridle line/ sub-structure raising lines
4.5.41.1. Full Inspection – Cat IV (10 cycles or 2 years – whichever occurs earlier)
• Remove the raising lines from the mast/substructure and store them carefully on a wooden
palette or reel.
• Visually check the end connections (Splatter, shackles, pins etc.) For any damage, corrosion or
cracks.
• Visually check the raising line and Splatter sockets for any damage, kinks, corrosion and broken
individual wires and strands. For the type and allowable amount of broken individual wires and
kinks and wear refer BMS 06-55-STD ‘Care and Inspection of Wire Rope Raising Lines’.
• Preform MPI on the end connections (including pins and shackles etc.) And splitter sockets.
• Preserve with heavy oil and store on reel or wooden pallet.
4.5.42. Slings, shackles & pad eyes
4.5.42.1. Full Inspection (every six months)
• Identify (together with the STP or Worksite Supervisor in charge) all pad eyes, slings, lifting
devices, spreaders, sheaves and shackles that are due for inspection.
• Make sure that all items are registered and marked with individual identification numbers as per
the worksite lifting gear register.
• Visually check all items for damage, cracks, corrosion or wear.
• Visually inspect all lifting slings for kinks, broken strands and wires.
• Visually inspect all shackles for crack, twist, bending, excessive opening, pin and nut condition,
holes, diameters, holes alignment.
• To identify possible fractures if considered suspect; carry out NDT (liquid penetrant is
preferable) on pad eyes welds.
• Check pad eye width and hole diameter for compatibility with the appropriate shackle
• Mark all slings, pad eyes and shackles according to the dedicated color code system.
• Grease and lubricate as required.

4.5.43. King pins

4.5.43.1. Full Inspection (6 month ) By a Qualified Inspector
• Visually check the king pin, fifth wheel and mounting frame and bolts for any damage, cracks,
corrosion or wear.
• Measure dimensions of king pin and compare with the specified wear tolerances from the
manufacturer.
• Perform NDT required inspection on the king pin (retention plate and skid plate welding), fifth
wheel and related mounting brackets.
• Grease the items as required.
4.5.44. Personnel baskets
4.5.44.1. Field Inspection (every six months) By a Qualified Inspector
• Visually check the basket (including railing and floor plate) for any damage, corrosion or cracks.
• Remove the paint from the critical welded areas (main frame, floor plate and bottom part of
railing etc.).
• Perform NDT on all the critical welds.
• Perform NDT on the lifting eye and lifting sling (if applicable).
4.5.44.2. Full Inspection (every four years) By a Qualified Inspector
• Complete the full every six months’ inspection in addition to the following:
• Fully sandblast the personnel basket.
• Perform wall thickness measurement of the basket frame and floor plate and fixing points of
the railing (minimum three points per meter).
• Repaint all of the components.
4.5.45. Personnel elevators “If installed“
4.5.45.1. Field Inspection (every six months) By a Qualified Inspector:
railing etc.).
• Perform NDT on all elevator to sub base attachment points.
• Perform NDT on the lifting eyes and lifting device attachment point.
• Complete the full every six months inspection in addition to the following:
• Fully sandblast the personnel elevator basket.
the railing
• (Minimum three points per meter).

4.5.46. Self-propelled man lifts

railing etc.).
• Perform NDT on the pad eyes and all lifting cylinders’ attachment points.
• Fully sandblast the self-propelled manlift basket.
the railing (minimum three points per meter).
4.5.47. Crane hooks
4.5.47.1. Full Inspection (every year) By a Qualified Inspector
• Sling out the lifting block / hook.
• Visually check the block / hook for any damage, corrosion or wear.
• Check that hook swivel assembly is rotating freely.
• Visually check the block sheaves depth (using a sheave groove gage) and the sheave bearing
clearance using pry bar. If loose, need to identify the cause and replace the bearing, if needed.
• Check the hook for any excessive bending, twisting, wear or throat opening and compare it with
the OEM recommendations.
• Perform NDT on the hook, hook pin, load bearing areas and outside plates of the block.
• If found any initiation of cracks in the load bearing areas, MPI is recommended to verify the
crack condition.
• If MPI show cracks, complete disassembly and extensive MPI should be carried out.
4.5.48. Forklift forks and fork support
• Disassemble the support frame from the forklift as much as possible.
• Visually check the forks and support for any damage, bends, corrosion or wear.
• Measure the angle of the forks. The fork should be withdrawn from the service if the deviation
was 3 degrees greater or less of 90o (or as per the OEM recommendations) between the blade
and the shank.
• Perform MPI on the fork arm, forks (critical areas) and attachments/brackets of the forklift
support. Special attention shall be paid to the heel and the top and bottom hooks including
their attachment to the shank.
• Thoroughly measure the wear on fork arm blade and shank; if the thickness of the blade or
shank is reduced to 90 % of the original thickness, or to the minimum thickness specified by
OEM, the fork arm shall be withdrawn from service. A set of fork arms shall be checked for any
difference in height when mounted on the fork carrier. If the difference in tip heights exceeds 3
% of the blade length or that recommended by OEM, the set of fork arms shall be withdrawn
from service.
• Check the safety chain between forks and fork support (if applicable) for damage or wear.
• Check the bore of the shaft/pin type forks. Wear limit should not be more than 10 % of the

original bore or as per OEM recommendations.

• Check for loose items (bolts, pins etc.)
• Check the hydraulic lifting components for any damage or leakage.
4.5.49. Air pressure vessel
4.5.49.1. Field Inspection CAT III (every one year) – by a Qualified Inspector
• Release the pressure from the vessel and disconnect all lines, valves and gauges etc.
• Open the inspection hole of the vessel.
• Visually check the vessel for any damage, corrosion or wear.
• Visually check all nozzles and associated piping/fittings for any visible defects.
• Measure and document the wall thickness of the vessel body (minimum 6 points per square
meter), paying particular attention to areas where water can gather.
• Perform MPI on critical weld joints (connections and nozzles)
• Where deemed necessary by the inspector, a pressure test may be required.
• Ensure that the SWP is clearly visible on the external of the vessel.
4.5.49.2. Full Inspection CAT IV (every five years) – by a Qualified Inspector
• Release the pressure from the vessel and disconnect all lines, valves and gauges etc.
• Open the inspection hole of the vessel.
• Visually check the vessel for any damage, corrosion or wear.
• Visually check all nozzles and associated piping/fittings for any visible defects.
• Measure and document the wall thickness of the vessel body (minimum 6 points per square
meter), paying particular attention to areas where water can gather.
• Perform MPI on critical weld joints (connections and nozzles)
• Prepare and submit the inspection report which is to include determination of corrosion rate
where previous readings are available.
• Where deemed necessary by the inspector, a pressure test may be required.
• The test medium should be water and special consideration should be given to the supporting
structure and foundation design.
• Ensure that the SWP is clearly visible on the external of the vessel.
• In addition to all other OEM inspection requirements and international applicable standards
4.5.50. Air pressure relief valves
4.5.50.1. Field Inspection (every One year)- by a Qualified Inspector
• Release the pressure from the vessel.
• Remove the air pressure relief valve.
• Visually check the relief valve for any damage, corrosion or wear.
• Visually check the inlet and outlet piping for signs of deposits
• Calibration shall be conducted through approved third party
monitoring gauge.
• Release the pressure from the vessel.
• Remove the air pressure relief valve.
• Visually check the relief valve for any damage, corrosion or wear.

monitoring gauge.
4.5.51. Fuel storage tanks
4.5.51.1. Field Inspection (every year) by a Qualified Inspector)
• Visually check the tank for any damage, corrosion or cracks.
• NDT –UT inspection shall be conducted
• Record the wall thickness of the tank (minimum 2 points per square meter) including the
pedestals and skid.
• Wall thickness measurements shall be compared with the original thickness to decide the
condition of tank serviceability
4.5.51.2. Full Inspection (every Five years)- by a Qualified Inspector
• Empty the fuel tank completely and flush inside with water based cleaner.
• Sand or grit blast the tank outside.
• Visually check the tank for any damage, corrosion or cracks.
• Measure and record the wall thickness of the tank (minimum 2 points per square meter)
including the pedestals and skid.
• Preparing for Confined Space Entry Rules
• Open the tank man hole and inspect the tank inside for any corrosion or cracks.
• Perform NDT on all critical areas (welded seams, pedestal and skid front ends etc.)
• Check condition and content of the manufacturer’s name plate.
4.5.52. Bop lifting devices
4.5.52.1. Field Inspection – Cat III (every one year)
• Remove the BOP hoisting device from the traveling beams.
• Dismantle the hoisting device as much as needed.
• Visually check all items for any damage, wear, corrosion or cracks.
• Measure and record the wall thickness of the traveling beams (in the “working area”).
• Perform MPI on the hook, traveling beam connections and sheaves (if applicable).
• Repaint the items as required (including the SWL sign).
4.5.52.2. Full Inspection – Cat IV (every four years)
• Complete the full every one-year inspection in addition to the following:
• Completely disassemble of the hoisting device.
• Visually inspect and measure the main hoist (or hydraulic cylinder) components.
• Compare the measurements with maximum allowable tolerances from the manufacturer.
• Reinstall the unit and conduct performance test to maximum load.
• Follow OEM requirements and applicable international standards
4.5.53. F. Arrestors & escape devices
• Remove the arrestor or escape device from the working position.
• Visually check the device for any damage, corrosion, wear or cracks.
• Visually check the wire line for any cuts, kinks, corrosion or broken wire.
• Check that the “Pull line “can be pulled out and retracts fully.

• Perform NDT on the welds, the mounting brackets and any shackle or swivel.
• Repaint the items as required.
• Completely disassemble the arrestor and inspect, measure and record the wear of the critical
components
• As per manufacturer’s manual.
• Compare measurements with maximum allowable tolerances.
4.5.54. EX(D) and EX(E) systems
This is an optional inspection procedure
4.5.54.1. “Close/Visual” Inspection (3 years)
• Review the rigs hazardous area layout drawings. If the drawings are inaccurate or missing,
note deficiency on the report and notify the Technical Operations group.
• Verify all electrical equipment and their connection system installed in Zone 1 or Zone 2 areas
are rated for the area they are located.
• Inspect the equipment ensuring junction boxes, glands, cables, etc are in good condition and
that all bolts are fitted.
• Update the rig Ex register and any deficiencies are reported and acted upon, these are also to
be added to The rig ICR.
In case of any major deficiencies detected during the Close/visual inspection
A “detailed” Inspection shall be implemented by a qualified compex inspector:
• Review the rigs hazardous area layout drawings. If the drawings are inaccurate or missing note
deficiency on the report and notify the Technical Operations group.
• Verify all electrical equipment and their connection system installed in Zone 1 or Zone 2 areas
are rated for the area they are located.
• Inspect and verify the installation of the air ventilation systems in the drillers control,
instrument panels and the air cooling systems of the DC motors for the Draw works, top drive
system and rotary table (if applicable).
• Open all enclosures and ensure terminations are correct.
• Update the rig Ex register and any deficiencies are reported and acted upon, these are also to
be added to the rig ICR.
4.5.55. Rig instrumentation
4.5.55.1. Main Principles
• Critical rig instrumentation including gauges, torque wrenches, electric meters will be
calibrated by a competent person in accordance with this standard. For details on critical rig
instruments
• Gauges that are not classified as critical will also require calibration by a competent person in
accordance with this applicable standard and EGPC requirements standard
• All calibrated instrument, gauges etc. Are to be tagged with ‘Date Calibrated’ and ‘Next
Calibration Due’ tags by the qualified inspector.
• The calibration details of calibrated instrument and gauges will be provided by the qualified
inspector to rig STP.

• Ensure all instruments are thoroughly cleaned prior to commencing any inspection.
• The calibration details will be entered by Rig Management into the Critical Instrumentation
• Calibration Log available will be maintained up to date.
4.5.55.2. Full Inspection of critical instruments (every 6 months) By a Qualified Inspector
• Visually check the instruments for any damage, corrosion or leaks.
• Check condition and content of the OEM’s name plates for necessary information
• Visually check the installation of the instruments for proper mounting of brackets, piping,
hoses, fittings etc.
• Inspect service and carry out function tests of the instruments as per OEM’s instructions.
• Recalibrate in accordance with OEM’s requirements and apply calibration tag.
• Mark the instruments with new/updated inspection signs/ stickers.
4.5.55.3. Inspection of non-critical gauges (every 1 yearly) By a Qualified Inspector
• Visually check the gauge for any damage, corrosion or leaks.
4.5.56. Rig instrumentation
4.5.56.1. Main Principles
• Critical rig instrumentation including gauges, torque wrenches, electric meters will be
calibrated by a competent person in accordance with this standard. For details on critical rig
instruments,
• Gauges that are not classified as critical will also require calibration by a competent person in
accordance with this standard.
• All calibrated instrument, gauges etc. Are to be tagged with ‘Date Calibrated’ and ‘Next
Calibration Due’ tags by the qualified inspector.
• The calibration details of calibrated instrument and gauges will be provided by the qualified
inspector to
• Ensure all instruments are thoroughly cleaned prior to commencing any inspection.
• The calibration details will be entered by Rig Management into the Critical Instrumentation
Calibration Log available in
• Log Must be maintained up to date.
4.5.56.2. Full Inspection of critical instruments (every 3 months) By a Qualified Inspector
• Visually check the instruments for any damage, corrosion or leaks.
• Inspection of non-critical gauges (every 1 yearly) By a Qualified Inspector:


4.5.56.3. Inspection of non-critical gauges (every 1 yearly) By a Qualified Inspector
4.5.57. Breathing air cylinders (fiberglass/steel)
4.5.57.1. Field Inspection for (every one year) By a Qualified Inspector
• Visual check all cylinders’ components
• Replace breathing Air by removing and recharge it again with new breathable air
• Purity Air compressors must used
• Purity certificate must be provided through the third party “if recharged through third party “
• Stamp new expiry date on the cylinders.
4.5.57.2. Full Inspection for (every three years) By a Qualified Inspector:
• Remove the cylinders from service.
• Perform complete hydro-test as per manufacturer’s specifications.
4.5.57.3. Full Inspection for Steel Cylinders (every five years) By a Qualified Inspector
• Remove the cylinders from service.
• Perform complete hydro-test as per manufacturer’s specifications.
Note: The SCBA cylinder testing company / inspectors shall have their own individually licensed
copies of the relevant CGA (Compressed Gas Association) documents needed to carry out the
cylinder inspections that the testing company offers.
4.5.58. IBOP, Kelly valves & safety valves

4.5.58.1. Field Inspection (every six months)- by a Qualified Inspector
• Remove the valve from service.
• Fully open the valve and pump a small volume of fresh water through the valve to remove
drilling mud residue from the ID bore of the valve.
• Fully close the valve and disassemble the valve completely.
• Visually Inspect threads for damage, stretching and galling.
• Visually inspect valve bore, seat bores, and stem bores for internal scratches or excessive wear.
• Perform NDT (PT with fluorescent penetrants) on the following:
• Box / pin thread area
• Area inside the operating crank window.
• Fillet radii of internal grooves and shoulders.
• Change all the valve seat seals, Teflon rings and stem/crank O-ring.
• Reassemble the valve and fill with high grade lithium based grease.


• Complete the full six-month inspection in addition to the following:
• Replace the whole valve seats and ball assembly.
• With the valve in the closed position conduct a pressure test according to OEM procedures and
records the results.
• Low Pressure test from 250 to 350 PSI for 5 minutes.
• High pressure test to the rated cold working pressure for 5 minutes
4.5.59. Mud gas separator “POORBOY “
4.5.59.1. Field Inspection- Cat III Semi- Annual / Annually)
• Perform the three Months Preventive maintenance
• Perform NDT –MPI on all the MGS body, inlet lines, return lines, vent lines and piping clamps/
brackets welding.
• Perform NDT wall thickness measurement on all the MGS body and compare it with the
minimum recommended thickness provide by OEM / International applicable standards .
4.5.59.2. Full Inspection- Cat IV (Every Five Years)
• Perform the three Months Preventive maintenance
• Open the Mud gas separator Manway.
• Verify the condition of the inner surface of the Mud Gas Separator for any signs of cracks or
excessive corrosion.
• Verify the baffles/slotted pipe condition for any damage.
• Perform MPI on all the MGS body, inlet lines, return lines, vent lines and piping clamps/
brackets welding.
• Perform wall thickness measurement on all the MGS body and compare it with the minimum
recommended thickness.
4.5.60. Iron roughneck
4.5.60.1. Full Inspection CAT III (Six Month)
• Visually inspect all fasteners for damage or corrosion.
• Visually inspect all pins/holes (bearing movement areas) for excessive wear.
• NDT VT/MPI inspection for all of the hanging points, lifting eyes, shackles and guide handle for
excessive wear, damage or deformation.
• Visually inspect all hydraulic/pneumatic hoses for damage, kinks, cuts reaching the internal wire
layer of the hoses and replace if necessary.
• Check the operating mechanism
• Follow OEM inspection procedures or international applicable standards
4.5.60.2. Full Inspection (every One year )
• Fully disassemble the Iron Roughneck.
• Check the slew and roller bearings condition.
• Visually inspect all fasteners for damage or corrosion.
• Visually inspect all pins/holes (bearing movement areas) for excessive wear.
• Visually inspect all of the hanging points, lifting eyes, shackles and guide handle for excessive
wear, damage or deformation.
• Extend the lifting cylinder and visually inspect the chrome surface for any pitting or excessive
wear condition.
• Extend all of the clamping and wrenching cylinders consecutively and visually inspect the
chrome surface for any pitting or excessive wear; check the attachment points and eyes for
wear and excessive tolerance.
• Visually inspect the biting edges of the jaw assemblies and their retaining bolts for any

looseness or damage.
• Check the spinning rollers diameter for excessive wear (Make the measurement from the center
of the rollers away from the edges as much as possible)
• Perform an MPI (PT for narrow areas) for all the accessible weld and critical areas including the
power scope adapter assembly (if installed).
• Reassemble and paint the Iron Roughneck.
• Follow OEM inspection procedures or international applicable standards
4.5.61. Pipe arms & pipe loaders
4.5.61.1. Field Inspection (every one year)
• Visually inspect all the unit fasteners and fittings for tightness, damage or corrosion.
• Visually inspect all the pins/holes (bearing movement areas), pivot connections and control
mechanisms for excessive wear.
• Visually inspect the tubular loading system including the pipe support, ejector mechanism,
transfer arms, pipe stoppers and tilting pistons for any damage, deformation or excessive wear.
• Visually inspect the entire arm major components including pipe supports, clamps, jaws,
funnels, top spring and supporting beams for any damage, deformation or excessive wear.
• Extend all cylinders (main lifting and auxiliary) and visually inspect the chrome surface for any
pitting excessive wear condition including.
• Visually inspect all the accessible weld and critical area members in the pipe arm and loading
system structure, frames, bracing & hydraulic system
• Visually inspect all hydraulic hoses for damage, kinks, cuts reaching the internal wire layer of
the hoses replace if necessary.
• Visually check the condition electrical cables, plugs and junction boxes mounted on the unit.
4.5.61.2. Full Inspection (every three years)
• Perform all the field inspection procedures.
• Perform an MPI (PT for narrow areas) for all the accessible weld and critical area members in
the pipe arm and loading system structure, frames, bracing & hydraulic system
4.5.62. Spinning wrench
4.5.62.1. Full Inspection (every Six month)
• Visually inspect all the unit fasteners for tightness, damage or corrosion.
• Visually inspect all the pins/holes (bearing movement areas) for excessive wear.
• Visually inspect all the hanging points, lifting eyes, shackles and adjustment bolts for excessive
wear, damage or deformation.
• Extend lifting cylinder and visually inspect the chrome surface for any pitting or excessive wear
condition.
• Visually inspect the snub line attachments, brackets, shackles and pins for excessive wear,
damage or deformation.
• Extend the clamping cylinder and visually inspect the chrome surface for any pitting or
excessive wear;
• Check the attachment points and eyes for wear and excessive tolerance.
• Remove the drive motor (If applicable); clean muffler and check the drive and gear case pinion
gears condition.
• Check the spinning rollers diameter for excessive wear (Make the measurement from the center
of the rollers away from the edges as much as possible)
• Perform an NDT –MPI/PT for narrow areas) for all the accessible weld and critical areas
including the power scope adapter assembly (if installed).

4.6. Overhauling requirements

4.6.1. Rig main diesel engines
4.6.1.1. Needs for Overhauls – Condition Based Criteria
• Monthly safety and preventive maintenance results, indicating the need of the top end or major
overhauls.
• Increase in the oil consumption. Three times the original oil consumption rate due to normal
wear with an increase in the crankcase blow by exceeding the OEM limits.
• Total amount of fuel consumption reaching the maximum limits highlighted by the OEM.
• The results of wear metal analysis of the lube oil (oil sampling).
• An increase in the level of noise or vibration.
• If the service hours are reached the maximum frequencies mentioned in rig operators PM
Engine schedule, from last overhaul or from the date of purchase.
4.6.1.2. Top End Overhaul Requirements - By OEM or Qualified Workshop/Facility
• A complete top end overhaul should be performed as per the OEM instructions.
• After the re-assembly, while the engine is stopped; Conduct a solenoid test and wiggle (wiring
integrity) test.
• After the re-assembly, while the engine is running; perform a multi cylinder cutout test and
record theTest results.
• Check all the safety shutdown settings and record them (test them if applicable).
• Submit the final service report and overhauling records.
4.6.1.3. Major/”Zero Hours” Overhaul Requirements - By OEM or Qualified Workshop/Facility
• A major/”Zero hours” overhaul will be performed as per the OEM instructions.
• After the re-assembly, while the engine is stopped; Conduct a solenoid test and wiggle (wiring
integrity) test.
• After the re-assembly, while the engine is running; perform a multi cylinder cutout test and
record the test results.
• Check all the safety shutdown settings and record them (test them if applicable).
• Perform load testing sequence and record all the required readings based on the PM system
requirements

D5. Requirements For HSE Case

D.5. Requirements For HSE Case
5.1. Scope
This procedure will be applied to all rig contractors working under Egyptian petroleum sector
affiliated companies
5.2. Purpose
To demonstrate:
• that there is a systematic approach to HSE management in place, which is designed to provide
for continuous improvement in HSE performance for the Well Engineering Operations;
• compliance with all applicable HSE legislation and standards, the EGPC policies and Drilling
and Workover HSE guidelines where applicable
• that there are physical and operational controls in place for all hazards that commensurate with
the level of risk;
• that safety risks have been reduced to tolerable levels as defined by rig contractor’s criteria;
• That measures are in place to reduce the HSE risks to as Low as Reasonably Practicable (ALARP)
and appropriate recovery preparedness control measures are in place in the event of a realized
incident.
It is the responsibility of Rig operator’s/Rig contractor’s management and work site supervisors to
ensure that this standard is followed
5.3.1. EGPC/EGAS Drilling and workover /HSE Dept.

• Ensure that all requirements mentioned in in this section of EGPC guidelines are carefully
implemented through predetermined audit and inspection plan
• Assign a special committee from its affiliated companies for performing rigs Auditing and
updating this guideline
• Nominate of drilling and HSE members to participate in HSE case reviewing and approval
committee from EGPC or other affiliated companies as applicable
5.3.2. Rig Operator’s chairman of the board and General Manager
• Ensure that all requirements mentioned in this guidelines are carefully implemented and
support the implementation of all HSE policies
5.3.3. Rig Operator’s Operations General Manager
• Ensure that all requirements mentioned in this guidelines are carefully implemented through
predetermined acceptance audit and inspection and rig acceptance criteria
5.3.4. Rig Operator’s Drilling General Manager
• Ensure that all requirements mentioned in this guidelines are carefully implemented through
supporting the implementation of periodical audit and inspection plan and rig acceptance
criteria
• Nominate of the drilling member for the HSE case reviewing and approvals committee
• Review HSE case results and recommendations with HSE manager and Rig contractor
Operations and HSE management team
5.3.5. Rig Operator’s HSE General Manager
• Ensure that all requirements mentioned in in this guidelines are carefully implemented
• Prepare a plan to Perform HSE audit/ Inspection/ Walkthrough..etc.
• Follow up the daily HSE activities using his Company checklist which established based on

EGPC Drilling and workover guideline

• ensure that the acceptance audit performed by EGPC approved third party is performed and all
critical and major items are closed
• nominate the drilling member for the HSE case reviewing and approvals committee
Responsible for reviewing HSE case results and recommendations with Drilling manager and
Rig Contractor Operations and HSE management team
5.3.6. Rig Contractors’ Operations General Manager
• Approve the specific training requirements plan including all required training mentioned on
this section of EGPC drilling and workover HSE guideline
• formulate the HSE case committee based on the committee structure mentioned in this section
• Ensure that the Training Plan are implemented through his respective Drilling and workover
operations managers and rig contractor’s administration department
• Issue Clear instructions and commitments to all company affiliated rigs to comply with EGPC
HSE guidelines
• Provide Financial and administrative support to comply with EGPC drilling and workover
manual
• Follow up the implementation of EGPC HSE Case requirements with his respective Drilling and
workover Superintendents
• provide Financial and administrative support to comply with EGPC drilling and workover
manual
• Follow up the implementation of EGPC HSE Case requirements with his respective Drilling and
• The Nomination of Operations member in the HSE case committee
• Join the committee and provide technical support whenever needed
• To provide Financial and administrative support to comply with EGPC drilling and workover
manual
5.3.9. Rig Contractor’s Maintenance and Assets Integrity Manager
• follow up the implementation of EGPC HSE Case requirements with his respective Drilling and
• the Nomination of the maintenance team members in the HSE case committee
• provide technical support whenever needed
• provide Financial and administrative support to comply with EGPC drilling and workover
manual
• Follow up the implementation of EGPC HSE Case requirements within the Drilling and workover
rigs under his responsibility
• Participate in the HSE case workshops and provide technical support whenever needed
5.3.11. Rig Contractor’s Senior Tool pusher
• Follow up the implementation of EGPC HSE Case requirements within the Drilling and workover
rigs under his responsibility
• participate in the HSE case workshops and provide technical support whenever needed

• Implementing all plans and control measure as per mentioned in the approved HSE case
including “operations, maintenance and HSE in addition to third parties’ activities
• Follow up the implementation of EGPC HSE Case requirements within his workplace
• Participate in the HSE case workshops and provide HSE support whenever needed
• Implementing all HSE plans and control measure as per mentioned in the approved HSE case
including activities
5.4. Requirements
5.4.1. Preparation and issuing Formal HSE Case Assessment Report (FHSECAR)
All Rig Contractors are requested to conduct a Formal HSE Case Assessment Report (FHSECAR) of
their rigs” all types including all capacities”. This Formal HSE Case Assessment Report (FHSECAR)
is expected to contain information on major accident hazards (MAHs) and show that all practicable
controls have been identified to ensure that risk is reduced ALARP.
The Formal HSE Case Assessment Report (FHSECAR) process must include the identification of all
potential risks and appropriate control measures adopted for each specific risk.
The contractor management shall create a Formal HSE Case Assessment Report (FHSECAR) Team
which consists of rig contractors multidiscipline team as follow as a minimum
• Maintenance team Member;
• Inspection team Member;
• Instrumentation team Member;
• HSE team Member;
• Projects team Member
• and other subject matter experts as applicable.
5.4.2. Required training for the HSE Case Committee
• Rig contractor is responsible to provide a professional Training ,that will make all HSE case
team be competent enough to perform their responsibilities toward preparing the HSE case as
required by EGPC and in the applicable Industry Codes and Standards which depend on identify
safety critical elements (SCEs) associated with major accident hazards (MAHs), therefore all
HSE case member shall successfully pass the following training
• HSE case training program
• Process safety management “PSM” program
• Risk management program
• Rig inspection training program
5.4.3. Submission of Safety Case
Submission and approval of a HSE Case is a mandatory requirement for all Rig contractors to be
operated, currently operating or to be decommissioned in the oil and gas industry in Egypt
All Rig contractors must comply with EGPC regulations, guidelines, standards and other systems
described in the HSE Case. This means that every rig in Egypt must have a HSE Case, and imposes
a responsibility of all rig contractors to develop, submit, and secure approval of the same for each
relevant facility.
Each HSE Case is to be submitted to EGPC/Egas/Ganop and rig operator’s operations and HSE
departments at specific stipulated periods and under specific conditions, and any deviation from
the conditions will invalidate the Safety Case approvals. For instance, the HSE case report shall be
submitted within 30 Days of receiving awarding later through the rig contractors .

5.4.4. Review of a Safety Case

When the HSE Case has been submitted to the concerned Holding company and Rig operator,
there may be a need for a joint review/ workshop which will enable the contractor to present,
demonstrate and justify the adequacy of the safety provisions in the facility to the EGPC /Egas/
Ganob and rig operators or on any other grey areas as may be necessary. This joint review aims to
assure the EGPC/EGAS /GANOB that the HSE Case dossier satisfies all the required expectations.
The joint review team will be made up of
• EGPC/ Egas / Ganob representatives,
• Rig Operators operations personnel,
• Rig Operators HSE Member
• Rig Contractors HSE personnel,
• Rig Contractors Project Development team
• Third-party consultant if needed
At the end of a review process, HSE case validation and verification will also be carried out. This
may involves a physical visit to the rig site to confirm that installations, and operations on the
facility, amongst others, are fit for purpose and consistent with Safety Management Systems,
The HSE Case must be kept up to date and revised as necessary during the facility life cycle and
must reflect the operational reality of the installation.
A revised HSE Case is required to be resubmitted for approval every five years and non-compliance
with this requirement may lead to summary penalties or fines to rigs owners/ rig operators or the
revocation of associated leases, licenses and permits by the EGPC
5.5. HSE Case and Birding documents

The HSE Case should be prepared in tandem with the Bridging Documents of the Rig after
awarding and before the first spud in . and shall include but not limited to the following :
5.5.1. Introduction
The Introduction portion of the HSE Case sets the overall tone of the document, it identifies
components such as management commitment, the scope of the HSE Case and rig contractor’s
commitment to continuous improvement.
5.5.2. HSE Management System (MS) Summary

Rig contractors HSE philosophy and structure of the HSE Management System. In particular, the
HSE Management system describe the system of identifying hazards, assessing risk to personnel,
managing those hazards and the means of mitigating the consequences should those hazards be
realized.
5.5.3. Rig operating systems/operations Description Summary

the essential features of the execution of Well Engineering Operations and an overview of the
rig operations with a focus on the relevance to HSE and emergency response management. This
part consists of the rig layout and information regarding the key equipment and systems of the rig
Primary structure;
• Drilling, completion and well control equipment;
• Fire and explosion protection
• Emergency Systems
• Accommodation;
• Well testing; and
• Other Third Party Equipment.

5.5.4. Risk Management Summary

the HSE Case shall describe the Risk Management Process for assuring that the risks associated
with rig contractors Scope of Operations are reduced to a level that is tolerable to rig contractor and
rig operator
The Risk Management Process must consider the HSE management objectives, systems and
equipment and shall be provided and managed by rig contractors or related third parity
5.5.5. Emergency Response Summary

The Emergency Response section describes the HSE Management objectives for emergency
response of incidents - to mitigate the consequences of incidents and the measures to recover from
incidents.
Rig contractors shall mention all the expected emergency case related to operations, equipment,
weather, surrounding environment …etc and its preparedness to control or mitigate all expected
emergency cases

Section E: Occupational
Health Requirements
E1. Food Service Hygiene

E.1. Food Service Hygiene
1.1. Scope
The scope of food service hygiene procedures encompasses all aspects of food handling, from
receiving and storing food to preparing, cooking, serving, and disposing of food waste. These
procedures are designed to prevent foodborne illness by minimizing the risk of contamination from
physical, chemical, and biological hazards.
1.2. Purpose
The purpose of food service hygiene procedures is to:
• Protect public health by preventing foodborne illness
• Ensure that food is safe for human consumption
• Comply with food safety regulations
• Maintain a positive reputation for the food service establishment
1.3. Definitions
1.3.1. HACCP:
It stands for the “Hazard Analysis and Critical Control Point” system. It allows you to predict
potential risks to food safety and to prevent them before they happen.
1.3.2. CCP:
Critical control points (CCPs) are the points in the process where significant hazards must be
controlled.
1.4. Procedure
1.4.1. Risk Management:
In line with the HACCP system, risk management normally takes place as a result of the existence
of hazardous conditions of food, as the food type and cooking process have that vital effect in
getting the food condition out of hygiene and quality margins (taking into consideration the
nutritional components of every type of food)
The figure lists the most common prepared foods linked to illness as a result of the risk increase,
so that the risk of consumer illness as a result of food poisoning while cooking process increases
when going up in list as shown.
1.4.2. HACCP Core Principles:

Any food management system should comply with the HACCP system “Hazard Analysis Critical
Control Point” which should be compatible with the following 7 HACCP core principles:
1.4.2.1. Identify Potential Food Safety Hazards
The first two letters in HACCP stand for “Hazard Analysis.” When doing a hazard analysis, we
should determine the primary potential food safety risks at each stage of the preparation process.
Each food preparation process has its own potential safety hazards, example of these practices
like; cross-contamination, improper hot or cold storage and other hazards.
1.4.2.2. Determining Critical Control Points (Determine where and when to prevent
problems)
CCP is a stage in food preparation process where hazards can be reduced or eliminated, and where
later stages won’t correct safety problems if they are not controlled at first stage. Examples of CCPs
might include: cooking, reheating, hot holding stages, chilling, chilled storage, receiving, thawing,

mixing ingredients, and other food handling stages.

1.4.2.3. Establishing Critical Limits. (Set limits to control potential control problems)
Once CCPs are identified, critical limits should be established, which will reduce or eliminate
potential hazards, for example:
Receiving
Potentially hazardous food must be at below 40°F
Frozen foods mustn’t have been thawed
There must be no evidence of spoilage, abuse, foreign objects, or contamination in foods
Cooking, Reheating, and Hot Holding
Cook poultry to at least 165°F
Cook roast beef to at least 130°F
Reheat all foods rapidly to at least 165°F
Hold all hot foods at 140°F or higher
Chilling and Chill Storage
Chill roast beef from 120°F to 55 °F in less than 6 hours, and continue to chill to 40°F
Chill all other foods from 130 °F to 80°F in 1.5 hours, and from 80°F to 40°F in 6 hours
Do not leave potentially hazardous foods at room temperature
Do not cover hot foods tightly in the cooler until chilled
Chill and store foods in shallow pans (2-3 inches deep)
Food Handling
Thoroughly wash vegetables in clean cold water
Use proper hand washing techniques
Use proper dish washing and sanitizing techniques
Cover and protect open cuts and scratches.
Handle cooked foods only with clean gloves or utensils
Use clean and sanitized equipment and utensils
Stay home when sick
1.4.2.4. Establishing a System to Control the CCP.

Methods for monitoring CCP limits may include:
• Visual observations (watching the practices of deli workers, and inspecting raw materials).
• Sensory evaluations (smelling for off-odors).
• Chemical measurements (pH or acidity, viscosity, salt content, or water activity).
• Physical measurements (time and temperature).
1.4.2.5. Establishing the Corrective Actions.
To be taken when monitoring indicates that a particular CCP is not under control. Examples of
Corrective Actionss might include:
• Adjust a cooler’s thermostat to get the proper temperature
• Extending cooking time

• Re-cooking or reheating a product to the proper temperature

• Modifying food handling procedures
• Discarding products
1.4.2.6. Establishing procedures of verification to confirm that the HACCP system is working
effectively (i.e. Performance monitoring & auditing)
An in-depth audit should take place by the management audit team for the entire HACCP system
at least once a year. Additional audits should be conducted whenever there are new products, new
recipes, or new processes.
1.4.2.7. Establishing documentation concerning all procedures and records appropriate to
these principles and their application.
Recordkeeping is an essential part of the HACCP system. Monitoring results for each CCP must be
recorded for review by management. These records indicate to management that work is evaluated
properly, handled, and processed foods and ingredients.
1.4.3. Key Performance Indicators:
1.4.4. KPI-1
Suitability of catering facilities, where the caterer’s facilities must be fit for purpose and meet
the technical requirements laid out in the contracts which should be compatible with international
standards. The performance target should be 100 % compliance and monitoring frequency to be on
a monthly basis through weekly camp inspection reports in addition to a pre-qualification or renewal
of the contract.
1.4.5. KPI-2
Meeting legal requirements, where rig contractors and their sub-contractors (caterers) should
comply with local regulations and with drilling company food and water management guidance. The
performance target should be 100 % compliance and monitoring frequency to beat Pre-qualification
or renewal of contract.
1.4.6. KPI-3
Health status of staff, where it can affect food and water safety. The performance target is that all
health and vaccination certificates must be up to date (consider the Egyptian legal requirements
related to frequencies of staff health checks and certifications expiry dates). Performance monitoring
shall be conducted frequently basis in addition to a pre-qualification and renewal of the contract.
1.4.7. KPI-4
Temperature control documentation, where food temperatures are critical to food safety and
robust measurements and recording is required at all stages from delivery and transportation then
to service. The performance target is that all records should be available for all items identified
under ‘key controls’ Temperature should be recorded 3 times each day. Monitoring frequency is to
be performed periodically depending on risk.
1.4.8. KPI-5
Cleaning schedules, Robust cleaning schedules must be in place. The schedule should state what,
how, when and who cleans equipment. Performance target is that records of cleaning activities
supported by visual observation should be maintained. Monitoring Frequency should be periodically
depending on risk and findings from inspections and audits.

1.4.9. KPI-6
Training, Where all levels of catering staff should meet the standards set out in the training
matrix. Performance target is 100% compliance since there is no exception for prospective caterer.
Existing caterer allowed three months to confirm qualification. Monitoring Frequency is to be at pre-
qualification process and periodically depending on staff turnover.
1.4.10. KPI-7
Waste management, where the caterers have the ultimate responsibility to be aware by drilling
company waste management procedures in addition the clients’ contractual obligations and to act
accordingly by the way that shall not cause harm to the environment, galley operations wastes shall
be segregated and to be disposed as per the above mentioned references. Monitoring process shall
take place on daily basis by the rig supervisors in addition to pre-qualification and at the renewal of
contract.
1.4.11. Operating Procedures for Selected Critical Points

1.4.11.1. Eliminating Hand Contact when Handling Ready to Eat Foods
Instructions
• Train food service employees on using the procedures in their company’s manual.
• Follow legal health regulations.
• Use proper hand washing procedures to wash hands and exposed arms prior to preparing or
handling food or at any time when the hands may have become contaminated.
• Don’t use bare hand to handle ready to eat foods at any time unless washing fruits and
vegetables.
• Using suitable utensils when working with ready to eat food, which may include;
• Single-use gloves, Deli tissue, foil wrap, dispensing equipment (ex: spoons)
Monitoring
Camp boss and physician should visually observe that bare hand contact with ready to eat food is
eliminated and that gloves or suitable utensils are used and changed at the appropriate times during
all hours of operation.
Corrective Actions
• Retain any food service employee found not following the procedures in this standard
operating procedure.
• Discard ready to eat food touched with bare hands.
Verification and Recordkeeping

Catering contractor representative is responsible to verify that all his food service workers are
using suitable utensils by giving hygiene trainings and visually monitoring food service employees
during all hours of operation.
1.4.11.2. Holding Hot and Cold Potentially Hazardous Foods
Instructions
• Train catering food service employees on using their company’s procedures manual.
• Follow legal requirements.
• Hold hot foods at 135oF or above.(preheat through steam tables or hot boxes)
• Hold cold foods at 41oF or below.

Monitoring
• Use a clean, sanitized, probe thermometer to measure food temperature or equivalent mean of
measuring temperatures.
• Take temperatures of foods by inserting the thermometer near the surface of the product, at the
thickest part, and at other varies locations.
• Take temperatures of holding units by placing a calibrated thermometer in the coolest part of a
hot holding unit or warmest part of a cold holding unit.
• For hot foods held for service:
- Verify that the air/water temperature of any unit is at 135oF or above before use.
- Reheat foods in accordance with reheating for hot holding mention in this standard operating
procedure.
- All hot potentially hazardous foods should be 135oF or above before placing in hot holding
units.
- Take the internal temperature of food before placing it on a steam table or in a hot holding
unit and at least every 2 hours thereafter.
• For cold foods held for service:
- Verify that the air/water temperature of any unit is at 41oF or below before use.
- Chill foods, if applicable, in accordance with the cooling potentially hazardous foods standard
operating procedures.
- All cold potentially hazardous foods should be 41oF or below before placing the food in
holding units.
- Take the internal temperature of food before placing it onto any salad bar, display cooler, or
cold serving line and at least every 2 hours thereafter.
• For cold foods in storage:
- Take the internal temperature of the food before placing it into any walk-in cooler or reach-in
cold holding unit.
- Verify that air temperature of any cold holding unit is at 41oF or below before use.
• For cold foods in storage:
- Take the internal temperature of the food before placing it into any walk-in cooler or reach-in
cold holding unit.
- Chill food in accordance with the Cooling Potentially Hazardous Foods SOP if the food is not
41 ºF or below.
- Verify that the air temperature of any cold holding unit is at 41 ºF or below before use and at
least every 4 hours thereafter during all hours of operation.
Corrective Actions
• Retrain any food service employee found not following the procedures in this SOP.
• for hot foods:
- Reheat the food to 165 ºF for 15 seconds if the temperature is found to be below 135 ºF and
the last temperature measurement was 135 ºF or higher and taken within the last 2 hours.
- Repair or reset holding equipment before returning the food to the unit, if applicable.
- Discard the food if it cannot be determined how long the food temperature was below 135 ºF.
• For cold foods:
- Rapidly chill the food using an appropriate cooling method if the temperature is found to be
above 41 ºF and the last temperature measurement was 41 ºF or below and taken within the
last 2 hours:
- Place food in shallow containers (no more than 4 inches deep) and uncovered on the top shelf
in the back of the walk-in cooler.
- Use a quick-chill unit like a blast chiller.
- Stir the food in a container placed in an ice water bath.
- Add ice as an ingredient.
- Separate food into smaller or thinner portions.
- Repair or reset holding equipment before returning the food to the unit, if applicable.
- Discard the food if it cannot be determined how long the food temperature was above 41 ºF.


Food service employees will record the temperatures of food items and document Corrective
Actions taken on the Hot and Cold Holding Temperature Log. A designated food service employee
will record the air temperatures of coolers and cold holding units on the Refrigeration Logs. The
Subcontractor’s Camp boss will verify that food service employees have taken the required holding
temperatures by visually monitoring food service employees during the shift and reviewing the
temperature logs at the close of each day. The temperature logs are to be kept on file for a minimum
of 1 year.
N.B. Rig contractor camp boss shall ensure that the temperature log is kept up to date
1.4.11.3. Personal Hygiene
Instructions
• Train food service employees on using the procedures in this SOP.
• Follow legal requirements and regulations.
• Report to work in good health, clean, and dressed appropriately.
• Wash hands properly, frequently, and at the appropriate times.
• Keep finger nails trimmed, filed, and maintained so that the edges are cleanable and not rough.
• Don’t wear artificial fingernails with exposed foods unless wearing gloves.
• Don’t wear any jewelry except for a plain ring such as a wedding band.
• Treat and bandage wounds and sores immediately. When hands are bandaged, single-use
gloves must be worn.
• Eat, drink, use tobacco, or chew gum only in designated areas where food or food contact
surfaces may not become contaminated.
• Taste food the correct way:
- Place a small amount of food into a separate container.
- Step away from exposed food and food contact surfaces.
- Use a teaspoon to taste the food. Remove the used teaspoon and container to be washed in
basin. Never reuse a spoon that has already been used for tasting.
- Wash hands immediately.
• Wear suitable and effective hair restraints while in the kitchen.
Monitoring
• HSE Engineer will inspect food service employees when they report to work to be sure that
each employee is following this SOP.
• Camp boss will monitor that all food service employees are adhering to the personal hygiene
policy during all hours of operation.
Corrective Actions
• Retain any food service employee found not following the procedures in this SOP.
• Discard affected food.
The camp boss and physician will verify that food service employees are following this SOP by
visually observing the employees during all hours of operation. The Sub-contractors Camp Boss and
rig contractor camp boss will complete the food safety checklist daily. Food service employees will
record any discarded food on the damaged or discarded product log. The HSE engineer is to inspect
and supervise the whole personal hygiene SOP. Logs are to be kept for a minimum of 1 year.

1.4.11.4. Using and Calibrating Thermometers

Instructions
• Follow the food thermometer manufacturer’s regulations for use. Use a food thermometer
that measures temperatures from 0oF (-18oC) to 220oF (104oC) and is appropriate for the
temperature being taken. For example;
- Temperatures of thin products, such as hamburgers, chicken breasts, pizza, filets, nuggets,
hotdogs, and sausage patties, must be taken using a thermocouple with a thin probe.
- Bimetallic, dial-faced stem thermometers are accurate only when measuring temperatures of
thick foods. They may not be used to measure temperatures of thin foods.
• Have food thermometers easily accessible to food service employees during all hours of
operation.
• Clean and sanitize food thermometer before use. (Wiping cloth with approved sanitizer or
alcohol swab approved to sanitize thermometer probe.)
• Store food thermometers in an area that is clean and where they are not subjected to
contamination.
Monitoring
• Food service employees will use the ice-point method or boiling method to verify the accuracy
of food thermometers.
• To use ice-point method:
- Prepare a cup of ice with enough cold water to remove any air pockets.
- Insert thermometer probe at least 5 cm into the ice water making sure not to touch sides or
bottom of the cup.
- Allow temperature reading to stabilize before reading the temperature.
- Temperature measurement should be 0oC (+ or -1). If adjustment is required, follow
manufacturer’s instructions.
• To use boiling point method:
- Immerse at least 5cm of the probe into boiling water making sure not to touch sides or
bottom of cup.
- Allow the temperature reading to stabilize before reading the temperature.
- Reading should be 100oC (+ or -1). If adjustment required, follow manufacturer’s instructions.
• Food service employees will check the accuracy of food thermometers:
- At regular intervals ( at least once per week)
- If dropped.
- If used to measure extreme temperatures, such as in an oven.
- Whenever accuracy is in question.
Corrective Actions
• Retrain any food service employee not following the procedures in the SOP.
• For an inaccurate, digital thermometer with a reset button, adjust the thermometer according to
manufacturer’s instructions.
• If an inaccurate thermometer can’t be adjusted on site, discontinue using it, and follow the
manufacturer’s instructions for having the thermometer calibrated.
• Retrain employees who are using or calibrating food thermometers improperly.
Food service employees will record the calibration temperature and Corrective Actions taken,
if applicable. The caterer will verify that food service employees are using and calibrating
thermometers properly by making visual observations of the employees during the calibration
process and all operating hours. The HSE engineer will review and initial the thermometer
calibration log weekly. The calibration log will be kept on file for a minimum of 1 year.

1.4.11.5. Limiting Bacterial Growth in Potentially Hazardous Foods

Instructions
• Train food service employees on using the procedures in this SOP. Refer to the using and
calibrating thermometers SOP.
• Expect during preparation, cooking, or cooling, potentially hazardous foods shall be maintained
at 135oF or above, or at 41oF or below.
• Cook raw potentially hazardous food within hours past the point when the food is removed
from temperature control.
• Serve or discard cooked or ready-to-eat food within 4 hours past the time when the food is
removed from temperature control.
Monitoring
• Rig contractor Caterer & physicians will continually monitor that foods are properly marked
or identified with the time that is 4 hours past the point when the food is removed from
temperature control.
• Rig contractor and Caterer will continually monitor that foods are cooked, served, or discarded
by the indicated time.
Corrective Actions
• Retrain any food service employee found not following the procedures in SOP.
• Discard unmarked or unidentified food removed from temperature control.
• Discard food that is noted to exceed the 4-hour limit.
Food service employees will mark or otherwise identify food as specified in the instructions section
of this SOP. The physicians will verify that food service employees are following these procedures by
visually monitoring food service employees and food handling during the shift. Food safety checklist
is to be kept for at least one year.
1.4.12. Storing and Using Poisonous or Toxic Chemicals.

Instructions
• Designate a location for storing the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
• Follow manufacturer’s directions for specific mixing, storing, and first aid
• Instructions on the chemical containers in the MSDS.
• Label and date all poisonous or toxic chemicals with the common name of the substance.
• Store all chemicals in a designated secured area away from food and food contact surfaces
using spacing or partitioning.
• Limit access to chemicals by use of locks, seals, or key cards.
• Maintain an inventory of chemicals.
• Store only chemicals that are necessary to the operation and maintenance of the kitchen.
• Use the appropriate chemical test kit to measure the concentration of sanitizer each time a new
batch of sanitizer is mixed.
• Do not use chemical containers for storing food or water.
• Label and store first aid supplies in a container that is located away from food or food contact
surfaces.
• Do not store medicines in food storage areas.

Monitoring
Camp boss and food service manager will visually observe that chemicals are being stored,
labeled, and used properly during all hours of operation.
Corrective Actions
• Discard any food contaminated by chemicals.
• Label and properly store any unlabeled or misplaced chemicals.
The Camp boss will complete the Food Safety Checklist daily to indicate that monitoring is
completed. Food service employees will record the name of the contaminated food, date, time,
and the reason why the food was discarded on the Damaged and Discarded Product Log. The Rig
physician will verify that appropriate Corrective actions are being taken by reviewing, initialing, and
dating the Damaged and Discarded Product Log each day. The Food Safety Checklist and Damaged
and Discarded Product Logs are kept on file for a minimum of 1 year.
1.4.12.1. Preventing Contamination at Food Bars
Instructions
• Follow Employee Health Policy, Personal Hygiene, and Washing hands.
• Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for pre-heating and pre-chilling food bar equipment
before use.
• Place all exposed food under sneeze guards.
• Provide an appropriate clean and sanitized utensil for each container on the food bar.
• Replace existing containers of food with new containers when replenishing the food bar.
• Assist customers who are unable to properly use utensils.
• Ensure that customers use a clean dish when returning to the food bar and avoid using spray
chemicals to clean food bars when in use.
Monitoring
• Monitor and record temperatures of food in accordance with SOP.
• Continually monitor food containers to ensure that utensils are stored on a clean and sanitized
surface or in the containers with the handles out of the food.
• Continually monitor customers’ use of the food bar to ensure that customers are not:
- Touching food with their bare hands
- Coughing, spitting, or sneezing on the food
- Placing foreign objects in the food
- Using the same plate for subsequent trips
Corrective Actions
• Remove and discard contaminated food.
• Demonstrate to customers how to properly use utensils.
• Discard the food if it cannot be determined how long the food temperature was above 41 ºF or
below 135 ºF.
The Rig Contractor camp boss/caterer camp boss will verify that food service employees are
assigned to maintain food bars during all hours of operation. Food service employees will record
the temperatures of food items and document Corrective actions taken on the Hot and Cold Holding

Temperature Log. The Rig Contractor camp-boss/caterer camp-boss will complete the Food Safety
Checklist daily. This form is to be kept on file for a minimum of 1 year. Food service employees will
document any discarded food on the Damaged or Discarded Product Log. The Rig Contractor camp-
boss/caterer camp-boss will verify that appropriate Corrective actions are being taken by reviewing,
initialing, and dating the Damaged or Discarded Product Log each day. The Hot and Cold Holding
Temperature Log and the Damaged or Discarded Product Log are to be kept on file for a minimum
of 1 year.
1.4.12.2. Preventing Cross-Contamination during Storage and Preparation.
Instructions
• Wash hands properly. Refer to the Washing Hands SOP.
• Avoid touching ready-to-eat food with bare hands
• Separate raw animal foods, such as eggs, fish, meat, and poultry from ready-to-eat foods, such
as lettuce, and lunch meats during receiving, storage, and preparation.
• Separate different types of raw animal foods, such as eggs, fish, meat, and poultry, from each
other, except when combined in recipes.
• Store raw animal foods in refrigerators or walk-in coolers by placing the raw animal foods
on shelves in order of cooking temperatures with the raw animal food requiring the highest
cooking temperature, such as chicken, on the lowest shelf.
• Separate unwashed fruits and vegetables from washed fruits and vegetables and other ready-
to-eat foods.
• Use only dry, cleaned, and sanitized equipment and utensils.
• Touch only those surfaces of equipment and utensils that will not come in direct contact with
food.
• Place food in covered containers or packages, except during cooling, and store in the walk-in
refrigerator or cooler.
• Designate an upper shelf of a refrigerator or walk-in cooler as the “cooling” shelf. Uncover
containers of food during the initial quick cool-down phase to facilitate cooling.
• Clean the exterior surfaces of food containers, such as cans and jars, of visible soil before
opening.
• Store damaged goods in a separate location.
Monitoring
A designated food service employee will continually monitor food storage and preparation to
ensure that food is not cross-contaminated.
Corrective Actions
• Separate foods found improperly stored.
• Discard ready-to-eat foods that are contaminated by raw eggs, raw fish, raw meat, or raw
poultry.
The rig physician will visually observe that employees are following these procedures and
taking all necessary Corrective Actionss during all hours of operation. The caterer supervisor will
periodically check the storage of foods during hours of operation and complete the Food Safety
Checklist daily. The Food Safety Checklist will be kept on file for a minimum of 1 year. Food service
employees will document any discarded food on the Damaged and Discarded Product Log. The
Camp boss will verify that appropriate Corrective Actionss are being taken by reviewing, initialing,
and dating the Damaged and Discarded Product Log each day. The Damaged and Discarded

Product Log is to be kept on file for a minimum of 1 year.

1.4.12.3. Reheating Potentially Hazardous Foods
Instructions
• Train food service employees on using the procedures in this SOP. Refer to the Using and
Calibrating Thermometers SOP.
• Reheat the following products to 165 ºF for 15 seconds:/.nbvc003E
• Any food that is cooked, cooled, and reheated for hot holding
• Leftovers reheated for hot holding
• Products made from leftovers, such as soup
• Precooked, processed foods that have been previously cooled
Reheat food for hot holding in the following manner if using a microwave oven
• Heat processed, ready-to-eat foods from a package or can to at least 135 ºF for 15 seconds
• Heat leftovers to 165 ºF for 15 seconds
• Rotate (or stir) and cover foods while heating
• Allow to sit for 2 minutes after heating
- Reheat all foods rapidly. The total time the temperature of the food is between 41 ºF and 165
ºF may not exceed 2 hours.
- Serve reheated food immediately or transfer to an appropriate hot holding unit.
Monitoring
• Use clean, sanitized, and calibrated probe thermometer.
• Take at least two internal temperatures from each pan of food.
Corrective Actions
• Continue reheating and heating food if the internal temperature does not reach the required
temperature.
Food service employees will record product name, time, the two temperatures/times, and any
Corrective Actions taken on the Cooking and Reheating Temperature Log. Camp boss will verify that
food service employees have taken the required reheating temperatures by visually monitoring food
service employees during the shift and reviewing, initialing, and dating the Cooking and Reheating
Temperature Log at the close of each day. The temperature logs are kept on file for a minimum of 1
year.
1.4.12.4. Washing Hands
Instructions:
• Post hand washing signs or posters in a language understood by all food service staff near all
hand washing sinks, in food preparation areas, and restrooms.
• Use designated hand washing sinks for hand washing only. Do not use food preparation, utility,
and dishwashing sinks for hand washing.
• Provide warm running water, soap, and a means to dry hands. Provide a waste container at
each hand washing sink or near the door in restrooms.
• Keep hands washing sinks accessible anytime employees are present.
• Wash hands:
- Before starting work

- During food preparation

- When moving from one food preparation area to another
- Before putting on or changing gloves
- After using the toilet
- After sneezing, coughing, or using a handkerchief or tissue
- After touching hair, face, or body
- After smoking, eating, drinking, or chewing gum or tobacco
- After handling raw meats, poultry, or fish
- After any clean up activity such as sweeping, mopping, or wiping counters
- After touching dirty dishes, equipment, or utensils
- After handling trash
- After handling money
- After any time the hands may become contaminated
• Follow proper handwashing procedures as indicated below:
- Wet hands and forearms with warm, running water at least 100 ºF and apply soap.
- Scrub lathered hands and forearms, under fingernails, and between fingers for at least 10-15
seconds. Rinse thoroughly under warm running water for 5-10 seconds.
- Dry hands and forearms thoroughly with single-use paper towels.
- Dry hands for at least 30 seconds if using a warm air hand dryer.
- Turn off water using paper towels.
- Use paper towel to open door when exiting the restroom.
Monitoring
• A designated employee will visually observe the handwashing practices of the food service staff
• The designated employee will visually observe that handwashing sinks are properly supplied
Corrective Actions
• Ask employees that are observed not washing their hands at the appropriate times or using the
proper procedure to wash their hands immediately.
• Retrain employee to ensure proper handwashing procedure.
The caterer supervisor will complete the Food Safety Checklist daily to indicate that monitoring
is being conducted as specified. The Food Safety Checklist is to be kept on file for a minimum of 1
year.
1.4.12.5. Transporting Food to Remote Sites
Instructions
• Prepare the food carrier before use:
- Ensure that all surfaces of the food carrier are clean.
- Wash, rinse, and sanitize the interior surfaces.
- Ensure that the food carrier is designed to maintain cold food temperatures at 41 ºF and hot
food temperatures at 135 ºF or above.
- Place a calibrated stem thermometer in the warmest part of the carrier if used for transporting
cold food, or the coolest part of the carrier if used for transporting hot food. Refer to the
Using and Calibrating Thermometers SOP.
- Pre-heat or pre-chill the food carrier according to the manufacturer’s recommendations.
• Store food in containers suitable for transportation. Containers should be:

- Rigid and sectioned so that foods do not mix

- Tightly closed to retain the proper food temperature
- Nonporous to avoid leakage
- Easy-to-clean or disposable
- Approved to hold food
• Place food containers in food carriers and transport the food in clean trucks, if applicable, to
remote sites as quickly as possible.
• Follow Receiving Deliveries SOP when food arrives at remote site.
Monitoring
• Check the air temperature of the food carrier to ensure that the temperature suggested by the
manufacturer is reached prior to placing food into it.
• Check the internal temperatures of food using a calibrated thermometer before placing it into
the food carrier. Refer to the Holding Hot and Cold Potentially Hazardous Foods SOP for the
proper procedures to follow when taking holding temperatures.
Corrective Actions
• Continue heating or chilling food carrier if the proper air temperature is not reached.
• Reheat food to 165 ºF for 15 seconds if the internal temperature of hot food is less than 135 ºF.
Refer to the Reheating Potentially Hazardous Foods SOP.
• Cool food to 41 ºF or below using a proper cooling procedure if the internal temperature of cold
food is greater than 41 ºF. Refer to the Cooling Potentially Hazardous Foods SOP for the proper
procedures to follow when cooling food.
• Discard foods held in the danger zone for greater than 4 hours.
Before transporting food to remote sites, food service employees will record food carrier
temperature, food product name, time, internal temperatures, and any Corrective Actions taken
on the Hot and Cold Holding Temperature Log. Upon receipt of food at remote sites, food service
employees will record receiving temperatures and Corrective Actions taken on the Receiving Log.
The caterer supervisor at central kitchens will verify that food service employees are following
this SOP by visually observing employees and reviewing and initialing the Hot and Cold Holding
Temperature Log daily. The camp boss will verify that food service employees are receiving foods
at the proper temperature and following the proper receiving procedures by visually observing
receiving practices during the shift and reviewing and initialing the Receiving Log daily. All logs are
kept on file for a minimum of 1 year.
1.4.12.6. Cooling Potentially Hazardous Foods
Instructions
• Train food service employees on using the procedures in this SOP. Refer to the Using and
Calibrating Thermometers SOP.
• Prepare and cool food in small batches.
• Chill food rapidly using an appropriate cooling method:
- Place food in shallow containers no more than 4 inches deep and uncovered on the top shelf
in the back of the walk-in or reach-in cooler.
- Use a quick-chill unit such as a blast chiller.
- Stir the food in a container placed in an ice water bath.
- Add ice as an ingredient.
- Separate food into smaller or thinner portions.
- Pre-chill ingredients and containers used for making bulk items such as salads.
• If State or local requirements are based on the 2001 FDA Food Code, chill cooked, hot food

from:
- 135 ºF to 70 ºF within 2 hours. Take Corrective Actions immediately if food is not chilled from
135 ºF to 70 ºF within 2 hours.
- 70 ºF to 41 ºF or below in remaining time. The total cooling process from 135 ºF to 41 ºF may
not exceed 6 hours. Take Corrective Actions immediately if food is not chilled from 135 ºF to
41 ºF within the 6 hour cooling process.
• Chill prepared, ready-to-eat foods such as tuna salad and cut melons from 70 ºF to 41 ºF or
below within 4 hours. Take Corrective Actions immediately if ready-to-eat food is not chilled
from 70 ºF to 41 ºF within 4 hours.
Monitoring
• Use a clean, sanitized, and calibrated probe thermometer to measure the internal temperature
of the food during the cooling process.
• Monitor temperatures of products every hour throughout the cooling process by inserting a
probe thermometer into the center of the food and at various locations in the product.
Corrective Actions
• Reheat cooked, hot food to 165 ºF for 15 seconds and start the cooling process again using a
different cooling method when the food is:
- Above 70 ºF and 2 hours or less into the cooling process; and
- Above 41 ºF and 6 hours or less into the cooling process.
• Discard cooked, hot food immediately when the food is:
- Above 70 ºF and more than 2 hours into the cooling process; or
- Above 41 ºF and more than 6 hours into the cooling process.
• Use a different cooling method for prepared ready-to-eat foods when the food is above 41 ºF
and less than 4 hours into the cooling process.
• Discard prepared ready-to-eat foods when the food is above 41 ºF and more than 4 hours into
the cooling process.
Food service employees will record temperatures and Corrective Actionss taken on the Cooling
Temperature Log. Food service employees will record if there are no foods cooled on any working
day by indicating “No Foods Cooled” on the Cooling Temperature Log. The rig physician will
verify that food service employees are cooling food properly by visually monitoring food service
employees during the shift and reviewing, initialing, and dating the temperature log each working
day. The Cooling Temperature Logs are to be kept on file for a minimum of 1 year

1.5. Guidance for Action Tracking

Criteria Example Green Yellow Red
Equipment capable of Available and Available but Not available or
Blast chilling, being able to rapidly reduce working within maintaining food maintaining food
refrigera- and/or maintain food specification. temperatures
tors/walk in temperatures between 1 °C temperatures above 8˚C.
chillers and 5 °C. between
5˚C and 8˚C.
Food should not be left out 5˚C or below Between 5˚C and Above 8˚C
at ambient temperature for 8˚C
more than 20 minutes, and Food left
Chilled food temperature checked on
Temperature at ambient
delivery temperature for
more than 20
minutes.
Robust cleaning schedule Cleaning Cleaning schedule No evidence
in place, and catering grade schedule in available but not of organized
Cleaning cleaning products available place and implemented, or cleaning and use
and used. catering grade non-catering grade of non-catering
chemicals in use. chemicals in use. grade chemicals.
Food should be cooked as Food cooked as Completion of Completion of
close to consumption as late as possible cooking more cooking more
Cooking too possible. Cooking far in before service than an hour than an hour
far in advance due to power cuts and/or during prior to service prior to service
Advance is not acceptable. service. with adequate with inadequate
temperature temperature
controls in place. control.
Controlled through the use Provision Color-coded No color-coded
of color-coded chopping and effective equipment equipment
boards, knives and cleaning segregation of provided but used available. Cross-
cloths. Raw foods stored color-coded incorrectly. contamination
Cross-contam-
below cooked (ready to chopping between raw and
ination
eat) foods or physically boards, knives, cooked.
segregated. cloths and
correct food
storage.
All food handlers are Full compliance. Program in place No evidence of
vaccinated and medically Valid but documentation compliance.
screened periodically and certificates/ incomplete or
Fitness for
prior to commencement of documentation expired
work
work. available in
facility
Freezers/walk Should be easily capable -18˚C or lower Between -18˚C and Above -12˚C
in of storing food at or below -12˚C
Freezers -18˚C


Wash hand basins (WHB) Located near Not located near to No soap or
should be unobstructed and entrances, entrances but with drying facilities
Hand washing sited near entrances and accessible and soap and drying available at
Provision provided with liquid soap with soap and facilities WHB.
dispensers, hand drying hand drying
facilities and waste bin. facilities
Air temperatures in kitchen Kitchen Kitchen Kitchen
being maintained at 30˚C temperatures temperatures temperatures
Heating, ven- or below and capable of at 30˚C or less. between 30˚C and above40˚C or
tilation, removing cooking vapors. Vapors being 40˚C. inadequate
air condition- extracted. extraction of
ing cooking vapors
Should be able to keep 63˚C or above / Between 60˚C and Below 60˚C /
Hot and cold food hot(above 63˚C) and 5˚C or below 63˚C /5˚C and 8˚C above 8˚C
Displays cold (below 5˚C).
Cooked food to achieve a 75˚C or above Between 70˚C and Less than 70˚C
core temperature of 75˚C on completion 75˚Con completion on completion
Hot food and to be kept at 63˚C or of cooking. Food of cooking. Food of cooking. Food
temperature above for no more than 4 kept at 63˚C or kept above 63˚C for held below 63˚C.
control hours. above for less more than 4 hours.
than 4 hours.
Should be able to keep hot Cabinet Cabinet Cabinet not

food at 63˚C or above. maintaining maintaining achieving 60˚C or
Hot holding temperature temperature cabinets required
cabinets above 63˚C. between60˚C and but not provided.
63˚C.
Capacity and temperatures 82˚C 60˚C (disinfection <60˚C

should be appropriate to (disinfection sink and (disinfection
use. sinks and dishwashers) sinks and
dishwashers) 40˚C–43˚C (WHB). dishwashers).
Hot water
60˚C (detergent Sporadic hot water <40˚C or
provision
sinks) 43˚C– availability. >49˚C (WHB).
49˚C (WHB). Inadequate
Available at all supply.
times.
Staff washing their Staff observed Staff not washing Staff not washing
hands on entering food engaging in hands thoroughly hands after
Personal hy-
preparation areas, change correct hand or regularly. visiting toilets or
giene
of task and after using the washing during handling refuses.
toilet. visit.


Facility should be pest free Effective Pest activity Evidence of
and designed to keep pests pest control identified but uncontrolled pest
out. measures in control measures presence and/
Pest control place. in place. or an absence of
control measure.
Effective control of cleaning Control over Procedure in place No MSDS in

chemicals (e.g. MSDS in potential but place. Chemicals
place), glass, ceramics, contaminants. not fully stored with food.
Physical / wood, decanted ingredients Dedicated implemented No physical
chemical con- etc. chemical contaminant
taminants storage. control.
Significant
potential for
contamination.
Bins effectively distributed Lidded external Bins with manual Waste bins
within the kitchen. External bins stored lids in use overflowing.
Refuse bins enclosed and kept away internally. Some External food
Arrangements away from kitchen. from entrances; refuse strewn bins open,
appropriate outside. attracting pests.
internal bins
Potable water and sanitizer Sanitizer and Potable water Potable water/
used to disinfect and rinse potable water available but salad washing/
Salad prepa- salad vegetables. used to disinfect rinsing not carried sanitizer not
ration and rinse salad out. used.
vegetables.
There should be a linear Easily capable Poor layout with Area too small
workflow that allows of providing most tasks being to meet the
staff to work without safe food for conducted in one demand. Risk of
Structure and compromising food safety. the intended area. contamination,
layout number of e.g. cooked food
customers and raw foods
prepared in same
area.
Supervisors trained to Food Supervisors Supervisors Supervisors have

Safety for Managers level have attained about to take not attended
and all food handlers given Food Safety Food Safety for Food Safety for
a minimum of an induction for Managers Managers course, Managers and/
Training
and 6 hours food hygiene level and food and food handlers or no training
training. handlers trained. trained with program in
training program place for food
implemented. handlers.
1.6. Catering Action Report

Report No:
Site Visited:
Date of Inspection:
Inspected by: Facility Provider responsible
Caterer Responsible
Defect/Non confor- Action Target
Area/ Location/ Issue Action Status
mance by date
Blast chilling, refrigerators/
walk in chillers
Chilled food temperature
Cleaning
Cooking too far in advance
Cross-contamination
Fitness for work
Freezers/walk in freezers
Hand washing provision
Heating, ventilation, air
conditioning
Hot and cold displays
Hot food temperature control
Hot holding cabinets
Hot water provision
Personal hygiene
Pest control
Physical / chemical
contaminants
Refuse arrangements
Salad preparation
Structure and layout
Training

1.7. Catering Hygiene Checklist

Inspection is a tool to monitor standards, key controls and assess particular issues
Catering Facilities Checklist

Kitchen facilities should be inspected and reported on weekly basis.
Suggested points to include are: Food handling, kitchen, dining, housekeeping and waste management.
Prepared by: Date:
Sat. = When checked and satisfactory
Unsat. = When checked and if unsatisfactory, requires comment and short description of
Planned mitigating action / who is responsible for mitigation / due date. Must be
Filed.
Sat. Unsat.
Delivery of food
Documentation of certificate of origin, receipts, and expiry date of goods checked
Cleanliness of delivery area
Comments:
Garbage Area
Maintenance of structure
Cleanliness of structure
Insects absence
Rodent absent
Collection frequency
Comments:
Washing-up area
Maintenance of fittings
Cleanliness of fittings
Pre-scraping carried out
Dish washer provided
Machine temperatures adequate, rinse temperature above 82˚C
Equipment sanitized by chemical or heat 60˚C if hand washed
Tap water of sufficient quantity
Protective gloves available for manual dish washing
Comments:

Cold rooms and refrigerators

Cleanliness of shelves
Food in cold room stored, no more than 10˚C
Fridge temperature below 5˚C
Raw and cooked foods adequately separated and covered
Thermometer provided and in working order
Temperature log kept and satisfactory (in hot areas, morning and evening temperature
is not adequate, should include reading from the hottest part of the day during summer
season)
Door seals clean and in good condition
Comments:
Clean equipment and utensil storage

Maintenance and structure
Stored equipment protected from dust and dirt
Proper color coded wipe/polish cloths available and used
Comments:
Bulk dry store

Temperature satisfactory
No goods stored on the ground/floor
Comments:
Freezers
Cleanliness of shelves
Food stored above floor level

Raw and cooked foods adequately separated and covered

Door seals clean and in good condition
Frozen foods thawed in cold room before use
Temperature below -18˚C
Temperature log kept and satisfactory
Thermometer provided and in working order
Comments:
Kitchen
Sink provided is clean
Room temperature satisfactory during preparation of meals, ambient temperature around
30˚C
Sufficient hot water at the correct temperature provided
Drains sufficient and working
Cleaning program in place and well communicated to staff
Ventilation working satisfactorily
Ventilator hoods have grease filters
Designated hand washing sinks with liquid soap, pedal bin and paper towels, water
temperature between 45 and 49˚C
Comments:
Beverage/Ice area
Water supply to ice machine satisfactory
Ice scoop stored satisfactorily
Cold drinks machine regularly dismantled and sanitized
Comments:

Toilets
Aerially disconnected from food production area
Hot and cold water provided
Soap provided
Single user towels provided
‘NOW WASH YOUR HANDS’ sign displayed
Floors dry
Comments:
Miscellaneous overall
Kitchen/dining facilities sufficient for the number of people served
Kitchen staff sufficient for the number of meals prepared
Changing facilities provided for staff
No equipment or pots stored directly on floor
Electronic fly killer installed
Premises rodent/animal proofed
Full air conditioning provided
Food expiry dates satisfactory
Pest control satisfactory
Water supply safe for drinking
Date of last water samples taken
Power supplies properly maintained
Cutting and chopping boards color coded
Comments:
Procedures
Written cleaning schedule in use
Worktops, cutting boards and other small equipment sanitized after use
Re-usable dry stored items examined before re-use
Stock rotation of perishable items
Frozen meat/fish/poultry defrosted in the refrigerator
Rice to be used is freshly cooked

Heating cupboards/hot plates working and at correct temperatures

‘NO SMOKING’ sign in food production area.
Toxic items (cleaning materials) labeled correctly and stored in proper places
Safety data sheet for cleaning agents is available
Contents of opened food cans transferred to proper containers once opened
Main rule: food should be cooked hot and served hot: cooked food not allowed to reach
temperature below 63˚C
Thermometers and probes, including probe wipes, available to check food temperature.
Basic first aid equipment available to kitchen staff
Firefighting equipment available and working
Fire escapes not blocked
Comments:
Staff
Appearance
Protective clothing, including shoes (not open slippers), and light colored uniforms
Protective clothing and uniforms properly laundered
Head coverings
Medically examined prior to employment and then at least yearly
Stool tests included in medical examination
Infected food handlers excluded from work until cleared
Food handlers vaccinated (specify according to regulation)
Comments:
Corrective Actions To Be Taken
1.8. Food Safety Checklist
Food Hygiene Inspection Checklist

YES/NO
Hand washing facilities
Are wash hand basins readily accessible and clean, and free of utensils/food waste?
Is there sufficient hot (43–49˚C) and cold water?
Have soap and drying facilities been supplied and replenished?

Storage and display temperature control – chilled and frozen

Are all refrigerators holding food at or below 5˚C?
Are all freezers holding food at or below -18˚C?
Are refrigerators and freezers loaded to ensure that there is unobstructed air flow?
Are the door seals of all chillers and freezers clean and intact?
Are all the evaporator fins free from a build-up of ice?
Can the emergency door release of walk-in refrigerators and freezers be operated
effectively?
Is storage temperatures recorded a minimum of three times a day and documents
readily accessible?
Are actual food temperatures being taken (using probe or infra-red thermometers) and
recorded?
Is Corrective Actions taken and noted when correct food storage/display temperatures
have not been achieved?
Are chilled foods not exposed to ambient temperature for more than 20 minutes
during preparation and storage?
Is the cold display equipment maintaining food at a temperature of 5˚C or below?
Are cold foods transferred to remote canteens in insulated boxes?
Salad and fruit preparation
Is the water used for salad preparation of drinking-water quality (potable)?
Is a chemical sanitizer available and used to disinfect salad products and fruit
(excluding oranges, etc. where the peel isn’t eaten)?
Is the strength of the sanitizer checked?
Are damaged/poor quality fruit and salads removed prior to sanitizing?
Temperature control - cooking
Are food temperatures checked immediately after cooking? (Should be 75˚C or above)
Are actual food temperatures being taken (using probe or infra-red thermometers) and
recorded?
Is Corrective Actions taken and noted when correct cooking temperature has not been
achieved?
Does cooking start less than 5 hours before service starts?
Is everything cooked today for service today?
Hot holding and hot display
Is hot holding/hot display equipment turned on at least an hour before food is placed
into it, and checked each hour that it is in use?
Is the hot holding/hot display equipment maintaining food at a temperature of 63˚C or
above?
Are actual hot display food temperatures being recorded and records readily
accessible?

Is Corrective Actions taken and noted when the correct food storage temperature has
not been achieved?
Are the hot holding cabinets in a clean, serviceable condition (e.g. door seals clean,
undamaged and in contact with the door)?
Are the water reservoirs for the hot holding cabinets filled and maintained with hot
water during use?
Are hot foods transferred to remote canteens in insulated boxes?
Indicators of heating, ventilation and air conditioning failures
Are doors and windows closed in air-conditioned food preparation areas?
Is the air temperature in food preparation areas below 30˚C?
Are grease filters clean and present in the extraction hoods?
Cross contamination
Are color-coded cleaning cloths available (e.g. RED=raw, BLUE=cooked/ready to eat,
YELLOW=toilets)?
Are color-coded knives available (e.g. RED=raw, BLUE=fish, GREEN=salads,
BLACK=ready to eat)?
Is the color-coded equipment being used correctly as above?
Are chopping boards in good condition (e.g. free from deep scoring)?
Physical/chemical contaminants
Are glass objects in the food production/service areas (e.g. bottles, glass shelves or
sneeze guards) free from damage or chips?
Is glass breakages (including ceramics) recorded?
Are all lights provided with intact diffuser covers?
Are the diffusers free from dead insects?
Is food kept above floor level (e.g. stackable containers of meat or prepared
vegetables)?
Are bags of raw ingredients stored on impervious material pallets (not wood)?
Are bagged products, once opened, decanted into storage bins to avoid pests?
Are cleaning chemicals and equipment kept in a separate store away from food
storage and preparation areas?
Personal hygiene
Do food handlers wash their hands on entering a food preparation room? (Observe)
Do food handlers wash their hands between handling raw and ready-to-eat foods?
(Observe)
Check the hands of 5 food handlers. Are cuts protected by a plaster?
Are food handlers free from jewelers (a plain wedding band and plain sleeper earrings
are acceptable)?
Are food handlers free from excessive cosmetics and perfume?

Is suitable headwear for hair provided and used by everyone in the kitchen?
Are uniforms in an undamaged, clean condition?
Provision of Hot Water
Is hot water continuously available for pot washing (e.g. does not run out)?
Is the temperature of water at pot/dish washing sinks at or above 60˚C?
Is the automated dishwasher rinse cycle at or above 82˚C?
Cleaning
Is the cleaning schedule followed?
Is ‘clean as you go’ appropriately implemented (e.g. spot cleaning)?
Is detailed cleaning of utensils and equipment performed to an acceptable standard?
Is general cleaning (e.g. walls, tiles, floors, etc.) performed to an acceptable standard?
Pest Control
Are the facilities free from flying insects?
Is the facility free of the evidence of pest activity (e.g. no droppings, insect bodies, fur,
feathers, and product damage)?
Are all open windows fitted with a fly screen?
Are all electronic fly killers switched on?
Training
Are routine toolbox talks being conducted and recorded?
Refuse Arrangements
Do waste bins have lids?
Are kitchen waste bins pedal operated?
Are waste bins positioned close to wash hand basins and work benches?
Are waste bins emptied before they are overflowing?
Is the external waste holding area clean and tidy?
Good Receipt
Are produce temperatures, shelf life dates and packaging condition checked and
recorded for each delivery?
Are accepted chilled products received at 5˚C or lower?
Are accepted frozen goods received at temperatures of -15˚C or lower?
Are chilled and frozen goods delivered in a refrigerated vehicle?
Are all goods received within manufacturer’s expiry/use-by date?
Are goods in store rooms undamaged and complete with labeling?
Is there a register of rejected goods indicating reason for rejection and action taken?

Non-conformances Correction
date
1.9. Insurance on Flowcharts and Critical Points:

Rig Contractors Company should track its catering contractor’s Flowcharts which are used in
identifying critical control points during the food preparation process. Where catering contractors
always should stick to rig contractors company selected deli food flowcharts as a raw model, in
addition to providing proven implemented system for identifying critical control points along all
hazards identified through catering services
1.9.1. Flowcharts and CCP for Selected Catered Food



E2. Sanitation
E.2. Sanitation
2.1. Scope
This procedure applies to all food service employees involved in cleaning and sanitizing food
contact surfaces.
2.2. Purpose
To prevent foodborne illness, ensure all food contact surfaces are properly cleaned and
sanitized.
2.3. Definitions
2.3.1. Cleaning
Removes dirt, grease, and other contaminants from floors, walls, and equipment like microwaves
and refrigerators.
But when it comes to any surface that touches food like preparation tables, utensils, and dishes,
cleaning isn’t enough, you must also sanitize.
This is because cleaning only removes visible dirt and food particles — pathogens that you cannot
see can remain, even if a surface appears clean.
2.3.2. Sanitizing
Is the process that kills pathogens, reduces viruses or harmful strains of bacteria to safe levels and
reduces them to safe numbers..
2.3.3. Disinfection
Kills most or all pathogens, and sterilization kills all pathogens.
Disinfectants and sterling products are more commonly used in healthcare settings like hospitals
and nursing homes rather than in food service since they are not food-safe. That is why it can only
be used for sickbay/clinic at rig camp/accommodation.
2.3.4. Sterilizing
Is the process of destroying all microorganisms, including bacteria, viruses, and fungi, from food
contact surfaces. This is important to prevent foodborne illness, which can cause serious health
problems.

E.2. Sanitation
2.4. Procedures
2.4.1. When and How to Clean and Sanitize Food-Contact Surfaces
Rig contractor or food-service employee must clean and sanitize food-contact surfaces whenever
they become contaminated, such as:
• before and after working with food, especially raw animal products
• when switching tasks, such as between dicing chicken and chopping lettuce
• after taking a break, in case of contamination unknowingly occurs while you are away
• after four hours of use, since this is enough time for bacteria to multiply to harmful levels
• At any time during the operation, when contamination may have occurred.
Here’s how to properly clean and sanitize food-contact surfaces (a three-compartment sink is
preferable):
• Remove any loose or caked-on food particles.
• Scrub the surface using warm water (35°C [95°F] or hotter) and a detergent to remove stuck-on
food particles, grime, and oils (in the 1st compartment).
• Rinse the surface with clean water (35°C [95°F] or hotter) to wash away any detergent residue
(in the 2nd compartment).
• Following the directions on the sanitizer container, apply a sanitizing solution (in the 3rd
compartment).
• Allow the surface to air dry in a self-draining position on approved, properly protected hooks or
racks (never use a cloth or towel for drying since this can re-contaminate the surface).
• If a dish machine is used:
- Check with the dish machine manufacturer to verify that the information on the data plate is
correct.
- Refer to the information on the data plate for determining wash, rinse, and sanitization (final)
rinse temperatures; sanitizing solution concentrations; and water pressures, if applicable.
- Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for use.
- Ensure that food contact surfaces reach a surface temperature of 160 oF (71 oC) or above if
using hot water to sanitize.
You cannot sanitize a dirty surface so you must follow these steps in order to properly clean and
sanitize a surface.
There are a few extra steps when it comes to cleaning and sanitizing stationary equipment like
ranges, grills, hot-holding equipment, and microwaves.
To clean and sanitize stationary equipment, follow these steps:
• Unplug the equipment.
• Scrape or remove food from surfaces.
• Remove all removable parts and wash, rinse, and sanitize by hand or run through a dishwasher.
• Wash and rinse all food-contact surfaces you cannot remove.
• Sanitize the equipment surfaces and allow them to air-dry.
• Reassemble the unit.
However, you should still follow the manufacturer’s guidelines for cleaning and sanitizing
stationary equipment.
Wiping cloths are convenient for washing and sanitizing, but if you’re not careful, you can pick up
pathogens in your cloth and push them around, contaminating surfaces instead of sanitizing them.
2.4.2. Instructicons for food safety employees

• Don’t reuse dry cleaning cloths that you use to wipe up food spills or anything else.
• Keep wet cloths used for sanitizing in the sanitizing solution between uses.
• Regularly check the sanitizing solution concentration using a test kit to ensure it’s still effective.
• Don’t use wiping cloths that you use to clean and sanitize surfaces that come in contact with

E.2. Sanitation
raw animal foods.

• Launder wet wiping cloths daily.
The boxes, baskets, and other receptacles in which food is transported, or stored, shall be
maintained in good repair and kept free of accumulated dust, dirt, insects, rodents, and other
contamination.
Exhaust fans, hoods, filters, grease trays, and ductwork are cleaned regularly to prevent a buildup
of cooking grease and other flammable material.
2.4.3. Chemical Sanitizers Approved for Foodservice

The three main chemical sanitizers approved for food service include chlorine, iodine, and
quaternary ammonium (QUATS).
They are considered food-grade or food-safe because, unlike a disinfectant, even if they come in
contact with food, they’re unlikely to make people sick.
Many factors influence the effectiveness and safety of sanitizers.
Some of these factors include:
• Concentration: Too low of a concentration won’t effectively sanitize and too high of a
concentration can be toxic.
• Water temperature: Sanitizers work best between 55ºF (13ºC) and 120ºF (49ºC).
• Water hardness: Higher water hardness can decrease the effectiveness of some sanitizers.
• Contact time: To effectively kill and reduce bacteria and other pathogens to safe levels,
sanitizers must remain in contact with food-contact surfaces for 10–30 seconds.
• PH: Sanitizers tend to work better in more neutral environments rather than acidic ones.
Of these factors, concentration and water temperature are the most important to ensure proper
sanitization and safety.
Use a test strip or kit to verify that the concentration for your chosen chemical sanitizer is
correct.
2.4.3.1. Chlorine (Bleach)
Chlorine-based sanitizers are the most popular and widely used sanitizers in food service.
Sodium hypochlorite and chlorine dioxide are the active ingredients in chlorine-based sanitizers.
Chlorine sanitizers are less expensive compared with other sanitizers and are very effective in
reducing bacteria to safe numbers.
The concentration of chlorine ranges from 25 to 100 parts per million (ppm) .
The minimum temperature required for chlorine solutions depends primarily on the
concentration.
Concentration (ppm) Minimum Temperature (pH ≤ 10) Minimum Temperature (pH ≤ 8)
25–49 120ºF (49ºC) 120ºF (49ºC)

50–99 100ºF (38ºC) 75ºF (24ºC)
100 55ºF (13ºC) 55ºF (13ºC)
Chlorine-based sanitizers must remain on food-contact surfaces for at least 10 seconds to work
effectively.

E.2. Sanitation
2.4.3.2. Iodine
Iodine is an effective sanitizer but it’s more costly and less effective than chlorine, commonly used
in the medical field to disinfect the skin prior to surgeries and to prevent wounds from becoming
infected. And leave behind a reddish-brown stain that can be difficult to remove, especially from
plastics, so they are better suited for surfaces less prone to staining like glass or stainless steel.
The concentration of iodine for sanitation is 12.5 to 25 ppm, should allow the sanitizer to remain on
food-contact surfaces for at least 30 seconds to work effectively.
2.4.3.3. Quaternary ammonium (QUATS)
Quaternary ammonium “QUATS” is effective against a wide range of pathogens. Unlike other the
other two sanitizers, QUATS leave a residue that provides short-term antibacterial effects after it
dries.
The concentration for QUATS varies from 100 ppm to 400 ppm so read the label for dilution
recommendations. And must remain on food-contact surfaces for at least 30 seconds.
QUATS bind to the fibers of a microfiber towel, which makes it less effective for sanitizing, so you
should use a non-woven cloth if you aren’t using a spray application.
2.4.3.4. Additional cleaners
While other food-safe sanitizers are available, it is crucial to adhere to the specific usage guidelines
outlined on the EPA-registered label for each product to ensure optimal effectiveness.
• Peroxyacetic acid (PAA) — a mixture of acetic acid and hydrogen peroxide — is one example.
• PAA is primarily used during food production to sanitize food-contact surfaces and fresh fruits
and vegetables.
• An all-purpose cleaner is not an approved sanitizer for food service.
Sanitizers work best when the surface is clean, but other factors determine their effectiveness.
Here’s a quick look at the three chemical sanitizers approved for food service:
Chlorine Iodine QUATS
Water temperature Dependent on 68ºF (20ºC) 75ºF (24ºC)
concentration and pH
Water pH ≤ 10 ≤5 Dependent on
manufacturer
Water hardness Dependent on Dependent on manufacturer ≤ 500 ppm
manufacturer
Sanitizer 25–100 ppm 12.5–25 ppm Dependent on
concentration manufacturer
Sanitizer contact time 10 sec 30 sec 30 sec
Regardless of your chosen sanitizer, make sure to read the label closely before use.
The label will tell you what the water temperature should be, how much sanitizer to add, and how
long the sanitizer should remain on the food-contact surface to be effective.
2.4.4. Guidelines for safe sanitizer use

Keep these guidelines in mind when working with sanitizers:
• Always read the chemical sanitizer label before use.
• Do not combine different chemical sanitizing solutions.
• Hold cloths in a pale containing the chemical sanitizer solution between uses. Wash daily.

E.2. Sanitation
• Keep cloths that come in contact with raw animal food separate from cloths used for other
purposes.
• Change the chemical solution often and when visibly dirty.
• Label spray bottles containing sanitizers that are not in their original container so they are not
mistakenly used for something different.
• Store sanitizers and other chemicals separately from food and items that may come in contact
with food.
• Know where and how to access the safety data sheets.
Here are some common methods for applying disinfectants and sanitizers in accommodations and
food preparation areas
2.4.4.1. Spraying:
Spraying is a common method for applying disinfectants and sanitizers. It is effective for covering
large areas quickly and can be used on most surfaces. However, it is important to ensure that the
spray is evenly distributed and that all surfaces are covered.
2.4.4.2. Wiping:
Wiping is a method that involves applying disinfectants and sanitizers to a cloth or paper towel
and then wiping down surfaces. This method is effective for removing dirt and debris, as well as
disinfecting surfaces. However, it is important to ensure that the cloth or paper towel is properly
saturated with the disinfectant or sanitizer and that all surfaces are thoroughly wiped down.
2.4.4.3. Soaking:
Soaking is a method that involves immersing items, such as utensils and cutting boards, in a
solution of disinfectant or sanitizer. This method is effective for disinfecting hard-to-reach areas.
However, it is important to ensure that the items are properly submerged and that the solution is at
the appropriate concentration.
2.4.4.4. Fogging:
Fogging is a method that involves using a machine to generate a fine mist of disinfectant or
sanitizer. This method is effective for covering large areas quickly and can reach areas that are
difficult to access with other methods. However, it is important to ensure that the fog is evenly
distributed and that all surfaces are covered.
Note: It is important to follow the manufacturer’s instructions for proper use and dilution of
disinfectants and sanitizers, as well as to ensure that all surfaces are properly cleaned and sanitized.
Additionally, it is important to wear appropriate personal protective equipment, such as gloves and
masks, when applying disinfectants and sanitizers.
2.4.5. The hazards of Neglecting Proper Cleaning and Sanitizing Practices

2.4.5.1. Foodborne illness:
Failure to properly clean and sanitize food preparation areas and mess halls can result in the
growth and spread of harmful bacteria and viruses, such as salmonella, E. coli, and norovirus. This
can lead to foodborne illness and outbreaks that can affect the health and well-being of workers on
the rig.
2.4.5.2. Cross-contamination:
Failure to properly clean and sanitize food preparation areas and utensils can result in cross-
contamination, where harmful bacteria and viruses are transferred from one food item to another.
This can result in the spread of foodborne illness and contamination of other food items.

E.2. Sanitation
2.4.5.3. Pest infestations:

Failure to properly clean and sanitize food preparation areas and mess halls can attract pests, such
as rodents and insects, which can contaminate food and spread disease.
2.4.5.4. Non-compliance with regulations:
Failure to properly clean and sanitize food preparation areas and mess halls can result in non-
compliance with regulatory guidelines and standards, which can result in fines and penalties.
Overall, it is important to prioritize the cleaning and sanitizing of food preparation areas and mess
halls in drilling/workover rigs to prevent foodborne illness, cross-contamination, pest infestations,
unsafe working conditions, and regulatory compliance issues.
2.4.6. Cleaning and sanitizing instructions

2.4.6.1. Accommodations, Living Areas, and Offices
• Regularly clean and disinfect all surfaces, including floors, walls, and furniture, using a
disinfectant
• Provide hand sanitizing stations in common areas, such as dining halls and recreation rooms.
• Encourage workers to practice good hygiene, such as washing their hands frequently and using
hand sanitizer.
• Ensure that bedding and towels are changed and laundered regularly.
• Keep a record of all cleaning and disinfecting activities, including the products used, date, and
time.
Schedule:
• - Daily cleaning and disinfecting of high-touch surfaces, such as door handles, light switches,
and bathroom fixtures:
- Disinfect door handles, light switches, and bathroom fixtures.
- Disinfect all high-touch surfaces, including tables, chairs, and countertops.
- Clean and disinfect bathroom surfaces, including the toilet, sink, and shower.
- Clean and disinfect the floors.
- Weekly deep cleaning and disinfecting of all surfaces:
- Clean and disinfect all surfaces, including floors, walls, and furniture.
- Clean and disinfect all bedding and towels twice a week.
- Clean and disinfect all appliances.
• - Monthly deep cleaning and disinfecting:
- Clean and disinfect all surfaces, including floors, walls, ceiling and furniture.
- Deep clean and disinfect all furniture, including chairs, tables.
- Deep clean and disinfect all carpets and rugs.
- Disinfect air conditioning units and filters.
- Apply pest control by competent person.
It is important to note that the schedule and checklist may vary depending on the size of the
accommodations, the number of people using them, and the specific cleaning and disinfecting
products used. It is also important to keep a record of all cleaning and disinfecting activities.
2.4.6.2. Food Preparation Facilities
• Regularly clean and disinfect all surfaces, including countertops, cutting boards, and utensils,
using a disinfectant approved for food-contact surface.
• Encourage catering crew to practice good hygiene, such as washing their hands frequently and
using hand sanitizer before handling food.
• Ensure that all food preparation areas are kept clean and free of debris.
• Store food properly to prevent contamination.

E.2. Sanitation
• A record of all cleaning and disinfecting activities shall be kept, including the products used,
date, and time.
• Provide appropriate training and education to the catering crew to ensure that they understand
the importance of sanitization and are equipped with the knowledge and tools necessary to
maintain a safe and healthy work environment.
Schedule
• After each meal:
- Clean and sanitize all surfaces, utensils, and equipment used during the meal.
- Dispose of all food waste in a safe and hygienic manner.
- Clean and sanitize all tables and chairs.
• Daily cleaning and disinfecting:
- Clean and disinfect all high-touch surfaces, including tables, chairs, and countertops.
- Clean and sanitize all kitchen equipment, including stoves, ovens, and grills.
- Clean and sanitize all utensils, including pots, pans, and knives.
- Clean and sanitize all food preparation surfaces, including cutting boards and countertops.
- Clean and sanitize all sinks and dishwashing areas.
- Clean and disinfect all floors.
• Weekly:
- Deep clean and sanitize all surfaces, including floors, walls, and ceiling.
- Deep clean and sanitize all kitchen equipment, including stoves, ovens, and grills.
- Deep clean and sanitize all utensils, including pots, pans, and knives.
- Deep clean and sanitize all food preparation surfaces, including cutting boards and
countertops.
- Clean and sanitize all sinks and dishwashing areas.
- Clean and disinfect all floors.
It is important to keep a record of all cleaning and sanitizing activities.
2.4.7. Monitoring the cleaning and sanitizing process

Rig contactor Camp-boss & physician will continually monitor:
• During all hours of operation, visually and physically inspect food contact surfaces of
equipment and utensils to ensure that the surfaces are clean.
• In a 3-compartment sink, on a daily basis:
- Visually monitor that the water in each compartment is clean.
- Take the water temperature in the first compartment of the sink by using a calibrated
thermometer.
- If using chemicals to sanitize, test the sanitizer concentration by using the appropriate test kit
specified for the sanitizer used.
• In a dish machine, on a daily basis:
- Visually monitor that the water and the interior parts of the machine are clean and free of
debris.
- Continually monitor the temperature and pressure gauges, if applicable, to ensure that the
machine is operating according to the data plate.
- For hot water sanitizing dish machine, ensure that food contact surfaces are reaching the
appropriate temperature by placing a piece of heat sensitive tape on a small ware item or a
maximum registering thermometer on a rack and running the item or rack through the dish
machine.
- For chemical sanitizing dish machine, check the sanitizer concentration on a recently washed
food-contact surface using an appropriate test kit.
• Implementation of the mentioned cleaning and sanitizing schedule for Accommodations, Living
Areas, Offices, and Food storing and Preparation areas.

E.2. Sanitation
2.4.8. Actions
• Wash, rinse, and sanitize dirty food contact surfaces. Sanitize food contact surfaces if it is
discovered that the surfaces were not properly sanitized. Discard food that comes in contact
with food contact surfaces that have not been sanitized properly.
• In a 3-compartment sink:
- Drain, clean and refill compartments periodically and as needed to keep the water clean.
- Adjust the water temperature by adding hot water until the desired temperature is reached.
- Add more sanitizer or water, as appropriate, until the proper concentration is achieved, and
verify with test kit.
• In a dish machine:
- Drain and refill the machine at the end of every meal zone and as needed to keep the water
clean.
- Contact a direct supervisor (Camp-boss) to have the machine repaired (By maintenance team)
if the machine is not reaching the proper wash temperature indicated on the data plate.
- For a hot water sanitizing dish machine, retest by running the machine again. If the
appropriate surface temperature is still not achieved on the second run, contact the
appropriate individual(s) (maintenance team) to have the machine repaired. Wash, rinse, and
sanitize in the 3-compartment sink until the machine is repaired or use disposable single
service/single-use items if a 3-compartment sink is not available.
- For a chemical sanitizing dish machine, check the level of sanitizer remaining in bulk
container. Fill, if needed. “Prime” the machine according to the manufacturer’s instructions to
ensure that the sanitizer is being pumped through the machine. Retest. If the proper sanitizer
concentration level is not achieved, stop using the machine and contact the appropriate
individual(s) (maintenance team) to have it repaired. Use a 3-compartment sink to wash, rinse,
and sanitize until the machine is repaired.
2.4.9. Verification and record keeping by Camp-boss & rig physician
• Camp-boss will record monitoring activities and any action taken on the Food Contact Surfaces
Cleaning and Sanitizing Log. The physician will verify that the required temperatures have taken
and tested the sanitizer concentration by visually monitoring Camp-boss during the shift and
reviewing, initialing, and dating the Food Contact Surfaces
• Dish machine temperatures are critical to ensuring equipment and utensils are properly
sanitized.
• At the beginning of each meal, document the temperature of the rinse water in the dishwasher.
• If the final rinse water temperature is below 180 º F (82ºC) or above 195 º F (90ºC), notify the
supervisor and document the action taken.
• Utensils are air-dried or they are stored in a self-draining position.
• Equipment and utensils are stored at least 6 inches (15 cm) above the floor to prevent
contamination. They should be kept covered to protect from dirt and condensation.
• Glasses and cups are stored upside down in cleaned and sanitized racks.
• Cleaning and Sanitizing Log. The log will be kept on file for at least 6 months.
• The rig physician will complete the Food Safety Checklist daily.
• The Food Safety Checklist is to be kept on file for a minimum of 6 months.

E3. Minimum Medical

Requirements
E.3. Minimum Medical Requirements
3.1. Scope
The scope of the medical minimum requirements procedure encompasses all aspects of medical
care, from patient care to administrative and operational functions.
3.2. Purpose
The purpose of MMRPs is to:
• Protect patient safety by establishing a baseline level of care, MMRPs help to ensure that
patients receive safe and effective care from all healthcare providers.
• Improve the quality of care by helping to improve the overall quality of care by promoting
standardization and consistency in practice.
• Reduce healthcare costs by preventing adverse events and improving patient outcomes,
MMRPs can help to reduce healthcare costs.
• Promote accountability by helping to hold healthcare providers accountable for providing high-
quality care.
• provide a framework for progress evaluation and improvement of medical practice ,encourage
a culture of continuous improvement in the field of healthcare delivery and outcome
3.3. Procedure
3.3.1. Pre-employment Medical Check
Pre-employment medical assessments are a workforce risk management tool used to screen
individuals for risk factors that may limit their ability to perform a job safely and effectively.
3.3.1.1. The Benefits of Conducting Pre-employment Medical Check Assessments
The benefits include a safer work environment, reduction in workplace injuries, minimized
downtime, reduction in work cover claims and insurance costs, matching the capacity of the
employee with the role, Early detection of health issues, legal compliance, and overall recruitment
cost and risk reduction.
3.3.1.2. Components of Pre-employment Medical Examination
• Height, weight, body mass index (BMI)
• Cardiovascular examination (heart check, blood pressure, pulse)
• Full musculoskeletal examination including comprehensive range of movement
• Central nervous system examination
• Examination for hernias and other abdominal abnormalities
• Urinalysis for diabetes or kidney / bladder disorders
• Respiratory examination
• Vision assessment including color blindness
3.3.1.3. Other Specific Pre-employment Medical Examination Requirements
• Audiometry (hearing test, including Workover WA audio compliance)
• Spirometry (lung function test)
• Drug and alcohol testing (instant or laboratory)
• Work fitness assessments
• Periodic and exit medical assessments
• Statutory and code of practice screening
• Health surveillance screening (including hazardous substance monitoring)
• Blood tests
• radiological examination

3.3.2. Periodic Medical Examination (PME)

The root cause of Periodic Medical Examination (PME) is to follow the medical condition and
status of the employees to ensure they perform healthy and effectively. It’s a culture believing
health is a pillar of work and life. It focuses on every (occupational) health damage risks concerning
employees within your company. The examination looks at the lifestyle, work ability and health of
your employees.
3.3.2.1. Periodic Medical Examination Covers
• Work-related risk factors (known as Risk Inventory and Evaluation (RI&E)).
• Personal health factors.
• Alerts issued by the company doctors.
• employee feedback and concerns
• chronic disease
3.4. Health Facilities

The facilities in the industry can be categorized into rig land clinics and company clinics. They
must be provided with all sets, pharmaceuticals, and specialized doctors to deal with a wide range
between minor and critical situations they have to face and overcome.
3.5. Land Rigs Clinic

Land rigs are remote and isolated places, and they require a dedicated team of medical personnel
to provide healthcare for the workers. Doctor/medics who are working on oil rigs have to be able to
provide general medical care as well as emergency medical services. They must be able to diagnose
and treat a wide range of illnesses and injuries, and they must also be able to handle trauma and
critical care.
Land rig doctor/medic should also provide medical care for workers who are suffering from the
effects of isolation and confinement, such as stress, anxiety, and depression. They also have to
provide preventive care and health training to the workers. Moreover, they have a responsibility to
provide first aid training for catering staff members. They must also provide and present awareness
sessions to the rig personnel at a weekly safety meeting.
Every doctor/medic needs wide-ranging medical skills, occupational health knowledge, and to be
a highly qualified first aid provider. It is also important to have the expertise to provide trauma and
medical care to injured and sick personnel on a rig, be able to operate and maintain a rig hospital/
clinic ensure all emergency medical equipment is serviceable and rectify any deficiencies, and be
qualified to liaise with local and international shore-based medical facilities.
Every doctor/medic should have a disease register and medical history for each employee.
Employee medical history is divided into three components:
• Medical history sheet.

• Family medical subscription and claim.
• Sick leaves.
• immunization records
• chronic disease
• Biometric measurement
• Allergic and sensitivity
3.5.1. Clinic Specs
The Clinic should include:
• Ambulance bag
• Nebulizer

• Oxygen Cylinder
• Oxygen Regulator
• Sphygmomanometer
• Stethoscope
• Examination Bed
• Examination Lamp
• Stretcher
• Basin
• Glucose Measurement Device
• Otoscope
• Eye examination torch
• Digital Infrared thermometer
• Autoclave
• Oven
• AED (Automated External Defibrillator)
• ECG (Electrocardiogram)
• Suction Device
• Laryngoscope
• Incinerator
• IV stand
• Stainless steel medical instrument table
• Instrument dressing drum
• Pulse oximeter
• Weighing scale
• Anesthesia Ventilator
• Medical Patient Monitor
• 29-surgical tools
• Airway
• Safety Box
• first aid supply
• emergence eye wash bottles
• wound care supply
• wheelchair and mobility aids
3.6. Doctor/Medic Minimum Qualifications:

The doctor/medic’s minimum qualifications should include:
• B.Sc nursing/ Bsc. Medicine
• Certificate of Complete Training/Residency.
• License of profession from the ministry of health.
• advanced trauma Life support (ATLS)
• Advanced cardiovascular life support (ACLI)
• basic life support (BLS)

E4. Fitness To Work

Requirements
E.4. Fitness To Work Requirements
4.1. Scope
The scope of a fitness-to-work procedure encompasses the assessment and management of an
employee’s ability to perform their duties safely and effectively without posing a risk to themselves
or others. It outlines the steps involved in identifying, evaluating, and addressing any health or safety
concerns that may affect an employee’s fitness for work.
4.2. Purpose
• Protect health and safety by protecting the health and safety of employees, customers, and
visitors.
• Ensure job capability of employees to perform their job duties safely and effectively.
• Reduce disability risk and presentism.
• Prevent accidents and injuries.
• Manage and accommodate identified fitness concerns.
• Promote a culture of safety and health within the workplace.
• Enhance legal compliance.
• Return to work program
4.3. Procedure
4.3.1. Principle and designing of a fitness-to-work process
The principles of a fitness-to-work process are summarized as follows:
• Health Risk Assessments shall be carried out and it considers the base of this procedure, the
outcome of any health risk assessment can be summarized as control measures which shall be
applicable through all operations and all levels of the company.
• Medical examinations should relate to an assessment of fitness for a position with the
reasonable (and foreseeable) health and capacity requirements for an employee in that
position.
• Tests and examinations should produce repeatable and consistent results.
• Monitoring of sickness absence levels
• pre- employment assessment to ensure that the new hired person is fit for the specific demands
of his roles
4.3.2. The outcome of fitness to work evaluations
A fitness-to-work evaluation should result in a clear statement to rig contractor’s on the status of
the employee. Typically, an employee may be regarded as:
• Fit for the assigned work/tasks and location
• Unfit for the assigned work/tasks and location
In the event of an individual being assessed as ‘unfit’, it is the responsibility of the organization
to seek alternative employment for the individual, if possible and where appropriate. However, it is
important to recognize that alternative employment may not always be possible, especially if the
restriction relates to work in a particular geographical location.
Temporary or partial restrictions can be the cause of confusion and difficulty. The advice provided
in a statement of fitness to work should be unmistakable, phrases such as ‘fit for light work’ should
be specifically avoided, as they are meaningless in a practical and legal sense. The advice should
state what tasks the individual can and cannot do, and for how long the restriction applies. Whether
these restrictions can be accommodated by the organization is for the line management.
Transitional duties are a particularly useful means of rehabilitating an employee back to work after
a period of illness or injury.

N.B. schedule follow-up assessment to monitor the progress of employees undergoing

rehabilitation or alternative employment arrangements and adjusts the recommendations as
needed
4.3.2.1. The consequences of fitness to work evaluations
An assessment of unfit for a position can have serious implications for the employees, from losing
a position they hold to not getting one they are otherwise qualified for.
The organization will be asked to prove that the process of selection in a particular case is
objective and within the law of that country.
The organization adopts all of the following measures as good practice, with the specific goal of
reducing the personal impact on an assessment of unfit to work and shall be applied.
4.3.2.2. Accommodation
It is good practice to consider which of an individual’s tasks might be assigned to others, thus
permitting the individual to continue in the same position. The practicality of accommodating an
individual in this way will, of course, depend on the task, for example, a roustabout who cannot
work in the derrick, so he cannot be promoted to be a Floor man, who has to work on the derrick
under some circumstances.
4.3.2.3. Transfer to alternative work
The incapacity of an individual to fulfill the needs of a particular position, the organization shall
actively consider the options to transfer the individual to a more appropriate position if one is
available.
4.3.2.4. Termination
The decision to terminate, not offer or modify employment for any individual is a matter for the
line management. This should only be pursued after a careful consideration of the alternatives (i.e.
accommodation and transfer to alternative work). This decision shall be taken after confirming that
the employee is unfit to work regarding to a health problem that is not resulted from work related
illness.
4.4. Fitness to Work Matrix

Schedule regular follow-up meetings with the employees who have the fitness to work assessment
to assess their progress, address concerns, and make any necessarily required adjustments to the
accommodation plan

Maintenance
Catering DM/ AFM/ AD/Driller/ Team/Barge Administrative
Drivers Welders
staff FM RAF NTP/STP/OIM engineer Staff
Examination
Pelvi-Abdominal U/S.
Chest X-Ray.
Visual acuity & color
discrimination.
Audiometric studies.
E.E.G
E.C.G. (Add stress ECG if
needed).
E.N. T consultation
Orthopedic consultation
Chest consultation
Cardiac consultation
Ophthalmic consultation
General medical exam-
ination and report
Drug abuse test in urine
Lab tests
C.B.C
E.S.R
HBA1-C
Lipide profile
kidney functions
Liver functions
Alkaline phosphates
S. ALBUMIN
Thyroid functions
prostatic functions
Urine analysis & culture
Widal test
Throat swap & culture
Nasal swap & culture
Complete stool analysis
& culture
Hepatitis a marker.
H.Bs ag
H.C.V.P.C.R qualitative

Section F:
Environmental Requirements
F1. Environmental
Protection
Responsibilities
F.1. Environmental Protection Responsibilities
1.1. Scope
This section of EGPC guidelines will be applied to all drilling and workover contractors working
within the Egyptian Petroleum sector
1.2. Purpose
• The purpose of this Section is to define Egyptian Petroleum Ministry requirements for keeping
all EGPC-affiliated rig contractors working in a safe environmental condition, in addition to,
ensuring that all environmental Aspects produced by drilling and workover and its related
activities are managed safely without causing harm to employees, public or the surrounding
environment.
• These guidelines also provide information on the application and use of rig operators’ HSE
processes and systems to ensure that Environmental risks/Impacts associated with drilling and
workover activities(Hazards /Aspects) can be identified, mitigated, and controlled to a level that
is as low as reasonably practicable
• All environmental protection requirements defined in this section represent EGPC “minimum
requirements” which cannot be or ignored.
• Under no circumstances EGPC requirements and scope should never be changed
1.3. Responsibility
1.3.1. EGPC/EGAS Drilling and Workover/HSE Dept.
• Responsible for ensuring that all requirements mentioned in these guidelines are carefully
implemented through a predetermined Environmental protection plan
• Responsible for reviewing and updating the guidelines periodically.
• Responsible for assigning a special committee/ Departments from its affiliated companies to
perform Auditing and updating this guideline
• Responsible for organizing a periodical meeting with rig contractors and related service
companies aiming to enhance communication, improve statistics, deliver EGPC vision and
sharing lessons learned.
1.3.2. Rig Operator’s chairman of the board and Gen. Mgr.
implemented
• support the implementation process of all HSE and environmental policies
• Responsible for providing strategic and operational financial support in achieving the
organizational goals of providing high-quality, integrated health and personal social and
Environmental protection services.
1.3.3. Rig Operator’s Operations Gen. Mgr.
implemented through predetermined acceptance audit and inspection
• Responsible to ensure that all rig working under his responsibilities are fully complied with
EEAA requirements and EGPC drilling and workover guidelines
1.3.4. Rig Operator’s Drilling Gen. Mgr.
implemented through supporting the implementation of periodical audit plan
• Ensure all rig contractors and drilling team are adhering to all Egyptian environmental
protection legislation and EGPC rules and regulations
• Ensure all rig contractors being complied with EGPC environmental protection requirements
• Responsible to ensure that all rig contractors working under his responsibilities are fully

complied with EEAA requirements and EGPC guidelines through performing several Audits
and reviewing compliance reports and take all necessary action for full compliance with
Environmental requirements
1.3.5. Rig Operator’s HSE Gen. Mgr.
• Responsible for ensuring that all requirements mentioned in in these guidelines are carefully
implemented
• Responsible for preparing a plan to Perform Environmental audit / inspection / walkthrough...
etc. and Follow up the environmental activities using his Company specific Environmental
protection review checklist which established based on EGPC Drilling and workover guideline
• Responsible for Assigning Rig HSE team for continues follow up all rigs operations and
controlling its environmental impacts
• Responsible for assigning an appropriate concerned authority OR Approved qualified third
party for performing Monitoring and measurement for all environmental aspects and its related
impacts
• Ensure all rig contractors and drilling teams are adhering to all EGPC environmental protection
rules and regulations
• Ensure all rig contractors comply with EGPC environmental protection requirements
• Responsible for ensuring that all rigs operating under his responsibilities are fully complied
with EEAA requirements and EGPC guidelines through performing several Audits and reviewing
compliance reports and take all necessary actions for full compliance with Environmental
requirements .
1.3.6. Rig Contractors’ Operations Gen. Mgr.
• Responsible for supporting the implementation of his company’s environmental protection
specific Audit /inspection plan issued by HSE departments at his company
• Responsible for ensuring that the environmental protection inspection Plan implemented
through his respective Drilling and workover operations managers
• Responsible for issuing Clear instructions and commitments to all company-affiliated rigs to
comply with EGPC Drilling and workover HSE guidelines and EEAA requirements
• Responsible to provide all financial support to all rigs under his responsibility by all
Environmental protection, Training, equipment, Devices and other requirements that may
support compliance with EEAA
• Responsible to follow up the implementation of the approved environmental Audit /inspection
requirements and submitting the same to his respective Drilling and workover Superintendents
• Responsible to follow up the level of EEAA compliance within all rigs under his responsibilities
and take all necessary actions to avoid any environmental violations
• Responsible for ensuring that All rigs under his responsibilities are complied with EGPC Drilling
and workover HSE guidelines, environmental protection section and EEAA requirements
• Responsible to follow up the level of EEAA compliance within all rigs under his responsibilities
and take all necessary actions to avoid any environmental violations
• Responsible to ensure that all environmental aspects and related impact are measured
periodically through qualified persons supported with calibrated measuring devices or Assign
an approved qualified third party to do such jobs
• Responsible to provide the required mandatory training for his affiliated rigs crews based on
this guideline and EEAA requirements


• Responsible to Ensure that All rigs under his responsibilities are complied with EGPC Drilling
and workover HSE guidelines environmental protection section ,and EEAA requirements
• Responsible to follow up the level of EEAA compliance within all maintenance activities
performed in all rigs under his responsibilities and take the necessary actions to avoid any
environmental violations
• Responsible to ensure that all environmental aspects and related impact within maintenance
activities are measures periodically
• Responsible to request the required mandatory training for his affiliated rigs maintenance
crews based on this guideline ,environmental protection section and EEAA requirements
1.3.10. Rig Contractor’s “PIC” Senior Tool pusher
• Responsible to Ensure that his rig is complied with EGPC Drilling and workover HSE guidelines
,environmental protection section and EEAA requirements
• Responsible to follow up the level of EEAA compliance within all activities performed in his rig
and take the necessary actions and precautions to avoid any environmental violations
• Responsible to ensure that all environmental aspects and related impact are measures
periodically
• Responsible to follow up and request the required mandatory training for his affiliated rigs
maintenance crews based on this guideline and EEAA requirements
1.3.11. Rig Contractor’s Chief Mechanic and Chief Electrician:
Responsible for assisting rig management on site by applying all Environmental protection
requirements within maintenance activities and take all necessary precautions to avoid violation or
environmental incident

Responsible to follow up the implementation of the approved environmental protection plan and
procedures and to Report all deficiencies to Rig Operator’s HSE manager and Rig Superintendent
through the official reporting procedures

F2. Planning Requirements

F.2. Planning Requirements
2.1. Scope
This section of EGPC guidelines will be applied to all drilling and workover contractorsworking
within Egyptian petroleum sector
2.2. Purpose
• The Environmental Protection Plan Guidelines and Interpretation Notes will guide all rig
operators and rig contractors on the development and maintenance of Environmental
Protection Plans.
• These guidelines set out EGPC minimum requirements for the content of Environmental
Protection Plans. Rig contractors may provide additional or different content, where that
content is demonstrated to meet or exceed the same requirements for the protection of the
environment.
• Environmental Protection Plans are used to Manage all drilling and workover activities without
affecting employees , public and surrounding environment
• Where a conflict exists between the Guidelines and the EEAA, the EEAA are paramount.
2.3. Responsibility
It is the responsibility of Rig operator’s /Rig contractor’s management and work site supervisors to
ensure that this standard is carefully followed.
2.4. Requirements
• Environmental Plan should serve as a reference document for all rig operations personnel
so that they are aware of their responsibilities and what is expected of them concerning
environmental protection
• Environmental Plan should include statements that describe its purpose and that demonstrate
that the rig contractors understand the relationships between the Environmental Protection
Plan and the operator’s management system, the legal requirements, and the work to be
completed.
• Environmental Plan should identify the specific drilling and workover aspects of the planned
activities to which the Environmental Protection Plan will be applied,
• Environmental Plan should include the activities that fall within the scope of the drilling and
workover operations and could include, as applicable, operations and activities related to
pre-mobilization, mobilization, Rig up/Down, drilling/ Workover operations, third parties
installation, and abandonment,
• The level of details included in an Environmental Protection Plan should be proportional
to the complexity and Environmental impact of the proposed activity and should meet
the requirements of EEAA approvals which provided by the rig operators and Concerned
administrative authority
• Plan Shall contain sufficient detail and applicable method to allow rig contractors/operators to
assess of the environmental protection measures associated with the proposed plan
2.4.1. Content of the Environmental Protection Plan
An effective Environmental Protection Plan should incorporate the following elements:
• Serve as a summary and reference document that describes, or provides a map to all
environment-related processes, aspects, impacts, and documents.
• Should summarize and refer to the environmental management elements of the rig contractors’
Management System that apply to the drilling and workover operations
• Shall address all of rig contractor’s aspects of its planned work or activity that may have
potential impacts on the environment, whether they are specifically identified in these
guidelines or not
• It is not a stand-alone document and should refer to rather than duplicate detailed information

F.2. Planning Requirements
contained elsewhere in the rig contractor’s management System.

• Should summarize and/or refer to the approved safe operating procedures and other
operational documents that are to be implemented to ensure the quality of environmental
protection
• Rig contractors are expected to identify hazards and to assess associated aspects and
mitigation requirements on an ongoing basis throughout the full lifecycle of each project
separately.
• The Environmental Protection Plan should summarize and refer to the applicable Management
System elements in relation to environmental protection
• Should refer to the appropriate emergency plans and procedures and/or spill response plans(s)
that would be implemented in such situations.
• Should refer to the Contractor’s plans to test and exercise its emergency preparedness plans
and response equipment.
• It must contain a list of all structures, facilities, equipment and systems critical to environmental
protection and a summary of the system in place for their inspection, testing, and maintenance
• Summarize and reference the process for verifying “fitness for purpose” for environmentally
critical items;
• Summarize and refer to the system in place for the inspection, testing, and maintenance of
structures, facilities, equipment, and systems critical to environmental protection.
• Identifying the position(s) accountable for the Environmental Protection Plan includes
indicating who within the company has responsibility and authority for its implementation,
ongoing maintenance, performance monitoring, and continuous improvement.
• Should describe, at an operational level, how installation management and personnel will
implement the Environmental Protection Plan on a day-to-day basis.
• Shall describe the Reporting relationships and structures for both management roles and
supporting environmental protection staff functional roles, including contractor staff where
applicable, are most easily understood when represented in organization charts.
• Shall clearly identify the processes for the treatment, handling, and disposal of waste.
• Shall include a description of the equipment and procedures for the treatment, handling, and
disposal of waste material
• Should include the procedures for the temporary storage and management of wastes. The
description should also include the procedures for classifying and separating waste streams,
and for the handling, storing and transportation of the waste material.
• Shall describe the commitment toward providing sufficient number of trained and competent
individuals who are available to complete the authorized work or activities and carry out any
work or activity safely and without pollution

F3. Legislation requirements

F.3. Legislation requirements
3.1. Scope
This section of EGPC guidelines will be applied to all drilling and workover rigs working within
Egyptian petroleum sector
3.2. Purpose
• The Egyptian environmental protection laws that may apply to land drilling operations should
be carefully studied to determine their impact and applicability to specific operations.
• The purpose of this part is to identify and records all applicable Egyptian Environmental
statutes, rules and regulations and to issue a list of required environmental compliance
documentations as an important part of the environmental protection plan.
• Legislations registers relevant to drilling & work-over operations aspects shall be issued and
maintained at each rig site in order to fulfill all Egyptian environmental legislation
3.3. Mandatory required documentations

3.3.1. Official Environmental Permissions and Approvals
• EEAA approval for drilling wells “” Rig Operator responsibilities”
• Hazardous wastes handling permissions from the concerned administrative authority ”Rig
contractors Responsibilities ”
• Hazardous material handling permission from the concerned administrative authority “Rig
contractors responsibilities ”
• WMRA registration for all wastes disposal contractors “Rig operators and contractors
responsibilities Based on the contract holder company”
3.3.2. Required Registers and responsibilities
• Drilling /Workover Environmental Aspect and impact register “Rig operators and contractors
responsibilities “ Based on the type of activities “
• Drilling/workover Hazardous wastes registers “Rig operators and contractors responsibilities
“Based on the type of activities “
• Rig Environmental register “Rig contractor’s responsibilities”
• Rig Hazardous/Nonhazardous wastes registers” Rig contractor’s responsibilities”
• Rig Hazardous materials register” Rig contractor’s responsibilities”
• Rig Aspects monitoring Map” Rig contractor’s responsibilities”
• List of the Environmental legislation and other requirements for rig operations aspects ” Rig
contractor’s responsibilities”
• Required Contracts and responsibilities : -
• Nonhazardous wastes disposal Contracts” Rig contractor’s responsibilities”
• Hazardous wastes disposal contracts” Rig contractor’s responsibilities”
• Hazardous/Nonhazardous wastes transportation contracts ”Rig contractor’s responsibilities ”
• Medical Wastes Transportation and disposal contracts” Rig contractor’s responsibilities”
• Used oil transportation and recycle contract” Rig contractor’s responsibilities”
• OBM transportation, disposal and treatment contracts ”Rig Operators responsibilities”
• WBM transportation, disposal and treatment contracts” Rig Operator responsibilities”
• Dry location Contracts must include OBM transportation, disposal and treatment contracts” Rig
Operators responsibilities”
3.3.3. Required Environmental protection various activities
• Rig contractors shall conduct a third party Annual environmental Monitoring and measurement
based on rig contractor aspects map
• Rig contractors shall Obtain ISO 14001 “last version “for the environment management system
• Rig contractors shall Obtain Rig Operator approval for his own Environmental plan

• Rig contractors shall provide Environmental protection statistics reporting System

• Rig contractors shall Record all environmental aspects associated with a their activities and an
evaluation of whether those aspects have or could have a significant impact on the environment
3.4. Procedures:
3.4.1. Permission and Approvals
3.4.1.1. EEAA approval for drilling wells
• It is Rig Operators responsibilities and accountability under the Egyptian Environmental laws to
Issue an EIA study through EEAA approved consultants
• EEAA will review the study to ensure whether the impact assessment reports have adequately
assessed in order to get the EEAA approvals
• Rig Operator is fully accountable to apply all EEAA approval terms and conditions
• It is the Rig Contractors duties and responsibilities to comply with rig operators EEAA approval
terms and conditions under full supervision from the rig operators Operations and HSE
departments
• Rig Operators Shall use Specific Environmental protection checklist to ensure that the rig
contractors are fully complied with the environmental requirements mentioned in this guideline
3.4.1.2. Hazardous wastes handling permissions
• It is Rig Operators/ Contractors responsibilities /accountability to issue such permissions and
license under the Egyptian laws
• Permits for handling Hazardous Wastes must be obtained from the concerned Administrative
authority,
• It is Rig Contractors responsibilities to ensure that the Rig site meet the permit conditions to be
granted the hazardous wastes handling process.
• The permit would be issued for a Specific period which can be renewed.
• The permit can be suspended by the granting body in cases of occurrence of environmental
violations or breaching one of the permit conditions
3.4.1.3. Hazardous material handling permission
• It is Rig Operators/ Contractors responsibilities /accountability under the Egyptian laws
• Permits for handling hazardous materials must be obtained from the concerned Administrative
authority,
• The Rig site must meet the permit conditions to be granted the handling process.
• The permit would be issued for a Specific period which can be renewed.
• The permit can be suspended by the granting body in cases of occurrence of environmental
violations or breaching one of permit condition
3.4.1.4. Waste Management Regulation Authority “WMRA” registration for all wastes
collection and disposal contractors
It is the responsibilities of both Rig contractor and operators to ensure that all Wastes collections,
treatment and disposal contractors have been registered in Waste Management Regulation
Authority “WMRA” and have WMRA licenses/ approvals/ permits for the activities related to waste
and hazardous Wastes, which should be issued by the Waste Management Regulatory Authority
electronically.
3.4.2. Required Registers and responsibilities

3.4.2.1. Drilling /Workover Environmental Aspect and impact register
It is a rig Operator responsibility to identify all drilling and workover and service company’s
environmental aspects and its impacts that may affect the surrounding environment and its control

measures, all this information must include in the Rig operators aspect and impact register
3.4.2.2. Rig Environmental Aspects and impact register “” Rig contractor’s responsibilities”
It Is a rig contractor responsibility to issue a complete detailed register including all environmental
aspect related to drilling and workover activities that interacts or can interact with the environment”
and an impact as a “change to the environment, whether adverse or beneficial, wholly or partially
resulting from an organization’s environmental aspects. “Associated with its control measures
3.4.2.3. Drilling/workover Hazardous wastes registers “” Rig Operator responsibilities”
It is rig operator’s responsibilities to identify, issue and maintain an updated hazardous wastes
register as a legal requirements including all rig operators related Hazardous wastes which
generated through Drilling and workover activities Such as, Oil Base Mud (OBM), Water Base Mud
(WBM), Mud chemicals containers...etc
3.4.2.4. Rig Hazardous wastes registers
It is rig Contractor’s responsibilities under the Egyptian environmental laws to identify, issue and
maintain an updated hazardous wastes resister as a legal requirements including all rig contractors
related Hazardous wastes which generated through Drilling and workover activities Such as Used
oil, used filters, rags , Batteries ...etc.
3.4.2.5. Rig Environmental register “” Rig contractor’s responsibilities”
It is rig Contractor’s responsibilities under the Egyptian environmental laws to identify, issue and
maintain an updated environmental registers based on the EEAA guidelines forms and instructions
for each unit, including but not limited to , General information , Unit description , Input and
output , Hazardous and nonhazardous wastes , wastes Transportation and disposal contracts ,
Environmental measurements
3.4.2.6. Rig Hazardous materials register
It is rig Contractor’s responsibilities under the Egyptian environmental laws to identify, issue
and maintain an updated hazardous Materials resister as a legal requirements including all rig
contractors / Operators related Hazardous Materials which may be used through Drilling and
workover Operations.
3.4.2.7. Environmental Aspects monitoring Plan
It is rig Contractor’s responsibilities under the Egyptian environmental laws to prepare and apply
Environmental aspect monitoring plan, the purpose of this plan is to regroup into one document the
monitoring and follow-up programs
Required to track potential effects of the drilling and workover activities on the receiving
environment. The Plan focuses on monitoring and reporting information to rig operator top
management for improvements including but not limited to, Air quality, noise, light intensity,
Humidity…etc.
3.4.3. Required Contracts and its responsibilities

3.4.3.1. Non-hazardous wastes disposal Contracts
• It is rig Contractor’s responsibilities to contract with EEAA approved contractors for
nonhazardous wastes disposal
• Rig operator have to ensure that rig contractor have always valid nonhazardous wastes disposal
contracts
• Rig operator Rep. have to ensure that rig contractor have disposal register supported with safe
disposal manifest
• Rig operator Rep. have to ensure that rig contractors have WMRA registration and licenses

3.4.3.2. Hazardous wastes disposal contracts

• It is rig Contractor’s responsibilities to contract with EEAA approved contractor for hazardous
wastes disposal
• Rig operator have to ensure that rig contractor have always valid hazardous wastes disposal
contract
• Rig operator Rep. have to ensure that rig contractor have hazardous wastes disposal register
supported with approved/Stamped official manifest.
3.4.3.3. Hazardous/Nonhazardous wastes transportation contracts
It is rig Contractor’s responsibilities to contract with EEAA approved contractor for hazardous
wastes transportation contractors
Rig operators Rep. have to ensure that rig contractors have always valid hazardous wastes
transportation contract and WMRA registration
3.4.3.4. Medical Wastes Transportation and disposal contracts
• It is rig Contractor’s responsibilities to contract with approved contractors/Hospitals for
medical wastes disposal
• Rig operator have to ensure that rig contractor have always valid medical wastes disposal
contract
• Rig operator rep. have to ensure that rig contractor have medical wastes disposal register
supported with updated manifest
3.4.3.5. Used oil transportation and recycle contract
• It is rig Contractor’s responsibilities to contract with EEAA approved contractors for used oil
transportation and recycle services
• Rig operators have to ensure that rig contractors have always valid used oil transportation and
recycle services contracts
• Rig operator Rep. have to ensure that rig contractors have used oil transportation and recycle
register supported with updated approved /stamped manifest
3.4.3.6. OBM transportation, treatment and disposal contracts” Dry location services
• It is rig operator’s responsibilities to contract with EEAA approved contractors for OBM
transportation, treatment and disposal
• Rig Operators have to keep copy of the OBM transportation, treatment and disposal contracts
and updated manifest in its recordkeeping system at the rig site
3.4.3.7. WBM transportation, treatment and disposal contracts
• It is rig operator’s responsibilities to contract with EEAA approved contractor for WBM
transportation, treatment and disposal and to Keep a copy of valid contract at the rig site
• Rig Operators have to keep copy WBM transportation, treatment and disposal, and keep an
updated manifest in its recordkeeping system at the rig site
3.4.4. Environmental Miscellaneous Activities
3.4.4.1. Environmental Monitoring and measurement
• It is the responsibility of rig contractors to perform Annual Environmental monitoring
and measurements to observe an environment characterize and its quality, and establish
environmental protection parameters, for the purpose of accurately quantifying the impact of
the their activity on the surrounding environment.
• Results of monitoring and measurement will be gathered, analyzed statistically, and an
appropriate corrective/preventive actions must be taken for improvement , All contractors shall
keep an updated records for their monitoring and measurement reports and related correctives

actions supported with closeout evidences or contractors closeout plan

• Environmental Monitoring and measurements activities must be performed periodically by the
rig contractors and annually by EEAA approved third party
• Analysis and statistics and improvement plan taken based on monitoring and measurement
reports must be kept in place with evidences all the time
3.4.4.2. Environmental Management system ISO 14001 “last version “
All rig Contractors working under Egyptian petroleum sector authority must obtain ISO 14001 for
managing the environmental systems with latest requirements version
Note: This item is mandatory required by EGPC for both Rig operators and contractors
3.4.5. Wastes / Chemicals yard requirement

• It is the responsibility of rig contractors to identify several specific safe areas for chemicals yard,
hazardous wastes yard, recycle wastes, Junk yard, paints, etc. as follow
- Hazardous wastes accumulation areas including recycled hazardous wastes
- Nonhazardous wastes accumulation area including recycled non-hazardous wastes
- Mud Chemicals yard
- Rig chemicals yard/ storage including “paints, Lube oil, Hydraulic oil …etc.
- Junk accumulation area “follow up register must be kept up to date “
• All these areas are considered temporary holding of waste/chemicals pending
• storage /treatment or disposal
• Rig contractors shall provide an appropriate storage methods include containers,
• Tanks, waste piles, and surface impoundments for each area
• Storing waste materials incorrectly can be dangerous, even fatal, with the potential
Of causing leaks, fires, or environmental contamination. To protect the environment while
continuing to encourage recycling hazardous waste, therefore, all wastes storage areas must meet
all EEAA and civil defense requirements
Environmental plan must include Hazardous, nonhazardous wastes and material On-site
temporary storage procedures and must include but not limited to the following:
• Wastes generation source
• Quantity per specific period “Monthly /annually “
• On-site Storage Time Limits
• Maintain Spills and Leaks
• Secondary Containment Storage
• Incompatible Wastes Segregation
• Safe, Accessible Container Storage
• Properly Seal Waste Containers
• Personnel Safety Training
• Competency requirements for dealing with hazardous wastes and materials
• All waste must be disposed of within 6 months of accumulation to decrease safety risks.
• site storage time
• Temporary storage area layout
• Firefighting equipment
Hazardous wastes register must include all hazardous wastes related information including but
limited to the following:
• Waste type
• Source of wastes generation
• Quantities per year “ Specific period “
• Temporary Storage location ”onsite“
• Packing and storage method
• Onsite temporary Storage period

Type of dangerous
waste
•
•
•
•
•
Page 555
Source of waste
Amount
(year)
Disposal method
Treatment method
Storing location
Wastes MSDS availability
Disposal follow up method
Packing method
(barrels-tanks-etc..)
Collection/storage
Transportation and disposal contracts
period
Method of handling
Method of Conjugation
3.5. Hazardous / Nonhazardous wastes register Form
Method of transporting
waste
Organizations that
handle waste
Y
Is there a plan to
trck the wastes
N
D&WO HSE Guidelines

Y
Is there An MSDS
available for the
N
chemicals
F4. Wastes, Excess and

Reusable Material
F.4. Wastes, Excess and Reusable Material Management
4.1. Scope
This chapter of section 6 of EGPC guidelines will be applied to all drilling and workover rigs
working within the Egyptian petroleum sector to promote the concept of environmental protection
to all its employees, and to provide guidance as to individual and collective responsibilities in this
area of activity.
4.2. Purpose
This part of EGPC D&WO HSE Guidelines is defining the steps to be followed to properly process
waste, reusable materials, and recyclable materials returning from all Drilling and Workover
activities, in an effort to prevent degrading the environment, reduce hazardous and nonhazardous
waste volumes, as well as promote reuse and recycling.
4.3. Definition
The environment is defined as the air, water, and land around the company’s workplaces, facilities,
and other activities.
4.4.1. Rig operators Drilling Manager
• Responsible for the implementation of this procedure in its entirety
• Develop and implement an audit program that will accurately record and identify the level of
implementation of this procedure.
• Ensure that all internal and corporate audit non-compliances regarding these requirements are
addressed and resolved within the time allotted for closure of such findings.
4.4.2. Drilling & Workover superintendent
• Responsible to ensure the implementation of this procedure
• Responsible to develop an audit program that will accurately record and identify the level of
implementation of this procedure.
• Ensure that all internal and corporate audit non-compliances regarding these
• requirements are addressed and resolved within the time allotted for closure of such findings.
4.4.3. Drilling & Workover supervisor
• Ensure waste is segregated properly onsite and that it is handled in compliance with this
procedure’s requirements and all applicable governmental and Egyptian regulations and
standards.
• Ensure trash is properly segregated as per this procedure, and sent directly to the landfill (from
onshore rigs).
• Ensure any recyclable or reusable materials are sent for further processing.
• Track and document the receipt/disposal of rig operators materials and wastes removed from
the rig to their final destination.
• Ensure an effort is made to reuse materials from damaged bags and containers at the rig site.
• Ensure drilling contractors are implementing their contractual requirements as contained in
their contract approved.
4.4.4. Rig Contractor/Sub contractors
The contractors have the responsibility for ensuring;
• All subordinates are aware of potential hazards to the environment.
• All operation is carried out in accordance with statutory and Company requirements with fully
compliance with EGPC drilling workover manual requirements
• Subordinates are aware of their individual responsibilities for protecting the environment.

• All incidents causing or having the potential for causing damage to the environment are
investigated and reported as per the approved reporting procedures
• Spill control measures shall be in place based on the environmental protection plan rig
operator’s requirements
• Maintain records of waste manifests for hazardous and non-hazardous wastes transportation,
treatment and disposal.
4.5. Requirements
4.5.1. Environmental Preventive Measures
• Environmental preventive measures will largely depend on control practices through work
programs, regular briefings on the environment and most of all on site supervision.
• Effective supervision of the D&OW operations is crucial for ensuring proper implementation of
the contractor’s environmental responsibilities and environmental preparedness measures.
4.6. Rig Components and Equipment

For drilling and workover operations and service companies the following preventive measures
should be considered where relevant:
4.6.1. Drilling Fluid

• Adequate storage facilities for mud components must be provided.
• Preventive maintenance of mud pumps must be implemented and audited periodically
• Proper runoff system on shale shakers must be installed.
• Monitoring devices for the mud system should be periodically calibrated and tested.
• Mud chemicals should be properly stored, handled and disposed in accordance to applicable
regulatory requirements.
• Drainage channels/ditches shall be provided around mud pumps and storage tanks to direct
excess fluid or spills to the reserve or waste pit as appropriate.
• Centrifugal pump gland packing fluid to be directed to a drainage sump/channel or ditch
• Rig floor drains should be directed to the cellar or a waste tank and fluid transferred to reserve
pit
• All chemical or drilling fluid spills will be cleaned up immediately by qualified team at each rig
• All drilling fluid chemicals will be stored in a designated area and chemicals separated as
recommended by the qualified Mud Engineer
• When cleaning/flushing cement units and/or similar equipment fluid should be directed to the
approved reserve pit “constructed in accordance with EEAA requirements “ Based on the EEAA
approval
4.6.2. Chemicals
• Fuel storage tanks should be kept relatively close to the generators.
• Records should be kept for all chemicals stored or used on site.
• As part of waste minimization measures, unused chemicals should be returned to supplier
wherever possible.
• Unused chemicals drums should be cleaned and rendered useless to prevent reuse.
• Frequent checks should be made to ensure the integrity of containers, storage facilities and
handling practices.
• All waste oil/fuel and/or cleaning fluids shall be transferred to a waste oil tank or drums for
ease of removal from location for disposal
• All engine skids and mechanical equipment/pumps shall be fitted with sumps or containment
to allow drainage to a suitable container for transfer to the waste oil tank
• Drip/catchment trays shall be used during the repair of mechanical/hydraulic equipment
• Drip/catchment trays shall be used during such operations as cleaning casing/tubulars and the

fluid transferred to the waste tank

• All diesel outlets shall be fitted with a ‘deadman’ fuel dispensing nozzle
• All oil tanks/drum racks shall be fitted with drip pan/sumps and the drums equipped with taps
or transfer pumps
• Fuel transfer pumps shall be suitably bund wall /contained to prevent spills/gland packing
leakage during operation “ Bund wall or equivalent shall be calculated Based on NFPA
requirements
4.6.3. Handling of Waste
• The various types of wastes that return from the rigs and those that are used in D&WO facilities,
including all classes of waste, reusable and recyclable materials, must be handled as set out in
this document.
• The goal is to reduce hazardous and nonhazardous waste volumes, promote recycling, and
reduce the transport costs.
• Rig contracts shall be audited to ensure that the responsible parties for various worksite waste
streams are identified, and a waste management plan is established.
• The responsibility for all waste streams associated with all well activity at a worksite is the
operators responsibilities, such as mud cutting, chemicals containers …etc.
• In the execution of the work contract, all wastes must be disposed based on the Egyptian
applicable regulations must be observed.
• Waste management under the work contracts, regardless of responsible party, shall meet the
following minimum EGPC requirements standards
• Clean up equipment and absorbent material will be available at the work site (spill kit)
• Specific wastes disposal contracts must be provided in place and valid
• Wastes disposal contractors must be approved from the EEAA and has EEAA approval matched
with company activities
4.6.4. Oil Base Mud
When using oil base mud, a contingency plan should be prepared by the rig operators/contractors
giving consideration to:
• Dry location equipment integrity
• Appropriate Containment bunds
• Surfacing of the immediate rig location
• Lining of reserve pits based on the EEAA requirements and approvals
• Lining of channels/ditches based on the EEAA requirements and approvals
• Provision of spill containment equipment e.g. Vacuum pumps, absorbent material
• Provision of rig floor drip and/or directing of drains to a holding/transfer tank
• Provision of mechanical seals on centrifugal transfer pumps
• Disposal of OBM cutting at approved EEAA contractors and Permitted by WMRA
4.6.5. Treated Sewage
• Generated sewage shall be treated through a sewage treatment unit before it is released to the
environment.
• Treated sewage water shall be tested to ensure it does not contaminate the surrounding area
or underground water based on the applicable Egyptian laws.
• When practicable, treated sewage water shall be piped to the nearest drainage system (open or
closed).
• In the absence of a drainage system, the rig(s) equipped with sewage treatment units shall
dispose of treated sewage into a waste pit which shall be vacuumed by vacuum trucks through
EEAA approve contractors “ valid contracts shall be in places supported with stamped manifest

4.6.6. Untreated Sewage

• Sewage waste pit shall be at least 30 meters from the main camp.
• Untreated sewage shall be disposed of into lined waste pits “based on the EEAA requirements
“which shall be vacuumed by vacuum trucks“ valid contracts shall be in places supported with
stamped manifest When vacuuming the waste pit is not an option, untreated sewage can also
be disposed of to waste pit lined by plastic to prevent infiltration reaching the underground
water and be left to dry.
• Plastic linen and waste residues to be collected once pit has dried out.
4.6.7. Domestic Wastes
• Covered bins should be provided for refuse and litter.
• Waste bins shall be covered all the time and emptied regularly.
• An authorized garbage collector shall be contracted to transport domestic waste to the nearest
authorized land fill (as/when practical).
• Domestic waste shall be logged e.g. load, date, vehicle details shall be manifested and shall be
disposed through EEAA approved contractors
4.6.8. Clinical Waste
• Clinical waste shall be collected separate from other domestic waste.
• Clinical waste shall be wrapped/secured firmly and shall be transported off the location via an
approved contractor to the nearest designated medical facility.
• Needles shall be crushed or burned to prevent infection.
• Expired medicine shall be collected and sent back to the rig contractor medical department
with official receiving manifest.
• Clinical waste shall be logged e.g. load, date, vehicle details shall be manifested.
4.6.9. Hazardous Wastes
• Used oil shall be collected in oil drums by a designated waste disposal contractor.
• Oil drums used for disposal of used oil shall be sealed to prevent spillage.
• Batteries and contaminated filters shall be collected and picked-up by a designated waste
disposal contractor.
• All shipments shall be recorded.
• Truck driver shall have a shipment manifest, which should describe shipment type, weight,
number of units and final destination.
4.6.10. NORM Waste
• NORM contaminated equipment removed from the wells during work over by services
contractors (pipeline, cables, ESP..etc ….) which will not be re-run, shall be collected from the
well location.
• Rig operators PIC at rig site “DSV” Shall inspect the equipment using the Norm survey meter
• If the equipment greater than 0.5 µSv/h is considered NORM contaminated
• The equipment may need to be transported to Rig Operator Specific yard or approved
contractors yard for further checking
• If the double check of the equipment indicated that NORM contamination, the equipment shall
transport to the approved third party decontamination NORM yard
4.6.11. Land Restoration
• The fundamental principal to site restoration is to return the location to as near possible to its
original condition.
• Residual contamination or situations of potential future impairment should be eliminated.

4.6.12. Well and Cellar Area

• Rubbish pits, burn pits and excavations for sewage should be backfilled and
• restored to the original condition using local equipment of the rig contractors/Operators based
on their contract “ it is the accountability of rig operators “.
• All litter and other waste should be collected from site and access way and
• Disposed off.
• Small hydrocarbon and salts spills should be cleaned up by removal or dilution with fresh water
or clean sand.
• Large spills must be collected and disposed of offsite.
4.6.13. Camp Site
• Rubbish and sewage pits, drains, etc. should be backfilled in such a way as to restore as nearly
as possible to the original condition.
• Heavily compacted area should be ripped to facilitate infiltration and re-vegetation when
relevant.
• All Rig Operators and Rig Contractors operations mangers are responsible for ensure that an
environmental review is conducted prior to commencement of new work activities
• All applicable Egyptian Environmental laws and regulations and Contractual obligations must
be identified and complied with
• All Potential pollution hazards shall be identified and all prevention measures shall be
addressed in each rig contractors environmental plan
• The environmental review shall identify all necessary equipment to be purchased and
appropriate training to be provided.
4.6.14. Chemical storage areas
Chemicals Storage area will be kept clean, spills removed and broken sacks repacked
4.6.14.1. Sewage
Camp/accommodation sewage/waste water systems will observe local requirement
4.6.14.2. General Waste
To allow appropriate decisions to be made as to final disposal it is recommended that waste
materials are segregated into separate containers for the following waste streams where required:
• Scrap metal
• Steel offsets, machinery parts etc.
• Combustible Waste such as Wood, Plastic, etc.
• Accommodation waste such as Food Scraps etc.
• Hazardous waste such as Paint cans, Chemical drums/sacks etc.
4.6.14.3. Disposal
• Responsibility for waste continues beyond the rig contractor’s worksite.
• Waste transport and disposal shall observe prevailing regulatory requirements.
• Rig operators are fully accountable for safe disposal of all generated wastes
4.6.14.4. Fuel Transfer
• Receiving of fuel shall be completed under the direction of the Rig Senior Mechanic or qualified
designate.
• The Mechanic shall measure the fuel tank levels before receiving fuel.
• The Mechanic shall ensure that all hoses are correctly fitted and that all the valves in the line are
correctly aligned to receive fuel.
• The Mechanic shall inspect the fuel truck pump and hoses for damage or leaks before transfer
commences.

• The Mechanic shall ensure that the fuel tank skid, pumps, fuel truck and pumps are adequately
earthed/grounded before transfer begins.
• All hose fittings and connections shall be examined for leaks or damage as the transfer begins.
• At completion of transfer the Mechanic shall ensure that all valves have been realigned to
operating position for the system.
• The Mechanic shall supervise the disconnecting of the hoses ensuring that any residual fuel in
the hoses is contained and NOT spilled to ground. Stored hoses shall be plugged or capped.
• The Mechanic shall measure the fuel tanks immediately after receiving the product and confirm
quantities with the manifest
4.7. Spill Control and Procedure

All spills of any substance will immediately be reported to a Supervisor. The following is required
for response to a spill:
4.7.1. Spills easily contained

Immediate line Supervisor will organize personnel to respond as necessary.
4.7.2. Spills requiring assistance

• Alert Senior Toolpusher and main Office; Enlist assistance of additional crew members; Obtain
Spill Equipment, including Absorbent, bundling, etc; Dispose of cleanup materials as per local
requirements/regulations

F5. Air Emissions Control

F.5. Air Emissions Control
5.1. Purpose
The Drilling and Workover (D&WO) Air Emissions Control procedure defines the minimum
requirements to be implemented to control the air emissions within drilling and workover
operations.
The procedure also provides the guidelines to be followed by rig contractors to generate,
implement and manage their standalone air emissions control procedures comply or exceed EGPC
guideline in this regard.
5.2. Scope
This procedure applies to all EGPC/EGAS-affiliated Drilling and workover operations
5.3. Air Pollutants

Air pollutants are classified as follows:
5.4. Primary pollutants

This classification represents pollutants that are released directly into the air in harmful forms.
5.4.1. Secondary pollutants

This classification refers to pollutants that are modified into hazardous forms due to chemicals
reactions in the atmosphere.
Both primary and secondary pollutant emissions can occur as a result of Drilling and Workover
operations and can be attributed to planned or unplanned gas and liquid flaring operations, power
generation and vehicles utilizing internal combustion engines. The various types and sources of
these air pollutants have been identified and summarized in Table below:
5.4.1.1. Types and Sources of Air Pollutants
Activities/Sources Air Pollutants/GHGs

Planned or unplanned gas and liquid flaring Carbon Dioxide,Carbon Monoxide , SOx, NOx , PM
operations (Particulate Matter) , Hydrocarbons (CH4)
Engines’ (power generators and vehicles) Carbon Dioxide , Carbon Monoxide , SOx, NOx , PM
fuel combustion (Particulate Matter) , Hydrocarbons (CH4)
5.5.1. Rig operators and Rig contractors
• Rig Operators and contractors shall comply with EGPC air emission control requirements
• Rig Operators and contractors shall Implement an applicable technologies to meet the
• Requirements such as zero discharge technology, to minimize flaring/emissions.
• Rig Operators and contractors shall ensure that all hazards /aspects and risks /impacts
associated with their source of emissions are identified, assessed and mitigated and emergency
response plans developed.
• Rig Contractors shall ensure that work sites/facilities that are classified as large sites develop,
document and implement an Engine Emission Management Program.
• Rig Contractors shall adhere to the air pollution mitigation procedures described in their
environment management programs

• Rig contractors shall develop and implement an Engine Emission Management Program.
• Rig contractors shall ensure periodic preventive maintenance programs are in place and
implemented to all rig equipment and service companies in order to minimize environmental
releases of air pollutants and GHGs.
• Rig Operators and contractors shall verify existence and implementation of contractors’ Engine
Emission Management Programs during inspection/ audit.
5.6. Standard and requirements

5.6.1. Flaring Requirements
• Flaring and burning of hydrocarbon gases and liquids at rig sites is a significant source of air
pollutants and GHG emissions.
• Emissions of air pollutants and GHGs generated from flaring can be minimized and controlled
by proper design and/or control of the flare system/equipment (e.g., elevated flare stack, high-
efficiency burner, etc.);
• Air quality and source emission control recommendations from applicable Environmental
Impact Assessment (EIA) studies and/or technical and environmental evaluation shall be
implemented by the Rig contractors and operators
• All equipment shall be operated in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
• The preventive maintenance and repair of all rig equipment, including replacement in-kind,
shall also be in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
• Diesel Engine Emissions Management
• Fuel combustion systems utilized to support D&WO operations for either power production or
mechanical use produce air pollutants and GHGs.
• Air pollutants are emitted through engine exhaust. Some organic compounds (VOCs) can
escape from the crankcase as a result of blow-by and from spills/leaks from fuel tanks and
carburetors.
• Control measures shall primarily be directed at limiting excessive emissions of pollutants (Sox
NOx, CO, PM, and GHGs (CO2, CH4)) from engine exhausts.
• Emission limits for mobile diesel (compression-ignition) engines are specified by the Egyptian
environmental laws.
• Emission limits for individual pieces of equipment such as diesel generators on drilling /
workover locations used onshore and outdoors must be identified based on the Egyptian
applicable laws and regulations and can’t be exuded
5.6.2. Engine Emission Management Program
Rig contractors on the entire sites including (i.e., rig equipment, rig camp, main camp, etc.) must
develop an internal engine emission management program. The engine emission management
program will include the following:
• A list of all engines with serial number, size, make, model, year of manufacture and any other
relevant information.
• An engine preventative maintenance procedure including description of mandatory
preventative maintenance.
• Potential hazards and emergency response procedures.
• All engine emission management program documentation, Plan and records shall be organized
and available upon request at rig contractors units.

F6. Air Emissions Control

6.1. Scope
This procedure is applicable to all EGPC rig contractors, and all rig operators /contractors related/
supporting activities commencing at both offshore and onshore facilities.
6.2. Purpose
EGPC guideline for Drilling and Workover Spill Prevention, Preparedness and Response Procedure
defines the minimum steps to be followed to prevent the occurrence of a spill, and to ensure the
optimum response and mitigation plans in case of a spill, including its reporting. The procedure also
outlines the corrective actions to be carried out to prevent the recurrence of spill events.
6.3. Potential Spill Sources

Spills can result from individual or variable cause(s), including:
• Connection/line failure during bunkering.
• Failure of fuel tanker lines, connections or an above ground storage tank during filling.
• Well control issue such as Kick or Blowout.
• Failure/Damage of a chemical containers/storage tank during handling/storage.
• Leaking from equipment/machinery/engine/vessel.
• Overflow during mud/drilling fluid preparation.
• Collision Incident
6.4. Procedures
• All rig contractors have to issue a comprehensive Spill prevention and spill emergency
preparedness plans , Both must be up to date and kept in the rigs site
• Records for both plans must be kept at rig site
• The comprehensive Spill prevention plan shall include but not limited to:-
- Equipment integrity and preventative maintenance program
- Daily or weekly site walk-around inspections and should be documented and records kept
onsite for auditing purposes.
- Best available Control Technologies applications
- Adherence to and implementation Hazardous Materials Management procedures
- Adherence to requirements of any in-place Permits to Work (PTWs) and supporting work
method statements and job safety analysis documents that address isolation/removal of
isolation means (e.g., blinding/open and closing of valves) and system reinstatement, through
means such as removal of lock-out/tag-out (LOTO) devices.
- Engineering controls such as prior to working on contaminated tubular sections, sufficient
ground cover made of plastic, other water-proof and durable materials
- Well control program implementation.
- Well control equipment integrity, inspection and testing
- Administrative Controls such as adding a work requirement for fuel tanks to only be refilled
from ground level or lower hose connections and not top filled, or prohibiting activity such as
the prohibition of refueling of equipment with suspended fuel tanks.
- Spill emergency plan
- Identify and provide spill prevention equipment (for example spill control pallet or secondary
containment).
- Identify and provide spill emergency equipment (for example spill kit)
6.4.1. Classification of Spills
- Refer to EGAS unified incident reporting and investigation procedures March 2017
- Refer to EGPC drilling and workover \HSE guidelines incident reporting, levels of
investigation and EGPC related procedures in this regards .

6.4.2. Spill Preparedness

• All rig Contractors will include a section within their site specific Emergency Response Plan
(ERP) that addresses spill response incidents.
• The ERP will include the total number and positions of their spill response team personnel.
• The ERP will also address all probable spill scenarios (i.e., oil, fuel, acids, etc.), response and
mitigation actions.
6.4.3. Emergency Drills and exercise
Spill preparedness and response drills shall be completed at regular intervals. The main objectives
of conducting regular drills includes:
• Familiarizing all personnel with their roles, responsibilities and the use of kit/equipment.
• Practicing and improving the spill response management and tactical skills/ techniques.
• Identifying any potential operational/logistical problems that may arise during an actual spill.
• The PIC is ultimately responsible for the implementation of spill response preparedness through
drills.
• All rig contractors must identify and issue specific spill emergency drills matrix
• After the completion of each drill, a drill review will be conducted to review the effectiveness
and performance of the overall response. This review will be used to identify areas of strength,
weaknesses, areas of improvement, or changes in contact details and roles/ responsibilities.
• All Drills required by scheduled will have a “Drill Report” issued and kept at site. This report will
include any lessons learned from the drill.
6.5. Spill Kit/Equipment

• Rig contractors must provide adequate spill kit/equipment at each Drilling and workover rigs
appropriate and matched with their Spill emergency plan
• List of spill kit/equipment for each rig must be identified, updated and kept in place
• Rig contractors are ultimately responsible to ensure there are a sufficient number of properly
trained personnel to appropriately respond by mitigation, evacuation, reporting or any other
required actions for all spill scenarios.
• As training is an essential component of preparedness, spill response members shall be trained
in spill response to ensure that all the designated response personnel are able to respond to a
spill in a quick and competent manner.
• Training must be held through qualified third parties

F7. Water Conservation

Program
F.7. Water Conservation Program
7.1. Scope
This document describes industry recommended practices, procedure and EGPC D &WO
guidelines required for effective Sanitary & Hygiene procedures to ensure compliance
7.2. Purpose
• This section specifies the public health requirements necessary for the maintenance of a
hygienic, safe and wholesome water supply.
• This procedure is prepared to ensure the quality of the sanitary and hygiene on the EGPC rigs
contractor and avoids that rig contractor personnel being exposed to water borne illness which
is caused by mishandling of water.
7.3. Definitions
7.3.1. Chlorine Residual
The amount of chlorine in all forms (total) or (free) remaining in treated water to ensure
disinfection for a certain period of time.
7.3.2. Coliform Group Bacteria:

• Group of bacteria predominantly inhabiting the intestines of man or animal, but also
occasionally found elsewhere. It includes all aerobic and facultative anaerobic, gram negative,
non-spore forming bacilli that ferment lactose with production of gas.
• A group of organisms, which include Escherichia coli.
7.3.3. Contamination Water
The direct or indirect introduction into water of microorganisms, chemicals, wastes or
wastewater.
7.3.4. mg/L
Milligrams per liter, which is the metric equivalent of parts per million (ppm).
7.3.5. TDS (Total Dissolved Solids)

Total solids dissolved in water. TDS is expressed in mg/L frequently expressed as parts per million
(ppm).
7.3.6. Vacuum Breaker

A device for relieving a vacuum or partial vacuum formed in a pipeline, preventing back siphon
age.
7.3.7. Bottled Drinking Water

All water, which is sealed in bottles, packages or other containers and offered for sale for human
consumption.
7.3.8. Chemically Treated

Any water that has been chemically treated. The treatment may range from simple addition of
chlorine to kill bacteria to multiple chemical applications to render it non-corrosive and or non-
scaling or to remove certain physical or chemical pollutants.
7.3.9. Compliance Monitoring:

• In the case of any water supplied from a distribution network, the point of compliance is where
it emerges from the taps that are normally used for human consumption

• In the case of water supplied from a tanker the point of compliance is where the water emerges
from the tanker. Compliance Monitoring shall be construed as collecting samples from these
points for the purpose of determining water quality.
7.3.10. Cross-connection
• Any actual or potential connection between the potable drinking or potable raw water supply
and / or a source of contamination or pollution including contamination by water of an inferior
quality.
• Raw water and potable raw water are inferior quality to drinking water.
• Cross-connections are the links through which it is possible for contaminating materials to
enter a potable water supply.
• The contaminant enters the potable water system when the pressure of the polluted source
exceeds the pressure of the potable source. The action may be called back siphon age or
backflow. Essentially it is reversal of the hydraulic gradient that can be produced by a variety
of circumstances. Cross connection can also occur when there is a direct pathway between the
potable water supply and a potential source of contamination.
• Examples include potable tanks sharing a common wall with a tank containing an inferior
product or pipes containing a contaminant passing through or over a water potable water tank.
7.3.11. Desalinated
Water from which most of the dissolved salts have been removed by one of the desalination
processes (e.g. reverse osmosis, electro dialysis or flash evaporation).
7.3.12. Disinfect
To kill infectious microorganisms by physical or chemical means. Some bacterial spore forming
organisms may survive the process, but all other microorganisms are reduced to insignificant levels
or eliminated completely.
7.3.13. Drinking water

Water intended primarily for human consumption, either directly, as supplied from the tap, or
indirectly, in beverages, ice or foods prepared with water. Drinking water is also used for other
domestic purposes such as bathing and showering.
7.3.14. Filter
A device made of porous material, through which a fluid is passed, to separate from it matter held
in suspension.
7.3.15. Fire Water

Any water (fresh, well, sea) contained in a piping system or storage tank and normally intended to
provide water for extinguishing fires. The source of the fire water shall be identified.
7.3.16. Groundwater
That part of the subsurface water that is in the zone of saturation.
7.3.17. Hard water

Any water containing more than 300 mg/L calcium and or magnesium expressed as calcium
/ magnesium carbonate
7.3.18. Health Hazard

• Conditions considered to be hazardous to health and or a nuisance. For the purposes of this
Code section an actual or potential health hazard includes an unprotected service connection

on a drinking water supply to any domestic property supplied with both potable raw and
potable drinking water, and an unprotected potable water service connection to a commercial
or industrial property.
• Hazardous condition may include Fixtures with direct water connections or submerged inlets
(sanitary appliances, water heaters, washing machines, dishwashers etc.)
7.3.19. Hypochlorite
In its sodium salt form, the active bleaching ingredients in liquid chlorine bleach.
7.3.20. Liquid Chlorine Bleach

A solution of sodium hypochlorite, a highly active oxidizing agent, Liquid chlorine bleach is also
called household bleach and is commonly distributed as an approximately five percent solution of
sodium hypochlorite.
7.3.21. Managed network

Refers to a distribution system which is the responsibility of water-supply operator serving private
property.
7.3.22. Maximum Contaminant Level (MCL)

The highest level of a contaminant that is permitted in drinking water.
7.3.23. μg/L
Micrograms per liter, which is equivalent to parts per billion (ppb).
7.3.24. Operational monitoring

Operational monitoring refers to monitoring of water quality in the treatment process and leaving
the works prior to entering the distribution system.
7.3.25. Potable Raw Water

Raw water which has been disinfected and is distributed in a separate supply system for domestic
use – i.e. washing, showering, flushing cisterns etc.
7.3.26. Raw Water

Raw water refers to water in a storage reservoir, or underground source prior to receiving
treatment. This water normally contains less than 5,000 mg/l TDS
7.3.27. Safe
Free from micro-organisms, parasites and substances which in terms of number or concentration
constitute a potential danger to public health and otherwise meets the contaminant levels
7.3.28. Secondary maximum contaminant level (SMCL)

Secondary drinking water standards
Regulating contaminants that may cause cosmetic effects (such as skin or tooth discoloration) or
aesthetic effects (such as taste, odor, or color) in drinking water.
7.3.29. Utility Water

Water containing, normally less than 5000mg/L TDS, used in process facilities other than human
consumption

7.3.30. Air Break

A physical separation, which may be a low inlet into the indirect waste receptor from the fixtures,
appliances or devices indirectly connected.
7.3.31. Air Gap

• In a water supply system, it is the unobstructed vertical distance through the atmosphere
between the lowest opening from any pipe or faucet supplying water to a tank, plumbing
fixture or other device in the flood-level rim of the receptacle.
• The unobstructed vertical distance between the inlet from the potable water system and the
flood level rim of the non-potable water system, for a safe air gap, must be equal to at least
twice the inside diameter of the inlet pipe.
7.3.32. Backflow
The flow of water or other liquids, mixtures or substances, under positive or reduced pressure in
the distribution pipes of a potable water supply from any source other than its intended source.
7.3.33. Backflow Prevention Assembly

A device or means designed to prevent backflow or back siphonage. Most commonly categorized
as air gap, reduced pressure principle device, double check valve assembly, and pressure
7.3.34. Water Supply System

Includes the waterworks and auxiliaries for collection, treatment, storage and distribution of the
water from the sources of supply to the free-flowing outlet of the consumer.
7.3.35. Water Hardness

Soluble metal salts, principally those of calcium and magnesium, sometimes including iron and
manganese that, when present in water in significant levels, can create scaling problems.
7.3.36. Water Intended for Human Consumption

All water either in its original state or after treatment, intended for drinking, cooking, food
preparation or other domestic purposes, regardless of its origin and whether it is supplied from a
distribution network or from a tanker.
7.3.37. Fire Water Distribution System

Fire water need not be drinking water quality if distributed in a separate, independent water
distribution system that is used for no purpose other than firefighting, i.e. the water from the
separate, independent fire water system and is not intended for human consumption. Where tanks
used for the storage of fire water are supplied by a system intended for human consumption a
suitable backflow prevention device must be provided between the fire water tank and the supply
water.
7.4.1. Medic / Doctor
• The rig Medic / Doctor is responsible for implementing EGPC Guideline sanitary and hygienic
procedure & compliance with established hygiene instructions
• He is responsible for conducting daily as well as weekly hygienic inspections and reporting
same.
• The Medic / Doctor is responsible for collecting water samples from tanks / water supply and
ice machines in order to perform required tests plus maintain records in the clinic files and send
water samples for approved Egyptian laboratory in monthly basis in order to conduct monthly

water analysis. The result of the monthly tests shall be recorded and maintained in the clinic
files.
7.4.2. Rig Contractor Management
The management is responsible to ensure that, this procedure is periodically appraised and if
necessary revised. Adequate staff, funds and materials are available to meet the requirement of the
sanitary and hygiene procedures.
7.5. Transportation & Storing

7.5.1. Water Transportation
• Water shall be obtained, conveyed, treated, stored and distributed in closed containers that are
protected from contamination.
• Water Truck / Boat supplies potable water to rig contractors units in a regular basis and
controlled by a formal manifest which is managed by medic and recorded in rig Medic filing
system.
• Enough chlorine shall be added to the water in the bulk water tanker to produce a residual
chlorine of not less than 0.5 mg/l or more than 1.0 mg/l at the point of delivery.
7.5.2. Water Storage Tank
7.5.2.1. Onshore Water Tanks
• After bunkering, isolate the storage tank(s) for 30 min. Analyze a sample taken from the water
in the storage tank for free residual chlorine. The results should be within 0.05-3 mg/l.
• After the bunkering is finished. The results must be logged, at the next bunkering and if
required, the dosing pump should be adjusted according to the results previously obtained. If
no free residual chlorine can be traced, add chlorine solution directly into the tank through the
roof manhole, before a new sample is taken. This procedure must be repeated until residual
chlorine traces are found. If the amount of residual chlorine is too high, the water can be diluted
with water from another storage tank or the chlorine can be removed with sodium bi-sulphate.
The water can also be stored for a few days before consumption.
• The chlorine concentration will then usually be reduced. Add hypochlorite solution to the tank
as required and if found necessary following analysis of water samples.
• A procedure for measuring residual chlorine must be enclosed with the instrument of analysis.
Before the tank is placed in service, a sample for bacteriological analysis shall be collected
from the tank. Note that the residual chlorine level shall be no higher than 3 milligrams per liter
(3 parts per million) when the sample is collected.
• The sample shall be tested to verify the absence of coliform organisms and a heterotrophic
plate count [HPC] of 500 CFU/mL or less. If check, samples show the presence of coliform
organisms in the tank but not in the source supply, then the tank shall be re-chlorinated. If
test results from the source supply tanker show it to be contaminated with coliform bacteria,
then the source of the problem shall be identified and corrected by cleaning and disinfecting
the tanker interior water storage by the water supplier and the water supplier shall provide
a proof manifest that this process was implemented properly. After correction is verified by
bacteriological testing, the tank shall be emptied and refilled. Water from the refilled tank shall
be tested to verify the absence of coliform bacteria again.
• All water storage tanks shall be provided with a sample tap, which shall be identified and in
working order.
• All water storage tanks shall be drained, visually inspected internally and cleaned on yearly
cycle; and de-sludge and super-chlorinated by application of a chlorine solution or other
approved means at least every 12 months.
• Records shall be kept of the dates of inspections, procedures to be followed, disinfectants used

and the strength of the disinfecting solution.

• Vents shall be of the gooseneck type or roof ventilator type, protected to prevent possible entry
of dust, any animals, insects, or any contaminants, with the opening protected by 16-mesh or
finer corrosion resistant screening.
• Equipment, devices, filters, and all other water treatment or conditioning apparatus, shall be
operated, inspected and serviced or replaced according to the manufacturer’s instructions and
specifications, and shall not be operated beyond their rated capacity.
• All such equipment shall be maintained in a clean and sanitary condition and, if necessary, shall
be sanitized by application of a chlorine solution or by other approved means. Where any of
the above are used in remote locations appropriate manufacturer’s instructions shall be kept on
site as part of that sites Operating Procedures.
• All the water filters must be inspected weekly by rig Senior Mechanic and a record must be kept
for changing water filters. All water filters should be tagged with the date of installation.
• If hoses are used for conveying potable water, they shall be dedicated, constructed of safe
materials, shall have a smooth interior surface, shall be used for no other purpose, and shall
be clearly identified as to their use. Caps and keeper chains shall be provided for water system
inlet and outlet fittings, as well as hose fittings. All such fittings shall be capped when not in
immediate use. Hoses shall be stored and used to be kept free of contamination.
7.5.2.2. Offshore Water Tanks
• Connect the filling hoses to the supply vessel, request the supply vessel to start their transfer
pump, while closing our supply valve in the manifold, take a sample of the water, the medic will
analyze the sample
• The sample shall be tested to verify the absence of coliform organisms and a heterotrophic
plate count [HPC] of 500 CFU/mL or less. If check samples show the presence of coliform
organisms in the tank but not in the source supply, then the tank shall be re-chlorinated. If
test results from the source supply vessel show it to be contaminated with coliform bacteria,
then the source of the problem shall be identified and corrected by cleaning and disinfecting
the vessel’s tank interior water storage. This should be communicated with the client, who
is responsible for all supply vessels. Water from the refilled tank shall be tested to verify the
absence of coliform bacteria again.
• After testing completed, the bunkering operations will be started to the potable water tanks
analyze a sample taken from the water in the storage tank for free residual chlorine. The results
should be within 0.05-0.3 mg/l. After the bunkering is finished. The results must be logged.
• Vents shall be provided with each tank which is square and a ball installed inside.
• Water line in the bunker stations (STBD & PS) shall be provided with a sample tap, which shall
be identified and in working order.
• Records shall be kept of the dates of inspections, procedures to be followed, disinfectants used
and the strength of the disinfecting solution.
• All water tanks shall be properly sealed to avoid contamination by any external resources.
• If hoses are used for conveying potable water, they shall be dedicated, constructed of safe
materials, shall have a smooth interior surface, shall be used for no other purpose, and shall
be clearly identified as to their use. Caps and keeper chains shall be provided for water system
inlet and outlet fittings, as well as hose fittings. All such fittings shall be capped when not in
immediate use. Hoses shall be stored and used to be kept free of contamination.
• All water storage tanks shall be drained, visually inspected internally and cleaned on yearly
cycle, and de-sludge and super-chlorinated by application of a chlorine solution or other
approved means at least every 12 months.

7.5.3. Guideline for Cleaning and Disinfection
7.5.4. of Water Storage Tanks

7.5.4.1. Backflow-Prevention Assembly
• A device or means designed to prevent backflow or back siphon age. Most commonly
categorized as air gap, reduced pressure principle device, double check valve assembly,
pressure vacuum breaker, atmospheric vacuum breaker, hose bibb, vacuum breaker, residential
dual check, double check with intermediate atmospheric vent, and barometric loop.
• A Backflow-Prevention Assembly shall be installed if there are any possible connections
when there is a direct pathway between the potable water supply and a potential source of
contamination. Examples: General Bathroom’s water supply line, Toilets flushers and potable
water pump delivery lines.
• All potable water supply Tanks/piping system shall be completely isolated from the raw water
lines or any other contaminated fluid piping in order to avoid any contamination could happen
from the raw water supply or any potential contaminant. Any kind of cross-connection is not
allowed in the potable water system.
7.5.4.2. Guidelines for the chlorination of bunkered water
When chlorination is employed, a sufficient amount of chlorine shall be added to the water to
maintain a measurable free chlorine residual of at least 0.5 milligrams per liter (0.5 parts per million)
at all points in the distribution system from which water may be withdrawn. The maximum chlorine
residual should not exceed 3.0 mg/L (3.0 ppm).
7.5.4.3. Manual Dosing
When the dosing is operated manually, the dosage has to be calculated. The dosage has to be
regulated according to the results of analysis. Make a note of the volume of water to be bunkered
(m3) and the rate of bunkering (m3/h). If there is any water left in the tank, this volume must be
added to the volume of water that is going to be bunkered.
7.5.4.4. The required volume of chlorine solution
• Bunkering period (h) = volume to be bunkered (m3) / bunkering rate (m3/h)
• Required volume of chlorine solution (l) = feed rate (l/h) x bunkering period (h)
7.5.5. Guideline for Cleaning and Disinfection of Water Storage Tanks
Sludge of organic material, corrosion products etc. will settle to the bottom of the tanks during
operation. Bacteria may form a film of slimy appearance on the tank walls. The storage tanks should
therefore be cleaned and disinfected at regular intervals. The tanks should also be disinfected after
periods of inspection and or maintenance. After repairs and painting have been completed; the
interiors of all water storage tanks shall be disinfected before they are placed in service (it may take
a week before it can be used).
7.5.5.1. Disinfection Method
• After paint has thoroughly dried and cured, the tank shall be filled slowly to the overflow level
with potable water to which enough chlorine has been added
• The chlorine, either as sodium or calcium hypochlorite shall be introduced into the water as
early during the filling operation as possible. Early introduction of chlorine is essential
• because the filling action is depended upon to agitate and evenly mix the chlorine with the total
volume of water in the tank.
• Chlorine compound should be poured into the tank through the clean out or inspection
manhole, the inspection manhole shall be bolted covered, if no manhole available at the
bottom, the chlorine solution shall be poured into the tank through the roof manhole

• The chlorinated water shall be retained in the tank for at least 24 hours, during which time all
valves shall be operated several times to ensure disinfection of the appurtenances. At the end
of this 24-hour period, the treated water in all portions of the tank shall have a residual of not
less than 10 milligrams per liter (10 parts per million) free chlorine
• After the holding period, the super chlorinated water in the tank shall be completely drained to
waste.
• After refilling and before the tank is placed in service, a sample for bacteriological analysis shall
be collected from the tank.
Note: The residual chlorine level shall be no higher than 3 milligrams per liter when the sample is
collected.
• Samples shall be collected in sterile bottles treated with sodium thiosulfate. No hose, valve or
outlet other than the tank sample tap shall be used in collection of samples
• If the initial disinfection fails to produce satisfactory, the tank shall be emptied and refilled
again then samples shall be taken from the tank and the water supply, if the tank sample shows
presence of coliform organisms but not in the water supply then the tank shall be re-chlorinated
by the high concentration method, if test results from water supply sample shows presence of
bacteria then the source problem must be identified and corrected immediately. After correction
is verified by bacteriological testing, the tank shall be emptied and refilled. Check samples
again. If the tank sample shows presence of coliform organisms but not in the water supply
then the tank shall be re-chlorinated by the high concentration method.
• If a water tanker supply is used, water tankers shall be drained, visually inspected and sanitized
by application of chlorine or any other approved means of disinfection at least every 12 month
or if any bacterial presence in tests results. Records shall be kept of the dates of disinfection.
7.5.5.2. Cleaning
Surfaces inside the tank must be flushed with a high pressure hose jet. Check whether there is a
slimy layer on the surfaces, and ensure that this layer is thoroughly removed. If necessary, the tank
must be scrubbed, but care must be taken not to damage any protective linings or coatings. After
scrubbing and flushing, the tank should again be completely emptied. Personnel performing the
cleaning must wear clean working clothes and boots prior to entering the tank. All equipment must
be cleaned prior to being used for washing purposes.
7.5.5.3. Inspection
After the storage tank has been cleaned and emptied it should be inspected to ensure that the
cleaning was effective, also if parts of the surfaces need repainting. It is the Doctor’s responsibility
to inspect the tank after cleaning and before refilling. Records and the PTW copy shall be kept of
the dates of inspections, procedures to be followed, disinfectants used and the strength of the
disinfecting solution. All this records shall be documented in Medic filing system.
7.5.6. Distribution System Disinfection

• Newly installed water distribution systems shall be inspected and subject to bacteriological
testing.
• Precautions shall be taken to protect pipe interiors, fittings, and valves against contamination
during connection/laying out of the potable water distribution system.
• Before being chlorinated, the potable water distribution system shall be filled to eliminate air
pockets and shall be flushed to remove all particulates, the flushing velocity in the main shall
not be less than 76 centimeters per second (2.5 feet per second) unless conditions do not
permit the required flow to be discharged to waste.
• Water entering the distribution system shall have not less than 25 milligrams per liter (25 parts
per million) free chlorine. The chlorine concentration shall be measured at the farthest faucet
from the water source.
• Chlorine application shall not cease until the entire distribution system is filled with super
chlorinated water. The chlorinated water shall be retained in the distribution system for at least

24 hours, during which time all faucets and taps shall be operated multiple times to ensure
disinfection of appurtenances. At the end of the 24-hour period, the treated water in all portions
of the distribution system shall have a residual of not less than 10 milligrams per liter (10 parts
per million) free chlorine.
• After the applicable retention period the super-chlorinated water shall be flushed from the main
until chlorine measurements show that the concentration in the water leaving the main is not
greater than 1 milligram per liter (1 parts per million).
7.6. Water Conservation Roadmap

7.6.1. Measure / benchmark current water consumption:
• Establishing a baseline against which future reductions will be measured is an important first
step in tracking progress.
• Environmental Measuring / Monitoring shall include consumption limits for water. Water
flow meters shall be provided, installed, and calibrated to get accurate measurements for the
consumed water.
7.6.2. Develop a water usage profile
A water use profile will help clarify how water is used in various systems (e.g., HVAC, sanitary,
laundry, etc.); Water Usage Profile can help identify reduction opportunities to refine the
performance of those systems. Understanding baseline and water use profile will help better
understanding of the best opportunities for improvement
7.6.3. Develop Water Cycle Diagrams:

Water cycle diagrams describes the continuous movement of water in the rig / facility. They help in
the development of water usage profile. Water cycle diagrams shall include color coding.
7.6.4. Set targets/goals:

It is important to set both short- and long-term reduction goals for water use reductions. Target
setting allows rig operators to establish reasonable, SMART goals that are consistent with a basic,
intermediate, or advance approach. Targets / goals could be set in the annual rig operators QHSE
Plan.
7.6.5. Develop strategic action plans for improvement

The Roadmap performance improvement measures list is designed to help pick and choose
projects to help meet EGPC water conservation goals.
7.6.6. Train, and educate:

Workers must be educated of the reasons for any changes, trained on work practice changes, and
informed with ongoing feedback to how the action plan’s progress is meeting the goals. Training
and education are both formal, with specific learning objectives, and informal with educational
materials that includes posters, information sharing in newsletters, and a variety of media. Informed
staff are engaged staff.
7.6.7. Fresh Water Operational Water Pits

• Operational water shall be stored in a manner that minimize water loss.
• Water pit volume and sizing shall be optimized based on operational requirements.
• Drilling water and wastewater pit walls and bottoms shall be protected in a manner
• that prevents erosion of the compacted MARL layers, when pits are not lined with
• HDPE. This can be done by liners, drip pans, energy dissipating blocks or other solution that
prevents erosion of the pit.

• Water pits should maintain the minimal amount of water necessary during the
• current operational activity in the drilling cycle. If a larger quantity of water is in a pit from a
previous operation, the excess amount may only be reduced through operational usage.
• Water pits will be kept at lowest possible volume to prevent overflow of the pit during
• rainy seasons, traditionally in spring and fall. Water pits shall not be filled beyond 75% of its
depth during Normal operations (i.e., no well control emergencies).
• Any excess water left in the pit after completion of drilling operations, and before rig
7.7. Potable Water Treatment System

7.7.1. The Offshore Potable Water Treatment System consists of:
• Water Maker
• Neutralizer / Mineralizer System
• Automatic Chlorine Unit
• Potable Water Pumps
• Activated Carbon Water Fine Filter
• Ultra Violet Sterilizer
7.7.2. Water Maker
• The combined brine / air ejector driven by the ejector pump creates a vacuum in the system in
order to lower the evaporation temperature of the feed water.
• The feed water is introduced into the evaporator section stage 1 through an orifice, and is
distributed into every second plate channel (evaporation channels).
• The hot water is distributed into the remaining channels, thus transferring its heat to the feed
water in
• the evaporation channels.
• Having reached boiling temperature - which is lower than at atmospheric pressure the feed
water undergoes a partial evaporation, and the mixture of generated vapor and brine enters
the separator vessel, where the brine is separated from the vapor and is introduced into every
second channels of the evaporator stage 2 as feed water.
• The vacuum steam generated in the first stage passes via a demister into the remaining
channels in stage 2 of the evaporator section.
7.7.3. Neutralizer / Mineralizer System
• It is undesirable to have domestic water, produced by Desalination Plants such as evaporators
and reverse osmosis water makers, with a low pH value (Acid Condition) due to its corrosive
and harmful effects.
• The water should therefore be treated to make it neutral or slightly alkaline. This acid condition
is due to the presence of free carbonic acid gas (C02) and to ensure its complete removal the
water should be filtered through a bed of neutralizing filter media, named E.W.T. Compound,
where the C02 combines with the filtering material to form natural bicarbonates.
• The consumption is approximately 1/2 kg (1Ib) of material per 35.000 liters of water to be
treated. It is sufficient to effect partial reloading 2 - 4 times a year only to compensate for the
quantity which disappears by dissolving in the water.
• E.W.T. Compound is supplied in granules packed in 25kg. It is advisable to occasionally reverse
the flow of water through the unit to loosen the medium and to flush after every refill until the
water is clear again.
• A Neutralizing-filter will improve taste and quality of the water. It will avoid corrosion (rust and
oxidized particles) in the fresh water system.

7.7.4. Automatic Chlorine Unit

In order to determine the Sodium Hypochlorite dosing it is first necessary to ascertain the required
amount of Sodium Hypochlorite to be added in milligrams per liter to give a residual of 0.5 mg/l.
7.7.5. Operational Checks

• Check that the stock of chlorine is sufficient and not beyond its shelf life.
• Check that the dosing vessel contains sufficient solution for at least 24 hours operation, or
enough to last until the next operational check.
• Check that the analysis results for residual chlorine are within the recommended limits. The
dosing pump must be adjusted as necessary to meet the desired levels of chlorination. On a
general basis the chlorine content should be 0.05 - 0.5 mg/l measured as free residual chlorine,
30 minutes after the chlorine was added.
7.7.6. Activated Carbon Water Fine Filter
• Hatenboer-Water activated carbon water fine filters are effective and well-designed filter
units to remove most traces of organic based pollution. The physical and chemical quality
of the water will be improved in order to prepare drinking water and or process water free
of hydrocarbons (ola mineral oils), aromatic derivatives, pesticides, detergents, chlorine
(dechlorination) etc. The water enters the filter unit and passes through a layer of selected
granulated activated carbon, which is packed in spiral wounded polypropylene filter elements
(FDAquality).
• The active carbon removes the organic pollution by means of adsorption. The turbid matter
is removed by filtration at 5 micron nominal selectivity. Under normal conditions the carbon
elements will require to be replaced every three months based on the pressure drop over the
filter unit or as per OEM instruction, with a minimum of one replacement per year (drinking
water-treatment applications only). This is depending on the drinking feed water quality.
Analysis of the feed water and the filtrate water may be required to indicate moment of filter
bed replacement.
7.7.7. Ultra Violet Sterilizer
• UV guarantees that the microbiological requirements of drinking water are met.
• This system contains all functions to control and supervise the UV system, operator panel, lamp
start sequencer, UV lamp supervision, UV intensity monitoring, flow control interlock, etc. The
status of the UV system is permanently displayed at the operator panel.
• During “normal” operation the display continually shows the current parameter values.
- UV Intensity
- Operating hours of UV lamps
- On / Off switches of UV reactor
- Event- or alarm messages
7.7.8. The following messages result from factory set threshold values:
• GREEN UV intensity higher than pre-alarm threshold value (> 60% of maximum value).
• YELLOW UV intensity is lower than pre-alarm threshold value « 60%, > 50%), maintenance may
be necessary in next future
• RED UV intensity lower than alarm threshold value « 50%) or UV lamp failure, maintenance
necessary
7.7.9. Lamp Monitoring System
• This system consists of UV sensor, electronics (amplifier / limit value relays), UV lamp
supervision, as well as operator panel with pilot lights and text display. The intensity (254 nm)
within the reactor chamber is measured continuously by the UV sensor. After signal processing
the intensity [W/m2] is displayed, furthermore it is available as a standard analogue output

signal (0-20 or 4-20mA) for external signal processing.

• By permanent measurement of UV intensity highest degree of safety is guaranteed. Every
failure will be displayed at the operator panel as well alarm signaling is caused without delay.
• The efficiency of the UV system substantially depends on the UV intensity being available in
the reactor. During operation ageing of the UV lamp reduces the UV intensity, as does scale
formation on the lamp’s quartz jacket. The intensity also may be influenced by supply voltage
and/or UV absorption (water quality)
7.7.10. Cleaning Process
A cleaning procedure should be carried out as often as scale cause a decrease in UV intensity of -
20%, it is necessary latest when >UV-Intensity< is displayed. As such a decrease also may be caused
by ageing of the UV lamp or changes in water quality (UV transmission), a visual inspection of the UV
sensor or the quartz jacket (UV module) is helpful before starting the cleaning procedure. Proceeding
in this way leads to cleaning intervals which are adapted to the individual operating conditions
(water quality). Quartz jacket (UV module) and UV sensor always have to be cleaned together, for
this they have to be dismounted. It is recommended to use wetted white cotton or a sponge for
wiping, eventually a suitable cleaning agent
7.7.11. The Onshore Potable Water Treatment System consists of:

• Neutralizer / Mineralizer System
• Automatic Chlorine Unit
• Activated Carbon Water Fine Filter
• Ultra Violet Sterilizer
• Potable Water Pumps
7.7.12. Neutralizer / Mineralizer System
• It is undesirable to have domestic water, produced by Desalination Plants such as evaporators
and reverse osmosis water makers, with a low pH value (Acid Condition) due to its corrosive
and harmful effects.
• The water should therefore be treated to make it neutral or slightly alkaline. This acid condition
is due to the presence of free carbonic acid gas (CO2) and to ensure its complete removal the
water should be filtered through a bed of neutralizing filter media,named E.W.T. Compound,
where the CO2 combines with the filtering material to form natural bicarbonates.
• The consumption is approximately 1/2 kg (1Ib) of material per 35.000 liters. of water to be
treated. It is sufficient to effect partial reloading 2 - 4 times a year only, to compensate for the
quantity which disappears by dissolving in the water.
• E.W.T. Compound is supplied in granules packed in 25 kg. It is advisable to occasionally reverse
the flow of water through the unit to loosen the medium and to flush after every refill until the
water is clear again.
• A Neutralizing-filter will improve taste and quality of the water. It will avoid corrosion (rust and
oxidized particles) in the fresh water system.
7.7.13. Automatic Chlorine Unit
In order to determine the Sodium Hypochlorite dosing it is first necessary to ascertain the required
amount of Sodium Hypochlorite to be added in milligrams per liter to give a residual of 0.5 mg/l.
7.8. Operational Checks

• Check that the stock of chlorine is sufficient and not beyond its shelf life.
• Check that the dosing vessel contains sufficient solution for at least 24 hours operation, or
enough to last until the next operational check.
• Check that the analysis results for residual chlorine are within the recommended limits. The
dosing pump must be adjusted as necessary to meet the desired levels of chlorination.

• On a general basis the chlorine content should be 0.05 - 0.5 mg/l measured as free residual
chlorine, 30 minutes after the chlorine was added.
7.8.1. Activated Carbon Water Fine Filter
• Hatenboer-Water activated carbon water fine filters are effective and well-designed filter
units to remove most traces of organic based pollution. The physical and chemical quality
of the water will be improved in order to prepare drinking water and or process water free
of hydrocarbons (ola mineral oils), aromatic derivatives, pesticides, detergents, chlorine
(dechlorination) etc.
• The water enters the filter unit and passes through a layer of selected granulated activated
carbon, which is packed in spiral wounded polypropylene filter elements (FDAquality).
• The active carbon removes the organic pollution by means of adsorption. The turbid matter is
removed by filtration at 5-micron nominal selectivity.
• Under normal conditions the carbon elements will require to be replaced every three months
based on the pressure drop over the filter unit or as per OEM instruction, with a minimum of
one replacement per year (drinking water-treatment applications only). This is depending
on the drinking feed water quality. Analysis of the feed water and the filtrate water may be
required to indicate moment of filter bed replacement.
7.8.2. Ultra Violet Sterilizer
• UV guarantees that the microbiological requirements of drinking water are met This system
contains all functions to control and supervise the UV system, operator panel, lamp start
sequencer, UV lamp supervision, UV intensity monitoring, flow control interlock, etc. The status
of the UV system is permanently displayed at the operator panel.
• During “normal” operation the display continually shows the current parameter values.
- UV Intensity
- Operating hours of UV lamps
- On / Off switches of UV reactor
- Event- or alarm messages
The following messages result from factory set threshold values
• GREEN UV intensity higher than pre-alarm threshold value (> 60% of maximum value)
• YELLOW UV intensity is lower than pre-alarm threshold value « 60%, > 50%), maintenance may
be necessary in next future
• RED UV intensity lower than alarm threshold value « 50%) or UV lamp failure, maintenance
necessary
7.8.3. UV Lamp Monitoring System
• This system consists of UV sensor, electronics (amplifier / limit value relays), UV lamp
supervision, as well as operator panel with pilot lights and text display.
• The intensity (254 nm) within the reactor chamber is measured continuously by the UV sensor.
After signal processing the intensity [W/m2] is displayed, furthermore it is available as a
standard analogue output signal (0-20 or 4-20mA) for external signal processing.
• By permanent measurement of UV intensity highest degree of safety is guaranteed.
• Every failure will be displayed at the operator panel as well alarm signaling is caused without
delay.
• The efficiency of the UV system substantially depends on the UV intensity being available in
the reactor. During operation ageing of the UV lamp reduces the UV intensity, as does scale
formation on the lamp’s quartz jacket. The intensity also may be influenced by supply voltage
and / or UV absorption (water quality)
7.8.4. Cleaning Process
A cleaning procedure should be carried out as often as scale cause a decrease in UV intensity of -

20%, it is necessary latest when >UV-Intensity< is displayed.

As such a decrease also may be caused by ageing of the UV lamp or changes in water quality
(UV transmission), a visual inspection of the UV sensor or the quartz jacket (UV module) is helpful
before starting the cleaning procedure. Proceeding in this way leads to cleaning intervals which are
adapted to the individual operating conditions (water quality) Quartz jacket (UV module) and UV
sensor always have to be cleaned together, for thi they have to be dismounted. It is recommended
to use wetted white cotton or a sponge for wiping, eventually a suitable cleaning agent
7.8.5. Replacement of UV Lamp

The effective life of the UV lamp depends on the required minimum UV dose [J/m2] which is
resulting from the existing UV intensity [W/m2] and duration time (flow rate). Normally, the lamp has
to be replaced latest, when >UV-Alarm< or >UV-Intensity< is indicated following cleaning procedure.
Especially, if treating water with altering UV transmission care should be taken for appropriate
reserve (please note: low UV transmission caused by high count of particles can’t be compensated
by higher intensity).
7.8.6. Tests
• The Medic must ensure that potable water is obtained from an approved source and has added
adequate chlorine to the water in the bulk water transport (conveyance) system to create a 0.5
mg/L to 1.5 mg/L concentration.
• All rigs must send a water samples to an approved lab monthly. Results must be filed in the
HSEMS filing system.
• The medic must perform a weekly water analysis using the test water kit. A record should be
available and filed in the clinic files.
• The medic must perform a daily water analysis and a record should be available and filed in the
clinic files.
• The weekly and monthly samples shall be taken from (rig camp tank, main camp tanks, water
supply truck and ice making machines).
7.9. Monthly Water Analysis Sample Procedure

• Use a sterile water sample bottles for collecting the water sample.
• Collect the water sample when you are sure you can deliver it to the laboratory within six (6)
hours.
• Refrigerate (cooler with ice packs) the water sample if it cannot be delivered to the laboratory
within six (6) hours.
• Ensure that each water sample bottle is identified as follows:
- Owner of the water supply
- Location of water sampling
- Date collected
- Time collected
• Sample points should be included to ensure that the samples taken are representative of
different sources from which the water is obtained by the public or enters the system.
• Remove any aerator, screen or other attachments from the sampling tap.
• Disinfect the end of the faucets pout with an alcohol swab before running the water to remove
debris or bacteria.
• Turn on water and let it run for 3-4 minutes to remove standing water from the plumbing.
• Remove the sample bottle lid.
- Do not touch the inside of the lid
- Do not put the lid down in any surface
- Do not rinse the bottle
• Fill the bottle to the level as required and close lid firmly. A small air space should be left to
make shaking easier, before analysis.

• Keep the water sample cool (but not frozen) until it is received in the laboratory.
7.10. Weekly Water Analysis Sample Procedure

Follow the same instructions mentioned in section (a) Monthly water analysis.
7.10.1. Test procedure:

• Check all materials are complete inside the test kit.
• Clean the flat surface or table with Dettol Antiseptic Solution.
• Prepare all the needed materials like gloves, medical waste container, and 5cc syringe.
• Do not open packets or vial until you are ready to perform the tests.
7.10.2. Bacteria Test:
• Take out the Bacteria Test Vial and set upright on a flat surface.
• Take the water sample with a 5cc syringe and put very slowly into the vial.
• Carefully twist off cap and fill vial to ½ inch below the top (to 5ml line). DO NOT OVERFILL and
DO NOT SPILL the bacteria growth powder in the vial.
• Replace the cap and twist on tightly. Shake the vial vigorously for 20 seconds or more until all
the powder is dissolved.
• Place the capped vial upright in a warm area (70–90°F or 00-00°C) where it cannot be disturbed
for 48 hours.
• After 48 hours, observe the color of the liquid WITHOUT opening the vial:
- Purple Color: Negative Result (No Bacteria were detected)
- Yellow Color : Positive Result (It is highly likely that potentially harmful bacteria were
detected) then follows disinfection instructions in section
• For positive results, add bleach to the sample before pouring down the toilet, then wash hands
thoroughly. Negative samples may be poured directly into the toilet.
• Discard the vial into the Medical Waste Container.
7.10.3. PH / Hardness / Chlorine Test
• Carefully open pH / Hardness / Chlorine Test packet and take out strip.
• Immerse the reagent pads into water sample and remove immediately. Hold the strip level for
15 seconds.
• Match pH (end pad), Total Hardness (middle pad) and Total Chlorine Pads (pad nearest to
handle) to the color chart inside the test kit.
7.11. Daily Water Analysis

Sample Procedure:
Follow the same instructions mentioned in section (a) Monthly water analysis.
7.11.1. Test procedure
• Check all materials are complete inside the test kit.
• When adding drops of solution, hold the bottle vertically and add drops slowly to ensure
proper drop size, swirling the sample after each drop.
• Perform test out of direct sunlight and read the results facing away from the light. Use the white
card supplied with the kit as a background to facilitate easy reading.
• Store your test kit out of direct sunlight in a cool place.
• Replace test kit reagents yearly to ensure accurate testing results.
7.11.2. Chlorine Test
• Fill small vial to line.
• Add 5 drops Solution 1.
• Cap vial and slowly invert several times.

• Within 2-3 seconds, compare color in vial with color standards to determine Free Chlorine level.
• Wait 1-2 minutes and compare again to determine Chlorine Residual level.
7.11.3. PH Test
• Fill the large tube to the top (solid) line.
• Add 1 drop Solution 4, mix by swirling.
• Add 5 drops Solution 2, mix by swirling.
• Compare the color with pH color standards.
7.11.4. TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Test
• Remove the protective cap.
• Press the ON / OFF switch to turn the meter on.
• Immerse the meter into the water / solution up to the max immersion level (2”).
• Lightly stir the meter to dislodge any air bubbles.
• Wait until the display stabilizes. Once the reading stabilizes (approx. 10seconds), press the
HOLD button to view the reading out of the water.
• If the meter displays a flashing ‘x10’ symbol, multiply the reading by 10.
• After usage, shake off any excess water from the meter. Replace the cap.
7.11.5. Water Temperature Test
• Once the meter is on, the temperature function can be used at any time, in or out of the liquid.
• Press the TEMP button. The display will switch to temperature (in Celsius only).
• To return to TDS’ mode, press the TEMP button.
7.11.6. Total Coliform Bacteria
Only for water from saline or brackish sources treated using thermal processes
• Take out the Bacteria Test Vial and set upright on a flat surface.
• Take the water sample with a 5cc syringe and put very slowly into the vial.
• Carefully twist off cap and fill vial to ½ inch below the top (to 5ml line).DO NOT OVERFILL and
DO NOT SPILL the bacteria growth powder in the vial.
• Replace the cap and twist on tightly. Shake the vial vigorously for 20 seconds or more until all
the powder is dissolved.
• Place the capped vial upright in a warm area (70–90°F or 21-32°C) where it cannot be disturbed
for 48 hours.
• After 48 hours, observe the color of the liquid WITHOUT opening the vial:
• Purple Color: Negative Result (No Bacteria were detected).
• Yellow Color: Positive Result (It is highly likely that potentially harmful bacteria were detected)
then follows disinfection instructions in section
• For positive results, add bleach to the sample before pouring down the toilet, then wash hands
thoroughly. Negative samples may be poured directly into the toilet.
• Discard the vial into the Medical Waste Container
7.11.7. Supplied Drinking Water
• The drinking water on rig operators rigs supplied by a Client approved bottled water vendor.
• Offshore potable water is provided through water makers which are under rig operators
preventive maintenance program. The water shall be tested under the following conditions:
- When the water tastes, color, etc. is abnormal.
- When the water source changed e.g. supply by boat.
- When the water maker has been through a major repair / upgrade / replacement
- The same procedure for onshore rigs shall apply. Records shall be kept at clinic for reference.

F8. Noise Control Program

F.8. Noise Control Program
8.1. Scope
All rig contractors will be maintained and operated in a way that to a safe and healthful work
environment for its employees.
8.2. Purpose
The purpose of this Noise control program is to prevent occupational hearing loss and to maintain
a good and healthy environment to employees by providing the proper guards to prevent any Noisy
areas.
An effective Noise Control Program includes, as a minimum:
• Noise exposure monitoring
• Audiometric testing and analysis
• Provision and effective use of hearing protection
• Training on the effects of noise, the care and use of hearing protection, etc.
• Recordkeeping.
- To translate the Rig contractors responsibilities and implementation of the procedures with
effective controlling measures through work scopes, training, regular briefing on the hearing
protection and effective field supervision.
- To promote the concept of hearing protection to all its employees and to provide guidance as
to individual and collective responsibilities in this area of activity.
- Rig Contractors is committed to prevention of accidents to minimize loss of life or bodily
injury to its employees, contractor and subcontractor employees.
- In fulfilling this commitment, which is essential to and equally important as production
objectives, the Rig Contractors will take every reasonable measure to provide and maintain
a safe and healthful work environment for its employees and protect the public against
foreseeable hazards resulting from operations.
8.3. Definitions
8.3.1. Noise:
A sound which is unwanted, either because of its effect on humans, its effect on fatigue or
malfunction of physical equipment, or its interference with the perception or detection of other
sounds. Noise levels are measured in decibels, or dB for short. The higher the decibel level, the
louder the noise.
8.3.2. Decibel (dB):

The standard unit of sound intensity measurement.
dB (A): The sound level in decibels read on the “A”-scale of a sound level meter. The “A”- scale
weighting best approximates the response of the human ear to sound.
8.3.3. Ambient Noise:

A measure of the intensity, duration, and character of sounds from all sources that affect a given
location.
8.3.4. Community Noise:

A measure of the overall noise which is associated with outdoor sound levels in the community.
8.3.5. Action Level:

Equivalent continuous sound level of 85 dB (A).

8.3.6. Engineering Controls:

A physical means of reducing noise exposure which does not include the use of personal hearing
protection like substitution of manufacturing equipment or isolation brought about by barriers,
enclosures or modification of the equipment, including the addition of materials such as absorbers
and damping materials.
8.3.7. Noise Exposure:

A cumulative acoustic stimulation which reaches the ear of a person over a specified period of time
such as a work shift, a day, a working life, or a lifetime.
8.3.8. Noise Hazard:

An acoustic stimulation of the ear which is likely to produce noise induced permanent hearing loss
in some of the exposed population.
8.3.9. Feasible:
Technical feasibility is the existence of technical know-how as to materials and methods available
or adaptable to specific circumstances, which can be applied to control noise with a reasonable
possibility that employee exposure to occupational noise will be reduced.
8.3.10. Time Weight Average (TWA):

That sound level, which if constant over an 8-hour exposure period, would result in the same noise
dose as is measured.
8.3.11. Permissible Level Exposure (PLE):

The maximum legal noise exposure, established by Egyptian applicable laws. The current PEL is 90
dB (A) over an eight-hour period.
8.3.12. Noise Reduction Rating (NRR):

Is measurement, in decibels, of how well a hearing protector reduces noise? The higher the NRR
number the greater noise reduction. While wearing hearing protection your exposure to noise is
equal to the total noise level minus the NRR of hearing protection in used.
8.3.13. Noise Dose:

Refers to the equivalent continuous noise levels to which a person is exposed over an eight-hour
working day described in decibels.
8.4. Responsibility
8.4.1. Rig Contractors PIC “SENIOR Tool PUSHER / OIM
• Coordination and supervision of noise exposure monitoring.
• Identification of employees to be included in the Hearing Conservation Program.
• Coordination and supervision of audiometric testing program.
• Supervision of hearing protector selection.
• Development of policies relating to the use of hearing protectors.
• Supervision of employee training programs.
• Coordination and supervision of required recordkeeping.
• Periodic evaluation of overall program.
• Coordination of required changes / improvements in the program.

8.4.2. Rig Management

• The rig contractors management has overall responsibility for develop, implement and manage
operations in a manner consistent with the corporate occupational standards and procedures in
their operations.
• Review the implementation of such standards and procedures by HSE Section.
• Manage operations under their area of responsibility in a proactive manner to ensure a safe and
healthful work environment and implement requirements of Hearing Conservation Program.
• Work with HSE & Training Sections as necessary to address any outstanding issues to reach an
acceptable resolution that does not compromise employee working conditions.
• Adequate staff, funds and materials are available to meet the requirement of the company’s
environmental protection policy. Employees receive sufficient information, instruction, training
and supervision in environmental protection matters.
8.4.3. Line Manager / Rig Superintendent
Each Line Manager / Rig Superintendent has a responsibility to be fully familiar with the rig
contractors Hearing Conservation Program and statutory hearing protection requirements of direct
relevance to their operations and to ensure that all activities performed under their requirements.
The successful discharge of these responsibilities will impose the following duties on Line Manager
/ Rig Superintendent:
• Provision of instruction, guidance and support to HCPA on protection of the Environment.
• Monitoring the implementation of this procedure and working practices to identify areas of
non-conformance and taking corrective actions to promptly rectify any deficiencies identified.
8.4.4. HSE Manager
• Responsibility of monitoring compliance with this Procedure is vested in the HSE Department
with functional guidance and assistance from Client environmental department In addition, the
responsibilities of the HSE department include:
• Provision of specialist support and advice on hearing conservation matters at all stages of rig
contractors operations.
8.5. Procedures
Occupational noise can cause hearing loss and increase the worker’s susceptibility to other
workplace problems including physical and psychological disorders, interference with speech and
communication and disruption of job performance associated with excessive noise intensities. This
exposure to noise produces hearing loss of a neural type involving injury to the inner ear hair cells.
The loss of hearing may be temporary or permanent. Brief exposure causes a temporary loss.
Repeated exposure to high noise levels will cause a permanent loss.
Permanent hearing loss is preventable with the continued use of proper hearing protection and
reduction of workplace noise levels to below 85 decibels. This will benefit not only employees
Who can listen and communicate well throughout their lifetimes, but also helps the rig contractors
in terms of reduced exposure to hearing loss compensation claims and a potential for increased
general safety and job performance.
8.5.1. Duration (Hours) Sound Level (dB)

Rig operators are in compliance with OSHA Occupational Noise Exposure standard 29 CFR 1910.95
establishes a Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL) for occupational noise exposure and requirements for
audiometric testing, hearing protection, and employee training if those sound levels are exceeded.

This regulation defines an “Action Level” (AL) as a “dose” of 50%, which is equivalent to an eight
hours’ Time Weighted Average of 85 dB. When noise levels exceed this amount, an effective hearing
conservation program is required, which includes as a minimum requirements as following:
• Noise monitoring
• Audiometric testing
• Protection equipment
• Employee training
• Recordkeeping
8.5.2. Noise Monitoring
• When information indicates that any employee’s exposure may equal or exceed an 8 hours’
Time Weighted Average of 85 decibels, rig contractors shall develop and implement a
monitoring program.
• RIG CONTRACTORS shall identify employees for inclusion in the hearing conservation program.
• Rig HSE is responsible to identify the Noisy areas in workplace and he shall implement his
required responsibilities which is:
- Identify the areas by safety signs BASED ON THE NOISE SURVEY
- Insure that any high noise areas provided by the proper selection of hearing protectors
- Insure that a noise survey is done annually and documented in the rig SMS files
- The results of the annual noise exposure measurements will be recorded and updated
annually Noise Survey Report & Rig Noise Layout” and both shall be displayed in the rig
meeting room information board.
• The annual Noise survey shall be done by an approved instrument and to be calibrated as
required, RIG CONTRACTORS noise survey shall include all areas
• Instruments used to measure employee noise exposure levels shall be calibrated to ensure
measurement accuracy
• Sound level measurements shall be taken at twenty-five meter intervals.
• Monitoring shall be repeated whenever a change in production, process, equipment or controls
increases noise exposures to the extent that:
- Additional employees may be exposed at or above the AL
- The attenuation provided by hearing protectors being used by employees may be rendered
inadequate to meet the requirements.
• RIG CONTRACTORS shall notify each employee exposed at or above an 8 hours’ Time
Weighted Average of 85 decibels of the results of the monitoring.
• The RIG CONTRACTORS shall provide affected employees with an opportunity to observe any
noise measurements conducted.
8.5.3. Audiometric Testing
• RIG CONTRACTORS shall establish and maintain an audiometric testing by making audiometric
testing available to all employees whose exposures equal or exceed an 8 hours’ Time Weighted
Average of 85 decibels. The program shall be provided at no cost to employees.
• Audiometric tests shall be performed Annually by a third party licensed or certified audiologist,
otolaryngologist, or other physician or by a technician who is certified by the Council of
Accreditation in Occupational Hearing Conservation or who has satisfactorily demonstrated
competence in administering audiometric examinations, can obtain valid audiograms and can
properly use, maintain and check / calibrate audiometers being used.
8.5.4. Audiometric testing frequency
• Audiometric testing shall be done with the fit to work test before sending a new employee to
the workplace
• Shall be done annually by third party to all rig employees
• Shall be done if any employee complained for an ear pain due to high interval exposure of high
noise limits

8.5.5. Annual Audiogram

• Audiograms will be conducted at least annually after obtaining the baseline audiogram for each
employee exposed at or above an 8 hours’ Time Weighted Average of 85 decibels.
• Medical department will maintain a record of all employee audiometric test records. This record
will include:
- Name and job classification of the employee
- Date of the audiogram
- The examiner’s name
- Date of the last acoustic or exhaustive calibration of the audiometer
- Employee’s most recent noise exposure assessment
8.5.6. Audiometric Evaluation
• Each employee’s annual audiogram will be compared to his baseline audiogram by qualified
evaluator to determine if a Standard Threshold Shift (STS) has occurred. This comparison may
be done by a technician.
• In determining if a STS has occurred, an allowance can be made for the contribution of aging
(presbycusis).
- An audiologist, otolaryngologist, or physician shall review problem audiograms and
determine whether there is a need for further evaluation. The rig contractors shall provide to
the person performing this evaluation the following information:
- A copy of the requirements for hearing conservation as set forth in the standard.
- The baseline audiogram and most recent audiogram of the employee to be evaluated.
- Measurements of background sound pressure levels in the audiometric test room.
- Records of audiometer calibrations.
- If the annual audiogram shows that an employee has suffered a STS, the rig contractors
may obtain a retest within 30 days and consider the results of the retest as the annual
audiogram.
- Unless a physician determines that the STS is not work related or aggravated by occupational
noise exposure, RIG CONTRACTORS shall ensure that the following steps are taken when a
standard threshold shift occurs:
- Employees whom are not using hearing protectors will be trained, fitted, and required
to use hearing protectors if they are exposed to an 8 hours TWA average sound level of 85
decibels or greater.
- Employees already using hearing protectors shall be retrained, refitted, and required to
use hearing protectors and provided with hearing protectors offering greater attenuation if
necessary.
- Rig contractors Human Resource will inform the employee, in writing, within 21 days of this
determination, of the existence of a permanent Standard Threshold Shift.
- The RSTC will counsel the employee on the importance of using hearing protectors and
refer the employee for further clinical evaluation if necessary.
- If subsequent audiometric testing of an employee whose exposure to noise is less than an 8
hours TWA of 90 decibels indicates the STS is not persistent, the Rig HSE:
- Shall inform the employee of the new audiometric interpretation.
- May discontinue the required use of hearing protectors for that employee.
8.5.7. Protection Equipment
• the Rig HSE shall ensure that hearing protectors are worn:
- By any employee who is subjected to sound levels equal to or exceeding an 8 hours TWA of
85 decibels.
- By any employee who has experienced a persistent STS and who is exposed to 8-hour TWA of
85 decibels or greater.
- By any employee who has not had an initial baseline audiogram and who is exposed to 8
hours TWA of 85 decibels or greater.

• Employees will be given the opportunity to select their hearing protectors from variety of
suitable hearing protectors at no cost to them.
- Rig contractors Company will provide training in the use and care of all hearing protectors.
- The Rig HSE will ensure proper initial fitting and supervise the correct use of all Hearing
protectors.
- Employees will be held accountable for not properly using and maintaining the equipment
furnished.
- The Rig HSE will evaluate the attenuation characteristics of the hearing protectors to ensure
that a given protector will reduce the individual’s exposure to the required decibels.
- If the 8 hours TWA is over 85 decibels, then the protector must attenuate the exposure to at
least 8 hours TWA of 85 decibels or below.
• If the protector is being worn because the employee experienced a STS, then the protector
must attenuate the exposure to 8-hour TWA of 85 decibels or below.
• If employee noise exposures increase to the extent that the hearing protectors provided may
no longer provide adequate attenuation, the employee will be provided more effective hearing
protectors.
- It is the responsibility of the supervisor to ensure that hearing protectors are worn by
all employees who are exposed to noise levels at or above an eight hour TWA of 90 decibels or if
the employee experienced a permanent STS or has not yet had a baseline audiogram.
8.5.8. Employee Training

An in house training shall be performed for each employee including the hearing conservation
program and will be conducted by RSTC for one time and repeated refresher training if necessary,
this training program will include information on:
• The effects of noise on hearing.
• The purpose and use of hearing protectors.
• The advantages, disadvantages, and attenuation of various types of protection.
• Instruction in the selection, fitting, use and care of protectors.
• The purpose of audiometric testing and an explanation of the test procedures.
Rig contractors Training Matrix will be used to record and track the training dates and the
employees in attendance. Information provided in the training program shall be updated to be
consistent with changes in protective equipment and work processes.
8.5.9. Recordkeeping
Noise exposure measurement records will be retained for two years. Audiometric test records will
be retained for the duration of the affected worker’s employment plus thirty years.
You can’t control workplace noise without reliable information. Accurate records document what
you have done to control noise and inform you when you may need to change your strategy to keep
noise under control. Record keeping ties together critical information about all the other tools you
use to eliminate or control workplace noise. The table below summarizes the critical record-keeping
information for each noise-control tool.

F9. Naturally Occuring

Radioactive Materials
(NORM) Management
F.9.NaturallyOccurringRadioactiveMaterials(NORM)Management
9.1. Scope
This procedure contains the EGPC Minimum rules to protect personnel from the Naturally
Occurring Radioactive Material (NORM) hazards. Common hazards when dealing with radioactive
sources include health hazards, Monitoring, training worker protection and disposal. These
procedures shall be in line with EGPC’S NORM guidelines within the drilling and workover
operations in Egypt that should be a main reference for this topic.
9.2. Purpose
Provide guidance on the management of process streams or equipment contaminated with minor
concentrations of Naturally Occurring Radionuclides (NORMs).
9.3. NORM in Oil and Gas Production

• NORM is present in trace amounts in crude oil, NGL, and natural gas, but at much lower levels
than at accumulation points.
• Only 222Rn (radon) can be easily measured on-site with user-friendly equipment. Other NORM
measurements require specialized labs.
• Heavier crude oils may concentrate Thorium (Th) and Uranium (U), making them measurable in
residues after deep processing.
• 222Rn follows the gas stream and can concentrate in propane and ethane during fractionation.
• 222Rn decays into short-lived radioactive progeny, except for 210Po, which accumulates as thin
films on equipment surfaces.
• Even high 222Rn levels in gas do not create external radiation hazards, except in rare cases for
gas caps on storage tanks.
• Uncontrolled gas release poses suffocation and explosion risks far greater than any radiation
hazard.
• Typical NORM activity concentrations for oil, NGL, and gas:
NOR Bq[NOR]/L[oil] Bq[NOR]/L[NGL] Bq[NOR]/m3[NG]
232Th 0.03 < > 2 n.r. n.r.
232Th
228Raeq n.r. n.r. n.r.
series
228Theq n.r. n.r. n.r.
238Ueq 0.0001 < > 10 n.r. n.r.
238U 226Raeq 0.1 < > 40 n.r. n.r.

series 222Rneq n.r. 0.01 < > 1,500 5 < > 200,000
210Pbeq n.r. 0.3 < > 230 0.005 < > 0.02
n.r. = not reported.
9.3.1. Discharge to the environment
While naturally occurring radioactive materials (NORM) are present in trace amounts throughout
the oil and gas production process, their discharge to the environment poses minimal risk. On-site
measurement is only possible for the radioactive gas radon, and even at its highest levels, radiation
hazards outside wellbores and processing facilities are practically nonexistent. The heavier the crude
oil, the more potentially concentrated NORM residues become, but these are typically contained
within pipelines and tanks. Overall, NORM discharge concerns pale in comparison to the immediate
suffocation and explosion risks associated with uncontrolled gas release.

9.3.2. Health hazards of NORM

ORM health hazards, are generally low-level and require specific exposure pathways to pose a
threat.
• Inhalation of radon gas and ingesting NORM-contaminated water or food are the primary
sources of concern.
• Internal exposure to these alpha-emitting radionuclides can increase the risk of lung cancer
and bone tumors, though the effective dose received is typically much lower than other
environmental radiation sources like radon in homes or cosmic rays.
However, occupational exposure can be higher within confined spaces or during maintenance
activities, necessitating proper ventilation, personal protective equipment, and monitoring
procedures to minimize risk.
By maintaining awareness and implementing safety measures, NORM health hazards can be
effectively managed within the oil and gas industry.
9.3.3. NORM Management Cycle

The NORM management cycle is a continuous loop in the oil and gas industry that minimizes the
environmental and health impacts of naturally occurring radioactive materials (NORM).
• It starts with the identification and characterization of NORM in various production streams,
then moves to segregation and control to prevent its spread.
• Waste streams are either treated and recycled or safely disposed of in approved facilities.
Throughout the cycle, monitoring and compliance ensure regulations are met and worker safety
is prioritized.
• Finally, feedback and improvements are incorporated to optimize the cycle and address
emerging challenges.
• This closed-loop approach keeps NORM contained, protecting both the environment and the
health of oil and gas workers.
9.3.4. NORM Regulations
While naturally occurring radioactive materials (NORM) are ubiquitous in the oil and gas industry,
a patchwork of national and international regulations governs their management. These regulations
aim to minimize environmental and health risks through specific requirements for:
• Identification and monitoring: Ensuring NORM presence is acknowledged and tracked
throughout the production chain.
• Waste handling: Setting standards for segregation, treatment, recycling, and safe disposal of
NORM waste.
• Worker protection: Mandating training, personal protective equipment, and radiation exposure
limits for personnel working with NORM.
• Environmental protection: Establishing guidelines for NORM discharge into air, water, and land
to safeguard the environment.
Compliance with these regulations is crucial for responsible NORM management, protecting
workers, the public, and the environment from unnecessary radiation exposure.
Exposure Limits:
• Public dose limit: 1 mSv/a additional to natural background (ICRP, IAEA, EU).
• Worker exposure: Treated as public with limited exposure time (2,000 hours/year).
• Workplace radon: 1000 Bq/Nm3 (IAEA) and 300 Bq/Nm3 (EU) reference levels.
Note:
- Regulations vary by nation and international agencies (IAEA, EU).
- Always check with local authorities for specific regulations.
- In absence of specific regulations, use IAEA/EU BSS as best practice.

- Explosion and suffocation risks from gas leaks outweigh radiation concern at high radon
levels.
9.3.5. NORM Monitoring

Monitoring plays a crucial role in the NORM management cycle. Through regular measurements
of NORM activity concentrations in air, water, soil, equipment surfaces, and personnel exposure,
potential risks are identified and assessed. This monitoring data informs mitigation strategies like
ventilation improvements, waste segregation, and personnel protection measures. By proactively
tracking NORM levels, companies ensure compliance with regulations, safeguard worker health, and
minimize environmental impact, making monitoring a vital tool for responsible NORM management
in the oil and gas industry, where each rig contractor shall provide a NORM monitoring device at
each unit.
9.3.6. Training and awareness

Effective NORM management starts with a strong foundation of training and awareness. Educating
all personnel involved in oil and gas production about the nature of NORM, potential exposure
pathways, health risks, and safety protocols is crucial. Training should cover topics like:
• Identification of NORM hotspots
• Proper use of protective equipment
• Radiation monitoring procedures
• Emergency response plans
• Handling practices
By fostering a culture of awareness and vigilance within the workforce, the industry can prevent
accidents, reduce occupational exposure, and ensure responsible handling of NORM throughout the
production chain.
9.3.7. Control of NORM sites

Controlling NORM sites in the oil and gas industry demands a multi-pronged approach
encompassing prevention, segregation, mitigation, and remediation. Prevention prioritizes
identifying and minimizing NORM accumulation from the outset. This involves:
• optimizing production processes to reduce NORM uptake by equipment and materials,
• designing facilities with NORM management in mind
• Implement robust maintenance schedules to catch potential leaks and accumulations early.
• Segregation focuses on isolating NORM-contaminated streams from clean ones, preventing
cross-contamination, and simplifying waste management. This includes dedicated pipelines,
tanks, and storage areas for NORM-laden materials.
Mitigation tackles existing contamination through techniques like:
• Ventilation systems to disperse radon gas,
• Shielding of high-exposure areas, and
• Regular decontamination procedures for equipment and surfaces.
Finally, remediation addresses historical NORM contamination at legacy sites. This may involve:
• Excavation and disposal of contaminated soil,
• Treatment and reuse of materials where possible, and
• Long-term monitoring to ensure the effectiveness of remediation efforts.
Effective control of NORM sites necessitates stringent adherence to regulations, thorough training
of personnel, and continuous monitoring and evaluation of control measures. By adopting a
proactive and holistic approach, the oil and gas industry can minimize environmental impact, protect
worker health, and ensure responsible stewardship of NORM throughout its operations.

9.3.8. NORM Contaminated Equipment

NORM-contaminated equipment in the oil and gas industry presents both challenges and
opportunities for responsible management.
9.3.8.1. Identification and Tracking
Identifying equipment harboring NORM is crucial, as various components like pipes, vessels,
and filters can accumulate residues throughout the production process. Regular monitoring with
appropriate instrumentation, such as radiation detectors and surface swabs, helps pinpoint hotspots
and track contamination levels.
9.3.8.2. Risk Assessment and Segregation
Once identified, equipment needs risk assessment based on the type and intensity of NORM
present. High-risk equipment may be isolated and dedicated to NORM handling, while low-risk
items can be integrated into regular workflows with appropriate precautions. Proper labeling and
segregation are essential to minimize cross-contamination and ensure safe handling.
9.3.8.3. Decontamination and Reuse
Depending on the contamination level and material type, decontamination might be feasible.
Techniques like high-pressure cleaning, chemical washes, or sandblasting can remove surface
contamination, allowing for equipment reuse in controlled settings. However, it’s crucial to ensure
decontamination effectiveness and proper disposal of any generated waste.
9.3.8.4. Disposal and Recycling
Service companies using Norm Devices and rig contractors/ operators having some contaminated
closes or material all shall have a valid contract with decontaminate third parties and NORM waste
disposal.
9.3.8.5. Design and Maintenance
Proactive considerations during equipment design and maintenance can significantly reduce future
NORM contamination issues. Utilizing materials less susceptible to NORM uptake, incorporating
easy-to-clean features, and implementing rigorous maintenance schedules all contribute to long-
term equipment functionality and minimize the risk of NORM accumulation.
Managing NORM-contaminated equipment demands a multifaceted approach that balances
safety, cost-effectiveness, and environmental responsibility. By prioritizing identification, risk
assessment, and appropriate handling methods, the oil and gas industry can turn this challenge into
an opportunity for sustainable and responsible operations.
9.3.9. Transport of Norm contaminated equipment

Transporting NORM-contaminated equipment requires meticulous planning and stringent
protocols to ensure safety and compliance, and is the responsibility of source holder.
9.3.9.1. Pre-transport considerations
• Classification: Categorize equipment based on NORM activity concentration and type (solid,
liquid, etc.).
• Packaging and labeling: Utilize certified containers and clear labels that identify NORM
presence and radiation levels.
• Documentation: Prepare transport documents outlining equipment details, decontamination
records, and emergency procedures.
• Permits and approvals: Obtain necessary permits and approvals from relevant authorities
based on regulations and destination.

9.3.9.2. Transport procedures

• Route planning: Choose optimal routes with minimal risk to population and environment.
• Secure transport: Utilize specialized vehicles equipped with proper containment and monitoring
systems.
• Trained personnel: Ensure drivers and accompanying personnel are trained in safe handling
and emergency response.
9.3.9.3. Safety precautions:
• Radiation monitoring: Continuously monitor radiation levels throughout transport to ensure
compliance with exposure limits.
• Emergency preparedness: Have clear communication protocols and emergency response plans
in place for potential incidents.
• Post-transport procedures: Decontaminate vehicles and equipment if necessary, and dispose of
any generated waste responsibly.
9.3.10. Remediation of NORM Contaminated Land
Remediating NORM (Naturally Occurring Radioactive Material) contaminated land in the oil and
gas industry demands careful strategies to protect both human health and the environment.
9.3.10.1. Assessment and Characterization
Identifying the extent and type of NORM contamination is crucial. Soil sampling, radiation surveys,
and hydrogeological studies guide the choice of remediation approach.
9.3.10.2. Remediation Options
• Excavation and disposal: Removing and transporting contaminated soil to approved landfills is
the most straightforward but costlier option.
• In-situ solidification/stabilization: Binding NORM within the soil using chemical additives can
reduce mobility and exposure risks.
• Phytoremediation: Using specialized plants that absorb and metabolize NORM offers a
sustainable and cost-effective solution for low-level contamination.
• Natural attenuation: Monitoring and relying on natural processes like adsorption and decay can
be suitable for certain sites with low-risk contamination.
9.3.10.3. Implementation and Monitoring
Chosen remediation methods are carefully implemented with safety protocols and environmental
controls in place.
Continuous monitoring of radiation levels, air quality, and water quality ensures the effectiveness
of the chosen approach and protects neighboring communities.
9.3.10.4. Post-remediation Management
Long-term monitoring and maintenance may be necessary depending on the chosen method and
residual contamination levels.
Clear land-use restrictions and record-keeping ensure future generations are aware of potential
risks and inform future development decisions.
9.3.10.5. Challenges and Considerations
• Public perception and regulatory compliance are crucial aspects to address.
• Choosing the most appropriate and cost-effective solution requires careful consideration of
site-specific factors.
• Balancing risks and benefits, including environmental impact and cost, is critical in decision-
making.

By adopting responsible and adaptable strategies, NORM-contaminated land can be remediated,

allowing for safe land use and minimizing long-term environmental impact. Remember, proper
assessment, informed decision-making, and robust monitoring are key to reclaiming the land and
ensuring a sustainable future.
9.3.11. Permanent disposal options

NORM (Naturally Occurring Radioactive Material) waste requires careful handling and permanent
disposal to safeguard both human health and the environment. Here’s a peek into the available
options:
9.3.11.1. Types of NORM Waste
• Solid waste: Drill cuttings, sludge, decommissioned equipment, contaminated soil.
• Liquid waste: NORM-laden water produced during oil and gas production.
• Gaseous waste: Radon gas found in natural gas streams.
9.3.11.2. Disposal Options
• Deep Geological Repositories: Burying NORM waste in deep, stable geological formations
offers long-term containment and isolation.
• Near-Surface Engineered Disposal Facilities: Secure landfills with engineered barriers to
prevent NORM migration and radioactive exposure.
• Re-injection Wells: Returning NORM-contaminated fluids to geological formations where they
originated can be suitable for specific types of waste.
• Recycling and Reuse: Limited opportunities exist for NORM recycling, such as utilizing NORM-
rich materials in radiation shielding or construction materials after appropriate treatment.

Egpc Hse Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Egpc Hse Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Egpc Hse Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

EGPC Drilling & Workover

HSE Requirements Manual

HSE Section Head

Senior QHSE Supervisor

Senior QHSE Supervisor

HSE General Manager

Section A: Administrative Requirements

A.1 Abbreviations and Acronyms

B.1 Permit To Work (PTW)

Section C: Offshore Safety Requirements ( Jack up rigs)

C.1. Over Water Operations

Section D: Asset Integrity Management Requirements

D.1. Equipment Inspection and Integrity

E.1 Food Service Hygiene

Section F: Environmental Requirements

F.1 Environmental Protection Responsibilities

Chemist/ Ehab Mohamed Ali

Mission Statement ”Rig Operators and Contractors“

Manual Objectives and Values

Mission Statement ”Rig operators and contractors“

Manual Objectives and Values

1.Welfare HSE Organization

A1. Abbreviations &

1.1. Abbreviations and Acronyms

D&WO HSE Guidelines Page 24

NFPA (American) National Fire Protection Association

Page 25 D&WO HSE Guidelines

2.Welfare HSE Organization

A2. Reference Materials

ANSI NFPA-70-2023 Grounding Separately Derived Alternating-Current Systems

D&WO HSE Guidelines Page 28

API SPEC 6A -2023 Wellhead Equipment

Page 29 D&WO HSE Guidelines

ISO 45001:2018 Occupational health and safety management system

D&WO HSE Guidelines Page 30

3.Welfare HSE Organization

A3. General Safety Rules

D&WO HSE Guidelines Page 34

Page 35 D&WO HSE Guidelines

participation of third party and sub-contractor employees.

D&WO HSE Guidelines Page 36

4.Welfare HSE Organization

A4. Roles & Responsibilities

D&WO HSE Guidelines Page 40

Page 41 D&WO HSE Guidelines

5.Welfare HSE Organization

A5. HSE Organization

5.3. HSE Organizational Structure

5.3.1. Managing director/chairman

5.3.3. HSE Coordinators

5.4. HSE Engineer

D&WO HSE Guidelines Page 44

5.5. Essential Functions

Page 45 D&WO HSE Guidelines

A6. Welfare Management

6.3.4. Welfare Facilities

D&WO HSE Guidelines Page 48

6.5.1. Risk Assessment

Page 49 D&WO HSE Guidelines

D&WO HSE Guidelines Page 50